DARA ONC AARA AAA Nae a aan NON AR Aan BNA AAA a RRA RAARA AA OOO a INIA Re (A; . AYO AA {VI WAC RIAVAYG AA = - P| {r VAN CYS NAA A a LAX UN B . = \ AN INA t im WAAR SA AAA AD ay anna, AA /\ APR AAARAP Maar AAD senty AAA aN AOAAARIA aA Ln : vale A ah : a A A A A aaa an) - D4 = 5 = ® : 8 fase (26 be S AAA oe As FA f ne = = ARRAN ae i 2 SI ra ANA ANNAN ae ee re ry aania‘aalay Lu (ay uu = gz 3 =| NAA A A = Qc = — = VA WN A\ NAAp 2 = = RQ o AATATAW’ = s e = S 3 Mailaaaewanaas a va ANA 9 AANA = = Ans = S avays a. AYA iy MAN nnanannn { | ; & lla Io, Nn ; had ! {| i A AlIADIA | Aaa! RANA rane nanan POT AA a ala aa AAI Ala AAVAIAIA | eter. * a ANON AANNANA Mannan anaranace vAaiinaal AVA A. ‘a\a\a\a\ +f Ver \ \ AAR PN ~\ AYA f\ WANS iN a fay ie A A a a f2 A. . A ff \ A fa DAD N I \ it ee ; "7 : { ANNA ‘ ale Nala / A EVA we) ARINAA _!h NAnal YAN AsARAAA | i eet Vanes NA NANBALALN Si oe 3) PAP A {AA AR AA NN pre a b.. ew vat A\s yi OT NAV AVAY, INI Be A al yal La al NAIA A ARR. St : 3 . ; es 33 Zant OR BAAR! Dani OAC A AODORA AAAS ARAR ng ARAAAA AF vaava nn AIAAIARAA RO ARAM la war enannte a A nee nnnatharnren een dean™ i AAA Anan ce. . AAR - : AVA Tam ip = alana / an AAT VAAL a iA Pa) iS VAN Alay, ASAGIAA Walaa ADR AAARMY AANA 23 AANAAAAA | Mn VA . ANN ~ ala A BA x fy eS 1a VR AA AA APA a: 4 nA, 1 RADAR Ala\a) AAAAAA Baan aaaale was Ala AR AASAC / nn nnn, AAA Wa IATA AON 3 NA A Tava AR WA RAVEN Np vA eS (NOMEN INN fa AA \n, : ARRRANNDs Ana Aaa aaa AY Aaa e aaa ALYY \ag RAIN ART ARR AAT iN an } \ ‘alate AanrQn An annah AAA AA AANAA AP NO fe als / vias aunae z an : Fa Vela vy" yn 4 ‘A n\ wn Adnan VV RiAae (NI A, Aa AVA Aan { ‘ NAA fn faa ARAARRARRAA AKA AAAA eaanaana : . ANP RANA Rana AAS a fN\ \ DAR aAOARARAA Z, < : RAARARAAN AAA Aas BANOANAS » PA ANCAAAN An f \ ANAL (ana) 5 NI AAA aA ia NAANAAA r f\ A VAAOO / | , A AaAan YY AIAAAY AAA AAAAAAA 2 ny MANA ip Aa NIOALN ava A > pi Ps ss a . f - INA oe < BARRA AAAAAAAA A Anann acaLAaeaaany se f IAAT Al AN nnn mann YW anywW Ar mA nnn ANP A ARAAAN AA AAA AANA AYA ~~ NAAAANG Za ee Rave RAL AI Naa’ f ala NA AO AMAA AAAI AAAS Nala “fy Vy ANA ALE NIN L\ CN NIN NC {™~ WA AAD ‘ Vy Ie aM lls] ~ j \r | awa vA \ Analy iG Wa \V ; Navatay Ven af AAA Ap AVA nina pa Ni A fa; If N AAS VAN) A WA n/ “ NS Nw ae MG ; \ A IAVEN 7 . , A SAR AAAR A AA? pay RA A AL 4 : \ 2 lov t eee ~ fn Ab ins ‘ om ~ LX fea? y rp /, Nf THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE: OR, Monthly Journal of Geology: WITH WHICH IS INCORPORATED F4f ~~ SRS CI (Srl OinOEIt Sons NOS. CCXLVII. TO CCLVIII. EDITED BY HENRY WOODWARD, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.8., F.R.M.S., OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY; VICE-PRESIDENT OF THE PALAZONTOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY, MEMBER OF THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY, NEW YORE; AND OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, PHILADELPHIA ; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE YORKSHIRE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY; OF THE GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION, LONDON; OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETIES OF EDINBURGH, GLASGOW, AND NORWICH ; CORRESPOND- ING MEMBER OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF BELGIUM; OF THE IMPERIAL SOCIETY OF NATURAL HISTORY OF MOSCOW; OF THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL; AND OF THE MALACO- LOGICAL SOCIETY OF BELGIUM. ASSISTED BY PROFESSOR JOHN MORRIS, M.A. F.GS., &., &., AND ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.RB.S.L. & E., F.G.8., &c., OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY. NEW SERIES. DECADE III. VOL. II. JANUARY—DECEMBER, 1885. LONDON: TRUBNER & Co. 57 anv 59, LUDGATE HILL. F. SAVY, 77, BOULEVART ST.-GERMAIN, PARIS. C 1885. ) (n HERTFORD: PRINTED BY STEPHEN AUSTIN AND SONS. THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE DECADE III. VOL. Il. JANUARY—DECEMBER 1883. avait LIST OF WOODCUTS. Figure to illustrate Slaty Cleavage. . - »« «© 2 «© « + Skull of Cenotherium Filholi ; upper and lower views. - - 59 99 50 side view . . »« »« « « Palate of op sp. STA ciarcrernte ofa saar-etl (oviilt = Mandible of ,, sp. ON COLOR CeO Gace Se lamin Palate of Anthracotherium Gresslyi; left half . . . «+ -« Mandible of + Fr co 0 0 0 0 6 © Restoration of Urocordylus scalaris, Fritsch . . »« «© « Caudal vertebre of ,, PA 5 Bao eae eam Restoration of Keraterpeton crassum ,, ae) Sommer h kelp 2p », Limnerpeton laticeps ,, hele, Mong save Urs ) 0 x obtusatum ,, OMOD como Caudal scute of 5 pe a5 Ber pore etanem sets Abdominal scutes __,, io Sie oie OM GO eaCORD Skull of Dinoceras mirabile, Marsh; side view . »- + «= -« ” ” ” 30 posterior surface. . . », Linoceras ingens, 6 46 0 6 0 6 » Dinoceras mirabile, ,, dorsal surface ay velit te > - distans, ,, dorsal surface . . . « », Linoceras ingens, 55 palatal surface . . . » Dinoceras mirabile, ,, 06 <5 ares meiyites Mandible of Dinoceras laticeps, Marsh, front view Sar cae % Uintatherium segne ,, side view . ». « e Skull of Tinoceras ingens, 5 dorsal surface 5 6 », Dinoceras laticeps, 5 ap 5 On) Rope at Cervical vertebra of Tinoceras grande, Marsh; front view . ” ” ” ” ” side view . Dorsal vertebra of Dinoceras mirabile, ,, front view. 9 *) op 9 50 side view - - Fore-foot of ,, . s 3 ae tig ton Oe Hind-foot of ,, 5 4 a BA oak Restoration of Tinoceras ingens, Marsh Sheol oo pap te Ammonite with Aptychus in situ . . . « »« » « « « Root of a Palm ? in a weathered Sarsen-stone Bae nek ate Restoration of a vertebra of Sphenosaurus Sternbergii (two cuts) FAGE 16 64 66 67 68 69 71 81 82 83 85 86 86 86 214 215 215 216 216 217° 217 219 219 221 221 223 223 223 223 224 224 225 346 361 379 Vill List of Woodcuts. Cochleosaurus Bohemicus, dorsal view » +» + «© e «© «2 «© «© « « 480 Skeleton of Halitherium Schinzi, Kaup - » + +6 «© «© «© «© «© « « 4138 Skeleton of Rhytina gigas, Zimmermann, 1780 . . - « »« « e e« 417 Map illustrating the Geographical Distribution of the Sirenia . . . . - 433 Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall . «© - » © «© «© «© « «© «© « 449 Didymograptus vacillans, Tullberg . «© » «© © «© «© © © «© «© « 4852 Dicellograptus Forchhammeri, Geinitz » +» »« +© +» «© «© »© « «© » 452 Dicranograptus ramosus, Hall. . «© «© «© «© © «© © © © « « « 482 Diplograptus angustifolius, Hall . »« «© «© «© « «© © © «© «© « 402 Monograptus gregarius, Lapworth . »« »© » »© «© »© «© » » » « 4852 ’ I. Iguanodon Mantelli, Owen. «© « «© © + « «© ¥ II. Oxfordian and Lower Oolite Gasteropoda (Yorkshire) vi TT. 5 3 bs i 3 : wer Vis 9 ap * 35 5p . ~ YV. Lower Oolite Gasteropoda (Yorkshire) ~ VI. Land-shells from the Bembridge Limestone, Isle of Wight . “ VII. South Australian Plant-remains . . - « « ~ VIII. Psephodus magnus, Agassiz, Carboniferous, Lanark LIST OF PLATES. . Devonian Aptychi, and Silurian Chitons . Ceratiocaris U. Silurian, Lanark . . Recent and Fossil Pleurotomarie . - Fossil Insects from Commentry, Allier. . . Solenopora compacta, Billings, sp. . . British Cretaceous Madreporarie . . . . «© = , =i - . . ’ . > . ~ * « Sy , t sisi penn : bisreath ue asia Lemepnan pe eigties ni t ss “om , ne {fa , i THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE, NEW SERIES. DECADE III. VOL. Il. No. I—JANUARY, 1885. ORIGINAL ARTICLES. —— ROBERT ALFRED CLOYNE GODWIN-AUSTEN, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. A” Time progresses, Geology, although comparatively a modern Science, yet looks back upon its early and honoured leaders, much in the same way as Art regards its ‘Old Masters.” Those pioneers have all left us, and, alas! few even of the distinguished men who belong, as it were, to a second generation now remain. Of these, who in their turn have become veterans in the science, we have recently to deplore the loss of Mr. Godwin-Austen. The rapid progress of geology has been largely due to the labours and influence of particular individuals ; men who, while diligent in the observation of fact, have by a wide grasp of the subject been able to apply their detailed knowledge to the solution of the larger problems of Nature ; who by their enthusiasm have kindled a love of science in others, and by their philosophical and suggestive writings have served to direct the inquiries of less gifted students. Among such individuals no one takes higher rank, or was more cordially respected, than Mr. Godwin-Austen, while his genial and courteous manners endeared him to all who had the privilege of lis acquaintance. “ Pre-eminently the physical geographer of bygone periods” (to use the words of Murchison) was the subject of our present sketch. And we cannot do better than quote other words of the same authority spoken in 1862, on handing to Mr. Godwin-Austen the Wollaston Medal. “Yon have distinguished yourself during a long series of years by your successful inquiries into the former changes of land and water from the Palzozoic age to modern times. « Persistently keeping that great object in view, you have put forth well-founded hypotheses, based on actual and numerous obser- vations, which have raised the philosophical character of our science. Your sedulous study of the organic remains, as well as the materials of the beds themselves of each formation which you have examined, and your laborious tracings of various lines of disloca- tion, have all been made subservient to that one great end.” Mr. Godwin-Austen was born in the year 1808, and was the eldest son of the late Sir Henry EH. Austen, who died in 1871. In 1833 Mr. Austen married Maria Elizabeth, only daughter and DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. I. 1 2 Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. heiress of the late General Sir Henry T. Godwin, K.C.B. (who com- manded the British Army in Pegu and Burma). He took the additional name of Godwin by Royal licence in 1854. On March 19th, 1830, Mr. Austen, then of Lincoln’s Inn, was elected a Fellow of the Geological Society of London. Sedgwick was then President of the Society, and Lyell, Horner, Buckland, De la Beche, Murchison, Greenough, and Whewell, were among the prominent Members of its Council. Mr. Austen’s certificate was signed by the three first-named geologists. Four years later (November 19, 1834) Mr. Austen read his first paper before the Society, and from that date, until within the last few years, he never ceased to take an active part in its proceedings. In 1841 he was elected a Member of the Council of the Society. and in 1843 and 1844, and again subsequently, he acted as one of the Honorary Secretaries. He has also filled the post of Foreign Secretary and served as Vice-President. Never, however, was he appointed to the Presidential Chair of the Society, although, we believe, he was repeatedly solicited to accept the honour: and cer- tainly no one ever possessed higher qualifications for the office. Mr. Austen became a Member of the British Association in 1846, and he occupied the Presidential Chair of the Geological Section at Norwich in 1868, and again at Brighton in 1872. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1849. Soon after being elected a Fellow of the Geological Society, Mr. Austen went to reside at Ogwell House, near Newton Abbot. Devon- shire thus early became the seat of his field-labours, and his associa- tion with De la Beche, whose book entitled ‘‘ Researches in Theoretical Geology” (published in 1834), has ever been looked on as one of the most philosophical works on the science, no doubt inspired the younger geologist, who became as it were a disciple of that great master. De la Beche mentions that in the district extending from Dart- mouth to Chudleigh, he was principally indebted for the lines on this part of the Geological Survey Map of Devon to Mr. Austen, who had examined the district in great detail.! Prof. Phillips, too, mentions the “‘ splendid series of fossils, chiefly from the calcareous strata of the vicinity of Newton Bushel, the fruit of the personal exertions of Mr. Austen during his residence at Ogwell House.’? These fossils were subsequently presented to the Museum at Jermyn Street. Mr. Austen’s observations are recorded in his paper on the South- east of Devonshire, in which are embodied the separate communi- cations on the district, made to the Geological Society of London during the years 1834-1840. The map accompanying this paper shows the area investigated and described by the author, and was at the time one of the most detailed geological maps published. In the mean time the observations of Sedgwick and Murchison, aided by the paleontological labours of Lonsdale, had led to the founda- 1 Report on the Geology of Cornwall, Devon, and West Somerset, 1839, p. 69. _ * Figures and Descriptions of the Paleozoic Fossils of Cornwall, ete., 1841, p. vi. Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. 3 tion of the Devonian System.! This term was not however adopted by Mr. Austen, which he states was “ not owing to ignorance of its value as a geological group, but because such a name is at variance with the nomenclature of well-established groups, and because the beds form only one portion of a great primary fossiliferous series for which we already possess materials for subdivisions founded on zoological views, which are preferable to geographical ones.” The details of this complicated region in South Devon are de- scribed in the most able manner by Mr. Austen. While noting the connection of the numerous isolated masses of the Great Limestones, he observed that in places they appeared to end abruptly, or to thin away and pass into shaly beds. He concluded that in their structure, as well as in the position, preservation, and grouping of the corals, the calcareous rocks of South Devon afford abundant evidence that their production was analogous to that of modern coral reefs. More recent observations tend to show that many of the isolated masses of limestone are separated by faults; and this is conspicu- ously the case with the Chudleigh Limestone, which, although regarded by Mr. Austen as belonging to “the slate and calcareous system ” of South Devon, was, owing to its apparent intercalation in the Culm-measures, placed with that group on the Geological Survey Map. De la Beche indeed admitted the difficulties in the way of such a grouping.2 When, however, we recollect the large areas investigated by the older geologists, and that they commenced their labours in regions about which little or nothing was previously known, we cannot too highly estimate the work which they achieved. And in South Devon nothing but a detailed geological survey on the six-inch scale is likely to unravel the many intricate points of structure, and settle beyond question the classification of the various groups of rocks. It is interesting to read in this early paper, that Mr. Austen noticed the association of human remains, ‘“ such as arrow-heads and knives of flint,” with other reliquice, in clay beneath the stalagmite of Kent’s Hole. Equally noteworthy are his suggestions that the “Terminal Curvature” of strata and the Raised Beaches, furnish indications of a much colder period. Mr. Austen’s attention was now directed to the geology of his proper home-county, Surrey; and for many years he resided at Chilworth Manor House, near Guildford. In 1843 he communicated (in two papers) to the Geological Society some general observations on the geology of Surrey, pre- facing them with the remark—needful enough at the time—that the Wealden area was not in its present state a valley of elevation, and moreover, that those movements of the earth’s crust, which were thought to be confined to that area, could be traced westwards, and evidently did not commence until after the completion of the lower Tertiary series. These papers are of great interest as indicating the 1 Sedgwick and Murchison, Trans. Geol. Soc. ser. 2, vol y. At p. 651, assistance received from Mr. Austen is acknowledged. * Report, pp. 74, 146, + Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. succession of organic remains in the Cretaceous and Neocomian rocks; a succession which in more recent years has been marked ont into various “zones.” These, and indeed all the papers of Mr. Austen, exhibit his extensive personal observation, combined with the most philosophical deductions, while at the same time they indi- cate his extensive acquaintance with the writings of others both at home and abroad. No doubt in later years he must have felt the great difficulty, which Lyell and all others have admitted, of keeping pace with the ever-increasing geological literature, that spreads like a deluge over the greater part of the civilized regions of the globe. Mr. Austen was one of the earliest English geologists to adopt the term Neocomian, and, as Professor Judd has remarked, many of his papers expose “the viciousness of the term ‘ Lower Greensand,’ and indicate the necessity for a change.”! The change is coming no doubt, though its slowness in coming shows how difficult it is to get rid of old and well-known names; and may teach us that they should never be replaced by new terms unless the old ones are absolutely unjust or misleading. It would be impossible in our limited space to do justice to the many important papers contributed by Mr. Austen, and we must refer our readers to the list appended to this article. We should not, however, omit to notice Mr. Austen’s remarks on the Phosphate beds in the neighbourhood of Farnham and Guild- ford, a subject which had grown into great importance through the observations made on the so-called “Coprolites” of the Hastern Counties by Professor Henslow. Mr. Austen regarded the phos- phatic matter as of animal origin, and pointed out that, “‘ where the casts of bivalve shells and ammonites are filled with matter con- taining phosphate of lime, these forms must have been first inclosed in the sand, that then the proper shelly matter was removed, and finally that the earthy phosphate occupied the place of the hollow. He supposes that the phosphoric acid may have formed part of the coprolitic matter of the time, this matter in part preserved with its original external form, while more frequently it was broken up, and the component portions diffused amid the sand and ooze.” ” In his paper on the superficial accumulations of the coasts of the English Channel, we have one of the earliest attempts to indicate the sequence of events in the Post-Pliocene period, from the testi- mony of Raised Beaches, Submerged Forests, Angular detritus, etc. This subject was followed up in a later paper dealing more par- ticularly with the newer deposits of the Sussex Coast. In this latter paper he points out’ how depressions and elevations have tended, by removing from the action of the sea a more easily dis- integrated stratum, or by bringing up a less destructible one, to accelerate or retard the various agents of denudation. One curious illustration of depression is derived from the form of the bottom of the English Channel, which Mr. Godwin-Austen represents a8 ex- 1 Grout Mac. Vol. VII. p. 224. * De la Beche, Address to Geol. Soc. 1849, p. 66. Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. 5 hibiting “lines of troughs and an advancing platform indicative of an old coast-line.” A more striking proof is derived from the mollusca in the Selsea deposits, which indicate by their habits, shallow-water and marginal conditions, that the eastern extension of the Channel at that period may be represented by a line extend- ing from the coast of Sussex to that of Normandy, and that the remaining portion of what is now the eastern end of the English ‘Channel was in the condition of dry land.! Subsequently, the Selsea erratic boulders were drifted into the position they now occupy. Mr. Godwin-Austen showed, so early as 1837, that in Devonshire there were terraces of gravel fringing the valleys; and in 1851 and 1855, in correlating these and other Quaternary deposits, he con- sidered that the ancient low-level alluvia of the Thames and Seine valleys, and the old beach and the Hlephant-beds of Brighton, were anterior to the Boulder-clay, and he was further of opinion that river- and ice-action had played an important part in producing these valley deposits. He also suggested that the Thames was originally a tributary of the Rhine.’ In 1855 Mr. Austen brought before the Geological Society his celebrated paper “On the possible Extension of the Coal-measures beneath the South-eastern part of England ”—the most important and suggestive philosophical essay which the Society has received. Judging from facts brought to light in working the Coal-measures of Belgium and the North of France, ‘‘and reasoning also on theo- retical considerations connected with the extension of the old coal- growth in the west of Europe, Mr. Godwin-Austen concluded that Coal-measures might possibly extend beneath the south-eastern part of England.” Illustrating his remarks by a map, “he showed that the Coal-measures which thin out under the Chalk near Thérouanne probably set in again at or near Calais, and are prolonged (beneath the Tertiary strata and the Chalk) in the line of the Thames Valley parallel with the North Downs, and continue thence under the valley of the Kennet, into the Bath and Bristol coal area. He showed, upon well-considered theoretical grounds, that the Coal-measures of a large portion of England, France, and Belgium were once continuous, and that the present coal-fields were merely fragments of a great original deposit, which he inferred had been broken up in two directions previously to the deposition of the Secondary rocks. He showed that the main line of disturbance had a general east and west direction, that part of it formed the great anticlinal of the Ardennes, by which the Belgian coal-field had been tilted up, and brought to the surface, and that the Mendips with the Somerset coal- field were on the same line of strike.”’ ® This is but a brief outline of the general conclusions arrived at in 1 We are indebted to the Addresses to the Geological Society of Mr. W. Hopkins, 1852, and of Col. J. E. Portlock, 1857, for notices of these papers. * Prestwich, Phil. Trans. 1864, p. 249; Lyell, Antiquity of Man, ed. 4, pp. 323, 330. __° We take these remarks from the Report, by Prof. Prestwich, on the probabilities of finding coal in the South of England, p. 146 (Report Coal Comm. vol. i. 1871). 6 Life of R. A. C. Godwin- Austen. the paper, which really deals with the physical geography of the European area at many past epochs. . The remarks on the Paleozoic areas are of especial interest at the present day, for the grouping adopted by Mr. Austen is one which connects the Devonian or Hifelian with the Upper Silurian, and the Old Red Sandstone with the Carboniferous Series. He remarks that “the limits of the lacustrine Old Red Sandstone of the Welsh area are tolerably well defined ; they hardly extended as far north as ordinary geological maps now carry that group, inasmuch as the red beds which underlie the coal-measures of Coalbrook Dale belong to the uppermost Ludlow beds, with Lingula cornea, etc.” As Dr. A. Geikie observes, “The first attempt to point out the distinction between the typical old Red Sandstone areas and those where rocks of the Devonshire type occurred was made by Mr. Godwin-Austen in his very suggestive memoir. .... [ which ] opened up a new era in the investigation of the history of the Old Red Sandstone.” 4 In a paper read before the British Association in 1870, Mr. Austen suggests that the Devonian system may be a triplex group—partly Upper Silurian, partly Devonian proper (Hifelian). and partly Carboniferous. In the preface to his “ Contributions to the Physical History of the British Isles” (1882), Prof. Hull remarks, “ Amongst those to whom I am indebted for light thrown on the internal structure of the British Isles, there is one name which takes unquestioned pre- cedence—that of Mr. R. Godwin-Austen—in whose elaborate essay, published in 1856 by the Geological Society of London, many of the problems since elucidated by experiment were investigated and solved. In reperusing that essay by the light of subsequent dis- coveries, I have been profoundly impressed by the knowledge of details which its author evinces regarding the geological structure of the region of which he treats, and the masterly manner in which, by the handling of these details, he has enabled us to understand the physical features of Western Europe in past times. I feel persuaded that that essay will ever be considered a masterpiece of geological induction.” The results of the deep borings at Kentish Town, Harwich, and more recently in other places in the South-east of England, have verified the conclusion that Palaeozoic rocks would be reached by such borings in this area; but it yet remaivs to be proved whether productive Coal-measures are also represented.” 1 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. vol. xxviii. p. 346. 2 Itis noted in the Atheneum (Nov. 29, 1884), that Mr. Austen’s views on this subject had been to some extent foreshadowed by De la Beche: the only passage bearing on the subject, which we have come across in De la Beche’s writings, is that in Mem. Geol. Survey, vol. i. 1846, p. 214. He says, ‘‘ From the movement of the older rocks many a mass of Coal-measures may be buried beneath the Oolites and Cretaceous rocks on the east, the remains of a great sheet of these accumulations, connecting the districts we have noticed, with those of Central England and of Belgium, rolled about and partially denuded prior to the deposit of the New Red Sandstone.” Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. vi Tn his remarks on the boulder of granite found in the Chalk near Croydon, and which was no doubt transported by floating ice, Mr. Austen attempts to trace out the coast-line during the Cretaceous epoch, in which every other form of sea-bed, from the abyssal to the marginal, must have existed. Remarking on these enquiries Major-General Portlock observes that the author “‘has appropriated to himself a class of research which is difficult in proportion to its apparent obscurity, but which he is likely by his skill and perseverance to place very high amongst the objects of the philosophical geologist.” * Edward Forbes, who died in 1854, left his papers to Mr. Austen. Among these was a Memoir on the Tertiary Fluvio- Marine Formation of the Isle of Wight. This was brought out in 1856, under the editorship of Mr. Austen, who was well qualified for the task, as he had been with Forbes when many of his notes and observations were recorded, and had discussed with him many of the questions that arose. In certain instances Mr. Austen supplied such short notices as were requisite to complete the work, but the memoir was fortunately far advanced by Forbes himself. Another work, however, which had been undertaken by Forbes, was left by him in a very incomplete state. This work, entitled ‘The Natural History of the European Seas,” was edited and continued by Mr. Austen, and published in 1859. It was a companion volume to Prof. Henfrey’s “The Vegetation of Europe”; and Mr. Austen himself had undertaken to write the “Geological History of the Kuropean Area’”—a work which, however, was never published. The volume on the Natural History of the European Seas had, at the time of Forbes’ death, been corrected and printed off, as far as p- 102, and there were proofs (uncorrected) bringing up the work to p- 126; butno further material was forthcoming. Mr. Godwin-Austen, however, who naturally had many difficulties to contend against, laboured hard and successfully at his task; and although it must always be lamented that Forbes did not live to complete this and other works he had planned, yet we may be none the less grateful to Mr. Austen, even if we agree with what he says in reviewing his own portion of the joint volume (in the preface) :—‘I feel | may be charged with having treated the subject too often from a geological stand-point, and that my share may possibly remind some of the Angel of the sign-painter who had painted Red Lions all his life— and which, in spite of his efforts, looked more like a Lion, than became an Angel, after all.” Mr. Austen contributed to the so-called “Greenough Geological Map,” a new edition of which was announced in 1865 by the President of the Geological Society, Mr. W. J. Hamilton. This map, really based on that of William Smith, was brought up to date by utilizing the labours of the Geological Survey, and those of several Fellows of the Geological Society. Mr. Austen contributed greatly to the revision of the S.H. sheet, including the Wealden strata of Kent and Sussex, and the members of the Cretaceous series. He also superin- tended and laid down from MS. notes, a small portion of France, 1 Address to Geol. Soc. 1858. 8 Life of R. A. C. Godwin-Austen. including the Boulonnais. The portion of Ireland, included in the Map, was executed from MS. notes of Mr. Austen, aided by the map of Sir Richard Griffith. Considerable portions of the 8.W. of Scotland were also filled in by Mr. Austen.' Many pleasant excursions were made from time to time by Mr. Austen, in company with other Fellows of the Geological Society. Thus in 1849, he accompanied Messrs. Prestwich, Morris, and A. Tylor to the Crag district at Chillesford, in Suffolk; an account of which was afterwards published by Mr. Prestwich, and to whose observations made at this time we date the introduction of that local and debateable deposit known as the “Chillesford Clay.” In 1852 Mr. Austen, together with Edward Forbes, D. Sharpe, Mr. Prestwich and Mr. Tylor, visited Tournay and Mons; and again . in 1865, he visited Belgium, in company with Mr. W. J. Hamilton, Mr. Prestwich, Capt. D. Galton, Mr. W. W. Smyth, Mr. Busk and Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys. Mr. Austen’s observations on the Belgian Tertiaries were in part made during these excursions. Mr. Austen was a Member of the Committee formed in 1858 for the purpose of reporting on the Exploration of Brixham Cave; and the Report, which was drawn up in 1872 by Prof. Prestwich, was signed by Mr. Busk, Mr. Austen and Prof. Ramsay. Mr. Godwin-Austen took but little part in the proceedings of the Geological Society after 1877, when he retired from the Council. He was, however, a Justice of the Peace, and Deputy-Lieutenant for the County of Surrey. He died at Shalford House, near Guild- ford, on the 25th November, 1884, aged 76. As remarked in “ Nature” (Dec. 4, 1884), “It is some consolation to geologists, who mourn the quenching of one of their luminaries, that his place is taken by a son who, by scientific labours in India and in this country, has proved himself a worthy successor.” Horace B. Woopwaxp. List oF GEOLOGICAL WORKS AND PAPERS OF THELATE R. A. C. Gopwin-AUSTEN, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. 1835:—1. An Account of the Raised Beach, near Hope’s Nose, in Devonshire, and other recent Disturbances in that Neighbourhood. Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. ii. pp- 102, 103; and Phil. Mag. vol. vi. pp. 63, 64. 1836.—2. On the part of Devonshire between the Ex and Berry Head, and the Coast and Dartmoor. Proc. Geol Soe. vol. ii. pp. 414, 416. 1838.—3. On the Geology of the South-east of Devoushire. Proc. Geol. Soe. vol. li. pp. 584-589; ‘Trans. Geol. Soc. ser. 2. vol. vi. pp. 433-459 (1842).! 1838,—4. On the Origin of the Limestones in Devonshire. Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. ii. . 669, 670. 1839.2. On the structure of South Devon (or the general relations of the various bands of Slates, Limestones, and Sandstones in South Devon). Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. iii. pp. 123,124. 1839.—6. Considerations on Geological Evidence and Influences. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1838, Trans. of Sections, p. 93. 1840.—7. Note on the Organic Remains of the Limestones and Slates of South Devon, Ibid. 1839, p. 69. 1 W. J. Hamilton, Address to Geol. Soc. 1865, p. 33. * In this memoir are given in a condensed form the substance of papers Nos. 1, 2,: 3, 4, 5, and 9. Life of R. A. C. Godwin- Austen. 9 1840.—8. On Orthoceras, Ammonites, and other cognate Genera; and on the posi- tion they occupy in the Animal Kingdom. Proc. Geol. Soe. vol. iii. pp. 179, 180. 1840.—9. On the Bone Caves of Devonshire. Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. 111. pp. 286, 287. 1843.—10. On the Geology of the South-east of Surrey. Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. iv. pp. 167-178. 1843.—11. Additional Note on the Geology of the South-east of Surrey. Ibid. pp. 196-198. 1845.—12. On a supposed Aérolite, said to have fallen near Lymington, Hants. Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. iv. p. 584; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. i. p. 450. (Brief note only.) 1846.—13. On the Coal Beds of Lower Normandy. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ii. pp. 1-6. 1848.14 On the Position in the Cretaceous Series of Beds containing Phosphate of Lime. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. iv. pp. 257-262. 1850.—15. Notes on the Geology of the Channel Islands.- Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1849, Trans. of Sections, pp. 49-51. 1850.—16. On the Valley of the English Channel. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vi. pp. 69-97. 1850.—17. On the Age and Position of the Fossiliferous Sands and Grayels of Farringdon. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vi. pp. 454-478. 1850.—18. Notes on the Bagshot Sand; General Board of Health Report on the Supply of Water to the Metropolis. 8vo. Lond. Appendix 3, p. 198 (wrongly printed as by W. Austin). 1851.—19. On the Superficial Accumulations of the Coasts of the English Channel, and the Changes they indicate. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. vil. pp. 118-136. 1851.—20. On the Gravel-beds of the Valley of the Wey. Quart. Journ. Geol Soc. vol. vil. pp. 278-288, 1851.—21. On Recent Changes of Sea-Level. Report Brit. Assoc. for 1850, Trans. of Sections, pp. 71, 72. 1853.—22. On the Series of Upper Paleeozoic Groups in the Boulonnais (with a note by Mr. D. Sharpe). Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. pp. 231-245, and pp. 245-253. 1855.—23. On Land-Surfaces beneath the Drift-Gravel. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xi. pp. 112-119. 1856.—24. On the possible Extension of the Coal-Measures beneath the South- Kastern part of England. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. vol. xii. pp. 38-73. 1857.—25. On the Newer Tertiary Deposits of the Sussex Coast. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xiii. pp. 40-72. Reprinted in Dixon’s Geology of Sussex (1878), p. 24-49. 1858.—26. On a Boulder of Granite found in the ‘‘ White Chalk’’ near Croydon ; and on the Extraneous Rocks from that Formation. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. yol. xiv. pp. 252-266; and Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1857, Trans. of Sections, p. 62. 1858.—27. On the Conditions which determine the probability of Coal beneath the South-Eastern part of England. Proc. Roy. Inst. vol. ii. p. 511. 1859.—28. Forbes, Edward. The Natural History of the European Seas. Edited and continued by R. Godwin-Austen, 8vo. London. 1860.—29. On some Fossils from the Grey Chalk near Guildford. Quart. Journ. " Geol. Soc. vol. xvi. pp. 324. 1850.—30. On the Occurrence of a Mass of Coal in the Chalk of Kent. Quart, Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xvi. pp. 326-327. 1863.—31. Geological Notes on the locality in Siberia where Fossil Fish and Esthericze have been found. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xix. pp. 71-73. 1865. —32. On the Classification of the Cretaceous Beds. Guou. Maca. Vol. II. pp. 199-899. ; 1866.—33. On the Submerged Forest-Beds of Porlock Bay. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol, xxii. pp. 1-9. 1866.—34. On the Kainozoic Formations of Belgium. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. Xxil. pp. 228-284. 1867.—35. Letter, Dr. A. von Koenen on the Belgian Tertiaries, Gron. Mac. Vol. LV. pp. 565-567. 1868.—36. Address to the Geological Section of the British Association, Norwich, 10 Dr. H. Woodward—On Iguanodon Mantelii. Aug. 19, 1868. Gxon. Mac. Vol. V. pp. 469-480; and Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1868, Trans. of Sections, pp. 51-58. 1870.—37. The Devonian Group considered Geologically and Geographically. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1869, Trans. of Sections, pp. 88-90. 1873.—38. Address to the Geological Section of the British Association, Brighton. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1872, Trans. of Sections, pp. 90-96. (Also printed in Nature, August 29th, 1872.) 1877.—39. On the Geological Signiticance of the Boring at Messrs. Meux’s Brewery, London. Grou. Mac. Dec. II. Vol. IV. pp. 474-475. 1877.—40. On some further Evidence as to the Range of the Palaeozoic Rocks beneath the South-East of England. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for 1877 (Coloured Geological Map). IJ.—Ieuanopon Manretut, Meyer.t By Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S. (PLATE I.) le 1822, just sixty-three years ago, Mrs. Mantell found the first tooth of a new and remarkable reptile (afterwards known as Iguanodon), imbedded in a mass of coarse conglomerate, which had been brought as ‘road-metal’ from one of the quarries in the Wealden formation of Tilgate Forest. This tooth, with others subsequently found in the same rock, was submitted to Baron Cuvier, who pronounced them to belong to a large terrestrial herbivorous reptile hitherto quite unknown. Various other detached and fragmentary remains were subse- quently collected in the Wealden strata, and in 1825 the discovery was communicated by Dr. Mantell to the Royal Society,? when the name of Iguanodon was proposed for the fossil reptile, from the resemblance which its teeth presented to those of the living Iguana, a large vegetable-feeding lizard common in the West Indies and Central America. In 1834 the first important connected series of bones of Iguanodon was discovered by Mr. W. H. Bensted in the “Kentish Rag” quarries of the Lower Greensand formation at Maidstone. This specimen (which is preserved in the Geological Gallery of the British Museum of Natural History) consists of a large number of the bones of the skeleton of a_young individual imbedded in stone in a very confused manner and all more or less flattened and dis- torted. Amongst them are two long and very slender bones which in the original description are referred to as “two clavicles,” and they continued to be so called in Owen’s British Fossil Reptiles.® . The true nature of these long and slender bones was pointed out by Prof. Huxley in a paper entitled ‘Further Evidence of the Affinity between the Dinosaurian Reptiles and Birds.”‘ They are in fact the ischia, and occupy in Bensted’s Iguanodon a position near to the ilium, to which they were once united. Another specimen, embracing the chief part of the vertebral column with some of the bones of the extremities of a supposed young Iqua- ' “ Palologica,”’ by Hermann von Meyer, 1832, 8vo. (Frankfort), 2 See Phil. Trans. vol. 115, p. 179. 3 Pal. Soc. 1851, pp. 111-118, tab. xxxiv. * Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1869, vol. xvi, pp. 12-50. Dr. H. Woodward—On Iguanodon Mantelii. 11 nodon (since referred to Hypsilophodon) from the Wealden of Cowleaze Chine, Isle of Wight,! shows the remains of the ilium, with the ischium and rod-like post-pubis attached to it, lying side by side. But the anatomical importance of this specimen was not discovered ” until Huxley redescribed it in 1869.° In estimating the value of such comparative anatomical studies, we must not, however, omit to take into account the circumstances under which that work was performed, and when we look at the enormous labour accomplished by Sir Richard Owen in describing and figuring the vast number of detached bones and parts of skeletons of new and remarkable Dinosauria in the Paleeontographical Society’s volumes, we cannot fail to admire his untiring energy and wonder- ful skill in deciphering so many difficult remains, and are no longer astonished that he fell into some erroneous determinations, but rather marvel that he made so few. More lately ‘ Mr. J. W. Hulke, F.R.S., described a new species of Tguanodon (I. Prestwichii), from the Kimmeridge Clay, Cumnor Hurst, near Oxford; distinguished from I. Mantelli of the Wealden by the shape of the vertebral centra, by fewer than five sacral vertebre, and by the simpler character of its tooth-serrature. But interesting and numerous as have been the discoveries of fragmentary remains of Zguanodon, in this country, they could only have assisted us to a more or less conjectural notion of the living aspect of this huge Dinosaur, whilst the restoration by Waterhouse Hawkins (1855) was known to be erroneous in several particulars. Two somewhat small Dinosaurs, allied to Iguanodon, have, how- ever, been met with in England in a tolerably perfect state. ‘The first of these is from the Lower Lias of Dorset, obtained by the late Mr. Harrison of Charmouth, and is a fairly-complete skeleton of a herbivorous Dinosaur about 12 feet in length, closely allied by its dentition to Iguanodon, and described by Sir Richard Owen as Scelidosaurus Harrisoni.? This reptile was armed with lateral rows of thick bony scutes, and exhibits considerable disparity between the fore- and hind-limbs as well seen in Iguanodon, Compsognathus, and many other Dinosaurs. There are four functional digits and one rudimentary one in the pes. The researches of Prof. Huxley and of Mr. J. W. Hulke have also made us acquainted with Hypsilophodon Foaii, obtained by the late Rev. W. Fox from the Wealden beds of the Isle of Wight. At first only known from fragmentary remains® in 1869, ‘it became possible in 1881 to speak of an almost entire individual about 4 feet in length, preserved in one mass of matrix, besides parts of several others more or less complete. ‘The important remains are figured by the Royal Society in twelve quarto plates, and 1 Ficured by Owen in Pal. Soc. Foss. Rept. Wealden, tab. I. 1855. , 2 The two ischia and the pubes are marked in the originai description as the right tibia and fibula. 3 Quart. Journ. Geo. Soc. vol. xxvi. pp. 3-12, Pl. u. 4 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1880, vol. xxxvi. pp. 483-456, pl. xvili.—xx. 5 Pal. Soc. Foss. Rept. Oolitic form. 1861, pl. 2, 4, 5, 6; and 1862, pl. 1-11. Preserved in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.). 6 See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1870, vol. xxvi. pp. 3-12, pl. 1 and 2. 12 Dr. H. Woodward—On Iguanodon Mantelli. in the last a complete restoration is given by Mr. Hulke.! The animal has four large and powerful digits to the hind-foot® and a small rudimentary 5th outer toe; an extremely small manus with four small digits and a 5th rudimentary one. Mr. Hulke thinks that the sharp-pointed and curved ungual phalanges indicate that it was probably arboreal and rock-climbing in its habits. “The sides of the crowns of the teeth are finely serrated and repeat in miniature i lamelliform serration of the crown of Iguanodon Mantelli”’ (op. cit.). Prof. Huxley was the first to draw special attention * to one of the most perfect remains known in Hurope of a small Jurassic Dinosaur from the Lithographic Stone of Solenhofen, Bavaria, and described some years since by Dr. Andreas Wagner, under the name of Compsognathus longipes. “It has alight head with toothed jaws, sup- ported on a very long and slender neck. ‘The ilia are prolonged in front and behind the acetabulum. The pubes (?) seem to have been remarkably long and slender. . . . . . The fore-limb is very small; the hind-limb is disposed as in birds, and is very large, with three digits to the manus and pes. The femur, as in birds, is shorter than the tibia.” Notwithstanding its small size—not more than two feet in length—it strikingly resembles the figure of Iguanodon (Plate I.), but its proportions are more light and slender, and its dentition shows that Compsognathus was carnivorous, whilst Iguanodon © belongs to the herbivorous type. Amongst the earlier discoveries of large Dinosaurians in North America must be enumerated, Hadrosaurus Foulkii, Leidy, from the Cretaceous beds of New Jersey, an herbivorous animal closely resembling Iguanodon, and fully twenty-eight feet in length; and Lelaps aquilunguis, Cope, twenty-four feet long, of carnivorous type like Megalosaurus. Attempted restorations of both these genera were set up some years since, in the Central Park, New York, by that ingenious enthusiast, B. Waterhouse Hawkins, F.G.S. (see Gxot. Mae., 1869, Vol. VI. p. 565), but have been since removed. To Prof. O. C. Marsh, M.A., F.G.S., of Yale College, Newhaven, belongs the honour of making known perhaps the largest number of American Dinosaurs, some of which as, eg., Brontosaurus eacelsus,* Marsh, from the Jurassic formation of Colorado, Diplodocus longus,° Marsh, Ceratosaurus nasicornis,’ Marsh, and Allosaurus fragilis,’ Marsh, have been illustrated in these pages. Altogether more than thirty genera of Dinosauria have been described from North America alone. It is remarkable, that after more than sixty years, since the first 1 See Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. 1883, vol. 173, part iii. pp. 1035-61 and pl. 71-82. 2 In this point it agrees with Scelidosauwrus Harrisoni ; but that Dinosaur was furnished with rows of bony scutes, whereas Hypsilophodon has none. (See the original specimens in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.)) % Proceedings of the Royal Institution of Great Britain, Feb. 7, 1868. See also Grou. Maa. 1868, Vol. V. pp. 357-365. * See Grou. Maa. 1883, Dec. II. Vol. X. pp. 385-388, Pl. IX. 5 Op. cit. 1884, Dec. III. Vol. I. pp. 99-107 (10 Woodcuts). 6 Op, cit, 1884, pp. 252-262 (Figs. 1-5). 7 Op. cit. 1884, loc. cit. (Figs. 6-8). Geol.Ma§g. 1885. Decade IIL. Vol. IL. PLI. iat 10 x 8 Tf 6 5" q- 3 e Tien 12 FE j G.M.Woodward del. et lith. r : West Newman & C° imp Iguanodon Mantelli, Owen. Restorea by M.L.F de Poww, in the Brussels Museum. . ten el — ee = ~wheeeibiebe = el ee cee ee ae 12 D. in the last ¢ animal has fi small rudime four small di, the sharp-po probably art the crowns the lamellifo cit.). Prof. Hux most perfect from the Lit some years Compsognath ported on a> tront and be remarkably small; the | three digits : than the tibi feet in leng (Plate 1.), b dentition shc belongs to tl Amongst America mt the Cretacec resembling Lelaps aqu type like M. were set uj that ingenio Mae., 1869, To Prof. belongs the American J Marsh, fron Marsh, Cerc have been genera of D It is ren 1 See Phil. 2 In this p furnished wit original speci 3 Proceedir Grou. Maa. 4 See Gor 5 Op. cit. 1 5 Op. cit. | Dr. H. Woodward—COn Iguanodon Mantelli. 13 discovery of Iguanodon remains was made in the Wealden—during which time similar reptilia, more or less complete, have been ex- humed on the Continent, in England, and in North America, in strata varying in age from the Trias to the Chalk,—numerons perfect specimens should have lately been met with in their original gise- ment, the Wealden formation, from which the first was obtained ; not however in Sussex, but in Belgium. Their preservation is due to a very singular circumstance. In the colliery of Bernissart'— between Mons and Tournai near the French frontier—the Coal- measures (which are overlain by the Chalk-formation and by thick Quaternary deposits) are fissured in many places by deep valleys or chasms more than 200 metres deep.? These must have been formed by denudation and dislocation of the strata in post-Carboniferous times, and were open gorges in the old land-surface in the Wealden period.* Into this vast abyss were precipitated, by some Cretaceous débacle, twenty-three huge Iguanodons, numbers of fish of the genera Lepidotus, Ophiopsis, and Microdon; a Batrachian ; several species of Chelonians; and Crocodilians—equally perfect with the Iguanodons ;—and numerous ferns of the genus Zonchopteris, Pe- copteris, Alethopteris, Sphenopteris. Gleichenites and Gleichenia ; agree- ing with those described by Dunker from the Wealden of Hanover, and by Mantell from that of the south-east of England.4 The ossiferous deposit is separated from the steep walls of coal- shale bounding the chasm by a talus 10 metres thick, composed of débris of the coal-formation. The layers are composed of finely laminated blackish clay, interstratified with veins of grey sand and fragments of coal. The skeletons are imbedded in concretionary masses in the fine clay-sediment with fishes and plants, and indicate a repetition of ossiferous deposits at different levels, more or less widely separated by beds of unfossiliferous clay. The beds themselves are inclined at 70° against the sloping talus, but their inclination diminishes rapidly and is reduced to only 5° at a distance of 12 to 15 metres from the sides of the chasm. The discovery was first made known in 1878, and three years were subsequently spent by M. de Pauw in extracting the great series of fossil-remains from the pit-shaft, the bones being brought up from a depth of 322 metres.’ It must have been no small inconvenience and loss to the owners of the Sainte- Barbe coal-pit, to allow M. Dupont, the Director of the Brussels Museum and his Assistants, to carry on their researches for so long a period, and bring to bank with care so large and bulky a collection. 1 <r. Searles V. Wood. International Committee of Geological Nomenclature, in 1883, a majority voted in favour of the limit between the two divisions being drawn below the Callovian. The lines of division to which geologists generally attach impor- tance are breaks in the sequence, shown by unconformity or by changes in the sedimentation. Mr. Jukes-Browne very naturally wishes, as most other English geologists have done, to draw a limit where the calcareous deposits of the Middle Jurassics cease in England, and the argillaceous beds of the Upper Jurassics come in. Such a division, however well marked locally, has no general value, the change being confined to but a small portion of the earth’s surface. My reason for classing the Oxford Clay as Middle Jurassic is that, by so doing, the series or primary subdivisions of the system are more nearly equal in value. I take four fairly representative modern classifications, those of Renevier (1873-74), Meyer-Hymar (1881), Geikie (1882), and De Lapparent (1883). Under Renevier’s arrange- ment, if the Oxford Clay (and Callovian) be classed in the higher series, the upper subdivision would contain 3 “ systémes ” comprising 9 “étages,’ the middle 1 “systéme,’ and 4 “étages. By Meyer- Hymar’s arrangement, the upper would contain 4 étages consisting of 12 sous-étages, (or if the Purbeck, classed by Meyer-Eymar in the Lower Cretaceous series, be added, as it would by most geologists, 5 and 14), the middle 3 étages, consisting of 8 sous-étages. In Mr. Geikie’s classification two divisions would be assigned to the Upper Jurassic, one only to the Middle, whilst in De Lapparent’s 4 étages with 11 sous-étages would belong to the former, and only 2 étages with 4 sous-étages to the latter. If on the other hand the Oxfordian and Callovian are classed with the Middle Jurassic, the difference in paleontological importance between that and the upper subdivision, under any of the systems of classification quoted, would be small.: I carefully abstained from proposing new names, as so many have already been given to various Jurassic subdivisions. Those proposed by Mr. Jukes-Browne have certainly an advantage, on the score of euphony, over the terms Malm and Dogger, but the latter are widely known. I must deprecate the use of the term “stage,” in the sense in which it is employed by Mr. Jukes-Browne. An English term is urgently required as the equivalent of the French étage. This is never used for divisions of the rank of upper, middle or lower Jurassic, but always for smaller terms such as Purbeck, Portland, Kimmeridge, etc. If “stage” is restricted to the same meaning, the term will be far more useful than if employed as loosely as, for instance, “group” and “series”? have been. November 19th, 1884. W. T. Buanrorp. Wer regret to announce the death of Mr. Searles V. Wood, F.G.S., Treasurer of the Paleeontographical Society, on Sunday the 14th December, 1884, at his residence, Beacon Hill House, Martlesham, Woodbridge, after an illness of nine years duration. Geol. Mag . 1885. Decade Ill. Vol.II. Pl. IL. A.S.Foord del et lith Mintern Bros , imp. Oxfordian and Lower Ochte Gasteropoda: Yorkshire . THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEV SERIES. (DECADE HR VOLO TI. No. II—FEBRUARY, 1885. ore beara pAws, Ab aE @ aaa Se ——@_—_— I.—ConTRIBUTIONS TO THE PALMONTOLOGY OF THE YORKSHIRE OoLITEs. By Witrrip H. Hupzzston, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Continued from Decade III. Vol. I. p. 303.) (PLATE II.) 67.—Neritorsis (? Turso) tavieara, Phillips, 1829. Plate II. Figs. 1, 2,3, 3a. 1829 and 1835. Turbo levigatus (Nerita levigata, Min. Conch.). Phillips, G.-Y. p- 129, pl. xi. fig. 31. 1852 ? Turbo gibbosus, D’Orbigny. Terr. Jurass. ii. p. 342, pl. 330, fig. 1-3. 1854 ? Monodonta gibbosa, Thorent. Morr. Cat. p. 258. 1875. Turbo levigatus, Phillips, G.Y. 3rd ed. p. 330, pl. xi. fig. 31. Bibliography, etc.—The type specimen of Turbo levigatus, Phil., has not been seen by me; but since there are some grounds for regarding the fossil, usually so described, as a Neritopsis, the identi- fication becomes important. We must therefore fall back upon Phillips’s figure, and upon such collateral evidence as, in the absence ot description, may be available. Phillips in the early editions of the G.Y. considered Bean’s specimen from the Dogger as identical with Nerita levigata, Sow. (M. C. t. 217, fig. 1), which he regarded as a Turbo rather than a Nerita. This identification of Phillips has not been endorsed by subsequent writers. D’Orbigny believed that he recognized in Turbo levigatus, Phil., Delphinula gibbosa, Thorent (Mém. 8. G. Fr. 3, p. 260, pl. 22, fig. 19). D’Orbigny’s figure, making due allowance for enlargement, is very similar to the one by Phillips. There are two points in which D’Orbigny’s description of Turbo gibbosus does not correspond with the Dogger fossils identified by me with Turbo levigatus, Phil. (1.) T. gibbosus is described by D’Orbigny as having a smooth whorl. (2.) That author finds traces of a tooth on the columella. Neither of these peculiarities can be predicated of the Dogger fossils now under consideration. Therefore, without actually seeing Thorent’s type, its identification with the shells I call Neritopsis levigata, Phil., is not absolutely certain. At the same time, there are specimens from the Dogger, such as Fig. 3 of our Plate, where the fine spiral ornamentation is so obscure that, in another matrix, it might altogether escape observation. DECADE III,.—vVOL. II.—NO. II, 4 z q : : | ' : 50 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. As regards the traces of a tooth said to exist in Thorent’s species, D’Orbigny’s plate shows a strong callosity on part of the columella, but no actual tooth. In Mr. Leckenby’s collection these fossils are labelled Nerita levigata, Phil. non Sow.: in the Scarborough Museum there is a large specimen labelled Monodonta levigata, Phil. non Sow. This is at least collateral evidence that Phillips’s figure (xi. 81) refers to the fossils now under consideration. Moreover, there are no other fossils forthcoming which answer to the Phillipsian species. Whether more than one species can be made out of the available specimens is a point which cannot be absolutely decided, though I have preferred to treat them as varieties. Descriptions.—Varinty A.—Specimen from the Dogger (zone 1), Peak (Blue Wyke). Leckenby Collection. Fig. 1 AWG oa scones an caDdGN ea sdk oodoa0dKS 15 millimetres. pyjama Binge oe Ga0a0 aboo chon nso ccod Kn 110°. Shell turbinate, transversely ovate ; body-whorl large in proportion to the spire. Whorls about four, depressed, somewhat flattened at top, and separated by a wide and slightly channelled suture. Although apparently smooth, the shell, on closer inspection, is seen to possess a very fine and regularly undulating spiral ornamentation, decussated by broad lines of growth, especially visible on the flanks of the body-whorl. Aperture large and circular, but the anterior portion concealed in the matrix. Another specimen.-Same horizon and locality. Jermyn Street Museum. Fig. 2. Meiers s «aes aie s Siats eect neiiate elon es ... 13 millimétres, Waders teas cia/. icrath ravererneistoneiiteseraceeie aera 14 5 S pia lean; cere eerie ter erat podkbSodar e Ratio of body-whorl to entire shell about .... 80 : 100. The spire of this specimen is in worse condition than the one previously described (Fig. 1) ; but the body-whorl is similar in shape and ornamentation, and probably also in relative size. Being free from matrix, the aperture is clear, though a portion of the outer lip and anterior extremity is deficient. Hnough remains to show that the aperture was very wide and produced; with a long columella very slightly curved and much thickened by callus. No umbilicus. Varinty B.—Specimen from the same horizon and locality. York Museum. Figs. 3 and da. IGN otodaaonuucodsuUcosG cogo bonne . 12 millimétres. AWGN paca pam oondG.noe0 co.duaoouMeos 0000 12 ” Spiralianole va sence elawutes epee nacre trenete | GBF Ratio of body-whorl to entire shell ..... Agood (08 LOW. Shell turbinate, subovate, imperforate ; body-whorl large in com- parison with the spire, but less so than in variety A. ‘The entire shell consists of about five whorls, which are tumid, scarcely flattened atop, and separated by a suture of moderate depth. (N.B.—The appearance of a sort of belt over the suture, between the penult and body-whorl, correctly represented in Fig. 8, has no structural significance, but seems to be the result of one of those curious W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. 51 “tricks which mineralization sometimes plays with the fossils of the Dogger.) The whorls are smooth—almost polished in the specimen —but a fine system of undulating spirals may be seen on close inspection, and these are decussated by broad flat lines of growth. The aperture is wide, and subcircular, the outer lip being produced and slightly pouting; columella nearly straight and considerably thickened. Relations and Distribution—The above forms are by no means easy to allocate generically, and it is quite open to question whether the varieties A. and B. should not be more widely separated. Variety A., which is the least rare of the two, has the shell extremely depressed and neritoid, and the ornamentation so characteristic of the more delicately sculptured amongst the Jurassic Neritopsids is conspicuous in a good light without the aid of a lens. In this respect variety A. approaches Neritopsis (Turbo) canaliculatus, D’Arch., from the Cornbrash of Yorkshire, described in the last number of this Memoir.?, There are a fair number of specimens in the best collections, but hardly any afford opportunities for a study of the aperture. The Jermyn-Street specimen (Fig. 2) is almost alone in this respect, and even in this one the conditions are not altogether favourable for a very accurate diagnosis. The late Dr. Lycett appears to have regarded this specimen as a Neritopsis. Variety B. is very like Phillips’s figure, and also like D’Orbigny’s. Although it has many points of resemblance with A., yet there are important differences. The spiral angle is 15° less and the ratio of the body-whorl 10 per cent. less, and the aperture is relatively smaller, and more circular. Indeed the whole aspect of the shell is less like a Neritopsis. This variety must be regarded as the re- presentative of Phillips’s type. It is, however, very rare. Both varieties occur sparingly in the Dogger, but as yet I have not identified them from the Inferior Oolite of the West of England. Supposing that variety B. is really represented by Delphinula gibbosa, Thorent, it occurs in the Inferior Oolite of St. Michel (Aisne), France. Genus Turso, Linnezus, 1758. As previously intimated in the “Corallian Gasteropoda” (GEot. Mag. 1881, p. 52), and also in a former part of the present Memoir, owing to the withdrawal of Amberleya, and the so-called Littorine, the number of species left to be classed under Turbo is limited. If we were further to withdraw the forms usually referred to Monodonta and Delphinula, there would be no representative of Turbo at all in the series of beds now under consideration. It must be admitted that, in the absence of certain characters easily recognized in existing species, it is extremely difficult to know how to treat the quondam Turbos of our lists: nay more, it is not always easy to say (when the aperture is concealed or imperfect) whether a species should be classed under Turbo or Trochus. Hence I am free to admit that the arrange- ments at present adopted are somewhat empirical, and thus the list of Grou. Maa. Dec. III. Vol. I. p. 301. 52 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. Jurassic Turbos becomes large or small according to the views of particular authors. That Amberleya and the so-called Littorine should be classed under the Turbinide rather than under the Littorinide is extremely probable. The title of the smooth forms of Monodonta to be separated from Turbo, because of the columellar tooth, which is very irregularly developed, is also doubtful, since there seems to be a singular connection between the small smooth Turbos of the Lias and the “ Monodontas” of the Oolite. It is best to regard Monodonta, Crossostoma, etc., as merely of subgeneric value. 68.—Turso (MonoponTa) Lavieatus, Sowerby, 1821. Plate II. Figs. 4, 4a, 4b; 5, 5a; 6, 6a. N.B.—In a general sense this should be viewed as a group rather than as one species. The references below must not in every case be regarded in the light of actual synonyms, but rather as represent- ing sections of the group. Hence no chronological arrangement. 1821. Nerita levigata, Sowerby. Min. Conch. pl. 217, fig. 1. 1854. Monodonta levigata, Sowerby. Morr. Cat. p. 258. n.v. Nerita bellulata, Bean MS. 1843. Zrochus Labadyei, D’Archiac. Mém. Soc. Geol. Fr. vol. v. pt. 2, p. 379, pl. 29, fig. 2, 2a. 1852. Trochus acmon, D’Orbigny. ‘Terr. Jurass. p. 278, pl. 314, figs. 1—4. 1860. Monodonta papilla, Heb. et Desl. Bull. Soc. Linn. Norm. p. 59 of sep. copy, pl. 3, fig. 1. 1867. Chrysostoma ovulata, Héb. et Desl. Laube, Gaster. von Balin, p. 13, pl. 3, fig. 3. Compare also— 1850. GAME discoideum, Morris and Lycett. Gt. Ool. Moll. p. 73, pl. xi. (2 ec Bibliography, ete.—Although specimens of this plentiful and wide- spread group are not extremely rare in the Yorkshire Dogger, yet it would seem that none were available, when Phillips’s early editions were published. It is somewhat singular that no notice should have been taken of these fossils in the third edition of the G.Y. (1875), notwithstanding their obvious and unmistakeable difference from the species just described (No. 67). In the Leckenby Collection and also at York they are known as “ Nerita bellulata,” Bean, MS. None of the three Yorkshire forms figured answers exactly to Sowerby’s type of Monodonta levigata,* which measures as follows: —Height 12 mm., width 13 mm., spiral angle (approx.) 90°, ratio of body-whorl to entire shell 75: 100. Hence the type of the M. levigata group is median between such extremes as Monodonta acmon, D’Orb., with a spiral angle of 65°, and the highly rotelliform section with an inconspicuous spire, which is represented by Mono- donta (Chrysostoma) ovulata, H. and D., and perhaps yet further by Crossostoma of the Great Oolite. In the collections from the I.O. of the South of England the median form is well represented, but graduates into the rotelliform section ; whilst the papilliform section is more sharply separated. Thus Mr. Tawney (Dundry Gastero- 1 Kindly lent to me by the Council of the Bristol Museum at the instance of Edward Wilson, Esq., F.G.S., the Curator. ‘ W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. 53 poda) recognized two species, viz. Monodonta levigata, Sow., and Monodonta acmon, D’Orb. It is well known that the bulk of these shells from the G.O. were classed by Morris and Lycett under Monodonta Labadyei, D’Arch., which belongs to the papilliform section. As far as I can see at present, no particular section can be predicated of any one horizon as being peculiar to it; but in each district of the Lower Oolites, and possibly higher up in the Jurassic system, some one or more of these sections will be found to prevail, but often with a local modification, which it would be difficult either to describe or depict, but which at the same time is recognizable. Such varieties may be regarded as races. Hence, perhaps, there is more variation laterally than vertically. If people please to amuse themselves by giving specific names not only to the sections but also to the races which make up the group of Monodonta levigata, well and good; but such “ species” are not of equal value, seeing that they frequently represent differences laighalils g6qns00s ooudoe BbogOOOddooCUDaOOe 13°5 millimétres. DWaldt = esi oeiers PEAR haya Va lanwua faa, aiserigcstete rie 14 ey Si! ARMA ¢. coonsv00 noduDd bond UoDDOOUD 80°. Ratio of body-whorl to entire shell ........ 68 : 100. Shell small, turbinate, not umbilicated. Whorlis four or five, which increase under a regular angle, are moderately tumid, and separated by a well-defined, but not wide, suture. Body-whorl relatively large, tumid, with a very slight flattening of the posterior region. The entire shell is perfectly devoid of ornament, except lines of growth which are numerous and very fine. Aperture tolerably wide and nearly circular; columella thick and strongly toothed anteriorly. Relations and Distribution —This variety belongs to the papilliform section, represented in the Great Oolite by Monodonta Labadyea, D’Arch., and in the Callovian of Montrueil-Bellay by Monodonta papilla, Héb. et Desl. How far these three actually differ from each other it would be difficult to say, without having specimens of each side by side. It is the only section of the group, which is found in any quantity in the Yorkshire Dogger, though by no means common. Description of another variety, B.—From the same horizon and locality. York Museum. Figs. 5 and da. IGE MG NAW ssc ocleisize sib cielee ate « Hoong O0b0c! 9 millimetres. RVG Aich OLAS! ete katie cis cht e\ Siareicl ss viele ayes solu iolemlasts Ye i Syairalisane] CM ye a rapetecctersicrt eter slosrerciera wotou alegele irregular. Ratio of body-whorl to entire shell .......... 75 : 100. This variety, which is similar to forms from other parts of Eng- land, is characterized by a great irregularity in the development of the whorls. The penultimate exhibits a remarkable bulge anteriorly, whilst the posterior region is considerably flattened. This variety probably occurs wherever the group is abundant. It is very rare in the Dogger. o4 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. . _ Description of another variety near to M. ovulata, H. and D. From the same horizon and locality. Leckenby Coll. Figs. 6 & 6a. LOI BG LAs sPatera. w/b eiaiciore lavera ee eRe I 7°5 millimetres. Wid thi gelevas dye tobeotetoiaate at eistennets che ete tere « 10 » Spiralvan glen aden capielsa Gaia a eee: TSS Katio of body-whorl to entire shell .......... 86 : 100. Shell small, transversely ovate, depressed, not umbilicated. The Spire is few-whorled and bears but a small proportion to the body- whorl, which is slightly flattened in its upper part, and extremely swollen anteriorly. Suture almost invisible, whorls extremely smooth. Aperture transversely (to the axis) ovate, columella short, thick and toothed anteriorly. Relations and Distribution.—This is the most rotelliform of the M. levigata group in the Yorkshire Dogger, and is to a certain ex- tent the representative of Monodonta ovulata, Héb. et Desl. The typical M. levigata lies between the two extremes shown in Figures 4 and 6. Extremely rare in the Yorkshire Dogger. As regards the Relations and Distribution of the M. levigata group generally, this subject was partly discussed under the heading “ Bibliography.” It might be hazardous to speculate how nearly some of the small smooth Turbos, not unfrequent in the Lias, are re- lated to our Zurbo (Monodonta) levigatus group. This will require further investigation. As regards distribution in the Lower Oolites, we find all three sections recognized by Laube from the Brown Jura of Balin, though his identifications are not absolutely correct. By this author the group is referred to Chrysostoma, Swainson, classed by Gray with the rotelliform Trochids. Not noticed by Brauns in the Middle Jura of N. W. Germany. In the Yorkshire Oolites we do not find any shells of this kind between the Dogger and the Coral Rag, where three species were recognized (see ‘‘ Corallian Gastero- poda,” Geol. Mag. 1881, p. 53), in many respects analogous to the three sections of Turbo levigatus. 69.—Tourzo (DetpHtnuta) FuNicuLatus, Phillips, 1829. Vanrrerizs. Plate II. Figs. 7 and 8. See ‘‘ Corallian Gasteropoda,” (Gzox. Mac. 1881, p. 54.) Compare also Turbo Hamptonensis, Morris and Lycett, Gt. Ool. Moll. p. 64, pl. ix. fig. 30. Turbo Davoustii, D’ Orbigny, Terr. Jurass. p. 344, pl. 331, figs. 7-10. Bibliography, etc.—The type is, of course, a Corallian fossil not uncommon in the Coral Rag of Yorkshire. The fossils now under consideration are representative rather than identical forms ; though, after all, the principal difference is probably due to the more exuberant development of the Coral Rag fossil and partly to difference of status. As these shells are extremely rare in the Lower Oolites of Yorkshire, the present classification is only provisional, and the same may be said of the suggested comparisons.’ 1 Tn both figures, but especially in Figure 8, the granulations are made too small and too circular. There are indications that these nodes were more imbricated. W. H. Hudleston—On the Vorkshire Oolites. 55 Descriptions.—Docerr Variety.—Specimen from the Dogger (zone 1), Peak (Blue Wyke). Leckenby Collection. Figure 7. Ele Toten, Mico rele oi Sle ea ens 6-5 millimetres. PATE ORAM ALOR GONVPLCU IN vavctiede rye) sesh ayele of sai e/ eves foie oteraslereyers 6°25 - Sjomal amas osscoocootocdnsdoos50c 78°. A small turbinate shell, highly ornamented. Spire few-whorled (much eroded in the specimen), and apparently about 4rd the height of the entire shell. Body-whorl large, sutures wide. The orna- mentation is rich, consisting of well-cut spirals strongly tuberculated ; the uppermost row of tubercles recedes, and was probably rather imbricated. Other indications are wanting. CornprasH VARIETY. — Specimen from the Cornbrash (zone 4), Scarborough. Leckenby Collection. Figure 8. \ JRIGIGING oc socpocaoussu6 5 oo0000 000000 12 millimétres. PAN ORONANAATC) a WHLGUINs a ciateleicere cle eisicie were sleie clessls clevace W250 955 l Samal HMB 965606 coo sone bODHOD ONO? 80° About twice the size of the Dogger variety, but too imperfect and too much involved in matrix for accurate description. The system of the tuberculation is proportionately enlarged, the tubercles being exceedingly coarse and spirally elongate. The specimen having been much eroded, these tubercles have a sort of polished appearance, though it is not improbable that they were originally imbricated. Suture wide. Relations and Distribution.—But little more can be said on these points. The gaping suture and the probable imbrication of the nodes make it almost certain that these forms, small and battered though they be, belong to the group of Delphinule, of which Turbo (D.) funiculatus, Phil., may be regarded as the type. Hach specimen is unique in its horizon for Yorkshire, and this is an additional reason for not attempting any new names. Specimens similar to, if not identical with, the Dogger variety, may be noted occasionally from the Inferior Oolite of other parts of England. 70.—Turzo (DELPHINULA) GRANATUS, sp. n. Plate II. Figs. 9-12. Delphinula granata, Bean, MS. Solarium granatum, Bean, MS. Descriptions.—Srction A.—Shell depressed, bicarination of body- whorl indistinct. Specimen from the Dogger (zone 1), Peak (Blue Wyke). Leck- enby Collection. Figs. 9, 9a. ETO UNG Mavateeradn casei ievis ace ohcatecleis, Sincere s 5°5 millimétres. Wildl cojdouudue gneocpoowesdoeua uopaue 6°5 3 SS piraltanio] OW vstyrais ejarety,e acy eles. «eh share oti 120°. Ratio of body-whorl to entire shell ........ 85 : 100. Shell small, turbinate, depressed, umbilicated. Whorls angular and step-like; those of the spire about 4in number; suture rather close. The apical whorls are nearly smooth, but the antepenult exhibits a fine granulated carina towards the base, whilst the rest of the shell is marked by fine spiral granulations with larger granulations on the carina. Body-whorl very large in proportion and angular: close to 56 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. the suture is a double spiral ridge slightly tuberculated, the re- mainder of the flat area being marked by finely-granulated spirals. The widest part of the shell is marked by a slight carina with larger granulations, below which are other slight keels: base granulated. This specimen represents a young individual: the ornaments are exceptionally well preserved. Another specimen.—Same horizon and locality. Bean Collection, British Museum. Figs. 10 and 10a. Lek Ai ea ea aid Sola ae Cc eS REA roms tao 6°5 millimétres. Width 35 ee aS Eee RON dbecmeat aes 7 36 Spiral anglers acy. crevasse sth misjefehs ye ie eee oboe 110°. This probably represents a more mature individual than the pre- ceding. The body-whorl is slightly bicarinate, the upper keel being somewhat the stronger. The base of the shell is ornamented by fine granulated spirals terminating in a spiral of larger tuberculations, which fringes a moderately wide and deep umbilicus. The aperture is slightly pentagonal, and fairly large. Another specimen.—Same horizon and locality. York Museum. Figs. 11, lla, and 116. EC othiti nag) abs AeA dAS ait ecayatayae totale chy apeeyacleyc 11-5 millimétres. SW nas hat tee oc tarss aap pepapettayeytetnestaraborey shade 13°25 30 Spiralvan gle wie cic gtarettee cise sysveusistenenere Irregular. A fine example of the mature shell. It consists of five whorls: the apical ones are free from granulations, but with the usual carine: penult sufficiently uncovered to show the lower carina. Suture rather more open than in the smaller specimens. Ornaments of the body-whorl rather coarser than in the smaller specimens. Upper carina bigranulate: lower carina scarcely distinguishable. The tuberculated spiral which fringes the umbilicus very conspicuous (11d). Aperture nearly circular, with the pillar lip shghtly produced. Section B.—Shell sub-conical: bicarination of body-whorl dis- tinct. Specimen from the same horizon and locality. My Collection. Not figured. Heeighty uui...waes busied eens shames 12:5 millimétres, Waid Gay tee rales er cata a alana tama cle lobe ts rovenets 12°5 ” Spiraltaneles(about)is;.- pismeise mcieiisls serie late 85° The points in which this form differs from those described under Section A. are (1) the more conical outline of the spire, which is almost acute; (2) the strong bicarination of the body-whorl; (3) the coarser tuberculation of the spiral surrounding the umbilicus ; and (4) the spiral angle of lower value. This specimen has a sort of superficial resemblance to “ Trochus”’ bisertus. Another specimen.—Same horizon and locality. Bean Collection, British Museum. Fig. 12. Trochiform like the last, the whorls of the spire are devoid of granulations, though the keels are well marked. ‘The ornamentation of the upper part of the body-whorl is peculiar, the spirally granu- late character being masked by an axial or transverse system. Owing to the matrix, it is not easy to say if the lower keel is developed. W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. Dt This is probably an aged shell, or it may have suffered during the process of mineralization. Relations and Distribution.—It will be gathered from a comparison of the descriptions under Sections A and B, that there exists a depressed and irregular form (A), and a sub-conical and more regular form (B); each of which has hitherto been referred to Turbo (Delphinula) granatus, and had best remain so for the present. The young specimens of Section A have a very wide spiral angle. It is just one of those groups that easily passes into something else, which is nearly, but not quite the same. It may, I think, be seen in collections from the Lincolnshire Limestone, but south of this I have not at present traced it. The analogous or representative species in the rich univalve beds of the 1.0. of Dorset-Somerset must be sought in Turbo Shaleri, Tawney (Dundry Gasteropoda, p. 23, pl. 2, fig. 3). In Turbo Shaleri, which may well be regarded as belonging to the subgenus Delphinula, the shell is somewhat more depressed than in our section A.; and the whorls, especially the body-whorls, are more angular and pos- sessed of more prominent and better defined carine. In T. Shalert also the umbilicus is wider, and bounded by a spiral of large tubercles, few in number, rather than by the small and numerous granules which surround the umbilicus in D. granata (see Fig. 116). Not found in Yorkshire anywhere but in the Dogger of the Peak. Nothing of the kind is quoted by Brauns from “NW. Germany. Amongst the numerous small species of Turbo figured and described by D’Orbigny, we can scarcely doubt that some must be pretty near to Turbo (Delphinula) granatus. 71.—Turzo ? species. Plate II. Fig. 18. Description.—Specimen from the Dogger (zone 1), Peak (Blue Wyke). Bean Collection, British Museum. Ror eo hiptepre nveysrencrss erections . 6°75 millimetres. NP PLOXIMaAbe:« WiCGhiee vrei srelduias seiieii sy 2 5°50 7 Spiral emer rrrettcreleoratcrs 70°. Shell small, trochiform, higher than wide. Spire subacute, and composed of about five whorls, which are almost regular in their increase; apical whorls nearly smooth; anterior whorls angular, spirally granulate, and ornamented by carinz with larger granulations, which vary somewhat in each whorl, but may be described as follows: (1) a fringe of beady granules close to the suture; (2) a double row of beady granulations at the angle of the whorl, the upper row being the strongest and occupying the salience of the whorl; (8) the body- whorl developes an anterior row of beady Te Aron in addition to the preceding. Suture moderately close. Base spirally granulate. Other indications wanting. Relations and Distribution. —The granulated character of the ornaments and to some extent their arrangement serve to connect this shell with section B. of Delphinula granata. On the whole, however, its truly conical outline, closer suture, and the double row 58 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. of granulations make it difficult to believe that this can represent the young form of section B. Hence it may be fairly regarded as a distinct species, which I have not yet succeeded in tracing elsewhere. Bearing in mind that the specimen is unique, and that the aperture cannot be seen, it would be premature to make a new species; but should a name be required, I would suggest that it be known as Turbo gemmuliferus. 72.—Turzo? species. Pl. Il. Fig. 14. Description.—Specimen from the Dogger (zone 1), Peak (Blue Wyke). Bean Collection, British Museum. Ls she aan oO DeROAR mauaaC 6:25 millimétres. Approximate { Width ....... doqougd dodopodd 6°5 ” Siouell NS Gg onaoe boudod20 F. 20m Shell small, subdepressed, step-like. The spire consists of about 4 whorls, the apical ones being smooth and inflated. The penult is angular, and partially bicarinate anteriorly, the upper keel mark- ing the chief salience: traces of extremely fine spiral ornamentation. Body-whorl large, both in height and width, relatively to the spire, and strongly angular; three well-marked carine of nearly equal strength occupy the median prominence, the upper keel being slightly double: fine spiral lines without granulation ornament the whole of the body-whorl, including the base. Suture moderately close. Other indications wanting. Relations and Distribution.—Less depressed, and with a more symmetrical spire than Delphinula granata, this form is further dif- ferentiated by the non-granulated character of the keels and spiral lines. At present I have failed to trace the exact counterpart else- where. Bearing in mind the apparently local character of certain forms, and the fact of this Specimen being unique, it would be pre- mature to recognize it as a named species. Should it be found to occur more plentifully, 1 would suggest the name of Turbo (Delphi- nula) levier. | Genus Trocuus, Linneeus, 1758. The three zones of the Inferior Oolite in Yorkshire are extremely poor in shells referable to this genus. I have already expressed a belief that “ Trochus”’ bisertus, Phill., belongs to the so-called Littorine: and even if this group is ultimately restored to the Turbinide, T. bisertus cannot be regarded as a Trochus. In Trochus monilitectus, Phil., we possess a well-marked and characteristic Trochus, almost the only one hitherto noted from any portion of the I. O. of Yorkshire. The Lias of Yorkshire, accord- ing to Tate and Blake, has yielded three species of Trochus, only one of which is at all plentiful. Hence we are prepared to have the genus poorly represented in the Dogger. 73.—TrRoounus, near to pimrp1aTus, Sowerby, 1818. Pl. II. Fig. 15. 1818. Trochus dimidiatus, Sowerby. Min. Conch. pl. 181, fig. 4. Bibliography.—Sowerby described his species from a single speci- Prof. F. W. Hutton—On Geological Nomenclature. 59 men found at Little Sodbury. It is just possible that some of D’Orbigny’s species from the I. O. are synonyms. Description.—Specimen from the Dogger Sands (lower part of zone 1), Blue Wyke. Leckenby Collection. The specimen is too much involved in matrix for close description. The spire consists of about four whorls, which increase under a reeular angle, the apical ones being smooth and inflated. The penult shows traces of a strong carina: the body-whorl, which is relatively large, has two keels, of which the lower represents the margin of the base. Shell plain. Relations and Distribution.—This small fossil is so near to Sowerby’s species that it would be unsafe to separate them. The specimen figured is the only one known to have been found in the I. O. of Yorkshire. EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. Fie. 1. Neritopsis levigata, Phil. Vartery A. Dogger, Blue Wy ke Leckenby Collection. Back view. x 13. 5p So Jb. Variety A. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Jermyn Street Museum. Front view. x 13. 5h 8h BE Tb, Variety B. Dogger, Blue Wyke. York Museum. Back and front views. x 14. », 4, 40,45. Turbo (Monodonta) levigatus, Sow., var. bellulat7, Bean. Dogger, Blue Wyke. York Museum. Back, front, and basal views. x 1). 59 Dy Ore Jb. Variety B. Dogger, Blue Wyke. York Museum. Back and front views. x 14. op Gy Gee Ib. var. near to ovulata, H. &D. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Leckenby Collection. Back and front views. x 1}. yg Ue Turbo (Delphinula), cf. funiculatus, Phil, DoceEr VaRtrery. Leckenby Collection. Back view. x 13. 59 &e Jb. Cornnprasu Variety. Leckenby Collection. Back view. x 1}. 59 By Mae Turho (Delphinula) granatus, Bean MS. Young specimen. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Leckenby Collection. Apical and back views. x 13. », 10,10¢. Jb. Intermediate in size. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Bean Collection, British Museum. Front and back views. x 15. 5, 11,11, ) 26. Mature specimen. Dogger, Blue Wyke. York Museum. 116. § Back, front, and basal views. x 14. x 1 2. Jb. Sxcrion B. Probably an old or worn specimen. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Bean Collection, British Museum. : Fie on Turbo (Delphinula), species. Dogger, Blue Wyke. Bean Collection, British Museum. Back view. x 13. lle Turbo (Delphinula), species Dogger, Blue Wyke. Bean Collec- tion, British Museum. Back view. x 13. Lo, le Trochus, cf. dimidiatus, Sow. Dogger Sands, Blue Wyke. Leckenby Collection. Back view. x 13. (To be continued.) IJ.—GrotocgicaL NOMENCLATURE. By Prof. F. W. Hurton F.G.S8. | SHOULD be much obliged if you would allow me to make a few remarks on the subject of Geological Nomenclature. Certain points connected with nomenclature are forced on the attention of a geologist living at the antipodes of Europe which are not likely to attract the notice of one who is working in, or near, the region from which the standard table of rock-systems has been drawn up; and 60 Prof. F. W. Hutton—On Geological Nomenclature. this must be my excuse for coming forward in a matter which has already been so much and so well discussed. I do not object to the work done by the International Congress at Bologna. On the contrary, I think that the names “ System,” “Series,” and “Stage,” with their chronological equivalents, can be advantageously employed by British geologists in all parts of the world; and I quite agree that the term ‘‘ formation” should be used only with reference to the mode of origin of a rock. The term ‘‘oroup ” seems to be unnecessary, as we can always speak of the Paleozoic or the Mesozoic rocks of a country with all the accuracy required when using such wide terms; while we cannot always do the same with sufficient accuracy when referring to rocks belonging to the shorter periods or epochs. For example, I can speak of the Mesozoic rocks of New Zealand, because the term is wide and makes no pretension to accuracy. But I cannot speak of the Jurassic or of the Cretaceous rocks of New Zealand with any approach to accuracy, although our present unmethodical nomenclature often compels me to do so; and it is on the question of correlating systems in different parts of the world that I wish to lay my views before your readers. It is generally allowed that although deposition has been going on continuously in some part or other of the earth, a complete series of rocks does not exist in any one geological region: and it is also allowed that the breaks in the sequence in different regions are not contemporaneous. From this it follows that the rock-systems of any one geological region cannot possibly be the chronological equivalents of the rock-systems of other regions. Chronological overlappings must constantly occur, and consequently there is no single region in which the rock-systems can be taken as supplying a nomenclature applicable to the whole world. Further, in consequence of over- lapping, no table of rock-systems, collected from different parts of the world, can be compiled which will show a simple sequence. It is therefore quite impossible to squeeze the rock-systems of other regions into those found in the Huropean area. They will not fit. This being so, it is evident that, if geological nomenclature is to be fairly accurate, each geological region must have a separate set of systems distinguished by different names. This is allowed by Dr. A. Geikie.t But in order that these regional systems may be connected together, it is necessary that geological time should be divided into a set of divisions quite irrespective of any particular region: and the systems could then be referred to this chronological scale with greater and greater accuracy as our knowledge of the paleontology of each region increased. Geological regions with separate systems would be established wherever it was thought to be necessary, but in time some might amalgamate, or partly amalgamate. For example, there is in New Zealand a physically connected system of rocks which I have called the “ Hokanui system.” Future investigation may prove that this is the equivalent of the ‘‘ Newer Carbonaceous System” of Australia, 1 Text-Book of Geology, p. 635. Prof. F. W. Hutton—On Geological Nomenclature. 61 and in time both may be shown to be equivalents of the “Gondwana System” of India. If so, the earlier name would stand for the Regional System and the others would become synonyms. But it would not therefore follow that the Cainozoic Systems of India and New Zealand were equivalents; each system would retain its own name until it was proved to be the equivalent of some other. Some systems would be quite local, others would be widely spread. Exactly the same method would be employed with the series com- posing a system. Each would retain its own name until two or more were united by paleontological evidence. Of course differences of opinion would arise as to whether two series, or two systems, should or should not be united. This is unavoidable in any case. It is the same difficulty which naturalists have to deal with in making species and genera. But it is no more, and probably a con- census of opinion would soon settle each point. It may be objected that a great number of names would have to be introduced, many of which would in time become obsolete. This is true; but on the other hand, applying the names of the rock- systems of Europe to the systems in other parts of the world must always be very inaccurate, and may lead to serious error. It is better to multiply names if it insures accuracy, than to insure in- accuracy by making a few names cover everything. An illustration will render the comparative merits of the two methods clearer. Suppose, then, the existence of a rock-system in Chili which in reality covered in time part of the Jurassic and part of the Cretaceous period. At first, when the knowledge of its fossils was slight, there might be a difference of opinion as to its age. By the one method some geologists would apply the name Jurassic, others Cretaceous to it, so that confusion might easily arise. But when its true age came to be known, a compound name, such as Cretaceo-Jurassic, would have to be invented, and even then, this cumbrous name would not be accurate, as the system would not cover the whole of these periods. By the other method the system would at once be called (say) the ‘Talca system,’ and under this name it would always remain, unless shown to be the exact equivalent of some other system. Its true age would at first be disputed, but no confusion could arise, as no chronological name would be applied to it. Ultimately this point would be settled and the system referred to its proper place in the universal scale. The name ‘Talca system’ would also be accurate, as it would include those particular rocks only, neither more nor less. It might also be objected that under the system here advocated it would not be possible to colour geological maps uniformly ; but this objection has no weight. It is impossible, in any case, to colour all geological maps uniformly, because the regional systems overlap in time. It would be no advantage to call a system Silurian, in order that it might be so coloured, when we know that it cannot be the equivalent of that European system. In the method I advocate the colours would represent the chronological divisions of the universal scale, and each system would be coloured as if it belonged to that chronological division which most nearly represented it. 62 Prof. F. W. Hutton—On Geological Nomenclature. The regional systems and series would, of course, have geographical names, but the names of the chronological divisions should not be geographical, as they would be made for paleontological reasons. We have very good chronological names for the four great eras, and the names of the Cainozoic periods are well adapted for introduction into the chronological scale as divisions. What is wanted are new names for the divisions of the Mesozoic and Paleozoic eras. 'The Archean need not be divided until some means of correlating the systems has been discovered. These divisions would form a com- plete sequence, and it would be as impossible to intercalate a new division as it would be to put in a new era between the Palzozoic and Mesozoic. But as our knowledge of paleontology advanced, it might be found advisable to make subdivisions in some cases, and for this reason the names of the divisions should not be Upper, Middle, and Lower. One word more as to what I understand by systems. These would be separated by well-marked unconformities—physical or paleeonto- logical—over the whole or the greater part of the region, and would show important geological changes in the region. Consequently they would have very unequal chronological values. In one region there might be only one Cainozoic system, while in another region it might be necessary to establish three or four systems. They would there- fore bear no relation to the chronological divisions, which themselves would represent, as they do now, very unequal portions of time. The duration of the divisions would depend on the rate of biological change. The duration of the systems would depend on the frequency of important changes in the physical geography of each geological region. Mr. Blanford says that ‘the principal divisions should be as nearly as possible of equal value,” ! and no doubt this is theoretically true as regards the chronological divisions, but it would be difficult to carry out in practice, as our geological chronometer— biological change—has been going faster and faster. Of course I do not pretend that there is anything new in these remarks. Geologists are applying the principle in all parts of the world. Even in England, as soon as Archzean rocks were discovered, new names were given to them, because it was seen to be impossible to correlate them with the previously-established Archzan systems in Canada. All that I advocate is that the principle should be carried out methodically by putting the European rock-systems on the same footing as the rock-systems of other parts of the world, and- by drawing up a chronological scale to which all systems might be referred. CANTERBURY CoLLEGE, CHRISTCHURCH, New ZEALAND. 1 GrotocicaL Macazine, July, 1884, p. 319. R. Lydekker—On Fossti Mammatia. 63 Iil.—Nore on Turer Genera or Fossin ARTIODACTYLA, WITH Description oF A New SPECIES. By R. Lyprexxer, B.A., F.G.S., F.Z.S. CznotHEeRium FILHOLt, sp. nov. nobis. From the Quercy Phosphorites. N his memoir on the Vertebrates of the Quercy Phosphorites, Dr. Filhol has described two species which he refers to the genus Cenotherium, viz. C. commune’ and C. elongatum.? Of the former only one ramus of the mandible is figured, and it is referred to a varietal form under the name of procommune: the latter, which is a small form, is known by the cranium and mandible. Both species have no diastema in the dental series. In addition to these, two small species are referred to the genus Plesiomeryx, under the names of P. cadurcensis® and P. quinquedentatus,* the latter being known only by the mandible; these forms are distinguished from the true Cenotherium by the presence of a diastema between the earlier premolars. From the Lower Miocene of Cournon (Puy-de-Déme) and St. Gérand-le-Puy (Allier) Dr. Filhol recognizes three species of Cenotherium proper, viz. C. commune,’ C. laticurvatum,® and C. Geoffroy ;7 and one species of Plesiomeryx, viz. P. gracilis.2 The two latter are of very small size; and C. laticurvatum is the largest of all. In a later memoir? the same writer describes a lower jaw from the Lower Miocene of Ronzon, near Puy-en-Velay, which is also referred to P. gracilis, although it presents no diastema. This specimen is the type of Aymard’s ill-defined Zooligus Picteti (= C. Picteti, Gervais); and on its evidence Dr. Filhol says that no distinction derived from dental characters can be drawn between Cenotherium and Plesiomeryx; although the latter is retained as a sub-genus marked by certain cranial characters. The present writer prefers to altogether abolish the latter term. From the Upper Hocene of Mouillac, France, Dr. Filhol’’ has more recently described a frag- ment of the maxilla of an allied form containing the last five teeth under the name of Mouillactherium elegans. The specimen has not been figured ; but it is described as differing from typical species of Cenotherium by having a larger and more forwardly placed inner cusp to pm. 3, by the absence of the third cusp on the hinder lobe of m. 3, and by the presence of a diastema between pm. 2 and pm. 3, The species is of small size, the length of the space occupied by the three true molars being 0-011. The generic distinctness of this form may perhaps be doubted. The following table indicates the chief characters of the eight species mentioned above. 1 Ann. Sci. Géol. vol. viii. art. 1, p. 212, pl. xii. pl. xii. figs. 269-70 (1877). 2 Tbid. p. 212, pl. xii. figs. 275-8. 3 Ibid. p. 208, pl. xii. figs. 271-4. 4 Ibid. p. 430, pl. xix. figs. 314-16. 5 Ibid. vol. x, art. 3, p. 213, pl. xxviii, ; Ibid. p. 226, pl. xxix. 7 Tbid.p. 240, Lbid. vol. xi. pl. 1, fig. 13 (1881). Lbinl. vol. xii. art 8, pp. 77-84, pl. xi. pp. 53-9 (1882). From specimens in the British Museum the writer is inclined to think that 0. cadurcense and C, gracile may be identical. Filhol regards them as very closely related. #0 Aun, Soc. Sci. Phys. Nat, Toulouse, 1882, pp. 128-30, 9 64 R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammalia. Cenotherium, 3 cusps on the hinder lobe of m. 3, No diastema. 1, Cenotherium laticurvatum, St. Gérand-le-Puy. 2. Cenotherium commune, Cournon, and Quercy Phosphorites. 3. Cenotherium Geoffroyi, St. Gérand-le-Puy. 4. Cenotherium elongatum, Quercy Phosphorites. A diastema usually present between pm. 1 and pm. 2 in both jaws (maxilla unknown in No. 6). | 5. Cenotherium cadurcense, Quercy Phosphorites. 6. Cenotherium gracile, St. Gérand-le-Puy, and Ronzon. A diastema between pm. 2 and pm. 3 (mawilla unknown). 7. Caenotherium quinquedentatum, Quercy Phosphorites, Mouillactherium, 2 cusps on the hinder lobe of m. 8, A diastema between pm. 2 and pm. 3 (lower jaw unknown). 8. Mowillactherinm elegans, Quercy Phosphorites, It will be observed that Nos. 7 and 8 agree in the position of the diastema, and, although the latter is a larger species, their generic identity may perhaps be indicated by this character. Fic. 1. Cenot the Upper Eocene of Caylux. +. (B. M. No. 1399). Among a collection of fossils from the Quercy Phosphorites recently acquired by the British Museum, are two skulls of a species belong- ing to the present group, remarkable for their fine preservation, and on this account alone worthy of description. Both specimens are from Caylux (Tarn et Garonne). The first, which is represented in Figure 1, consists of the cranium only, and is almost as perfect as a R. Lydekker —On Fossil Mammatia. 65 recent skull. The only loss which it has sustained is a portion of the right zygomatic arch; part of the posterior border of the left orbit ; “the right outer incisor and canine; and the left inner incisor and the first premolar. ‘The cheek- teeth belong to the permanent series, and are but slightly worn. The extreme ‘Jength of the upper surface of the skull is 0-081, which is practically the same as in the type of C. laticurvatum (0-0815), although some specimens of the latter (var. metopias) are larger. The present specimen differs, how- ever, from that species by the presence of a distinct diastema; which is situated between the canine and pm. 1, instead of between the earlier premolars,’ as in the so-called /lesiomeryx. In this respect, therefore, the skull under consideration differs from the first seven species named above. It differs, moreover, in another very important point. In C. laticurvatum (which as already said is the only species which agrees in size with the present specimen), the nasals are long, narrow, convex bones, wider in front than behind, terminating anteriorly in a notch, and having a depression at their junction with the frontals. In the present specimen the nasals are very short, quite flat, and the two together form an oval, terminating anteriorly in an acute point. There is no depression in the frontal at the junction of these bones, neither are the frontal sulci as conspicuous as in C. laticurvatum. In all the other species of which the cranium is known, the nasals are long and terminate anteriorly in a notch. C. elongatum (in which there is no diastema) and C. cadurcense agree with the present specimen in having indistinct frontal sulci, and no depression at the root of the nasals. ‘The present specimen agrees with the much smaller last-named species, and C. commune, in having the anterior border of the posterior nares situated on the line dividing ™. 1 and m. 2. The figures of the crania of the above-mentioned species do not show the other cranial sutures. In the present specimen the premaxille extend upwards to articulate with the frontals. The lachrymal has a small facial, and a large orbital portion. The facial vacuity is narrow and long. ‘The frontal portion of the cranium is- flat; the sagittal crest well developed; and the profile much less arcuated than in C. laticurvatum. The squamosals extend high up on the temporal fossee; and the auditory bulle are of very large size. There is a minute inner cusp to Pm. 2, which seems wanting in other forms: the inner cusp of pm. 3 is rather larger than in C. laticurva- tum, and apparently comes near to Mouwillactherium. There is no diastema between any of the premolars, and the hind lobe of m. 3 has three cusps. The second specimen (Fig. 2) is a good deal crushed and broken, but is very important in having the mandible attached to it. This cranium has nasals similar to the last, a diastema between the canine and pm. L, and may, therefore, be referred to the same species as the last ; its somewhat smaller size indicates that it probably belonged to a female. The lower dental series shows a diastema occurring between pm. 1 and pm. 2; as is usually the case in the species Nos. 5 and 6 1 Ttis assumed that in C. gracile the diastema has the same position as in C. cadurcense. DECADE III. —VOL. 11.—No. It. 5 66 R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammata. in the foregoing list. The mandible of C. cadurcense is smaller than the present specimen; that of C. quinquedentatum* is still smaller ; and the same may be said of C. grucile.? In those forms which have Fic. 2. Cenotherium Filholi, Lyd. The right lateral aspect of the cranium and mandible, from the Upper Eocene of Caylux. +. (B. M., No. M. 1440). no diastema, the mandible of C. laticurvatum® has a much larger descending process at the angle; that of C. commune* is deeper posteriorly ; and that of C. elongatum® has the inferior border in advance of the angle highly arcuated in place of nearly straight. The foregoing comparisons indicate the distinctness of the present from all the seven species of Caenotherium recognized by Dr. Filhol. A number of other species have indeed been named, but mostly on insufficient specimens. The so-called C. Courtoisi, Gervais,® is much smaller than the present specimen, and together with Piclet’s C. Reneviert is referred by Kowalevsky (Phil. Trans., 1873, p. 25) to Hyopotamus. C. collotarsum" is founded on specimens which do not prove its distinctness from other forms. The part of the cranium of Meyer’s Microtheriwm figured by Gervais in the “Zool. et Pal. Francaises”’ (2nd ed. pl. xxxiv. p. 7), seems to belong to C. laticurvatum. From DMouillactherium elegans the present form is distinguished by its superior size, by the absence of a diastema between pm. 2 and pm. 3, and by the presence of a third cusp on the hinder lobe of m. 3; it seems, however, to be allied to that form by the large development of the inner cusp of pm. 8. Seeing, therefore, that the present form is markedly distinct from all those species of Canotherium which are described upon sufli- ciently perfect specimens, and as it cannot be identified with any of the imperfectly known forms or with J/owllactherium elegans, it seems permissible to give it at least a provisional new specific name ; and that of Filholi is proposed, in honour of the describer of so many of the Quercy vertebrates. The writer proposes to place 1 Ann. Sci. Géol. vol. viii. pl. xix. figs. 314-6. 2 Thid. vol. xi, pl. i. g.3; vol. xii. pl. xi. fig. 58. 3 Ibid. fig. 7. Thid. vol. viii. pl. xii. figs. 269-70, 5 Tid. fig. 276. 6 Zool. et Pal. Frang. 2nd ed. p. 162. 1 Thid. kh. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammatia. 67 the species in the type genus; but if the genus Plesiomeryx be maintained, it would seem necessary to form another genus for the present form, as the position of the diastema is different from that which occurs in the species of Plesiomeryx of which the skull is known, or in Mouillactherium. The following table gives the dimensions of the skulls of C. Filholt and a typical skull of C. laticurvatum. C. Filhol. C. laticur- Nowe No, vatum. 399 1400 Cranium.—Extreme length superiorly ..... sae MORN 66 OAS a ONOBE interiorly ...... .. 0067 .. 0064 .. 0-070 Length of series of cheek-teeth.... 0-032 .. 0-031 .. 0-037 true molars.... 0°0144 .. 0:01438 .. 0°0175 99 Width of palate atm. 3.......... 0-014... a OROMS Length of nasals ..... boc0000 S000 OMNI 56 Wot so WWE Greatest width of do. ..... soonoon OrdOls} 2. 00070 0°906 Height of occiput ..... Sa ar aes 0°015~—w.zj .. 0:016 Extreme height of cranium ...... 033° o- .. 0°033 Vertical diameter of orbit ..... sso . WeMilé so 6MOIB=—— 4 Ole Length of diastema ....... ssooo OWMUR, so Ordos Mandible.—Extreme length ...............46> eatstenecneins _ OH 5, OWay ” height BIOOUIOICIOIOIGIIOIG eo beer ce ceoee ORO Sri .. 0°043 Length of dental series ...... 50.0600 600005000 o OUR 5, Oey ar last six teeth ....... Dee yarie eieeue ates 0:030 36... 0084 Jalenalnn Gi oth, B 36555 q0000 Cae Ae ae . 0007 .. 0-005 ” WM 3 aAooooe BORO CAS CRIPPS OTC . 0:013 .» O-017 Length of diastema ..... Sal eulesevvew ctorsisvecosebetee .. 0°0026 CHNOTHERIUM sp. (? nov.) From the Quercy Phosphorites. The anterior portion of a third cranium from Caylux, which is figured from the palatal aspect in woodcut Fig. 3, apparently indicates a new variety or species. With the excep- tion of the third incisor, the specimen shows the complete dentition on the left side; and also the orbit and the anterior root of the left zygomatic arch. The premaxilla and frontal of the same side also remain; but the nasals have disappeared, although a cast of their inner surface remains. The dentition is of the type of the last species ; that is, there is a diastema between the canine and pm. 1; and in no other part. This character at once distinguishes the specimen from the first four species of Cenotherium mentioned in the list given above: and the specimen is of considerably larger size than either of the last three Sera : Fic. 3. Cenotherium, sp. species in that list. From C. Filholi it is The palatal portion of the distinguished by the much smaller space cranium: trom the Upper occupied by the cheek-teeth; and also by £0cen® Gi CEES ee (Ale A M. 1401. the circumstance that the nasals (as shown ) by their cast) are of the elongated type of C. commune; terminating anteriorly in a notch, and with their lateral borders diverging 68 R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammalia. regularly outwards from their roots. The frontals seem to have been flat, without any depression at the junction with the nasals ; and the premaxille extend upwards to articulate with the frontals. The form of the palate is very like that of C. commune; but the interval between m. 1 and the incisors is much less, and the incisors and canine are considerably larger. In Fig. 4 there is represented the left ramus of the mandible, im- perfect posteriorly, of a Cceno- therium, from Caylux, which from its size and general charac- ters may very probably be re- ferred to the same species as the cranium just described. It is of considerably smaller size than the mandible of C. Filholi, but agrees in having a distinct dias- tema between pm. 1 and pm. 2. Fic. 4. Cenotherium, sp. The left Jt is much larger than the man- ramus of the mandible, imperfect pos- : E teriorly: from the Upper Eocene of dible of C. quinquedentatum and Caylux. 3. (B.M. No. M. 1401, a.) C. gracile; and is also larger than that of C. cadurcense, “in which the length of the s space occupied by the last six cheek-teeth is only 0:0215. The following are the dimensions of the cranium and mandible. Cranium.—Length of series of cheek-teeth............ 0:928 A unuenmolansyaevereteieieinecers 0:013 Greatest width of nasals (anteriorly) ...... 00052 Vertical diameter OLMOEDIG eee eee eee 0:0125 ILenetin oi CheRWENNE) 5655 600000000000 a000 0-002 Mandible. — Extreme Remerthht ..,5 dicta, efahe,aisvepaielarerenerorora inns 0-044 At height slaforayelobsienerensnaerednrelehelvsasteretere 0:027 Weng chkotdental tsericsmeem errr tee ree isatets 0-088 Nast six teeth we yc ee.ae aa creseaeer 0:0248 Height LUPINE 2 eyevaerecerears eyatenesleteRerele erates 0:0065 TH Ourz anal deerro wrlern metloreots 0:0838 Length Ofxdiastemiawy ay eysiinekty Aero 0:0021 From the foregoing comparisons it is quite evident that the cranium mentioned above is specifically distinct from C. Filholi; and it cannot be identified with Mowillactherium (from which it is distinguished by the two structural characters noted in the case of C. Filholt) ; or with the so-called C. Courtoisi, or C. collotarsum. It differs from all the seven species of Cenotherium recognized by Dr. Filbol from the Cournon, St. Gérand-le-Puy, and Quercy beds; but its resemblance to C. commune is sufficiently close to suggest the question whether it might not be the male form of that species. Against this view there is, in the first place, the circumstance that the palate is shorter than in C. commune; and in the second place, that among the very numerous crania of that species from Cournon none present the characters of the present form; but are all (where the teeth are fully developed) characterized by the total absence of a diastema in both jaws. The case of the two varieties of C. gracile noticed above indicates, R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammatia. 69 however, the need of caution in founding new species merely on the presence or absence of a diastema. Under these circumstances it appears desirable to await additional specimens before deciding whether the present specimens should be regarded as a new species, or merely as a well-marked variety. The name Bravardi, either as a specific, or a varietal one, may eventually be appropriately applied to this form. AnTHRACOTHERIUM Gresstyi (H. v. Meyer). From the Headon beds of Hordwell. Tn the year 1846, the late Hermann von Meyer (Neues Jahrbuch, p- 471) briefly described some mammalian teeth from the siderolithes of Egerkingen, Canton Solothurn, Switzerland, under the name of Tapinodon Gresslyi. In 1862 Professor Riitimeyer (Denkschr. schw. nat. Ges., vol. xix. art. 3, p. 70, pl. v. figs. 64-67), described and fizured the three associated upper true molars, and the second and third lower true molars, of a small mammal from the same deposits, which he identified with Meyer’s Tapinodon Gresslyi, but referred to the genus Hyopotamus, under the name of H. Gresslyi (Myr.). Among the collection made by the late Marchioness of Hastings from the Headon beds of Hordwell, Hampshire, and now in the British Museum, there is the cranium (No. 29,851), and a mandible (No. 29,713), probably belonging to the same individul, and certainly to the same species, of a small mammal, the teeth of which agree precisely with those figured by Riitimeyer under the name of Hyopotamus Gresslyi. The Hordwell specimens may, therefore, be referred to that species. Fic. 5. Anthracotherium Gresslyi (Meyer). The left half of the palate and the upper cheek-dentition ; from the upper Eocene of Hordwell. (B.M. No. 29,851.) at The Hordwell cranium has been so much crushed and broken that it has not been deemed desirable to give a figure of its upper surface; but the left side of the inferior surface and the cheek- dentition are figured in the accompanying woodcut (Fig. 5). The cheek-series comprises six approximated teeth, and one tooth (pm. 1) 70 R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammalia. separated by a long diastema from the rest. The six approximated teeth are the last three premolars, and the three molars; the latter being in a partially worn condition, which indicates the fully adult condition of the specimen. The dentition is essentially brachydont, and it will suffice to say that the last six teeth agree precisely in form with those of typical species of Anthracotherium, and are in fact miniatures of those of some of the larger species of that genus.’ The true molars differ in toto from those of typical species of Hyopo- tamus, like H. bovinus ; although they approach those of some of the aberrant species like HZ. porcinus.? The second premolar (pm. 2) has a compressed simple crown; pm. 3 has a triangular crown; and pm. £has a distinct inner and outer column. These teeth are pre- cisely like those of Anthracotherium, and differ slightly from those of the typical forms of Hyopotamus.* The isolated tooth (pm. 1) has a compressed conical crown, and is inserted by two distinct fangs, whence if may be regarded as the first premolar; from its relation to the nasals it was probably situated but a short distance behind the canine. In the larger species of Anthracotherium, the first premolar is either in contact with pm. 2," or is separated by a comparatively small interval,° but the complete dental series of some of the smaller forms like A. breviceps® is not known. In the typical species of Hyopotamus’ there is a long diastema between pm. 1 and pm. 2, but there is a still longer one between the former and thecanine. In Cheropotamus parisiensis® there is a long diastema between pm. 1 and pm. 2; although this is proportionately smaller than in the present specimen, and the first premolar is relatively larger. The true molars of Cheropotamus are, however, readily distinguished by their more bunodont structure from the decidedly selenodont teeth of the present form. The crushed condition of the cranium admits of but little accurate observation. As in the Anthracotheriide in general, there is no tympanic bulla; the orbits are well defined, although incomplete posteriorly ; there is a strong sagittal crest ; and the nasals are relatively long. The occiput is like that of dAnthra- cotherium and Hyopotamus. The anterior border of the posterior nares is situated a considerable distance behind m. 3; which is a character found in Anthracotherium dalmatinum,’ and not in any of the typical species of Hyopotamus.” The lower jaw shows both rami of the mandible, which have however been disassociated. The right ramus and the dentition are 1 Compare Anthracotherium illyricum, Teller, Beitr. Pal. Oest. Ungar. vol. iy. pt. i. pl. xi. 2 Vide supra, vol. i. p. 547 (1884). 3 Vide Filhol, Ann. Sci Géol., vol. xii. pls. xv-xix. 4 A. illyricum, Teller, op. ce 5 A. alsaticum. Vide Filhol, Ann. Sci. Géol. vol. viii. pl. viii. (1877). & Vide Bottger “ Palecontographica,”” vol. xxiv. pt. d, pp. 163-173. 7 Vide Filhol, Ann. Sci. Géol. vol. xii. pls. xv-xix. 8 Gervais, Zool. et Pal. Francaises, 2nd ed. pl. xxxii. fig. 1. ° Teller, op. cit pl. xiv. Prof. Teller refers this species to a separate genus— Prominatherium ; but the present writer prefers to continue to refer it to Anthra- cotherium. 10 Filhol, Zoe. cit. R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammata. (o represented in the accompanying woodcut (Fig. 6). This ramus is complete, with the exception of the symphysis. In general form it resembles the mandible of Hyopotamus,! and of certain species of Anthracotherium, e.g. A. hippoidenm, Riitimeyer.? There are six cheek-teeth in apposition, in advance of which there is a long diastema, and then the broken base of a tooth which is doubtless the canine. The three true molars correspond exactly with the Egerkingen teeth figured by Professor Riitimeyer, and are of a brachydont type, with an imperfect selenodont structure, and having a small tubercle at the entrance to the external valleys. The general structure of these teeth is very similar to that found in Anthraco- iherium hippoideum, and they are more brachydont than in typical species of Hyopotamus. The fourth premolar has fore-and-aft talons, with a large inner cusp; the latter being found of smaller size in some species of Hyopotamus and Anthracothertum. The third and second premolars have compressed conical crowns, with very minute talons ; and are each inserted by two roots. There is no trace of the first premolar. Fie. 6. Anthracotherium Gresslyi (Meyer). The right ramus of the mandible, and the lower dentition. (B.M. No. 29713.) +. In the described species of Anthracotherium (e.g. A. hippoideum) the first premolar is usually situated in the middle of a short diastema occurring between pm. 2 and the canine; and in Hyopo- tamus, pm. 1 is frequently situated very close to the canine, and falls out at an early period of life. The lower jaw under consideration evidently belongs to a specialized form, whose molar teeth agree with those of Anthracotherium, and the brachydont species of Hyopotamus (e.g. H. porcinus). 1 Thid. pl. xxi. 2 Denkschr. schw. nat. Ges. vol. xv. art. 8, pl. i. (1857). 72 R. Lydekker—On Fossil Mammalia. The following table shows the chief dimensions of the specimen. Cranium.—Height from lower border of foramen magnum to summit of occiput ....... Oaagdaco indo dane GOOD OOE fhe tes) 1070384 Length from lower border of foramen magnum to pm. 1. 0°117 Length of space occupied by last six cheek-teeth ...... 0°047 ” ” 3 true molars ..... poadeoD 0°0265 », diastema between pm. 1 and pm. 2.......... 0:0205 » %M, Cee Oa cc oo eifeifais) urevenataleleifeln/alfelselivieyis\'et vie ts)'s 0:0095 Width aii amenpeabists «favs FoGadeoaUO GbooC doo 0oeanar a ee OsOe2: WEG CAA rane AEN” Sonoacacaconooondasd oouode nanonar . 07114 35 NES eri COMOMONG! OEEIS) Gada s sac5a0 oobne 0-052 IDO BiH WS Bo ddagnanaged oxooKonr oo5004000000 0000.) WOLY 5 PUL 2h Op RS AR) a, cise Seieostevetetons INS Oe css eoroten 0°015 Length of space occupied by six cheek-teeth .......... 0:052 nn Bs ae 3) true molars! os. se. etait 0:030 9 MN Ne arre osece O0da00 cdn0 OnDD DG ODUDDDDGNDDS 00085 90 Wi B socoogogcdo0 060000 O1g,00100 64.0:0,006 scooo OxNDsi7 aS MIDSHii releVe tore rerrotahareroretetene urarevstenueersvemerenereiartatare . 0-018 Width ysni wees od odooane Moleeere apon00000 B00000 0-008 The foregoing comparisons indicate pretty conclusively that the Hordwell fossil as regards dental characters comes nearer to Anthra- cotherium than to Hyopotamus,' and although the differences from typical forms of the first-named genus would doubtless be regarded by some paleeontologists as of generic value, the writer being strongly opposed to the multiplication of genera is inclined to refer it to that genus, and it may accordingly be known as A. Gresslyi (Meyer). A. Gresslyi must be regarded as a highly specialized species of Anthracotherium, bearing the same relation to typical species of the genus, as the so-called genera Plesiomeryw and Xiphodontherium re- spectively do to the genera Cenotherium and Xiphodon, in which the writer is disposed to include them. The addition of this species to the English Upper Eocene fauna is important, as it affords another instance of the intimate relations existing between the English and Continental Tertiary faunas. It also leads to the conclusion that the Egerkingen beds are closely related in time to the Headon series of Hordwell. The former beds are classed by Dr. Max Schlosser * immediately above the Paris Gypsum ; while Professor Gaudry* places a part of them below the Calcaire Grossier. The reference of the present species to Anthracotherium instead of to Hyopotamus, renders it necessary that T’apinodon should for the future be regarded as a synonym of the former, instead. of the latter genus. CHHROMERYX SILISTRENSIS (Pentland). From the Siwaliks of India. In the Palzontologia Indica (ser. 10, vol. ii. pp. 149 166) the writer 1 The circumstance that Anthracotherium and Hyopotamus pass into one another (see Grou. Mac. 1884, Decade III. Vol. I. p. 548) does not affect the present species, as its upper molars are of the typical Anthracotherium type. 2 Paleontographica, vol. xxxi. p. 96 (1884). The writer has recently found that Adapis mugna, Filhol, of the Upper Eocene of the Continent, occurs at Hordwell. 3 Les Enchainements, etc., Mam. Tert. p. 4. Prof. G. A. Lebour—Posidonomya Becheri at Bude. 73 has shown that the name Cheromerysx silistrensis should be applied to the specimen from the Garo Hills figured by Falconer and Cautley, under the name of Anthracotherium silistrense, in the “ Fauna Antiqua Sivalensis” (pl. lxviii. figs. 22,22a). Atthe time of writing that notice no trace of the specimen, which consists of a fragment of the right maxilla! could be found; and judging from the figure, and a cast (which now appears very inexact), he was under the impression that it contained three teeth which were considered as the true molars. The original specimen has recently been found in the British Museum (No. 19040) ; and it really contains only two teeth, which are respectively the third and fourth milk-molars. A comparison of the fourth milk-molar of this specimen with an upper true molar from Sind which is figured in the “ Paleontologia Indica” (op. cit. pl. xxiii. fig. 11), under the name of Sivameryx sindiensis, shows that the two are certainly generically, and very probably specifically the same; the slight differences between the two being not improbably merely due to difference of serial position. The figurein the F. A. 8. does not exhibit very clearly some of the characteristic features of the Garo Hills specimen; and from this, coupled with the reference of the teeth of this specimen to the permanent instead of the milk- series, the two specimens were referred to distinct genera. It follows from the above that the genus Sivameryx must be abolished. Cheromeryx has been previously placed in the neighbour- hood of Merycopotamus, but a recent comparison with specimens in the British Museum renders it probable that its affinities are rather with Dichodon. The occurrence of Cheromeryx and Anthracotherium silistrense in Sind and the Garo Hills renders it probable that at least a part of the Siwaliks of the latter district correspond to the lower division of that series. TV.—Nore on tHE Posmonouya Becuert Bups or Bupie (NoRTHUMBERLAND), WITH REMARKS ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES. By G. A. Lzzour, M.A., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in the Durham College of Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. UDLE BAY, on the coast of Northumberland, between Holy Island and Bamburgh, is the estuary of the little river Waren. The rocks of the country belong to the Bernician Series or, in other words, to the alternating grits, limestones, shales, and coals which in northernmost England represent the Carboniferous Limestone Series. The northern shore of the Bay is a broad expanse of sand stretching as far as Fenham Flats and Holy Island, but the southern is rocky though not lofty. The Great Whin Sill (the well-known intrusive sheet of Basalt*) is present here, and the late Mr. G. Tate of Alnwick has more than once described it as it occurs here, asso- ciated with the beds which form the subject of this note. In 1872 1 The figure in the F. A. S. is reversed. ; * Or Diubase, as Mr. Teall tells me I had better now call it. 74 ~~ Prof. G. A. Lebour —Posidonomya Becheri at Budle. he wrote: “At Budle the basalt is nearly connected with an indu- rated, jointed, red shale (containing Posidonomya Becheri, etc.), which overlies a limestone; for the basalt is in the hill a little above the schist, and on the sea-shore to the east; so that the jointed and indurated condition of the schist is probably due to the action of the Basalt.” } As early as 1855, however, Mr. Tate had called attention to the occurrence of the fossil in question. In his Presidential Address to the Berwickshire Club on the 7th of September of that year, he alluded to the “Budle schists . . . filled with rare and beautiful remains of fossil plants and animals belonging to the Carboniferous era.”” Ina similar address delivered in 1864, by Mr. Wm. Steven- son of Dunse, the then President of the Club, is the following passage, which I believe was at least inspired by Mr. Tate: ‘ Pro- ceeding onwards to Budle Bay, the well-known Posidonia shales were examined with much interest. These shales of a reddish brown colour, abounding in the shells of the fragile Posidonia, asso- ciated with the remains of a few land plants, have evidently been deposited in the still brackish waters of an ancient lagoon or estuary, little disturbed by tidal action.” 3 The above quotations, which, considering the scarcity of the back volumes of the Berwickshire Transactions, I make no excuse for giving in full, comprise about all that can be said in the way of description as to the Budle Shales. They are red, rather hard, and much jointed ; they contain numerous plant remains in the form of drifted narrow ribbon-shaped leaves, showing little or no structure, and not easy to determine; but the most interesting fossil is un- doubtedly the Posidonomya, which gives its name to the beds in which it occurs. The specimens are abundant; but, owing to the way in which the shale breaks up, it is somewhat difficult to obtain good specimens. With this shell are species of Lingula, Spirifer, Chonetes, Orthis and Euomphalus; LZ. mytiloides, Sp. bisulcatus, O. Michelini, Eu. pentangulatus being the commonest. Other fossils occur; among them I have found a Bellerophon, a Phillipsia (tail only) and some Polyzoa, whilst one Gonatites (G. atratus, Goldf.) is recorded by Mr. Tate; but with the exception of a Fenestella, these are all rare. Corals and Crinoids are conspicuous by their absence, and after many searches, I have never seen but one specimen of the otherwise ubiquitous genus Productus, and that was Pr. jimbriatus, by no means a common Northumbrian form. Mr. Tate placed the horizon of these shales rather low down in his “ Caleareous Group ” of the Carboniferous Limestone Series of Northumberland, between the two beds of limestone known locally as the Stone Close or Five-Yard and the Hobberlaw or Four-Yard 1 See G. Tate on ‘‘ The Basaltic Rocks of Northumberland,”’ Berwickshire Natu- ralists’ Transactions, 1872, p. 200. 2 Berwickshire Transactions, vol. iii. 1857. * Berwickshire Transactions, vol. v. p. 104. See also Baker and Tate’s “ New Flora of Northumberland and Durham,” 1868, p. 10; and Tate’s “ History of Alnwick,’’ vol. ii. 1869, pp. 454, 455, and 457. Prof. G. A. Lebour—Posidonomya Becheri at Budle. 79 limestone. This is a point of much difficulty, owing to the faulted condition of the series in the Bamburgh and Budle district, and more especially to the presence of that disturbing element the Great Whin Sill, which there runs in and out among the sedimentary deposits in a very bewildering manner. In 1878, I hazarded the following statement on the subject:—‘The interesting fossil Posidonomya Becheri occurs at Budle and in the neighbourhood of Alnwick, and appears to be confined to the Upper Bernician Series. Its exact horizon is doubtful.” * I am not in a position to add anything to this statement; but the exact horizon is certainly within the limits of the Bernician, probably in its upper portion, and will be known as soon as the results of my friend Mr. W. Gunn’s work on the Government Geological Survey of the district are published. At any rate the beds under discussion are some thousands of feet above the Tuedian. The other localities in the North for Posidonomya Becheri are the Cawledge Burn near Alnwick, where it was found by Mr. Tate; a small quarry near Denwick (also in the neighbourhood of Alnwick) where Mr. Topley, I believe, first saw it, and where I have myself gathered it; and lastly at Lowick, where the late Rev. Mr. Jenkinson collected it. All these localities are in the Upper Bernician. The range of Posidonomya Becheri is a subject of great interest. Wherever the Carboniferous Limestone series puts on a shaly facies, there it seems to be present. Many years ago I had the pleasure of seeing specimens of that and another species of the same genus from the shales of Lower Carboniferous age of Western Scotland in the collections of Messrs. James Thomson and Armstrong in Glasgow. Then come the Northumbrian Bernician shales, and next the Devon- shire Culm shales with Posidonomya as described by Dr. Woodward and Mr. J. E. Lee, to the latter of whom I am indebted for beautiful specimens in a shale wonderfully similar in aspect to that of Budle. On the Continent wherever the Bergkalk gives place to the Kulm— in other words, wherever the Lower Carboniferous sea was shallow and had a muddy instead of a limy bottom, there Posidonomya Becheri invariably appears, as Dr. Ferd. Roemer and others have so well shown. I have lying before me a little collection of Posidonomye from Silesia, Nassau, and Portugal due chiefly to Dr. Roemer’s kind- ness and including a beautiful specimen quite recently brought from the slaty beds in Southern Spain in which the great Rio Tinto mines are situated, and presented to this College by Mr. David Tyzack. All these specimens, altogether from some fifty places representing a vast extent of country, are absolutely indistinguishable except as to the degree of alteration which the shales containing them have undergone; and the occasional fossils of other kinds which are visible on the slabs are likewise very similar, the presence of long ribbon-like leaves of plants being remarkably general. It is perhaps not possible to dogmatize yet as to the limits of the vertical range of Posidonomya Becheri. I have paid a good deal of 1 Lebour’s ‘‘ Outlines of the Geology of Northumberland,”’ (1878), p. 68. 76 =Prof. T. G. Bonney—The Enstatitic Lavas of Eycott Hill. attention to the subject, and cannot find any limits (taking all Hurope into consideration) to its range within the Lower Carboniferous rocks. In England, however, it has never yet been recorded from beds of Tuedian age, nor, taking into account the nature of the Tuedian deposits, is it very likely that it may ever be found in them. V.—On tHE OccurRENCcE oF A Minera Atiisp tv ENSTATITE In THE AncreNT Lavas or Hycotr Hiin, CumMBERLAND. By Professor T. G. Bonney, D.Sc. LL.D., F.R.S., Pres. G.S. HIS interesting series of ancient volcanic rocks is described by the late Mr. Clifton Ward in a paper on the Microscopic Struc- ture of Ancient and Modern Volcanic Rocks, read before the Geological Society,’ in a Memoir of the Geological Survey on the Lake District, and, in greater detail, in a communication to the Royal Microscopical Society.? All these are illustrated by figures (in no case very good) and some chemical analyses are given in the last- named paper. J went to the hill in the autumn of 1874 and collected a few specimens, but my visit was cut short by heavy rain. A few weeks since Mr. J. Postlethwaite of Keswick, to whose kind- ness I have been more than once indebted for additions to my collection, forwarded to me three specimens from LHycott Hill, thinking that I might not have any rocks therefrom, and called my . attention to the peculiar reddish tint of the felspar in one of them, which, as he remarked, ‘‘resembled the colour of a garnet.” These were varieties of the well-known porphyritic lava of Hycott Hill, which is described by Mr. Ward as the second lava bed in ascending order, and as being above 100 feet thick. This specimen was obtained from a boulder on the hill. On examining it and com- paring it with my own (at which I had not looked for some years), I was struck with the appearance of the ground-mass, which seemed to me unusually compact and more like that of an augite-andesite, than of a dolerite or diabase, as the rock is named by Mr. Ward. I had a slide prepared by Mr. Cuttell from Mr. Postlethwaite’s specimen, in which I first discovered the mineral which is described in this note, and have since had some more cut from my own speci- mens from Hycott and others subsequently sent by him, and (for comparison) from the lavas of Falcon Crag near Derwentwater. The Eycott rock is described by Mr. Ward as having “a compact greenish-blue base, containing dark green spots of a soft mineral and large porphyritically imbedded felspar crystals, many of them an inch long. . . . . The top of this lava is beautifully vesicular in parts, the vesicles being drawn out along the line of flow and filled with chlorite, chalcedony, and calcite.” The “dark green spots” I may add generally do not exceed ‘1 inch in diameter, and I should be disposed to call the base a dark “slate” colour, commonly with a greenish tinge (slightly purplish in Mr. Postlethwaite’s specimen), rather than a “greenish-blue”; the felspar crystals are in the normal specimens a greyish olive-green. 1 Q.J.G.S. vol. xxxi. p. 406. * Monthly Microsc. Journal, 1877, p. 239. Prof. T. G. Bonney—The Enstatitic Lavas of Eycott Hill. 77 The felspar crystals, with the above described greenish spots, and some grains of iron oxide, belong to an earlier stage of consolidation, or, possibly one should say, of crystal-building. As Mr. Ward points out, they cannot have been separated out of the mass when it flowed asa lava. I have little to add to his careful description, except that I believe these felspars to be labradorite, and doubt the possibility of any of them being orthoclase. In Mr. Postlethwaite’s specimen a few scales of iron-glance are scattered about in the felspar crystals, but not in such numbers as one would expect from their ruddy tint before being sliced. The soft dark spots are regarded by Mr. Ward as pseudomorphs in many cases after augite, and some, he says, “‘seem to be after olivine, presenting the form and much-fissured appearance of that mineral. I have detected grains of olivine in an unaltered condition in some of these lavas, and therefore think there can be no doubt that both it and augite were common constituents at one time, though both have been so much replaced by pseudo- morphous minerals through subsequent alteration.” It is of course quite possible that my lamented friend may have detected olivine in some of the upper lavas, which I have not examined; but I think he has erred in his reference of these dark green spots either to augite or olivine, as will be seen from the following description. But I do not in the least doubt the presence of moderate-sized crystals of augite, which however seems to be always in fair if not good pre- servation, in addition to that which occurs in the ground-mass. The mineral of which we speak is obviously a magnesian silicate, which has generally been converted, since the consolidation of the rock, into a kind of serpentine. In form it is usually a rather irregular oblong, about -twice as long as it is broad, with a slightly worn or corroded aspect at its edges; and it is very commonly bordered by clustered opacite, as is frequent with hornblende and mica in anandesite. Hence the external crystalline form is generally not well defined. There is one well-marked cleavage parallel with the longer sides of the grain, with, I think, an indication of a second, which makes a large, if not a right angle with the other, and possibly a third; but these are often only suggested by the presence of rather irregular cracks, so that it is not possible to be certain about them. Indications of a fibrous structure, parallel with the dominant cleavage, may also be observed. With transmitted light the usual colour is a pale sap-green, but sometimes the inner, sometimes the outer part of the crystal is slightly browner. The mineral has evidently under- gone alteration, but in one crystal a portion remains apparently unchanged, and this is of a pale greenish straw colour. All exhibit a fairly well-marked dichroism. When the principal cleavage lines are parallel with the vibration plane of the lower Nicol, the tint 1s a pale sap-green; when perpendicular, it is a pale yellowish-green. With crossed Nicols, extinction takes place when the dominant cleavage lines are parallel with either vibration plane; when they are at an angle of 45° with these, the colour in the unaltered part is a straw-yellow, the tints in the altered parts being paler, and such as are usual with serpentinous minerals. I notice that the browner 78 Prof. T. G. Bonney—The Enstatitic Lavas of Eycott Hill. and greener parts mentioned above do not extinguish simultaneously. The mineral contains a few scales of iron-glance and some light brown granular endomorphs, which occur also in the ground-mass! but is generally rather free from inclusions. Obviously we have here a magnesian silicate containing some iron, which is more or less converted into a kind of serpentine. Clearly it is not olivine, neither is it normal bastite. It does not correspond with hypersthene, especially with the small crystals of that mineral which have of late been noticed in so many andesites. Its general aspect agrees with that of some of the more or less altered enstatites and bronzites with which I am familiar from my studies of serpentines, and it reminds me also of the representations given of altered enstatite and of so-called bastite by Fouqué and Lévy (Mineralgie Microscop. Roches Eruptives Francaises, plates xxvii., liii., and liv.) The ground-mass, in which the above-described minerals are embedded, consists of lath-like crystallites of plagioclase felspar, of grains and imperfectly developed little crystals of augite, and of crystals and granules of iron-oxide, which probably is mostly hematite. There are occasional scales of iron-glance. These are thickly set in a brown glass-like base. This when examined with objectives of fairly high power—say from + to 4 of an inch—becomes paler and greyer in colour, and is found to be crowded with dark granules and blackish belonites, which are sometimes slightly curved. These occasionally seem to interlace so as to form a kind of network. Similar microliths, but with a brush-like grouping, are figured by Rosenbusch in a hydrotachylite* (Microscop. Physiograph. vol. i. plate ii.). These belonites occur in the slide prepared from Mr, Postlethwaite’s specimen; in that from a specimen collected by my- self they are, if not absent, exceedingly rare. The general character, however, of the ground-mass of the latter corresponds with that of the former. So far as I can ascertain, the base is still a true glass, and has not undergone devitrification. After I had informed Mr. Postlethwaite of the result of my examination of his first specimen, he again visited Hycott Hill, for- warding to me fresh fragments of the redder variety broken from the rock in situ, and then a block, also obtained in situ, which exhibited a passage from that variety to the normal rock. I have had a slide cut from the extreme parts of this, for the transition from the one tint to the other is too gradual to offer anything like a junction. The two slides when examined under the microscope are almost identical, the only difference being that in the redder variety small scales of burnt-sienna coloured iron-glance are more numerous, and in its ground-mass the dark belonites are more frequent than in the normal rock. Also J think that the base of the former, when viewed with a low power, is a shade browner than that of the latter. The description given above serves as a whole for these slides also, Hach, 1 They are not isotropic. Probably they are alteration products, possibly ferruginous. They often occur in somewhat altered igneous rocks. 2 Similar needles are figured by Prof. Judd and Mr. Cole in their admirable paper on the Basalt Glass of the Western Isles of Scotland, Q.J.G.S, vol. xxxix. p, 444, Prof. T. G. Bonney—The Enstatitic Lavas of Eycott Hill. 79 I may remark, contains some sections of the supposed altered enstatite. Many of these exhibit one well-marked and fairly frequent cleavage, with two others much less perfectly developed ; one being very nearly at right angles to, and the other making an angle of about 26° or 27° with the first. Thus these two include between them an angle not far from 69°, but where the principal cleavage is not visible in the slice, then the irregular cracks appear to meet much more nearly at right angles. The slide from the normal rock contains five or six crystalline grains, roughly clustered together. Not one has quite escaped change, but in several we see a rather broad fibrous- looking border of a pale green colour, which gives uniform and clear tints with the crossed Nicols, while the interior is confusedly fibrous in structure and in large part dark, besides being a rather stronger green colour with ordinary light. Here and there we have a grain which is not much more altered than the one already described. Above the porphyritic lava just described comes a series of lavas noticed in Mr. Ward’s paper. I possess a specimen from the lowest of these (I believe that numbered 6 in his section). It is porphyritic, but the felspar crystals are much smaller than in the other rock, not generally exceeding a quarter of an inch in the longer diameter. These under the microscope appear to be more broken and corroded than they are in the rock below. The altered “ enstatite ” is also present in about the same quantity, but it too has a slightly more corroded aspect and is more thickly black-bordered than in the other. The ground-mass is of the same general character, but the crystallites are smaller, and the base, which with a low power is darker, seems to be of a green hue, and more crowded with microliths. The dark border of the enstatite also seems to be resolved into minute granules ofa partly translucent mineral, probably augite, mingled with ferrite. In the lowest of the lavas at Falcon Crag I find a little of what I believe to be the altered enstatite, though it is much more irregular in form, more interrupted by inclusions, and altogether less well characterized than at Hycott Hill, so that I should hardly have ventured on identifying it from these slides. Jn this lava there is also a fair quantity of well-preserved and characteristic augite (diameter commonly about -03 to -05 inch). I do not detect the enstatite in either of the slides from the next two lava-flows. I think then there can be no doubt that the Eycott Hill lavas contain a variety of enstatite. It might be possible, but it would be difficult, to isolate a sufficient quantity for chemical analysis, but to my mind the evidence as to its nature is already sufficiently clear, and the only point on which we require enlightenment is whether enstatite or bronzite would be the better name. The settlement of this point I willingly leave to any one who thinks it worth the time and labour, for I feel confident that the mineral is a bisilicate of magnesia with some iron. From the aspect of the ground-mass of the Eycott Hill rock, and the presence of the bisilicate, enstatite, instead of the unisilicate, olivine, I should not have been surprised if it had proved to be chemically more nearly related to the Falcon Crag lavas than to those 80 Reriews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. which succeed it at Hycott Hill. Analyses of the latter, quoted by Mr. Ward in the paper mentioned above, show the silica percentages of three of them to be respectively 53:3, 52°6 and 51:1. The Falcon Crag rocks are shown by Mr. Ward (though he coined for them the unhappy term felsidolerite) to be in reality andesites, which micro- scopically and chemically! present only such differences from the modern representatives of that group as we should naturally expect in rocks of such great antiquity. By the kindness of Prof. A. W. Williamson, the silica percentage of the red variety of the Hycott Hill rock has been determined for me by Mr. T. Cooksey in the laboratory of University College. He finds it to be 53:06 (one determination giving 53:40 another 52-73)? with a specific gravity of 2:754. The rock must therefore remain among the basalts (the glassy condition of its base renders the name dolerite inappropriate). It belongs, however, to the side of the basalt group which is the richer in silica, and is: nearly represented among modern rocks by some of the basalts of the Inner Hebrides in Prof. Judd’s collection. It also resembles in certain respects some of the magma basalts described by Boricky (Petrographische Studien an den Basaltgesteinen Béhmens). The amount of alteration may justify us in naming it now an enstatite-diabase, but I feel no doubt that it was originally a true basalt rich in glass, containing a variety of enstatite. aS) 220} Wea I Wg SS ————S Dr. Fritscu’s Permian AMPHIBIANS OF BoHEMIA. R. ANTON FRITSCH has now made such progress with his Monograph on the Fauna of the Bohemian Permian rocks that we are able to recognize it as one of the most important and one of the ablest of modern contributions to Paleontology. For excellence of description it has not been surpassed ; while from the minute dimensions of most of the Amphibian remains, care has been required in deciphering osteological characters, which has resulted in a perfection of osteological labour. Specimens offering fewer diffi- culties might not perhaps have been studied with the same complete- ness. Professor Fritsch has shown that he is a learned comparative anatomist, whose wealth of knowledge has enabled him to enrich his pages with the fruits of many and varied studies, and to success- fully interpret remains which are often obscure. The third part of the work contains descriptions of Urocordylus scalaris, Keraterpeton crassum, Limuerpeton modestum, L. laticeps, L. macrolepis, L. elegans, L. obtusatum. L. dubium, L. difficile, and a note on L. caducum. Like the foregoing part it consists of 82 quarto pages of text, well illustrated by many excellent figures printed with the text ; and by 12 coloured plates. The memoir begins with some account of the family Nectridea, 1 Two analyses of lavas from the Keswick district given in the Survey Memoir give silica percentages of 60-718 and 59-511 respectively. 2 He also writes, ‘‘ The rock contains a small amount of calcium, less magnesium, but mainly iron, aluminium and silica,’’ Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia, 81 which are long-tailed lizard-like animals, usually with elongated epiotic horns, and tail vertebrae devoid of ribs, but with the upper and lower spinous processes expanded in fan-like form. The genus Urocordylus, which was established by Huxley and Wright, has the head triangular, blunt in front, and truncated behind, with the cranial bones covered with round pits, which suggest those on the skulls of crocodiles. The strong tail includes about 80 vertebra. The strong ribs are double-headed, and about three times as long as the vertebree. EAR DN Fic. I.—Restoration of Urocordylus scalaris (Fritsch). The thin shield-shaped thoracic plate is expanded in front. The lateral thoracic plates are broad and spoon-shaped. The abdominal scales are smooth and elliptical. The feet are five-toed ; the hinder limbs are longest. The Urocordylus scalaris of Fritsch is distin- DECADE IIl.—YOL. II.—NO. II. 6 82. Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. guished from the U. Wandesfordi of Huxley by having broader spinous processes to the caudal vertebra, but the distinction is not of a striking kind; and the remains are imperfectly preserved. The restoration is founded partly upon the Bohemian fragments, partly upon Irish specimens. The head is one-fourth of the length of the body, and the body is about one-half the length of the tail. From the proportions of the body and limbs, the animal is presumed to have been essentially aquatic, and from the well-developed abdominal armour is inferred to have crawled along the bottom. There are no indications of scutes on the upper side of the body or on the tail. The abdominal armour consists of more than 100 rows of somewhate elongated scutes, which vary in size and form. The commence behind the thoracic plate, and are arranged in oblique series of three or four on each side of the median line, overlapping on the inner side. ae The form of the skull is more elongated than in Keraterpeton. The eyes were small, in the anterior halt of the head, and separated from each other by three times the diameter of the orbits. There are eleven teeth on the palatine bone. The number of presacral vertebree is unknown, but is estimated at 27 as compared with 20 in Urocordylus Wandesfordii. The vertebree are strong and well ossified, and terminate in fan-shaped neural spines, which are Fic. I].—Tait VERTEBR/ ENLARGED SIX TIMES. d, dorsal process; v, ventral process; p, pre-zygapophysis ; eh, notochord ; e, body of vertebra; ~, neural canal. serrated like a cock’s comb. The specimens figured are from the first third of the tail, and show the dorsal and ventral processes. These caudal vertebre are compressed from side to side. ‘Their number is unknown, but supposed to be about 80, as in the Irish Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. 88 species. The ribs are hollow. In the anterior extremity only the small humerus has been recognized. The hind limbs were twice as strong as the fore limbs. There are no traces of gill arches. Fig. III.—Restorarton or Keraterpeton crassum (Fritsch) ; 13 times natural size. A short account is given of the genus Keraterpeton, based upon Huxley’s memoir, and then follows a description of the species K. crassum (Fr.). This is the only Bohemian species. It has the orbit of the eye small and placed well forward, and has a head smaller in proportion to the body than in the British species. It is known from three complete specimens and fragments of thirty others. The animal was much smaller than Urocordylus, but of a stronger build. The head has a wide frog-like form, with the characteristic epiotic spines (see Fig. 3). The body is five times as 84 Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. long as the head, and the tail more than twice as Jong as the body. The limbs have a development which suggests locomotion by walking. and the small height of the processes of the caudal vertebra would indicate a comparatively bad swimmer. The skeleton is completely ossified, even the carpus and tarsus being here preserved. No in- dication of the skin is preserved, but there is a shield of strong armour which covers two-thirds of the width of the abdominal surface, and extends between the thoracic plates and the pelvis. This shield consists of more than forty rows of long rhomboid plates, directed obliquely backward from the median line, and has about eight keeled plates in each row. Each plate has four cir- cular pits on its inner edge, which resemble the pits on the cranial bones. In the skull deep depressions in front of the nasal bones indicate the nares. The circular pits on the skull are absent from the inner part of the frontal bone. The premaxillary teeth, five on each side, are pointed, and constricted towards the base so as to have a spoon-shaped contour. There are about eleven or twelve teeth in the maxillary bone in one row. As the number of teeth indicates a small gape to the month, Professor Fritsch infers that Keraterpeton fed upon the small Crustacea and Myriapods which occur in the Bohemian coal. The epiotic horn, which is attached to the square epiotic bone, is wedge-shaped, and four times as long as the base is wide. Its length is half the length of the skull. Its under surface is furrowed. The orbit contains a circle of about twelve or fourteen sclerotic plates. No new light is thrown on the gills or hyoid arch; and it is probable, from the absence of gills, that they were lost early in life. The number of the pre-sacral vertebra is uncertain, but is believed to be about 23; they are similar in size and shape, and all carry ribs. The centrum is constricted in the middle. ‘There are 40 caudal vertebra. As in Urocordylus, there are no interspaces between the dorsal and ventral processes of these vertebra. ‘There are no caudal ribs. The middle thoracic plate is triangular, with a T-shaped elevated mass upon it like the interclavicle of Jchthyosaurus in form, with circular pits in the bone on each side of the median bar of the T. The lateral thoracic plate is formed of an oval shield with a short round curved stalk. It is pitted on the outer edge. The fore-limb is shorter than in the Branchiosauridz. The humerus bas the usual constriction in the middle, is widest at the distal end, and has an elevated ridge on the upper end. ‘The bones of the fore-arm are half the length of the humerus. The number of carpal bones is unknown. The metacarpal bones and phalanges are short, so that the hand is shorter than the fore-arm. The terminal phalanges are blunt and conical. The hinder extremity is stronger, with digits which are relatively quite as short. The number of bones in the several digits is 1, 2, 8, 2, 1. The next family is named Limnerpetide. It is a group of Amphi- bians with broad frog-like head and long salamander-like body; and is armoured with sculptured scutes. The first species, Limnerpeton Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. 85 modestum (Fritsch), is known from a lower jaw in which the bone is sculptured and the short conical teeth are of uniform size, which is 24 times as long as wide. The second species, Limnerpeton laticeps (Fritsch), is 160 mm. long, but badly preserved. It had the form of an Axolotl, and has been restored from a specimen found at Tremosna. There is no indication of the skin. Scale armour was developed on the ventral surface between the pectoral and pelvic regions, where there are 54 rows of short wide scutes, each row consisting of about 8 scutes. The scales were 4} times as wide us long; they are marked with concentric lines, between which there are rows of minute punctures. The skull is nearly as broad as long, rounded in front. The orbits are large and nearly circular. There were more than 40 small even- sized teeth in the upper jaw, each half a millimetre in diameter, with with a large pulp-cavity. The epiotic bone is small and extends backwards into a short point. Thess squamosal bone is not divided as in Dawsonia and Melanerpeton. There are 24 presacral vertebra bearing ribs. In the tail 22 caudal vertebra can be counted, but there were probably 50, and many of these vertebrae carry short ribs. The vertebree are very deeply biconcave. Of the pectoral girdle, the only element known is the middle thoracic plate. The lateral thoracic plate or coracoid has a stalk-like process. The anterior extremities are strong, with the humerus nearly twice as long as the fore-arm, and the phalanges are short and slender; and the hind limb is similarly characterized. The third species Limnerpeton macrolepis (Fr.), is characterized by quadrate scutes, one and a half times as wide as high, marked with longitudinal striz, and hav- ing the hinder edge thickened. There are about twelve teeth in the premaxillary bone, distinguished by having their points furrowed. There are about forty blunt- pointed teeth in the maxillary bone. There are more than forty teeth in the lower jaw. The form of the vomer is complicated. The middle thoracic plate is marked with radial striping. The vertebrae were slightly ossified and constructed on the amphiccelous Fig. [1V.—ReEstToration oF Limnerpeton laticeps (Fritsch) ; natural size. 86 Reviews—Dr. Fritsch’s Permian Amphibia of Bohemia. Fie. VI. Fic. VII. Fic. V.—Restorarion or Limnerpeton obtusatum (Fritsch) ; natural size. Fic. VI,—Caudal scute from the tail enlarged 45 times. Fie. VI1.—Scutes from the middle of the abdomen, Limnerpeton obtusatum (Fritsch); enlarged 45 times. Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 87 plan. The ribs are short with both ends expanded. The fourth species is Limnerpeton elegans (Fritsch). It has small oval scutes marked with cancellate marking which is partly concentric, partly diagonal. The remains are scattered. The skull-bones are com- paratively smooth. They indicate a longer and smaller skull than that of the last species. The maxillary bone contains 28 teeth and may have included 35 teeth. The teeth are less regular in size than in other species of this genus. The shield of the parasphenoid bone is thickly toothed. The fifth species is Limnerpeton obtusatum (Fritsch). The scutes on the abdomen are of moderate size orna- mented with ribs which branch at intervals, and have a thickened hinder edge. The scutes of the upper side of the body want the thickened edge. The form of the body is greatly elongated, and the head is re- markably short and wide. The body is six times as long as the head, and the tail is twice as long as the head. The anterior ex- tremity is much shorter than the hinder extremity. The abdominal armour consists of about 100 rows of scutes; each row contains six scutes on each side of the median line. Each scute is.twice as broad as long. The skull is half as broad again as long. The orbits are in the anterior third of the skull, and are nearly double their diameter from each other. The teeth are small and smooth with pulp-cavities. The nasal bone is pitted. The epiotic bone is quadrate and ends in a process which is directed backward. The sclerotic circle includes 12 bones. The hyoid in so far as it is preserved resembles that of Keraterpeton. There are about 87 presacral vertebra, and about 16 in the tail, though 10 appear to be wanting. ‘The notochord was continuous. The caudal vertebra are very short and decrease rapidly in height. The dorsal ribs are 24 times as long as the vertebra, and have the capitulum and tuberculum most developed towards the neck. In the hinder extremity the phalanges are remarkably short. Some other remains are described under the names Limnerpeton dubium, known only from a lower jaw; L. difficile, known from a portion of a skull which is doubtfully referred to the genus; and ZL. caducum, founded upon a jaw and a rib. Although many species have been described, it is impossible not to recognize that they are for the most part well characterized. And the publication of electrotypes of these perishable specimens will facilitate a comparison between some of the Bohemian species and their British allies, and thus demonstrate the nature of the affinity between them. H. G. SKELey. Iz ISO ISS) JAIN) 352549) Caan tei ce ae GroLocicaL Society or Lonvon. I.—December 3, 1884 ( Continued).—Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair. The following communica- tion was read :— ‘ 3. “On the Lower Eocene Plant-beds of the Basaltic Formation of Ulster.” By J. Starkie Gardner, Hsq., F.G.S. 88 Reports and Proceedings— The paper commenced with a brief outline of the physical features of the basaltic area in Ireland. The beds whence plants have been obtained form a quadrilateral, the angles of which are Ballintoy, Glenarm, Ballypalady, and Lough Neagh. The Ballintoy beds are very incompletely explored, and have so far yielded few species. ‘The Glenarm beds are situated in a disused mine, filled with water, which was drained by the author. The plants are well preserved ina matrix of white sandy clay. The Ballypalady plants are less perfectly impressed in a matrix of ochreous earth. Many of the plants are common to both; but Ballypalady possesses a whole group of conifers, including a cypress, yew, many pines and firs, not met with elsewhere; while Glenarm is richer in leafy trees. Among the plants in common are two which still exist, Cryptomeria, and a peculiar Pteris with reticulated venation. Among extinct piants the presence of Macclintockia especially points to their age being the same as the Heersian flora of Gelinden in Belgium, a stage very low in the Eocene. The Longh Neagh beds are estimated to be as much as 500 feet thick, and their flora shows them to be interbasaltic, and therefore Hocene instead of Pliocene as hitherto sometimes supposed. The great extent these beds formerly held is shown by the area over which silicified wood derived from them lies scattered. The basalts, here as elsewhere, have been enormously denuded; and the author believes that the horizon of the Mull leaf-bed is not anywhere present in Ireland. The Mull bed is regarded in this paper as probably of the same age as the Woolwich and Reading series of the London Basin ; it was deposited on the flat banks of a river, liable to inundation; while the Irish beds, are fluviatile, not lacustrine, with the probable exception of those of Lough Neagh, which may be lacustrine. II.—December 14, 1884.—W. Carruthers, Esq., F.R.S., Vice-Pre- sident, in the chair.—The following communications were read : 1. “On the South-western Extension of the Clifton Fault.” By Prof. C. Lloyd Morgan, F.G.S., Assoc. R.S.M. This fault cuts across the strata out of which the Avon gorge has been excavated, a little north of the Suspension Bridge. According to the author’s estimate, the throw of the fault is, on the Gloucester- shire bank, somewhat less than 1200 feet, and somewhat more than 1100 feet on the Somersetshire bank. The difference of nearly 100 feet the author considered to be, in part at least, due to the dying-out of the fault to the west. Taking as a datum-point the intersection of the line of fault and the line of high-water mark, the rocks relatively shifted downwards are, on the Gloucestershire bank, Mountain Limestone 730 feet, Upper Limestone Shales 470 feet. According to this estimate, there would be 130 feet of Upper Limestone Shales above high-water mark, above which beds of Millstone Grit would be brought down. This accords with observed facts. On the Somersetshire bank the beds brought down below high-water mark are Mountain Limestone 770 feet, Upper Limestone Shales 330 feet. According to this estimate, there would be 270 feet of Upper Lime- stone Shales above high-water mark, which would thus leave little Geological Society of London. 89 or no room for Millstone Grit to be brought down to the surface. Nor has the author succeeded in finding any sign of this rock on the Somersetshire side. Owing to the fact that softer Upper Limestone Shales are brought down by the fault, its westward extension may be traced by a line of depression resulting from the greater erosion of these softer beds. In the map which the author exhibited, a triangular wedge of Upper Limestone Shales, brought down by the fault, had its apex near Hill Farm (see Survey Map), and its base abutting on the Triassic beds south of Durdham Down. If the fault do not tend to die out westwards, the apex of this triangle must be placed further S.W., for which there is no evidence, while there is some against it. The southern side of the triangle marks the line of fault. Further west the author believed that evidence exists of the faulting-down of a wedge of Mountain Limestone into the Lower Limestone Shales. 2. “On the Recent Discovery of Pteraspidian Fish in the Upper Silurian Rocks of North America.” By Prof. E. W. Claypole, B.A., B.Sc. London, F.G.S. The fossils now described from Pennsylvania are the first authentic remains of fishes found in the Silurian rocks of America, and some of them are the oldest undoubted vertebrates yet discovered. Pre- viously fish had not been detected in America below the Devonian Corniferous Limestone of Ohio, and the Lower Devonian of Canada. The most important fish-remains hitherto known from beds of Silurian age are from the bone-bed of the Upper Ludlow rocks, one specimen, the oldest in Hurope with the exception of Pander’s doubtful Conodonts, having been recorded from the Lower Ludlow. The fossils now described are closely allied to the two Ludlow types and consist of the spines known as Onchus, and the shields referred to Scaphaspis and belonging to the peculiar family Pteraspidz. The author entered into a detailed comparison of the English Silurian Pteraspids as described by Professors Huxley and Ray Lankester, and those now discovered in America. He described the three layers of which the shields of the Pennsylvanian Pteraspids are composed, and proposed for their reception a new genus, Pale- aspis. He considers the Pteraspide, in which no bony structure has been detected, a distinct family from the Cephalaspide, which exhibit that structure. He then proceeded to correlate the American beds yielding Pale- aspis with the Ludlow beds of England. The American fish were chiefly found in the Bloomfield Sandstone at the top of the middle division or variegated shale of the fifth group of Rogers. This fifth group of the Pennsylvanian Survey immediately underlies the ‘Water-lime, corresponding to the Envlish Lower Ludlow, and has been shown by the writer to represent the Onondaga shale of New York. The position of the latter in the series is shown by the following sections taken from Prof. James Hall :— New York. GreEAT BRITAIN. Lower Helderberg ............... Sonoadabonde Wanting. DWiaberc lim eM len .ccih sawn anal hiiraes ee topes Lesmahago beds. Onondaga salt group ..........eseeeseeeeeees Wanting. Niagara ZroUp ...... .csscoececsseaseonee «es.. Wenlock Limestone, 90 Reports and Proceedings— The last two were considered representative by Sir R. Murchison, and this view has never been disputed. It therefore appears that the Pennsylvanian Pteraspids from the Bloomfield Sandstone are older than Scaphaspis ludensis of the Lower Ludlow by the time required for the deposition of 200 feet of strata. But 1000 feet below the horizon just named comminuted fish-scales are found in beds containing Leperditia alta; and again, 700 feet lower, in the iron sandstone near the middle of the Clinton group, which corresponds to the English Upper Llandovery beds ; and 200 feet below the Ore Sand-rock, broken plates, with the superficial striation of Palwaspis and a few fine spines of Onchus (described as O. Clinton’) are met with. The horizon is well defined, for the Ore Sand-rock contains Beyrichia lata, Calymene Olintoni, Ormoceras vertebratum, and other characteristic fossils. The iron sandstone also contains white pellets, apparently of coprolitic origin, and containing 32 per cent. of phosphate of lime. Previously reported discoveries of fish in American Silurian rocks were discussed, and their supposed age shown to be erroneous. The paper concluded with the description of two species of Paleaspis (P. americana and P. bitruncata), of Onchus Pennsylvanicus from the Bloomfield Sandstone, Onondaga group, and of Onchus Clintont from the Iron Sandstone of the Clinton group. 3. “On some West-Indian Phosphate Deposits.” By George Hughes, Esq., F.C.S. (communicated by W. T. Blanford, Hsq., LL.D., F.B.8., Sec. G.S.) Some West-Indian specimens of phosphates were exhibited, in reference to which the author called attention to a description by Dana of an instance in which the carbonate of lime in fragments of coral was partially converted into phosphate, and aiso to the apparent alteration of limestone rock into phosphate of lime in Barbuda Island by the action of water draining a guano-like deposit of bats’ dung in a cave. A specimen of the phosphate of lime thus produced was exhibited. In Aruba Island the process of conversion of coral-rock into phosphate of lime has been in operation on so extensive a scale that the deposit is being largely worked for shipment. The alteration is probably due to the action of water containing soluble phosphates derived from the excrements of sea-birds (guano). Of this guano no trace remains; but the fragments of coral in the underlying rock have been altered into a substance containing 78 to 80 per cent. of phosphate of lime; and the deposit, as shipped, contains 35:7 per cent. of phosphoric acid, equal to 77-9 per cent. of tribasic phosphate. Reference was also made to some other West-Indian phosphate- deposits formed of bones, and to iron and alumina phosphates found in Redonda, Alta Vela, and Testigos Islands. 4, “Notes on species of Phyllopora and Thamniscus from the Lower Silurian Rocks, near Welshpool, Wales.” By George Robert Vine, Hsq. (Communicated by Prof. P. Martin Duncan, F.R.S., F.G.S.) In this paper a species of Phyllopora from the Caradoc beds of Correspondence—Mr. A. G. Cameron. 91 Wern-y-scadog, Llanfyllin, was described as P. tumida, and a Tham- niscus from the «volcanic ash of Middleton Hill, near Welshpool, probably of Bala age, as Z. antiquus, both from a coliection sent by Mr. J. B. Morgan, of Welshpool, to Prof. Lapworth for identi- fication. A list of the species of Phyllopora, hitherto described from Lower-Silurian beds, and of both Upper and Lower Silurian forms of Thamniscus, was added, and the relations of the various known species to those described in the present paper were discussed at some length. @@ Ere Sa @ IND ieee sare oe eee FULLERS EARTH AND WATER SUPPLY. Srr,—At Woburn, Beds, the Fullers earth is obtained by digging cylindrical holes or wells, as they are there called, in the Greensand, until this marl is reached. Sometimes there is water, oftener not ; but when there is, it is the finest and sweetest in the country, very clear, never failing, but not very abundant. So good is it that those domestic wells deriving their supply from some other source than the Fullers earth, are treated to it, from time to time artificially, by having masses of it placed in them. The cleansing properties of this ‘earth,’ as applied to blankets, etc., is universally recognized, but I never heard before of its being used for cleansing water supply. I understand, however, that such is the case, the Woburn earth having been sent into a neighbouring county for that purpose ; though I have not as yet been able to obtain corroboration of this, nor to find out whether it is put into filter beds with the other material, or in what way it is made use of. A. G. CAMERON. H.M. Grotocicat Survey, Brprorp. THE PHENOMENA OF STRAINS, Erc., OBSERVABLE IN OBSIDIAN. Srr,—In the August number of the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Mr. F. Rutley describes the phenomena of strain in the glass of some obsidians around embedded crystals. 1 enclose a photograph of similar depolarizing effects in a slide, cut from a specimen of Mexican obsidian given to me some years ago by my friend Mr. J. Backhouse of York, among a number of pieces several of which showed the phenomenon in question. It is rather remarkable that in the same slide some of the erystals exhibit the luminous brushes as described and figured in the article cited, while others apparently have no effect upon the state of the glass. This is the case round both the crystals of felspar of various kinds, and the black specks, mostly rounded, which I suppose are magnetite. I determined that the glass is compressed by observing the effects produced by the interposition of different parts of a strip of glass between the slide and the objective when bent by the pressure of the fingers in a horizontal plane. By this means it was possible to so 92 Correspondence—Mr. T. H. Wailler—Mr. W. Gunn. compensate the effect, that at any point of the luminous brushes darkness could be restored ; and this was found tosbe the case when the stretched part of the glass strip was superposed. On the other hand, either pair of the quadrants could be brightened by placing the length of the glass corresponding with their direction and bringing the compressed side into action. The effects are still more marked when a selenite is used, but disappear entirely on inserting a quartz plate until the analyser is somewhat rotated. In one case I have met with appearances quite the reverse of those described by Rutley in the case of perlitic cracks. One of these surrounds a crystal to the extent of about 3, and within this the field is dark, while the line of the crack is fringed with light due to pressure in the glass surrounding the pearl. Connected with this encircling crack, although, owing to the thickness of the section, the connection is not very definitely traceable, is a long straight crack ex- tending both ways from the crystal. At the extreme points of this the brushes reappear, and when the crack is parallel to the principal plane of either of the Nicols prisms, they are quite brilliant. We have here evidently the expression of the rending force which at this point was not able actually to separate the particles of the glass, but only to produce the strain which results in depolarization. The connection which Mr. Rutley suggests between strain and crystallization is, I think, scarcely available here, as the glass is ‘compressed, and the phenomena seem to me rather to point toa higher coefficient of expansion by heat for the obsidian glass than for felspar and magnetite producing in the former, since it was fitted, so to speak, to the crystal at a high temperature, a strain similar to that of an iron tire shrunk on the woodwork of a wheel. If any data of the expansions of the substances involved are known it would be easy to test this, but I do not know where to find any. BIRMINGHAM. THos. H. WauLuer. POSIDONOMYA BECHERI.1 Srr,—I have just seen in your interesting article in the last Num- ber of the Gronoeicat Magazine, “On the Discovery of Trilobites in the Culm Shales of Devonshire,” a reference (on p. 540) to the occurrence of Posidonomya Becheri in the rocks at Budle, Northum- berland. Please allow me to point out that this shell was found there by Sir Roderick Murchison and others, many years ago (see p. 291, Siluria, 4th edition), and the late Mr. G. Tate, of Alnwick, has noticed its presence here along with many well-known Carbon- iferous limestone fossils, eg. Griffithides, Bellerophon, Unio, Huompha- lus, Chonetes, Hardrensis, etc. (Trans. Ber. Nat. Club, vol. v. p. 78, 1863). I never heard till now that any one regarded these beds as “Tuedian.” They are underlain and entirely surrounded by beds of the ordinary Carboniferous Limestone type, and there is no Tuedian within many miles of them. Ifthe Posidonomya Bechert is characteristic of genuine Tuedian, why is it not shown to occur 1 See ante, pp. 73-76. Obituary—Dr. Thomas Wright, FBS. 93 abundantly in Northumberland in all the beds which everybody admits to be Tuedian or Lower Carboniferous? Almost all the Carboniferous Limestone of North Northumberland is the represen- tative of Phillips’s Yoredale Series, and I have no doubt the Budle Beds are much nearer to the top than the bottom of the Carboniferous Limestone Series. In Ireland the Posidonomya is a characteristic fossil of certain black shales lying above the Carboniferous Lime- stone, which were at one time regarded as Coal-measures, but which are probably the representatives of the Yoredale Beds of England (see Jukes’s Manual, 3rd edition, pp. 591-2). I hope soon to show that the Tuedian Beds and the Calciferous Sandstone of Scotland represent in time not only the Lower Limestone Shale, but the greater part of the Carboniferous Limestone also. 20, CUMBERLAND STREET, W. Gunn. Epinpureu, Dec, 20, 1884. Ors RP ASE Na DIR WIBLOMMWAS \WARICIRNES Sie sinasee leolniaSelean - la Glas)- Dr. Thomas Wright was born in Paisley, Renfrewshire, N. B., November 9th, 1809. He was educated at the Paisley Grammar School, and before he completed its curriculum, was articled to his brother-in-law, a surgeon and general practitioner, where he ac- quired an elementary knowledge of the Natural Sciences, and showed an early predilection for biological studies. Before the expiration of his articles his brother-in-law removed to a practice in Ayrshire, which occasioned an interruption to his course of study, and temporarily disarranged his pursuits. After a futile attempt to enter into a manufactory, for which his scientific tastes rendered him quite unfit, he rejoined his brother-in-law, and having completed his articles, prepared himself for entering the medical classes of the University of Glasgow. But acting upon the advice of his friends, he proceeded to Ireland, and enrolled himself as an anatomical student in the Royal College of Surgeons, Dublin, where he rapidly acquired an extensive knowledge of anatomy, and became an accomplished physiologist and pathologist. Later on he was induced to study under Messrs. Kirby and Hllis, and soon be- came their Assistant-demonstrator. On leaving Dublin he received the highest credentials from those gentlemen, and was offered the post of Demonstrator of their School, with the promise of the Chair of Anatomy and Physiology if he remained. During the preceding winter, however, Dr. Wright had suffered much from a dissecting wound which quite unfitted him for anato- mical work, and compelled him to decline the offer so handsomely made by Mr. Ellis. On recovering his health, he passed the College of Surgeons, London, in 1832, and graduated as M.D., at St. Andrew’s University in 1846. Soon after passing the College he settled in Cheltenham, where his life has since been spent in the active practice of his profession. He was for fifteen years Surgeon to the Cheltenham 94 Obituary—Dr. Thomas Wright, F.RB.S. Dispensary, for upwards of twenty years Surgeon to the General Hospital; and for many years President of the Literary and Philo- sophical Association, during which period he delivered, in different sessions, courses of lectures on Comparative Ehysiolog ry, Natural History, and Palzontology. Dr. Wright strongly advocated the teaching of Natural Science in colleges and schools, and was always ready ‘to help in the cause of popular education. He frequently lectured in Bristol, Bath, Worcester, and elsewhere, on scientific subjects which he made his life-long study. During the early days of his professional career he devoted much time to microscopical research, but his eyesight suffering from too close an application to these investigations, he turned his attention to Paleontology, in the pursuit of “which the Oolitic rocks of the Cotteswold Hills around Cheltenham afford such rich materials. He made in his leisure hours a large collection of fossil Echinoderms from these and other Oolitic formations, and read a series of Memoirs to the Cotteswold Field Club on the minute anatomy of this class, which appeared in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. These papers attracted the attention of Professor Edward Forbes, F.R.S8., who spoke in high terms of their merit, and proposed to Dr. Wright that they should publish a joint Monograph on the British Fossil Echinodermata for the Paleontographical Society. It was finally settled that Professor Forbes should describe and figure the British Cretaceous and Tertiary species, and that Dr. Wright should describe and figure the Oolitic forms. But that accomplished Naturalist died, just when he had obtained the ambition of his life, the chair of Natural History in the University of Edinburgh, and before he had done anything to his portion of the work; so that on the completion of the Monograph on the Oolitic Echinide, and the Monograph on Oolitic Asteriade and Ophiuridee, the Council of the Paleontographical Society requested Dr. Wright to undertake that part of the work which Hdward Forbes had left unfinished. Dr. Wright commenced (in 1860) the description, with figures, of all the Cretaceous species, and for more than twenty years he devoted all his leisure to this work, which is now completed, and forms a large volume of 890 pages quarto, with 87 magnificent plates. In 1875 Dr. Wright commenced another extensive Monograph on the “ Lias Ammonites of the British Isles.” He had been collect- ing materials for this work during his long residence in Cheltenham ; and had succeeded in securing a rare and beautiful series of these Cephalopods, many of his specimens having been carefully and judici- ously selected to show the remarkable morphological changes through which Ammonites pass in the process of their evolution. This work, happily now completed, consists of 480 pages of text and 90 plates. His paleontographical labours fill four large quarto volumes, and comprise 242 plates, accompanied by 1568 pages of descriptive letterpress, every species having a full detailed description given of the form, with its affinities and differences from congeneric species carefully pointed out, also the locality from Obituary—Dr. Thomas Wright, F.R.S. 95 whence it was derived, and its stratigraphical distribution accurately defined, both in Hnglish and Continental rocks. These works have occupied all his leisure hours for the last thirty years. Much of this time was devoted to the collection of specimens, the examination of private cabinets and those in British and foreign museums, in order to compare all the British species with continental forms, and thus to bring each one to the crucial test of a critical and personal examination. He made many journeys to the Continent to visit the grand collections in Paris, Stuttgart, and Tubingen in Germany, and those in the Geneva Museum, and in that of Zurich, Switzerland. The accomplishment of this self-imposed task has been the pleasure and delight of his life. For these works, and other memoirs on geology published in the Quarterly Journal, the Council of the Geolo- gical Society awarded him the Wollaston Medal in 1878. Dr. Wright was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Edinburgh in 1855, a Fellow of the Geological Society in 1859, and a Fellow of the Royal Society of London in 1879. For many years he filled the post of Medical Officer of Health for Cheltenham, Charlton Kings, and Leckhampton. Referring to the sad losses which our science sustained at the close of 1884, in the deaths of Mr. Godwin-Austen ; Dr. Wright; Prof. James Buckman; Mr. Alfred Tylor; and Mr. Searles V. Wood; all of them Fellows of the Geological Society, Prof. Edward Hull, F.R.S., writes: —‘“ Dr. Wright was one of that small band of local geologists, who, like Charles Moore of Bath; Dr. Lycett of Minchinhampton; G. W. Ormerod of Cheshire; and Edward Binney of Manchester; have made their respective habitats, to use a scientific term, as household words amongst geologists, and have largely contributed to the general advancement of our know- ledge of Natural History.” The following is a List of his Geological Papers and Mono- graphs :— A Stratigraphical Account of the Sections from Round Tower Point to Alum Bay, on the N.W. Coast of the Isle of Wight. Ann. Mag. Hist. 1851, vol. vii. pp. 14-27; Cotswold Club Proc. 1853, vol. i. pp. 87-100. On the Strombide of the Oolites (with the description of a new and remarkable Pteroceras, by John Lycett). Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. vii. pp. 306-310; Cotswold Club Proc. 1858, vol. i. pp. 115-119. A Stratigraphical Account of the Sections of Hordwell, Beacon, and Barton Cliffs, on the Coast of Hampshire. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1851, vol. vii. pp. 433-446 ; Cotswold Club Proce. 1853, vol. i. pp. 120-138. On the Cidaride of the Oolites, with a Description of some New Species of that Family. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1851, vol. viii. pp. 241-280; Cotswold Club Proc. 1853, vol. i. pp. 134-173. On the Cassidulide of the Oolites, with Descriptions of some New Species of that Family. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1852, vol. ix. pp. 81-103, 206-214, 294-316; Cotswold Club Proc, 1853, vol. i. pp. 174-226. Contributions to the Palzeontology of the Isle ot Wight. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1852, vol. x. pp. 87-93; Cotswold Club Proc. 1853, vol. i. pp. 229-284. Contributions to the Palwontology of Gloucestershire. A Description of some New Species of Kchinodermata from the Lias and Oolites. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1854, pp. 161-178, 312-324, 376-383; Cotswold Club Proc. 1860, vol. il. pp. 17-48. 96 Obituary—Dr. Thomas Wright, F.R.S. On Fossil Echinoderms from the Island of Malta, with Notes on the Stratigraphical Distribution of the Fossil Organisms in the Maltese Beds. Ann. and Mag, Nat. Hist. 1855, vol. xv. pp. 101-127, 175-196, 262-277 ; Cotswold Club Proc. 1860, vol. ii. pp. 124-127. On a New Genus of Fossil Cidaride, with a Synopsis of the Species included therein. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1855, vol. xvi. pp. 94-100. On some New Species of Hemipedima from the Oolites. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1854, vol. xvi. pp. 196-199 ; Cotswold Club Proc. 1860, vol. ii. pp. 125-130. On the Occurrence of Upper Lias Ammonites in the (so-called) Basement-Beds of the Inferior Oolite. Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1856 (pt. 2), pp. 80-82. On the Stratigraphical Distribution of the Oolitic Echinodermata. Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1856, pp. 396-404. On the Paleontological and Stratigraphical Relations of the so-called ‘‘ Sands of the Inferior Oolite.”’? Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1856, vol. xii. pp. 292-325. Notes on the Fossils collected by Mr. Geikie from the Lias of the Isles of Pabba, Scalpa, and Skye. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1858, pp. 24-36. On the Avicula contorta Beds and Lower Lias in the South of England. Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1860 (pt. 2), p. 108; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1860, vol. xvi. pp- 374-411. Remarks on the “‘ Roadstones’? of Cleeve-Hill. Cotswold Club Proc. 1860, vol. ii. 184-187. On the) Subdivisions of the Inferior Oolite in the South of England, compared with the equivalent Beds of that Formation on the Yorkshire Coast. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1860, vol. xvi. pp. 1-48. Geological Expedition to Swift's Hill and Rodborough (1860). Cotswold Club Proce, 1865, vol. ui. p. 21. The Oolitic Section at Leckhampton (1860). Cotswold Club Proc. 1865, vol. iii. pp. 26-52. Report on Miss Holland’s Collection of Lias Fossils (1862). Cotswold Club Proc. 1865, vol. 111. pp. 153-156. On the Ammonites of the Lias Formation. Cotswold Club Proc. 1865, vol. ii. pp. 162-179, 235-245. On the Development of Ammonites. Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1864 (Sect.), vol. xxxiv. pp 738-74; Gon. Mac. 1865, Vol. Il. pp. 86-87. On the White Lias of Dorsetshire. Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1864 (Sect.), vol. xxxiv. p. 75; Guo. Mae. 1864, Vol. I. pp. 290-292. On the Fossil Echinide of Malta (1863). Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1864, vol. xx. pp. 474-489. Table of the Stratigraphical Distribution of the Echinoderms of Malta (1863). Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1864, vol. xx. p. 490. Additional Notes on Cleeve-Hill Section (18645). Cotswold Club Proc. 1868, vol. iv. p- 60-70. On Gora Reefs, Present and Past. Cotswold Club Proce. 1868, vol. iv. pp. 97-178. Notes on a New Species of Starfish from the Ironstone Beds of the Inferior Oolite of Northamptonshire. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1870, vol. xxvi. pp. 391-393. On the Geological Features of the Country round Ross. Woolhope Field Club Trans. 1870, pp. 45-50. On the Coralline Formations of the Oolitic Rocks. Woolhope Field Club Trans. 1870, pp. 62-53. On the Correlation of the Jurassic Rocks, in the Department of the Cdte-d’?Or, France, with the Oolitic Formations in the Counties of Gloucester and Wilts, England (1870). Cotswold Club Proc. 1872, vol. y. pp. 148-238 ; Grou. Mac. 1870, Vol. VII. pp. 568-571. On a New Genus of Silurian Asteriade. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 18738, vol. xxix. p. 421, Monocrapus PUBLISHED BY THE PALMONTOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY. Fossil Oolitic Echinodermata, vols. i. and ii,, 1855-80, 65 plates, pp. 698. Fossil Cretaceous Echinodermata, vol. i. 1864-82, 87 plates, pp. 390. Liassic Ammonitide, vol. i. 1878-84, 90 plates, pp. 480. THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEVWISSERIES, “DECADE Ti ViG@Ea tl: No. III —MARCH, 1885. ORIGINAL ARTICIMS. I.—On tHE Ctost or tHe HigHnuanp CONTROVERSY. By Professor Coartes Lapwortu, LL.D., F.G.S. ; Mason Science College, Birmingham. LL those British geologists who have interested themselves in the long-vexed question of the geological position and true mode of origin of the Metamorphic rocks of the Highlands of Scot- land must have read with the greatest interest and pleasure the clear and vivid ‘Report on the Geology of the North-West of Sutherland,” by Messrs. Peach and Horne, in the pages of ‘‘ Nature”! for November last; and the manly and candid Introductory Observations by the Director-General of the Geological Survey. Not only does the publication of this Report put an end to one of the most keenly agitated controversies in the history of British Geology, but it explains and harmonizes the diverse views of the contending parties. The issue appears to me to be most creditable to all concerned. For many years the Highland controversy has appeared to outsiders, and to those geologists who were unaware of the difficulties attending the stratigraphy of the older rocks, as a trivial dispute between the Geological Survey on the one hand and a few misguided amateurs on the other. Sosimpleand so irresistible appeared to be the facts and arguments advanced by Sir Roderick Murchison and his followers in proof of a naturally conformable upward succession from the unaltered Silurian rocks of the North-West into the overlying metamorphic rocks of the Highlands, that they carried conviction to the minds of geologists of the first rank, from Lyell downwards. So overwhelm- ing indeed was the concensus of opinion in favour of the general accuracy of Murchison’s conclusions, that those geologists, who have so strongly denounced and so steadily endeavoured to disprove it, have had by no means an easy ora pleasurable task. That they com- mitted some mistakes and drew some erroneous conclusions during the prosecution of their investigations was inevitable, from the very novelty of the work, and the complicated nature of the stratigraphy. But when these mistakes are set off against the gigantic error which these investigators so successfully opposed, there will be found to be a most substantial balance in their favour, for which the future student of these old rocks will give them due credit. The story of the origin, the publication and the extraordinary suc- cess of the Murchisonian hypothesis of the Highland sequence, in spite 1 Nature, 1884, vol. xxxi. p. 29. DECADE III.—yVOL. I1,—NO. Il, a 98 Prof. C. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. of the manly opposition of Nicol; and of the labours, the discoveries, and the conclusions of its opponents, from the date of the bold re- opening of the controversy by Dr. Hicks, down to the issue of the report of Messrs. Peach and Horne, will form a most interesting and instructive chapter in the history of British Geology. It is to be hoped that some geologist, who is familiar with all the facts, and has not identified himself with either of the contending parties, will write this story for the information and edification of our scientific public in general, while the subject is still fresh in the minds of all. By myself, the Murchisonian hypothesis has been objected to upon two grounds: first, because I believed that the assumed _ strati- graphical proofs upon which it was founded were erroneous, and that their general acceptance delayed the discovery of the true laws of the stratigraphy. of the older convoluted rocks ; second, because the supposed ascending succession in the North-West seemed to shut up geologists in general to a theory of regional metamorphism, which I regarded as impossible and absurd. Some of my ideas respecting the worthlessness of Murchison’s stratigraphical evidences, were published in the first part of my uncompleted paper on the ««Secret of the Highlands,” together with a short sketch of the strati- graphical phenomena that might reasonably be expected in these mountain regions.!. The actual stratigraphy of the more important parts of the Durness-Eriboll district, and a sketch of the probable agency and mode of metamorphism of its schists, I trusted to be able to develope in the final parts of that paper; but a severe illness contracted by myself in working out the rocks in the North-West has prevented the execution of this task. Indeed, there is now no longer any absolute necessity for its completion, for the conclusions at which I arrived seem to me to be identical in all their essentials with those recently published by Messrs. Peach and Horne. A brief summary of my own results in so far as they affect the age, composition, and mode of formation of the eastern schists, as deduced from the remarkable stratigraphical and metamorphic pheno- mena apparent in Durness and Eriboll, will be found in the brief communication printed in the appendix to these remarks. It was written mainly to show the difference between my own views and _the views of those, on the one hand, who believed in the Archean age of all the Eastern metamorphic rocks, and of those, on the other, who held that because the Durness Limestone was succeeded, with apparent conformity, by the metamorphic schists in Sango Bay, the latter were geologically newer. It was read on my behalf by my friend Mr. J. H. Teall at the ordinary meeting of the Geologists’ Association on the 4th of July last, and is here reprinted, from an advanced proof, by the kind permission of the Council of the Asso- ciation. It is not referred to in this place, as establishing any selfish claim to priority, for the officers of the Survey reached their con- clusions in complete ignorance of my results, and from a. totally different direction, while they have gone far beyond me in working 1 See Guoz. Mac, Decade II. Vol. X. 1883, pp. 120, 198, and 337, Prof. C. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. 99 out the details of the subject. Should there be, however, any stray geologists who still hesitate to accept the statements of Messrs. Peach and Horne respecting the extraordinary nature of the strati- graphical phenomena in our British mountain region, and fail to appre- ciate the brilliant light thus thrown upon the true mode of origin of some of the crystalline schists, it may aid them in arriving at a correct opinion to note for themselves how two sets of investigators, coming to the Durness-Eriboll district with theoretical views almost diametri- cally opposed to each other, have independently arrived at, and independently made known, the same general conclusions, as regards (1) the sequence; (2) the extraordinary stratigraphical phenomena ; (83) the mode of metamorphism; (4) its Post-Cambrian date. We are now for the first time in a position to take stock, as it were, of the common acquisitions of all parties on the subjects of the stratigraphy and metamorphism of the rocks of the North-West Highlands. The more vital conclusions laid down in the Report of Messrs. Peach and Horne, or incidentally covered by it, are sum- marized below. It will be apparent on testing the references given (which include merely a single citation for the different investigators in each case) that they are in thorough accord with similar conclusions arrived at by one or by many of the opponents of the Murchisonian hypothesis, a circumstance which affords a strong presumption of their general correctness, and a high probability that they will soon ‘be accepted by all. Synopsis of our present ideas of the Geology of the Rocks of the North-West Highlands. (a) THE SEQUENCE. 1. The unaltered Paleozoic rocks of North-west Sutherland and Ross consist of four! main members—the Torridon Sandstone, the Quartzite, the Fucoid Group, and the Durness Limestone. 2. These major groups admit of subdivision into several recogniz- able zones,” capable of being easily identified upon the ground. 3. The Durness-Hriboll Limestone is the newest sedimentary rock * in the district. 4, The Upper Quartzite and Upper Limestone of Murchison are non-existent ;* the so-called Upper Quartzite is the Lower Quartzite repeated, and the so-called Upper Limestone is in reality a repetition of a part of the Durness Limestone itself. (b) Tum STRATIGRAPHY. 5. There is no* conformable upward succession, as held by Murchi- son and his followers, from the Silurian Rocks into the Eastern Gneissic series ; for— 1 Nicol, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1856, p. 20, ete. Hicks, Q.J.G.S. 1878, p. 813. Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 1883, p. 358, etc. Lapworth, Gzou. Mace. 1883, p. 123, etc. * Lapworth, Gzou. Mac. 1883, p. 126, ete. Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 1883, p. 358, ete. 3 Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 88, etc. Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 1881, p. 244. Lap- worth, Gron. Mac. 1883, p. 127. ' * Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 91, ete. Hudleston, Gon. Mac. 1882, p. 394. Lapworth, Grou. Mac. 1883, p. 127. Callaway, Q.J.G,.S. 1883, p. 367. > Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 86. Hicks, cbid. 1883, p. 157. Callaway, Q.J.G.8. 1883, p. 357. Lapworth, Grou. Maa. 1883, p. 127, 100 Prof. OC. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. 6. In some spots the basement beds of the local Paleeozoic rocks rest unconformably’ upon one member of the Hastern meta- morphic series: while— 7. Generally speaking, the line of junction of the unaltered Palzo- zoic rocks and the Eastern Metamorphic Series is a great fault ” and overthrust, along which— 8. The Eastern metamorphic series has been forced*® over the Silurian rocks by Harth-movements which have acted since Lower Silurian (Ordovician) times. 9. The schists and gneisses of Sango Bay and Farrid Head, which 10. 11. 12, 13. repose locally upon the Durness Limestones, do not form part of a continuous sedimentary succession. They are a part of the Eastern or Upper Gneissic Series, and they are separated from the Durness Limestone by planes of fault.* As these schists, etc., of Sango Bay are similar in character and arrangement to the zones of pressure schists occurring above the great overthrust in Hriboll,> nearly 10 miles to the 8.E. they afford a rough index of the enormous distance to which the metamorphic rocks have been forced over the under- lying sedimentary and unaltered deposits. Much of the Eastern Gneiss is merely the Archean ® gneiss repeated ; the Logan Rock of the Assynt district is generally the Archean’ brought up from below the overlying sedimentaries, and the Arnaboll Rock of Hriboll* is a part of the same Archean (Hebridean) gneiss. (c) Tax Mrramorpaism. The petrological, lithological, and mineralogical distinctions between the Hebridean gneiss and the Logan ® and Arnaboll Rocks and their equivalents are primarily due to the extra- ordinary mechanical disturbances *° to which the latter have been subjected. The planes of schistosity in the Eastern Metamorphic Schists, etc., between and above the great fault-planes, are not planes of bedding :" they are planes of shearing and cleavage, gliding planes (thrust-planes) along which the rocks have yielded to the lateral crust-pressure. 1 Lapworth, Gzon. Mae. 1883, p. 127. Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 1888, p. 407. Compare Hicks, 1880, Grou. Mae. p. 21. 2 Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 86. Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 18838, p. 357, ete. Hicks, Q.J.G.S. 1883, p. 157. Lapworth, Q.J.G.S8. 1883, p. 421. 3 Callaway, Q.J.G.S. 1883, p.410. Lapworth, /oc. cit. Compare Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 110, and Hicks, Groz. Mac. 1880, p.17. 4 Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, pp. 87, 88. Callaway, idid. 1881, p. 241. Lapworth, see Appendix. 5 Lapworth, 1884, see Appendix, p. 104. § Nicol, Q.J.G.S. 1861, p. 95. Hicks, ib¢d. 1878, p. 818, etc. etc. 7 Bonney, Hudleston, Proc. Geol. Assoc. 1879, p. 75; Q.J.G.S. 1880, p. 95. Callaway, ib¢d. 1883, p. 410. 8 Lapworth, Q.J.G.8. 1883, p. 422, etc. 9 Compare Bonney, Q.J.G.S. 1880, p. 95, etc. 10 Lapworth, 1884, see Appendix, p. 103. 11 Lapworth, 1884, doc. cit. Compare also Bonney, Q.J.G.S. 1883, p. 415, ete, : Prof. CO. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. 101 14. By the agency of this lateral earth-thrust, the Archean, the plutonic, and included patches of sedimentary rocks have been locally sheared and flattened out into rocks resembling hille- flintas! and rhyolites, even finely-laminated shales. 15. This Eastern Metamorphic Series of Sutherland and Ross not only contains Archean rocks, but also local patches of meta- morphosed Paleozoic,’ intrusive, and segregatory rocks, together with local patches of material probably compounded of all these in different degrees.? 16. This Eastern Metamorphic Series has received its present strike, pseudo-bedding and its present foliated and mineralogical characteristics through the agency of the crust movements which have operated within the district since Lower Silurian times.* Some of these conclusions may appear startling at first sight to those who have not followed with interest and appreciation the more recent developments of our knowledge of the geological phenomena of mountain districts. But they agree precisely with the results which have been already worked out by extra-British investigators. The stratigraphy of the North-West Highlands, as I have more than once suggested, is precisely of the same character as that so admirably described and illustrated by Heim ® in his magnificent work upon the Alps of Central Switzerland. The metamorphic phenomena of the north-west, too, are identical with those so minutely detailed and photographed in Lehmann’s most valuable work on the meta- morphic rocks of the Saxon® Erzgebirge. Continental geologists, British amateurs, and the officers of the Geological Survey are now at one and the same point. They stand together on the shore of a new world of geological discovery, full of the richest promise. But it must not be forgotten that the results already attained in the north-west are merely the preliminary sketches for a great and a most necessary work, namely, the detection of the chief laws of mountain stratigraphy and the discovery of the more important processes of regional metamorphism. Investigators are certain to crowd in hosts to the new ground in search of fresh discoveries, and geological pamphlets upon the district will soon be thick as leaves in Vallambrosa. All this will advance the science greatly, and much good will come of it. But before we can advance far beyond our present standpoint, it is absolutely requisite that the debatable region shall be accurately mapped and its complicated stratigraphy un- ravelled. 'This is a work which can only be accomplished speedily and in its entirety by the Geological Survey. And it is a preliminary and necessary work of the very first importance, for upon its speedy and satisfactory completion hang some of the most vital problems in British stratigraphical as well as in general theoretical geology. 1 Lapworth, Joc. cit. 1884. 2 Compare Hicks, 1883, Q.J.G.S. p. 147. 5 Lapworth, 1884, ibid. p. 104. 4 Lapworth, 1884, ibid. p. 105. 5 Heim, Mechanismus der Gebirgshildung, Basel, 1878. 6 Lehmann, Entstehung der Althrystallinischen Schiefergesteine, Bonn, 1884. 102 Prof. OC. Lapworth— Close of the Highland Controversy. By means of their recent labours in the Durness-Eriboll district Messrs. Peach and Horne have familiarized themselves with the ‘minutest details of its component formations, and have studied and interpreted its astounding stratigraphical phenomena in the area where they are most completely dissected by nature for the benefit of the investigator. No one who has the real interest of geology at heart but will earnestly hope and trust that they will uninterruptedly continue the work they have so excellently begun until it is thoroughly complete from Eriboll to Skye. May we soon see a Monograph upon the debatable land of the North-West, that shall compare with those fine works issued by the American Survey, and shall demonstrate both to our scientists and to the educated public at large that the members of our British Survey can not only lay down correctly upon their maps the true places of the economic treasures of the rocky floor of our country, but that they can interpret minutely and correctly the most com- plicated geological phenomena of our mountain regions ! But a work of this kind need not clash in the slightest degree with the contemporaneous work of amateurs in the same or in corre- sponding fields of research. The subject is perfectly free and open to all. very investigator has a right to address himself to any part of the work he pleases, and the right, if he deems it fitting to exercise it, to demand a full recognition of the importance of his own contribution to the common stock of discovery. No investigator, or body of investigators, has any claim, beyond that conceded by courtesy, to a monopoly in any special department of geology, local or theoretical. The only available geological possessions of the investigator are his abilities, his opportunities, and the fruits of the good work he has done in the past. The only authority he dare ‘recognize with safety is Nature herself. The extremest penalty for the slightest departure from the course she has marked out, whether committed wilfully or in ignorance, will be mercilessly exacted by her tardy but sure-footed avenger—Time. It seems to me that these are the conclusions that every one who knows the facts is certain to draw for himself, from the startling and sudden collapse of the brave Murchisonian hypothesis in our midst, and that they ought to have the effect of banishing partisanship, and of teaching us scientific toleration and mutual respect. At the present time the several groups of students of these old rocks are all met together upon one and the same elevated platform of a common opinion, having climbed up painfully thereto from many different directions. The old subject of dispute has utterly disappeared, and there is no longer any reasonable excuse for dissen- sion. We have all been partly right and partly wrong. It is a time for a hearty laugh all round, a time to shake hands and be friends. The inauguration of the Murchisonian hypothesis of the Highland succession marked the beginning in Britain of a period of bitter controversy, of estrangement of Survey men and amateurs, of decline in geological enthusiasm, and of comparative feebleness of geological research. Let us trust that its downfall marks the commencement Prof. C. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. 103 of a new and a happier period like that of the earlier years of the present century, when all British geologists shall meet upon an equal footing, in mutual communion and sympathy, and when the only rivalry between parties shall be in vieing with each other in develop- ing the unknown treasures in that new geological world of wonder now opening up before our eyes, where authority and precedent are alike unknown, and where so much awaits discovery that there is room and work and hope for all. APPENDIX. On THE STRATIGRAPHY AND MertTamorpPHisM oF THE Rocks OF THE Durness-Eripout Distrtot.’ By Cuarues Larwortu, LL.D., F.G.S., Professor of Geology and Mineralogy, Mason Science College, Birmingham. In? the district round Eriboll and Durness, the so-called Hastern (or Upper) Gneiss is composed of two very distinct members. The older member is the Arnaboll Gneiss, which is, in my opinion, nothing more nor less than the so-called Laurentian (or Lower Gneiss) brought up to the east of the Assynt (Durness-Hriboll) series by gigantic overfolds. The younger member, which is composed of the schistose meta- morphic rocks of the Moen and Central Sutherland, contains within it—forming almost inseparable parts of its mass—long strips and patches of the lower zones of the Assynt (Durness-Hriboll) series. The schistose quartzites or the quartz-schists (of some authors) of the Sutherland Schist Series are actually nothing more than the crushed and mechanically metamorphosed ends of long wedges of the Assynt Series, and are often in visible continuity upon the ground with the unaltered Assynt beds. I hold that the Sutherland Schistose Series is composed of a com- plete intermixture of Archwan and Assynt rocks, the two series being so interfolded and interfelted together that (exception being made of those zones near the great overfanlts where the metamor- phism is incomplete) they can never be separated in the field, but must be mapped simply as ‘‘ metamorphic.” The planes of foliation and schistosity in the (so-called) Upper Metamorphic Series of Sutherland are not planes of bedding ; they are planes of cleavage—that is, gliding-planes, along which the rocks have yielded to the irresistible pressure of the lateral Earth- creep during the process of mountain-making. This pressure was so extraordinary that granites, syenites, pegmatites, gneisses, and quartzites have been crushed to powder, and have been finally flat- tened out into rocks having all the external characters of halleflintas and even finely laminated shales. Every stage of the crushing pro- cess is recognizable in the field and under the microscope, from the coarsest pegmatite and gneiss down to the so-called metamorphic shales, schists, and slates. Hence the most highly metamorphosed * Read at Ordinary Meeting of Geologists’ Association, July 4th, 1884. * The communication is printed as read. A few words have been added by Prof. Lapworth for the sake of clearness of description. These are given in brackets.— J.J. H, Teauu. ‘ 104 Prof. O. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. rocks of Hriboll are not the coarse Hebridean Gneisses, but the fine slaty schists. The process of rock-folding in the region is exceedingly complex, and has resulted in most remarkable phenomena. The rock-folds (and faults) are of all grades, from miles across down to microscopic. In some cases the original dividing plane (either bedding plane or fault plane) of two successive rock-sheets has been twisted into the form of spirals, cornucopias, etc. Folding, interfolding, buckling, shearing, stretching have all taken effect again and again along the junction (fault or bedding) plane between the Sedimentaries and Archean ; and innumerable protrusions of igneous rock —plutonic—— have forced their way in numberless veins in the latter (Archean) up to the former (Sedimentaries). At present, even near the line where the two distinct sets of rocks retain their recognizable individuality, the schistose layers that form the so-called lowest beds of the Eastern Schists are (occasionally) compounded of materials of such different origin that even in the same hand- specimen (from one locality) I believe that it can be sometimes demonstrated that certain parts of a layer may be mainly Assynt, other parts mainly Archean, and other parts mainly intrusive or segregatory. ‘The result is a comparatively homogeneous schist; but who shall indicate its geological age ? Schists composed of Archean, Ordovician (sedimentary), and intrusive rocks respectively, form part and parcel of one and the same (lowest or heterogeneous) zone in the Hastern (Schistose) area, and intermingled with them occur schists (apparently) composed of mixtures of all three in different degrees. Here and there near the junction line (between the present Durness-Hriboll Series and the present Eastern Metamorphic Series) we can say: This band (a) is essentially or wholly Archean ; this (b) is certainly Ordovician ; and this (¢) probably intrusive rock. But as we go further east all recognizable distinctions vanish one by one, and in the present state of our knowledge all that we can presume to say is, that, considered as a whole, the Hastern Schist of Central Sutherland is in all probability an intimate compound of sheets of (1) Archean, (2) Sedimentary, and (8) Intrusive rocks, which have been crushed into slaty rock, in which crystallization has set up along the cleavage planes. The quartz, and possibly some of the mica, of the Upper Schists may have been largely derived from the Sedimentaries ; hence the highly quartzose nature of these schists. Their felspar has either been derived from the Archzan, or from intrusive plutonic rocks. So far as my own observations go, there seems to be no trace what- ever of any sedimentary rock in the Durness-Hriboll region of more recent date than the Durness Limestone. The thin, so-called Upper Quartzite band of Sango Bay is the crushed basement zone of the Lower Quartzite. The green schists overlying it are pressure schists, formed and brought over in the great overfault. The same zone occurs again in Hriboll, along the great fault-line of the Upper Schist series. If (like those geologists who erroneously maintain that these Sango Bay Schists, etc., naturally succeed the Durness Limestone), Prof. C. Lapworth—Close of the Highland Controversy. 1065 we regard these green schists, etc., above the Limestone in the Sango Bay section as (forming part of) a true (sedimentary) sequence, we can prove with equally valuable evidence, indeed upon identical grounds— (1) In Sango Bay that these green schists overlie the Limestone. (2) In (near) Arnaboll that they follow at once to the basement bed of the Quartzite. (3) In Hriboll (in some localities) that they are interstratified with the Hebridean. (4) And (in other localities) that they trough the Tomer Quartzite, coming out from below it. (0) And also, as in Craig Faolinn, that they are the junction (transition) beds of the Lower and Upper Gneissic Series. In other words, that they are below the Ordovician, above the Ordovician, in the Quartzite, above the Quartzite, in the Hebridean, and in the Upper Gneiss (so called) all at one and the same time ! I believe at present that the great area of metamorphic schists of Sutherland and the Central Highlands is, as a whole, neither Archean nor Ordovician. The Sutherland Gneiss—Arnaboll—is Archean. The Sutherland Schist has been manufactured’ since Silurian times. For all I know, there may be large areas (in the Central Highlands, etc.) composed wholly of Archean (Laurentian) rocks, or of Cambrian or pre-Cambrian rocks. When the meta- morphism of the Highland area began I think that it is impossible to say, and may be always impossible. One thing seems pretty clear to me—the so-called oldest beds of the Highland succession of the Schistose Series of the N.W. Highlands are the newest in point of time. The zone of intermixture and metamorphism (in Sutherland) travelled to west from east, and the last beds (schists) manufactured are those now in contact with the Assynt Series in Durness, Eriboll, and Assynt. . Strikes, dips, and visible sequences are worse than useless in these metamorphic rocks as indices of chronological sequence. I cannot help believing that we have in the Highlands merely the remains of a decraded mountain complex. That fragment of the N.W. Highlands where the fossil-bearing beds occur, is the newest (of its component ranges) in point of time. Some ranges were certainly in existence in the Highlands in the Old Red times, and, for all we know to the contrary, some in Silurian times aiso. The Highland area has, I consider, been the theatre of mountain-making, and of igneous action again and again, since then. If the same crumpling has taken place over its whole surface as has certainly taken place in Hriboll, its present width must be the merest fraction of its original extent, and the manufacture of its schists and gneisses may have gone on in some localities below its surface from pre-Cambrian times to the present without interruption. The attempt to claim all its (Central Highland) rocks as pre- Cambrian is perhaps a little more justifiable than the attempt to 1 (ze. the heterogeneous materials of which it is composed have undergone re-arrangement, and haye received a new and a common set of petrological features, through the agency of the great Earth-mill). 106 J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quartz-Felsites and Augite- Granites. claim them as Silurian. At present the disproof of the “visible ascending succession” of the Murchisonian party is a_ brilliant triumph for the Nicolites. But the truth lies, I cannot help believing, between the two views. If I can prove my case, we shall find :— (1) That there is no recognizable chronological sequence (or in- variable succession of superposition) in the metamorphic Highland area corresponding to that among the sedimentary formations (for the planes dividing the truly metamorphic layers are not planes of deposition, but planes of shearing and cleavage). (2) Many of its (the Highland) schists are composed of Archean materials (rocks), which have received their present pseudo-bedded arrangement since Ordovician times. (8) What proportion of its schists and gneisses is composed of Archean, sedimentary, or intrusive materials respectively is in all probability an insoluble question. (4) Its gneisses may be either Archean or (some) possibly formed by intrusion (injection of plutonic rocks) in later ages. (5) Its schists may be composed either of crushed Archzans, crushed intrusives, or of a mixture of these with sedimentaries. (6) Its (so-called) slates may be (according to the locality, either normal slates or) crushed rocks not yet crystallized (and) of either Archean, sedimentary, intrusive, or of mixed origin. JJ.—On some Quartz-Frtsites AND AUGITE-GRANITES FROM THE Cueviot Disrrict. By J. J. Harris Teatt, M.A., F.G.S. N previous communications to the Grotocican Macaztne' I have described at some length the petrographical characters of the lavas and tuffs of the Cheviot District. It was proved that they are, at any rate for the most part, of an andesitic character, and that some of them are so little altered as to be thoroughly entitled to the term andesite, unless we are prepared to adopt the unphilosophical system of making geological age, per se, a factor in petrographical nomenclature. If we leave out of account the modifications in structure and composition which have been superinduced on the rocks by the various agents of change, then the Cheviot lavas and tuffs belong to the three fairly well characterized groups of the augite-, hypersthene-, and mica-andesites. It is interesting to note that pumice and ash having essentially the same chemical and mineralogical composition as the Cheviot hyper- sthene-andesite was erupted in immense quantities by the volcano of Krakatoa in the autumn of last year: a fact which testifies in a striking manner to the uniformity in volcanic phenomena during immense periods of geological time. In the present communication I propose to describe some intrusive rocks that occur in the Cheviot district. They belong to two well- marked groups—the quartz-felsites and the augite-biotite-granites. 1 Notes on the Cheviot Andesites and Porphyrites, Gror. Mac. 1883, pp. 100, 146, 262. J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quartsz-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 107 It is necessary to state that my visit to the Cheviots was made after the reading of a paper on the geological structure of the district at the Geological Society by Mr. Clough, at which I was present. I was guided to many of the localities mentioned in this communication by information obtained from that paper. I regret very much indeed that it has not yet been published. It deals with the mutual relations of the rocks referred to in the present com- munication, but so far as I can remember, it does not contain detailed petrographical descriptions. THE QUARTZ-FELSITES. I have observed these rocks in three localities in the porphyrite region ; in the Ridlees Burn about 14 mile from its junction with the Coquet; in the Coquet itself about 1 mile above Shillmoor Farm ; and in the Usway rather more than 4 mile from its junction with the Coquet. In each case the rocks occur as dykes in the porphyrites, and they are well exposed in the actual banks of the several streams. There is no marked variation in the rocks from the different localities, and they may therefore be described collec- tively. In colour they vary from pale red to dull purple. In texture they are not conspicuously porphyritic, the individual crystals rarely exceeding a length of two mm. Hxamined with a hand lens the most conspicuous mineral is seen to be biotite, which is evenly scattered through the rock in the form of beautiful hexagonal tablets. Crystals of felspar, usually of the same colour as the ground-mass, but occasionally weathering white, may be recognized. Grains of quartz are also seen to be present, but their importance as constituents of the rock is not recognized until the thin sections are examined. The matrix presents the usual felsitic character. Under the microscope the biotite is seen to be of a perfectlynormal character. Its boundaries are intact; a fact which shows that in the case of this rock the magma exerted no corrosive action on the mineral. The only inclusions are apatite and magnetite. Quartz is the next mineral inimportance. It usually occurs in irregular grains, but occasionally in the form of more or less regular crystals. It contains inlets and inclusions of the ground-mass, and sometimes the form of the grain is as irregular as the island of Celebes. The relation of the quartz to the ground-mass is therefore seen to be that which is so especially characteristic of the rhyolites. Mica occa- sionally occurs as an inclusion in the quartz. The felspars are so similar in appearance to the ground-mass on account of the presence of irregular and ill-defined brownish flecks and scales (ferrite: Vogelsang) that they may sometimes be overlooked when examining the rock by ordinary light. Under polarized light they become at once apparent, and in the majority of cases may be identified as orthoclase, a conclusion which is confirmed by Mr. Waller’s analysis (see p. 111). The ground-mass is perhaps the most interesting portion of the rock so far as microscopic characters are concerned. It presents several very interesting modifications; but before pro- ceeding to describe these, it seems advisable to make a few general 108 J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite- Granites. remarks on the subject of the ground-mass of the quartz-porphyries * in order that the terms employed may be clearly understood. The characters of this ground-mass have been made the subject of elaborate researches by many observers, and the most diverse Opinions have been expressed as to their true significance. The whole subject has been discussed by Rosenbusch, with his usual critical ability, in his work “ Die massige Gesteine,”* and in the following communication I propose to adopt his terms. In any attempt to acquire definite ideas as to the nature of this ground-mass, it is advisable to remember that there are in this, as in every branch of petrography, two more or less independent points of view; the descriptive and the etiological. We may consider the actual characters of the ground-mass without reference to their origin, or we may attempt to form some notion of the manner in which they have been produced. From the first point of view two modifications of the ground-mass stand out as the antitheses of each other, and present no difficulty in the way of description. On the one hand we have an isotropic glass, and on the other an aggregate which is capable of resolution, either with a hand lens or with the microscope, into a congeries of perfectly definite crystalline grains. The terms vitrophyre and granophyre were proposed by Vogelsang® to include those quartz-porphyries in which the ground-mass is pre- sent in one or other of these forms. Rosenbusch,* however, has shown that the granophyres of Vogelsang may be subdivided into two groups, to which he proposes to apply the terms micro-granite and granophyre. The rocks of these two groups are distinguished from each other by the mutual relations of the crystalline constituents of the ground-mass. In micro-granites these constituents are related to each other in the same way as the constituents of granite or granulite. They consist of crystalline grains, mostly of felspar and - quartz, which are arranged without any regularity. In granophyres, on the other hand, the quartz and felspar are intergrown according to more or less definite laws, so that definite structures, such as micro-pegmatite, may be recognized in these rocks. One special type of structure which is frequently present in these rocks, and is often seen in association with the true micropegmatite, is termed by Rosenbusch pseudo-spherulitic. True spherulites, according to him, are composed of crystalline fibres of one and the same substance, all radiating from a common centre, and having an axis of elasticity parallel with the length of the fibre. They are therefore character- ized under the microscope with crossed Nicols by a perfectly definite four-armed cross, the arms of which lie parallel with the vibration planes of the Nicols, and remain stationary as the stage is rotated. The spherulitic structures of the granopbyres are, however, com- posed of quartz and felspar, so that the axes of elasticity in the 1 It must be remembered that the terms quartz-porphyry and quartz-felsite are not synonymous. The former term is the more comprehensive, as it includes such rocks as the porphyritic pitchstones (Vitrophyr of Vogelsang). 2 Page 60. 3 Die Krystalliten, Bonn, 1875, p. 160. 4 Zusammensetzung und Structur granitischer Gesteine, Z.D.G.G. 1876, p. 369. J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 109 different elements of the spherulite may have different positions in relation to the spherulite as a whole. Under crossed Nicols such a structure may give rise to more or fewer arms than the number characteristic of true spherulites, and these arms may not lie parallel to the vibration planes of the Nicols. Such structures, wherever they may occur, Professor Rosenbusch proposes to call pseudo- spherulites. The.granophyres, then, are distinguished by the presence of a micro-pegmatitic, pseudo-spherulitic or some allied structure in the ground-mass ; whereas the ground-mass of the micro-granites is an irregular aggregate of crystalline grains. Rosenbusch also uses the adjective granophyric to express the various modifications of structure which occur in the ground-mass of the granophyres. It is some- what unfortunate that the term granophyre should have been used in two senses, but no confusion will arise if we remember that the granophyre of Vogelsang comprises the micro-granite as well as the granophyre of Rosenbusch. It is always advisable in describing rocks and rock-structures to refer to typical examples. The rock from the summit of Carrock Fell, Cumberland, which was well described by Ward? as a spherulitic felsite, is a most beautiful granophyre, as that term is employed by Rosenbusch. The ground- mass sometimes shows the micro-pegmatitic structure only, and sometimes the pseudo-spherulitic ; the two structures often co-exist and together they produce the granophyric structure of Rosenbusch. This rock is also interesting on account of the presence of well- formed crystals of a monoclinic pyroxene. It is identical with the granophyre’ of the Fontaine Laquainte, Kirneckthal, Dep. des Vosges, which occurs as a dyke in the andalusit-hornfels of that district. Between the micro-granites and granophyres on the one hand, and the vitrophyres on the other, we have a group of rocks (the felso- phyres of Vogelsang) about which the most diverse opinions have been held. It is with reference to these that the terms micro-felsite and ecrypto-crystalline have been used. They can be defined only by employing negative characters. Their ground-mass is neither a true glass nor a recognizable aggregate of crystalline grains. When examined under polarized light, it may or may not appear perfectly isotropic. If isotropic, it is distinguished from a glass by the fact that it appears to be composed of ill-defined flecks, scales, fibres, and granules. ‘T'o this Rosenbusch proposes to restrict the term micro- felsite, and there is no doubt that if this propositio& be generally accepted, it will tend to facilitate very greatly the precise description of rocks of this class. If not isotropic, then it is distinguished from the micro-crystalline ground-mass by the apparent absence of definite boundaries to the doubly refracting particles. The term crypto- crystalline is applied to this structure. Now in dealing with this crypto-crystalline ground-mass, we ex- perience precisely the same difficulties as those experienced by the older petrographers in dealing with the felsitic base. The introdue- tion of the microscope has not removed the difficulties ; it has only 1Q. J. G. 8S. vol. xxx. p. 20, * Die Steiger Schiefer, p. 345. 110 J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite- Granites. pushed them a little further back. Let us endeavour to take stock of our present position in relation to this subject. In discussing the question it is necessary to remember that the microscope does not enable us to approach the limits of the molecular world. There is room for a universe of phenomena, so to speak, between the limit of microscopic visibility and that of mole- cular structure. Hence, many structures and modes of association in minerals which we observe macroscopically and microscopically, as well as others which we cannot observe, may exist in this ultra- microscopic universe. Now many rocks which show a crypto- crystalline structure, when examined in thick sections and with low powers, may be resolved, by reducing the thickness of the sections and by using higher powers, either into a micro-crystalline aggregate or into doubly refracting particles, and a glassy or micro-felsitic base. If the doubly refracting particles are small in comparison with the thickness of the slide, then, owing to their superposition, they will give rise to the indefinite aspect under crossed Nicols which is the special characteristic of crypto-crystalline matter. These considerations lead us, therefore, to the conclusion that the term crypto-crystalline includes different things and is useful merely for the purpose of expressing our ignorance as to the precise con- dition of the matter to which it is applied. It is an expression which is rendered necessary in consequence of imperfection in our methods of observation, and does not correspond with anything definite in the nature of things. It is a subjective and not an objective term, and one that we must therefore use for the purpose of expressing our ignorance, and not for the purpose of concealing it. In concluding this discussion it is well to remark that the felsophyres, granophyres, and micro-granites cannot be distinguished from each other by macroscopic examination. All that we can do in the field is to separate the quartz-porphyries with a vitreous from those with a felsitic ground-mass. The former may be termed vitrophyres, while for the latter our own term, quartz-felsite, is very appropriate. If we consider the porphyry ground-mass from the etiological point of view, then we have to recognize the fact that the micro- and crypto-crystalline ground-masses may owe their double refraction either to crystallization at the time of consolidation or to the sub- sequent devitrification of an original glassy substance. [erlitic structure, so far as we know, can only arise during the consolidation of a glass, and we may therefore fairly conclude with Mr. Allport} and others that rocks which show this structure were originally in the glassy condition. In many cases, however, a perlitic rock will split up under crossed Nicols into a micro-crystalline aggregate. So far as I know, we have at present, in the absence of perlitic or some other structure equally characteristic of a glass, no test by which we can distinguish an original micro- or crypto-crystalline ground- mass from one which has been produced by subsequent devitrifica- tion. - Here again we have to make a confession of ignorance. If we look at the quartz-porphyries in their relations to other 1 On Devitrified Pitchstones and Perlites of Shropshire, Q.J.G.S. vol. xxxiii. p. 449, J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quartz-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 111 rocks, we see that they shade off on the one side into rhyclites, and on the other into granites. Asa whole, they occupy the same position in the acid series as the diabases and dolerites in the basic series ; they are intermediate between the volcanic and the plutonic rocks, but without well-defined limits. The subdivisions as well as the general relations of the quartz- porphyries may be expressed as follows : Volcanic. RuHYOLITE. Vitrophyre Intermediate. QuaRTZz- PoRPHYRY Felsophyre. Quartz-felsite Granophyre. Micro-granite. Plutonic. CERTAIN GRANITES. I now proceed to give a description of the ground-mass of the Cheviot quartz-felsites. Hxamined by ordinary light it never pre- sents the appearance of a true glass. Ill-defined specks, flecks, fibres, and scales of a brownish substance (ferrite), are everywhere present and lie superposed over each other in the thinnest sections. As a rule these are scattered uniformly throughout the substance of the ground-mass, but in some instances they give rise to small spherical aggregates exactly as in certain rhyolites from Hungary and the Ponza Islands. Under crossed Nicols the ground-mass is seen to be micro- or erypto-crystalline; no portion appears to remain dark under crossed Nicols. In one case a very interesting structure occurs. The ground-mass presents a perfectly normal appearance when examined by ordinary light, but under crossed Nicols it splits up into a coarse-grained crystalline aggregate. The boundaries of the different doubly-refracting grains are perfectly irregular, and are not recognizable by ordinary light. Every quartz crystal in the rock forms the nucleus of one of these grains, so that the space surrounding it extinguishes simultaneously with the crystal itself. This fact seems to show that the substance which has deter- mined the definite optical characters of the ground-mass is quartz, although other substances must be present in considerable quantity. I incline to the view that we have here a case of true devitrification ; but as there are no structures especially characteristic of glass, it seems impossible to be certain on this point. In some slides the pseudo-spherulitic structure may be detected in places, and this may be taken as indicating an approach to the grano- phyric structure of Rosenbusch. Mr. Waller kindly analyzed a specimen froma point in the Coquet about 4 mile above Shillmoor Farm, with the following result : SiQg ResRe na aR UA don ob a are rm AY a ali aM a AA) Al,O3 Hope saad bdo see! eae boc! ado 15°7 Fee03 3°0 CaO 14 INIEEAO) Lacs. Ameo a eta Mem cece 2s FOR et ee nea LFF) K20 eae ieee 5°6 Loss 3°7 | - o oO co 112 J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quartz-Felsites and Augite- Granites. In addition to the quartz-felsites above described, there are others in the granitic region; but as these, at any rate in places, appear to me to be of the nature of contemporaneous veins, I will refer to such as I have observed in describing the granitic rocks. Tur AvuGits-Brorrre-GRANITE. It has long been known that in the sparsely populated but by no means inhospitable recesses of the Cheviot Hills extensive tracts of granitic rocks occur. The precise relations of these rocks to the porphyrites have not yet been described, and we must wait until the Survey Maps and publications are out before we can obtain detailed information on this subject. My own knowledge of these rocks, as they occur in the field, was obtained during two short excursions ; one to Linhope Spout, the other involving a walk from Usway Ford round the head-waters of the Breamish, by Staindrop Rigg and Hedgehope, to Langley Ford in the valley of the Harthope Burn. As it was necessary to get from Usway Ford to Wooler in one day, there was no time available for a search for junctions, and I had to content myself with collecting specimens of such rocks as came in my way. The principal interest attaching to these rocks centres in the fact that they present us with a type hitherto unknown in Britain, and by no means widely recognized in other parts of the world. They are true augite-bearing granites similar in all essential re- spects to the augite-granite of Laveline in the Vosges, described by Rosenbusch,! and that of Oberbruck also in the Vosges, described by Cohen.? Prof. Rosenbusch has seen my specimens, and agrees with me in my determination; he has also very kindly supplied me with specimens of the rocks from Laveline and Oberbruck. As the augite is the most interesting constituent, I will describe it before proceeding to refer to the rocks in which it occurs. It is present in the form of irregular grains, granular aggregates, and sometimes, though rarely, in more or less definite crystals. It is almost colourless in thin section, exhibiting only a slight inclination to a pale green tint. Inclusions of magnetite are not uncommon. Cross sections show the characteristic cleavages of augite, and longitudinal sections give a maximum extinction of 48° or 44°, Twinning may occasionally be observed. Alteration tends to develope serpentinous and not chloritic products, and the separation of iron-oxide appears to accompany the change. In appearance the mineral is identical with the augite of the Vosges rocks above referred to, and we may safely conclude that it has an analogous composition. Dr. Alphonse Merian® has recently isolated and analyzed the augite of the Laveline rock, and he finds that it possesses the following composition :— 17. D. G. G. 1876, p. 369. 2 Neues Jahr. 1883, vol. i. p. 200. 3 Studien an gesteiisbildenden Pyroxenen. Neues Jahrbuch III, Beilage Band, p. 262. J. H. Teall—COheviot Quartz-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 113 Si02 Bea eerie ska), ses deed nee eali- eee OUR CORI Al205 sighs ASS e Oe emer ETIGH Fs os 87 os RE OM ree VO 22 RRA ee Bee e PRe UPR IUL ERA Na tReN L223, Sif Sis PSR ee : MeO oi Mend Lene hhe sacl Sera wee, amet us 0) 1! CaO PAT ae wera ers sera cars| Ss eeeeMr ON OU) Na,O 900 OS0 500 leis. coo ales 500 coo 1:02 Ti02 AAS seco be dot ata alge hana ti Wek ena eae 79 99°84 Sp. Gr. 3°372. It is therefore a non-aluminous iron-bearing augite of the diopside type allied to the augite of the augite-syenites. The tendency of the mineral to pass into serpentinous rather than-chloritic alteration products is of course due to the absence of alumina. I now proceed to describe the rocks in which the above mineral occurs. They are usually coarse-grained, holocrystalline, non- porphyritic rocks, which vary considerably in aspect and in the relative proportions of the different constituents. Some of the varieties are dark and syenitic-looking ; others resemble a grey or pink granite of normal aspect. Owing to the variability of the rocks, it will be advisable to describe the special types which have been examined. Linhope Burn, 4 mile above Linhope Farm.—A dark-coloured syenitic- looking variety, composed of orthoclase, plagioclase, with low ex- tinction angles, quartz, augite, biotite, magnetite, apatite and serpen- tinous alteration products. Felspars of both kinds very abundant. Augite well represented. Quartz in moderate quantity. Linhope Spout.—In the immediate neighbourhood of the waterfall several very interesting rocks may be observed. The augite-granite is here traversed by dykes and veins of quartz-felsite, which some- times show under the microscope the micro-granitic, at other times the granophyric structures. These two structures often co-exist in the same slide, but as a rule one or other predominates. Biotite and augite are occasionally present, but the latter mineral is decidedly rare. I incline to the view that these are of the nature of con- temporaneous veins, and if so, a very interesting conclusion, which will be referred to later on, may be drawn from this fact. They are evidently more acid in composition than the normal rock. The augite-granite of Linhope Spout is a coarse-grained rock, in which flesh-coloured orthoclase, light-coloured plagioclase, biotite and a dark green mineral (the augite) may be recognized by macro- scopic examination. Under the microscope quartz is seen to occur abundantly, the augite may be identified, and magnetite and apatite may be recognized. One very interesting feature is the tendency of the quartz and felspar to form micro-pegmatite. This is also noticeable in the augite-granites of the Vosges, and it may there- fore be rewarded as a characteristic feature of this class of rocks. Staindrop Rigg.—On the high ground between the Het Bum and Staindrop Burn there are two conspicuous craggy bosses of a greyish granite. These form Staindrop Rigg. A similar rock occurs low DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. III. 8 114 J. A. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite-Granites. down to the §.E. of this exposure, so that in all probability it forms an extensive tract in this district. Examination with a hand lens enables one to recognize easily a pink potash felspar, a light-coloured almost white plagioclase, biotite and quartz. The felspars sometimes measure + of an inch across, and so give the rock a slight porphyritic aspect. They may be easily isolated and examined by Szabo’s method. I give below the results of my own examination of these felspars and also those obtained by myself and Dr. Szabo on some typical felspars. EXAMINATION OF FELSPARS BY SzABO’s Meron. Ist Experiment. 2nd Experiment. foe ont Na,O K,O | Fusibility. || NagO | K.0 | Fusibility. |; Na,O | K,0 1—5 | 1-38) 1-4 || 1-5] 1-8 1—5 1—5 | 1—4 A (T) 4—5 0 3—4 4—5 0 4—5 5) 1—2 B (8) 4—5 0 8—4 || 4—5 0 4—5 4—5 | 1-2 CUS B= 0 9 —4 SEA 36 Eo D(T) 3 0 2—3 4 0 4 4—5 1 E(T) 4 0 pales | A 4 5 1 F(T) 3 2 gens gi 4| Go: tg 4 4 3 G(S) | 3-4 2 2 Bao 4 Beds 18 A. Oligoclase Twedstrand (Teall). B. Oligociase (Szabo). C. Andesine (Szabo). PD. Andesine, Scourie Dyke (Teall). E. Plagioclase, granite, Staindrop Rigg (Teall). F, Orthoclase, granite, Staindrop Rigs (Teall). G. Perthite group (Szabo). Mr. Waller, of Birmingham, appears to have been the first observer who applied Szabo’s method to the practical determination of minerals in this country, and ] am indebted to that gentleman for instruction in the working of the method. There is no doubt that it is a quick and reliable method for obtaining very valuable information as to the nature of the constituents of rocks. The above experiments prove clearly that the plagioclase belongs to the oligo- clase-andesine group and the potash felspar to the perthite group of Szabo; a group which is characterized by the presence of from 4 to 6 per cent. of soda." The two felspars occur in about equal proportions in the rock from Staindrop Rigg. Augite and magnetite may be recognized under the microscope, but they are far less abundant than in the syenitic-looking varieties from Linhope Spout. Quartz on the other hand is more abundant. The microstructure of the rock is thoroughly , granitic. Narrow contemporaneous veins of quartz and felspar with 1 Tn is interesting to note that the augite-syenites and their porphyritic equivalents of the Christiania district contain felspar rich in soda which appears to be sometimes monoclinic and sometimes triclinic, with a cleavage angle differing but slightly from 90°. Brégger has described these two forms in great detail (Die Silurischen Etagen 2 und 3, p. 208, et seq.). He names them soda-orthoclase and soda- microcline. J. H. Tealli—Cheviot Quartz-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 115 very little biotite may be observed in the mass of the rock at Staindrop Rigg. Comb Fell.—I collected several specimens from the western side of Comb Fell. They are all varieties of a pinkish biotite granite, in which orthoclase appears to be the dominant felspar. Augite is present only in very small quantity. Hedgehope.—This mountain is largely if not entirely composed of granite. Specimens from the eastern side are similar in character to those from Staindrop and therefore require no special description. In taking a general view of the holocrystalline granitic rocks of the Cheviot District one fact stands out in a prominent manner. They are by no means uniform in composition. Some are rich in basic minerals, others are comparatively poor; some contain plagio- clase, others a soda-orthoclase, as the dominating felspar. The dif- ferent varieties do not appear to be in all cases sharply separated from each other. A possible explanation of this variability will be referred to later on. CoMPARISON OF THE CHEVIOT AUGITE-GRANITES WITH ALLIED ROCKS OF OTHER DrsTRICTS. The occurrence of augite rocks containing quartz and orthoclase is such a striking violation of one of Breithaupt’s laws of paragenesis as to give these Cheviot granites a special interest. This occurrence was first recognized according to Rosenbusch ' by Vom Rath in the case of a quartz-porphyry from Campiglia (Tuscany), which contains orthoclase, plagioclase, augite, magnetite, mica, and quartz. In North Saxony, near Leipzig, there is an exten- sive development of augite-bearing quartz-porphyries. These rocks have been investigated by Tschermak, Naumann, Kalkowsky, Rosen- busch, and Penck. They are classed with the upper portion of the middle Rothliegende by the last-mentioned author.? Rosenbusch * has identified a rhombic as well as a monoclinic pyroxene in these rocks, and I may mention that in one case I observed in a Cheviot granite a mineral that was most probably enstatite or bronzite. Then again there are the remarkable pyroxene-granulites of the eranulitie 1 region of Tuscany which have been described by Stelzner,* Dathe,> and Lehmann.’ These have been divided by Dathe into orthoclase- and plagioclase-diallage-granulites, according to the nature of the dominant felspar. They contain monoclinic and rhombic pyroxenes, and in this respect resemble the quartz-porphyries of North Saxony. Until recently they have always been regarded as Archean, but the work of Dr. Lehmann has destroyed much of the evidence on which this conclusion was based. In the same connexion we must mention the quartz-less augite- syenites of Monzoni, described by Vom Rath,’ and those of Norway 1 Massige Gesteine, p. 58. 2 Die pyroxen- fiihrenden Gesteine des nord-sichsichen Porphyrgebietes, Min. Mitth. 1881, p. 72. 3 Massige Gesteine, p. 58. 4 Neues Jahr. 1871, p. 246. 557) DeGaGe 1877, p. 285. 6 Die Entstehung der alt-kr ystallinischen Schiefer-gesteine, p. 228. 7 7Z. D. G. G. 1875, 343-357. 116 J. H. Teali—Cheviot Quartsz-Felsites and A gite-Granites. described by many observers, but especially by Br gger.! The orthoclase in these rocks, like that of the Cheviot vranites, is rich in soda. The augite-granites of the Vosges have been already referred to, and as they are very closely related to the Cheviot rocks, it is necessary to quote their analyses. ie IL. SiO, PG IGOS Petia 62°09 TiO, 1 Aer MONE Oy eae aR Ri 56 Al,O; cose ee Loglomeeire ss, 16:45 Fe.03 900 © 900 3°63 one 690 2°34 FeO Sree Rel 2°31 RB a 2°03 CaO ee eee O48) teal ae 2°32 MgO Pee er aN G0 0 aa gia eee S08 Na,O fees IBS ECs weak | eek 4-07 K20 vee, Mets 611 Moe Steere 4:66 H,0 114 "85 99-04 98°43 I.% Augite-Granite from Laveline. Sp. Gr. 2-723. II.° Augite-granite from Oberbruck. Analyses by Werveke. Rosenbusch*‘ has also recognized fresh pyroxene in the Vosges, porphyries of Etival, Rothau, Rochesson, and in a rock which is sometimes a quartz-porphyry and sometimes a granite from the Titisee in the Schwartzwald. He remarks that the mineral is absent as a rule from massive granites, but that he has observed it abundantly in one case, viz. that of a rock from the Julier Pass. Mourvat Reiations or THE Ie@neous Rocks oF THE CHEVIOT DistRict. The facts, so far as they are known at present, appear to show that the first period of volcanic activity in this district was marked by the eruption of immense quantities of andesitic lava and tuff. The andesites fall into three groups, characterized respectively by the minerals hypersthene (bronzite), augite, and mica. Most of them are now much altered, and to these altered forms I have restricted the term porphyrite. The presence of tuffs, vesicular and amygdaloidal varieties of lava, and actual evidences of flow, proves that the conditions of eruption were substantially identical with those of modern times. The eruption of andesitic material was followed by the intrusion of quartz-felsite dykes. If the magma which produced these dykes ever reached the surface, it must unquestionably have formed rhyolites and rhyolitic tuffs. Do such rocks occur anywhere in the Cheviot District? The dykes of quartz-felsite occur in the porphyrite region, so that we have conclusive evidence to show that the eruption of acid followed that of andesitic material in the history of the Cheviot Old Red Sandstone volcanoes. The intrusion of quartz-felsite dykes appears to have been the concluding phase of the volcanic activity of Old Red Sandstone times; for such dykes as those of Acklinton, which cut the Carbon- 1 Die silurischen Etagen 2 und 3. 2 Studien an gesteinsbildenden Pyroxenen, Merian. 3 Neues Jahr. 1888. I. 201. 4 Z.D.G.G. 1876, p. 369. J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quartsz-Felsites and Augite- Granites. 117 iferous rocks of North Northumberland as well as the igneous rocks of the Cheviot district, and are intermediate in composition between basalts and andesites, may be referred with a considerable amount of confidence to the Tertiary period. In the present communication it has been shown that the district about Hedgehope, Comb Fell, Staindrop and Linhope Spout is occupied by holoerystalline, non-porphyritic rocks of the plutonic type. Are these rocks due to the consolidation, beneath the surface, of the magma which produced the andesitic lavas and tuffs? Do they occupy the same position in relation to the Cheviot lavas as the gabbros and granites of Mull do to the lavas of Mull according to Prof. Judd? The evidence available is not so complete as we could wish, but, such as it is, it points decidedly to an affirmative answer to the above questions. The augite-granites are evidently not characterized by a high percentage of silica. Some of them strongly resemble syenites in appearance; but as quartz is present in all my specimens, the term syenite cannot be applied to any of them. True augite-syenites may of course occur in the district, as my observations were necessarily of a very limited character. The analyses of the Vosges augite- granites show that these rocks belong to the intermediate, rather than to the acid class; and that the bases, if we except the alkalies, are present in approximately the same relative proportions as in the Cheviot lavas. With regard to the alkalies, I would remark that we have no analyses of the Cheviot plutonic rocks; but itis certain that the orthoclase is rich in soda, and that plagioclase of the oligoclase- andesine type is sometimes present in greater quantity than the orthoclase. I have little doubt that in some of the plutonic rocks the relative proportions of the two alkalies is the same as in the normal andesites. Again, Mr. Waller’s analysis of a porphyrite from Shillmoor’ shows an excess of potash over soda. There is another point in connexion with the volcanic history of the Cheviot district in Old Red Sandstone times which seems worthy of special attention. Why did the quartz-felsites succeed the andesites ? One of the most fascinating problems of geology is to account for the variation in the composition of the material erupted at different periods in the volcanic history of a district. Now in considering the possible causes of this variation careful attention should be paid to the changes brought about in the composition of a magma by the successive crystallization of different constituents. Information on this subject may be obtained in at least three different ways: (1) by observing the order in which minerals have erystallized in different magmas; (2) by examining the chemical and mineralogical composition of the ground-masses of porphyritic rocks ; (3) by examining the so-called contemporaneous veins which are especially characteristic of plutonic rocks. Prof. Rosenbusch? and others have shown that as a general rule 1 Grout. Maca. Dee. IJ. Vol. X. p. 151, 2 Neues Jahr, 1882, i. p. 1. EELS, SNS A, Pee 118 J. H. Teall—Cheriot Quarts-Felsites and Augite-Granites. the minerals separate out in the order of their basicity ; the more basic minerals, or those which do not contain silica, being the first to form. This being admitted, we see at once that the tendency of the progressive crystallization must be to render the magma more and more acid. Dr. Petersen has isolated and analyzed the glassy base of the Cheviot hypersthene-andesite and the devitrified base of a porphy- rite from Allerhope Burn. His analyses appear to me to have such an important bearing on the sequence of volcanic phenomena in the Cheviot district that I quote them below, together with two analyses of the Cheviot lavas. They show that the ground-mass is richer in silica and alkalies, and that the ratio of potash to soda is much greater in the ground- mass than in the rock as a whole. I II. III. IV. RO ee Um aMGGe25 1) Suomi LOR lGmt Ail ce enue ae ema eenE On Os) LOS DONE UIB EDO LUTE TeAG YS A RU ee Cray athe og, BETES WesOsy (1a! SFI te SsOn ies DOME ee 1-80 FeO ne et aa = RW POrOd anes 4°79, CaO ay Doe D4 AIS | ae 1:79 MgO... Dy Meubgay iy I a SAD) an 4-29 NO uae ag5y |) i Be54 8 Testy) 2°88 NasOl oes 2:25) E68) beats DBT) Dias 3:97 H,0 a... 539. UGee ee) S09 wae 3°16 99-07 99°82 98°51 7°3 Sp.Gr. 2-437 2-640 2-543 I. Glassy base. Hypersthene-andesite, Il. Devitrified base. Porphyrite. Allerhope Burn. III. Hypersthene-andesite. Carhope on Coquet. IV. Porphyrite, + mile above Shillmoor Farm. Mr. Stock? has shown that the ground-mass of the Cockfield dyke is also richer in silica than the normal rock. Mr. Waller, of Birmingham, has recently investigated certain contemporaneous veins in the bronzite-diabase of Penmaenmawr. He finds that they contain 64 per cent.” more silica than the rock in which they occur, and that potash is present in excess of soda, whereas the reverse relation holds in the rock itself. These veins then bear precisely the same relation to the parent rock as the ground-mass of the Cheviot andesite does to the mass of the andesite. There are veins in the Rowley Rag basalt, also described by Mr. Waller, which contain 9 per cent. more silica than the rock, and possess as much as 11 per cent. of alkalies. From these and other facts which need not be here enumerated, we may safely draw the general conclusion that the effect of pro- 1 North of England Dykes, Q.J.G.S. 1884, p. 225. 2 Midland Naturalist, 1885, p. 6. Compare the concretionary (?) patches (e.g. certain inclusions in granite described by Mr. Phillips. Q.J.G.S., vol. xxxvi. p. 1, and the nodules of peridotite in basalt) with the so-called contemporaneous veins. The former are as a rule more basic, the latter more acid than the normal rock. The former may represent the earliest, the latter certainly represent im many cases the latest products of consolidation of an originally homogeneous magma, J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite-Granites. 119 gressive crystallization is to increase the percentage of silica and alkalies, to increase the potash relatively to the soda, and to diminish the lime, iron, and magnesia in the liquid magma. Rocks of rhyolitic composition may represent, so to speak, the mother-liquor out of which the basic minerals have crystallized. Suppose, now, that the crystallization occurs under conditions which admit of the mechanical separation by gravity of the crystals and the magma in which they are formed. This would give rise to some very interesting results." Consider the case of an internal reservoir of molten-rock, and for the sake of simplicity, suppose the conditions of crystallization to be realized in the upper portion. The basic minerals will form and then fall by reason of their high specific gravity.*. On descending to lower levels, they may be dissolved, and thus a variation in the com- position of the originally homogeneous magma may be produced. Diffusion will tend to restore homegeneity ; but the above cause, operat- ing in the contrary direction, may be the more potent of the two, and if so, a permanent difference in composition will be established. When final consolidation occurs, a mass will be produced which will vary in composition from top to bottom; the most acid portion occurring in the former, the most basic in the latter position. In the Cheviot district the augite granites vary considerably in composition and different varieties sometimes appear to shade into each other. The same feature may be observed in rocks which I cannot but. regard as igneous, in the Carrock Fell region in Cumberland. The highly basic gabbros of Mosedale Crags appear to shade into the 1 Separation may be effected without gravity. Suppose a half-consolidated plutonic mass to become subject to the lateral thrust of which there is such striking evidence in certain districts. ‘The mother-liquor may be squeezed out of the rock as water out of a sponge. In this way contemporaneous veins might be produced in the plutonic rock, dykes in the surrounding rock, and lavas at the surface. * The subject of the separation of crystals in a molten magma has been discussed by many writers. It is important to notice that it must occur if there be any difference between the specific gravity of the crystals and that of the magma in which they exist. The only question that can arise is as to the geological significance of the operation. Mr. Darwin deals with the subject in his Geological Observations (2nd edition, p- 132), where he describes certain phenomena in the Galapagos Islands which he attributes to this cause. He also quotes a statement from Von Buch that M. Drée found, on melting lava, that the felspars always tended to fall to the bottom of the crucible. The Pattison process for separating lead from silver is mentioned by Mr. Darwin, and it certainly has a very interesting bearing on the subject under consideration. Again, Mr. Clarence King (Systematic Geology, p. 678) says: ‘‘ During an eruption in the crater of Kilauea at the time of my visit, a fluid stream of basalt overflowed from the molten lake at the west end of the crater and poured eastward along the level floor of the pit. Numerous little branchlets spurted out from the sides of the flow and ran along the depressions of the basaltic floor, for a few feet and then congealed. 1 repeatedly broke these small branch streams and examined their section. In every case the bottom of the flow was thickly crowded with triclinic felspars and augites, while the whole upper part of the stream was of nearly pure isotropic and acid glass.” The sinking of felspars in a basaltic magma strikes one at first sight as an impossibility ; but the observations of Darwin and King and the experiments of M. Drée appear to prove the fact in a conclusive manner. We _ must infer, therefore, that the specific gravity of the molten magma is less than that of the felspars, 120 J. H. Teall—Cheviot Quarts-Felsites and Augite-Granites. acid granophyres of the summit of the hill. Is it possible that these facts may be due to an action of the kind above referred to ? The point, however, to which I wish to direct special attention is this. The eruption of andesitic lavas and tuffs in the Cheviot district was followed by the intrusion of quartz-felsite dykes. The plutonic rocks of this district are traversed by veins of quartz-felsite. If these veins be of the nature of contemporaneous veins, as I believe them to be, at any rate in part, then they owe their special chemical characters to progressive crystallization in a magma of andesitic composition, and we may see in this a reason why quartz-felsites succeeded andesites in the history of the Cheviot volcanoes. ‘This view receives strong confirmation from the fact that the ground-mass of the andesitic lavas is substantially identical in composition with the quartz-felsites; as will be seen at once by comparing the two analyses by Dr. Petersen with the analysis of the quartz-felsite by Mr. Waller, which is given in the earlier part of this paper. If we compare the history of volcanic action in the Cheviots with that of other districts, we are struck by many points of resemblance. The succession, andesite, trachyte, rhyolite, is common to many volcanic regions, including Hungary, the Lipari Islands, and North America.’ The sequence of volcanic rocks is, however, usually complicated by the introduction of basalt during the later phases of volcanic activity, a fact which shows that the view adopted for the purpose of explaining the volcanic sequence in the Cheviot district is not in itself sufficient to cover all cases. Doubtless, as Captain Dutton has pointed out, many factors are involved in the determination of the sequence. The phenomena of the Lipari Islands, so admirably described by Prof. Judd,’ furnish a very interesting case. The first period of activity in this region appears to have been characterized by the eruption of andesitic material. Then, as time went on, the products diverged, as far as composition is concerned, in opposite directions, and in modern times we see Stromboli erupting basic and Vulcano acid material. The sequence can be explained if we regard the pro- ducts of Vulcano as formed from the mother-liquor and those of Stromboli as resulting from the refusion of the basic minerals which have separated out of it. There is one interesting point, almost of the nature of a paradox, to which attention has frequently been directed, but which it seems advisable to refer to in connexion with the present subject. The fusion point of basic rocks is lower than that of acid rocks, and yet minerals separate out as a general rule in the order of their basicity, the more basic being the first to form. How is this to be explained ? 1 Propylite, the rock which has long been supposed to mark the first period of volcanic action in Tertiary times, has been shown by the recent work of Dr. Becker (Geology of the Comstock Lode) to comprise, in America, altered forms of well- known rocks, especially andesite, and a similar conclusion had been previously arrived at by Dr. Wadsworth. ; * Grou. Mac, 1876. Geol. Mag. 1885. . Decade III. Vol .II. Pl. Ill. A,S.Foord del.et lith. Mintern Bros. imp. Oxfordian and Lower Oolite’ Gasteropoda; Yorkshire. W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. 121 A complete and satisfactory answer to this question remains to be discovered; but there are one or two facts of great significance which bear upon it. In the first place, we notice that there is no connexion between the temperature at which a mineral separates from a magma in which its constituents are held in solution, and its own fusibility further than this—that no mineral can form at a higher temperature than its own fusing point. Graphite, one of the most infusible substances, crystallizes out of molten iron. Quartz must constantly form at a point far below that of its own fusibility. Then, again, there is the great question, first brought into prominence by Scrope, as to the influence of water in determin- ing the liquidity of lavas. Dr. Petersen has shown that the glassy base of the Cheviot hypersthene-andesite is rich in water; the devitrified base, on the other hand, is poor in water. The whole subject discussed in the last part of this paper is one of great interest; but we must be content to wait for a further accumulation of facts before a perfectly definite judgment can be formed. To those who collect and arrange these facts so as to remove the subject from the region of controversy will belong the chief merit of discovery. III.—Conrrisutions TO THE PALHONTOLOGY OF THE YORKSHIRE OoLITEs. By Witrrip H. Hupissron, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Continued from Decade III. Vol. II. p. 59.) (PLATE III.) 74.—Trocuus monizrrectus, Phillips, 1829. Plate III. Figs. 1, an 16: 1829 and 1835. Trochus monilitectus, Bean; Phillips, G Y., p. 123 (p. 165 as T. moniliferus, P.), pl. ix. fig. 33. 1849. T. monilitectus, Phil.; D’Orbigny,, Prod. p. 265. Et. Bajoc. 1854. Ibid. Phil. ; Morr. Cat., p. 281. 1875. Lbid. Bean; Phillips, G.Y., 3rd ed. p. 259, pl. ix. fig. 33. Bibliography, etc.—This somewhat insignificant fossil approaches several of the small granulated or tuberculated species of T’rochus (or Monodonta), which are distinguished by a completely conical outline, resulting from a close suture and perfect flatness of the whorls. Although without description, Phillips’s figure is character- istic, and it is somewhat singular that this species was not recognized by D’Orbigny amongst the fossils of the French Jurassic. The typical form is confined, in Yorkshire, so far as I know, to the Scarborough Limestone (zone 3), where it is rare, and, for the most part, so imperfectly preserved, that accurate description is a matter of some difficulty. A single specimen referred to T. monilitectus from the Cornbrash of Scarborough is in the Leckenby Collection. It presents certain differences of ornamentation, and will be described as var. B. 'l’o recognize a distinct species founded on a single specimen would be imprudent, when the differences are not great. Should more specimens 122 W. H. Hudieston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. of var. B. be found, either in Yorkshire or elsewhere, the case would be altered. Phillips’s type may be examined in the York Museum. Descriptions. —The usuat Form. Specimen from the Scarborough Limestone (zone 3), Cloughton (?), Bean Collection, British Museum. Figs, 1, la, 10. LEAN Ans sopgangtoopboDIaoog Oga0D060000" 8 millimetres. Wintdllay Yiisjerererssniate > avehajeuerare, ——__ I.—GrotocicaL Sootrty or Lonvon. I.—March 25, 1885.— Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.B.S., President, in the Chair.—The following communications were read : 1. “On the Relationship of Ulodendron, Lindley and Hutton, to Lepidodendron, Sternberg, Bothrodendron, Lindley and Hutton, Sigillaria, Brongniart, and Rhytidodendron, Boulay.” By Robert Kidston, Esq., F.G 5S. The author commenced by expressing an opinion that the so- Geological Society of London. 233 called genus Ulodendron of Lindley and Hutton comprised specimens belonging to several species and even to different genera. Unless: the outer surface of the bark is well preserved, stems of Clathrarian Sigillarie and Lepidodendra are .undistinguishable; but species of Ulodendron have been in several cases founded on decorticated examples, and distinguished by such characters as the size of the Ulodendroid scar. The three species which have furnished most of the specimens described as Ulodendron, and to the description of which the present paper is chiefly devoted, are Lepidodendron Vel- theimianum, Sternb., Sigillaria discophora, Konig, sp., and S. Zaylori. _ The author first gave an epitome of the views of previous writers on Ulodendron ; and secondly, described the specimens beionging to the species named that he had been able to examine. The third part contained the general conclusions as to the nature of Ulodendron at which he had arrived. He commenced by defining the four genera Lepidodendron, Lepidophloios, Sigillaria, and Rhy- tidodendron, as distinguished by the characters of their leaf-scars, and showed that Lepidodendron, Sigillaria, and Rhytidodendron occasionally exhibit large scars, arranged in two opposite vertical rows. These are the Ulodendroid scars. They marked, in the author’s opinion, the point of attachment of a caducous appendicular organ, which had in a very few cases been found in position. These appendicular organs were probably sessile cones. Details were given, showing the progressive development of the scars, the obliteration of the normal leaf-scars by the appendicular organs, and the branch- ing of Ulodendroid stems. The concluding portion of the paper contained the synonymy at length and full descriptions of three fossil plants, Zepidodendron Veltheimianum, Sigillaria discophora, and S. Taylori, together with the horizons and localities in which they have been found in Britain. Bothrodendron was shown to be a decorticated form of Ulodendroid oe and Knorria a cast of the case of Lepidodendron. “On an almost pertect Skeleton of Rhytina gigas=Rhytina Sialler (‘Steller’s sea-cow ’) obtained by Mr. Robert Damon, F'.G.S., from the Pleistocene Peat-deposits on Behring’s Island.” By Henry Woodward, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. ' The author spoke of the interest which paleontologists must always attach to such animals as are either just exterminated, or are now in course of rapid extirpation by man or other agents. He referred to the now rapid destruction of all the larger Mammalia, and expressed his opinion that the African Elephant, the Giraffe, the Bison, and many others, will soon be extirpated unless protected from being hunted to death. The same applies to the Whale- and Seal-fisheries. He drew attention to a very remarkable order of aquatic animals, the Sirenia, formerly classed with the Cetacea by some, with the Walruses and Seals by others, and by De Blainville with the Ele- phants. He particularly drew attention to the largest of the group, the Rhytina, which was seen alive and described by Steller in 1741. It was then confined to two islands (Behring’s Island and Copper 204 Reports and Proceedings— Island). In forty years (1780) it was believed to have been entirely extirpated. It was a toothless Herbivore, living along the shore in shallow water, and was easily taken, being without fear of man. Its flesh was good, and it weighed often as much as 3 or 4 tons. The author then described some of the leading points in the anatomy of Ihytina, and indicated some of the characters by which the order is distinguished. He referred to the present wide dis- tribution of the Sirenia:—Manatus with three species, namely, M. latirostris, occupying the shores of Florida and the West Indies; M. americanus, the coasts of Brazil and the great rivers Amazon and Orinoco; M. senegalensis, the West Coast of Africa and the rivers Senegal, Congo, ete. Halicore with three species, namely, H. taber- naculi, the Red Sea and East coast of Africa; H. dugong, Bay of Bengal and Hast Indies; H. australis, North and Bast Australia. _ The fossil forms number thirteen genera and twenty-nine species, all limited to England, Holland, Belgium, France, Germany, Austria, Italy, Malta, and Hgypt, and to the United States and Jamaica. The author noticed the dentition of the fossil species, of which Halitherium and Prorastomus are the two most remarkable types. Lastly, with regard to the geographical area, occupied at the present day by the Sirenia, the author pointed out that two lines drawn 30° N. and 30° South of the Equator, will embrace all the Species now found living. Another line drawn at 60° N. will show between 380° and 60° N. the area occupied by the fossil species. He looked upon Zhytina as a last surviving species of the old Tertiary group of Sirenians, and its position as marking an “ outlier ” of the group now swept away. The greater northern extension of the group seems good evidence of the once warmer climate enjoyed by Europe, Asia, and America in the Tertiary epoch. II.— German GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. _ The following is an abstract of a paper “On THe Limits oF THE ZucusTrin Formation AND OF THE Dyas IN GENERAL,”! by Gun. Horrara Prorussor Dr. H. B. Geinrrz, etc., read before the German Geological Society in September, 1884. 1. The Upper Limit of the Zechstein Formation—The uppermost member of the Zechstein is defined as the “ Plattendolomit ” with Schizodus Schlotheimi (Gein.), Aucella Hausmanni (Goldt.), and a few other rarer fossils; not the overlying Bunterschiefer of Murchison or the so-called upper variegated shales (Z. 0. 3) of the maps of the Geological Surveys of Saxony and Prussia. Extensive erosion of the upper beds of the Plattendolomit produces a general discordancy between them and the overlying shales and thin-bedded sandstones ; it is only where this is not observable or is observable to only a slight extent that anything like concordancy between them is to be observed. ‘The published works of previous observers (Gutbier, Naumann, von Cotta, and Emmrich) are quoted as establishing these facts. The author then proceeds to describe additional sections 1 See Nova Acta Acad. Leopoldina xxi. 1885. German Geological Society. 239 which he examined during last year, in company with Herr Ditt- marsch. Very clear sectional drawings of six of these are included in the paper, two of which represent sections near Meerane in Saxony. ‘These, with the descriptions of them, agree in character with those noticed by the translator, in the Quart. Journ. of the Geol. Soe. vol. xl. p. 891, and this agreement is pointed out. The theory advocated by some writers, that “the circulation of water between the strata of the Plattendolomit has, by internal erosion of the beds, produced cavities into which the overlying beds have sunk,” is criticized and shown to be inconsistent with the observed facts. The author next points out that unless we are to class the whole of the Bunter with the Zechstein, against which there are insuper- able objections on paleontological grounds, it is impossible (and the impossibility is acknowledged by his colleagues of the Geological Survey) to draw any boundary-line whatever between the Zechstein and the Bunter. The fossil-evidence recently found by the author in the Meerane district in the regularly stratified beds of sandstone in the limestone quarry next the village of Crotenleite, in a position less than a métre above the eroded surface of the Plattendolomit,’ is next described, and the close resemblance of the numerous Saurian footprints discovered by the author last summer in that locality with those of Chirosaurus Barthi and Chirotherium Geiniizi in the Univer- sity Museum at Jena and elsewhere is pointed out. As in company with the latter there was found a somewhat larger and coarser but otherwise similar form to Rhizocorallium jenense of the lower Wellen- kalk, so here, immediately above the Plattendolomit, the same asso- ciation of undoubted Triassic forms was met with. In addition to these, the author also mentions the occurrence of a few horseshoe- shaped reliefs on the bedding-planes of the sandstones, which he con- siders to be vegetable-remains, and these bear the closest resemblance to certain forms which have been described by Koch and E. Schmid from the Bunter Sandstone of Jena. [Those who know the district about Jena will see the force of this comparison.] These remains are now open to the inspection of geologists in the Dresden Museum. “Though these are as yet so sparingly met with (says Geinitz), yet they prove that the variegated shaly sandstones (Z, 0. 3) belong to the Bunter and not to the Zechstein.” “In other districts, where also the lower members of the Zechstein are developed, local disturbances of the original stratification have occurred, partly through subsidences of the Plattendolomit in con- sequence of the solution of gypsum and rock-salt, partly through the elevation of the strata in consequence of the gradual conversion of anhydrite into gypsum. Excellent examples of this occur in the neighbourhood of Gera, and at Pésneck and Oppurg in Thiiringen ; yet in all these cases a similar unconformable order of deposition of the lower Roth (the lowermost Bunter strata) upon the upper Zech- stein is repeated.” These instances are described in detail in the 1 Comp. Gror. Mac. December, 1884, where a quotation is made from a letter of Geinitz on this subject. 236 Reports and Proceedings— paper, as are also others at Gumpelstadt, N.E. of Salzungen, and in the neighbourhood of the Lower Warth. In the latter locality the red shales and thin-bedded sandstones are stratified around highly inclined strata of Plattendolomit and a reef of Rauchwacke (Middle Zechstein). . The relation of the Bunter to the Zechstein as it is exhibited at Gopelskuppe near Hisenach is also noticed, and refer- ence is made to the accurate demonstration of it by J. G. Bornemann (Jahrb. d. k. gues, geolog. Landesanstalt, 1883), as well as the description of it in Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xl. p- 808 et seq. by the translator. From the evidence cited, the author concludes that the so-called upper variegated shales and thin sandstones of the Saxon and Prussian maps, which correspond to the Bunterschiefer of Murchi- son, belong not to the Zechstein, but to the Bunter Sandstone, so that “an important member of the Permian Formation (in Murchi- son’s sense) is taken away, and there remains of that Paleozoic Trias, which that deceased author defined as his Permian, only a dual system or Dyas.” 2. The Lower Limit of the Zechstein Formation.— Wherever a com- plete development of the Marine Zechstein Formation is exhibited, the Weissliegende (Grauliegende, Zechstein Conglomerate of Beyrich) forms the lowest member. This stratum, varying in thickness from a few centimétres to several métres, contains an extraordinary marine fauna, among which are found as characteristic species, Productus Cancrini (de Vern.), Strophalosia Leplayi (Gein.), Rhynchonella Geinitzt (de Vern.), and Pecten sericeus (de Vern.). Thus the Weiss- liegende is distinguished principally from the Rothliegende, the nature of which is determined by association of the littoral character of its sedimentary materials with eruptive rocks. Freiesleben, Dr. Liebe of Gera, Dr. Senft of Hisenach, and other writers are quoted in support of this view. The position of the upper Rothliegende as a lateral equivalent in some localities of the true Middle and Lower Zechstein is touched upon, and its occurrence in relation to the latter on the north-west side of the Thiiringerwald is pointed out (see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. loc. cit., and Senft, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Geol. Gesellsch. Bd. x. p. 3388, Taf. ix. fig. 9). “The opponents of this view,” adds Geinitz, ‘have hitherto offered no explanation of the facts observed.” 3. The Lower Boundary of the Dyas in General.—Where the massive grey conglomerate of the Lower Rothliegende, or the ante- porphyritic stage of Naumann, overlies the Coal-measures unconform- ably, as it does in the district of Zwickau and other places in the basin of the Erzgebirge, the boundary between the Dyas and the. Carboniferous appears very clearly defined. In other places, as in - the Plauenscher Grund near Dresden, where the discordancy is less pronounced, the grey conglomerate zone still rests upon the eroded surfaces of the previously indurated Coal-measures, in such a manner as to remind us of the way in which the eroded strata of the Platten- dolomit are overlain by the thin strata of the Bunter. In some places the massive Brandschiefer (bituminous shales) overlie the Correspondence—Mr. R. Lydekker. 237 Coal-measures, and contain even feeble black seams’ of coal. In, such cases the boundary is well indicated by the presence of the characteristic flora and fauna of the Lower Rothliegende, Walchia piniformis (Schl.), W. filiciformis (Schl.), Odontopteris obtust/oba (Naum.), Callipteris conferta (Stbg.), Calamites gigas (Bgt.), and other characteristic plant-forms, or by such characteristic fish-remains as Acanthodes gracilis (Rém.), Xenacanthus Decheni (Beyr.), Paleo-. niscus angustus (Ag.) and others. 4. On the Integral Character (Selbstindigkeit) of the Dyas as a * Terrain” or ‘“ System” (newer nomenclature of the International Geological Commission). “We are now pretty generally convinced from such evidence as is described above that the strata of the Dyas (or Permian) mark the close of the Paleozoic series of formations, as was admitted, in fact, by the celebrated Sir R. I. Murchison ; it remains however still a question whether the Dyas or Permian shall maintain its position as an independent system, or should be subordinated to the Carboniferous, perhaps under the name of Post-Carboniferous (“ Post- carbon”). This was not definitely settled at the sittings of the International Commission for Geological Nomenclature, etc., at Bologna in 1883, and the question remains to be decided at the next International Congress at Berlin. “For a satisfactory answer to the question it must be referred primarily to the German geologists, since it is in the German area that the greatest and most significant changes took place in the Dyas period, especially in the construction of continental deposits (Festlandbildungen) ; the views of the Russian, English, and North American geologists have also to be considered, since in those countries discovery has followed quickly upon discovery in the region of the Dyas in most recent times. ‘The richest fauna and flora of the Dyas is certainly to be seen in the Royal Mineralogical Museum in Dresden, where perhaps geological confréres will be convinced that even from a palzonto- logical point of view our Dyas deserves the same recognition as an independent Terrain or System, as the Devonian in comparison with the Silurian, and that notwithstanding the fact that several species pass upwards from the Silurian to the Devonian.” A. Irvine. (Gl Osta seas S we @ un PAD sa Gas LENA EAE, NOTE ON SOME SIWALIK BONES ERRONEOUSLY REFERRED TO A STRUTHIOID (DROM AUS (?) SIVALENSIS, LYD.). Srr,—In examining the collection of Mammalian remains in the British Museum for the purpose of cataloguing, I have come across certain specimens from the Siwalik Hills, which have convinced me that the phalangeals described and figured in the ‘“ Palzeontologia Indica” (Mem. Geol. Surv. India), ser. 10, vol. iii. pp. 145, 146, pl. xiv. figs. 23:4, 5, 6 (1884), as belonging to a Struthioid, and named Dromeus (?) sivalensis, are not Avian at all, but belong to one 238 Correspondence—Mr. R. Lydekker. of the lateral digits of the fore-foot of an Artiodactyle Ungulate allied to the Hippopotamus. The genus Dromeus must therefore be expunged from the Siwalik fauna. | I regret having made this unfortunate misidentification ; but am glad to take this early opportunity of correcting it. A note to the same effect will appear in the Introduction to the volume of the “ Paleontologia Indica,” quoted above, on its completion. R. Lyprexker. SUBTERRANEAN CONTOURING ON GEOLOGICAL MAPS. Srr,—The notice in your March number, by my friend Professor Benjamin Smith Lyman, of Northampton, Mass., regarding this means of expressing the underground configuration of stratified deposits would, I venture to think, have attracted wider attention if it had dealt as fully with the manner of construction as it does with the results to be gained. A long acquaintance with Professor Lyman’s own use of this system in the number of beautifully constructed maps which he has produced of Japanese and other geological regions must be my excuse for pointing out that, while the employment of the system on a large scale by another American. geologist (in the Pennsylvania anthracite coalfield) is certainly evidence in his favour, the important circumstances stated in the second sentence quoted from Mr. Ashburner’s report have an essential bearing upon the usefulness of these contour lines. The quotation reads thus:—‘ The data which are available for the construction of these maps are very extensive and very accurate.” This beings so, few will doubt that in such a case plans showing true underground contours of coal beds, etc., would be most valuable charts for the guidance of all kinds of mining operations. But granting this involves the consequence that, where the data are neither extensive nor accurate, the results will be hypothetical and may be even largely based upon the safety of assertions which there is no evidence to contravene, albeit there may still be ample room for doubt. The forms and curvatures assumed by contorted strata varying infinitely, it seems to me we may speculate upon, but cannot predict, the continuity of any conditions at depths beyond the reach of direct observation. We may trace an ellipsoid formed at the surface by the outcrop of a synclinal basin, but without further information we can scarcely foretell whether the interior rocks are, or are not, folded again and again into anticlinal and synclinal curves, overfolded or faulted, thinned away or crushed out. If what we call contortions had as uniform proportions as basins, saucers, spoons or even casks, from any section of which some- thing might be presumed regarding the size and shape of other portions concealed, the theory of these contour lines would be complete; but as neither the shape nor size of a contortion has relation to any standard, I do not see the advisability of laying down upon ordinary geological maps, with the semblance of accuracy, what Correspondence—Dr. W. T. Blanford. 239 are merely possible positions, amongst many others at which a con- cealed stratum might be found. This element of uncertainty, it is true, affects the absolute accuracy of many geological sections, if not of most—in an unavoidable way, for which reason it would be wiser to reduce than to multiply sources of error. A geological map is in a sense pictorial, and the more so the more easily understood: competing interests destroy such pictures as contain them by creating confusion ; hence, is it not better to struggle on with existing difficulties in order to convey surface observations intelligibly, than seek to overlay our maps with a complex of sub- terraneous assertions—save where necessity and data may both exist, as in the case of mining plans for special purposes. Supplementing facts with fancies may possess a charm, but the tendency is dangerously apt to degenerate, or lead us into paths which geological observers of orthodox principles are as yet not imperatively called upon to tread. Lest these remarks should be considered captious, let me express a hope that Professor Lyman will further favour your readers with information as to how the positions for contours may be accurately ascertained at depths far removed from observation, amongst highly contorted or disturbed strata? And also as to whether he would advise the use of distinct plans on which to record the positions of the contours at the various depths, when ascertained. cra = Kinestown, March 11th, 1885. ij THE CLASSIFICATION OF THE JURASSIC SYSTEM. Sir,—lf Mr. Jukes-Browne is satisfied with the argument that because a lithological change does take place, in England, France and Germany, about the line of division between the Cornbrash and Oxfordian, therefore this is a good line of separation between Middle and Upper Jurassics, and one with which most English geologists will be satisfied, I fear it is useless for me to argue further. The statement about the lithological change is true in a certain sense, but it is one of those unscientific half-truths that ignore the main facts. Amongst the facts ignored in this case are the following: The lithological change in Germany from the argillaceous beds of the Brown Jura below to the calcareous strata of the White Jura above is precisely the reverse of that which takes place in North- Western France and England, and the horizon where the change takes place is not the same, in fact the two changes have no con- nection with each other. So purely local are the lithological con- ditions on which Mr. Jukes-Browne relies that the argillaceous Upper Jurassics of England and North-Western France are represented even in Central France by calcareous beds. I did not attempt to enter into the classification of minor sub- divisions like the Lower Calcareous Grit. But when Mr. Jukes- 240 Correspondence—Rev. H. H. Winwood. Browne calls attention to my omission to mention this band, he must have overlooked the circumstance that he has forgotten to notice the far more important Calcarian which intervenes between the Oxfordian and the Cornbrash, and which is one of the best known and most widely spread subdivisions of the Jurassic system. March 14th, 1885. W. T. Buanrorp. GEOLOGICAL AGE OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS. Sir,—A recent conversation with Dr. Hicks induces me to send you the following record of the results of a short ramble in the Rocky Mountains, which I trust you may deem of sufficient import- ance to insert in your MaGazingr. On a much-to-be-remembered morning on the 11th of last Septem- ber, Professor Selwyn and Dr. G. M. Dawson of the Canadian Geological Survey, with several other brothers of the hammer, left the cars of the Canadian Pacific Railway at Stephen, for a walk down the track into British Columbia. Passing the picturesque little lake on the summit of the Kicking Horse Pass, between 5000 and 6000 feet above sea-level, the rocks on the right hand of the track were carefully examined for any indication of their age. They consisted for the most part of a series of almost vertical calcareous and quartzite beds, followed by greenish slates and were varied in colour, blue, white and green predominating. Though supposed to be altered Devonian, yet we tailed to obtain any fussil evidence to determine this point. After however crossing the high trestle- bridge spanning the torrent which gives its name to the pass, we were more fortunate, and found sufficient evidence whereby the age of these beds could be clearly defined. Remaining behind the rest of the party, my attention was attracted to a greenish micaceous slab of rock dipping at a high angle to the east, bearing on its face those fucoidal markings, or worm-tracks (?), so abundant in the Ilfracombe beds in North Devon, and on detaching some of these, I soon saw other and more important black patches, the organic nature of which there could not be any doubt about. These at first sight were con- sidered to be the shields of Trilobites. Proceeding onwards about 62 yards on the same side, a dense blue calcareous band was found almost vertical about six inches thick divided from another of the same kind about seven inches thick by a parting of greenish shale ; both these were full of organisms. On showing them to Prof. Boyd Dawkins and others, they were at once pronounced to be Primordial. Since my return home, Dr. Hicks has examined my specimens, and states that they represent a Menevian fauna, and that the mica- ceous rock contains lime and is detrital, with the tail of a Paradoaides on its surface, whilst the dense blue calcareous bands have abundant fragments of Paradowides, Conocoryphe and other allied forms. This fact is of value, as it proves that a Primordial zone exists north of the 49th parallel of latitude, and somewhere between the 116th and 117th parallels of longitude, a fact which has been, I believe, hitherto denied or at least unproved. H. H. Winwoop. Baru, April 17, 1885, x . ri —— - . . - : — = — . 7 4 " r * “ , ‘ — nc oe / o pe Shen 6 shar ay Geol. Mag. 1885. Decade Vol. 11. P1 VI. AB Woodward del.etlith. West, NewmandCo. intp. Land-Shells from the Bembridge limestone, Isle of Wight. THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEW SERIES. DECADE Ill. VOL. Il. No. VI—JUNE, 1885. ORIGINAL ARTICLES. 2eeo eS T.—On tHE Lanp Motuusca oF THE Eocenes. By J. Starkiz Garpner, F.L.S., F.G.S., ete. (PLATE YI.) HE distribution of land-mollusca still remains one of the most perplexing of the problems to be solved by the geologist. Sir Charles Lyell seems to have been especially struck with their capricious distribution, particularly in Madeira. The facts are still substantially as stated in the tenth edition of his “Principles of Geology,” tor Mr. Leacock, in showing me the results of many years collecting in Madeira, observed that his researches had not modified them in any important particulars. Nearly all the species are peculiar to the Madeira Archipelago, and the remarkable fact about their dis- tribution is that, though there are 56 species in Madeira proper, and 42 in Porto Santo, only 12 are common to both islands, though in sight of each other. Still more unaccountable it seems, that of 19 species found on the Dezertas, three barren rocks which appear but little detached from the main island, only 12 are common to Madeira, and even each of these islets has species and varieties peculiar to itself. But two species of land-shells are in fact common to Madeira, the Dezertas and Porto Santo. Sir Charles Lyell infers the great anti- quity of the Archipelago from this, contrasting it with the far more extensive group of the British Isles, numbering 200 islands, not one of which have yet developed peculiar species. The fact that such narrow seas have sufficed to keep the land-mollusca distinct conclu- sively proves, in his opinion, that they have no ready means of dispersal, and that their passage across even the narrowest sea must be of such extraordinary rarity that the possibility need hardly be taken into account. The presence of the same species throughout the whole of the British Islands is thus the strongest argument in favour of their having been joined together and to Europe at a very recent date. Turning to that most fascinating book by Mr. Wallace, “Island Life,’ in which all possible arguments are arrayed to support the theory of the Permanence of Continents, we cannot help remarking how frequently the land-mollusca are opposed to other evidence, and how, when the distribution of the rest of a fauna can be satisfactorily accounted for, these crop up in contradiction. The present arrange- DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. VI, 16 242 J. S. Gardner—British EFocene Land-Mollusca. ment of land and water can be made to suffice for the distribution of such recently developed things as the existing species of mammals, birds, and butterflies; but the far more ancient families of land- mollusca, at least, seem to have been in possession of their present habitats from the most remote times. I find in “Island Life” that the Azores are stated to possess 69 species, 382 being peculiar, though with a general European facies. A fourth of the land-shells of Bermuda are peculiar, including one genus, while most of the remainder are found in the West Indies and American mainland. The Galapagos Isles possess about 20 species, most of them peculiar. St. Helena has 29, 20 of which are truly indigenous, two of them, Bulimi, resembling Brazilian types. The land-shells of the Sand- wich Islands number between 300 and 400 species, and 30 genera, three-fourths peculiar; the large sub-family Achatinelline, with 14 genera, being entirely confined to the Sandwich Isles, and the genera of Auriculides only met with there and in Australia, China, Bourbon, Cuba, and the West Indies. About two-thirds of the land-shells of the Seychelles are peculiar, most being Indian forms, and some like those of Madagascar. Such examples may be multiplied if we look into Woodward’s Manual of the Mollusca. The author of this work is profoundly impressed with the belief that many of the Oceanic Islands are relics of lands that have disappeared. The mollusca of St. Helena especially indicate a closer geographical alliance between the east of South America, than now holds. The presence of several species of old-world genera in the Columbian region, which are wanting in North America, implies a land connection at some very remote period across the Atlantic in temperate latitudes. Two genera, Anastoma and Megaspira, now peculiar to Brazil, inhabited France during the Kocene. There is nothing in these facts to support the extreme views of the Permanence of Continents, advocated by Wallace; and taken in connection with the observations of such writers as Sir Joseph Hooker and many other botanists, there is such an array of at least prima facie evidence against them, which has not been explained away, that they must be held as far indeed from generally acceptable to geologists. The re-examination’ of the Eocene land and freshwater fossil shells, which I propose to undertake, will I am convinced present some very curious problems in connection with this subject. The progress of science has moreover rendered some revision neces- sary, and though Professor Sandberger has to a great extent already effected this, his work is in German, and the British species are mixed up in it with a large number of others. As the first instalment, I have selected the group of land-shells of the Bembridge and Headon limestones of the Isle of Wight, which, from their size, number, and splendid preservation, probably form the most important assemblage of the kind from any rocks of similar age. 1 Nearly all the species have been described for the Paleeontographical Society by Mr. F. Edwards, 1852. J. S. Gardner— British Eocene Land-Mollusca. 243 Fam. Burimins.* Burtmmus (AMPHIDROMUS) ELLIPTICUS,” Sby. sp. 1822. Plate VI. Figs. 3 and 4. The adult shell is sub-perforate ?, sinistral, oblong-ovate, bulimi- form, composed of 8 whorls. The general form of the shell is that of a pupa, or chrysalis, the penultimate whorl being almost of the same diameter as the body- whorl. The apex is blunt. The whorls are at first more than twice as wide as high, the fourth whorl in descending is in diameter twice its height, the penultimate whorl in the specimen figured is 18 mm. high against 31 mm. in diameter, and the body-whorl 42 mm. high, with a diameter of 33 mm. All are irregularly tumid, bulging most towards the lower suture. The testis thin. There are two varieties of ribs, one coarse, with a millimétre interval between each, the other fine, in which case 3 ribs occupy one millimetre; the former variety is the commoner, and, though I have not remarked both occurring on the same individual, there are often very fine lines or ribs in the intervals between the coarse ones. The suture is very narrow, but defined. The aperture is ovate, sub-auricular, angular above, its precise form being difficult to describe in words. The peristome is continuous, thickened, and reflected, the columellar lip being a little broader and united to the outer by a thickened callus. The columella is slightly convoluted, and the columellar region lightly excavated. The average length of the full-grown shell is 85 millimétres, or a little over 34 inches, and this seems rarely if ever to have been exceeded. The young are conical, with the last whorl subangular, shells of 2 centimétres in length having a spiral angle of about 55°, which diminishes to about 45° when the length is doubled. The aperture is semi-lunar or a little like an inverted comma, and the lips thin and sharp. Casts of the young are very abundant in places, far more so than of the adults. Associated with them in still greater abundance are oviform bodies (Plate VI. Fig. 5), variable, but the great majority of which are under 24 to 3 centim. in length and to 16 mm. in diameter. They are equal and rounded at both ends, with the sides flattened. When not merely casts, they are seen to be enveloped with a thin caleareous shell of rugged texture. They are supposed to be eggs or cocoons, and are sometimes hollow, or partly filled with arrago- nite, but in general they are casts, with one end free, and the other broken, and adhering to the matrix, as if the animal had effected its escape. Several of the most promising have been slit for me, and 1 That part of the genus to which our fossils belong was separated into a genus Cochlostyla, by Férussac in 1819. The name, literally column-shells, indicates sufficiently their general form. The true Bulimus has few whorls, the body-whorl being very large and at least equalling in length all the rest of the spire. -Amphi- dromus is a smaller group or sub-genus of closely allied species usually sinistral. These subdivisions seem useful in so enormous a genus. 2 All the species, unless otherwise stated, are described in F. E. Edwards’ monograph on the Kocene Mollusca, in the Paleeontographical Society’s volume for 1852, where the bibliography of the species is detailed at length. Most of them are re-described in Sandberger’s Land und Siisswasser Conchylien, Wiesbaden, 1870-75. 244 J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. are filled with infiltrated granular limestone and arragonite, without betraying any outline of their former living occupant. Their asso- ciation in such abundance with land-shells, and especially with the young of Lulimus, suggests that they may not improbably have been the eggs of the latter. Many Bulimi lay eggs of even larger size ; but the only examples in the British Museum are eggs of species with relatively very large body-whorls. I have so far not been able to obtain information as to the form of egg laid by the living species of the Amphidromus section of the genus. The eggs, if such, are certainly very large in proportion to even the fullest grown adult ; but they might have passed, for the internal mould of the body- whorl is 19 millim. across, and the eggs at their greatest diameter but 15 or 16 externally. The recent eges of the large Bulimi, where there is ample space in the body-whorl, are regularly oval; but in these fossils the sides are perfectly straight, and this peculiarity rather favours the assumption that they may really be the eges of the cylindrical-shelled Bulimus, especially as none of the fry of this species are ever found of smaller diameter than the supposed eggs. The size of the egg in living Pulmonates bears no settled relation to the size of the shell. The texture of the shell is rugged, but in all the recent eggs I have seen it is smooth. ‘The question cannot, how- ever, be definitely settled until further observations are made. Internal moulds of Bulimus were formerly found abundantly in the Bembridge Limestone at Sconce. Fine specimens with the shell replaced by carbonate of lime were always rare and of some value,’ being among the handsomest of our many fine Hocene mol- lusea. Though the horizon of the species is the Bembridge Lime- stone, it must have existed throughout the whole of our sub-tropical Hocene period, for part of a sheil from the London Clay is figured by Mr. Edwards, and he has specimens from the Middle Headon of Brockenhurst and Hordwell, as well as the Upper Headon of Headon Hill. The National Collection is very rich, comprising at least a dozen fine specimens of the adult shell. The species appears to be extinct, but one very closely allied, B. chloris, Reeve, is a native of the Philippines, and there are many others, as B. perversus, of the same group inhabiting the same region. JB. chloris is a bright yellow shell, somewhat smaller than ours, but so closely resembling it in all other respects, that we are fully justified, in believing that ours is an ancestral form, or genetically connected. Sandberger compares it with B. palaceus, v. d. Busch, and B. Winteri, Pf., from Java. No species resembling it occurs in other regions, and the group, which is very distinct, is, as already stated, separated under the sub-generic name Amphidromus. Burrus (AMPHIDROMUS) LavoLonGuUs, Boubée, 1844. Pl. VI. Fig. 1. Bull. Soc. Géol. i. ser. 1, p. 213, M. de Serres, Ann. des Sciences Nat. 1844, p. 180, pl. xi. fig. 9. Sandberger, die Susswasser-Conchyl. 1870-76, p. 287, pl. xvi. fig. 7. The introduction of the present species into our Eocene fauna is 1 20s. seems to haye been an established price. J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. 245 based on a unique specimen said to be from Sconce, and recently acquired for the National Collection. The shell is regularly spiral, and tapers gradually. The extremity is broken, but, supposing, as seems probable, that the spire was continued at the same angle, and allowing that the apex was as obtuse relatively as in the last species, the total length must have reached 130 mms., or more than five inches. The spiral angle is about 18° and the length preserved of the shell 106 mm., comprising 10 whorls. The whorls towards the apex are more than twice as wide as high, the last but two being exactly twice, the penultimate whorl 17 mm. high, to 50 mm. diameter along the inferior suture, and the body-whorl 10 mm. high and 50 mm. in greatest diameter. The whorls are slightly convex and the suture slight. The whole is so finely striated in the direction of the axis, that 4 striz occupy only 1mm. The aperture is invisible, being imbedded in the matrix. The peristome was evidently much reflected, but has been chipped away unfortunately, through ignorance of its form. The shell has been replaced by thin, translucent arragonite, and is of a peculiar pale- yellow, suggesting palpably that traces of the original colouring yet remain. Though evidently allied to B. elliptica, the characters are altogether so peculiar, that it has been separated specifically. It departs more widely than the last from any existing species. The specimen described was purchased from Mr. Gregory as a Bembridge-Limestone fossil, and the matrix has the characters of this limestone. In the South of France it occurs in the Paleotherium- limestone of Villeneuve and Mas Saintes Puelles, and is not rare. The group Amphidromus is confined within well-defined limits— the Philippines, Timor, Celebes, the Malayan Peninsula, and southern- most China, and an outlier in the Eastern Himalayas.’ Of 18 species, 8 are persistently sinistral, but individuals among the remainder are sometimes dextral. In the luxuriant and open forests of the Philippines, the vegetation and climate combine to favour the growth of arboreal species, and the genus is represented in prolific splendour. “Mr. Cuming must have truly felt like one transported to the fabled gardens of the Hesperides, when beholding the lofty trees of these sunny isles laden with snails of such magnificent proportions. Aladdin, in the Arabian tale, could not, surely, have contemplated the rich clusters of vari- coloured fruit in the garden of the African magician with more astonishment, nor probably gathered it with more avidity.”* The animal in the Philippines is uniformly of a sombre olivaceous brown, and dwells in family groups, as it were, among the shady foliage ot the branches. An observation strikingly in accord with the arrange- ment of the fossils is that out of a group of some dozen living 1 Preussische Expedition nach Ost-Asien, Zoologische Theil, vol. ii. E. von Martens, 1867. * Reeve, Conchologia Iconica, 1849, vol. v. p. 1. 246 J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. specimens, not more than three or four will be found in an adult state, with the lip of the shell reflected. I have not, as I have already mentioned, been able to come across any specimens or account of the eggs of the group of Amphidromus. The large eggs of the true Bulimus are of very firm consistence, and translucent as alabaster. Reeve describes a soft-shelled egg, like that of a snake, as being deposited in little clusters on the trees, between two leaves, which the animal curls up one on another as a receptacle for their protection. Woodward mentions that one of the largest species deposits its calcareous eggs among dead leaves. Fam. OLEACINID. GLANDINA COSTELLATA, Sowerby, sp. Plate VI. Fig. 2. Syn. Achatina costellata, Edwards, Kocene Mollusca, Order Pulmonata, p. 75, 1852. The shell is cylindrical, fusiform, dextral, imperforate, composed of 6 whorls; the aperture narrow and elliptical. The ultimate whorl or nucleus is obtuse, but the general form of the apex is acute. The whorls forming the spire are wider than high, the 4th whorl in the figured specimen measuring 5 mm. in height, with 8mm. as the diameter of the suture, and the 5th whorl 11 mm. in height, and 18 mm. for the suture. The whorls are irregularly convex, slightly constricted in some individuals towards the sutures, which are well defined. The length of the body-whorl is at least double that of the spire, and exceeds it even four times in abbreviated examples. It is much longer than wide—44 to 25 mm. in the figured specimen—the greatest convexity is central and parallel with the suture, and it becomes attenuated towards the base. The test is thin; marked with irregular lines of growth, rarely coarsely ribbed, 3 ribs oceupy- ing 2 mm.; or finely striated in the same direction, when there are 5 strie to a millimétre. Mr. Edwards thus describes the sculpturing : “The edges are slightly pressed against the preceding volution, so as to present a narrow band running round the spire, parallel with the suture; the ribs are rounded, irregular, rather oblique, and slightly thickened above the sutural band, giving a rough crenulated appearance to the edges of the volutions; they are crossed saltier- wise, by very faint obscure lines of growth, perceptible only in well- preserved specimens.” ! The aperture is narrow, longitudinal, ellip- tical, outer lip crescentic, inner pear-shaped, coming to an acute point above, and more or less rounded below. The lips are thin and sharp. The columella thin, rather bowed and truncated at the base ; the latter character affording a basis of separation between this genus and Achatina. The length of the shell appears to be 62, and the diameter 25 mm., though these are not the extremes observed in the largest individuals. The National Collection comprises upwards of 60 specimens, well illustrating the great variability in the relative proportions of the whorls and aperture in this species. The MS. name brevis attached 1 Kocene Mollusca, p. 75. J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. 247 to one of the varieties shows that Mr. Edwards contemplated separating it as a distinct species. Most of the specimens are from the Bembridge Limestone, where the shell is rarely preserved, but a few are from the Headon Lime- stone. It also occurs in the Paleeotherium limestone of the depart- ment of Aude in the South of France. It is difficult to avoid uniting this with some of the existing species of Glandina from Mexico, so nearly identical are they. Their connection is at all events of the very closest, and as the Glandinas are entirely confined to Central America, Mexico, Florida, and. the West Indies, the problem as to how they formerly strayed to Hurope is interesting. Lying in close proximity on a fragment of limestone in the Edwards’ collection are two of these superb snails; one, the Glandina (Pl. VI. Fig. 2) and the other, a Bulimus (Pl. VI. Fig. 3). They lived together in company, and one may have even succumbed to the carnivorous instincts of the other; but their habitats are now so widely severed that to bring them together again ten thousand miles of sea must be traversed. The fossil, as already stated, resembles many of the existing species so closely that it would be hard to find any character by which they might be distinguished, especially in the cases of G. lignaria, Reeve, of Mexico, and G. conspena, Pfr., of Guatemala. It is important to mark that the genus is now entirely confined to the West Indies and the main- land south of Texas, so that its occurrence in the Isle of Wight is alone a hopeless stumbling-block to the acceptance of Mr. Wallace’s views. The animal of Glandina is very large in proportion to its shell, into which it retires with difficulty. It crawls with its labial palpz ceaselessly in movement, and when it comes across a Bulimus or a Helix, it fastens upon its victim and devours it. The snout is pro- truded and swells up, and the mouth opens to its largest extent. M. Sallé and Mr. Gould both relate that they have seen the Glandina attack individuals of their own species and size. According to Raymond, G. algira of Bruguiére is exceedingly voracious, and can in 24 hours devour ten or a dozen of Helix variabilis. This observer relates that “‘aprés avoir flairé sa proie, il penétre assez avant dans le dernier tour de spire des Hélices et fait le vide par succion; on voit trés-distinctement disparaitre le mollusque qui lui sert de nourriture.” * The Antilles, Central America and Mexico constitute the region in which the genus Glandina attains its maximum development. Its carnivorous propensities are abundantly provided for amidst the herbivorous pulmonata which swarm in those regions. The largest species are found in Mexico and Guatemala, where the numerous species of Bulimus serve them for food. The eggs are calcareous, as in me large Bulimi, and G. Andebordi deposits 20, measuring 8 by 6 millims. 1 Mission Scientific au Mexique, Recherches Zoologiques, part vii. Etudes sur Moll. Terrestres et fleuves du Mexique et du Guatemala, par P. Fischer, H. Crosse, 1878. 248 J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. Fam. HeEwicinz. Herx (Canococuiea) eLososa, Sby. Plate VI. Fig. 6. HI. globosus, Sby. 1818, Min. Con. vol. ii. p. 157, t. 170. The shell is composed of 6 whorls, with an obtuse apex. The whorls rapidly enlarge, each one being more than twice the height of the one above, and the fourth is more than twice the diameter of the third at the suture. The apical angle is very obtuse, but varies considerably within certain limits. The apical whorl seems rounded with the spire flat. The succeeding whorls are slightly rounded or flattened, with the sides at angles of 90° and upwards. In some cases the young are subcarniated, in others not, and the aperture is semilunar or subquadrate according to the angularity of the whorl. The penultimate whorl is much more swollen and the sides steeper and higher in proportion, the height being 26 millim., to a diameter of only 46 millim., the one next above measuring but 8 to 33 millim. The height and diameter of the last whorl are little greater than those of the penultimate, producing the globosely-conical outline which has suggested the name. All the specimens are casts, but in a few cases fragments of the shell remain, which are seen to be very finely striated or more roughly marked with lines of growth. There is the appearance of a small umbilicus as a matter of course in the casts from out of which the columella has been dissolved, but one or two specimens with parts of the shell preserved show it to have been imperforate. The suture is well defined. One perfect cast shows the lip to have been considerably reflected in the adult, and there are indications that it was thickened. The aperture is rounded, the peristome discontinuous, the outer lip forming a semicircle, and the columellar lip and the side of the body-whorl converging to an obtuse point at the columella. The base of the shell is very tumid, and when the shell rests upon it, the axis is inclined at an angle of about 25°. The most perfect specimen measures 45 millimétres in height and 46 in diameter, but the extreme diameter of a less perfect one is 62 millimetres. Adult shells are very rare and imperfect, and all are from the Bembridge Limestone at Sconce. Young shells are abundant there and also at Bembridge. Though Mr. Edwards has separated some of the casts as H. occlusa, and formulates some pronounced characters by which he says they may be distinguished, I cannot follow the grounds of separation in the actual specimens, and it seems to me that it would be advisable to limit the name H. occlusa to the Headon Limestone specimens, which are quite certainly distinct. The shell belongs to the group Calocochlea, now limited to, or at least characterizing the Philippines, and might even belong to the living species which most resembles it, C. Harfordii. There are many other fine species in the same region, and there is a group, Camoena, of shells, in Australia, not disimilar in outline, but um- bilicated. Sandberger compares it to one of the latter, H. Fraseri, of Cape York. These, on account of their large size, are the most striking species J. S. Gardner— British Eocene Land Mollusca. 249 of the Eocene pulmonate group. Those of less size are as a rule of diminished interest, and most of the true Helices among them at least, present characters recurring in so many widely scattered species, that they are really distinctive of no particular geo- graphical provinces and cannot be definitely assimilated to any one of many existing species which may resemble them. Their detailed description would thus present no new facts of interest in the present research, and they are therefore merely enumerated or their chief characteristics only remarked upon. Hetrx occtusa, Edwards. This comes next in size to H. globosa, young shells of which it much resembles. Its widest diameter is nearly 2 centimétres, and its height about 14 mm., the first whorl 4 wider than the second. The five whorls are slightly angulated, with polished test and a brown band running round the most salient region, imperforate, and with the lip simple. I regard all the species from the Bembridge Limestone as the immature shells of H. globesa, and should limit the species to those from the Headon Limestone. It very strongly resembles H. incerta, Feér., of St. Vincent and the West Indies, without however, exhibiting complete identity. H. Woodwardi and H. Etheridgi, MS. of the Edwards’ collection, are probably also young of H. gobosa. H. Vectiensts, Edwards, with which should be united H. cocciphera and H. trochila, MS. species in the same collection, is an almost turbinate and small shell with slightly elevated spire and five rounded whorls, strongly reflected lip, tumid base in which only one whorl is visible, with small umbilicus, finely striate and punctu- lated polished test. The dots are only faintly visible when magnified 15 diameters, and are not present on the most perfect and figured type specimen even when magnified 40 diameters. The greatest diameter is 1 centimétre, and the height 5 mm. It occurs in the Bembridge and Headon Limestones at Sconce, and nearly resembles H. fallaciosa from Ceylon. It is compared to H. rufescens by Edwards. H. D’Urpant, Edwards, is a shell of very similar outline, but is distinguished by its thin and unreflected lip. To this should be added H. Morristi, H. Keepingi, H. omphaloides, MS. Edwards. It is placed by Sandberger in the sub-genus Hyalinia, Agass., of Monfort’s genus Zonites. H. Sconcimnsis, MS. Edwards, possesses the same contour, but has a larger umbilicus, and is somewhat strongly and obliquely ribbed. H. tropirera, Edwards. A very rare, small shell, from the Bembridge Limestone, with depressed and perfectly angulated spire, tumid beneath, the cast displaying a large umbilicus and semilunar aperture. H. Cogquandiana, Mathéron, of the Paleotherium Lime- stone of Aude, in the South of France, seems indentical with it. It is compared by Edwards to H. lapicida, recent, of Europe; but it far more resembles H. tricotropsis, Pfr., from China, as well in size as contour. The largest of three specimens measures 1 cent. diameter, and 6 mm. in height. H. ompnauus, Edwards, a much smaller shell with 5 very gradually diminishing rounded whorls, very slightly elevated spire, with large umbilicus in the cast, permitting several of the whorls to be seen, 250 J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. and very regularly ribbed obliquely. As pointed out by Mr. Searles Wood, it so closely resembles a group of North American species as to be separable from them only on most trifling grounds. It comes . perhaps nearest among them to H. striatella, Anthony. Its range seems restricted to the Bembridge Limestone. Sandberger would place it in the genus Discus, Fitzinger. H. tasyrintuica, Say.—This minute, but strongly characterized shell from Headon Hill and Hordwell is identified with every pro- priety with a North American species, ranging from Ohio to Florida and Missouri to Texas. Sandberger, however, considers that there are points of difference, and proposes the name “ pseudolabyrinthicus,” and places it in Anton’s subgenus Strobilus. H. supuapyrinturcoa, Edwards.—This is a small unique shell of quite different outline to the last, and perhaps more properly refer- able to Pupa. Sandberger mentions an almost identical form as oc- curring in the limestone of Lautrec. H. Hraponensis, Edwards.—A rare and very minute shell, com- posed of 6 or 7 rounded whorls, 3 teeth on the outer lip, and wide umbilicus. J have been unable to ascertain that there is any living species resembling it, but Sandberger compares it to Gastrodonta lasmodon, Phillips, of Alabama and Tennessee. The small turrited pulmonates are of greater interest and would well repay a most careful examination. Omitting Bulimus politus, which seems to be a freshwater shell, we have the following terres- trial species : Fam. PoMattiasina. Pomatia’ HeTEROSTOMUS, MS., Hdwards sp.—Though described as a Bulimus, this clearly belongs to the genus Pomatia, a small group of chiefly Huropean species, but with outliers in New Zealand, Rodriguez, Norfolk Island and the Himalayas. It might be identi- fied with one of the European species. B. Vectiensis, MS., may indicate a second species, but only casts are known. Fam. Purina. Popa perpEentTAtA, Edwards.—This is a very elongated, cylindrical shell, finely striated and distinguished by the great number of teeth, 14, with which the outer lip is furnished. No living species of Pupa seems to come very near to it. Sandberger says that similar though imperfect shells occur in the same horizon in the south of France and at Buxweiler. It belongs to the sub-genus Torquilla, Faure-Biguet. Pupa oryza, Edwards.—This a small cylindrical shell, strongly resembling P. stenopylis, Benson, and P. lapidaria, Hutton, of the Himalayas. CLAUSILIA STRIATULA, Edwards, op. cit., 1852. Plate VI. Fig. 7. A very perfect specimen from the Bembridge Limestone has been procured since the species was published, showing it to have been a slender cylindrical shell 24 mm. long, composed of 15 whorls, tapered at both extremities, 44 mm. wide, sinistral like most of the genus. The entire shell is covered with an exceedingly delicate ribbing, at right 1 Sub-genus Pomatia, Beck. J. S. Gardner—British Eocene Land Mollusca. 251 angles to the suture and almost parallel to the axis. The ribs are sharp, narrow, and relatively high, and the interspaces are at least three times as wide as the ribs, and five are included in a millimétre. It possesses a projected ovate aperture with slightly reflected lips, which are toothed. There are many living species scattered over the world, but the fossil most closely resembles a group of nearly related species inhabiting the Grecian Archipelago. Pura monoponta, MS., Edwards, from Headon, appears referable to the genus Megaspira, possessing the columellar folds or teeth characteristic of that genus. - Mecaspira cytinprica, MS. Edwards.—The unique specimen known is from the London Clay of Finchley, and is a small turrited finely striated shell with peculiar transversely plaited columella, appearing identical with M. exigua from Ports Molle and Curtis. Fam. Succininz. Succrnua impersprcua, 8. Wood, is a true Succinea, very probably belonging to a still existing species, but the living forms are so in- distinguishable from each other, and the genus is so widely distributed, that an exact identification would be difficult, if not impossible. The fossils are from Headon and Hordwell. Fam. OLEACINIDE. Zua.—Two small species, Z. Headonensis and Z. dubia, Hdw. MS., smooth cylindrical shells, are referred to the very limited recent genus Zua, but the propriety of this determination appears doubtful. All the preceding species require further correlation with those already described from Tertiary beds of other parts of the world, more particularly with those of the Eocene Paris Basin, as it seems hardly possible, in view of the number of plants common to English and European Kocenes, that so many should be peculiar to so limited an area. There is no doubt but that an exhaustive comparison would enable many more of the fossil species to be identified with living. Very few, I believe, would be found wholly extinct, for the per- sistence of specific types of land snails through long geological ages is one of the noteworthy facts in the history of Mollusca. Many of the genera are known to have existed indeed in the Carboniferous. The facts already brought to light demand a very complicated redis- tribution of land and water, and are certainly incompatible with Mr. Wallace’s views of the permanence of continents through all geolo- gical time. I prefer for the present however to withhold those more definite conclusions which the material, even so far as already examined, would justify me in putting forward. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Land Mollusca from the Upper Eocene, Bembridge Limestone, Sconce, I. of Wight. Fie. 1. Bulimus (Amphidromus) levolongus, Boubée, 1844. >, 2. Glandina costellata, Sowerby, sp. », 8. Bulimus (Amphidromus) ellipticus (young), Sby. sp. a de oe 3 »» (adult). », 5a. Egg of B. ellipticus (?). 5b. Section through same. » 6. Helix (Calocochlea) globosa, Sby. » I Clausilia striatula, Edwards. All drawn natural size. 252 W. H. Hudleston—On the Yorkshire Oolites. II.— ContrisutTions To THE PALMONTOLOGY OF THE YORKSHIRE OOoLITES. By Witrrip H. Hupuzsron, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Concluded from p. 207.) Genus Actmon, Montfort=Tornatella, Lamarck. Two species, or at least two well-marked varieties of one species, occur in the lower beds of the Inferior Oolite of Yorkshire, which cannot be referred to Actceonina, but which are provisionally placed under Actgon. The type is the well-known Auricula Sedgvici, Phil., characteristic of the Dogger, though far from common, and almost impossible to obtain in a perfectly satisfactory state. Hence the chief difficulty. These shells are ovate, with a shortish spire, the last whorl ventri- cose, surface spirally striated (more deeply than in any species of Acteonina), columella thickened, and somewhat oblique, but not plicated, if I have correctly interpreted the available specimens. The aperture is relatively shorter than in Actgonina, and, owing to the effuseness of the outer lip, almost semilunar in outline. The general aspect of these shells is greatly that of Actgon; but, as far as my experience goes, they are without the fold.’ 92.—Aoctmon Sxrpevict, Phillips, 1829. Pl. V. Fig. 4.” 1829-1885. Auricula Sedgvici, Phillips, G. Y., p. 129, pl. xi. fig. 33. 1849. Actaeon Sedgwici, D’ Orb (Phil.), Prod. i. p. 263. Et. Baj. 1850. Acteon Sedgvici, Phil.; Morr. and Lye. Gt. Ool. Moll. p. 118, pl. 15, fig. 9. 1854. Acteon Sedgwickii, Phil. ; Morris, Cat., p. 233. 1875. Acteon Sedgwickii, Phillips, G. Y., 3rd edition, p. 260, pl. xi. fig. 33. Compare also, 1837. Tornatella pulla, Koch and Dunker, Verstein. pp. 33, pl. 2, fig. 11. 1848. Tornatella pulchella, Deslongchamps, Mém. Soc. Linn. Norm- vii. p. 162, pl. 18, fig. 4. 1850. Acton pullus, Morris and Lycett, Gt. Ool. Moll. p. 119, pl. 15, fig. 11. 1852. es 56 Graculavus velox 50 ” ” ” ” pumilus ” 99 Miocene. Newer Miocene. MI0cENE. Miocene. Post-PLI0cENE. Meudon, Paris, Gastornis parisiensis. Belgium, Gastornis Edwardsii, Dollo. Sheppey, Lithornis vulturinus, Owen. (London Clay), Argillornis longipennis, Owen; Dasornis londiniensis, Owen; Odontopteryx toliapicus, Owen ; Halcyon; Laride (sp.), Gulls? Ardeide, Herons? Hempstead (Freshwater marls), Isle of Wight, Pzenornis. Hordwell, Macrornis (Seeley). Glarus (Plattenberg), Protornis (Osteornis). Paris Basin, Agnopterus (Flamingo ?), ext. ; Cormoranus ; Coturniz (2 sp.); Falco; Gypsornis (Rallide ?), ext. ; Leptosomus; Limosa; Paleocircus, ext.; Paieortyx, ext.; Pelidna; Ralius; Sitta; Tringa? Aix, Provence, Fossil Eggs and Feathers. Lacustrine deposits, Armissan, in Languedoc, Zetrao. Apt, Provence, Bird remains indetermined. Marls of Ronzon, Auvergne. Various Bird remains. Swabian Alps (Fraas). Ditto. N. America, Wyoming (0. C. Marsh), 5 species of Birds. New Mexico, U. States Territory, Diatryma gigantea, Cope. France-Bourbonnais and Auvergne (remains of nearly 50 species of birds). Mentz, many identical forms. Berne, Freshwater deposits. Provence and Languedoc. (Bone-beds) Sansan in Gascony. Greece, Pikermi, Attica. Siwalik Hills, India. Struthio, sp. -Argala. ? Cormorant. Steinheim, Bavaria, 8 sp. of birds. bis, Ardea, Paleloches, Anas and Pelecanus. N. America. All of them existing species. New Zealand, Dinornis, Palapteryx. Madagascar, pyornis (3 species). Mascarene Islands, Erythromachus, etc. Brazil (Bone-caves), Rhea, sp. Australia (Caves), Dromeornis, Dromeus. The labours of many Naturalists combined, of whom the names of Sclater, Wallace, Newton, and some others should be specially men- tioned, have enabled us to map out the world into six great Natural- History Regions, to which, strange to say, flying birds, with few exceptions, readily correspond in their geographical distribution. "4x0 gy “A ‘ds FT ayyey ‘ut ‘bs 000'¢ = ‘ds | ‘soroeds 000‘T ‘soqtua arenbs 000‘000‘E eNVITVULSOV “AI (‘Sada “WHELVTIOS ‘soroads Q00‘TT Wet} SsoT Jou ST MMOMY Yuosard 4v sprtgq Fo raqumu [e404 OT, ‘govtd woyey svy savok OZ ysv] 94} Ur sotoods Ur esvoroUT snoultoua sadUTAOId IMO} osaqy [[B UI JVI ow suIXosut adiwyg “g{ Y “aAT z ["GL81 Ut (moyMON) Sotoads Qe)g 0} puv : (1oxV[OG) NOG) OF Sgt UI poymnowe BUNYTAB eToyM oyT] “(gegt) gFI-ogT “dd “mM “Joa ‘(ASojo0z) ‘oog ‘uur ‘oorg ‘umoe “gy yy “toyepg AoynyT “gq aq 9g 1 “FXO T KPEYy ‘a ‘bs 009° = ‘ds | ‘sotoods 00¢‘T ‘sori orenbs 000000 ‘F zNVIGNI ‘III ‘gouryxe T [A T ayer] sul ‘bs 0U0‘TS = ‘dsq ‘sotoeds 0e9 ‘sopiut orenbs 000‘000‘FT ‘OILOUVW TVd a ADTTILOT ‘d “Ud UALAV) Saya ‘qxo ds pA | BYR “w ‘bs 009'6 = ‘ds 1 ‘sotoads Yeg‘T “soprum orenbs 000 ‘000 ‘GI 2 NVIdOIH LH ‘II 009°) 061 _—sotoads [euoytppy org‘) 0°6'Z oeee eevee ‘TA Wy wOewovke a 000‘T e@eeeceeee “AL NG, CORRS OME wear: 0SZ‘T eeeeoeee HL 029 teen eens a7 “soroedg “SOLS ‘yxo [ a ‘ds g @yryey ‘ut "bs 000'F3 = ‘ds T ‘sotoods 9Gz‘z ‘sopiut atenbs 990‘00¢‘e 2 [VOIZOULOUN ‘TA (‘ssof [ @}4R 7) ‘ut ‘bs 0006 = ‘ds Tf ‘satoads 999 ‘soqtut orenbs 900‘00¢‘9 ‘OILOUVAN “A HO NOILONGIYLSIG TVOIRdVYNORD AHL 316 Dr. H. Woodward—On Wingless Birds. These Regions embrace :— I. The Panmarcric, consisting of Europe and Asia, with Africa, down to the tropic of Cancer, also Northern Arabia, Persia, Tibet, and China. In North Africa, Arabia, and Persia there is evidence of the Ostrich in modern and ancient times, although no doubt it is rarer now. We have also a fossil Ostrich Dromornis (Sheppey). Il. The Erutopran Region, embracing all Africa and Arabia south of the tropic of Cancer and Madagascar with its adjacent islands. We have here the living Ostrich, and in Madagascar three if not four well-marked species of extinct Struthious Birds called Mpyornis, occurring in the newer Tertiary sand-drift deposits of this island. III. The Inpian Region, and the whole of Siam, with Borneo, Sumatra, the Philippines, etc., having one fossil Ostrich in the Sewalik Hills. There is also historic evidence of the former wider range of this Bird, from Persia into India itself. IV. The Avsrratian Region, comprising New Guinea, Celebes, Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, etc. This province in living and extinct forms of Struthious Birds is the richest in the world. It possesses 9 species of Cassowary (Caswarius). 3 <5 Emeu (Dromeus). (living). 4 45 Apteryx or ‘* Kiwi.” 14 5 Dinornis, Palapteryx, Dromornis, etc. (all extinct). V. The Nearotic Region embraces the great Continent of North America down to Mexico. It has no living Struthious Bird; but Prof. Cope has discovered in strata of Eocene age in New Mexico, a wingless Bird twice the size of the living Ostrich, named by him Diatryma gigantea. VI. The Neorropican Region embraces Central and South America, and the West Indies: a region most rich in species of modern birds, and having three species of Struthiones, and one extinct form from the Caves of Brazil. Power of Flight.—Nearly all living birds, as is very well known, possess the power of flight and have carinate breast-bones, to give attachment to the great pectoral muscles, without which the wings would be unable to beat the air in the rapid flight of the bird, and so sustain it above the earth. But if a Carinate Bird is placed upon an island and has no enemies, and has habitually to seek its food upon the ground, the bird in time ceases to fly at all, and loses the carinated character of its sternum." This has happened in Strigops (one of the Psittacide), New Zea- land; in the Dodo (Didine), Mauritius; the ‘‘ Solitaire” (Pezophus solitarius), Rodriguez; the Aphanapteryx (a Rail), Mauritius ; the 1 Tn the case of Didunculus, in the Island of Samoa, this little didine bird had carelessly taken to building its nest on the ground, but since the introduction of pigs and other animals, it has made an effort to save itself, and it now builds its nest higher up in the trees, and it may possibly survive adverse circumstances if man does not intervene. Strigops seems, on the contrary, doomed to extermination, building on or near the ground, and making no effort to fly or protect itself from its destroyers. Dr. H. Woodward—On Wingless Birds. 317 Chemiornis (a gigantic goose), New Zealand; the Aptornis (a Rail), New Zealand ; the Notornis (a Rail), New Zealand. Again, a bird may have wings quite useless for the purpose of flight, and yet capable of being used for some other purpose, and so may develope a large keel on the sternum. For example, the Great Auk and the Penguin, although incapable of flight, use their rudi- mentary wings most vigorously when swimming in pursuit of fish, and have a very large keeled breast-bone.* The Hesperornis had a perfectly flat sternum, wholly destitute of a keel, so that, even if it had a rudimentary wing, it was without any function, having no muscles to move it. Whatever view we may adopt as to the origin of the Ratite, it is an undoubted fact that they occur, either recent or fossil, in each of the great regions of the globe. This group must therefore be considered to be as old, if not probably more ancient than the Carinate among the Avian Class. For unless we adopt the hypothesis of a separate origin for each family of the Raft-breasted Birds, we must admit that their inability either to fly or to swim, renders their distribution by land, as in- dispensable as in the case of the Mammalia: whereas those birds possessed of the power of flight may have crossed over a portion of old land, on the wing, after that land had become submerged, and so have peopled separate islands and continents. Indeed Wallace so explains the habit of those migratory birds that twice annually cross the Channel, and also the Mediterranean Sea, by the theory that they are a part of a group of birds belonging to a much larger ancient land-surface (now no longer continuous), over which these birds moved with the seasons in search of food, from south to north, or from east to west, and vice-versa, and that their modern representatives simply follow the old road, although a part of that road is now under water. But we must admit that the Carinate may justly claim for their remote ancestor the most ancient fossil bird we know at present, viz. the Archeopteryx from the Lithographic Stone of Solenhofen in Bavaria, a stratum of Upper Jurassic age. For although an aberrant form of bird, it possessed the foot of a true passerine bird, and enjoyed, in a small degree at least, the power of flight; whereas for the Ratirm we have no more remote ancestor than Owen’s Kocene Dasornis londiniensis, or Cope’s Diary gigantea from the Hocene of New Mexico. It seems probable, however, that some of the footprints on the American Triassic Sandstones may have been produced by Struthious birds, and Cope’s discovery of Diatryma gigantea in the Hocene of New Mexico may be followed by the unearthing of more ancient evidence of Ratira in North America. That the immediate predecessors to Birds were Dinosauria seems highly probable, and this view has been adopted by Professors Huxley, O. C. Marsh, and many other comparative anatomists. 1 The Guillemot may be seen at the Zoological Gardens using its wings when swimming in pursuit of fish. 318 Mr. P. Lake on Hippopotamus from Barrington. Professor Marsh, writing upon Archeopteryx in the Grou. Mace., 1881, says:—‘“'The nearest approach to Birds now known would seem to be in the very small Dinosaurs from the American Jurassic. In some of these the separate bones of the skeleton cannot be distin- guished with certainty from those of Jurassic Birds, if the skull is wanting, and even in this part the resemblance is striking. Some of these diminutive Dinosaurs were perhaps arboreal in habit, and the difference between them and the birds that lived with them may have been at first mainly one of feathers. It is an interesting fact that all the Jurassic birds known, both from Hurope and America, are land birds, while all from the Cre- taceous are aquatic forms. 'The four oldest known birds, moreover, differ more widely from each other than do any two recent birds. These facts show that we may hope for most important discoveries in the future, especially from the Triassic, which has as yet furnished no authentic trace of birds. For the primitive forms of this class we must evidently look to the Paleozoic rocks.” (O. C. Marsh upon “Jurassic Birds and their Allies,” Gnon. Mac. 1881, pp. 485-487.) VII.—Woopwarpian Museum Nores. On a Pecuttar Form or HiPPorpoTaMus MAJOR, FOUND AT BARRINGTON. By Pup Laxs, Esq., St. John’s College, Cambridge. N the gravel at Barrington, about seven miles §.8.W. of Cam- bridge, numerous remains of Hippopotamus have been found, associated with Rhinoceros, Bison, Cervus, etc. A description of this gravel and its included fossils has been given by Mr. Fisher.’ But since Mr. Fisher’s paper was written, the number of bones and teeth found has been very largely increased. Most of these remains have been deposited in the Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge. Among the Hippopotamus bones were six more or less perfect lower jaws. Five of these were typical specimens of H. major ; but the sixth differs in character from the rest in several points, so much so in fact, that with a less perfect series of remains, it would perhaps have been described as a different species. The jaw in question is tolerably perfect. The front part is com- plete; and the whole of the right ramus is present except the posterior lower portion. The condyle of this side, and also the anterior part of the crochet, are preserved. Only the front half of the left ramus of the jaw, as far as the first true molar, is complete ; but we have also the condyle of this side, though the intermediate parts are missing. The incisors and canines are all present. On the right side the teeth left are the last premolar and the last two molars ; on the left side, the last premolar and the first molar. The chief points in which this jaw differs from an ordinary jaw of H. major are the very small size of the canines and incisors ; the extent of the contraction and the small depth behind these; and the generally more feeble character of the jaw. 1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1879, vol, xxxv. p. 670. Mr. P. Lake on Hippopotamus from Barrington. 319 The molars are well worn, except the last, which, however, is worn to some extent at all its cusps. Hence the animal must have been mature, though probably it had only just reached that age. In order to show the points of difference and resemblance arrived at by a comparison of this jaw with that of an unmistakable H. major, I have drawn up the following table of measurements. The first column of figures gives the measurements taken from the jaw in question; the second, those taken from a typical jaw of &. major, of the same length, in the Woodwardian Museum. The new jaw. |Jaw of H. major. iis) ak, fis) in Length—Condyle to canine ..........00. ¢ 1 9 1 9 Breadth—Canine to canine ......sesssese sees 1 4 1 5 Width at top just in front of the last premolar a 0 5 0 5 Width at the widest part of the jaw just below EMS OUM peer cfeteyerw Heteiers: ctevets’ss sean arenes ste 0 93% 0 103 Depth of jaw at the last molar ............0008 ORnos, 0 55 Depth of jaw in front of last premolar.......... 0 os 0 (Ce Length of the part of the canine out of the socket (measured along the convex side) .......... 0 43 0 9 Length of the part of the middle incisors out of Hn@ GOK Géabs SobbOC BES cdodcoude corede On 3 0 8t * Part of the left side of the jaw being missing here, about half an inch has been added to bring the width to what it actually would be if the specimen were perfect. + This is the observed length, but fully an inch is missing. The outer incisors of the jaw are perfect and project only an inch, or even less, out of their sockets; but those in the typical jaw with which I have compared them are broken off. They are, how- ever, much thicker than in the new jaw. The molar teeth are exactly like those of H. major. Among the canines found separately at Barrington, there are small ones like those belonging to the new jaw, and larger ones belonging to H. major. But there is no passage between these two kinds. Among all the other remains there is no evidence of there being two kinds of Hippopotamus here. In discussing the nature of this jaw, ‘it may be assumed that it is (1) a new species, (2) an immature H. major, or (8) a female of H. major. It can scarcely be considered to be a new species, for the only difference from H. major is the size of the canines and incisors and the natural accompaniment of diminished weight and strength of the jaw and of the canine sockets. There are enough of the other remains to assume that if there were any other difference, we should be able to detect it. It is not likely that the remains of this kind of Hippopotamus should be restricted to canines and incisors, while we get so many other parts of H. major. Again, the jaw does not seem to be immature. The dentition is adult, the last molar having completely risen from its alveolus, and being worn down to some extent. Moreover, among the other re- mains, there is no passage between the two kinds of canines. Finally, the jaw is as long as that of a full-grown H. major. 320 Reviews—T. M. Reade, on the Two Americas. In Parkinson's “Organic Remains’! there is described a peculiar Hippopotamus tusk, small and rounded, which he is inclined to refer to H. minor. But Sir Richard Owen? considers it to be simply the tusk of a young H. major; and states that these characters are found in the tusks of young animals of H. amphibius. But the tusks of the jaw under examination are not in the least rounded, and their section is just like that of an ordinary adult tusk, and they are grooved in the same way. Assuming it then as proved, that this jaw is a jaw of H. major, and is not an immature one, it seems probable that it belongs to the female of H. major. It is common enough among the Omnivora, to which Hippopotamus belongs, to find the tusks much more strongly developed in the male than in the female. It is true that the travellers® who have had the best opportunities of studying Hippo- potamus amphibius in its native state, do not notice any very marked difference in the size of the tusks of the two sexes (except so far as old males are concerned, these having enormous tusks). But there is nothing unlikely in supposing that, in the case of H. major, the female might have much smaller tusks than the male; and this is what the other evidence seems to point to. Norr.—Mr. R. Lydekker, B.A., F.G.S., concurs in the author’s suggestion, that the relative differences in the dentition and form of the jaws in the Barrington Hippopotami are really only sexual, and it is therefore unnecessary to figure these remains, seeing that they are, In common with other Pleistocene examples, met with in this country, without reasonable doubt, referable to the living species of Hippopotamus, as long since pointed out by Prof. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., F.R.8. (see his Introduction to the Fossil Mammalia, Pal. Soc. Mon. 1866).—Enpir. Grou. Maa. gy Gen VS SO 3S WwW (Se I.—Denupation or THE Two Americas. By T. Mutnarp Reape, C.E., F.G.S., ete. . [Presidential Address to the Liverpool Geological Society, Session 1884-5. } ils 1876 Mr. Mellard Reade delivered an address before the Liver- i pool Geological Society on the subject of “Geological Time.” He then introduced some calculations relating to Chemical Denuda- tion, and concluded that, on an average, 1434 tons of mineral matter are annually removed in solution from each square mile of the surface of England and Wales. From the Danube basin he estimated the annual loss by chemical denudation to be 90 tons per square mile. Hxtending his calculations now to the larger rivers of America, he concludes that from the drainage area of the Mississippi, 120 tons of solids in solution are removed from each square mile of surface per annum. It has been estimated that the basin of this 1 «» gemmatus, 99 A an var. mosensis, De Ryckh. 99 95 Viseticola, Pe ” ” legiacus, ” 30 On eburonicus, D6 >, priscus, Minster. » mervicanus, De Ryckh. », turnacianus, 30 >, LMempiscus, 96 », (Chitonellus) cordifer, De Kon. », thomondiensis, Baily. », Burrowianus, Kirkby. [The following additional species of Chitons from British Carbon- iferous rocks are recorded by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., F.R.P.S.E., Proceed. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, 1881, pp. 84-104, pl. i. and ii. Chiton Dalriensis, R. Etheridge, jun. » Armstrongianus, R, Eth. jun. 356 Dr. H. Woodward—On Helminthochiton— Chiton sp. ind. », soleaformis, R. Eth, jun. 5 tae 5 4 % . ind. Chitoneitus subquadratus, Kirkby and Young. As sp. ind. 3 (?) patelliformis, R. Eth. jun. 2 Bennieanus, > 36 (?) Kirkbyanus, AB of Youngianus, Kirkby. } (De Koninck’s List continued.) Urerrer Dervontan. Chiton levigatus, Fr. Ad. Roemer. 5, tumidus, De Kon. », fasciatus, Sandb. », subgranosus, Sandb. Mippur Devonian. Chiton corrugatus, G. and F. Sandberger. PRC i ‘diformis, G. Sandberger. >» priscus, non Munster. », NSandbergianus, De Ryckh. », sagittalis, G. and F. Sandberger. 99 Do Sd Uprer SILURIAN. Chiton Grayanus, De Kon. Lower Sinurian. Chiton (Helminthochiton) Grifithii, Salter. The only species of Chitonide noticed by G. Lindstrém, in his Silurian Gasteropoda and Pteropoda of Gotland, Stockholm, 1884, are :— Chelodes Bergmani, Davidson and King. 50 Gotlandicus, Lind, Chiton, sp. indet. Besides the specimen above described, Prof. T. Rupert Jones had also received from Mrs. Gray several examples of a small fossil from a black Silurian slate-rock, Balcletchie, near Girvan, named Soleno- caris solenoides by MM. Young in 1868.' The small detached oblong valves originally described by the authors were obtained from the Silurian strata of Penwhapple Glen, near Girvan (see Proe. Nat. Hist. Soc. of Glasgow, 1868, vol. i. part i. pp. 171-178, pl. i. figs. Ta, b., and Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinb. vol. iv. 1878, p. 167). The genus Solenocaris of Young is also referred to, under the order Phyllopoda, in ‘Nicholson and Etheridge’s Monograph of the Silurian Fossils of the Girvan District in “Ayrshire ” (fase. 1. 1878, p. 207). The authors point out that the Solenocaris of Young (1868) must not be confounded with the Solenocaris of Meek (1872). Messrs. Young thus describe Solenocaris :— “‘Tt presents, at first sight, all the characters of a bivalve shell of the Solenoid group; but Mr. Young detected at the posterior part of the hinge-line the peculiar * See also Report on Fossil Puynuoropa, Brit. Assoc, 1883. Jrom the Silurian of Girvan, Ayrshire. 307 ornament which is comparable only to that found in Crustaceans, and is never found in Lamellibranchs. The test is oblong quadrilateral, one quarter of an inch in length, and one fourteenth in breadth. The anterior extremity is truncated vertically, the posterior is gently rounded. The outer surface, on which an eye-spot is visible,! is divided into two nearly equal parts, one of which, starting from the anterior superior angle, cuts the lower margin in front of the lower posterior angle. The area anterior and inferior to this furrow is traversed by nine or ten longitudinal ridges, of which the lowest is more elevated than the others, and forms a thickened rim to the test. The posterior and upper triangular area is divided by a triangular ridge, which, narrow at its anterior superior end, gradually widens backwards, and covers more than the lower half of the posterior extremity of the test. Above this ridge isa gently convex surface, bounded superiorly by the slightly thickened dorsal margin. ‘This area is traversed by faint concentric strive, the continuation of some of the coarser anterior ridges. It is on this area that the ornament above mentioned is seen. It consists of very close-set, minute tubercles, arranged in linear series opposite each other. The contours of the surface are in several planes. The anterior vertical margin is everted ; the remainder of the antero-inferior area is in one plane. The middle of the postero-superior area projects considerably, in consequence of the prominence of the elevated ridge, the upper surface being flattened slightly towards the hinge-line ; but posteriorly the surface is flattened very markedly towards the posterior rounded margin, so that the two valves would be approximated pretty closely. Its resemblance to a gaping bivalve is thus considerable, but on closer comparison the difference will appear well-marked. No Lamellibranch has the anterior greater than the posterior gape ; when the relation is not one of equality, the posterior is the larger. Orthonotus, the nearest in form, is not one of the gapers, nor is its hinge- line linear, with parallel bounding areas; its oblique, lateral ridges, moreover, cut the inferior margin, not the posterior outline, as in the specimen before us. The ornament, again, is not that of Lamellibranchs; its granular surface has a corresponding obverse surface seen when the shell has been removed, and exactly similar to that in the internal casts of Dithyrocaris. The lateral position of the beak removes the Brachiopoda at once from consideration, though, in some respects, the outer and inner surfaces present appearances not unlike those of Productus. No other conclusion is open except that this form is a Crustacean, and, so far as I am aware, of an undescribed type. Those which are known from the Silurian rocks are Hymenocaris, Peltocaris, Discinocaris and Ceratiocaris. In all these the extended carapace forms a shield, with rounded outlines.. Our specimen would give a quadrilateral shield.2 The character of the ornament is wholly peculiar; no less so is the want of the definite emargination seen in the Crustacea above-mentioned. The absence of distortion in any of the other fossils from the same locality, and the presence of the eversion of the anterior margin in all the specimens, forbids the supposition that this character is accidental. After a careful study of Messrs. Young’s Solenocaris, and com- parison with the Chiton-like series of plates above noticed, we are led to conclude that there is a very general agreement between them, 1T have not been able to satisfy myself as to the presence of the eye-spot here referred to, in any of Mrs. Gray’s specimens.—H.W. 2 We are reminded by the Solenocaris of Young of the small oblong bivalved Crustacean carapaces, named by Prof. T. Rupert Jones Zeaia (see Appendix to a Monograph of the Fossil Estherie, by T. Rupert Jones, Pal. Soc. Mon. 1862, p. 116, pl. v. figs. 11, 12, Leaia Leidyi, Pennsylvania; LZ. Leidyi, var. Williamsoniana, Jones, op. cit. p. 117, pl. i. figs. 19, 20, and var. Salteriana, fig. 21, from Ardwick, Manchester, and Fifeshire; others are known from Edinburgh, Bristol, South Wales, Germany, Nova Scotia, and Illinois) ; but the sculpturing and orna- mentation is, to all appearance, that of Hstheria. See on some Bivalyed Entomostraca from the Coal-measures of South Wales, by Prof. T. Rupert Jones, Grou. Mac. 1870, Vol. VII. p. 214, Pl. IX. with figures ot Lewia. - See also on the Occurrence of a Phyllopod genus, Zeaia, in the Lower Carboniferous Rocks of Edinburgh, by R. Etheridge, jun. (Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1879, 5th series, vol. iii. pp. 257-263). 308 Dr. H, Hicks—On Rock Classification. so far as bodies of the kind can be compared, preserved in such different kinds of matrix. The points of difference observable are, first, that the valves of “« Solenocaris” appear to be longer and narrower than in Helmintho- chiton, and the lines of growth appear to be harder, sharper, and squarer, whilst the radiating ribs or striae of the dorsal area are more numerous on the valves of the former than on those of the latter genus. In Helminthochiton the lines of growth observable upon the lateral areas of each valve are rather more curved and less quadran- gular than in “ Solenocaris.” Prof. Rupert Jones and Mr. Robert Etheridge, who have examined and compared the specimens from Thraive, and from Penwhapple and Balcletchie, are satisfied of their generic, if not of their specific identity. For differences above specified I prefer, on the whole, to treat them as distinct. Under these circumstances, it will be needful to refer them to Helminthochiton and to suggest a fresh specific name for the Chiton from Thraive, and I venture to propose to name it Helminthochiton Grayiz, in honour of its discoverer, Mrs. Robert Gray, who has contributed so much to the elucidation of the fossil- remains from the Silurian rocks of Ayrshire, and to whom we are indebted for the opportunity of describing the present interesting. specimen. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX. Fies. 7-12. Fic. 7. Helminthochiton Grayia, H. Woodw. (side-view) natural size; a. sup- posed anterior or cephalic plate. San Os rf a (dorsal view) ,, a », 9. Two of the valves of same, viewed dorsally, twice nat. size; a, a, posi- tion of apophyses, not clearly to be made out in the fossil. » 10. Side-view of a yalve of same, enlarged twice nat. size. Ste, Ws 50 43 of Helminthochiton (Solenocaris) solenoides, Young and Young (twice nat. size). », 12. Two valves of Chiton squamosus, Lamk. (recent), placed for comparison with the fossil, viewed dorsally. Fics. 7-10 from the Upper Bala Beds of Thraive, near Girvan, Ayrshire, in the collection of Mrs. Robert Gray, of Edinburgh. IV.—Tue CuassiFIcCATION OF STRATIFIED Rocks. By Henry Hicks, M.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. R. JUKES-BROWNE’S proposed classification of our rock groups, in the July Number of the Gronocican Macazinu, is a commendable attempt to solve an important question, especially where he proposes to establish divisions on paleontological evidence, in preference to depending upon minor breaks in the succession, which must always be more or less local. In some respects, however, his table lacks the definite order and simplicity which should be the main point aimed at in any attempt at improving the classification. All appear more or less agreed as to the great divisions, and the terms Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary, are on the whole satisfactory. Dr. H. Hicks—On Rock Classification. 309 The subordinate divisions should as far as possible have Geographical terms with wide applications, but such names as Carboniferous and Cretaceous will also doubtless remain in use. The wide geographical divisions should be divided and subdivided under more local names. The Lower Paleozoic rocks in the West of England and Wales could according to this plan be satisfactorily arranged as follows :— I would apply the term Cambrian in a far more general sense than it has hitherto been used, and would place it as one of the main divi- sions of the Paleozoic, the others being Devonian and Carboniferous." Cambrian, being a term derived from the whole of the Principality of Wales, where the Lower Paleozoic rocks are best exposed, and in which every important group from the base of the Llanberis and Harlech series to the top of the Ludlow is found, is incomparably the best that can be suggested for this purpose.” The Cambrian in this arrangement should be broken up into three primary divisions with the names in descending order of Silurian, Ordovician, and a new name Georgian, from the districts bordering St. George’s Channel, where the lower rocks (Llanberis, Harlech, Menevian, etc.) are best exposed, and where they have been mainly examined. The groups and series should have local names—such names being taken from places where the beds were first examined, or are well exposed. The following table will explain the arrangement suggested :— GROUPS OR STAGES. SyYSTEMs. Primary Divisions. (Wanzs, prc.) (Scornanp) (IRELAND). ( Ludlow ? B SILURIAN. Wenlock B Pp Llandovery ? Pp Bala ? fg Llandeilo P P ORDOVICIAN. Llanvirn ? ip | Arenig ? P CAMBRIAN. < (| Tremadoc P P Dolgelly P ? | Ffestiniog ? p Gan Gain é Maentwrog ip if 5 | Menevia (instead of Menevian) i 2 | | Solva ? ? (| Caerfai P ? ARCHZAN, or, PRE-CAMBRIAN. 1 It may be found advisable to class the Upper Paleozoic Rocks, like the Lower, into one system with three Primary divisions. In that case the term Devonian would be applied, in a better sense, as the lowest of the Primary Divisious in that system. 2 The term Silurian may possibly occur to some as suitable, but to my mind it seems entirely out of the question, as comparatively only a few of the groups,—none indeed of the more important of the lower groups,—occur anywhere within the limited area formerly occupied by the Sidures. 360 kh. Lydekker—On Esthonyx and Platycheerops. V.—Novre on tHe Generto Ipentity or tur Genus EsrHovrx, Cope, with PLarycua@rors, Cuartesworta (=Mzozoraus, Owsy). By R. Lypexxer, B.A., F.G.S., ete. te an early number of the present serial! Prof. Sir R. Owen de- scribed and figured the hinder part of the palate of a small mammal from the London Clay of Herne Bay,? under the new name of Miolophus planiceps. The specimen is now preserved in the Museum at York, and had been previously described by Mr. E. Charlesworth * under the name of Platycherops Richardsoni; a cir- cumstance which seems to have escaped the notice of Sir R. Owen. This name having the priority should supersede that of Miolophus.‘ The specimen (of which there is a cast in the British Museum) shows the second and third true molars of both sides, and on the right side the fourth premolar and the alveoli of pm 8 and m.1. Both the later premolars and true molars are of the same general form, and have tritubercular crowns. Sir R. Owen regarded the specimen as indicating a form allied to Hyracotherium (including Pliolophus) ; but the similarity between the premolars and true molars and the trituberculate crowns of the latter forbids the acceptance of this view. In 1874 Prof. Cope ® founded a new genus, from the reputed Hocene of New Mexico, under the name of Hsthonyx, the type species being named HE. Burmeistert. In two subsequent communications ° the same writer determined the dental formula of this form to be I. 2, C. 4, Pm. 3, M. 2; and in the latter of the two he gives a reduced figure of the right half of the palate.’ The third (penultimate) premolar has one external and one internal cusp, and is separated by a distinct interval from the teeth on either side. In the fourth premolar these cusps are much enlarged, and the tooth is transversely elongated. The true molars have two external cusps, which are flattened, close together, and well within the margin of the base of the crown. There is one internal cusp, and a strong posterior ledge. This description applies word for word to the palate of Platycherops Richardsoni ; and if the figure of the latter be compared with that of the so-called Esthonya Burmeisteri, the close resemblance of the two will be self-evident. The European form exhibits the isolation of the alveolus of pm 3, and the marked contraction of the cranium at the level of this tooth. The writer has, therefore, no hesitation in uniting Esthonya with Platycherops. The American P. Burmeisteri appears to have been ' Got. Maa. Dec. I. Vol. II. p. 389, Pl. X. Fig. 1 (1865). * Erroneonsly stated to be from Sheppey. ® Rep. Brit. Assoc. for 1854, Trans. of Sections, p. 80. See also Gron. Mac. Dee. I. Vol. III. p. 48 (1866). 4 The description is somewhat vague, and the two sides of the molars are reversed in the description. | ° Rep. U.S. Geogr. Sury. W. of 100th Meridian, Vert. Foss. New Mexico, p. 6 1874), 8vo. ® Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, 1831, pp. 147-148 ; and Amer. Nat. 1884, pp. 479-480. 7 A full-sized figure is given in Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv, vol. iii. pl. xxiv. C. fig. 1 (1884). 4to. Wm. Carruthers—Roots in Sarsen Stones. 361 very nearly equal in size to P. Richardsoni, but is distinguished by the relatively smaller size of the last true molar. With regard to its serial position, the genus was originally referred by Prof. Cope to the Insectivora, but in his latest memoir’ it is placed among his Creodonta, in the family Leptictide, which includes Proviverra (=Stypolophus, Cope, Cynohycenodon, Filhol). Provisionally accepting this reference, the present writer will include Platycherops in the group Carnivora Primigenia;* which appears to connect the true Carnivora by insensible gradations with the Insectivora. Prof. Cope suggests that the genus may be an ancestral form connected with Hrinaceus. VI.—Norzs on Fosstz Roors in rue Sarsen Stones oF WILTSHIRE. By Witi1am Carrutuers, F.R.S., ete. AVING had placed in my hands by Prof. T. Rupert Jones (who has already communicated some notes on Sarsen Stones to your pages, Vols. for 1875 and 1876) some microscopic preparation of plant-remains found in Sarsen Stones from Wiltshire, belonging to Impressions of Roots of a Palm (?), seen in a weathered Sarsen-stone in a wall at Abury (from a pencil-sketch by Major C. C. King). 1 Amer. Nat. 1884, pp. 347, 479. 2 «Catalogue of Fossil Mammalia in the British Museum,”’ pt. i. p. 20 (1885). The writer finds it will be necessary to issue a supplement to this part, as he is con- tinually coming across specimens in the Museum which have hitherto been referred to other orders, but which he now finds should be included in those treated of in this part. He proposes (with the sanction of the Museum authorities) to issue this supplement on the completion of the Catalogue of the Ungulata. 362 Notices of Memoirs—E. T. Newton on Gastornis. Mr. Thos. Codrington, F.G.S.,1 I would be glad to state in a sentence or two the results of my examination. These vegetable remains are certainly roots. The method of branching shown in some of the specimens, and shown still better in a pencil-sketch by Major C. C. King, from a Sarsen which has been weathered in a wall at Abury, leave no doubt as to this. The root- lets leave the main root in every direction at right angles. The roots are in their original position. The soft sand, now indurated by siliceous cement, has been the soil on which the plants grew. An examination of the preparations shows the main stem to have been composed of a small central vascular bundle, surrounded by a con- siderable thickness of soft parenchyma, consisting of uniform cells of short rectangular shape. The cells have not been distorted by pressure, but retain the size and form of the original tissue,—which is a further evidence of the roots being preserved in the position in which they grew. There are not sufficient data in the specimens to enable one to determine with certainty what was the nature of the plants to which the roots belong ; but it appears to me probable that they were monocotyledonous plants; and they may have been Palms, a group represented in the Hocene Flora of England. INIQaBICCwAAyS) (Oss MoI O)lisyS5 Gastornis Kriaasseny, Newton. A Gicantic BrirD FROM THE Lower Eocene or Croypon.? By HE. T. Newton, F.G.S. R. H. M. KLAASSEN, F.G.S., in his paper on the Series of Lower Tertiary Strata exposed in the railway cutting at Park Hill, near Croydon, read before the Geologists’ Association (Proce. vol. viii. p- 226, 1888), mentions that he had obtained the remains of a very large bird which would as soon as possible be described. The description of these most interesting specimens has been delayed, in the hope that additional material might be brought to light, but as there seemed no longer any probability of other specimens being found, a full account of them, with detailed descriptions, was given in a paper read before the Zoological Society on the 5th of May last, and is in due course to appear in the Transactions of that Society. In the mean time the following account of the paper which is pub- lished with the assent of the President, Prof. Flower, may be of in- terest to the readers of the GroLocicaL MaGazinr. 1 In 1865 Mr. Thomas Codrington, C.E., F.G.S., described in a paper ‘‘ On the Geology of the Berks and Hants Extension and Marlborough Railways,” in the “‘ Magazine Wilts Archeol. Nat. Hist. Soc.,’’ 1865, the occurrence of fossilized vegetable tissue in the pipe-like holes traversing some Sarsen Stones lying on the ground westward of Little Bedwin. In the ‘“ GronocicaL Macazine, new series, Vol. II. 1875, p. 589, Prof. Rupert Jones, noticed some similar tubular cavities in the Sarsen Stones near Frimley, Surrey, and in other geological formations ; and in Grou. Mae., new series, Vol. III. 1876, p. 523, he described similar vegetable marks in the Greywethers or Sarsens of the Chalk Downs near Marlborough, and particularly in the enormous upright stones at Avebury (Abury). These and other similar markings seen elsewhere, are also alluded to by him in the “ Trans. Newbury District Field-Club,” vol. ii. 1878, p. 249, etc. 2 Abstract of a paper read before the Zoological Society, May Sth, 1885. Notices of Memoirs—E. T. Newton on Grastornis. 363 These gigantic bird-bones were obtained from the “ Blue Clay ” and lignite patches of the Woolwich Beds, which lie immediately above the “‘ Mottled Clays,” and are marked f and gin Mr. Klaassen’s section. The most interesting among these specimens are the portions of two large tibiotarsi and parts of a femur. The most perfect tibiotarsus when complete must have had a length of at least twenty inches, and its trochlear extremity is three inches and a half wide. Of the second tibiotarsus only the lower end is preserved, but this is larger, being a little over four inches wide. These bones resemble very closely the corresponding parts of Gastornis Parisiensis, but present differences sufficient to prevent their being referred to the same species, and they have therefore been named after their dis- coverer, Gastornis Klaassenti. This Eocene bird must have been as large and heavy in build as the Dinornis crassus of New Zealand. The original specimen of Gastornis from the Lower Hocene beds of Meudon near Paris, was described by M. Hébert in the Comptes Rendus for 1855 (vol. xv. pp. 579 and 1214), and the genus named after their discoverer, M. Gaston. These Parisian bird-remains were afterwards more fully described and compared with recent forms by Prof. (now Sir Richard) Owen, in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society (vol. xii. p. 204, 1856), and by M. Milne- Edwards (Oiseaux Fossiles, vol. i. p. 165). Unfortunately the troch- lear extremity of the tibiotarsus of G. Parisiensis was so badly pre- served as to render the comparison most difficult and unsatisfactory. Other specimens referable to the same genus have since been dis- covered in Lower Hocene beds near Rheims, and described by Dr. Victor Lemoine under the name of Gastornis Edwardsii (Recher. Oiseaux Foss. envir. d. Reims, 1878 and 1881); these include parts of the head, vertebra, etc., and are therefore extremely valuable ; but the lower ends of the tibiotarsi are far from being well pre- served, and consequently do not help us much in comparing this most important bone with the same parts in recent birds. Mr. L. Dollo, of the Brussels Museum, has described the distal end of the femur of a large bird which he has referred to Gastornis Edwardsii, Lemoine, from the Lower lLandenien of Mesvin, near Mons, Belgium (Bull. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belg. tom. ii. p. 297, pl. xi. 1883). These large tibiotarsi from Croydon have their distal ends so perfect that every detail of their structure can be studied. It is not a little remarkable that, in this part of its organization, Gastornis is quite unlike any of the large birds, recent or fossil, at present known ; the living Ratite having a tibiotarsus quite unlike that of Gastornis ; and that of Dinornis, although making a somewhat nearer approach, has the trochlear extremity of an entirely different type. Indeed, the known forms of Ratite all differ more from Gastornis, in regard to the tibiotarsus, than do some of the living Carinate; and it is interesting to find that opinions, expressed by some previous writers, as to the Anserine affinities of Gastornis, are confirmed by the detailed comparison with recent forms, which the more perfect Croydon specimens now render possible. Although the tibiotarsus of Gastornis Klaasseni more nearly resembles that of the Anserine 364 Reviews—Dr. H. Lansdell—Russian Central Asia. than of any other form of bird, yet it differs in certain particulars from every genus with which it has been possible to compare it, and seems to represent an entirely new type. According to the researches of Dr. Victor Lemoine, Gastornis, in other parts of its organization, shows Ratite affinities. At present the median portion of the sternum is unknown; but the small size of the wings, in some species at least, leads one to expect that it will prove to be without a keel, and thus show a further resemblance to the Ratitze. RAV Lew Ss. —»_—— I.—Russtan Centra Asta, incLupinGc Kuipsa, Boxmara, Kurva, AND Merv. By Henry Lanspett, D.D. Two volumes. (Lon- don: Sampson Low & Co., 1885.) N these interesting volumes, describing a long and somewhat adventurous journey, Dr. Lansdell incidentally imparts to his readers a considerable amount of information on the Geology of Turkestan and some other parts of Central Asia, obtained partly by personal observation, partly by careful compilation from books and papers in languages other than English. The author’s route from Sergiopol to the valley of the Ili, and thence to Chimkeut, ran in a general south-westerly direction. Near the first-named place he notes the occurrence of coal and graphite. Mesozoic and Tertiary rocks, from Triassic upwards, are then traversed, until on attaining higher ground Paleozoic and Metamorphic rocks are reached. The mountain ranges forming the huge massif of the Thian Shan are said to be largely composed of metamorphic and of various igneous rocks. Beyond the Ili the base of a chain composed of Paleozoic rocks with granite is skirted, and about Chimkeut many valuable minerals are found, such as rock salt and coal, besides iron, lead, silver, and even gold in workable quantities. Not the least interesting part of the work is the author’s descrip- tion of the region south of the Sea of Aral from western Bokhara to the Caspian, the scene of some of the latest advances of Russia towards ‘“‘the gates of India.” Except for ulterior purposes, this enlargement of her empire does not seem one that need be envied. The region, as a whole, is singularly barren; not seldom a waste of shifting sands, among which the rivers lose themselves—thin beds, quite dry, or occupied only by shrunken streams, are frequently encountered, and Dr. Lansdell more than once calls attention to the impression, produced on his mind by the scenery, that he was travelling along the bed of a desiccated sea. At the present time he states that the Sea of Aral—many parts of which are extremely shallow—is distinctly drying up, and the effect of this on the country is very well described from the author’s personal observation. His course for some 300 miles was down the Amu or Oxus, and he enters upon an interesting discussion as to the former variability of course of this river and the diversion of its waters from the Aral to the Caspian. Reviews—The National Geological Surveys. 365 The book, we may add, contains even more information about the natural history and ethnology of the region traversed than it does about the geology, and is written throughout in a very pleasant style. TIl.—Tue Narronan Gerotoercan Surveys or Evurorr. By Wittram Topuuy, F.G.S., etc. (1885, pp. 20.) (Reprinted, with an Appendix, from the Report of the British Association for 1884, by permission of the Council. Triibner & Co. Price 6d.) HIS pamphlet is a reprint, with some additions, of the Report read at Montreal and printed in the GronocicaL MaGcazine for Oct. 1884. Additional information is scattered throughout the pamphlet; some, which seem the most important, are given below. The first Report of the Russian Survey for 1885 gave a full notice of the Report as printed in these pages, adding notes on the Surveys of the United States, Canada, India, Japan, ete. Bouremra.—This is a section of the Austrian Survey, under the control of Anton Fritsch; the maps are those of the ‘‘ Neue Special- Karte,” scale 1: 75,000, referred to in 1884. The text is included, as “Geologische Abtheilung,” in “ Archiv der Naturw. Landesdurch- forschung von Bohmen,” with plates and extra maps on various scales. Huneary.—This Survey was established as a section of the Austrian Survey in 1868, but was soon after made a distinct body under the title ‘‘ Kénigliche ungarische geologische Anstalt;” its head-quarters and the place of publication is Budapest. But it is in connection with the central institution at Vienna, and an abstract of its work appears in the Verhandlung. The first director was Max von Hantken, who was succeeded in 1882 by Johann Béckh. The survey is done on the scale of 1: 28,800. The publications date from 1871. These are in Hungarian, but a German version is given in “ Mittheilungen, aus dem Jahrb. k. u. geol. Anstalt,” dating from 1872. About 22 sheets of the map are published. Beicium. — Before the establishment of the existing Survey another had been in existence, conducted by a Committee of which M. Jochams was president. It was founded, in 1878, under the control of the “ Ministére de l’intérieur;” this is stated on each publication, which may thus be distinguished from the publications of the existing Survey, the latter being headed “par ordre du Gouvernement.” About 20 maps were published (1879-81), each with text; 18 were by O. V. Ertborn and P. Cogels. Both Surveys have used the same topographical map. Portuean.'—Seccao dos Trabalhos Geologicos de Portugal (Lisbon). —This survey was commenced in 1857 (as Commissao Geol. de Portugal). It was reorganized with the existing title in 1869, under the direction of Carlos Ribeiro; he was succeeded, in 1888, by J. F. N. Delgado. 1 The first part of the serial publication of this Survey has just been issued— “<< Communicagoes da Secgao dos Lrabalhos Geologicos de Portugal,’’? tom. 1, fase. 1, 1885; 8yo. Lisbon. Some of the papers therein contained had been previously printed. 366 Reviews—The National Geological Surveys. The work is now done on the scale of 1: 100,000; with occasional enlargements to double this scale. There are contours at intervals of 25 metres. The map will be in 87 sheets, longitude reckoned from Lisbon, 9° 9’ W. of Greenwich. The topographical map is not yet complete, and none of the sheets are published with the geology. Several memoirs have been published, dating from 1865 ; and also a general map—“ Carta Geologica de Portugal,” by C. Ribeiro and J. F. N. Delgado, scale 1: 500,000; 1876 (now out of print). Pruss1a.—Geological surveys of some German States have been made on the scale of 1 : 50,000, not all directly by the Government ; but the great survey previously described will probably absorb these, and will re-map the districts on the larger scale. Amongst these local surveys are the following :— Bavrn, made by Zittel and Sandberger. Hussz.—“ Geologische Specialkarte des Grossherzogthums Hessen und der angrenzenden lLandesgebiete.” This survey, under the direction of R. Ludwig, is in eighteen sheets, with text. It was made by the “ Mittelrheinischer Geologischer Verein ” (Darmstadt), and was published from 1856 to 1872. Upper Siztesia.—A “ Specialkarte der Oberschlesischen Berg- revier,” scale 1: 10,000, is published by the “k. Oberbergamt in Breslau,” in “ Lieferungen,” of ten or more sheets. The price of each sheet is 14 mark. Roumanta.—(Biuroulut Geologict Romani, Buchurest). Hstab- lished in 1882, under the direction of Gregorit Stefanescu, for the purpose of providing materials for the International Geological Map of Europe. One Report has been published (“ Anuarulti Biuroului Geologict,” anuli: 1882-1883, No. 1, pp. 114, 1884). The rocks contained within the kingdom, which are briefly described in this Report, are :—Crystalline Schists (Archean), Jurassic, Hocene, Miocene, Pliocene and Quaternary. This Report contains descrip- tions, with analyses, of mineral springs. Russta.—This survey' was commenced in 1882; the director is B. Cheresheff. The publications comprise Reports in 8vo., and Memoirs in 4to. ; the latter are illustrated by maps and plates; some of the Memoirs are descriptive of sheets of the maps, otaers of certain formations in various districts. The Reports are in Russian ener the Memoirs have title in French (‘‘ Mémoires du Comité géologique”’), and a translation or précis in German. The map is on the scale of 1 : 420,000; to be completed in 154 sheets; 3 sheets are published. The meridian is Pulkowa, 50° 19 E. of Greenwich. The map has explanations and title in French :—‘Carte Géo- logique générale de la Russie d’Europe.” 1 For descriptions of this Survey, and of its puyabarions, see Nature, vol. XX1X, p. 93; xxx.p. 608; Guou, Mac. Dec. III. Vol. I. p. 84, 1884. Reviews—The National Geological Surveys. 367 A map of the Urals, prepared by the mining engineers, has been published by A. Karpinsky—‘ Geologische Karte des Ostabhanges des Urals,” 3 sheets, 1884. Scale 1 : 420,000; with enlarged parts of 1: 210,000. AppEnDIx. Grotocicat Map or Evrors.—Although only a small area of Europe has yet been published by the Surveys described above, enough is now known of its geological structure to justify the preparation of a complete map, on a scale sufficiently large to allow all the main subdivisions to be shown. This task has been under- taken by the International Geological Congress, which, during its meeting at Bologna in 1881, appointed a Committee to carry out the work. The Committee is formed as follows :— For Germany E. Beyrich Directors of the ‘ W. Hauchecorne Map. », Austro- Hungary , K. Mojsisovics Pee Licance mae 5 ; A. Daubrée », Great Britain . : W. Topley », Ltaly : 5 : F. Giordano op MUSSI, G ; 5 A. Karpinsky EK. Renevier, Secretary. The map will be in 49 sheets (7 by 7), measuring in all about 12 feet by 10 feet. The scale isl: 1,500,000 (about 254 miles to one inch). The expense of producing this Map is far beyond the means of the Congress; it was therefore resolved to apply for assistance to the various Governments of Europe. In most cases the money required was immediately promised, and in others satisfactory arrangements for the amount required have been made. England’s share of the expense is £400, yearly instalments of which have been given, as required, by the Royal Society from its Govern- ment Grant. For this sum 100 copies of the Map will be returned. The Map is being prepared at Berlin, and will be published there by Reimer & Co. A new topographical map is being prepared by Prof. Kiepert. Streams and railways are given in detail ; in select- ing the names of places special care is taken to mark those of geological interest or importance ; the names of mountain-chains and chief hill-ranges are given, the heights of the summits being marked in metres. The meridian is Paris, 2° 20’ E. of Greenwich. The topography is far advanced, and much progress has been made with the geology. The subdivisions represented on the Map will probably be nearly as follows: — Alluvium and Quaternary, Pliocene, Miocene, Oligocene, Eocene, Cretaceous (3 divisions), Oolite (2), Lias, Trias (2), Permian (2), Carboniferous (8), Devonian (8), Silurian (2), Cambrian, Crystalline Schists etc., (perhaps 2), Granite, Hrup- tive rocks (perhaps 6 or 7). The geological information, as supplied by the various members of the Committee, is inserted under the supervision of W. Hauchecorne, the Director of the Geological Survey of Prussia; whatever success may attend the work will be mainly due to his energy and care. 868 Reviews—Peach and Horne—Scotch Volcanic Rocks, ete. IlJ.—Tur Op Rep Sanpsronn Votcanic Rocks or Scortanp. By B. N. Peacn and J. Horne. [Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Vol. XXXII. Part II. pp. 859-888. ] HE authors observe that the most interesting feature connected with the Old Red Sandstone formation in Shetland is the evidence of prolonged volcanic activity in those northern isles. The records of this activity are mainly confined to the west and north- west portions of the Mainland and the islands adjoining the western seaboard. They may be grouped into two divisions,—first, the contemporaneous igneous rocks, comprising the lavas and _ tuffs which were erupted and spread over the sea-floor during the accu- mulation of the sedimentary deposits; second, the intrusive igneous rocks, which were injected at a later date, probably towards the close of the Old Red Sandstone period in Shetland. In the penin- sular tract of Northmavine, west of Hillswick, there is an important development of ancient lavas and tuffs, which attain a thickness of not less than 500 feet. The absence of any intercalations of sand- stones, flagstones or shales, save near the fault at Brei Wick and Rooeness Voe, indicates that the subaqueous eruptions must have been well-nigh continuous for a time in that portion of the basin. On the eastern seaboard the following order of succession in the strata was established : 5. Flaggy series of Bressay and Noss, consisting of alternations of sandstones, flags, and shales. At the base of Noss Head there is a zone of dark calcareous shale with limestone nodules, which has a striking resemblance to the well-known fish-bed of the Moray Firth basin. 4, Lerwick series, consisting of massive false-bedded sandstones, which throughout are markedly conglomeratic. 3. Rovey Head conglomerates. 2. Brenista series, consisting of well-bedded red flags. 1. Basement breccia. Observations on the microscopic characters of the rocks show that the porphyrite and diabase lavas of Shetland are akin to the great volcanic series of Lower Old Red Sandstone age in Central Scotland. Two beautifully executed chromolithographic plates of rock- sections, and a geologically coloured map of the Shetland Islands accompany this memoir, which is also illustrated by fourteen wood- cuts in the text. TV.—Watxs 1n Eppinc Forust. Edited by Prroy Linney. [The Geology of the Forest-District, by Horace B. Woopwarp, F.G.8., of the Geological Survey of England.] London: 1885, long 8vo. with 36 illustrations and a folding-map. Sold at 123-125, Fleet Street, E.C., and at all Booksellers. © AVE you ever been to Epping Forest? If you have not, it is certainly worthy of a visit. Just imagine! that in 1885 there actually exists, within half an hour of the Bank of England, an Reviews—Waiks in Epping Forest. 369 area of nine square miles in extent, which, by the munificence of the Corporation of the City of London, and at a cost of over a quarter of a million, has been secured as a place of recreation and enjoyment for the public for ever. This district, moreover—notwithstanding all the cruel curtailments it has suffered—is actually a bit of primeval forest land, and is the last remnant of the great forest of Essex, once extending over the whole county. Here in the merry months of May and June—especially in the middle of the week (avoiding the period embraced from Saturday to Monday)—one may hear the pleasant harmony of the thrush, the blackbird, the lark, and the linnet, with all the finches for chorus; whilst a host of rare birds may be seen by the early riser, who knows their haunts, who may watch the kingfisher by the brook, or listen to the entomologising woodpecker, or discover the heron knee-deep in some rushy pool. Then too there are the wild animals. The fallow-deer (Cervus dama) have never been entirely exterminated, and are now on the increase. They are said to be lineally descended from the primitive stock first introduced by the Romans into Hssex, and to differ from those preserved in other park-lands elsewhere. The Red-deer (Cervus elaphus), and the Roe-buck (Cervus capreola), have both been re-introduced. These deer were abundant in this very district in prehistoric times, and probably down to the 17th century, if not later. The other denizens are hares, rabbits, foxes, badgers, pole-cats, martens, and some lesser forms of Mustelide. In prehistoric times, as we know from the excavations at Waltham- stow (see Grou. Maa. 1869, pp. 385-388), we had in addition to the above, the Wolf, the Beaver, the Wild-boar, the Elk, wild Oxen, and Goats. In Pleistocene times we had a still larger number of forms which are now extinct or exterminated in this country, com- prising Hlephas primigenius, E. antiquus, Spermophilus, sp., Rhinoceros tichorhinus, RB. megarhinus, and R. leptorhinus; Hippopotamus major ; Bison priscus ; Bos primigenius ; Ovibos moschatus ; Cervus megaceros, Cervus tarandus ; Felis spelea; and many others. The forest then of to-day has a wonderful history of its own; going back through Historic, to Prehistoric times, and thence to the Pleistocene period, we can trace, by means of the peat-deposits, the Alluvium and the Brick-earth, one fauna as it succeeds another, marking not only great changes in the animals, but also in the climate and physical conditions of the district. Mr. Horace B. Woodward, F.G.S., in his excellent sketch of the Geology of the Forest-area, takes us even beyond this point, to the Boulder-Clay, the Glacial Deposits, the Bagshot Beds and the London Clay ; we cannot however give a fuller notice of this Guide here, but all who take an interest in the suburbs of our great Metropolis will secure a copy of this excellent little Guide for themselves. The illustrations are charming, and give an admirable idea of the beauty of the scenery of this delightful suburban resort. DECADE I1I.—vVOL. II.—NO. VIII. 24 370 Reviews—Indian Pretertiary Vertebrata. V.—Memorrs oF THE GEOLOGICAL SuRvVEY oF INDIA. PaLmonToLoGia Inproa. 1. Inp1ian PRetTERTIARY VERTEBRATA, Series IV. Vol. J. Part IV. Tue LasyrintHopont FrRoM THE Brsort Group. By R. Lypex- KER, B.A., ¥.G.8., F.Z.S. Royal 4to. pp. 16, with 4 Plates. 1885. S far back as 1865, Prof. T. H. Huxley described the remains of Dicynodon orientalis, Huxl., and of Gonioglyptus longirostris, Huxl., from the Panchet group, Damida series, Gondwana System of India.i These basal rocks of the secondary section, which may be considered homotaxial with the Triassic or Permian rocks of Europe, have also by their fossil remains an affinity with the Reptiliferous Triassic deposits beds of South Africa.’ Mr. R. Lydekker in the present memoir makes us acquainted with a new and very interesting form of Labyrinthodont reptile from Bijori, in the Central Provinces, for which he has proposed the genus Gondwanosaurus, with the trivial name of Bijoriensis. The specimen comprises the skull and a considerable portion of the axial skeleton; most of the bones have disappeared and are represented by moulds or cavities in the sandstone matrix. The skull agrees very closely in general size with that of Loxomma Allmanni, Huxl., from the Coal-measures of Northumberland (see Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xiv. pl. iv.), and it may be assumed that the present specimen indicates an animal of about the dimensions of that species. The structure of the teeth, the presence of epiotic bones, of a parietal foramen, and the structure of the thoracic shield, leave no doubt of the labyrinthodont nature of the specimen. ““ Gondwanosaurus is evidently a more specialized type than Archegosaurus, although, if the occipital condyles were really absent, it agrees with the family Archegosauride, and differs from the Actinodontide. The specialization indicates an approach to the higher labyrinthodonts like Mastodonsaurus, and Labyrinthodon; this being marked by the presence of large tusks in both jaws within the outer series (a character which is common to several of the American Actinodontide), and of the inner articular buttress to the mandible. The absence of a post-articular process to the mandible is a character in which it approaches Zoxemma ; and it is thus easy to see how the higher forms have been derived from the primitive Archegosauria. If Rhytidosteus belong to the section, it indicates still more completely the transition, since the structure of the teeth is almost precisely intermediate between that of Actinodon and aINGrooe PED. Lan GeotocicaL Socimty or Lonpon. June 24, 1885.—Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair.—The following communications were read : 1. “Supplementary Notes on the Deep Boring at Richmond, Geological Society of London. 381 Surrey.” By Prof. John W. Judd, F.R.S., Sec.G.8., and Collett Homersham, Hsq., F.G.S. Since the author’s former communication to the Society on the subject, this boring, in spite of the strenuous efforts made by the Richmond Vestry and the contractors, Messrs. Docwra and Co., has had to be abandoned, after reaching a total depth of 1447 feet from the surface. ‘This depth is 145 feet greater than that of any other well in the London Basin, and, reckoning from Ordnance Datum, reaches a lower level by 312 feet than any other well in the district. Before the termination of the work, temperature-observations were obtained, which, generally, confirm those previously arrived at. The strata in which the boring terminated consisted of the red and variegated sandstones and marls previously described, which were proved to the depth of 208 feet. Although it was demon- strated that these beds have a dip of about 30°, complicated in places by much false-bedding, no conclusive evidence could be obtained concerning their geological age. They may be referred either to some part of the Poikilitic series, or to the Carboniferous (for similar strata have been found intercalated in the Carboniferous series at Gayton, near Northampton), or they may be regarded as of Old Red Sandstone age. Some interesting additional observations have been made, since the reading of the former paper, on the Cretaceous rocks passed through in this well. Mr. W. Hill, F.G.S., of Hitchin, has found the exact analogue of the curious conglomerated chalk met with at a depth of 704 feet at Richmond. His observations entirely confirm the conclusion that we have at this depth the ‘“ Melbourne Rock ” with the zone of Belemnites plenus in a remanié condition at its base. Some new facts concerning the state of preservation of the fossils in the Chalk Marl are also recorded. With respect to the conclusions arrived at by the author concern- ing the distribution of the Jurassic rocks on the south side of the London Basin, an important piece of confirmatory evidence has been supplied by a deep boring made at the Dockyard-Extension Works at Chatham. ‘This section, for the details of which the authors are indebted to the officers of the Geological Survey, shows that under the Chalk and Gault, with normal characters and thickness, there lie 41 feet of sandy strata of Neocomian age, and that these are directly underlain by blue clays of Middle Oxfordian age, as is proved by the numerous fossils which they have yielded. We have now, therefore, direct evidence of the existence and position of strata of Lower, Middle, and Upper Oolite age, respectively, beneath the Cretaceous rocks of the south-east of England. 2. “On the Igneous and Associated Rocks of the Breidden Hills in Hast Montgomeryshire and West Shropshire.” By W. W. Watts, Esq., F.G.S. The author, in this paper, described the succession of rocks in the small tract near the Breidden Hills situated between Welshpool and Shrewsbury. The Cambrian rocks are :— a. Criggion Shales, dark and barren, much penetrated by intrusive diabases and about 2700 feet thick. O82 Reports and Proceedings— b. Andesitic lavas and ashes, followed by conglomerates of the same materials. c. Ashy grits and shales containing Olimacograptus antiquus ? C. bicornis 2? C. Scharenbergi, Cryptograpsus tricornis, Diplograpsus foliaceus, Leptograpsus flaccidus ? Beyrichia complicata, Trinucleus concentricus, Orthis testudinaria, Bellerophon bilobatus. The rocks are thus of Bala age, the fossils indicating that the ashy grits and shales are on the horizon of the top of the Glenkiln or bottom of the Hartfell series. These are followed by Silurian strata. a. Pentamerus-beds. Soft sandstones and mudstones yielding Pentamerus globosus? P. oblongus, P. wndatus, Leptena transversalis, Strophomena rhomboidalis, Petraia subduplicata. b. Purple shales, unfossiliferous. c. Lower Wenlock Shale, with Monograptus vomerinus ? Crypto- grapsus, sp., M. priodon, var. Flemingi. These graduate into :— d. Upper Wenlock Shale, with M. priodon, M. vomerinus? M. basilicus, M. Nilsson, M. Reemeri. e. Lower Ludlow Shale. M. colonus, M. Nilssoni, M. Salweyi, M. lintwardenensis. ; The paper concluded with microscopical descriptions of the igneous rocks, of which there are two sets :— a. An older set interbedded with the Cambrian and consisting of andesites bearing a large percentage of a mineral allied to enstatite, together with augite and a small quantity of hornblende and mica. These are chiefly lavas, but some few are perhaps intrusive rocks and dykes. b. Intrusive rocks of a diabase type, generally, however, contain- ing a variety of enstatite identical with that in the andesites. These are intrusive in the Cambrian rocks, and from their relations appear to be most probably of Post-Silurian age. 3. “Note on the Zoological Position of the genus Microcherus, Wood, and its apparent Identity with Hyopsodus, Leidy.” By R. Lydekker, Hsq., B.A., F.G.S. In this paper the author discussed the character of the genus Microcherus, Wood, from English Upper Eocene deposits, which has hitherto been regarded as an Ungulate form, and showed that it is really an Insectivore. He also indicated that the American Eocene form Hyopsodus, Leidy, is almost certainly identical with Microcherus. 4, “Observations on some imperfectly known Madreporaria from the Cretaceous Formation of England.” By R. F. Tomes, Esq., F.G.8. This communication contained notes on several species of Cre- taceous corals. The author considered that Smilotrochus insignis of Duncan must be referred to the genus Ceratotrochus, that S. granu- latus, Duncan, was founded on immature specimens of Trochocyathus Wiltshiret, Duncan, that Micrabacia Fittoni, Duncan, is a variety of Cyclocyathus Fitton, that the genus Podoseris, Duncan, and pro- bably Syzygophyllum, Reuss, are the same as Lhizangia, M.-Hdw. and Haime, and consequently P. mammiliformis, Duncan, and P. elongata, Duncan, are species of Rhizangia. He further states that Geological Society of London. 383 Turbinoseris, Duncan, is identical with Leptophyllia, of Reuss, and as the specific name de Fromenteli is preoccupied in the latter genus, he proposed to substitute the name Leptophyllia anglica, Tomes, for Turbinoseris de Fromenteli, Duncan. A new species, probably of Smilotrochus, from the Gault of Folkestone, and a new Isastrea from Atherfield, were described, and notes added on the occurrence in British localities of Barysmilia tuberosa, Reuss, B. Cordieri, M.-Hdw. and Haime, Pleurosmilia neocomiensis, HK. de From., of a small form of Astrocenia, and of Isastrea Reussiana, M.-Edw. and Haime (=Ulophyllia crispa, Reuss.). The occurrence of Beaumontia Egertoni, derived from the Carboniferous Limestone, in the Upper Greensand of Cambridge, was reported. 5. “Correlations of the Curiosity-Shop Beds, Canterbury, New Zealand.” By Capt. F. W. Hutton, F.G.S. The “Curiosity Shop” is a locality on the River Rakaia in the Canterbury Plains, and has been thus named on account of the numerous fossils found in some calcareous sandstones cut through by the river. The section exposed consists of—1l. River-gravels. 2. Loose grey quartz sands. 38. Soft calcareous sandstone with glau- conite, passing downwards into tufaceous clay. 4. Calcareous sand- stone without glauconite. 5. Loose grey or yellowish brown sands. By McKay, of the Geological Survey, No. 2 had been referred to the Pareora series (Miocene ?), No. 8 to the Upper Hocene series, and Nos. 4 and 5 to the Cretaceo-Tertiary series. ‘The author, who was inclined to class all these beds in a single series, pointed out that the only difference between the fossils found in Nos. 3 and 4, the most important fossiliferous beds, consisted in the presence of a greater number of forms in No. 38, all found in No. 4 being identical with those in the overlying bed. He then gave a complete list of the species of Vertebrata, Mollusca, Brachiopoda, Hchinodermata, Bryozoa and Ceelenterata, from the locality, 48 in all, and compared them with those from the Weka-pass stone, 26 in number, and the Ototara fossils from Oamaru, to show that a large proportion were identical. He gave reasons for not agreeing with the views of Dr. Hector and Mr. McKay, who held that unconformity exists between the beds referred by them at the Curiosity Shop, in the Weka-pass district, and north of Otago, to the Upper Hocene and Cretaceo- Tertiary series respectively, and showed both from paleontological and stratigraphical data that all these rocks must be included in one system, the Oamaru system of Dr. von Haast and himself. 6. On the Fossil Flora of Sagor in Carniola.” By Constantin Baron von Ettingshausen, F.C.G.8. The author in this paper gave the principal results of his examina- tion of the fossil flora of Sagor, consisting of 170 genera and 387 species, of which a list was appended. The plants were obtained from 14 different localities, some of the most important species from each of which were mentioned; in one of these localities the flora underlying the brown coal of the district belonged to the uppermost Eocene, whilst the remaining stations were assigned to the lowest stage of the Miocene system. The great diversity of the fossil plants showed that the Tertiary flora of this and other localities 384 Correspondence—Prof. Boulger—Rev. P. B. Brodie. must be considered the origin of all the living floras of the globe; for in the fossil-flora of Sagor are found plants representative of forms now found in Australia, North America and Mexico, California, Chili, India and the East Indian islands, Europe, AR an. Norfolk Island, and New Zealand. Examples of all these were cited. CORRES PON DENCE. BS Sh geet. A GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE WORLD. Sir,—The want of a tolerably detailed large-scale map of the world, coloured geologically for students and geologists generally, has often occurred to me, and I venture to direct attention to it in your columns. In the present imperfect but advancing state of our knowledge the publication of such a map, or of a geological atlas of the world, would be worse than useless; but surely one such map might well be displayed in the galleries of the Natural History Museum, or in some other similar national institution. The Jermyn Street collections being exclusively British, the Natural History Museum would seem the more appropriate place for it; and, as beautiful special diagrams of the anatomy of animals are now being prepared there, no difficulty should arise in its preparation. If made in several sheets mounted on canvas, these might be separately re- placed by better ones as our knowledge increases; and the adoption of the system of colouring agreed upon by the International Con- gress would serve to familiarize us in England with that code of the future. We might well have far more detail than in Ami Boné’s map, and, in fact, I see no reason why, where our knowledge is full, we should not have more detail than in other less known parts of the map; but orographical matter had, perhaps, better be sparingly in- troduced. Such a map is exhibited in the museum at Brussels, and would, I should think, add much to the educational interest of our national collection here. G. 8. Bounerr. 18, LapBroxr GRovE, w. FOSSIL BIRDS. Sir,—My friend Dr. Woodward in his interesting paper on Wingless Birds in the Grontocican Macazinr, Dec. III. Vol. le No. 7, p. 308, “alludes to the discovery of fossil feathers of birds in some places abroad, both in Jurassic and Tertiary strata, but he does not mention any as occurring in England. It may be interesting to the readers of the Macazinr to know that a small feather is recorded by Mr. J. 8. Gardner, from the Tertiary Plant-beds at Bournemouth, and I have two portions of feathers from the Kocene Bembridge Limestone at Gurnet Bay, near Cowes, Isle of Wight; which has yielded to the researches of Mr. A’Court Smith so many remarkable Insect-remains, Arachnids, Crustacea and Plants, and of which I have a fine series. Remains of Birds are almost as a matter of course unusually rare in any fossiliferous rocks, and generally occur, as might be expected, in fluviatile or lacustrine deposits, and feathers seem to be still more so. Those in my collection are only fragmentary, merely the upper end of a very small feather; but perhaps Mr. Smith may have more entire examples, though I am not aware of any others having been met with in any older formations in this country. P. B. Brovin, F. SLs) [To the foregoing should be added the following species : Pelagornis Burret (Seeley). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Aug. 1866. Enaliornis Barretti. Seeley, Index to Fossil Remains, ete., 1869, SEE Journ. Geol. Soc. Noy, 1876, pl. xxvi.—xxvil. H. Deeade Il. Vol. Il. PI. X Oo [o8) or Wost, Newman &Co.imyr Ceratiocaris. U. Silurian, Lanark. THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEW ‘SERIES. DECADE “Ill. VO: Il No. IX.—SEPTEMBER, 1885. ORIGINAL ARTICLES. ’ ae I.—Nores on THE BritisH SpEcIES OF CERATIOCARIS. By Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., and Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S. (PLATE X.) R. PACKARD’S observations on the structure of the Phyllo- poda, and his comparative anatomical studies of allied living and extinct genera, supply the paleontologist with sound reasoning for referring the Phyllocarida to the Nebaliad type as a centre for a great group of obscure fossil forms, and as a starting-point for the Decapoda. His views have been referred to in some detail in the Geou. Mac. for August last, pages 549-852. Order Puytiocaripa, Packard (1879). Genus Crratiocaris, M‘Coy (1849). The generic characters of Ceratiocaris have been described by Moy, Salter, H. Woodward, and Barrande in their several works and memoirs referred to in the sequel. James Hall, R. P. Whitfield, A. §S. Packard, J. M. Clarke, Fr. Schmidt, C. E. Becher O. Novak, and others have added much information, general and special, on this and allied genera. The appended synonymy of the genus supplies full references to published notices on Ceratiocaris and some of its kindred. We offer the following diagnosis of Ceratiocaris. Carapace bivalved, probably with membranous attachment, no distinct hinge-joint observable; valves subovate, semiovate, sub- quadrate, or trapezoidal ; contracted in front with the end sharp or rounded above the median line of the valve; more or less truncate behind. Rostrum elliptical in shape, of a single, lanceolate piece, chevron-marked. Antennz (?) obscure. Dentate mandibles often apparent. Body many-jointed, with fourteen or more segments, of which 4-7 extend beyond the carapace; ornamented with delicate raised lines. Some or all of these segments bore small, lamelli- form, branchial appendages.? Last segment longest, supporting three caudal spines, namely, (1) a strong tapering telson (style), thick at the top or proximal end, with its trifid articulating surface 1 See ‘‘ Monograph of the Phyllopod Crustacea of North America, with remarks on the Order Phyllocarida. By Dr. A. 8. Packard, jun. (Extracted from the Twelfth Annual Report of the U. 8. Geol. and Geograph. Survey), 1883.” 2 See the Sixth Report on Fossil Crustacea, Brit. Assoc. Report for 1872, p. 323 ; and Grou. Mac. Vol. IX. p. 564 ; also a descriptive note by Mr. R. Etheridge, j jun., in the Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotl., , Explan, Sheet 23, 1873, p. 93, and Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist. ser. 4, vol. xiv. 1874, D- oF DECADE III.—VOL. II,.—NO. IX. 25 386 Prof. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— (resembling that in the telson of Limulus) pointed at the distal extremity, and more or less spinose, as shown by the bases of attachment for small lateral prickles, and (2) two shorter, simpler, lateral appendages (stylets). The surface of the valves has a lineate ornament, and the ventral margin has a thin raised rim. Crratrocaris, M‘Coy, 1849. 1839. Onchus, Agassiz (in part). In Murchison’s Silurian System, p. 607. 1848. Onchus, Phillips (in part). Mem. Geol. Surv. vol. ii. part 1, p. 226. 1849. Pterygotus, M‘Coy. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 394. 1849. Ceratiocaris, M‘Coy. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iv., p. 412. 1851. Pterygotus, M‘Coy. Brit. Paleeoz. Fossils, fasc. 1, p. 175. 1851. Leptocheles, M‘Coy. Brit. Paleoz. Fossils, fasc. 1, p. 176. 1851. Ceratiocaris, M‘Coy. Brit. Palzeoz. Fossils, fasc. 1, p. 136. 1851. Pterygotus (Leptocheles), Bronn. Lethzea Geognost. vol. i. part 1, p. 40. 1852. Onchus, James Hall. Geol. Surv. New York, Palzontol. vol. ii. p. 320. 1852. Ceratiocaris, Bronn. Leth. Geogn. vol. i. part 2, p. 539- 1853. Dithyrocaris, Geinitz. Verst. Grauwack. Sachsen, Heft 2, p. 23. 1853. Leptocheles, M‘Coy. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p. 13. 1853. Ceratiocaris (Leptocheles), Barrande. Neues Jahrb. fur Min. etc. 1853, Heft 3, p. 342. 1853. Dithyrocaris ? D. Sharpe. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p. 158. 1854. Ceratiocaris et Leptocheles, Murchison. Siluria, Ist edit. p. 236. 1854. Ceratiocaris, Morris. Catal. Brit. Foss. 2nd edit. p. 102. 1856. Ceratiocaris, Salter. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xii. p. 33. 1859. Ceratiocaris, J. Hall. Geol. Surv. New York, Paleontol. vol. iii. p. 420. 1859. Ceratiocaris, Salter. In Murchison’s Siluria, 2nd edit. (3rd including Sil. Syst.), pp. 262, 538. 1860. Cevatiocaris, Salter. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 158. 1863. Ceratiocaris, James Hall. Sixteenth Ann. Rep. of Regents, p. 72, pl. I. 1865. Ceratiocaris, H. Woodward and Salter. Catal. and Chart. Foss. Crustacea. 1865. Ceratiocaris, H. Woodward. Grou. Mac. Vol. II. p. gor. 1865. Ceratiocaris, Huxley and Etheridge. Catal. Foss. Mus. Pract. Geol. p. 79. 1866. Cevatiocaris, H. Woodward. GEoL. Mac. Vol. III. p. 203. 1866. Ceratiocaris, Salter. Mem. Geol. Surv. vol. iii. p. 294. 1867. Ceratiocaris, Salter. In Murchison’s Siluria, 3rd edit. (4th including Sil. Syst.) pp. 236 and 516. 1868. Ceratiocaris, Bigsby. Thesaur. Silur. p. 73. 1871. Cevatiocaris, H. Woodward. GEOL. Mac. Vol. VIII. p. 104. 1872. Ceratiocaris, H. Woodward. GroL. MAG. Vol. IX. p. 564; and Report Brit. Assoc. for 1872, p. 323. 1872. Ceratzocaris, Barrande. Syst. Sil. Bohéme, vol. i. Suppl. p. 437. 1873. Ceratiocaris, Salter. Catal. Cambr. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus. p. 177. 1873. Ceratiocaris, R. Etheridge, jun. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scot. Exp. M. 23, p. 93. 1873. Ceratiocaris, Marschall. Nomenclator Zoologicus, p. 404. 1874. Ceratiocaris, R. Etheridge, jun. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 4, vol. xiv. p. 9. 1876. Ceratiocavis, KF. Roemer. Leth. Geogn. Th. i. Leth. paleeoz. Expl. pl. 19. 1877. Ceratiocaris, H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 70. 1877. Ceratiocaris, Miller. Catal. Palzeoz. Foss. America, p. 213. 1878. Ceratiocarzs, Huxley and Etheridge. Catal. Foss. Mus. Pract. Geol. p. 84. 1878. Ceratiocaris, Bigsby. Thes. Devonico-Carbonif. pp. 26, 246 and 247. 1878. Ceratiocaris, Young. Proceed. R. Phys. Soc. Edinb. vol. iv. p. 168. 1880. Ceratiocaris, Whitfield. Amer. Journ. Sci. ser. 3, vol. xix. p. 35. 1882. Ceratiocaris, B. N. Peach. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. vol. xxx. part I, p. 73. 1883. Ceratiocaris, A. S. Packard, jun. Monogr. North Amer. Phyllop. Crust. ; Twelfth Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. and Geograph. Survey, p. 450. 1884. Ceratiocaris, C. E. Beecher. Ceratiocaridaee Upper-Devon. Measures ; Second Geol. Serv. Penns. P.P.P. p. 2. 1885. Ceratiocaris, O. Novak. Sitzungsb. k. bohm. Gesellsch. Wissensch. 1883. Ceratiocaris, H. W. and T.R.J. Report Brit. Association for 1883, p. 217. 1884. Ceratiocaris, T. R.J.and H.W. GeEou. Mac. Dec. III. Vol. I. p. 396. Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. O87 1. Ceratiocarts Murcuisont (Agassiz), and its variety LEPTO- pactyLus (M‘Coy). Some imperfect caudal appendages or spines (telson or style, and lateral spines or stylets), from the Uppermost Ludlow strata, near Ludlow, were figured in Murchison’s Silurian System, in 1859, as fish-defences. These were recognized by Prof. F. M‘Coy in 1853 as being very similar to some analogous fossils, referred by him at first (in 1849) to a slender-clawed kind of Pterygotus from the Lower Ludlow, at Leintwardine, near Ludlow, which he separated from that genus as Leptocheles leptodactylus. M‘Coy suggested that Murchison’s fossil should be known as L. Murchisoni.' Tn each case we have only caudal spines to deal with ; but M‘Coy’s specimens (Brit. Pal. Foss. pl. 1 H, figs. 7, Ta, 7b) are much more slender than Murchison’s (Sil. Syst. pl. 4, figs. 10 and 64, and Siluria, pl. 1 EH, figs. 1, 2), and less strongly ribbed; and therein they seem at first sight to have specific differences. Several good examples of more or less perfect sets of the three caudal spines corresponding in size, strength, and ribbing, with Murchison’s fossils have been met with. These show evidence of lines of prickles (by the presence of little pits, representing their bases, along one or more lines) ; and on close examination the en- gravings in the Sil. Syst. and Siluria (the specimens have been lost) show some slight indications of this spinose ornament. This is not visible, however, in M‘Coy’s figures or specimens (Cambridge Museum, a/928, a/924). Of these latter, more delicate, caudal appendages, very few other examples occur. In the collocation of these caudal appendages with their respective carapaces we have some doubt and difficulty. We have not found a carapace directly associated with any com- plete spines of either the Murchisoni or leptodactylus type except in the case of a very small specimen (M. P. G. x 1), which appears to have the caudal appendages of C. Murchisoni and the carapace of Salter’s “‘leptodactylus.” With regard to both, however, the late Mr. J. W. Salter satisfied himself that he knew their special carapaces, for he described them at p. 157 of the Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. for March, 1860: where also he refers both species to the Ceratiocaris of M‘Coy. Judging from his Latin diagnoses, he allocates to the former—‘“a cephalothorax (carapace) two inches long, oblong, convex, orna- mented with interrupted, nearly-straight, wide-apart lines. The caudal appendages long, sub-cylindrical ; the centre spine (telson) strong, bulbous at its base, and with a strong dorsal rib; the side spines long. All ribbed. The whole animal medium-sized. Speci- mens possessed by the geologists at Ludlow and by the Museum of Practical Geology.” The carapace described here does not agree * Prof. M‘Coy’s observations are as follows:—‘‘ . . . As before mentioned, figs. 9, 10, and 11 [Sil. Syst. pl. 4; omit figs. 9 and 11], representing the so-called Onchus Murchisoni, Ag., are almost identical in form, size, sculpturing, and all other characters (as far as they are represented in these drawings), with the distinctly didactyle pincers which I have figured (Brit. Pal. Foss. pl. E, fig. 7) from Leintwar- dine, under the name Lept. leptodactylus. . . . If this approximation prove correct, the fossil should in future be called Leptocheles Murchisoni (Ag. sp.).”’—Q. J. G. S. vol. ix. 1853, p. 13. 388 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— with any that we can associate with the caudal spines intended. Nor do we find at Ludlow exactly the kind of carapace required. To C. leptodactylus Mr. Salter apportioned “a cephalothorax long, triangular, acute in front, broad and rounded behind. Free abdominal segments 7-8 in number, subquadrate, deeply impressed at the sides. Caudal appendages long, striate; the central spine (telson) scarcely thicker than the long lateral spines. Surface of the head (carapace) smooth, or marked with only very short sparse lines. Abdominal segments strongly striate. The whole animal elongate and more than a foot long.” One particular specimen in the Mus. Pract. Geol. is referred to by Mr. Salter at p. 158. We are at a loss here also in fitting the indicated (slender) appendages to the carapace described. We have examined this and other good specimens, labelled C. lepto- dactylus by Mr. Salter or at his direction, in which the carapace agrees with his description. One carapace is of large size, nearly perfect, about 125mm. (6 inches) long, by 55 mm. at greatest height, M. P. G. x 4, Catal. Cambr. Sil. Foss. 1878, p. 142. A specimen nearly perfect, M. P. G. x + (Catal. 1878, p. 142), 60 mm. long by 28 mm., gives no certain indication of the length of its telson and its two stylets, for they are crushed off short. The abdomen exposed is about 50mm. long In specimen D of the Ludlow Museum, which has the proximal portion only of the caudal spines preserved, and in specimen B, with the appendages also broken off short, the telson was ribbed and pitted (= prickly), thereby differing from the spines known as C. leptodactylus (M‘Coy). There is also a well-preserved small specimen (M. P. G. x $, Catal. 1878, p. 142), with its carapace measuring only 25 mm. in length and 11 mm. in height, from the Lower Ludlow of Bow Bridge, Ludlow. This is labelled “ C. leptodactylus,” and belongs to the same species as the foregoing. Its caudal appendages are perfect, with the telson (25 mm.) about one-third of the length of the whole animal; but they differ from M‘Coy’s C. leptodactylus, for they are not only ribbed or ridged, but the telson was prickly ; the laterals were probably rather more than half its length. Specimen M. P. G. D <3, from Dudley, however, is a thin spiniform fragment, faintly striated like C. leptodactylus. Altogether the telson (style) and stylets of these specimens have a very close resemblance to those known as CO. Murchisoni (see above, p- 087). One example, from Dudley, described and figured.as such in the Guo. Mae. Vol. III. p. 204, Pl. X. Fig. 8 (stylets and the upper moiety of the style, 90 mm., even more than 5 inches long when perfect), was doubtlessly proportionate to the large carapace, M. P. G. x 4, above alluded to, as belonging to an animal more than 12 inches long; the carapace, exposed segments, and the telson being each a third of the whole length. Other good specimens of these caudal appendages are :— Ludlow Museum, C. Lower Ludlow; Leintwardine.1 Lower portion of the style and stylets, 180 mm. (5} inches). 1 This is mounted with specimen D as one specimen; but the discrepancy between the two parts is readily seen. It is referred to by the Rev. J. D. La Touche in his Geology of Shropshire, 1884, p. 77. Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 389 Owens College Museum. From near Ludlow. Style and stylets, not perfect, 105 mm. M. P. G. 3%, Catal. 1878, p. 118. Leintwardine. Style, 103 mm. This and a piece of a carapace associated are labelled “ C. tyrannus, Salter.” Mr. Morgan’s Collection: Cwm-y-sul, near Welshpool (Wenlock Shale). Fragment of style, with stylets, 95 mm. Ludlow Museum, P. Lower Ludlow; Trippleton, near Leint- wardine. Lower part of style and stylets, 80 mm. Specimens B, C, D, in the Oxford Museum, from the greenish-grey mudstone near Ludlow, are also good tail-pieces. Broken pieces :— Murchison’s fig. 10, pl. 4, Sil. Syst. (fig. 1, pl. 19, Siluria), Upper Ludlow beds. One piece measures 92 mm., and more, if the piece lying at its end belonged to it. Fig. 9, Pl. X. Gzon. Mae. Vol. III. (M. P. G. 42, Catal. p. 84), Casterton, Low Fell, Kirkby-Lonsdale; Wenlock Shale. Frag- ments, 50 mm. Cambridge Museum, 6/7. Upper Ludlow beds; Benson Knot, Kendal. Fragment, 43 mm. M. P. G. x +5, Catal. p. 142. Upper Ludlow; Benson Knot, Kendal. Fragments, 40 mm. Cambridge Museum (Marr Coll.). Upper Coldwell beds=Wen- lock; south of Coldwell quarry, Windermere. Part of style and ends of stylets, 40 mm. Small fragments, smooth (? Murchisoni); straight and ribbed; curved and ribbed (? Murchisoni); M. P. G. x 34, si, sx; from the Downton Sandstone; Kington, Herefordshire. Strongly ribbed and pitted (=spinose), British Museum; Bury Ditch, Salop; and Oxford Mus. D, Ludlow. Both in M‘Coy’s C. leptodactylus and C. Murchisoni (the latter =Salter’s C. leptodactylus, in part, and his MS. C. tyrannus and C. gigas) the last abdominal segment is striated with straight, some- what inosculating, raised lines ; and other segments, where preserved, are similarly marked. A somewhat crushed specimen from Dane- field, Kington, Herefordshire (Lower Ludlow), M. P. G. x 4, Catal. p- 141, showing a terminal segment with similar nearly straight, but wrigegly, inosculating, thin riblets, and ridged and fluted caudal appendages, as far as preserved, has been labelled C. gigas by Salter; but this may well belong to the series here placed as C. Murchisoni; C. leptodactylus being restricted to M‘Coy’s specimens and figs. 7, 7a, 7b, and a few other slender and simply striate forms. The carapace belonging to these is not yet known. It is quite possible that these rare and thinner styles and stylets may have belonged to some variety of C. Murchisoni. In this case a separate specific name is not required for them, and they should be merged in C. Murchisoni, as arranged in H. Woodward’s Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust [S07a p. ole There is little or no doubt that the figure given by Mr. Salter in the Catal. Cambr. Silur. Fossils, 1873, pp. 16, 164, and 178, as 390 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— illustrative of the genus, is C. Murchisoni as here defined. The eye-spot, however, and the hinge-joints are, in our opinion, super- fluous and not substantiated. The synonyms of Curatiocaris Murcutsont (Agassiz), 1839 :— 1839. Onchus Murchisoni, Agassiz, in Silur. Syst. p. 607, pl. 4, fig. 10 (not figs. g and 11); and Onxchus, fig. 63 ?, and Ichthyodorulites, fig. 64. 1851. Leptocheles (Murchisoni), M‘Coy. Synops. Brit. Paleeoz. Foss. fasc. 1, p.176. 1853. Leptocheles Murchisoni (Agass.), M‘Coy. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p- 13 (omitting allusion to figs. 9 and 11, Sil. Syst.). 1854. Leptocheles Murchison (M‘Coy), Murchison. Siluria, 1st ed. p. 236, pl. 19, figs. I, 2, and sf. fig. 3. 1850. Leptocheles Murchisont (M‘Coy), Murchison. Siluria, 2nd ed. (3rd includ- ing Sil. Syst.), pp. 263, 538, pl. 10, fig. 1 (2 and 3°). 1860. Ceratiocaris Murchisoni (M‘Coy), Salter. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 157. 1866. Ceratiocaris Murchisoni, H. Woodward. GEoL. Mac. Vol. III. p. 205, Pl. IX. Figs. 8 and 9. 1867. Leptocheles Murchisoni (M‘Coy). Salter, in Siluria, 3rd ed. (4th including Sil. Syst.), p. 134, pl. 19, figs. 1 and 2. 1867. Leptocheles (Ceratiocaris) Murchisoni (M‘Coy). Salter, in Siluria, 3rd (4th) ed. p. 237, pl. 19, figs. I (2, 32). 1867. Ceratiocaris Murchisoni (Agass.). Salter, in Siluria, 3rd (4th) ed. p. 516, pl. 19, figs. 1 and 2. 1867. Ceratiocaris Murchisoni (M‘Coy), H. Woodw. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. 1884. Ceratiocaris Pardoensis, La Touche. Geol. Shropshire, p. 77, pl. 17, fig. 563. 1884. Ceratiocaris leptodactylus, La Touche. Geology of Shropshire, p. 77, pl. 17, fig. 566 (young C. Murchisont). The synonyms of CeratrocaRIs LEPTopAcTYLUS, M‘Coy, founded on certain slender tail-spines, which may have belonged to a varietal form of C. Murchisoni (Agassiz) :— 1849. Pterygotus leptodactylus, M‘Coy. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. iv. 1851. Pee leptodactylus, M‘Coy. Synops. Brit. Palzeoz. Foss. fasc. i. p. 176, pl. 1 E, figs. 7, 7a, 76 (not figs. 7¢, 7@). 1853. Leptocheles leptodactylus, M‘Coy. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. ix. p. 13. 1859. Leptocheles leptodactylus (M‘Coy), Murch. Siluria, 2nd (3rd) ed. pp. 263, 538. 1860. Ceratiocaris leptodactylus (M‘Coy), Salt. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 157. 1867. Leptocheles (Ceratiocaris) leptodactylus (M‘Coy). Salter, in Siluria, 4th ed. (including Sil. Syst.), p. 237. 1867. Ceratiocaris leptodactylus (M‘Coy). Salter, in Siluria, 4th ed. (including Sil. Syst.), p. 516. 1873. Ceratiocaris leptodactylus, Salter. Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 164. Taking M. Salter’s description of the carapace of leptodactylus and the appendages of Murchisoni as really both belonging to the latter, and the more slender caudal spines (leptodactylus of M‘Coy) as belonging to a variety of the latter, we have looked for the two- inch oblong carapace which Mr. Salter thought he had found for Murchisoni (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. l.c.), but we have not met with it at Ludlow, as led to expect by his remarks ; noris it in the Museum of Practical Geology, to which also he refers us. Indeed, we cannot help thinking that some confusion of the specimens is hereby indicated. The carapace of C. Murchisoni (as defined by us) is pyriform, or acutely subovate, deep behind, narrow in front; gently convex on Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. ool the back; outlined by a bold elliptical curve on the ventral margin, which rises up to form with the dorsal edge a sharp angle in front, above the median line of the valve; but this and other features were varied by age and sex, and have been modified by pressure in the different specimens. The antero-ventral margin is sometimes indrawn, making the point in front more acute. The hinder margin is truncate with an elegant ogee curve, full below, and ending above in the postero-dorsal angle, often but not always sharply defined. In some cases the ventral margin is much deeper than in others. Some fragments of carapaces from Leintwardine (Ludl. Mus. O., and M. P. G. 22) are ornamented with longitudinal lines or striz of varying strength. Seven abdominal segments are usually exposed. Good specimens of C. Murchisoni (Agass.) :— M. P. G. x 3.—Carapace, 125 x 55 mm., with acute prow. Smooth, longitudinal linear ornament. Long form of carapace. Leintwardine. M. P. G. x +.—Carapace, 60 x 28 mm. Smooth and glazy. Seven segments, about 50 mm. (the last one about 20 mm.). Telson crushed. Long form of carapace. Leintwardine. Ludl. Mus. D.—Carapace, 50 x 30 mm. Smooth. Seven segments, 55 mm. (the last one 20 mm.). Some with straight strize. Telson imperfect. Short form of carapace. Leintwardine ? Ludl. Mus. B.—Carapace, about 50 x 30 mm. Short form of carapace. Exposed segments (crushed up), 50mm. With straight, wriggly strize. Telson broken. Leintwardine. M. P. G. x 3. —Carapace, 40 x 20 mm., with acute prow. Smooth and glazy ; at the place of the teeth. Five? segments, about 30mm. Long form of carapace. Leint- wardine. M. P. G. x } .—Carapace, 25 x 11 mm. Small, smooth, sharp in front, marked by teeth inside. Seven ? segments, 28 mm. (the last one 14 mm.). Linear ornament. Telson, 25 mm. Ridged and pitted (spines). (Stylets about 12mm. Ridged.) Long form of carapace. The whole animal 3% inches in length. Bow Bridge, near Ludlow. - Ludl. Mus. A.—Carapace, 24 x 13mm. Small, smooth, subovate, sharp in front. Seven segments, 30 mm. (the last one 12 mm.). Longitudinally striate. Telson imperfect (12mm. preserved). Medium form of carapace. Leintwardine ? Oxford Mus. J, K, Q, are small specimens from the Lower Ludlow, with features closely resembling those of C. Murchisont. Addendum. 1853. Dithyrocaris Murchisoni (Agass.), Geinitz. Verstein. Grauwackenformation in Sachsen, u.s.w. Heft 2, p. 24, pl. 19, fig. 13. 1866. Ceratiocaris Murchisoni, Jones. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. xviii. p. 40. This is the distal end of tapering, costulate telson (or stylet ?), and is quite comparable with C. Murchisoni (Agassiz), as indicated by Dr. H. B. Geinitz. It was obtained from the Silurian Grauwacké beds of the Gunzenberg, between Moschwitz and Pohl, near Plauen, together with Graptolites, Orthoceras, and Pterinea. 392 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— 2. CERATIOCARIS LUDENSIS, H. Woodward. 1871. heels ludensis, 1. Woodward. GEOL. MAG. Vol. VIII. p. 104, Pl. - Lig. 3. 1884. Coratocarss aden Jones and Woodward. Grou. Mac. Dec. III. Vol. - P. 390. This large and indeed gigantic Ceratiocaris is represented by seven abdominal segments, with the caudal appendages of telson and two stylets, in the Ludlow Museum, and has been described in the Guot. Mac. for March, 1871, and illustrated with a reduced figure. The carapace is there estimated as having probably been eight inches in length. The segments giving eight inches, and the telson being about nine inches in length, the animal would be more than two feet in total length. As pointed out in the paper referred to, the telson is certainly the longest known. Thus we find the relative propor- tions to be for C. ludensis, H. W., 144; C. Murchisoni (Agass.), 128 (as defined above); C. Deweii (J. Hall), 100; C. bohemica, Barr. (Brit. Mus.), 84; C. stygia, Salter, 32; C. Neetlingi, F. Schmidt, 26; C. papilio, Salter, 16. The segments are ornamented along the back with imbricated or lattice-like, raised, lines, which pass downwards on the sides into oblique and then curved wrinkles, and sometimes form a reticulation. The ultimate segment is striated longitudinally with interrupted and inosculating lines. The spines are stout, tapering slowly, slightly curved inwards (downwards), delicately ribbed, and bear close-set marks of the bases of small spines between or on some of the ridges. This fine specimen is imbedded in the greenish-grey, sandy, lami- nated mudstone of the Lower Ludlow series, at Church Hill, Leint- wardine, near Ludlow, with Graptolites. It was found by the late Mr. H. Pardoe, and is preserved in the Ludlow Museum. 3. CERATIOCARIS PAPILIO, Salter. (Pl. X. Fig. 1.) 1859. Ceratiocarzs, Salter. In Murchison’s Siluria, 2nd (3rd) edit. p. 262, wood- cut fig. I, p. 538. 1860. Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter. Ann. Mag. Nat. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 154, wood- cut fig. 1, and p. 155. 1865. Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter and H. Woodward. Catal. and Chart Foss. Crust. p. 17 (not fig. 5). 1865. Ceratiocaris papilio, H. Woodward. GEOL. Mac. Vol. II. p. 403, Pl. 11, Figs. 1 and 2. 1867. Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 236, woodcut fig. I (not fig. 2), and p. 516. 1873. Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter. Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 178. 5 1873. as RS R. Etheridge, jun. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotl. Expl. Map 23, pp. 55, 56. 1876. Cevatiocaris papilio, Armstrong and others. Catal. W.-Scot. Fossils, p. 24. 1877. a 5 H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. 1878. 50 5 Huxley and Etheridge. Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 142. Of the two species, so abundant in the Upper-Ludlow Shales of the Logan Water, near Lesmahago, in Lanarkshire, and described (unfortunately without good figures) by J. W. Salter in the Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. for March, 1860, we have examined many good specimens. As mentioned by Salter, one (C. papilio) has the cara- pace more oblong than the other (C. stygia), which is deepened by Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 393 a greater or less angularity on its ventral margin. In the woodcut diagrams at p. 154 of his memoir, fig. 1 is the oblong form, and figs. 2 and 3 have the deep ventral angle (C. stygia), and yet they are all there termed C. papilio, evidently from oversight. In the Lesma- hago district multitudes of the two species seem to have been imbedded in the black mud (now shales) ; and frequent references to these interesting deposits are made in Siluria, Memoirs of the Geological Survey of Scotland (especially Explanation of Map 28, p- 49, etce.), in other works on Scottish Geology, in geological manuals, ete., and in Dr. J. S. Hunter’s papers in the Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, vol. vii. pp. 56, 272, ete. Carapace sub-oblong; straight on the back, gently curved below ; like the prow of a boat in front, and truncate with an ogee curve behind. The anterior extremity is rather sharp and is rarely pre- served; it slopes with a gentle curve downwards and backwards from the antero-dorsal angle to the ventral margin. The latter is somewhat convex in outline, with its greatest fullness near the middle and rather forward, but varying with every specimen, all being more or less squeezed out of their true shape. The front moiety usually keeps its shape more truly than the posterior region, of which sometimes the dorsal angle (as in Brit. Mus. 41896, 41897), and sometimes the boldly-curved ventral portion (as in Brit. Mus. 41894, 58669; Cambridge Mus. 6/135; and M. P. G. x 75) becomes the more prominent. The surface of the valves is delicately striate, with longitudinal lines, curving parallel with the ventral margin, and coarser on the ventral than on the dorsal region. In some specimens the lines are seen to converge at, or rather, as it were, to start from, the postero-dorsal angles. The telson (style), relatively stout, and very little longer than the laterals or stylets, was faintly ridged, and perhaps prickly or spinose. The whole adult animal was probably from four to six inches long. Having seen but few specimens in which the caudal appendages are well preserved in their place (as in Brit. Mus. 41894), we get only few good measurements. Mr. Salter says that only three or four of the abdominal segments were free (external to the carapace), but probably there were even five; for in one specimen (Brit. Mus. 58669) five segments of large size, now loose and reversed, were probably exposed beyond the carapace; and in another (Brit. Mus. 41895) four, with an imperfect fifth, have been shifted out. The segments, excepting the last one, appear in their squeezed condition to be half as long as high, and the last one as long as three of the others. | In Brit. Mus. 41894, the carapace is 60 mm. long by 30 mm. deep (or high), and probably once rather deeper, having suffered from pressure. The penultimate segment is 10 mm. long, and if there were four of that length (40 mm.), with the ultimate segment, the body-rings would be nearly 80 mm. The telson was 25 mm. (stylets 18 mm.). Thus, altogether, the animal was about 152 mm., or 6 inches, in length. Brit. Mus. 58669 has a longer (narrowed) carapace, five body- rings, and a broken telson ; altogether, 64 inches long, O94 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— In another, but smaller, individual (Brit. Mus. 41895) the cara- pace, 40 x 20? mm.; segments, 40 mm., but shortened ; and style, about 20 mm. (stylets, 15 mm. each), make about 100 mm., or four inches, of total length. In ten good specimens from Lesmahago we have seen two of cara- pace only; and in all the others the body-portion is shifted, and in six of them it is quite reversed—that is, lying at the anterior instead of the posterior end, as described by Mr. Salter (Siluria, 1867, p. 236, etc.). The specimen Cambridge Mus. 6/185 has the rostrum lying at an angle across the anterior extremity. Of C. papilio, good specimens from Lesmahago :— Cambridge Mus., /185. M. P. G. x +s, x vy. Brit. Mus. 41894, 41895, 41896, 41897, 45161, 47989, 58669. We have seen also some fossil carapaces from Benson Knot, Ken- dal (Upper Ludlow), which agree perfectly in form and proportions with C. papilio from Lesmahago, also in ornament, except that the postero-dorsal convergence of the striz is not present. These are, Brit. Mus. some of those marked 44342; M. P. G. x 4 (Catal. 1878, p- 141); and Cambridge Mus. 0/35. They range from 65 mm. long and 32 mm. high to 75 x 40 mm. Also a large imperfect specimen and some fragments in brown shale from Linburn near Muirkirk (Brit. Mus., all marked 58878.) The specimen 6/35 is included in C. inornata, M‘Coy, by Mr. Salter, Catal. C. S. Foss. 1878, p. 177. Moreover, the specimen N in the Ludlow Museum has the pro- portions and appearance of C. papilio, as far as it is preserved (wanting the antero-dorsal angle), from Church Hill, Leintwardine.* 4. Curatiocarts srycra, Salter. (Pl. X. Fig. 2.) 1859. Ceratiocaris, Salter. In Murchison’s Siluria, 2nd (3rd) ed. p. 262, wood- cut fig. 2. 1860. Ceratiocaris stygius, Salter. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. v. p- 154, woodcut figs. 2, 3 (fig. 1 is C. papzlio). 1865. Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter and Woodward. Cat. and Chart Foss. Crust. p. 17, fig. 5. 1867. Ceratiocaris stygius, Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) ed. p. 236, woodcut fig. 2, and p. 517. 1873. Ceratiocaris stygius, Salter. Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 178. 1873. a3 si R. Etheridge, jun. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotl. Expl. Map 23, pp- 55, 56. 1876. Ceratiocaris papilio. Roem. Leth, geogn. Th. i. Leth. palzeoz. pl. 19, fig. 4. 1876. Ceratiocaris stygius, Armstrong and others. Cat. W. Scot. Fossils, p. 24. 1877. as », H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 73. 1878. a », Huxley and Etheridge. Cat. Camb. Sil. Fossils, p. 142. Carapace-valves trapezoidal; back straight, but curving down for a short distance to the mucronate dorsal angle of the anterior edge, which then slopes with a slight convexity at a sharp angle, down- 1 The very rich localities for these Silurian Phyllopods in the neighbourhood of Ludlow are enumerated and described in the Rev. J. D. La Touche’s Handbook of the Geology of Shropshire, 1884, pp. 26, 27, especially Ludford Lane, Bow Bridge, Leintwardine, Church Hill, and Trippleton Farm. See also the Rev. W. 3. Symonds’ Record of the Rocks, 1872, p. 194, etc., for notices of Ludlow and its environs from a geologist’s point of view. Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 399 wards and backwards, to about the middle of the ventral margin, where the valve is deepest (highest) ; and the other half of the ventral edge rises slowly with a straight or nearly straight oblique edge to the blunt postero-ventral corner, whence the truncate hind margin rises, with a gentle concave curve, to the sharp postero-dorsal angle. When the valves are spread open, a triangular space is left between the antero-dorsal angles. This condition and the shape are well shown in the specimen M. P. G. x 3. The outline is often modified by pressure in other positions ; but not to quite so great an extent, as the shape of C. papilio is altered by squeeze in some instances. The valves are delicately striate, with longitudinal lines curving parallel with the ventral edge, and crowded at the postero- dorsal angles. The body-segments, of which probably five were outside the carapace (though often the segments seem to have been pushed back within the carapace after death), are marked with delicate, raised, oblique, wrinkly lines on the sides, coming from angular imbricated lines on the back (as in C. Scharyi, Barrande, and C. Deweii, Hall). The joints are sometimes more than twice as high as long. The last one is as long as three of the others. The telson is short, and is apparently in some cases about half as long again as the stylets (as 50 is to 30); and some specimens show traces of thin costule, and perhaps of prickles. The whole adult animals were from 4 to 8 inches long. Specimen M. P. G. x zy has the rostrum and teeth squeezed out loose near the front end. A large individual, Cambridge Mus. 5/65, measures— Carapace ¢ d o £3 $3 GE mim, Four segments 5 4O Last segment . a 25 5; mau Telson . é é o HO) 55 198 mm. or nearly 8 inches. A small specimen, M. P. G. x +43, measures — Carapace < é . 40 xX 26mm. Four segments 20 : ? Last segment . of 3 saan Telson . : c o BO op About 100 mm. or nearly 4 inches. C. stygia was rather larger than C. papilio; its telson was larger ; the carapace was markedly distinct by its trapezoidal outline, deep ventral region, and mucronate antero-dorsal angle, which was not nearly so often lost in fossilization as the front angle of C. papilio. In its rostrum, teeth, superficial ornament of carapace and of body- rings, it seems to have closely resembled C. papilio. In ten good specimens from Lesmahago, two are simple carapaces ; three have body-segments in places, and five have them shifted or reversed. In this respect C. stygia seems to have been rather less liable to the dissolution of the membranous attachments of the body than its associate C. papilio. A postero-dorsal fragment in Cambridge Museum (Marr Coll.), 396 Prof. Rupert Jones and Dr. Woodward—On Ceratiocaris. from the Denbighshire series (Wenlock), at Dinasbran, Llangollen, showing fine strize above, and coarse striz below, and the usual con- vergence of striz, belongs probably to C. stygia. Good specimens of C. stygia from Lesmahago are Cambridge Mus. b/136, b/65 (the last is referred to as C. papilio, evidently by mistake, in Cat. C. Sil. Foss. p. 178); M. P. G. x ps and +4, xfs, Xqs, Xa, Xs; and B. M. 41898, 45154, 45155, 45156. In the Mem. Geol. Scotl. Expl. Map 23, 1878, at p- 49, Mr. R. Htheridge, jun., enumerates the places near Lesmahago and Muirkirk, in Lanarkshire, where Ceratiocarides have been found by the Sur- veyors, namely— Ceratiocaris papilio, Salter, at Dunside (Logan Water), Eaglinside Burn, Logan Water (2 m. S. of Lesmahago), and Linburn. Ceratiocaris stygta, Salter, at Kip Burn (Logan Water), Eaglinside Burn, and Linburn. Ceratiocaris, caudal appendages, at Long Burn (Logan Water), Dunside (Logan Water), Logan Water (6 m. S.W. of Lesmahago), Lann Burn, and Douglas Water. Abdominal segments and appendages probably belonging to C. stygia are :— B. M. 58878, Linburn, Muirkirk. A telson, not quite perfect at base, 85 mm. long, associated with some obliquely-striate segments. B. M. 41899, Lesmahago. Four segments, 27 mm., and M. P.G. X yc, four segments, 830 mm.,.and in each case two short ensiform stylets attached (style wanting). B. M. 41900 and 41901, Lesmahago. Three abdominal seg- ments, obliquely striate, and an ultimate segment with both oblique and straight striz, probably due to two layers of the test. Telson, 30 mm. long; and two ensiform stylets, each about 13 mm. ‘ong. M. P. G. x +4, sa, a5), asd, Logan Water, Lesmahago. Seg- ments with oblique striz (one ultimate segment has straight strie), not well preserved. Oxford Mus. H. Seven segments and two spines, imperfect. Leintwardine. One of the specimens in the Brit. Mus. marked 59648, from Les- mahago, is a small acute-ovate carapace (25x15 mm.), to which is attached a complete, but somewhate crushed body of 13-14 seg- ments, 6-7 (15 mm.) of which are external, and have appended two caudal spines, of which the longest may be the telson (12 mm. long), and the other, nearly as long, one of the stylets. , At first sight this looks like the small C. Murchisoni, Ludl. Mus. A., but it differs considerably in details. If it be not a distinct species, it may be the young of C. stygia. On another of the specimens, B.M. 59648, from Lesmahago, are three loose small bodies, without carapaces. The largest has 13 or 14 segments, 45 mm., some of which are obliquely striate. The last five measure 25 mm., and the last one 10 mm., equal to three of the others. The telson is 20 mm. long. Another such specimen, smaller and narrower, 35 mm. long, has 14 (?) segments; the last one 7 mm. long; appendages imperfect. J. Starkie Gardner— Underground Heat. 397 These may be the loosened and shifted abdomens of young in- dividuals of C. stygia or C. papilio, both common at Lesmahago. They cannot be mistaken for the Carboniferous Acanthocaris, Peach, or the Devonian Campecaris, Page. EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Fie.1. Ceratincaris papilio, Salter. Entire specimen from the Upper Ludlow Shales, Logan Water, Lesmahago, Lanarkshire. The abdominal segments are displaced and reversed (as is very frequently the case in specimens from Logan Water) and protrude from the rostral end of the carapace. Part of the carapace of another specimen is seen near the posterior border. », 2a. Ceratiocaris stygia, Salter, from the same locality and formation. », 2b. Portion of the carapace, near the postero-dorsal line, showing the delicate raised wavy lines with which the entire surface is covered (enlarged three times). “gp Ba — Ilne ie of same enlarged four times, to show the concentric strize covering the surface. Figs. 1 and 2a drawn of the natural size from specimens in the British Museum, - (Natural History). (To be continued.) I].—Can Unpercrounp Heat se Uriiizep ? By J. Starnxiz Garpner, F.G.S. EOLOGY has long been the handmaid of Engineering. Instances are numerous in which the practical hearing of facts discovered by the devotee of the one have been recognized and utilized by the other. On the other hand, engineering enterprise has often put geologists in possession of facts of the greatest value as bases for fresh inductions. The subject now brought forward may perhaps sooner, or in a remote future, furnish another instance in which knowledge gained by the geologist may become available for a great economic purpose. The subject of ‘‘ Underground Heat” is one about which very little is known even by the specialist. There is much divergence of opinion as to the form and conditions under which this heat exists, and still more as to the depth at which it occurs. Whether the interior of the earth is solid or fluid, hot or cold, is still a debated subject; though all leading geologists are at all events agreed that it is hot, and many believe that it is partially fluid, the fluid being situated beneath the solid crust, and resting upon a solid interior. ‘The question we have to consider is whether zones of considerable heat are likely to be within a depth at which it might be practicable to reach them. The paramount importance of the subject, and its pressing nature, will come to be recognized when the scarcity of coal in this country shall render it impossible for us to pay for the vast supplies of food we are compelled to import from abroad either by it or by articles produced by its aid. Our statesmen and others whom it may concern will then perhaps awake to the necessity of promoting experimental research, and of obtaining new scientific knowledge; but let us hope not too late to arrest a serious diminution of our national wealth. Coal began to be used as fuel in some localities about the 13th century ; but until the beginning of the 17th, prejudice and other causes prevented its coming into anything like general use. We may eee eee 098 J. Starkie Gardner— Underground Heat. form an idea of the consumption from the fact that in 1615 the ~ number of vessels employed in the coal trade consisted of only 400 sail. ‘Twenty-five years later between 600 and 700 were employed. The inroads on the stock of coal could not be serious until deep mining began, and it is apparent that little more than two centuries have brought us within a measurable distance of its exhaustion. The bases upon which the Royal Commission of 1871 reported the probability that the supply would not last more than 106 years are but too well known. Our working coal-fields contained but 90,207,000,000 tons available, and it was estimated that unworked fields might contain 56,273,000,000 more. Nothing has since come to light affording any ground to hope that these totals have been under-estimated ; but, on the contrary, subsequent research has rendered it probable that they are too high. A century seems a long time, but it might actually be almost spanned in a single life, and certainly within the lives of the offspring of already wedded couples. The time might be prolonged by checking the unremunera- tive and increasing export, but any measures that could be taken would necessarily prove futile in the long run. We need not do with- out coal for a long time to come after our own stock is exhausted, if we have money to purchase; for we possess in Australia coal-fields 400,000 miles in extent, and in India 30,000, while China is as rich as Australia, and the United States exceed all other countries with the immense area of 500,000 miles of coal-field. The consequences of having to import our coal are however no "please subjects for con- templation to an Englishman. But even the coal areas of the sig earth will be found to be finite quantities. Should the human race continue to multiply at its present rate, their exhaustion is a matter of time, and sooner or later the question that has become momentous to us will in turn become no less so to other nations. Artificial light and heat have become so essential to us, that the continued progress of humanity, if not its existence, is dependent on their supply. We need not stop to con- sider now the probable future of the electric light, for the question of heat would remain, and we know of no fuel at present, regularly replenished by nature, except wood and turf. By husbanding these, a residuum of civilized humanity could exist in temperate regions, but any one who has realized how marvellously the wants of the humblest creatures are provided for will be slow to believe it to be within the scope of a scheme which appears so transcendentally per- fect, that the supply of one of the most vital necessaries should fail us. Coal is the limited accumulation of vegetable matter of almost a single geological epoch, a transitory store to be used we may hope during a transitory condition of things. There is no ground to sup- pose that the end of our planet is near, nor the cessation of life upon it within a measurable distance; and if humanity has any destiny, we must have faith that some means of satisfying its needs will be pro- vided. We have the sun’s heat above, unequally distributed and intermittent; can we ever hope with the Laputans to ‘bottle sun- beams”? We have the central heat beneath us ever present; can J. Starhie Gardner—Underground Heat. 399 we get access to it, and will it prove more tractable? These will develope into the burning questions of the future. We are aware of the presence of this central heat in various ways, the most direct of which is the observed increase in the temperature when the crust is bored into. A great deal of evidence upon this has been collected by the committee appointed by the British Asso- ciation to investigate underground temperatures, and the result of their work was to ascertain that the increase varies from 1° F. for from every 130 to every 34 feet. Several still newer observations give a result near the latter figure. The mean is about 1° in 64 feet, the rate greatly depending on the conductivity of the matrix bored. It would perhaps be safer to take a rather higher average, as it seems likely that borings, whether filled with air or water, must as a general rule give a rather lower temperature than the rock itself. It also seems probable that the rate may increase in a compound ratio at depths beyond those hitherto reached, since radiation would be less. The observed increase would give us boil- ing water at 10,000 feet, and molten rock of the temperature of lava as it issues from Vesuvius, 2000° F., at a depth of 20 miles. This is only calculated, however, from what we know to take place within the first three-quarters of a mile from the surface, the greatest depth yet tested, and we shall see in the sequel that there are other reasons for anticipating that these temperatures will be met with nearer the surface. There are, as is well known, whole classes of rocks called meta- morphic, that is to say, rocks originally sedimentary, which have become crystalline through heat. They comprehend the gneisses, schists, slates, and nearly all crystalline rocks indeed which are not igneous or intrusive. There is even reason to suppose that granite itself is a clastic rock which has been fused at a great depth from the surface. They have been proved to be merely sedimentary rocks, originally formed as ordinary sea or other mud, by tracing the same strata from their crystalline to their normal and often fossiliferous condition. In the latter case we can be quite sure of their age, and are able to estimate the greatest possible depth at which they are ever likely to have been buried, by the simple process of adding together the maxima of thickness of all the more recent known sedimentary strata. Some have been metamorphosed by direct con- tact with igneous rocks, but the greatest work has been effected through heat generated by squeezing and pressure during the elevation of mountain chains. These are plicated rocks, but all metamorphic rocks are not plicated, and since the microscopic in- vestigations to which they have been subjected leave no doubt as to heat having caused the alteration, we may suppose in such cases that at the depth under which they were buried the temperature must have been sufficient to cause metamorphosis. In basing any theory upon them, however, we must proceed with extreme caution, for we must first be quite sure that the heat was not the result of squeezing and movement; and, secondly, we cannot be sure of the depth of sediment which existed above them, though we have fair 400 J. Starkie Gardner.—Underground Heat. grounds for believing that even the Silurian system has not been buried under more than 25,000 feet of newer strata. A more striking manifestation of the existence of heat beneath us is seen in volcanic eruptions. We learn by them that rocks are not only incandescent, but rendered molten and fluid by the intensity of the heat. It is now recognized that the explosions, showers of stones and ash, and escape of volumes of steam, which accompany eruptions and render them so terrible, are caused by the sudden conversion of underground waters in more or less superficial strata into steam. The great absorption of water that takes place in volcanic regions has often been remarked, and so soon as the heated lava is set in motion and commences to rise, it is certain that it must come into contact with saturated strata and underground waters, with the inevitable result that most violent explosions must occur. The longer the interval between two eruptions, the more deeply and completely the rocks to be rent will be saturated, and the more energetic the explosion; and eruptions are accordingly observed to be violent in proportion to the period of quiescence which preceded them. The explosions and steam are the mere accidental accom- paniments of an eruption, which is fundamentally the squeezing out or escape through a vent or crack of some of the molten interior, owing presumably to an increase of pressure elsewhere. After the paroxysmal stage, that is, when the water in contact has all been blown into steam, the Java flows tranquilly enough, and may con- tinue to well out for very long periods. It-seems probable that eruptions through craters are very minor matters, and that the grand eruptions are through fissures which may extend for hundreds or even thousands of miles in almost parallel lines. The Hocene basalts of Ireland and Scotland are generally agreed by geologists to have formed part of an extensive tract that once stretched uninter- ruptedly through the Faroés to Iceland and Greenland. These lavas are in horizontal sheets, and there is no trace of any craters through which they could have welled, but the fissures are plain and marked by large dykes. Their outpouring seems to have been unaccom- panied by explosions, for nowhere have I discovered any great deposits of scoriz or lapilli interstratified with them, and contem- porary deposits that have formed in their vicinity show no layers of ash. The Chalk also is quite or almost free from volcanic dust, while the corresponding ocean ooze of the present day invariably contains a large percentage of such extraneous matters. The results of other large and equally tranquil eruptions are to be seen in the Deccan, where there is an area under lava 200,000 square miles in extent and 6000 feet in thickness, and in Oregon an undulating plain of basalt equalling the combined areas of France and Hngland. These facts are merely mentioned to show that volcanic eruptions are not merely local phenomena, caused by lateral thrusts or pressure, but are vents through which the heated and molten rocks of the interior overflow the surface. When we see rocks rise and burst through the crust in every part of the earth at temperatures of 2000° F., we can hardly refuse to believe in underground heat. J. Starkie Gardner—Underground Heat. 401 What directly concerns our present inquiry, however, is whether this heat is at a depth which would make it impossible with our present appliances to reach it, or whether there is ground to hope that it may some day be reached, Harthquakes are perhaps more likely to yield information on this point, and as they can only, for the most part, be the incompleted efforts of the molten matter to force its way to the surface and find a vent, the two subjects may be treated as one. Their direct connexion with eruptions is more- over sometimes apparent, though not always, nor even very frequently, for earthquakes are felt where there are no signs of any volcanic activity having been manifested in recent times. In Japan, where they have been particularly studied, no connexion can be traced, but in Italy, on the contrary, the connexion is apparent. Harthquakes are certainly due to movements of the earth’s crust, and as these are primarily of two kinds, either of elevation or subsidence, the resultants are very different in kind and degree. Those due to sub- sidence would probably be the more local, while those due to efforts of the molten interior to break through would be propagated to great distances. It would be impossible to attempt to enter into the physics of earthquakes; but I would merely say that the phenomena of some are so wide-spread, and so independent of changes in the nature of the superficial crust, that they appear as if they could only have been propagated through the fluid or viscous substratum. The smallest depth at which I have seen the focus of an earthquake calculated is four miles; this was in the vicinity of a volcanic region, Vesuvius. Others have been determined at seven and ten miles. A peculiarity observed about earthquakes is that they are far more prevalent in winter than in summer, and that they take place more frequently when the barometer is low.’ This effect must have a cause, and the only one apparent is that the diminished pressure of the atmosphere admits of a corresponding expansion of the fluid interior. The tension must obviously have been already extreme, for so small a reduction of the pressure to produce disturbances at a depth within the earth’s crust that may be sensibly felt at the surface. But what an idea this gives of the flexibility of the crust, and how thin it must be to be acted on by so slight a cause! Besides their connexion with volcanoes, the direct connexion of earthquakes with underground heat is apparent in many ways. One of the most curious examples of this was the sudden and permanent increase in temperature of the waters of the Bagnéres de Luchon from 46° to 122° F., following the great earthquake of Lisbon. Another proof that some classes at least of earth- quakes are propagated through the fluid substratum lies in the fact that mountain chains often, as in Japan, prove a complete barrier to their progress, for the Rev. Osmond Fisher has shown, in his admir- able work on the Physics of the Harth’s Crust, the high probability that mountain chains interrupt to a certain degree the continuity of the fluid layer. Other instances of the influence of earthquakes on thermal springs must no doubt have been observed, but I have not 1See J. Rofe, C.H., F.G.S8., ‘‘On Colliery Explosions,”’ ete., Grou. Maa. 1867. Vol. IV. p. 106. DECADE I1I.—VOL. II.—NO. IX. 26 402 J. Starkie Gardner—Underground Heat. come across them. Very valuable information as to the depths at which high temperatures are seated could be gathered in non-volcanic regions where there are hot springs by observing the outcrop of the underlying impervious stratum and estimating the depth at which it would be situated where the springs issue forth. Thus the rainfall on the Mendips may probably feed the thermal springs at 120° F. at Bath, and the depth from which the water rises would not be more than the thickness of the strata forming the basin—about 4200 feet. Again, the fact that springs of scalding water are met with in some mines of 2000 feet in depth, as at Redruth and the Comstock, makes it unlikely that the horizon of boiling water is anything like so low as the 10,000 feet estimated from the observed increment in artesian wells. We can hardly in fact conceive that the hot springs so pre- valent in Germany and other parts of Hurope, away from both voleanic districts and earthquake zones, rise from such prodigious depths ; though they may of course do so. In volcanic districts at least, there can however be no question as to the proximity of under- ground heat to the surface, for its presence is apparent in fumaroles, geysers, mud caldrons, etc., not always close to vents, but often in plains at some little distance. But the great proof of the thinness of the earth’s crust is to be sought in the movements which are constantly taking place at its surface. Its extreme sensitiveness has only become apparent since the micro- phone has enabled earth-tremors to be appreciated, and we now know that the solid ground is sensitive to a footstep and vibrates under a hail-stone. The seais the fixed, and terra firma the unstable element. Every accumulation of weight brought from elsewhere by any trans- porting agency causes the land to sink in a corresponding degree. The whole story of the sedimentary rocks is one continued record of subsidence keeping pace with sedimentation. Every layer of the Coal-measures was formed at or very near the sea-level, while the crust was giving way inch by inch under the continued additions of weight, until in South Wales it finally sagged no less than 10,000 feet. The entire Cambrian series appears to have been formed in uniformly shallow water, and yet in our area it forms a mass esti- mated at 23,000 feet in vertical thickness, or sufficient to have filled in solid the abyssal depths of the Atlantic. Hvery river delta that has been pierced shows an endless succession of estuarine beds, often hundreds of feet in thickness, but each of which is recognized by its contents to have been formed at the water’s level. No sea-coast-line is at rest. Where cliffs are being eroded and carried away by the waves, there is upheaval; for it will be noticed that, irrespective of the general strike inland, the strata of which they are com- posed almost invariably dip away from the sea on the shore-line. This general dip can be traced all round even deep and land-locked bays, and is explicable on no other hypothesis. Where sediment is accumulating out at sea, great subsidence must take place; for were it otherwise, coasts would be surrounded with vast shoals but a few feet below the influence of the surf, and extending as far as ever the land had stretched before the sea began to act upon it. Islands separated off by sea-action generally exhibit a strike for the strata J. Starkie Gardner—Underground Heat. 403 composing their cliffs, corresponding to that of the main-land from which they have been severed, but at a much lower level, a result that could only be brought about through subsidence or elevation. To bring forward the overwhelming proofs of this double movement on coast-lines would carry us beyond the limits of this article. During the Glacial period the land was everywhere depressed by the weight of ice, to the extent of 1550 feet in Wales; and everywhere rose when the weight was removed by the ice melting off again. In like manner I have twice observed in Iceland that lava debouching on to plains has caused them to sink bodily. Darwin’s well-known explanation of the formation of coral reefs and atolls requires that subsidence should keep pace exactly with the added weight, by the depression of the rocks or banks on which they are forming. It would be physically impossible for such movements to take place if the earth were solid throughout. The fluid or viscous layer which is near to the surface in volcanic regions must extend under- neath all areas where movements of upheaval or subsidence have been observed, and since movements to a greater or less extent seem universal, the only inference is that the crust rests everywhere upon a viscous substratum. Yet we know that the earth as a whole isa rigid body, of the rigidity of steel or glass, and it is believed that its principal mass is kept solid ata temperature beyond the fusing point of rock through the pressure of the external envelope. But if this is so, the pressure must become relaxed as the surface is neared, and at a certain point the rock must obey its impulse and melt, and we must thus find at some depth or other beneath the crust, rendered solid by loss of heat, a layer in a state of fusion. The Rev. Osmond Fisher has shown the high probability that this state of things does actually exist, and many geologists are now embracing the same views. At the same time the plications the crust has undergone in many places, as at Bergen, demonstrate that it is far more flexible than had been supposed. The ceaseless removal of material, by dis- integration and abrasion, from one area of a flexible crust, and its redeposition by various transporting agencies, on another, would be likely to destroy the equilibrium of the liquid layer beneath, and to cause those changes from sea to land revealed in stratified rocks, as well as the slow movements which are even now discernible on every coast. Subsidence under newly transported weight must lead to a compensating elevation elsewhere, and thus, as old lands sink, new ones rise to take their place. This appears a reasonable explanation of the movements that have taken place throughout geological time, and I know of no other that can compete with it. Pushed to its extreme we should find that all oceans are areas of sedimentation, and there- fore of depression, while high lands would be areas of denudation, and therefore of elevation. Further we should expect to find that the viscous layer would seek relief at the nearest point free from sedimentation, and we should thus find our mountain chains running parallel with ancient or modern coast-lines. At first sight this would favour the theory of the permanence of ocean-basins and of continents ; but the sea-bottom is itself traversed by currents which 404 J. Starkie Gardner— Underground Heat. denude its surface, and lead to the formation of submarine areas of elevation which assume the form of ridges and banks and finally dry land. The movements must be infinitely complicated, but the greatest depths or hollows of the ocean would be the least likely to come under the influence of denudation, and would thus probably prove permanent. As the great ocean currents are caused by the difference in specific gravity of the tropical and polar waters, they must flow north and south, and areas relatively free from sediment would lie in the same directions, as we in fact know that the chief land surfaces do. This theory agrees with most known physical facts, and it would be interesting to trace it further did space permit. It has been objected that a solid crust could not be supported on a liquid, but would break up and sink through. Lava, however, in cooling, forms a crust, which is supported on the still molten mass, and the crust of the earth must be, as a whole, of lighter specific gravity than the fluid it rests on. The movements of the earth’s crust are, on the whole, more com- patible with a crust of 10 miles in thickness, the minimum assigned to it by physicists, than with the maximum estimate of 50 miles. Modern engineering would not, perhaps, consider the task of piercing even such a depth as 10,000 feet, at which depth boiling water must be reached, an altogether hopeless one, were the stake sufficiently great; for mere artesian wells have been bored to the depth of nearly a mile. London would perhaps be a very unfavour- able area in which to experiment, as the upper water-bearing strata are of great thickness, and have outcrops in adjacent counties. Were there any water-bearing strata however among the deep-seated Paleozoic rocks, supplies of boiling water might be confidently reckoned upon. The west of England would be a much more favourable field, but the chances are that the neighbourhood of London would be preferred, as there is still the strongest probability that coal may yet be pierced at a workable depth, and the enormous sum of £5,000,000 per annum paid by Londoners for its carriage be thereby saved. It is hardly probable that danger would ensue from sinking a shaft even into molten lava, were it possible to do so, and I should not apprehend that any uncontrollable eruptions would ensue. Molten lava habitually fills some craters for long periods at a time, and remains in a constant state of ebullition. There is no need, however, to essay so gigantic an enterprise just yet, as a supply of more moderate heat would go far to check the rapid consumption of fuel. As illustrating the possibility of obtaining such, the following extracts ' are of interest : “Near St. Etienne (France) a new geyser has been discovered. At a depth of 1500 metres a vein of hot water was tapped, and the result is an intermittent fountain which sends its water to a height of 26 metres. The geyser ejects carbonic acid as well as hot water.” “The deepest artesian well in the world is being bored at Pesth, and has reached already a depth of 951 metres. The well at Paris, which measures 547 metres, has hitherto been the first. The work 1 From ‘‘ Nature ’’ of various dates. J. Starkie Gardner— Underground Heat. 405 is undertaken by the brothers Zsigmondy, partially at the expense of the city, which has granted £40,000 for the purpose, with the in- tention of obtaining an unlimited supply of warm water for the municipal establishments and public baths. A temperature of 161° F. is shown by the water at present issuing from the well, and the work will be prosecuted until water of 178° is obtained. About 175,000 gallons of warm water stream out daily, rising to a height of 35 feet. This amount will not only supply all the wants of the city, but convert the surrounding region into a tropical garden. Since last June the boring has penetrated through 200 feet of dolo- mite. The preceding strata have supplied a number of interesting facts to the geologist, which have been recorded from time to time in the Hungarian Academy of Sciences. Among some of the in- genious engineering devices invented during the course of the boring are especially noteworthy the arrangements for driving in nails at the enormous depth mentioned above, for pulling them out (with magnets), for cutting off and pulling up broken tubes, and, above all, a valuable mechanical apparatus by means of which the water rising from the well is used as a motive power, driving the drills at a rate of speed double that previously imparted from the mouth of the well.” Whether, having obtained a supply of heat, it would be practicable to lay it on to our houses, is a question apart, but one which seems to have been solved in America. “A very successful experiment has been made at Lockport, New York State, in supplying heat to houses by steam supplied from a central station, in much the same way as gas is supplied. The ex- perimental works in Lockport were commenced last year, and during the late winter about 200 houses in the city were heated from the central supply, through about three miles of piping, radiating from the boiler-house, containing two boilers 16 feet by 5 feet, and one boiler 8 feet by 8 feet. These boilers were, during the winter, fired to a pressure of 35 lb. to the inch, with a consumption of 4 tons of anthracite, costing 44 dols. a ton; during the summer but one boiler is fired, consuming a ton and a half of anthracite in twenty-four hours, and a pressure of 25 lb. per inch maintained. The boiler pressure of 35 lb. in winter, and 25 lb. in summer, is maintained through the entire length of the three miles of piping up to the points of con- sumption, where there is a cut-off under the control of the consumers. The distribution of heat in the apartments is by means of radiators, consisting of 1 inch pipes 30 inches long, placed vertically either in a circle or as a double row, and connected together, top and bottom, with an outlet pipe for the condensed water. which escapes at a tem- perature a little below boiling, and is sufficient for all the domestic purposes of the house, or is used as accessory heating power for horticultural and other purposes. The steam has also been applied at a distance of over half a mile from the boilers for motive power, and two steam-engines of ten and fourteen horse-power are worked from the boilers at a distance of half a mile, with but a slightly increased consumption of fuel. The laid on steam is being also used 406 Dr. O. Herrmann— Distribution of Graptolites. for cooking purposes, for boiling, and even baking, and Mr. G. Maw, F.G.S., who describes the system, witnessed in a house three- quarters of a mile from the boilers, a bucket of cold water raised to boiling heat in three minutes by the passage of the steam through a perforated nozzle plunged in the bucket. The operations of the Heating Company have been up to the present time of an experi- mental character, and from the 200 houses already supplied with the heating connexion, the actual cost of the coal that would have been used for heating has been provisionally received in payment, and the amount has left a wide margin over the working expenses, though the company’s operations at present cover but a small portion of the area for which they have provided plant.” Jn conclusion, the man of science will no more doubt that supplies of heat would be forthcoming from depths of 7000 or 8000 feet than that water will be found in Chalk, or coal in the Coal-measures. Whether London will ever be supplied with heat from this source is a question apart ; but it needs no seer to pierce the not-distant future when we shall be driven to every expedient to discover modes of obtaining heat without the combustion of fuel, and the perhaps far more remote future when we shall bore shafts down to the liquid layer and conduct our smelting operations at the pit’s mouth. IiJ.—On tHe Disrrisution or THE GRAPTOLITHIDZ IN TIME AND SPACE. By Dr. Orro Herrmann. T was indicated even by Murchison that the Graptolites constitute admirable characteristic fossils of the Silurian formation. Sub- sequent investigation has established that the group Graptolithide is essentially confined to the oldest fossiliferous formation. A single genus, the genus Dictyograptus, Hopk. (Dictyonema, Hall), occupies a remarkably exceptional position as regards its distribution in time. Formerly, indeed, this genus was separated from the proper or true Graptolites (Rhabdophora, Allman), and referred with some other genera (Dendrograptus, Hall, Ptilograptus, Hopk., Callograptus, Hall) to the Campanularide ; but recently W. C. Brégger® has very clearly shown that the genus in question differs very little from the true Graptolites, inasmuch as the most important parts of the latter, such as the sicula, and the hydrothece, have been detected in it. By this the Graptolithic nature of the genus in question is rendered very probable. Members of the genus Dictyograptus, Hopk., appear among the very oldest of known Graptolites; the genus maintains itself throughout the whole of the Silurian formation, while by its 1 Dr. Herrmann has published in the “ Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne,”’ vol. xxix. Heft. 2, the greater part ofa treatise, in German, on the Graptolite family Dichograptide, the first chapter of which bears the above title, and is here translated. This is terminated by an elaborate analytical bibliography of the literature of Grap- tolites. The second chapter deals with the organization and economy of the Grapto- lithidee, and the third (not yet completed) contains a monographic revision of the genera and species of Dichograptide. 2 « Die silurischen Etagen 2 und 8 in Kristianiagebiet und auf Eker,” Christiania, 1882. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 407 side new genera make their appearance, culminate and disappear. Even after the other Graptolites had long since disappeared from the ancient sea-fauna, this genus still lived on, for we find it occurring in the Devonian. All other Graptolites, however, are confined to the three subdivi- sions of the Silurian :—the Cambrian, Lower Silurian (Ordovician), and Upper Silurian (Silurian System ; Silurian proper). If we wish to obtain a clear and complete picture of the vertical distribution of the Graptolites, we find the course made plain by C. Lapworth’s classical memoir, ‘‘On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora.”! From this invaluable work it appears that not only the families and genera, but even the individual species are confined to perfectly definite levels; that the zones characterized by particular genera or species occupy the same relative position to one another over the whole earth; and that the Graptolites are well fitted to enable us to make even a detailed subdivision of the Silurian for- mation. Graptolites are known from the Upper Cambrian. G. Linnarsson has described a branched species of Graptolite? from the Olenus- shales of West Gothland; Bryograptus Callavei, Lapw., has been found in England in somewhat younger deposits; and in Norway Cambrian strata have furnished Dictyograptus flabelliformis, Hichw., and Bryograptus Kjerulfi, Lapw. (and other species of these two genera), in great individual abundance. The question now arises :— Which of the species of Graptolites enumerated is the most ancient? Lapworth answers this question to the effect that D. tenellus, Linnars., and B. Callavei, Lapw., with B. Kjerulfi, Lapw., open the series of the Graptolites. On the contrary, Brogger® shows that in Norway, B. Kjerulfi, Lapw., occurs in the upper beds of the Dictyograptus- shales, over Dict. flabelliformis, Kichw., itself, and proves that this is also the case in. England with B. Callavei, Lapw. The zone with Bryograptus, Lapw., is therefore in his opinion younger, both in Norway and in England, than the zone with Dictyograptus, Hopk. But we must regard the Swedish Dichograptus tenellus, Linnars., as older than Dictyograptus flabelliformis, Kichw., and indeed as the oldest Graptolite which has as yet become known to us. According to Linnarsson, it is contained in the Olenus-shales (Peltura-zone) of West Gothland, which is overlain by the Dictyograptus-shales ; according to Von Schmalensee, it occurs above the Peltura-zone, but in deposits which are in contact therewith. Dictyograptus tenellus, Linnars., belongs undoubtedly to the family Dichograptid, Lapw., and this family is in fact the oldest family of Graptolites. Any one who is for the first time occupied seriously with the sequence of the Graptolites in age will be exceedingly astonished at such a result, as he does not find those forms which are the most 1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iii. pp. 245 and 449; vol. iv. pp. 333 and 423; vol. vy. pp. 45, 273, and 358; and vol. vi. pp. 16 and 185. 2 It received from Linnarsson the name of Dichograptus tenellus, L., but errone - ously. Upon this further hereafter, 3 Loc. cit. pp. 146. 408 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. simply constructed, the uniserial and one-sided Monograptide, figur- ing also as the oldest representatives of the group. He will wonder to see the Graptolites suddenly make their appearance in the world of organisms under complicated and very elegant forms. The oldest Graptolite family, Dichograptide, Lapw., appears therefore, as we have already seen, in the uppermost division of the Cambrian, attains the maximum of its development in the lowest division of the Lower Silurian (Arenig formation), and becomes extinguished before the superior limit of the Lower Silurian is reached. The next oldest family, Phyllograptide, Lapw., appears to be con- fined to the lowest division of the Lower Silurian (Arenig). The same is the case with the family Lasiograptide, Linnars., or Glosso- graptide, Lapw., with its still partly problematical forms of Lower Silurian age. The Leptograptide, Lapw., and Dicranograptide, Lapw., are also confined to the Lower Silurian. The most ancient representatives of both families make their appearance in the lowest division (Upper Arenig), and the most modern are extinguished in the uppermost division (Upper Caradoc) of the Lower Silurian. The family Diplograptidee, Lapw., commences with isolated species as early as the lower limit of the Lower Silurian, but is fully deve- Joped only at its upper boundary and extends up into the Upper Silurian, although it dies out completely in the first division of this (Valentian). The vertical distribution of the family Retiolites coincides with that of the preceding family. All these families are followed, after the most luxuriant period of this group of animals is passed, and it is already rapidly declining, by the Monograptide. With regard to these Lapworth has shown that, contrary to previous notions, they are strictly confined to the Upper Silurian, and that therefore, according to the present stand- point of our knowledge of the Graptolites, ‘the mere presence of a single species of the Monograptide may at once be set down as con- clusive evidence of the (Upper) Silurian age of its containing beds.” This family, as already indicated, is survived only by the genus Dictyograptus, Hopk., which passes into the Devonian. Dictyograptus, Hopk., is at present still unranged in the system.' Passing from these brief remarks upon the distribution of the Graptolites in time, to their distribution in space, or geographical distribution, we must mention at once that our organisms are cosmo- politan fossils. Up to the present time we have been able to ascer- tain their existence in the Silurian deposits of three continents, Europe, America, and Australia. In Sweden, where these fossils were first observed, we have to seek the localities for Graptolites in the districts of Schonen, West and East Gothland, Dalecarlia, and Jemtland, and in Gotland. The best- known names of these may be here given in order to facilitate the 1§. A. Tullberg’s most recent work (Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Geol. Gesellsch. 1883, pp- 228-269) contains a system in which the Dictyogr apnea Tullb., are placed, as a new family, at the head of all other families. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 409 immediate knowledge of the position of any given locality :—they are, in Schonen (Skane) :—Réstanga, Tosterup, Jerrestad, Fogelsang, Nyhanin, Kiviks-Esperéd, Flagabro, Komstad; in Dalecarlia (Dalarne) :—Nitsj6, Stygfossen, Kallholm, Gullerasen, Osmundsberg, Hnan, Skattungbyn; in Hast Gothland:—the Hunneberg and Klubbudden near Motala; in West Gothland:—Kongslena; and in Gotland :—Visby, Farén, and the district of Frojel. The Swedish Graptolites have been very thoroughly worked out. M. von Bromel, the first observer of these peculiar organisms, Linné, who gave them their present name, Nilsson, Hisinger, L. Tornquist, and especially G. Linnarsson and §. A. Tullberg, have contributed to this accurate knowledge of the Swedish Graptolites. S. A. Tullberg has done this above all by his work ‘Skanes Graptoliter, I.,” in which, following the example of the English paleontologist, Lapworth, he has, with the aid of the Graptolites, endeavoured to carry out a special division of the Swedish Silurian. In Norway the productive fossil localities in the vicinity of Chris- tiania also furnished Graptolites at an early date. In the capital of the district itself, or in its immediate neighbourhood, localities occur upon the Galgenberg, in the Nordal Bruns-Strasse, and at the churchyard “ Vor-Frelser,” near the Botanic Garden (Téien), in which well-preserved Graptolites may easily be collected. At a somewhat greater distance from Christiania are the localities Vakkero, Malmé, Asker and Roken; and still further off we find Krekling in the parish of Eker, and the district of Ringerike with several points, such as Slemstad, Fure, etc. During an excursion last summer (1884) another locality was dis- covered in Ringerike, in which thick graptolitiferous aluminous schists (Phyllograptus-schists of the Silurian Htage 3, and Dictyo- graptus-schists of Htage 2), may be well studied, although the state of preservation of the fossils themselves is by no means satisfactory. This point is situated above the farmstead of Val, opposite the Vikersund railway station. In the last few years, indeed, the number of the Norwegian graptolitiferous rocks has been repeatedly increased. In the first place, H. Reusch has detected among the fossils from the peculiar, strongly-metamorphosed mica-schists of the peninsula of Bergen, Graptolites which indicate an Upper Silurian age for the beds in auestion. The locality for these Graptolites, which, however, are much deformed, is near the farmstead of Vagtdal. I have myself also discovered Graptolites, in the summer of 1883, in the bluish-grey, pyritous clay-slates, which stretch from Hovind in the district of Drontheim to the Selbo lake, and, with their reddish-brown weathered surface, are conspicuous as a thick band in the mountains. These clay-slates, like most of the sedimentary rocks of the Drontheim district, are strongly metamorphosed, and, in consequence, the Graptolites, as may be supposed, are preserved in a very unsatisfactory state. The species which I could determine (Dicranograptus ramosus, Hall, Diplograptus teretiusculus ? His.) in- dicate for the slates a horizon corresponding to the English “‘ Upper Llandeilo ” or “‘ Lower Caradoc.” Eee 410 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. The Norwegian Graptolites are still but little investigated, as the naturalists of this country have directed their chief attention rather to geological investigations. There are two old memoirs by Boeck and Scharenberg; then some species are enumerated by T. Kjerulf ;? there is a fragmentary working-up of the Norwegian Graptolites in Brogger’s great work;? and also a small memoir by the author.? The further elaboration of the Norwegian Graptolites is in the hands of G. Holm, who has already furnished some excellent memoirs upon them.* Great Britain, which is so richly endowed from a geological point of view, has, in different parts, excellent localities for Graptolites, and the English paleontologists, such as Murchison, Portlock, Phillips, Sedgwick, Salter, Nicol, M‘Coy, Harkness, and especially Nicholson, Hopkinson, and the first authority in this department, C. Lapworth, who have taken it upon them to investigate these localities with unwearied zeal, have accumulated an abundance of material, so that the British Graptolites must be regarded as those which have been best investigated. In the districts established by the British authors in their writings—Wales, the Lake District in the north of England, Girvan, Ireland and Scotland—a whole series of localities © and systems of strata have become famous in the eyes of the Grapto- litist. In Wales this is the case with the neighbourhood of St. Davids (Arenig and Llandeilo rocks), with the Shropshire district (Caradoc and Salopian formations), and the vicinity of Conway (Tarannon). In the Lake-District in the north of England we know the neighbourhoods of Skiddaw and Sedgwick by the Skiddaw Slates of Arenig age, the Coniston Mudstones of Skellgill (Llandovery formation), and the Coniston Flags (Salopian) which occur there. Ireland has to show the known localities of the Bellewston Hills and County Meath (Llandovery formation, 7.e. Valentian), and in the first rank the County Down, with Ballygrot (Caradoc and Llan- dovery). Scotland, finally, presents the Glenkiln or Lower Moffat Shales of the neighbourhood of Moffat and the district of the Lead hills; and, further, the Hartfell Shales or Middle Moffat Beds (Upper Caradoc) and the Birkhill Shales (Llandovery) of the Moffat district, as remarkably rich in Graptolites. In France Graptolites are found near Fougerolles, at Cabriéres near Neffiez, near Poligné, La Ménardaie, Domfront and Mortain, Vretot, Crozon, Angers, Luchon and Caffiers. In the Pyrenean peninsula Graptolites have been detected both in Portugal (in the vicinity of Oporto,—Lower Silurian) and in Spain (in the deposits of Almaden and in the Sierra Morena,—Upper Silurian). The Sardinian Graptolites are Upper Silurian. Continuing our wandering, we find the next localities for Grapto- 1 “Veiviser ved Geolog. excursioner i Christiania Omegn.’’—Christiania, 1865. Laas Die silurischen Etagen 2 und 8 im Kristianiagebiet und aut Eker.’’— Christiania, * “ Vorlaufige Mittheilung iiber eine neue Graptolithenart, etc.,’’ in Nyt Mag. for Naturv. vol. xxvii. (1882), pp. 341-362. 4 In Ofy. Kongl, Vet. Akad. Férh. 1881. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Gtraptolites. 411 lites in Silesia, upon which F. Romer reports; in Carinthia and in Bohemia. The Bohemian Graptolites are known to all geologists. They are derived from the environs of Prague and Beraun, and the names of places which occur most frequently in our literature are: Motol, Gross-Kuchel, Konigshof, Libornischl, Konieprus, Borek, Jarow, etc. The Silurian formations of the neighbouring Saxony and of Thuringia also present a rich storehouse ; in the former country the Graptolites are all of Upper Silurian age; in the latter both Upper and Lower Silurian. The names of the long-known localities are: Frankenberg, Langenstriegis, Reichenbach, Oelsnitz, Hartmanns- griin, the neighbourhood of Saalburg and Schleiz, of Ronneburg and Saalfeld. In Bavaria, Culmbach. Barrande’s investigations on the Bohemian Graptolites,’ as also those of H. B. Geinitz on those of Saxony,” are known to every one. The writings of R. Richter upon Thuringian Graptolites* also merit notice. In North Germany, in the Harz, we once more come upon a spot with Graptolites in their original place of deposition; our fossils have been discovered here upon the south side of the Rausberg, and near Thall at the northern margin of the mountain. For the know- ledge of this we are indebted to Kayer and Lossen. On the other hand, the points are innumerable at which Graptolites have been observed in northern erratics with which the low plain of northern Hurope is strewed. In these Graptolites have been found by Romer, F. Haidenhayn,* and K. Haupt. It is only quite lately that §. A. Tullberg*® has again demonstrated that one of the Graptolitiferous rocks met with in North Germany agrees perfectly both in its petrographic constitution and in the organic remains contained in it with a rock found in place in Skane. In the island of Bornholm (investigated by Forchhammer, Johnstrup, etc.), which geologically, “forms a direct continuation of southern Sweden,” various Graptolite-zones of Skane have also been recognized. It must also be mentioned that these characteristic Silurian fossils have been detected in several places in the widely-extended Silurian deposits of Russia, as in the Baltic provinces of Esthland and Ingermannland, in Poland at Zbrza near Kielce, and in the Ural. Hichwald and Schmidt have investigated Graptolites from the Baltic provinces, and Zeuschner others from Poland.° The above-mentioned localities are thrown quite into the shade, as regards the state of preservation and number of the individuals, by the Worth American ones. In the widespread Transatlantic Silurian formations, especially in Canada, Graptolitic deposits have been discovered which have become inestimable mines of wealth to the 1 «¢ Graptolites de Bohéme,’’ Prague, 1850. 2 « Die Versteinerungen der Grauwackenformation in Sachsen: I. Graptolithen,” Leipzig, 1852. 3 Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1850, 1851, 1866, 1871, 1876. * Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. vol, xxi. (1869), p. 143. ® Ibid. vol. xxxv. (1883), p. 256. 6 Ibid. vol. xxi. (1869), p. 569. 412 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. paleontologist. We mention here only the results which James Hall has given in his great work.’ Among the subdivisions of the Silurian established by the American geologists, the so-called Quebec Group has especially proved to be a system of strata richly charged with well-preserved and rare specimens of Graptolites. Under the name above cited the North American ‘“ Calciferous Sandstone” and the “Chazy Lime- stone” have been grouped together. The most celebrated locality for this group is the frequently mentioned Point Levis, the Grapto- litic treasures of which were discovered in 1854. Besides this locality, Orleans Island and St. Anne’s River are to be mentioned for the same horizon. Older than the Quebec Group is the Potsdam Sandstone (St. Croix and River Valley); younger are the Utica Slates (Utica), and the Hudson’s River formation (Norman’s Kill, in the neighbourhood of Albany, in the State of New York). Natura- lists who, besides James Hall, have written upon American Graptolites, are:—Brongniart (1828), Vanuxem, Mather (1848), Emmons (1846), Billings, Prout (1861), Logan, and Nicholson.’ By the incessant labours of the Geological Surveys, Graptolites have been discovered in a number of the States of the Union. Hitherto our fossils have been detected in New York, Wisconsin, Ohio, Tennessee, Iowa, and Virginia, and also to the north of Belmont, in Nevada. The knowledge of the existence of Graptolites in deposits in South America is of very old date. In the Republic of Bolivia, strata which hold a position about on the boundary between the Upper and Lower Silurian, have furnished several species. In conclusion the abundantly developed Graptolite-fauna of of Australia must not remain unnoticed. The strata of the environs of Victoria are the equivalents of the English Arenig and Llandeilo- Bala. Their fauna has been studied by R. Etheridge, jun.,° and by M‘Coy.* W. S$. D. 1V.—On tHE Fossitn SrreniA IN THE British Museum (Narurat History), Cromwent Roan, 8.W. By Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.; Keeper of the Geological Department. MONG the vast additions which, during the past five years, have been made to the paleontological collections in the British Museum (Natural History), none probably possess greater interest to the naturalist and comparative anatomist than the remains of the very remarkable group of aquatic phytophagous mammals known as the Srrunra, of which the “ Manatee” and the «« Dugong” are the living representatives. Fossil remains of Sirenians have been met with in Tertiary 1 Graptolites of the Quebec Group, Montreal, 1865. 2 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi. (1873), pp. 133—143. 3 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xiv. (1874), pp. 1—9. 4 Prodromus of the Paleontology of Victoria, Dec, i.—iii. (1874—78). Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 413 strata over the greater part of Europe, in England, Hol- — land, Belgium, France, Ger- many, Austria, Italy, and in deposits of analogous age in the Isthmus of Suez at Chalaif, and the quarries of Mokattam near Cairo, in Africa. They have also been obtained <_ from the Phosphate Beds of _ South Carolina, the Eocene of of = Shark River, New Jersey, in oe the United States; and from the Tertiary of Jamaica in the West. Indies. Of the European species, by far the larger number are referable to the genus Hali- therium, originally described by Kaup from the Miocene of g Hesse- Darmstadt, and of which we are now, thanks to Dr. G. R. Lepsius, of the Museum, Darmstadt, acquainted with the entire skeleton (Fig. 1). [See the Memoir on Hali- therium Schinzi, die fossile Sirene des Mainzer Beckens, von Prof. Dr. G. R. Lepsius, Darmstadt, 1881, Abhandl. des Mittelrhein. geolog. Vere- ins, 1 Band, 1 Lieferung, pp. 1—76, with 10 double quarto plates. |? Halitherium resembled the Dugong in its dentition, hav- ing small tusk-like incisors in the upper jaw, though these were not so well developed as in the ‘ Dugong’ (Halicore). The molar teeth were 2 or 4, the anterior teeth were simple and single-rooted, the posterior teeth of the upper jaw with three roots, and those below with two roots, and with ena- melled and tuberculated or “peoy TEMuULOI-D ‘due yy ‘vzuryog wmndayiyoy JO WOp[eyG—"T “OT “saTOUL § yooy J “MOJOTOYS Jo Ty0UIT Sojoay ot} UL paovjd st YIM Fo ysvo wv “4peysuIVd Fv WnosnL 94} UI “qpeqsuI(] Fo oeus00I, OY} WorT ‘(K10qstyT [eINyVN) WhosnyY Ys oyy Jo AoTpeyH [vol poatosord uoqafoys poxoysor oy} toy poonpordoy. 1 Numerous remains of Halitherium, comprising two jaws, one skull, detached teeth, scapule, femora, ribs, and many vertebii, trom Darmstadt, are also preserved in the collection, 414 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. ridged crowns, in all which points they resemble the Manatee more than the Dugong. The anterior molars were deciduous. The pelvic bones are better developed than in existing Sirenians ; there is also a rudimentary styliform femur. They were therefore less specialized than their modern representatives (Flower). Fifteen species of fossil Sirenians have been referred to the genus Halitherium (see list pp. 424-5), Only one species, Halitherium Canhami, Flower, from the Red Crag of Waldringfield, Suffolk, occurs fossil in England. (See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1874, vol. xxx. pp. 1-7, pl. i.) This interesting species is represented by a coloured cast of the skull in the British Museum (Natural History), the original being preserved in the Ipswich Museum. Another genus, very considerably larger than Halitherium, has been described by Professor Giovanni Capellini, from the Pliocene of Riosto, Bologna, under the name of Felsinotherium Forrestii ; it consists of a nearly perfect skull and lower jaw, of which the British Museum (Natural History) also possesses a coloured cast of the type specimen. Felsinotherium closely resembles Halicore in its dentition : a: ligne 5. 6. incisors 9 molars 55 Another species of Felsinotherium, namely, F. Gervaisii, has also been described by Prof. Capellini from the Pliocene of Siena.! The skull and lower jaw of a very singular type of Sirenian, named by Prof. Sir Richard Owen Prorastomus sirenoides, has been obtained from strata of Tertiary age in Jamaica, and is preserved in the British Museum (Natural History). It differs widely from either known existing or extinct genera of Sirenia, but probably approaches nearer to the living Manatus than to Halicore. But it is in its dentition that Prorastomus presents the most remarkable deviation from the rest of the order, for we have present at one and the same time, clearly differentiated— 3—3 ae molars aoe teeth.” Another curious discovery is that of a natural acst, found by Dr. Grant of Cairo, in a block of Hocene (?) rock from the quarries of Mokattam, near Cairo, which proved to be a most perfect copy of the interior of the skull or brain-cavity of another species of Siren, named Hotherium Agyptiacum by Owen, who described it in the Quarterly Journal Geol. Soc. for 1875 (vol. xxxi. p. 100). Portions of the characteristic ribs and some detached teeth have also been obtained from the same locality. This natural cast of the brain of Hotherium is placed with the other fossil Sirenia in the Geological Gallery of the British Museum (Natural History). Early in the present year, the Trustees acquired by purchase, _ 1} See Mem. dell’Istit. di Bologna, ser, iii. tom. i. fasc. 4, pp. 605—6384, tay. ¥—YVil. 2 See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, 1855, vol. xi. pl. xv. figs. 1—6, and 1878, vol. XXX1. pp. 559—667. iowigany 2=2 gata 22", aremoleng ces) Tae Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 415 from Mr. Robert Damon, F.G.S., a nearly entire skeleton of Rhytina gigas’ (=Rhytina Stelleri*) obtained from the Pleistocene Peat- deposits on Behring’s Island. This interesting species of Siren, commonly known as “ Steller’s Sea-cow,” once no doubt abundant along the shores of Kamtschatka, the Kurile Islands, and Alaska peninsula, but now entirely extinct, was first discovered by the eminent German naturalist Steller, who, in company with Vitus Behring, a captain in the Russian Navy and a celebrated navigator of the northern seas, was with his vessel and crew cast away upon Behring’s Island (where Behring died), in 1741. We have fortunately preserved to us Steller’s original description * of the animal, as seen alive by him, during his long enforced residence on the island; and no other competent observer has since had the same opportunity ; for between 1742 and 1782, a period of forty years, this large and harmless mammal appears to have been entirely extirpated, for the sake of its flesh and hide, around both Behring’s Island and Copper Island, to the shores of which in Steller’s time it was limited. In his recently published “ Voyage of the Vega,” Professor A. H. Nordenskiodld * has drawn attention to this now extinct Sirenian, and by the description of his efforts to recover its remains, we learn much as to their present rarity, whilst he graphically portrays the habits of Rhytina and its general appearance, as gathered from the bibliographical notices given by Steller, who alone seems to have left any record of the living animal. The bones of the Bhytina are not be seen anywhere lying upon the surface of the ground in either of the two islands, nor do they occur along the shore at the level of the sea, but they are met with at a distance from the shore in old raised beaches and the Post- Tertiary peat-mosses, deeply buried and thickly overgrown with luxuriant grass. It would be next to impossible to find them by digging, but they are found by boring into the peat with an iron rod or some such tool. The same method is adopted in the peat- deposits in Ireland, when one desires to find a timber-tree fur gate- posts; or when seeking for remains of the gigantic Irish Deer, Cervus hibernicus; the resistance offered to and the sound emitted by the boring-rod, when in contact with a solid, is at once noticed by the operator. The specimen of Rhytina now in the British Museum was obtained from compact peat, and all the vertebrae and other bones having cavities in them were full of peat-growth when they arrived, as was also the skull. Altkough specimens of Rhytina are preserved in several Museums, as at St. Petersburg, at Helsingfors in Finland, and in Stockholm, 1 Zimmermann, 1780. 2 Desmarest, 1819. : 3 «De Bestiis marinis, auctore Georg. Wilhelm. Stellero,”’ etc., Mém. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersbourg (read 1745, published 1751), tom. ii. pp. 294-330. 236 The Voyage of the Vega round Asia and Europe,’ London, 1881, vol. ii. pp. 272-281. 416 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. the acquisition of an almost perfect skeleton for the British Museum (Natural History) appears deserving some special notice.’ A detailed description of the Rhytina is rendered almost superero- gatory by the magnificent work of the late Dr. J. F. Brandt, of St. Petersburg,” who in his Monograph, ‘Symbole Sirenologicz,’ 1846-68, has left us a masterly and detailed account of the anatomy of this interesting genus, accompanied by admirably executed plates. The head in Rhytina, and indeed in all the Sirenia, is rounded, and of moderate size, never disproportionately large, as in the Whales; the neck is short and scarcely offers any marked con- striction between the head and body. But, although short, the neck is capable of a considerable amount of movement, which is not the case in any of the Cetacea, with which group the Sirens were formerly confounded. The muzzle is truncated and obtuse, and the nostrils, which are placed above the fore part of the snout, are valvular and distinct. The external ear is absent, or very small; the eyes very small with an imperfect eyelid, but a well-developed nictitating membrane. The form of the body is depressed, fusiform, tapering behind, and without any dorsal fin ; the tail is flattened and expanded horizontally, as in the Cetacea. The fore limbs appear to be remarkably free, and capable of being moved from the shoulder-joint. Thus the living Manatee has been observed to use its fore limbs, “manus,” to assist in bringing the food towards the mouth in feeding; and, as the mammary glands are axillary, the females all hold the young, in early life, under their arms.? The pelvis in the Sirenia is exceedingly rudimentary, consisting of a pair of small bones suspended at some distance below the vertebral column. (These have not been observed in Rhytina.) There is no trace of any hind limb; but a rudimentary femur has been noticed in another extinct form of Sirenian (Halitheriwm). The head in Rhytina is small in proportion to the long and very thick body. The bones of the skull are massive, but very loosely connected together. 1 The first account of this acquisition was read before the Geological Society of London, 25 March, 1885, entitled :—‘‘On an almost perfect Skeleton of Rhytina gigas (Rhytina Stelleri, ‘Steller’s Sea-cow’), obtained by Mr. Robert Damon, F.G.S., from the Pleistocene Peat-deposits on Behring’s Island. By Henry Wood- ward, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., etc.,”’ and appeared in the Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1885, August No. vol. xli. pp. 457-472. A portion of this article, together with two of its illustrations, is, by permission of the President, reproduced here. 2 One of the contemporary writers on Rhytina with Brandt, after Steller, was Alexander v. Nordmann, Professor of Zoology in the Imperial University of Helsingfors, in Finland (see Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Knochen-Baues der Ahytina Stelleri, von Dr. Alexander v. Nordmann, 4to. Helsingfors, 1861, Acta Soc. Scient. Fennice, tom. vii. with 6 plates). 3 That the appearance of these grotesque animals, no doubt frequently seen by the earlier voyagers, both in the East and West Indies and on the coasts of Atrica, should have originated the legends of Mermaids and Sirens, seems at first sight incredible; but art was then in its infancy in this country, and doubtless the engraver, who portrayed at second hand the features of the ‘‘sea-siren,’”’ had but little assistance in his delineation from the narrator, Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 417 Sir Richard Owen observes that this character of the skull, taken in connection with the density of the bony skeleton, and the absence of cavities! in the bones themselves, reminds one of the skeleton of the Reptilia (Owen, “On the Dugong,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1888, pp. 28-45). The nasal bones are quite rudi- mentary; the maxillary border is d narrow and straight ; the premaxillary bones, forming the rostral portion of the skull, are long and considerably developed in front, forming the strongly curved border of the nasal opening, and projecting with a downward curve (as in Halicore, but less acute), its upper and outer contour being very convex, and the lower and inner palatal sur- face being concave. The zygomatic arch is strongly developed and much curved. ‘The occipital portion of the skull is the broadest ; the supraoccipital portion is very rugose, the condyles are semi- circular and prominent, and the foramen magnum is very wide. The lower jaw is deep in proportion to its length. The coronoid process rises very little above the condyle itself. ‘he symphysis of the mandible extends for about one-third (or rather more) of its length, having a convex contour on its upper surface to corre- spond with the concave contour of the premaxilla. The symphysial surface is very rugose. Two kinds of teeth (molars and incisors) are usually present in most of the Sirenia.2 Dr. James Murie, in his elaborate and exhaustive memoir on the Manatee (Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. viii. 1872, pp. 127-202, pl. xvii—xxvi.), observes : —‘“ Although Rhytina was edentulous in the adult condition, I strongly suspect that, like other Sirenian genera, rudimentary teeth may have existed in its earlier stages of growth. Nordmann seemsalso favourably inclined to this opinion.” From Behring (Length 19 feet 6 inches ) Fic. 2.—Outline-sketch of Skeleton of the Extinct Rhylina gigas, Linn.=R. Stelleri, Desmar. Island, The original preserved in the British Museum (Natural History). 1 Ornithopsis Seeleyi, Hulke, had not then been discovered. 2 In Prorastomus canines are also developed; but Ahytina possessed neither. DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO, IX. 27 418 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. It is interesting to observe, in confirmation of Dr. Murie’s observa- tion, that the skulls of Rhytina in the British Museum demonstrate the former presence of small rudimentary incisor teeth in the premaxillaries, two small alveoli being clearly shown; and the sides of these bones are swollen slightly, just where the pulp-cavities of these small incisors would have been situated. As compensation for the absence of teeth in Rhytina, the palate and sides of the gums of both the upper and the lower jaw were covered by tough corrugated horny plates, of peculiar structure, which assisted in the process of mastication. With regard to the structure of the palatal and mandibular lamin, although their function was undoubtedly that of the tritu- ration of food, Prof. Brandt has shown! that they are destitute of true bony or dental substance, and that they are in fact indurated epithelium. Dr. Murie has also expressed his conviction that the strongly ridged palatal plate in Rhytina is homologous with that found in Manatus and Halicore. ‘It certainly,” he adds, “ does not appear to me to be the representative of teeth, nor of the baleen plates met with in the true Cetacea.” ‘The maxillary alveolar ridges are narrow and quite behind the bruising-plate, the latter occupying the intermaxillary and not the maxillary bones” (Murie, Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. viii. 1872, p. 167). Advantage was taken of the loose and readily separable state of the sutures of the skull, to make a careful gelatine mould of the brain-cavity. The result is shown in the cast exhibited in the Col- lection, which differs somewhat from the figure (similarly obtained) of the brain-cavity of Rhytina taken by Brandt. A comparison of the cast of the brain with that of other Sirenia tends to the conclusion that the brain of Rhytina was intermediate between that of Halicore and Manatus. It is interesting to observe that the brain of Rhytina, considering the huge size of the body of the animal, seems to be only one-sixth of the size of that of the living Manatus or Halicore. This agrees with Prof. Marsh’s obser- vations on the smallness of the brain in Tertiary mammals,’ and is strongly favourable to the very high antiquity of Rhytina. The plaster cast of the brain of Ahytina exhibits traces of the small optic nerves, and of a very large fifth hypophysis showing a rounded prominence.* The bones of the ear of Rhytina Stelleri, namely, the os petrosum of the periotic, with the tympanic annulus, are preserved on both sides of the skull. On removing the peat from the cavity of the mid-ear, Mr. C. Barlow (the able formatore of the Geological Depart- ment) discovered the three small auditory ossicles, namely, the Stapes, Incus and Malleus, still within the cavity. They agree very closely 1 Brandt, Mém. Imp. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, 1846, vi. série, pt. ii. Sci. Nat. vol. v. livr. iv. pp. 1-160, tab. i.-v. * See Marsh in Silliman’s Journal, ‘‘On the small size of Brain in the Tertiary Mammalia,” 3rd series, vol. viii. 1874, p. 76, ibid. op. cit. vol. xii. 1876, p. 61 and vol. xxix. 1885, pp. 190-198. 3 Brandt, “ Symbol Sirenologice,” fasc. iii. 1878, p. 256. Tab. ix. Mém. de P Acad. Imp. d. Se. St. Pétersbourg, sér. vii. tom. xii. Dr. H. Wovodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 419 with the figures given by Brandt,! and are also near to the ossicule auditus of the Manatee. The sternum in Rhytina is a rather irregularly-shaped bone, not very symmetrical bilaterally ; it has been figured by Brandt, and a portion of one is preserved with the skeleton now in the British Museum. It is a much thicker and stronger bone than the sternum of the Manatee, but is similar in form. The scapula is somewhat convex externally, the inner concave face fitting closely against the anterior ribs to which it was attached ; the spinous process of the scapula is strongly developed. The glenoid cavity is deep and circular and well fitted to the rounded head of the humerus; the humerus is short and very stout; the radius and ulna, which are also short, are anchylosed together at both extremi- ties and incapable of any rotatory motion; the olecranon is strongly produced and curved, showing that the fore arm as well as the humerus had considerable free lateral movement for the act of swimming. The carpal bones and digits of the manus of Rhytina are unknown ; the digits were probably five, as in Manatus and Halicore, but the thumb in the latter is rudimentary. Externally viewed, the fore limb in Rhytina was fin-like, with no separate digits or nails visible; but Steller describes their extremities as thickly covered with short bristly hairs. The skeleton is remarkable for the massiveness of the bones, especially the great density of the ribs, which have the hardness of ivory. This extreme density of the ribs is a character also shared by the modern Manatee and Dugong, and ‘by the extinct Halitherium and Felsinotherium. There is a general absence of medullary cavities in the bones. The great specific gravity of the bones no doubt assisted these animals in keeping their bodies sunk beneath the surface of the shallow waters in which they dwelt whilst feeding upon the marine vegetation upon which they wholly subsisted. Although the normal number of cervical vertebree maintained in the Mammalia is usually seven, yet some variations are met with, as, for example, in the “ American Manatee,” which has only sia. Con- versely in Bradypus the number of the cervical vertebra is increased to eight or nine. This is explained by the fact that the thoracic vertebree in Bradypus pass into the cervical region, while the diminution to six in Cholepus and in the American Manatee is similarly explained by the complete development of the rib of the seventh cervical vertebra. Rhytina has been described by Steller as only possessing six cervical vertebree, like the Manatee; but Brandt correctly gives the number as seven, and the specimen now in the Museum confirms this determination. 1 Brandt, ‘‘Symb. Siren.” Fasc. ii. pp. 8-10, Tab. ii. figs. 11-20. Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, sér. vii. 1861. See also Claudius ‘‘ On the Organs of Hearing in Rhytina,’? Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, 1867, vol, xi. No. 5, 2 plates. se Same S ELBE otc oe er 420 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. The atlas- and axis-vertebre in Rhytina are fairly robust, and the atlas is as broad as the second dorsal vertebrae; but the five re- maining cervical vertebra, although quite free, are thin and plate- like, as in the Cetacea proper. But the Sirenia are distinguished from the true Whales by their capability of moving the head from side to side, and up and down, by means of the “ odontoid process ” of the axis vertebra on which the head rotates. In the Cetacea, in which the cervical vertebre are anchylosed together to a greater or less extent, and the neck is consequently immovable, the odontoid process is also wanting. As the Sirenia spend their whole lives browsing upon the Lami- narie and other Algze and aquatic plants, this power to move the short neck pretty freely must be essential to them both in feeding and also in putting up their heads to breathe. The number of vertebrae attributed to the Sirenia, both of living and extinct genera, is very variable according to different authors. Prof. Brandt attributed to Rhytina 7 cervicals, 19 thoracic or dorsal vertebre, and from 384 to 37 lumbar, sacral, and caudal. The cervicals and dorsals are readily determined; but, as none of the vertebre are anchylosed together to form a sacrum, it is a matter of some difficulty to decide which are lumbar and which are sacral vertebrae. Not only does anchylosis never occur in the vertebrae of the Sirenia, but the flat ends of the centra of the vertebrze do not ossify separately so as to form dish-like epiphyses in the young state, as is commonly the case in all the other Mammalia. Brandt indicates the 7th vertebra beyond the last of the dorsal or thoracic series as bearing the rudimentary pelvis; but as the vertebree are never anchylosed to form a sacrum, we can only con- jecture (by noticing a slight prominence upon the posterior border of the extremely wide transverse processes) which of these lumbar- sacral vertebree seem marked as sacral, probably about the Sth, 6th, and 7th. The 13 vertebree next behind the dorsal series may, from their size and their wider and longer transverse processes, be con- sidered lumbar and sacral, and the 21 following vertebrae as caudal ; about 6 or 8 of the most anterior of the latter had small v-shaped chevron bones or hemal arches attached to them in the St. Petersburg specimen. The transverse processes in the caudal series are much smaller, thicker, and shorter, and are directed obliquely backwards. There is a marked variation in the form and size of the neural arch and the centrum of the several vertebree in the spinal column, from before backwards. The anterior dorsal vertebrae have each a small compressed centrum, much broader than deep; the neural arch is triangular, the neural spine erect. From the 5th to the 8th dorsal the centra are longer and cordiform, and the neural canal is smaller and more rounded: the neural spine bends backwards, and the zygapophyses are more prominent. The lumbar vertebree are much dilated laterally, the centra being nearly three times as broad as deep. The neural canal is reduced Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 421 in size, and the neural spine is moderately large; but the transverse processes are very flat. long, broad and straight, being im relation to the centrum as 5d to 1. The centra of the caudal vertebre are rounder, the transverse processes are short and stout and bent backwards; the neural canal is reduced to a very small size, and the neural spine gradually dis- appears. The 11th to 16th thoracic or dorsal vertebra have irregularly developed hypapophyses on the ventral surface of their centra. There are 19 pairs of ribs in Rhytina, probably not more than two pairs of which were articulated to the sternum. The Ist and 2nd pairs are short and much compressed laterally, the third and following are round and very massive, and increase in curvature and length up to the 12th, when they gradually become shorter and less curved, the 19th being quite rudimentary. The ovoid visceral cavity thus inclosed within the bony walls of the ribs is of vast dimensions; and one realizes readily the statement that a full-grown male, covered with its integument and flesh, weighed as much as 34 tons. This large number of rib-bearing vertebre in the Sirenia is only equalled in Hlephas and Rhinoceros, and only exceeded in Dendro- hyrat (which has 22 costal vertebrae), thus affording an interesting point of analogy in Rhytina to the Ungulata. Another point of comparison is observable in the teeth in Manatus and Halitherium, which have a most remarkable resemblance to the molars in Hippopotamus, Mastodon, and the Suide. Dr. Murie strongly insists upon the dermal characters as offering a further close resemblance between Manatus and Elephas. The short (rudimentary) nasal bones and the prolonged premaxillaries. with their tusk-like incisors, afford additional points of resemblance with the Proboscidea. The Sirenia pass their whole life in the water, being denizens of shallow bays, estuaries, lagoons, and large rivers; but they never venture far away from the shore. Their food consists entirely of aquatic plants, upon which they browse beneath the surface, as the terrestrial herbivorous mammals feed upon the green pastures on land. When Steller came to Behring’s Island in 1741, the Sea-cows pastured in the shallows along the shore, and collected in herds like cattle. As they fed, they raised their heads every four or five minutes from below water in order to breathe before again descending to browse on the thick beds of sea-weed which surround the coast." 1 My colleague, Mr. William Carruthers, F.R.S., F.G.8., Keeper of the Botanical Department, informs me that the large sea-weeds called Laminarie grow in water at or just below low-water; they are nutritious and are eaten by animals, They abound in the North Pacific Ocean. Ruprecht, in his account of the Alge of the North Pacific, records eight species of these large weeds growing in the Sea of Ochotsk, on the shores of Kamtschatka, and the north of North America. He adds:—'* When I went to see the Coniferous trees at Monterey, California, last autumn, I was surprised at the magnitude and quantity of the Fuci and Laminarve thrown up on the coast,”’ ; 422 Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. They were observed by him to be gregarious in their habits, slow and inactive in their movements, and very mild and inoffensive in their disposition. ‘Their colour was dark. brown, sometimes varied with spots. The skin was naked, but covered with a very thick, hard, rugged, bark-like epidermis, infested by numerous parasites. One of these, the Cyamus Rhyting, has been described and figured by Prof. Brandt." When full-grown, they are said to have sometimes attained a length of 35 feet and a weight of 3 or 4 tons. Like most of the Herbivora, they spent the chief part of their time in browsing. They were not easily disturbed whilst so occu- pied, even by the presence of man. They entertained great attach- ment for each other; and when one was harpooned, the others made incredible attempts to rescue it. They were so heavy and large that, Steller records, they required 40 men with ropes to drag the body of one to land. If we compare the extinct Rhytina with the existing forms of Sea- Sirens, we shall see that it approaches most nearly to the Dugong (Halicore), which when adult has only one pair of incisors left in the upper jaw, and two (rarely three) molars on each side above and below, making 14 teeth in ali. But adding the milk-dentition, we have in Halicore :— 1—1 3—3 Milk-dentition 3—3 B83 Incisors. Molars. 33 Permanent teeth Tei 2—2 rarely 33 0—0 2—2 The teeth in Halicore are more or less cylindrical ; the incisors, in their form and wear, resemble those of the Hippopotamus. The last molar is compressed laterally, giving the crown a figure-of-eight shape; but there is no distinction into root and crown. The sum- mits of the crown are tuberculated before wearing ; afterwards they are flattened or slightly concave. After the milk incisor-teeth of Halicore are shed, their alveoli, along the anterior half of the mandible, are covered over with a thick horny epithelium, which serves in the adult as a bruising-plate in lieu of the anterior teeth, as is the case in Rhytina. In Manatus senegalensis the only milk-teeth present are the incisors, ne, which speedily disappear; but the molars amount to 1—1 11—11 roots ; the lower mandibular series have an additional posterior ridge or talon, and only two fangs. The teeth drop out in front, and are renewed from behind as in the Proboscidea. This extreme variation in the number of the teeth from 2 (milk- incisors) in Rhytina, to 48 teeth in Manatus, is exactly paralleled in =48 in all. The upper molars have two ridges and three 1“ Qyamus Rhytine.’ Mém. Acad. St. Pétersb. 1871, vol. xvii. No. 7; and Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, pp. 306-313. Dr. H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. 423 the Cetacea, in which we have many edentulous species (Baleenide) ; others with only two teeth present (Ziphioid Whales) ; others again with very numerous teeth (Delphinidz). All the earlier voyagers confounded the Southern Sirenia with the Seals, and the Rhytina with the Morse or Walrus. In 1811, Ilhger separated the three genera—Manatus, Halicore, and Rhytina, under the name Sirenia, and placed them between the Seals and the Cetacea. They are now placed by Prof. Flower and other naturalists between the Ungulata and the Cetacea. The following conclusions in reference to the Geographical Dis- tribution of the order Strenta appear to be worthy of the special attention of geologists and paleontologists. Fic. 3.—Map illustrating the Geographical Distribution of the order Sirenia. AA, Line of extreme Northern distribution of the Srrenza in Tertiary times. BB. to CC. Limits of distribution of existing species of Sirenia. If we take the belt of the tropics, that is, 234° N. and 233° 8. of the equator (or, better still, say 30° N. and 8. of the equator), we shall embrace the geographical area of all the living Sirenians. If we take another belt of 30° North beyond the tropic of Cancer, we shall embrace the whole geographical area in which fossil remains of Sirenians have been met with. Assuming, as I think we may, that the Sirenia at the present day belong exclusively to the tropical regions of the earth, and that Rhytina, in its boreal home, was simply a surviving relic from the past (a sort of geological “outlier,” as of a stratum elsewhere entirely denuded away), we must conclude that the presence of about 12 genera and 27 species of fossil Sirenia, as widely distributed then as the recent forms are at the present day, but with a range from the tropic of Cancer up to 60° of north latitude, affords a most valuable piece of evidence (if such were needed), attesting the former northern 424 De H. Woodward—On the Fossil Sirenia. extension of subtropical conditions of climate which must have prevailed over Europe, Asia, and N. America, in Hocene and Miocene times and in the older Pliocene also. The early appearance of so highly modified a form of mammal, its abundance, wide distribution, and variations, serve to attest the great lapse of time occupied in the accumulation of even our later Tertiary deposits, which we are sometimes apt to pass over as representing but a very brief chapter in the geological history of our earth; and further, it must necessitate our carrying back the Mammalian class not only far back into Secondary, but probably even into Paleeozoic, times. The following is a List, with their distribution, of the existing species of the order Srrenta.! Manatus senegalensis, Desmarest (the African Manatee), inhabiting the west coast of Africa from about 16° N. to 10°S. lat., with the rivers Senegal and Congo, and as far into the interior as Lake Tchad ; and, according to native accounts, to the River Keebaly, 27° E. long. Manatus latirostris, Harlan (the West Indian Manatee), inhabiting the creeks, lagoons, and estuaries of the West Indian Islands and coast of Florida. Manatus americanus (the Brazilian Manatee), inhabiting the coast as far south as about 20° S. lat., and the great rivers Amazon and Orinoco, almost as high as their sources. Hualicore tabernaculi (the Dugong), inhabiting the Red Sea and the East Coast of Africa. Halicore dugong, inhabiting the Indian Sea, Ceylon, Bay of Bengal, Indo-Malayan Archipelago, and Philippine Islands. Halicore australis, the coasts of Eastern and North Australia. In addition to the fossil genera met with in Hurope, we have the Prorastomus sirenoides of Owen (already referred to) occurring in the West Indies; a form of Sirenian having important differences in dentition, by which to separate it from the now living Manati. Three other species occur in the Tertiary beds of South Carolina; and a doubtful form in the deposits of Darling Downs, Queensland, Australia. Lastly, there is the great extinct Rhytina of Behring’s Island. We have, then, at the present day living in America, Africa, India, and N.E. Australia, two genera and six species of Sirenia; and in Hurope, Asia, Africa, and America, 18 genera and 00 species of extinct Sirenians. List oF Fossin SrRENIA, WITH THEIR ForMATIONS AND LOCALITIES :— Chirotherium subapenninum, Bruno, 1839. Pliocene : Piedmont. Chronozoon australe, C. WW. de Vis. Pliocene: Darling Downs, N. S. Wales. (cast of the ca/varium only). Crassitherium robustum, Van Beneden. Pliocene: Belgium. Diplotherium Manigaulti, Cope. Miocene?: S. Carolina. Lotherium esyptiacum, Owen. Eocene ?: Mokattam, Cairo. Felsinotherium Forest, Capellini, 1872. Pliocene: Riosto, Bologna. Gervais, Capellini, 1872. Pliocene: Siena. 1 Dr. J. Murie, F.L.S., who has specially studied this group, has expressed his opinion to the writer that there are probably only two distinct species of Ha/icore and Manatus living at the present day; and that the large number of fossil species described are probably also capable of being reduced at most to two or three genera and species, G. F. Matthew—On the Genus Stenotheca. 425 HTalitherium Serresiz, Gervais. Pliocene: Montpellier ; d’Estrés (Bouches-du- Rhone). — fossile, Cuv. sp. Miocene : St. Maure, Loire; Angers, Rennes, Morbihan. Beaumonti, Christol, sp. Miocene: Beaucaire, Gard. Guettardiz, de Blainv. Miocene?: Etréchy (Seine), etc. sp. dubium, Cuv. Eocene: Blaye, Gironde. bellunense, Zigno, 1875. Miocene: Belluno, Venetia. angustifrons, Zigno, 1875. Miocene: Belluno. curvidens, Zigno, 1875. Miocene: Belluno. ~ veronense, Zigno, 1875. Miocene: Belluno. Schinzi, Kaup, 1855. Miocene: Darmstadt ; Miocene: Malta. Canhamt, Flower. Crag (derivative) : Suffolk. Cuviert, Owen. Miocene: Montpellier. sp., Van Beneden. Miocene (‘‘ Bolderian ”’) : Elsloo, near Maestricht. (Chirotherium) Brocchi, Bruno (Owen, ciz.). Miocene: Herault. sp., Zigno. Miocene: Chalaif, Isthmus of Suez. flemicaulodon effodiens, Cope. Eocene: Shark River, New Jersey, U.S. Manatus Coulombi. Filhol (1878) (named after M. Coulomb, the discoverer). From the Eocene ? Quarries, Mokattam, near Cairo (founded on three teeth of lower jaw like the Manatee). zmornatus, Leidy. Miocene ?: Phosphate beds, South Carolina. Pachyacanthus trachyspondylus, Brandt (in part), Van Beneden, emend., 1875. Miocene: Nussdorf, near Vienna. (Based on vertebree and ribs of a Sirenian.) Prorastomus sirenoides, Owen. ‘Tertiary : Jamaica. Rhytina gigas, Zimmermann (Geograph. Gesellsch. 1780). Pleistocene : Behring’s Island, = Rhytina Stellert, Desmarest, 1819. Rhytiodus Caperandi, Lartet. Pliocene : Basin of the Garonne. Lrachytherium Raulini, Gervais. Miocene: La Réole, Gironde. V.—NoteE oN THE GENUS STENOTHECA. By Grorez F. Marruew, of St. John’s, New Brunswick. S facts relative to the earliest forms of Molluscs are of interest to the naturalist as well as the geologist, I offer this note on the genus Stenotheca, derived from a study of the remains of several species occurring in the Cambrian rocks of Canada. The formation in which they are found is the St.-John Group, a formation occurring in the Southern part of the Province of New Brunswick; and the geological horizons are those of the Solva and Menevian Groups of Wales, equivalent to the Paradowides-Tessent beds, and overlying measures of Etage 1, of the Norwegian geologists. The fossils are, therefore, of great antiquity, having preceded any known Lamel- libranchs; and, except the JIetoptoma Barrandeit of Linnarsson, I know of no Gasteropods of equal antiquity. The genus Stenotheca was proposed in 1872 by Dr. Henry Hicks, to include a minute corrugated shell found in the Menevian Group of Wales. It is described by Dr. Hicks as “a curved shell ”— ‘a small wide form, with lines of growth strongly marked on its surface.” The genus is represented in Division ld of the St.-John Group by several small compressed species, none of which appear to be identical with Sé. cornucopia, the type of the genus. Dr. Hicks places this genus in the Pteropods (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. May, 1875, p. 192). If lam right in referring our shells to his genus, there seem to be features which indicate greater affinities to 426 G. F. Matthew—On the Genus Stenotheca. the Heteropods and Gasteropods; but the order to which these fossils should be referred is still doubtful, and must await further knowledge. The little shells of this genus found at St. John are always inequi- lateral, and usually present a carina at the posterior (?) end, and not unfrequently at both ends. Among recent Molluscs, Carinaria and Atlanta are the forms which appear to come nearest to the species under consideration. In general outline the fossils are nearest the former genus, but in their compressed forms they remind one of the latter; from both, however, they differ in the straight, or nearly straight apex, and in the arrangement of the lines of growth on the shell. They resemble these genera in that the majority of the species have a keel along the back, and it seems probable also that in some of the species the shell consisted of two lateral plates imperfectly connected along the back, for the two sides are occasionally found detached, and one pushed past the other. The apex of two out of the five species in the St.-John Group is known, and does not show any tendency to a coiled form, as in Carinaria, Atlanta, or any other Heteropods, with which these fossils may be compared. Among certain genera of Gasteropods, however, as Dentalium, Parmophorus, and Patella, similar apices may be observed. These Stenotheca appear to have been denizens of the open sea, and have only been found in the fine dark shales of Division 1d, or about the horizon of the Menevian Group of Wales. In the measures of Division le containing a fauna, the forms of which resemble those of the Solva Group, is a species of Molluse, which, although agreeing with the typical Stenothece of Division 1d, shows important points of difference. This species, originally described as Discina Acadica by Prof. C. F. Hartt, exhibits relations with Metoptoma (?) rugosa of the Trenton limestone; it is much larger than the true Stenothece, and is preserved in a different attitude in the shales. The Stenothece are flattened on the vertical plane of the shell; but this species is found compressed horizontally, or parallel to the aperture; nevertheless, in their younger stages of growth these larger Stenothece show a tendency to collapse laterally, in this resembling the small shells of the overlying measures ; in general form, also, as well as in the way in which additional con- centric ridges are inserted at the back of the shell, these conform to their congeners in the horizon above. Except for the absence of an involute apex, these shells are not unlike Carinariopsis carinata, Hall, of the Trenton formation; they are compressed near the apex in a manner similar to that species, and expand rapidly toward the aperture; but the arrangement of the lines of growth or surface-markings is quite different, and comparable with that of Metoptoma (?) rugosa, Hall. Our shells, however, are not Metoptome, since they are not truncated at the side beneath the apex, as are those of the Carboniferous genus Metoptoma. ‘These patelloid Stenothece lived in shallow seas near the coast-line, if one may judge from the species of other genera associated with them. St. Joun, N.B., 15th June, 1885. Notices of Memoirs—H. S. Wiiliams—On a Fossil Limulus. 427 NOTICHS OF MEMOLERS. cas Notice oF A NEW Limutorp CrusTACEAN FROM THE DrvontaN.! By Henry Suater Wiiams, of the Cornell University. MONG the fossils collected last summer for a comparative study of the Devonian faunas, an interesting form was discovered in Erie County, Pennsylvania, worthy of special notice. The specimen was found in a bluish sandstone (which in places is a fine pebbly conglomerate) at Le Boeuf called the «3d oil-sand,” by Mr. I. C. White, in the Report Q4 of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania (p. 239), and regarded by him as the equivalent of the third oil-sand of the Venango oil-district of that State. In the same stratum and above it are typical Chemung fossils. It occurs just at the junction between the sandstone and a stratum of soft, fine argillaceous shale, and, in the process of weathering, the fine shale has been washed away, leaving a sharply-defined cast of the fossil in hard sandstone, though no portion of the original crust is preserved. The associated species are Spirifera Verneuilit, Murch. (sya. disjuncta, Sow.), Rhynchonella contracta, Hall; and in the shales just above the sandstone occur Chonetes scitula, Hall, “ Chonetes”’ muricata, Hall, an Ambocelia umbonata, Hall, a small Productus of the type of Hall’s Productella Boydii, the coarse ribbed Orthis Leonensis, Hall, and a Rhynchonella agreeing with some of the wider forms of R. sappho, Hall. The fauna is the characteristic Upper Chemung fauna of western New York and adjacent area. In this area some of the species occur among the earliest Chemung species ; no characteristic Carboniferous types have been detected. The fauna may be considered, therefore, as a pure Devonian fauna. The general form and structure of the specimen place it among the Merostomata with anchylosed thoracico-abdominal segments, but as only the under side is exhibited, its identification with Prestwichia must be regarded as provisional, since we are ignorant of the struc- ture of the under surface of authentic members of that genus. I propose as a name for it, Prestwichia Hriensis, sp. nov. The following characters exhibited by the specimen are regarded as generic and as locating it in the genus Prestwichia of Woodward. (1), the elliptical head-shield ; (2), the genal spines which proceed backward more directly than in any described species of the genus ; (3), the thoracico-abdominal segments anchylosed to form a buckler, to which is attached (4) a long telson. The general outline of the whole animal resembles that of the modern Limulus. The evidence of a solid thoracico-abdominal buckler is found in the continuous surface across the body, from which proceed four (visible) short marginal spines each side the telson, and upon which are seen at least eight narrow ridges running longitudinally to near the margin. The remaining characters may be, in part, of generic value, but 1 Silliman’s American Journ. of Sci. vol. xxx. July, 1885, p. 46. 428 Notices of Memoirs—H. S. Williams—On a Fossil Limulus. they constitute the distinctive characters of the species, as far as these can be made out from the specimen. The under side of the body presents three well-defined tracts, viz. the cephalic shield, which is evenly rounded in front, and is laterally prolonged backward into two genal spines, which are nearly parallel with the axis of the body, and reach nearly to a point opposite the posterior margin of the buckler. The cephalic shield along the median line is about a third the length of the body ; the space between the posterior margin of the cephalic shield and the anterior margin of the buckler, containing the region of the mouth and the gnathopods, and the thoracico-abdominal buckler, marked over the surface by longitudinal ridges, and by marginal spines, and terminating in a long stout telson. Traces of the gnathopods are seen, as also traces of the foliaceous appendages of the posterior feet, but in too imperfect condition for exact delineation. Just anterior to the position of the mouth is seen a shield-like elevation upon the edge of the cephalic shield, which kas the appearance of an hypostoma. The condition of the specimen is not such as to give ahsolute certainty to this interpretation, though the symmetry of its form is strongly in favour of it. It is possible that it is merely outlines upon the surface, produced by crushing during fossilization. There are faint indications of joints on each of the anterior set of gnathopods. Along the centre of the thoracic region, there is a flattened depression, traversing longitudinally from the anterior edge of the plate, backward to the middle of the telson. The terminal portion of the telson is evenly rounded. Hach side of the median line of the buckler there are visible four clearly- defined marginal spines; there were probably more of them—six, I have supposed, but concealed in the specimen by the filling between the buckler and genal spines. There are also four rounded, longitudinal ridges on the buckler each side of the flattened depression; these begin abruptly near the anterior margin of the buckler, and run almost directly backwards, tapering to a slender point near the margin of the buckler. At the anterior margin of the buckler is a narrow plate, divided into a median and two lateral parts, which appears to be separated from the buckler itself by a distinct furrow. Laterally this plate appears to curve inwards and lies below (within) the surface of the buckler, and the median portion extends forward to a blunt point. I have interpreted this as probably representing the consolidated Jamellar appendages of the “first and second” thoracic segments of Hurypterus as defined by Hall in Paleontology of New York (vol. lll. p. 398).1 The telson is nearly two-thirds the length of the body, is flattened at the base, but nearly cylindrical and tapering to a blunt point at the extremity. 1 Tf these indications are the remains of lamellar appendages, they are like those of Limulus, and may be compared with the generative plate and branchigerous thoracic appendages of the XrrHosura.—H. W. Reviews—Dr. Davidson's Brachiopoda. 429 Above are given all the characters of which the specimen presents any reasonable suggestion. I have ventured to put an interpreta- tion upon some of the characters for which the evidence is slight, in the hope that those possessing specimens of any kindred forms may throw light upon this one by confirming the interpretation here given or suggesting a better one. Dimensions :— TWowall Wess 565600005 coo0000C 0005006 10.0000 .. 10 centimétres. Gireafesiawr dtl rei rosie. jeyniteisisyshs aide ss)e «iseieeyas 57 Length of telson (about)....... Sococ00000RC =) 4:0 Length of buckler (about) .............0 00. 5 ZA Greatest thickness of telson............sse00 0°7 Horizon.—Chemung Group, Upper Devonian; the “third oil sand” of I. C. White, 2nd Pa. Survey. Locality.— Le Boeuf, Erie County, Pennsylvania. The original specimen is among the collections of the U.S. Geolo- gical Survey, and will be deposited ultimately in the National Museum. ; Comments.—This specimen throws back the known range of Prest- wichia, or at least the type to which this genus belongs, to an earlier stage than heretofore reported. The earliest previously known Prestwichia occurs in the Carboniferous. If my interpretation of its characters be correct, Prestwichia bears closer relations to Limulus than is suggested by other known speci- mens, and also it possesses features linking it with Trilobites and EKurypterids. [The author illustrates his paper by a photo-engraving from a drawing, of P. Eriensis, of the natural size, and two diagrammatic figures of the supposed upper and under surface. The specimen, although of great interest, is too obscure to permit us to draw any positive conclusions from it, save the fact of the important discovery of a Limuloid Crustacean in rocks of Devonian age in Pennsylvania. A still earlier Limuloid form has, however, been met with in the Upper Silurian of Lesmahagow, Lanarkshire, and described by the writer under the name of Neolimulus faicatus, H. W., see GEOL. Mac. 1868, Vol. V. pp. 1-8, Plate I. Fig. 1.—H. W.] ReV Lew s. Tae PanmontocrRapHicaL Society. A MonocraPH or BrittsH Fossitn Bracutopopa.' By Txsos. Davipson, LL.D., F.R.S. ITH the present appendix (vol. v. part iii.) a monumental work has been brought to a close.” The labours of Thomas Davidson, LL.D., F.R.S., need no introduction to Paleontologists of any part of the world. The quiet distribution of the concluding fasciculi of the “ British fossil Brachiopoda” should not be allowed to pass without notice. 1 Science, vol. v. p. 409, 1885. ? There is, we understand, a Bibliography of the Brachiopoda ready for issue in the volume tor 1885, by Dr. Davidson, which equals the work in its proportions and exhaustiveness. 430 Reviews—Dr. Davidson’s Brachiopoda. Thirty years have passed since the publication of the general introduction to the first volume of this Monograph. Coincidently with, and largely induced by, its progress, a vast amount of precise knowledge has been acquired and made public, in regard to all that relates to the history and distribution of the Brachiopoda. Indeed, our knowledge of them, in any sufficient sense, may be almost said to date from about the time when the learned author began his labours ;. and the earliest known. reference to them in any printed work dates only from 1606. The present appendix closes a series of researches, begun just half a century ago, on the Brachiopoda of the British islands. During that period, Dr. Davidson has not only pre- pared the text of his monograph, and numerous collateral and frequently very important papers on the general subject, but has drawn with his own hand more than two hundred admirable and artistic plates by which that text has been illustrated and adorned. Seldom has fortune equipped more completely a student for his life- work than in the present case, when more than ordinary artistic talent, a liberal education, independent means, were joined to unsur- passed devotion in the pursuit of knowledge, and impartiality in the recognition of the labours of others in the same field. The steady stream of information induced by the publication of successive parts of the monograph has necessitated supplement after supplement. ‘The present and concluding part not only contains such material, but a catalogue of, and index to, the British genera and species, bibliographical and stratigraphical, and, more important than either for the general biologist, a summary of progress in our knowledge of the class up to the present time. This includes notices, under separate heads, of the test, the embryology, the affinities, the adult anatomy, habitat, and ranges in depth, of recent species, characters of the fossil genera, and classification discussed by families. Full space is allotted to the advocates of contending theories: Kowalevski’s valuable paper on the embryology is given in full abstract, with excellent figures; various suggested pedigrees are quoted ; the brilliant rise, and slow but continuous decadence, of the “worm theory” is related, with generous recognition of the sagacity of Morse in the detection of affinities.to which the then imperfect knowledge of the molluscan pedigree, and his remarkable researches into the early stages of Terebratulina and Lingula, lent a plausible, but, as it has since proved, a one-sided interpretation. The general conclusion is reached, that, however great the probability of continuous descent, with modification, as an explanation of the various forms of Brachiopods now or previously existing, the paleontological record presents many facts inexplicable by, or even opposed to, this theory ; while of natural selection there seems to be absolutely no visible trace. The number of British forms which, at the commencement of the work, comprised 15 genera, and 454 partly invalid species, has now expanded to 74 genera, and 976 species, and varieties, to which even now accessions continue to be made. In taking leave of his task, so worthily performed and to be con- tinued by younger hands, the author, in spite of certain infirmities, Correspondence—Prof. T. G. Bonney. - 431 does not relinquish his studies, but is now engaged on a Mono- graph of the recent species,’ which it is to be hoped he may be spared to complete to his own satisfaction and the undoubted benefit of Science. W. H. Datt. CORRESPONDENCE. CORNISH SERPENTINE. Srr,—I cannot reply fully to Mr. J. H. Collins’s paper on the Cornish serpentine, published at page 298 of this Macaztne, in which he repeats his mistakes as to the serpentine of Porthalla, until I have obtained permission from the Council of the Geological Society to have slices prepared for microsopic examination from the specimens which he presented in illustration of his paper published in vol. xl. of the Quarterly Journal. After this I think I shall be able to demonstrate that he has wrongly interpreted the very specimens on which his hypotheses are founded. In the mean time I will merely remark: (1) That the formation of the mineral called serpentine in the crevices of a rock no more proves that the rock serpentine is not of igneous origin than the occurrence of the mineral quartz in an adjacent vein proves that a quartz-felsite is not of igneous origin. (2) That (contrary to Mr. Collins’s assertion) there is no essential distinction between the serpentine of Porthalla Cove and that from other parts of the Lizard district. There is as much difference as, but no more than may be commonly found between two dykes or two lava-flows in the same volcano. (3) That the serpen- tine of Porthalla in its relations to the hornblende-schist exhibits the usual indications of the intrusion of one rock to a plastic condition into another. The second and third of these statements will no doubt be put aside by Mr. Collins, like those of Mr. Somervail, as merely “a repetition of the dogmatic assertion.”” But in excuse for this dogmatism, I] may remark that the question at issue between Mr. Collins on the one side and Mr. Somervail, myself, and those who have worked with me at the Lizard on the other, is really one of the ob- servation of facts. He in effect says, ‘‘ I cannot see any evidence of the intrusion of the serpentine into the hornblende schist.” We reply, “To our eyes the junctions (with the usual indications) are often so plain that we doubt whether you really know for what to look.” I may further plead in excuse of a little dogmatism on my own part that if there be one rock which I ought to know better than another it is serpentine (7.¢. the rock of the Lizard type), of which I believe I have studied more examples and possess a larger collection than any other person in England ; and if there be one class of phenomena with which I should be familiar, it is the junctions of rocks, whether brought about by igneous intrusion or by “the subsequent move- ments of the strata,” subjects to which for the last ten years I have paid special attention. T. G. Bonney. 1 This Monograph is, we understand, shortly to be published by the Linnean Society of London in its Transactions, —Eprr. 432 Ors PASELNas HENRY JOHNSON, F.G.S., BORN 1823; Diep 1885. Mr. Henry Johnson, of Trindle Road, Dudley, civil and mining engineer, well known in the Midland Counties, and beyond, for his skill, energy, and successful appliance of knowledge and experience, has succumbed to a long infliction of sciatic rheumatism and ultimate prostration. Born in 1828, he was in his 63rd year when he died early in July last. Articled to a surveyor, he soon became success- ful in land and mining surveying, in railway work, and collieries. The great Sandwell Colliery, in particular, was re-established and extended by his labour and influence. The Watling-Street Colliery near Wilnecote, and the Peel Colliery, near Tamworth, with its extensive clay works, were won and established by him. He was also actively and successfully engaged with the South Staffordshire Mines’ Drainage Scheme, and in the South Staffordshire and East Worcestershire Mining Institute. He contributed some good and useful papers to Societies with which he was connected,—as, for instance, that “On the Working of Thick Coal,” to the Midland Institute, Birmingham, and ‘On the Geological Features of the South Staffordshire Coalfield,” to the Iron and Steel Institute at Dudley, treating of the practical development of the Coal-field and improved working of the Mines. His services on Commissions, Trials, ete., connected with mining affairs, were highly valued and much soughtafter. Hewas ever ready tohelp his professional brethren, especially the younger engineers, with his counsel and practical aid. His talents as a draughtsman and in penmanship were appreciated from an early date. In a geological point of view Mr. Johnson had a ready and firm grasp on the bearings of geology on mining; and he particularly utilized his many opportunities, and gratified his natural taste, by collecting and preserving almost innumerable good specimens of fossils and minerals. The former he cherished with personal care and_ skilful manipulation, exhibiting their parts and characters clearly and with judgment, so that the paleeontologist, visiting his wonderfully rich collection, not only saw specimens better than he had seen before, but always found a judicious selec- tion of doubtful or unknown forms, of both animal and vegetable remains, which the energetic collector had saved and separated for examination by the specialist. As Mr. Johnson cheerfully exhibited whatever his visitors wished to see, so he gratefully accepted such information about his treasures as they were able to give. Not only his minerals and fossils, but his mining records and curiosities, are valuable memorials of his good taste, common sense, and acumen. He has left three sons and two daughters; and his long and fatal malady deprived him of the power of making such a provision for them as once he had a right to hope for.—T.R.J. Proressor H. Mityz-Epwarps.—lIt is with profound regret we have to record the death of one of the most eminent Naturalists of the present century, one too, who has witnessed its eventful history from its commencement. Born on 28rd October, 1800, he passed away in his 85th year, on the 29th July, 1885, Although resident in Paris, he was by origin an Englishman. We hope to give a suitable notice of Prof. Milne-Edwards in our next Number. Geol. Ma$.1885 Decade lll Vol I] PLXI. E..C. Woodward delet lith West, Newman &Co,imp. Recent & Fossil Pleurotomarie. THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEW SERIESS “DECADES: VOL: No. X—OCTOBER, 1885. Quast dhe HHIN( AI YAS eRI einen —>—__ J.—On Recent anp Fosstn PrevRroromaRriZ, By Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S. (PLATE XI.) HE progress of modern discovery, both in Paleontology and Zoology, has been steadily tending to bridge over the gap which seemed at one time to separate the past from the present life-history of our globe, and has brought each more closely into relationship with the other than seemed possible fifty years ago. Palzontologists are constantly discovering fossil forms to connect the past with the present, and zoologists, with equal zeal, are seek- ing new living ones to connect the present with the past. The discovery of Trigoniz in the seas, and the existence of Ceratodus in the rivers of Australia, offer us living analogues for a long series of ancestral forms, carrying us back through all the Secondary strata to the Trias, and in the case of Ceratodus, to the Coal-period ; whilst the Lingula and the Pearly Nautilus, living to-day, have found remote ancestors in Silurian and Cambrian times. The almost simultaneous discovery of remains of Scorpions in the Silurian rocks of America, Scotland, and Sweden, closely re- sembling those now living, attests the presence of dry-land and Insect-life in pre-Carboniferous times, and furnishes another link in the “ Enchainements du Monde Animal,” by which the long-buried past lives again by the light of the life of the present day. A similar interest, zoologically and palzontologically, attaches to the ancient genus Pleurotomaria, a Gasteropod which, previous to 1855, was only known in a fossil state. A large proportion of the older trochiform fossil shells have their whorls, whether round or angular, marked by a peculiar band, usually terminating in a deep slit at the aperture. Most of these were solid nacreous shells, and have been referred to the genus Pleurotomaria. Others are slender and tapering, and resemble a Cerithium with a notched aperture: they are named Murchisonia, and are probably related to Plewrotomaria proper. In Woodward’s “ Manual of the Mollusca” the genus Pleurotomaria is said to range from the Silurian to the Chalk formation, and the number of species then recorded (in 1854) was 400. Since that date the number of fossil forms described has been greatly increased. The paleontological gap which seemed to separate the fossil Pleuro- DECADE III.—YOL. II.—NO, X. 28 434 Dr. H. Woodward—Recent and Fossil Pleurotomarie. tomarie from the fauna of to-day has been also reduced by the discovery of seven Hocene, two Miocene, and two Pleistocene species ; whilst the dredge of the zoologist and the nets of the fishermen have demonstrated with equal success that Plewrotomaria is living in the seas of the present time. The following is a list of the Tertiary species of Pleurotomaria :— (EocENE) Pleurotomaria Bianconti, d’ Archiac, India. —_———. concava, Deshayes, Paris Basin. ———. Duboisii, Mayer, the Crimea. Genyi, Mayer, Nice. — Kadin-Kewiensis, d’ Archiac, Asia Minor. ——-—— Lamarckui, Mayer, Switzerland. Niceensis, Bayan, Nice. ———_—_— (MiocenE) —-—— Sismondi, Goldfuss, Bunde. —— tertiaria, M‘Coy, Australia. (PLEISTOCENE) Fischeri, Mayer MS., Guadaloupe ? ——_— Duchassaingii, Schramm, Guadaloupe ? The rarity of living Plewrotomarie, whether in public Museums or in private Collections, is an incontestable fact. Neither the British Museum (Natural History), nor the Museum of the Jardin des Plantes, Paris, possesses an example. Mr. W. H. Dall, in his Preliminary Report on the Mollusca dredged in the Gulf of Mexico, etc., 1877-78, by the U.S. Coast Survey Steamer ‘‘ Blake,” ' in 1881, records the existence of eight individuals only, that were actually known to him to exist in collections ; whilst M. H. Crosse (Journal de Conchyliologie, 1882, p. 20), a year later, mentions ten specimens of living species obtained up to that date :— viz.:—l Pleurotomaria Rumphii (in the collection of the Jardin Zoologique, Rotterdam) ; 5 of P. Adansoniana (viz. 1 in the collection of M. H. Crosse (the type), 1 in the Museum of M. Lher- minier, 3 in the Museum of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy, Cambridge, Mass.) ; 5 of P. Quoyana (viz. 1 in the collection of Miss De Burgh (the type), 2 in the Museum Zool. and Comp. Anat., Cambridge, Mass.) ; 1 P. Beyrichii (collection of Dr. Hilgendorf). We may now add a second specimen of P. Beyrichii, in the collection of Mr. R. Damon, F.G.S., of Weymouth (see Plate XI. Fig. 1). This specimen, obtained by Dr. C. Gottsche, of Berlin, during his residence in Japan, from a fisherman of Hnoshima, was actually caught with the mollusc in it, but the intelligent native very carefully removed it, and thus a most valuable prize was lost to science. Dr. Gottsche obtained the shell from the fisherman two hours after it had been taken alive, and from the good state of its preservation, and its brilliant coloration, there is every reason to believe that it was an actual living example when found. It contrasts most favourably both in coloration and condition with Dr. Hilgendorf’s specimen of P. Beyrichii (as figured by von Martens in the Conchological Mittheilungen, Cassel, vol. i. pl. vii. 1880), which does not display the slit, and is in an extremely poor state of 1 Bulletins of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, vol. ix. Nos. 1-5, pp. 78-79, June—Dec. 1881. Dr. H. Woodward—Recent and Fossil Pleurotomarie. 4385 conservation. Indeed it seems very probable that it may have been, like the species first discovered (P. Quoyana), inhabited by a hermit- crab, at the time it was obtained. In Mr. Damon’s specimen the coloration is much more brilliant than is represented in von Martens’ figure of Dr. Hilgendorf’s speci- men, and its altogether fresh and uninjured appearance suggests it to be the shell of a strong and healthy animal just caught alive. A small portion of the outer lip, on the lower side of the slit, has been broken away in removing the animal; otherwise the shell is quite perfect. The measurements recorded show Dr. Hilgendorf’s speci- men to be 8 mm. larger in diameter; its height is also 12 mm. greater than that of Mr. Damon’s specimen. [PLEUROTOMARIA Beyricatt, Hilgendorf. (Pl. XI. Fig. 1, a, 6.) Pleurotomaria Beyrichii, Hilgendorf, 1877, Sitzungsber. Gesells. naturforsch. Freund. Berlin, p. 72. Schepman, 1879, Tydschr. d. Ned. Dierk. Vereen, vol. iv. p- 166. Crosse, 1880, Journ. Conchyl. vol. xxvii. p. 204. Martens, 1880, Conch. Mittheil. vol. i. heft 3, p.. 38, taf. vu. Dall, 1881, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll. vol. ix. p. 78. H. Crosse, 1882, Journ. Conchyl. vol. xxx. p. 16. Animal and operculum of P. Beyrichii unknown. Shell trochiform, solid, whorls nine, surface ornamented with numerous broadly spiral ridges, intersected by somewhat strongly- marked lines of growth, which follow the same wave-like, or~-shaped, curve, as the mouth of the shell. Aperture subquadrate, with a deep slit (about one inch) in its outer margin. The part of the slit which has been progressively filled up forms a distinct band round the whorls. There are 9 spiral ridges above the slit, and 6 below, in the body-whorl; but these lower ridges are overlapped in the upper whorls as far as the line once occupied by the slit, which forms a band around the whorls of the shell just above the suture. The lower margin of the whorls is bent at a rather sharp angle, the some- what flattened base of the shell having 19 spiral ridges on it. The lip near the columellar margin is much thickened and flexuous, the interior of the shell and the umbilicus being nacreous. Colour pale- yellow, streaked with bright orange red. Largest diameter of base of shell 75 millimetres ; smallest diameter of base 65 mm.; total height 70 mm.; diameter of aperture 35 mm. ; height of aperture 25 mm.; length of slit 22 mm. Habitat :—Found living off the coast of Japan, at Hnoshima, depth unknown. 1 Dr. C. Gottsche writes (Berlin, 22 July, 1885), ‘“‘ In Dr. Hilgendorf’s specimen, which is a little rolled, and covered with Serpule and Bryozoa, the aperture is entirely broken away, so that the slit can only be reconstructed from the band.”? He adds that two more specimens of P. Beyrichii were brought back by Dr. Doederlein, of Strassburg in 1882, but they do not exhibit the slit itself. This statement brings the total number of living specimens of Pleurotomaria of all species known, up to 13 imdividuals. 436 Dr. H. Woodward—Recent and Fossil Pleurotomaric. Mr. W. H. Dall gives the following general description of Pleurotomaria : “Shell trochoid in form, internally pearly, the last whorl per- forated or fissured for the escape of eggs, or fecal matters, in the direction of the coil of the whorl. “ Operculum horny, subspiral or multispiral. Branchize two, nearly symmetrical, one on each side of the slit in the mantle corresponding to the fissure or perforations of the shell. “Animal with papillose edge to the mantle and lateral fringes; without elongated cirri as in the Trochids; with no frontal veil, or fissuring of the foot. Muzzle simple, without a proboscis, eyes on pedicels exterior to the bases of the simple tentacles. Jaws small, weak.” Then follows a description of the odontophore. Mr. Dall adds: “A description of the soft parts of Pl. Quoyana and Pl. Adansoniana, with figures of the animal taken from life, is in preparation. It is to be regretted that the account will be rendered rather imperfect on account of the poor state in which the soft parts have come to hand. The more delicate portions were entirely destroyed. Those parts of importance in classification, being of a tougher nature, for the most part can be tolerably well made out. Sufficient is already known to show that the group possesses characters of family value, and stands nearest the Trochide, with features recalling Haliotide; and that it has nothing whatever in common with the Plewrotomide” (op. cit. p. 79). Remarks on the other living Pleurotomarie :— Pl. Quoyana, Fischer and Bernhardi, 1856, was the first species of living Pleurotomarie discovered. The type specimen (now in Miss De Burgh’s cabinet) was figured in the Journal de Conchyliologie, 1856, vol. v. p. 165, pl. v. It is the smallest of living Pleurotomarie, being only 35 millimetres in diameter, and 45 mm. in height. The first specimen was obtained in a lobster-pot or trap sunk in deep water off the island of Marie-Galante, and between that little island and Dominique (H. Crosse, op. cit, 1882, p. 15). It was occupied by a living hermit-crab. Two other specimens were dredged alive off Barbadoes by the ‘Blake Hxpedition” under A. Agassiz, in 73 and 84 fathoms water (Mus. Comp. Anat. and Zool. Camb. Mass.). Pl. Adansoniana, Crosse and Fischer (1861), is twice the size of Pl. Quoyana, and extremely like it in its neat and regular ornamenta- tion; but the position of the slit-band, which is supramedian on the former, is median on the whorls of the latter species; whereas in Pl. Beyrichii it is inframedian in position. In both the West Indian species the coils of the shell are rather angular, and the slit-band is more prominent, and distinct. (In Pl. Beyrichii the slit-band nearly coincides with the suture in all but the body-whorl, in which its position is seen to be much below the centre of the whorl. The whorls are more rounded than in the West Indian species, and the outline is therefore more graceful and elegant). The specimens have been obtained as follows :—Islet of Fajou, Dr. H. Woodward—Recent and Fossil Pleurotomarie. 437 Guadaloupe, in the great bay of Pointe-A-Pitre, in 150 fathoms ; Barbadoes, 69 fathoms (dead) ; 94 and 200 fathoms (living) (see Journal de Conchyliologie, 1861, tome ix. p. 163, pl. v.; and 1882, WOlls Soxxe jos Pa lesb) )e Pl. Rumphii is the largest of living Pleurotomarie, being 190 millimétres in diameter, and 170 in height. M. Crosse considers it to approach most nearly to Pl. Adansoniana, but the height of Pl. Rumphii is double that of Pl. Adansoniana or of Pl. Beyrichii, and nearly four times that of Pl. Quoyana. It is, says M. Crosse, a veritable giant of the genus (op. cit. 1882, vol. xxx. p. 10). This interesting specimen is figured, from a photograph, by A. J. Wendel, and described by M. Schepman, in the Tijdschr. der Ned. Dierk. Vereen. Leiden, 1882, Deel VI. p. 23, pl. ii. figs. 1-3. Its habitat is said to be the Moluccas. M. Schepman discovered it among a number of shells from Molucca, in the Museum of the Zoological Gardens, Rotterdam, where the specimen is still preserved. From the annexed table of species of Pleurotomariide, it will be seen that the 400 extinct species, known to Dr. 8. P. Woodward in 1854, have now grown to nearly three times that number; whilst the gap which formerly existed between the Cretaceous and the recent forms is now bridged over by eleven species from the Tertiary and Quaternary deposits of various countries. Nevertheless one is re- luctantly compelled to admit that, although not extinct, Pleuroto- maria is a genus of the past, and that, numerically speaking, its sun has set, both as regards individuals and distinct species, when compared with the grand extension the genus enjoyed in Jurassic times, indeed from the Chalk formation to the Silurian epoch. [See Table, on p. 438. For the enumeration of the fossil species summa- rized in this table, I am indebted to my friend and colleague in the Geological Department, Mr. R. Etheridge, F.R.S. ] In quoting these figures as a census of species of Plewrotomarie, it must always be borne in mind, that, as regards at least a large number of the Paleozoic species, although they have been referred to Pleurotomarie, they may possibly belong to quite a distinct genus, as we are entirely unacquainted with the animal itself. We give on Pl. XI. Fig. 2, a representation of a very well-known and beautiful form of Pleurotomaria (Pl. reticulata, Sby.) common to the Coral Rag of Weymouth and the Kimmeridge Clay of Wotton Bassett. This species is interesting as illustrating Dr. S. P. Wood- ward’s observation on the genus (‘Manual of the Mollusca,” 1st edition, p. 147), that “specimens from Clay-strata retain their nacreous inner layers; those from the Chalk and Limestone have lost them, or they are replaced by crystalline spar.” Tt will be observed that Pl. reticulata attains a size almost, if not fully as large as Pl. Beyrichii, but the slit-band in this fossil species is supramedian, and not inframedian as in Pl. Beyrichit. The whorls in Pl. reticulata are rather more angular than in the Japanese species figured with it (Fig. 1); but the style of ornamentation has varied but little in this genus since Jurassic times. In reference to the genus Pleurotomaria, Mr. W. H. Dall has the 4388 Dr. H. Woodward—Recent and Fossil Pleurotomarie. Taste or DisrrisuTion or THE PLEUROTOMARIIDA. No. of species. Recent ... ... West Indies ... 2 Moluccas... .. 1 Jiapanky gavciues. tel — 4 Living or Recent. PLEISTOCENE ... West Indies .., 2 —— 2 Pleistocene or Quaternary. IPETO CENT s fo. Mecal) geel Mevcumeeel” Uses 0 — 0 PLIocENE. Miocene... ... Germany ... 1 Australia... 1 —- 2 MiocENE. EOCENE «.. «.. France <<. 2. 3 Switzerland ... 1 IRD, sag oon. Asia Minor ... 1 India 1 —— 7 Eocene. Cretaceous ... Switzerland ... 136 France 5 Bi India 2 sAamerica sap eae ue 2: England ... ... 31 208 CRETACEOUS. JuRASSIc... ... Germany .. France Russia England ... 367 JURASSIC. PERMIAN... ... Germany... . TRUSS, — Goo ane England ... e bo vom co — oO moo CO ON —— 12 PERMIAN. CaARBONIFEROUS America... .. 609 Belgium ... ... 130 TRUS, G95 don CLD) England... ... 53 —— 258 CaRBONIFEROUS. DEVONIAN ... America ... ... dl Rhenish Prussia 72 IRUSSIE c55 ong = Brance!) 22, 2... 0 England... .. 9 — 123 DEvonrzIAN. SinurRian... ... America... .. 113 Gotland ... ... 41 Russia... ww. 9 Bohemia... ... 38 Australia, etc. ... 2 Einio laniderey eset eee —— 177 SInurian. Summary— — Living species ... 4 1160. ANGI 250 no Secondary... ... 575 Paleozoic... ... 570 British fossil species of Pleurotomarie ... 226. Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. 439 following remark (Bulletin of Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass., 1881, vol. ix. p. 78): “It seems to have been overlooked until now, that we are indebted to Sowerby for its characterization, and that he is entitled to be cited as authority for the genus.” But on referring to James de Carle Sowerby’s descrip- tion of the genus Pleurotomaria,' Min. Conch. vol. vii. p. 69, pl. 640 (published November, 1844), he cites Defrance as his authority. It is true that in Defrance’s “Tableau des Corps Organisés Fossiles” (Svo. Paris, 1824), he merely gives the name (p. 114); but in the “Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles” (vol. xli. 1826, p. 881), De Blainville adopts Defrance’s name, and credits him with most of the new species described. It is also perfectly true that Sowerby defined the genus, but to assume that he founded it would be unjust. to Defrance, especially since both De Blainville and Sowerby have given Defrance credit for the genus. If such a rule, as is thus pro- posed by Mr. W. H. Dall, were generally adopted by naturalists, endless confusion would arise and great injustice would be done to all the older naturalists whose work laid the foundation for the researches of the generation of younger men who have followed after. ’ EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Fie. la. Pleurotomaria Beyrichii, Hilgendorf. Recent. Enoshima, Japan. (Nat.size.) », 10, Portion of the slit-band (enlarged). », 2 Pleurotomaria reticulata, Sby. (nat. size). Kimmeridge Clay, Wotton-Basset. The nacreous inner layer of the shell is well preserved. Fig. 1 is from the cabinet of Mr. R. Damon, F.G.S., of Weymouth. Fig. 2 is preserved in the British Museum (Natural History). Note.—Mr. Robert Damon has kindly given me permission to retain his specimen of Pleurotomaria Beyrichii on exhibition for two months in the table-case with the fossil Plewrotomari@ in Gallery B, Department of Geology.—H.W. IJ.—Ow BastitE-Serpentine and TROKTOLITE IN ABERDEENSHIRE, with A Nore on THE Rock or THE Buacxk Doe. By Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.S8c., LL.D., F.R.S., Pres.G.S. 22 N a paper entitled ‘On Minerals new to Britain,”’? published in the Mineralogical Magazine, vol. v. p. 1, Professor Heddle mentions the occurrence of a bastite-serpentine at two localities in Aberdeenshire ; one in the parish of Belhelvie, the other on the shore close to a curious rock named the Black Dog. A visit to the localities has enabled me to add to his account some particulars, and to offer one or two corrections which seem to me not unimportant. Professor Heddle states that he found the rock in the former case “in two quarries which are cut into a hill-side near the farms of Craigie and White-Cairns, on the west side of the Belhelvie hills.” 1 Sowerby’s description is as follows :—‘‘ Prnurotomaria, Defrance. Gen. char. A trochiform spiral shell, with an angular sinus near the middle of the outer lip, from which a band marked with lines of growth that indicate the sinus is carried round the whorls; no beak or sinus at the base of the aperture; a columella with or without an umbilicus.’’—(Sowerby, Min. Conch.) 2 In this paper the term mineral is used in a very wide sense, as it includes ¢achy- lyte, Lydian-stone, chert, lignite, spherulite, and pitehstone. If all of these are minerals, what are left to us as rocks? 440 Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. I believe that I visited the same locality, though I could only find One quarry in serpentine (very probably two excavations have now been worked into one). The locality is about eight miles from the town of Aberdeen, anda short distance to the east of the high road to Tarves.’ The quarry is close to a branch road and is visible from the main one. J was told that the name of a farmhouse, which stands on the ridge, a short distance north of the quarry, is Overhill. This ridge is a conspicuous feature, running for a considerable distance roughly parallel to the road, as the above-mentioned quarry is ap- proached. It is no doubt a portion of the ‘‘ridge of dark trap,” which is mentioned in the Ordnance Gazetteer of Scotland as “starting from the Black Dog’s mouth, and running through the entire parish of Belhelvie, from four to six furlongs wide, . . . flanked at one point by serpentine.” The outcrop of serpentine is but a small one, for it does not appear to extend much beyond the limits of the pit. The ridge here, and doubtless elsewhere, mainly consists of a rock of rather variable coarseness, which much resembles the well-known troktolite (or forellenstein), of Volpersdorf. This similarity struck me at once in the field, and is fully borne out by microscopic examination. My remarks will be chiefly directed to the structure of these two rocks and their relations. The matrix of the serpentine is compact, of a dark brownish to greenish black colour, speckled by very minute crystals or granules of a mineral resembling one of the spinellid group. There are irregular patches, two inches or more in greatest diameter, of a greenish-white, steatite-like mineral full of small rounded inclusions of the dark matrix; so as to form a kind of rude network or cell- like structure. Closely associated with this are crystalline grains of bastite (with the usual rounded inclusions of the matrix), at most about one half of an inch in diameter, and of rather feeble lustre. From the general appearance and relation of these two minerals, one would conclude that the white mineral was the result of a further change of that represented by the bastite. The rock in its general aspect, jointing, fracture, and mode of weathering, corresponds with a true serpentine, such as that of the Lizard. It very closely re- sembles my hand-specimens of bastite-serpentine from Baste (Hartz), Kupferberg (Bavaria), and Sta. Catarina (Elba). Of the first and third I possess slides, which prove the rocks to be almost identical. The Belhelvie serpentine (rock) consists of the following minerals : (1) Olivine, more or less converted into varieties of the mineral ser- pentine, with separation of the iron in the form of magnetite, ete. I have so often described the gradual formation of the “strings” of greenish and rather fibrous serpentine along the cracks of the original olivine, and the way in which they, and sometimes the mineral occupying the interstices between them, are discoloured by the deposit of magnetite, haematite, etc., that it is needless to occupy any space by repeating the usual details. Portions 1 It is marked on Dr. A. Geikie’s Geol. Map of Scotland. Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. 441 of unaltered olivine still remain in fair number between the serpen- tinous strings, which in several cases are shown to be remnants of one crystal, by identity of colour when placed between crossing Nicols. (2) Bastite, etc., viz. enstatite in various stages of alteration. This mineral, as is common, includes some olivine grains like an irregular setting, and therefore must belong to a later epoch of consolidation. We find it in various stages, from a characteristic enstatite, not very much altered, to a kind of steatite speckled with earthy-looking granules, and so rendered occasionally almost opaque. Sometimes the steatitic product is isotropic, at others it appears as an aggregate of very minute moderately bright-coloured granules. (8) Besides these, the slide exhibits a fair number of grains, not very regular in outline, either opaque or very dark brown in colour, most likely representatives of the spinellid group, and in part probably chromite.! Thus the serpentine has been derived from an olivine-enstatite rock, such as would be called a Saxonite by Dr. Wadsworth. The serpentine has been worked back to its junction with the troktolite, which constitutes the main mass of the ridge. This is usually a moderately coarse-grained mixture of purplish-grey or whitish felspar and dull dark-green serpentine. Coarser varieties occasionally occur; usually the felspar is to the serpentine in about the proportion of three to two, but occasionally a fragment is seen in which the former mineral distinctly predominates. A pyroxenic constituent, if present, is very inconspicuous. The rock is boldly but rather irregularly jointed and weathers. with a brown rough surface. I have examined a series of slides representing the average rock of this part of the ridge, the coarser kind, and varieties respectively rich in felspar and in serpentine. In the normal rock the felspar is fairly well preserved, though rather cracked, probably by molecular strains due to the alteration of the olivine constituent. It exhibits the usual twinning of plagioclase, the groups of macles being com- bined in both the Carlsbad and perikline types, and the large extinction angles show that anorthite is present. The olivine has been almost wholly converted into an olive-green to greenish-brown serpentine with the usual structure; only rarely does a fragment of the original mineral remain unaltered. There is a certain amount of diallage, more than one would have expected from a macroscopic examination of the rock. This occurs in rather small irregular “interstitial” looking grains, and now and then includes or is pierced by a small crystal of the felspar, having been the last to consolidate. There are also a few grains of iron oxide. One slide is traversed by a vein of chrysotile. In the coarser varieties the felspar is not quite as well preserved, but a fair amount of olivine is still unaltered, the two minerals being more nearly in equal proportions. In this there is little or none of a pyroxenic constituent. 1 Plate viii. figs. 2 and 3 (one of the peridotite of the Hartz, the other of that from Christiania) in Dr. Wadsworth’s Lithological Studies, part i, would very fairly illustrate the serpentine described in this paper. 442 Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. I possess a slide of the Volpersdorf troktolite, and have to thank Prof. Judd for the loan of others, as well as of a slide of the same rock from Baste. All these agree very closely with the rock described above. In them also, diallage is sparingly present in narrow irregular-shaped grains, so as not readily to catch the eye in hand- specimens (one, however, of my specimens of Volpersdorf rock has two or three conspicuous crystals of diallage). Hence we need not hesitate to call the Belhelvie rock a troktolite or forellenstein. In my paper on the Serpentine of the Lizard (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxiii. p. 906), I describe a rock from Coverack Cove, as being almost identical with the forellenstein of Volpersdorf, and this was afterwards confirmed by an analysis by Mr. F. T. Houghton (Grou. Mac. Dee. II. Vol. VI. p. 504).!. The Coverack troktolite, however, has probably a little more diallage than the Volpersdorf rock, and in the specimen analyzed there was only 33 per cent. of olivine as against 45 per cent. in the latter rock. Macroscopically and microscopically, this Belhelvie troktolite looks even nearer the Volpersdorf type than that of Coverack Cove. A chemical analysis, however, for which I am indebted to the kindness of A. E. Brown, Hsq., B.Sc., of University College, London, shows that on the whole the Belhelvie rock is more closely allied to the troktolite of Coverack than to that of Volpersdorf, and the per-centage of Al,O, is rather larger, and that of MgO rather smaller, than my estimate founded on microscopic examination led me to expect. ‘The following is the analysis (8.G. = 2°78). ELS Opfirgeny' vicepe yheemeelsl bap eee Sole BO aac datas at Rai N ie A mn aes O18 7 NIM O Sa me eM ME a al nes ai AMiry.. « Deleay TEE Oe eli arate ei esha tsileesoeuy arson LESS) FeO) act Ee CRE RTA 0) CaO) pisses abl aaa Wee Gi AEE OPC ae enn Om Coren gt seemy rs I FEE1)) PAO ame) cee ctnat Hers gn er ane tag eesmmene Tea ATE *Na.O G00" 080 SHO Yinoe 600) a00 G00 1:93 99°92 1 J append the analyses made or quoted by Mr. Houghton. TI. is the Volpersdorf rock, II. that of Coverack, III. the felspar of No. 1., IV. the felspar of No. LI. From the latter two it is evident the Coverack rock contains rather more labradorite than the Volpersdorf rock. I think, however, that the specimen analysed of the latter rock must have been a little richer than common in olivine. I. ie TOME. IV. EOe, [serenity S80. bow teouneeel Le Soon lasis 20 eoliesnle SiO sue crete tbl Scala 5e70 ne eM OSE nt te lary OROs . GIS56 eo OO, ee eae oh) Doan Bens nome BROMO Ti eOuw is) oh aNGr 19k een see eirmmmmene nee OF espns Anabe Oa Die alse nha) GHZ ee ehatcen WOR2beee SUE 16:08 Dey deetDeats OMe ure 2015 ee as AG earns 1009) hou ERAS KO OMM ct UeSor eae aU C ee” OO c ee eS INGO EE PMO QEOG OIE AM Dion emer IRAP ok 5th OLAS HSE 102-40 100-03 100-42 99-51 * Mr. Brown adds, ‘‘ The values of these are uncertain—the numbers given are the means of two experiments: the limits between which the value may lie are Na,O 1°85 to 2°38, K20 1°19 to :71.—Total 3°04.” Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. 443 I may call attention to another point of resemblance between the Cornish and Belhelvie rocks in their relation to the serpentine. At Coverack Cove the serpentine is the oldest rock; it is cut by the troktolite, and both are cut by an ordinary coarse olivine-gabbro. Now the serpentine and troktolite are so closely united that at the first glance we might suppose the one passed into the other. ‘This, however, is certainly not the case, but the junction is so perfect that they appear, as it were, fused together; while at the junction of the olivine-gabbro and the serpentine there is commonly a line of division or a crack, which is enlarged by weathering. It would be interest- ing to see whether in the Belhelvie ridge there were any indications of a normal gabbro and what was its relation to the other rocks. Professor Judd has also observed the complete sequence of serpentine (or peridotite), troktolite, and olivine-gabbro in the western isles of Scotland. For the last rock to cut serpentine is common. One point remains for consideration. What is the relation of the troktolite to the bastite-serpentine? Do they form part of one and the same eruption, or is the one distinctly subsequent to the other? The difference between the two rocks, notwithstanding the rapid variation which is often exhibited by peridotic rocks, seems too great to render the former hypothesis very probable; further, by careful search I discovered in one part of the pit a fairly sharp junction between the serpentine with bastite and the troktolite, of which I succeeded in securing specimens. I noticed, however, that in one place the troktolite, probably at a distance of three or four feet from this apparent line of demarcation, changed in the course of about three inches from a variety in which the felspar distinctly prevailed over the olivine to one in which there was more olivine than felspar, perhaps twice as much. In the latter the felspar is almost wholly replaced by secondary products. The greater part of the replacing substance is a minutely granular to slightly fibrous material, which with crossed Nicols changes, as the slide is rotated, from dark to a pale milky or greyish white; in it are scattered a few granules giving rather bright colours. Much of this might readily be taken for a steatitic mineral, but on testing the spots at the surface of the rock with a knife the hardness appears to be nearly that of felspar. I have examined a slice cut to exhibit the above-mentioned junction. It is rather less than an inch long; about Zin. being troktolite, the remainder serpentine. The former (except for the presence of a peculiar structure to be noted presently) is a normal troktolite, with the plagioclase felspar quite distinct, though much cracked ; the latter, consisting mainly of altered olivine, exhibits among this mineral two or three irregular interspaces occupied by a clear substance, which with transmitted light does not differ much from the felspathic portion of the troktolite, but which with crossed Nicols remains wholly, or almost wholly, dark in every position, and is probably steatite. This can be scratched easily with the knife-point, while the colourless mineral of the troktolite is not easily so marked. At the same time the slide does not exhibit the sharp demarcation commonly seen when one igneous rock has 444 Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. intruded into another, but the boundary is irregular, the felspathic portion of the troktolite seeming to pierce or send off-shoots into the serpentine. This debateable region may be about one-eighth of an inch wide. As in addition each rock in the slide is about of its normal coarseness, I should conjecture that the intrusion took place when the older rock was at a high temperature, and perhaps was still plastic. Which, then, was the earlier? At Coverack, in the instances on the West Coast of Scotland described by Prof. Judd, and in several cases where I have examined the junctions of ordinary gabbros and peridotic serpentines, the felspathic rock is the later of the two; though I may add that its coarse crystallization seems to indicate that its cooling was very gradual. In this case it is more difficult to come to a conclusion. The felspar of the troktolite near to the junction appears to occur in slightly smaller grains than in the normal rock, but the difference is slight and the rock variable. There is, however, one peculiarity. Near to the junction every grain of olivine is surrounded by a fringe-like border, resembling an incipient spherulitic structure. In some cases this appears double, the zone nearest the olivine consisting possibly of a serpentinous mineral ; but the outer, and in some cases the only mineral occurring, is a long and somewhat fibrous microlith, which from its general aspect and extinction-angle I should judge to be actinolite or tremo- lite.’ In these slides the flakes or border of diallage noticed in the normal rock are wanting. It is possible that the structure might be a result of the intrusion of the serpentine into the troktolite; but on the whole I incline to the opinion—though not without hesitation — that the former rock is the earlier. The Black Dog is a mass of rock about four yards long and broad, and rather more than two high, which projects from the sand and bears a very rude resemblance to the creature from which it is named. A dozen or more of much smaller blocks are scattered about in the neighbourhood, some a little nearer to, some a little further from the land. Most, if not all, of these can be visited at low water. Rain and wind prevented me from attempting to plot down these blocks (whether they are in situ or boulders I cannot say), and obliged me to content myself with a rather hasty examin- ation of them. Professor Heddle speaks of two masses of serpentine, a little seaward of the Black Dog. I obtained my specimens from two masses rather on the landward side (and to north of it), and there was a third not far from these, but I noticed two or three more dark blocks surrounded by the sea, which may have been those spoken of by Professor Heddle. Of the remaining blocks, one was certainly a dark gneiss; the others appeared to me to resemble the rock of the Black Dog, but at these I barely glanced.? Macro- 1 These or other microliths sometimes pierce the felspathic part of the slide in a way that recalls the canal system of Eozoon, but to discuss this would require too long a digression for the present occasion. ” Boulders are not common on this part of the shore. In fact, I do not remember observing one for about a mile and a half to the south, so that the rock probably is either im sitw or has come from the immediate neighbourhood. Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. 446 scopically the only difference between this serpentine and that of Belhelvie is that in the former there are much larger masses of the bastite and much less of its steatitic alteration products. Under the microscope the differences are but varietal_—rather less olivine remains unchanged, and the slides have a rather greener hue; this colour here and there occurring rather markedly in little filmy patches, as if a small amount of a chloritic mineral were present. Professor Heddle gives an analysis of this bastite, freed as far as possible ‘‘from the dark serpentinous rods which penetrate the mineral in so singular a manner” (these of course are the included grains of serpentinized olivine). By the side of it (I.) I place for comparison an analysis (II.) of the bastite from Baste’ (Kéhler, quoted by Dana, Mineralogy, p. 469) : 1 II. Si02 sete Se 38 °186 Sie) Wyland 43-90 OSes 2-178 as: 1°50 CnhOnr re... CGT Since Meh tai 2:37 Fe20, ooo © o00 "028 000 occ poo FeO Lah bitactd 8479 tas atale 10°78 MnO GOS) # Sade °513 aaepliess 15) CaO Aon) O80 2-912 Sttiehans 2°70 MOM eee OTTO ee ny 26,00 K:0 200 560 1°401 “47 INE WO ree ay rae oles H20 Seah: cite 14-030 500°) oc 12°42 100°486 100-69 Enstatite, more or less altered, is common in British serpentines, but this is the first instance I have seen of the varietal form bastite, —if we restrict this name to the large grains with inclusions of more or less altered olivine. I pass on now to the rock of the Black Dog. This, according to Professor Heddle, ‘“‘ consists of crystals of talc, matted in such con- fusion as to form both a tough and a hard rock.” As talc is about the lowest mineral in the scale of hardness, and its allies steatite, agalmatolite, etc, are all rather soft; and as minerals do not generally change their physical characteristics, however confusedly they may be matted, I looked forward to the examination of the Black Dog with much interest. Wet as it was with waves and rain, I could only see that it was a mottled dull-green to black rock, sparsely speckled with small scales of a silvery mica, and not unlike the troktolite; when dry, however, it appeared slightly foliated in structure. Smoothed by the action of the waves it presented but few prominences. Selecting one of the least unhopeful I en- deavoured to detach a specimen. A very few minutes sufficed to show the impossibility of any form of tale being the dominant mineral. I plied vigorously a fairly heavy hammer for about five minutes, first at one place, then at another hard by it, with only this result :—that I detached one chip about as large and as thick as a florin and a number of tiny splinters. The latter had set their 1 Comparison of these renders it highly probable that II. was more completely freed from the olivine grains than I. 446 Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. mark effectually on my right hand in the form of three cuts, one pretty deep. At last, after one or two more unsuccessful attempts, I secured a moderate-sized fragment of a rock which I may fairly describe as one of the hardest and toughest that I have ever assailed. It needed but a glance to show that the rock was highly crystalline, and quartzose, without any mineral that could possibly be compared with tale, except the not very abundant silvery mica. I believe there is only one Black Dog, or I should have supposed, so obviously incorrect is Prof. Heddle’s statement, that he were speak- ing of some other rock. The rock on a smoothed surface has a dull grey or bluish-grey colour, mottled or rather streaked in an irregular fibrous manner with a darker, almost green-black tint, and spangled with a few small flakes of a silvery mica. A broken surface exhibits a more or less crystalline structure, with an irregular fracture, as if the com- ponent minerals were tough and had been torn asunder rather than snapped. On these surfaces the grey assumes a rather more dis- tinctly violet-blue tint. The outer part and the surfaces of fissures are stained brown. The slides, viewed with reflected light, in certain positions also exhibit in parts a slightly bluish hue. This is very faint, but I think indubitable, and much resembles the peculiar violet-blue of some varieties of cordierite (iolite). On examining the slide with a one-inch objective, by transmitted light, we see a number of wavy, more or less translucent subparallel streaks, varying in colour from dull light-brown to dusky grey, which have a fibrous aspect and evidently consist of fine aggregated hair-like minerals which stick out in the streaks in various directions, though on the whole they maintain the same general orientation. We may in fact compare the streaks to rather matted locks of hair. Between these is a mineral generally clear, but sometimes a little dirty-looking, which occasionally exhibits a granular structure ; among both these a number of black grains, sometimes more or less rounded, sometimes angular, are scattered rather irregularly. Here and there we observe a mineral resembling a white mica in detached crystals, with irregular patches of a rather gummy-looking yellowish-brown mineral, and some small crystals of a brown mica. After a careful examination of the hair-like mineral with high powers, I have come to the conclusion that in all probability the greyer and the browner patches are alike aggregates of the acicular microliths which project from the edge, but possibly the latter may be darkened in colour by the inclusion of some exceedingly minute ferrite (though even with a one-eighth objective 1 can make out nothing definite beyond the crowded microliths) ; and that we may safely regard this mineral, so abundant in the slide, as a variety of fibrolite. It is almost exactly like that in the cordierite-gneiss of Bodenmais, which, however, sometimes has the microliths of larger size, resembling those in a typical specimen of fibrolite from the same locality, which I have in my collection. Among the colourless minerals I notice that a fair proportion have one well-defined cleavage, while of the remainder, some present Prof. Dr. T. G. Bonney—Troktolite, etc., in Aberdeenshire. 447 only faint indications of it, or indicate no more than a tendency in a parallelism of included microliths, while others show no sign at all. Among the first, some are certainly the white mica, the larger grains of which are visible to the unaided eye. These give bright colours with crossed Nicols, extinguish parallel with the cleavage planes, and have a rather spangled or satiny aspect, even at the moment of extinction. In a word this mineral reminds me in its general aspect of a hydrous mica, and is not unlike paragonite. But there is another well-cleaved mineral, which, though showing bright colours and well cleaved, gives more uniform tints, and I think more frequently contains inclosures of fibrolite than the mica. I suspect this to be kyanite. Of the remaining clear grains, including some without visible cleavage, the extinction, where cleavage planes are visible, is parallel with them. The colours, though they have a general resemblance to those of quartz, are rather more intense than is usual with it. The mineral also is not quite so clear and glass-like, and not seldom gives indications of incipient decompo- sition. This I consider to be very probably iolite. Other grains, however, are certainly quartz. The black granules are an iron oxide, and are probably in great part hematite. As pyrrhotite is present at Bodenmais, I have looked carefully for this mineral, but cannot detect it. The yellow-brown mineral occurs in irregular filmy patches and exhibits no definite structure. With crossed Nicols, it either remains dark, or gives very faint indications of an aggregate structure. Some, I feel sure, is a staining of hematite or limonite. This also occurs in some of the Bodenmais rock. The brown mica calls for no special remark. A few other microlithic minerals are present which I am not able to identify with precision. In one slide, however, I find a single instance of a peculiar mineral. It is a patch of irregular outline, (including several of the black grains, with little if any fibrolite), in diameter about O07 inch, with one or two small outliers—cleavage very dubious, possibly indications of two meeting at angles not very far from 90°—pale puce-grey or dove-coloured by ordinary trans- mitted light—strongly dichroic—extinction seemingly parallel with the best indicated cleavage, which corresponds with a slightly fibrous appearance,—dull olive-green for vibrations perpendicular to this ; light dove-coloured or puce-brown for parallel vibrations. The general look is like that of a mica in which the usual basal cleavage is not distinctly shown, as is the case with some of the brown mica in the slide. As the fibrolite appears to be present not only in the altered iolite, but in the quartz and in these streaky masses, it is probably of independent origin. We may then, I think, confidently affirm that this Black Dog rock principally consists of fibrolite (sillimanite), iolite more or less altered, quartz, and some micas. The above described slides present considerable resemblances to some from the cordierite-gneiss of Bavaria. Some of the latter contain very conspicuous cordierite, but others almost exactly re- 448 Dr, O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. semble the Black Dog rock, and these abound in the minute, thickly aggregated fibrolite. There is a generally similar association of minerals in the cordierite-gneiss of Galgenberg. Iam greatly in- debted to Professor Judd for the loan of additional slides of the Black Dog rock, made from my specimens, and for a series of slides of cordierite rock from the above-named localities, and from Burgstadt (near Chemnitz), Penig, Orijesvi (Finland), and Sertudalen (Sweden). About half-way between the Black Dog rock and the mouth of the Don,—and so about half a league N. of the latter, sundry blocks of a dark rock are strewn on the shore, some of considerable size. One is apparently a dark gneiss, others are evidently an igneous rock. I collected two varieties, one representing the two largest blocks which lie close together, as though they had once formed a single mass. It is a heavy dark green rock speckled with grains of a lighter colour, weathering brown. The following is a description :—holo- crystalline, structure intermediate between granitoid and ophitic, consists mainly of labradorite, augite and some olivine. The labrado- rite is well preserved, exhibiting the usual lamellar twinning and very bright colours with the crossed Nichols; the augite, or rather diallage, for the pinacoidal cleavage is generally well developed at the expense of the prismatic, is light brown-coloured in many of the grains, and exhibits the “schillerization”’ to which Prof. Judd has lately drawn attention; the olivine (not abundant) has its cracks bordered with a staining of opacite; some parts are converted into a dull brownish-green serpentine, but others are very well preserved. A few larger granules of black iron oxide occur in the slide. Another specimen of a finer-grained rock contains no olivine, but a little brown mica; the pyroxenic mineral also is partly diallage, partly a mineral of the hypersthene group, probably allied to the variety called amblystegite ; it is distinguished by a more marked dichroism, altering from a pale greenish to a bluish hue, and extinguishes parallel with the pinacoidal cleavage. The mode of occurrence of the two minerals, which are not always easy to distinguish, is very similar, and they appear to have consolidated as nearly as possible simultaneously. There is also some apatite in the slide, and as usual some grains of iron oxide. IJ].—On THe OrGanizAtTion AND Economy oF THE GRAPTOLITHIDE. By Dr. Orro Herrmann. N the first place, let us obtain a clear idea of a Graptolite, and for this purpose we will consider two members of the family Dichograptide, namely, Didymograptus vacillans, Tullb. (Fig. 2, p-. 462), and Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall (Fig. 1, p. 449). The entire polypidom (Hydrosoma, polypary, Frond, ‘“ polypier,” “‘polypariet”’) proceeds from a simple, hollow cone (sicula, ‘“ Fuss,” “ Haftorgan,” Radicle or initial point ex parte), which, in the com- 1 The second chapter of Dr. Otto Herrmann’s memoir on the Dichograptide, the first chapter of which appeared in this Macazinr for September, 1885. Translated from the Nyt Magazin for Naturyidenskaberne, vol, xxix. pp. 160-176. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 449 pressed state, presents itself as a pointed, dagger-shaped organ (Fig. 2.s.). In its external wall a bacilliform axis (virgula, solid axis “axe solide”) is developed, and two embryonal buds soon begin to sprout forth from the sicula, become converted into cells (Hydrothece, “‘Zihne,” denticles, calycles, “cellules,” “Thekorna”), and form the commencements of two branches (‘‘Arme,” “ Zweige,” stipes, branches, “ Grenarne’’) diverging at a definite angle. Hach of these branches represents a tube, the cavity of which (‘‘ Gemeinsamer Canal,” common canal, ‘Canal commun’”’) is occupied by the soft animal proper (ccenosarc). The axis lies upon the dorsal surface of the branch ; opposite to it are the hydrothece arranged in consecu- tive order (Monoprionidian Graptolites). The walls of the canal in the living state were chitinous (‘‘Skeletbildende Substanz,” “ Haut,” “ Schale,” periderm, perisarc, test), and consist of three lamina. In most cases the branches in growing did not continue simple, but forked; the forks thus formed might divide again, etc. By two such divisions an eight-branched form is produced (Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall, Fig. 1). It has been thought that the basal parts of the branches in many ramified Graptolites were free from hydrothece, and this “naked” part has been named the stem (‘‘Stiel,” funiculus, funicle). In some species these basal parts of the branches are united by a chitinous membrane (Discus, central disc, corneous disc, Fig. 1). In what follows we shall chiefly employ the nomenclature established by Allman and others for the different parts of a Hydroid Polyp. Fie. 1. Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall, from the Phyllograptus-shales, Galgenberg, Christiania. Natural size. Original. Tur Srcuna.—The inconspicuous organ to which Lapworth has given the name of the Sicula, and which early attracted the attention of paleontologists, but under the names of “ Haftorgan,” “radicle,” etc., has received a false interpretation, has now, since the recognition of its true significance, and of the part it plays in the development of the polypidom, taken a prominent position among the organs of the animal-colony. If we have to decide whether fragments of Graptolites that may be met with belong to the single-branched family Monograptide, Lapw., or are fragments of branched Grapto- DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. X. 29 450 Dr. O. Herrmann— Distribution of Graptolites. lites, this cannot be done until the discovery, upon one of the fragments, of this organ, the presence of which proves the com- pleteness of the proximal extremity, or until we find two such branches held together by this dagger-shaped organ; in the former case we have to do with a species of the Monograptide ; in the second with a species of one of those families which include two- branched forms. The sicula has another significance as a classificatory element. It has been shown that the further development of the hydrosoma, which is commenced by the sprouting of the primordial buds, does not always proceed from exactly the same spot in the sicula, but that, in certain groups, which may even show agreement in their other characters, it commences at different points of the margins of the sicula. In the fixing of the angle of divergence between the branches of the ramified Graptolites, the sicula also plays an important part. The conditions here indicated involve a number of questions which we find answered in different senses by different authors, and some of which have been the subjects of lively controversy, without any accordant and satisfactory answer being arrived at. It therefore appears to me worth while to examine some of these unsettled questions in detail, and to show what views in my opinion deserve the most consideration. In the first place we must glance briefly at the question whether the Graptolites were attached by the sicula to the sea-bottom or to some foreign object. Hall, who figured Graptolites with the sicula as long ago as 1847, in 1865, in his great work,’ expressed the opinion that some species, and especially those of the family Dicho- graptide, Lapw., in the early period of their growth, were seated temporarily upon the sea-bottom or upon foreign objects. Richter, who, in 1850, figured the sicula in Thuringian forms, characterizes the organ as the ‘“‘foot” (Fuss) or “adherent organ” (Haftorgan), names which of themselves involve the conception of its function. Scharenberg,’ in 1851, writes that in many species this appendage indicates a tolerably firm adhesion, but in others only a loose insertion into the muddy sea-bottom. Geinitz, in 1852, says that the genera Diplograptus and Didymograptus (Cladograptus) had “their lower extremity plunged into the sand or mud.” Nicholson (1872) * believes that the “radicle” in some forms of the genus Didymo- graptus, M‘Coy, served as an adherent organ, but that other genera, such as Monograptus, Gein., and Coenograptus, Hall, were not attached by that organ. More recently an opinion has made much way that all Graptolites provided with a sicula inhabited the sea as non-attached organisms, and that the discovery of the sicula on imperfectly known forms of 1 Figures and Descriptions of Canadian Organic Remains, Dec. ii., Graptolites of the Quebec Group, Montreal, 1865. 2 Ueber Graptolithen, etc., Breslau, 1851. 3 Die Versteinerungen der Grauwackenformation in Sachsen: I. Graptolithen, p. 17. 4 Monograph of the British Graptolitide, p. 63. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 451 the true Graptolites or Graptolite-like organisms will furnish a proof of their former free mode of life. In many genera (Didymograptus, Dicellograptus, Ceenograptus, etc.) the sicula runs out into a point as sharp as a hair; in other forms (e.g. Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall, Galgenberg, Christiania) it has acquired the form of a round knot or knob; in other species again (e.g. species of Tetragraptus) it entirely disappears in full-grown individuals, although the spot at which we ought to look for it is quite uninjured. All this speaks against a former attachment. We now assume that all Graptolites provided with a sicula were not attached bodies. It is indeed conceivable that we have an analogy with existing Coelenterata, in which also attached forms (these would correspond to the arborescent Graptolitiform organisms) are known, as well as forms which are inserted into the mud, and perfectly free. But whether they pierced into the mud of the sea-bottom with the sicula, or whether the Graptolites kept at small depths like a Cartesian diver in a vessel of water, will depend upon how far down in the deep seas of that time, the element of the Graptolites, organic existence was possible. Anois or Divercence.—Before we advance to the definition of the angle of divergence in the branched Graptolites, we must make out clearly what part of the hydrosoma we are to regard as the sicula in the different groups of Graptolites, seeing that the sicula and angle of divergence stand in the closest relation to each other. In most genera, as, for example, Didymograptus, M‘Coy, Dicrano- graptus, Hall, Diplograptus, M‘Coy, and Monograptus, Gein., there is no doubt about this, but not so in the genus Dicellograptus, Hopk. The situation of the sicula here has been a question in dispute, and - indeed because in that genus there are often four processes at the point where the two branches grow together, one of them situated on the dorsal side of the branches, and three upon the cell-bearing ventral side (Fig. 3). Hopkinson, who in 1871! separated the genus Dicellograptus from the Didymograpti, considers the middle one of the three spines which are placed side by side to be the sicula (“radicle”’), and defended his idea warmly against Nicholson, who,’ in some of the forms now referred to Dicellograptus (e.g. D. anceps, Nich.), regarded the process on the dorsal side of the branches (Hopkinson’s “axillary spine”) as the embryonal piece. Nicholson, himself, however, is not consistent in his mode of designation, seeing that in other evidently nearly allied forms (e.g. D. divaricatus, Hall) he regards the middle one of the three spines, in agreement with Hopkinson, as the sicula. Carruthers, in opposition to Hopkinson, regards the spine in the axillary hollow of the branches as the sicula; and Lapworth also expresses himself in the same sense, writing as follows:%’—“It is simply this persistent sicula which constitutes the ‘axillary spine’ in Dicellograptus.” 1 “On Dicellograptus, a new genus of Graptolites,’’ Gor. Mac. Vol. VIII. (1871), No. 1. 2 « Monograph of the British Graptolitide ” (1872), p. 59. 8 «* Notes on British Graptolites,” Guon. Maa. Vol, X. (1873), p. 501. 452 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. In the first place it must be noted that the presence or absence of this so-called axillary spine cannot at all affect the decision of the question whether we have or have not to regard it as the sicula, as not only this process, but also the middle one of the three processes placed side by side, is sometimes to be found, sometimes not. This is shown by Nicholson’s figure’ of D. seatans, Hall. But if we compare the figures here given (Figs. 2-6) of repre- sentatives of various genera, the decision of the question before us seems to proceed directly from them. Dicellograptus, Hopk., occupies amiddle position between Didymograptus, M‘Coy, and Dicranograptus, Hall; it is placed in the immediate vicinity of the latter genus, and both are referred to the same family. In Didymograptus the sicula is quite visible, and no doubt:is possible as to its position; in Dicrano- graptus the lower part of the two branches has grown together, and the sicula is thus imbedded. In the first case the pointed end of the sicula is actually upon the dorsal side of the branches, theoretically also in the second. In Dicellograptus, Hopk., the same position is occupied by the “axillary spine.” This is consequently the true sicula. Fic. 2. Bs vacillans, Tullb., Phyllograptus shales, Norway. Nat. size. riginal. Hy 3 Dicellograptus Forchhammeri, Gein., Ireland. Nat. size. After Lapworth. », 4. Dicranograptus ramosus, Hall, Hudson River Group, Canada. Nat. size, After Hall. » 0. Diplograptus angustifolius, H., Ireland. Nat. size. After Lapworth. », 6. Monograptus gregarius, Lapw., Upper Silurian, Scotland. Enlarged. After Lapworth. We find a still greater difference of opinion when we endeavour to make out what the various authors understand by the angle of divergence. Not only do the individual naturalists support different views, but even one and the same author defines the idea of the angle in question differently in different parts of his writings. Hopkinson, for example,” in 1871, explains with regard to the genus Didymo- graptus, M‘Coy, that the angle of divergence is the “angle included within the polypiferous margins of the branches”; but on a subse- quent occasion ® he says that in the genus Didymograptus, M‘Coy, 1 Monograph of the British Graptolitid, p. 63. 2 «On Dicellograptus,’ Guou. Maa. Vol. VIII. (1871), p. 22. 3 «¢On the Graptolites of the Arenig and Llandeilo Rocks of St. David's,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxi, (1875), p. 640. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 453 “the angle of divergence is gradually carried through the various species from 180° almost to 360°,” which is as much as to say that the angle of divergence is the angle formed by the dorsal “non- polypiferous ” margins of the branches. Several authors, in order to arrive at a definition of the angle of divergence, have started from the genus Diplograptus, M‘Coy (Fig. 5), assumed the angle in question here, as shown in the figure, to be 0°, and then proceeded to Dicranograptus, Hall, Dicellograptus, and Didymograptus, and found for these genera the magnitudes 0°, Z 180°, 7 180°, and 7 180° to 4 360°. Another mode of definition seems to me to recommend itself as the more natural. The oldest two-branched Graptolite genus, which first of all induces us to think over the angle of divergence, is the . genus Didymograptus, M‘Coy. If we have an example of this genus before us (Fig. 2), we shall find it natural at the first glance to give as the angle of divergence the angle which the branches form on their eell-bearing side." The younger two-branched Graptolites following Didymograptus, M‘Coy, in the sedimentary deposits, the Dicellograpti (Fig. 3) may then be regarded as Didymograpti the branches of which are bent further back. The above-indicated angle between the cell-bearing margins of the branches has become 7 180°. In Dicranograptus, Hall, only the distal parts of the branches are in divergence, and. the angle here formed by the cell-bearing margins of the branches (Fig. 4) varies between the same limits as in Dicellograptus, Hopk. The basal parts of the branches in Dicranograptus have grown together by their dorsal margins, so that the cell-bearing margins form an angle of 360°. Lastly, the genus Diplograptus (Fig. 5), which represents the Graptolites in their most perfect development, no longer possesses any visibly diverging branches ; but the theo- -retical angle of divergence at which we have arrived step by step, from the genus Didymograptus, through Dicellograptus and Dicrano- graptus, amounts to 860°. In Monograptus, Gein. (Fig. 6), we cannot speak even of a theoretical angle of divergence. This conception, which takes into account the geological age of the genera of Graptolites, may perhaps deserve consideration. Under the term angle of divergence we therefore understand the angle formed by the cell-bearing margins of the branches. This is as follows for the genera :—Didymograptus, M‘Coy = 7 0° to 180°. Dicellograptus, Hopk. = 180° to 7 860°. Dicranograptus, Hall = 360° and 180° to Z 360°. Diplograptus, M‘Coy = 360°. 1 The question of the angle of divergence appears to me to be a comparatively simple matter. Leaving out of consideration the two sides of the branches, the angle of divergence is that formed by the axial lines of the branches at their meeting-point in the sicula. Assuming the two branches to grow quite straight out from the sicula, there will be no angle of divergence (0°), and the celluliferous margins will be in contact ;—then, as the branches diverge, sweeping round the imaginary circle of which the sicula is the centre (of course in the direction of the non-celluliterous margin, as otherwise they would have to cross each other), these axial lines will form gradually increasing angles, until the dorsal margins come close together, when we get 360° as in fig. 5. Roughly speaking, the angles shown in the figures would be, for fig. 2, about 90°; fig. 8, about 270°; fig. 4, 360°, and 330°; and tor fig. 6, 360°.—W.S.D. 454 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. As regards the former position of the Graptolites in the living state, two different views are extant. Hopkinson, Lapworth, and Zittel represent all Graptolites with the acute extremity of the sicula always directed upwards, and state that in their opinion the Grapto- lites formerly lived in this position. A Didymograptus consequently turned the point upwards, and the two branches grew downwards. Other naturalists, as, for example, Hall, Nicholson, Tullberg, Linnars- son, and Brogger, choose such a position that the sicula, regarded as a point, is always placed below, while the branches stretch upwards. Direct evidence as to the correctness of one or the other view cannot be obtained, seeing that from the position in which we now find their remains in the rock, we cannot ascertain what position the living animals took in the Silurian sea. After their death they fell to the bottom, and then laid themselves upon one side. Even in the expanded much-branched Dichograptide, the appearance of which, especially when a central disc is present, may have had some re- semblance to that of a Medusa, no conclusion as to their former position can be drawn from their present position upon a rock- surface. The zoologists, however, refer to the fossils of arborescent form which are certainly very nearly allied to the Graptolites, and lived at the same time with them. These, such as Dendrograptus serpens, Hopk., possess a true stem from which branches and twigs issue at one end, while the other end terminates in a radiciform nodule. These forms may very probably have been attached, or have lived so that the points of the twigs formed the superior extremities, but not so that the branched part was turned towards the depths, and the stem with its nodose termination directed upwards. Here, how- ever, the nodose, and therefore probably the lower part, was un- doubtedly the older, 7.e. the starting-point. In Dictyograptus, Lapw., a genus which is also abundantly branched, there is no stem bare of branches ; in it the whole hydrosoma runs out into a point (sicula). This is also the starting-point ; the free extremities of the twigs are the younger parts of the hydrosoma. If we place the starting-point below in this case also, the whole hydrosoma represents a funnel opening upwards, certainly the natural position. If we reason in like manner in the case of Didymograptus, etc., there also the sicula must be placed at the bottom, and the branches and hydrothece represented as stretching upwards. We have therefore regarded the sicula as an equivalent whole, without taking into consideration whether the budding takes place sometimes at its pointed, sometimes at its broader end. Prof. Leuckart very kindly called my attention to the resemblance between the Graptolites and existing animal forms, and upon the last-mentioned point I have, after mature consideration, adopted, with full conviction, the views of my honoured instructor. The Graptolites have, therefore, always been figured by me with the sicula below, and the branches directed upwar rds. Funrcurvs.—Hall has given the name of “ funiculus ” io the part of the hydrosoma which, in the forms of Dichograptide possessing Dr. O. Herrmann— Distribution of Graptolites. 455 four, eight, or more branches, unites the two symmetrical halves, as well as to the parts of the branches situated nearest to the furcation- points. In the four-branched species the uniting transverse beam is said to be always destitute of cells; in those with eight and more branches neither the central part of the hydrosoma, nor the portions of the branches placed between the divisional points, are said to be cell-bearing, but the cell-bearing parts or “true branches” only commence beyond the last furcation-point. Hall himself, however, furnishes an exception to the rule thus established. The above remarks do not apply to Clonograptus Milesi, Hall, in which the hydrothecee commence immediately beyond the first furcation-point. Holm! states that Hall’s assertion has also proved untrustworthy in other forms, and expresses the opinion that “in many cases, although not always, hydrothece also occur even upon these sup- posed naked spaces.” He has actually detected distinct hydrothece upon the so-called funiculus in a Norwegian species of Schizograptus, Nich. When he had removed the periderm by means of a brush, he noticed the impression of a small hydrotheca on each side of the sicula. The instances in which one is enabled to observe the under-surface of the so-called funiculus will be of excessive rarity in consequence of the repeatedly noted peculiar position of the branched specimens. Nevertheless it has appeared to me as if in my young individuals of Tetragraptus quadribrachiatus, Hall, a narrow streak of a hydrotheca peeped out here and there beneath the transverse beam. Several specimens in my possession of the species Dichograptus octobrachiatus, Hall, and D. Kjerulfi, Herrm., are filled up with the rock-mass and have better preserved their original form. At the proximal end of each hydrotheca we observe a constriction on the dorsal surface of the branch which presents itself to the observer, so that the branch appears to consist of nothing but joints inserted one into the other, like the stem of an Hquisetum. ‘These depres- sions, each of which therefore corresponds to a hydrotheca, are not, however, found exclusively beyond the last furcation-point, but also here and there within the furcation-points upon the branches, a distinct proof that even the first divisions of the transverse beam, which, according to Hall, belong to the “funiculus,” are furnished with hydrothece. In the specimens which give rise to the obser- vations just cited, the transverse beam itself unfortunately was not well preserved, so that it could not be decided whether this does or does not bear hydrothece. It may, however, be assumed with the greatest probability that this is the case here as in many other species. Future observations will bring us certainty in this direction. The discovery of these hydrothece in the vicinity of the sicula is rendered more difficult because at the proximal end of the hydrosoma (as at the distal end) the hydrothece gradually diminish in size, and are sometimes only of minute dimensions. Further, it may, = “* Pterograptus, ett nytt Graptolitslagte,”’ Oty. Kongl. Vet. Ak. Férh. 1881, 0. 4. 456 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. however, be indicated, that the branches of Clonograptus multiplex, Nich., and C. flexilis, Hall, have cells between the furcation-points. Finally, I will mention that a specimen of Tetragraptus fructicosus, Hall, collected by myself, distinctly shows a hydrotheca between the sicula and each of the two furcation-points. TT. fructicosus, Hall, as is well known, has a mode of ramification different from that of the other Zetragrapti, for which reason one more readily manages to see the hydrothece in profile. The branch-segments situated between the sicula and the furcation-points are, however, here the. same parts of the hydrosoma which are denominated the “funiculus” in the other Tetragrapti, and this part is sometimes celluliferous in T. fructicosus, Hall. The facts brought together above show that the exceptions to Hall’s rule are gradually accumulating. We begin to feel the necessity of dropping the definition of the funiculus as a cell-less part of the hydrosoma ; but in any case the presence of such a naked stem is not to be employed as a means of separating genera and species from each other. The species founded upon such a criterion runs the risk of being upset by every fresh observation. Tue Crentrat Disc.—The most singular of all the parts of the Graptolite-body is undoubtedly the central disc, i.e. a chitinous mem- brane, which, in some much-branched Dichograptide, is extended between the basal parts of the branches. This peculiar organ was discovered by Hall, and gradually detected upon five different American species of the family Dichograptide, Lapw. Some of the American disc-bearing species were also soon found in the English Silurian deposits. For the paleontologists upon the continent of Europe the descrip- tion of this singular appendage had a peculiar interest, as it could not but be supposed that similar interesting forms would be dis- coverable in the strata which were regarded as of the same age as these American and English deposits. That these anticipations were founded upon a correct assumption was shown by the discovery of a comparatively thin but most productive bed of the expected and wished for forms. Those of this locality (Galgenberg in Oslo, a suburb of Christiania; Lower Graptolite-shales of Kjerulf; Phyllo- graptus-shales of Brogger) contributed to the completion of the analogy between the Norwegian, American, and English strata in question. The number of species of Dichograptidee with a disc has now been raised to seven, the names of which here follow: Tetragraptus alatus, Hall, 7. erucifer, Hall, T. Headi, Hall, 7. approximatus, Nich., Dicho- graptus octobrachiatus, Hall, D. Kjerulfi, Herrm., D. (Loganograptus) Logani, Hall. In specimens of Climacograptus bicornis, Hall, also, a similar membrane is sometimes observed, enveloping the base of the celluliferous stem and the processes issuing from the stem ; and in some species of the genus Dicellograptus, Hopk. (e.g. D. Moffatensis, Carr.), the proximal parts of the two branches are also united by a similar membrane. Hall, to whom we are indebted for all the information relating Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 457 to the disc,! states that it consists of two laminz, which are not united to one another in the central part; and he is of opinion that this space was occupied by the soft part of the animal body. The central disc, as implied in its name, possesses a disc-like form, in the centre of which the sicula, the starting-point of the hydro- soma, is situated (Fig. 1). The margin of the disc is incurved between every two branches, so that the many-branched specimens present the aspect of an open umbrella. The diameter is of very different lengths. In specimens with long branches it may be very small, while in other, short-branched examples, it may be dis- proportionately large. The length of the diameter apparently stands in no regular proportion to the length of the branches, 7.e. therefore to the age of the individuals. In several cases the formation of the disc has only just commenced in nearly mature specimens. Nevertheless it appears distinctly from the observations that the disc can acquire greater dimensions the greater the number of rami- fications, and that in the many-branched forms the disc is far more rarely wanting than in those with a smaller number of branches. As we find individuals in various stages of development in the Grap- tolite-shales, we can sketch a tolerably distinct picture of the course of development of the disc. In individuals which have died in their earliest yonth, nothing in the shape of a disc is to be recognized. In these, no secretion of the disc-substance had as yet commenced, or the central expansion, if present, was deficient in preservable. hard structures. The first traces of the formation are perceptible in somewhat more mature specimens on the margin of the branches in the vicinity of the sicula. This stage of development is represented by forms in which, in the compressed state, we see a thin membrane stretched between the forks of the branches, that is to say, around the transverse beam uniting the two halves of the hydrosoma, and on the proximal parts of the 8, 12, or more branches. The secretion advances further. The periphery of the disc increased ; the disc-substance must have become thickest in the neighbourhood of the centre, and gradually diminished in strength towards the margin. We consequently meet with older individuals in which the central part of the disc is quite opaque, while the marginal parts are still delicate and translucent. As the disc attained its complete development, this difference in Strength disappeared gradually, the marginal parts acquiring a uniformly greater thickness by the continual advance of the substance outwards from the centre ; and in fact, in its most perfect development, the dise forms a plate of uniform thickness. But as a secretion of chitine could not proceed from the solid margins of the branches, but, as zoology teaches us, only from soft body-substance, we must assume that the disc, as indeed Hall supposes, was filled with soft substance in its central part. But how this was connected with the coenosare of the polypary has not yet been ascertained. 1 Geological Survey of Canada: Graptolites of the Quebec Group, Montreal, 1865, and Introduction to the Study of the Graptolites, Albany, 1868. 458 Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. With regard to the function of the disc, Hall supposes that, on the one hand, it gave solidity and support to the basal parts of the branches, and on the other may have served other purposes of the animal economy. Such subsidiary functions of the dise may have been only of quite subordinate nature, seeing that in members of one and the same species the disc may be sometimes present and sometimes entirely absent, and its development commences sometimes in quite young individuals, sometimes in those which are nearly full grown. But as the disc occurs only in those forms in which the branches are remarkably thin in the neighbourhood of the sicula, and as, in consequence of the branches frequently being numerous and long, the central part of the organism had no small amount of resistance to furnish, this support may have been the principal if not the sole destination of the disc. This is rendered still more probable because the disc never occurs in other forms which possessed particularly stout branches, and in consequence of their mode of ramification had greater firmness, such as Clonograptus multiples, Nich., C. flexilis, Hall, ete. It does not appear to me probable that, as has been suggested, the Graptolites were attached by means of the disc, seeing that in very many specimens the disc is entirely uninjured, and even in those with damaged discs the kind of injury does not indicate their having been torn away, because it is precisely the central part that most rarely shows any damage. Hyproturcm.—We are indebted to Hopkinson for a new and important discovery with regard to the intimate structure of the Graptolites.! M‘Coy, in 1854, in his “ British Paleozoic Fossils,” in the course of the description of a Graptolite, had spoken of “transverse septa,” which were to be found at the proximal ends of the hydrothecz, and had also represented the position of these septa in a figure. In 1868, Hopkinson had stated in connexion with this? that he had been unable to find “ any indication of a dividing septum [in Graptolites], if we except a few forms in which there is an impressed line between the hydrothece and the periderm.” More recently Allman, in his “‘ Monograph of the Calyptoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids,” compared the hydrothece of the Rhab- dophora with the sessile nematophores of the Plumularie, at the same time denying the presence of a septum or constriction, and indicating that later observations had not confirmed the existence of the septa mentioned by M‘Coy. Hopkinson? was quite recently in a position to investigate an abundant Graptolitic material from the Skiddaw slates, and he found in it specimens of Didymograptus extensus, Hall, D. patulus, Hall, and Tetragraptus serra, Brongn. (=T. bryonoides, Hall), which permitted the interior structure to be examined. In some of these specimens he was able to perceive that the hydrothecze were separated from the coenosare by a well-marked septum, and that the coenosare 1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Jan. 1882, pp. 54-57. 2 Journ. Quek. Mier. Club, vol. i, p. 161. 3 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Soc. ser. 5, vol. ix. (1882), pp. 54-57. Dr. O. Herrmann—Distribution of Graptolites. 459 itself appeared to be divided into separate joints by transverse septa. Hopkinson figures a branch of T. serra, Brongn., which was obtained in section and filled with mineral substance. The common canal, which bad been occupied by the ccenosare, has the appearance of a vertebral column, and between each two rectangular joints we see a septum. When the mineral substance was removed, Hopkinson observed a series of rectangular impressions, separated from each other by transverse walls or “ridges.” A similar ridge separated each depression from the hydrotheca belonging to it. The hydrothece, says Hopkinson, appear to have budded from the coenosare as the leaves of an exogenous tree bud from the stem, and not to have been continuous with their support like the leaves of endogenous trees. The partition is not a true septum, but only “‘a ridge, a constriction, occasionally forming a very sharp line of demarcation, but in most cases scarcely, if at all, perceptible.” The structure here described occurs in the existing Thecaphora, and Hopkinson thinks that “it can now no longer be maintained that the calycles of the Graptolite are not true hydrotheca” :— Kirchenpauer, also, in opposition to Allman, treats the cells of the Graptolites as hydrothece. As regards the Repropuction and ZootocrcaL Posirion of the Graptolites, no new views have, so far as I know, been recently put forward, so that here we may refer to the excellent section upon the Graptolites in Zittel’s ‘Handbuch der Paliontologie,” in which the principal opinions are brought together and discussed briefly and clearly. When Hall describes specimens of Diplograptus, M‘Coy, with sac- like appendages, and regards these appendages as gonangia, we can only be surprised that among the innumerable specimens of Diplo- graptus from the earliest to the most advanced age which the graptolite collector has the opportunity of studying, such sexual individuals have never turned up. But I have carefully looked for them in vain. On the other hand, I brought home a hand-specimen which was sprinkled with small round or oval corpuscles, vividly reminding me in form and structure of the supposed ovarian capsules (Dawsonia) of the Graptolites figures by Nicholson.t These, like the fragments of Graptolites accompanying them, are converted into grey, shining mineral (Giimbelite?) But unfortunately the same beds contained not unfrequent although always isolated specimens of a Brachiopod (Obolus!) which has on the surface a striation exactly like that of the small, round bodies. This Brachiopod always appears black and lustreless, and is about six times the size of the latter. Finding at a higher level (zone of Didymograptus Murchisoni, Beck, Nordal- Bruns Strasse, Christiania) fragments of slate filled with innumerable small, black, undoubted Brachiopoda (Obolella?), I became doubtful, and could arrive at no definite answer to the question as to what the grey, shining bodies should be taken for. I must, however, admit that my material was very scanty, and that special investigations can only be made when it is made more complete. ‘ 1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (1873), ser. 4, vol. xi. p. 140. 460 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— The state of the case is therefore as follows: In the Phyllograptus- schists light grey, shining Graptolites are associated with numerous small, rounded bodies of the same. colour, and with isolated, larger, black, lustreless Brachiopoda. In the zone of Didymograptus Murchi- soni we meet with light grey, shining Graptolites associated with numerous small, rounded Brachiopoda, with a lustreless, black surface, with a few isolated, larger, black, lustreless Brachiopoda. This brings to a close the considerations upon the organization and economy of the Graptolites. We have taken as the starting-point the often cited section in Zittel’s “Handbuch der Paliontologie,” and refrained from repeating here all those newer views which are referred to in it, and which did not call for any comment. IV.—Notss on toe British Sprcies or CrRArIocaris. By Prof. T. Ruprrr Jonzs, F.R.S., and Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.B.S. (Concluded from September Number, p. 397.) d. CERATIOCARIS INORNATA, M ‘Coy. 1851. Ceratiocaris inornatus (Salter MS.), M‘Coy. Brit.Pal. Fos. p.137, pl. rE. f.4. 1854. Me ‘5 Morris. Catal. Brit. Foss. 2nd edit. p. 102. 1859. 56 (nis Salter. In Siluria, 2nd (3rd) edit. p. 532. 1860. 4 53 Salter. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 156. 1867. iss me Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1873. 35 We Salter. Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. pp. 177, 178. 1877. } H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. This is the third of M‘Coy’s original species. The specimen in the Cambridge Museum has its carapace ovate-oblong or somewhat boat-shaped in outline, 50 mm. (2 inches) long, 18 mm. high; moderately convex ; straight or very slightly arched above and more strongly arched below (both edges are partly imbedded in the matrix of the original specimen, 6/5, M‘Coy’s fig. 4). The anterior end (damaged) was neatly rounded, sloping up gracefully from below. The posterior is obliquely truncate from above downwards and outwards, with the postero-dorsal angle distinct, and the postero- ventral angle prominent and blunt. There is no eye-spot. Traces of longitudinal striz are visible on the impressions of the valves in the grey, micaceous, Upper-Ludlow sandstone, from Benson Knot, near Kendal, Westmoreland ; two specimens (one of them good) are in the British Museum, No. 44342, from the same locality. The foregoing description does not quite tally with the account of the species in the Brit. Pal. Foss. p. 137, nor with that in the Ann. Mag. N. H.1.c., but is based on the original specimen, and not on the restored figure in the Brit. Pal. Foss. The figure annexed by Mr. Salter to his note on C. inornata in the Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. 1873, p- 178, is used also in connection with two other species at p. 16 and p-. 164. In the latter case it is probably intended for C. leptodactylus, which we recognize as C. Murchisoni. C. inornata approaches C. papilio in form in some cases, but we think that they are quite distinct species. There are some small carapaces, one from Lesmahago, B.M. 59648, very near to C. papilio in form, and measuring 34 x 18 mm., and one from Benson Knot, B. M. 44842, measuring 35 x 14mm. These proportions are dif- Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 461 ferent from those of O. papilio. These two are rather smaller than M‘Coy’s original C. inornata (about 50 x 20mm.), but have the same proportions, the normal height being 24 of the length; whilst C. papilio is larger and has less height in proportion, the length being only twice the height, or even less. 6. Ceratiocaris Oretronensts, H. Woodward. 1871. Ceratiocaris Oretonensis, H. Woodward. GEOL. Mac. Vol. VIII. p. 105, Pl. Ill. Fig. 1. 1878. a Fe H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. This Carboniferous species, described in the Grox. Mac. for March, 1871, approaches closely to some of the forms of Ceratiocaris found in the Upper Silurian of Benson Knot—namely, C. tnornata, M‘Coy. The carapace (50 x 22mm.) is larger, however, without attaining the size and proportions of C. papilio, which is also found there, and is not without an apparent relationship to the former, as already noticed (p. 394). In again examining the specimens, we find that the anterior end is not so much rounded as in Fig. 1, but is slightly and obliquely truncate ; and the antero-ventral margin more sloping and less convex; thus the greatest depth of the carapace is in the hinder half. Four specimens from the Yellow Carboniferous Lime- stone of Oreton and Farlow, Worcestershire, not well preserved. The indistinct ‘eye-spot,’ mentioned at p. 105, is very problematical, and may have been caused by pressure on some internal organ (teeth ?). 7. CERATIOCARIS TRUNCATA, H. Woodward. 1871. Ceratiocaris truncatus, H. Woodward. GEOL. Mac. Vol. VIII. p. 106. Pl. Ill. Fig. 2. 1878. +f oe H. Woodward... Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 72. The smaller species occurring with the last (C. Oretonensis) was described and figured with it in 1871. The carapace (85 x 15 mm.) is well figured, except that (as the author remarks, p. 106) the slightly concave truncation of the hinder end is not well rendered by the artist. Its smaller size, sharp antero-dorsal angle, and nearly even ventral curve, distinguish it from its associates, but scarcely separate it as far as the outline is concerned from some specimens of C. inornata at Benson Knot. 8. CERATIOCARIS SOLENOIDES, M‘Coy. 1849. Ceratiocaris solenoides, M‘Coy. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 413, with woodcut. 1851. 5 5 M‘Coy. Brit. Palzeoz. Foss. fasc. i. p. 138, pl. 1 E. figs. 5, 5a. 1854. us iN Morris. Catal. Brit. Foss. 2nd ed. p. 173. 1860. Cultellus? (Ceratiosolen?) rectus, Salter. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. . 160. 1873. Ceratiocaris solenoides, Gi Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 178. 1877. H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. p. 178. Prof. M‘Coy founded the genus on this species and C. eliptica in 1849. The original specimens in the Cambridge Mus. (6/40, b/41) are not exactly drawn in M‘Coy’s figs. 5 and 5a. The carapace is elongate, sub-cylindrical, slightly convex on the sides, with an even elliptical anterior curve, and an oblique truncation posteriorly. There are 462 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— faint traces of longitudinal striz on the hollow impressions of the valves in the matrix, and there is a slight trace of the ventral rim. The large one is 45 mm. long (fig. 5); the smaller specimen (fig. 5a) 27 mm., is apparently broken behind, but does not show the double valve there as given in the figure; we cannot distinguish any “nuchal furrow,” nor is there any ‘‘ eye-spot”’: a mark consisting of two minute adventitious pits in the anterior third of one of the speci- mens, and a little hole in another, have been mistaken for it. Mr. Salter thought these little fossils were Molluscan ;' but they certainly may well claim to be Phyllopods. There are other specimens in the Cambridge Mus.; also two small individuals, one 19 mm. and the other only 10 mm. (marked //142) in length. In the Brit. Mus. there are four, rather large, but not well-preserved specimens (44342). All the above come from the Upper-Ludlow grey mi- caceous sandstone of Benson Knot, near Kendal, Westmoreland. 9. CERATIOCARIS GOBIIFORMIS, sp. nov. A form closely approaching C. solenoides in shape, but smaller, more acute in front, usually more vertically truncate behind, and much more convex on the ventral border, accompanies C. solenoides in the Upper-Ludlow sandstone of Benson Knot. One of the speci- mens marked 6/8, Camb. Mus., is 27 mm. long by 9 mm. high; one in the Brit. Mus., No. 44342, is 830 by 10 mm.; M. P. G. x +4; (Catal. 1878, p. 142) is 831 by 11mm. The valves seem to have been smooth. They distantly resemble in outline a deep-bodied, blunt- headed little fish, without its tail. It is possible that this may be a varietal or sexual form of C. solenoides, but it seems to be sufficiently well separated from its ally to require a distinctive name, so we refer to it as C. gobiiformis in our list. 10. Crratiocaris SALTERIANA, sp. nov. Six specimens in different states of preservation, from the Lower- Ludlow strata, indicate the existence of a distinct species of Ceratio- caris, having a nearly oblong carapace, ornamented with delicate but strong horizontal parallel lines, rather wide apart. Specimen Ludlow Mus. K., from Trippleton, near Leintwardine, has a carapace (23 x 12 mm.), five (?) abdominal segments (10mm.), and appendages, of which the style (pitted with bases of little spines) is imperfect, but a stylet measures 5 mm. Another carapace M. P. G. 22,, from Bow Bridge, Ludlow, well preserved, is 30 x 15 mm., straight on the back, rounded at the ends, the front being highest, and the greatest depth of the carapace being at the anterior third of the ventral margin. A hinder moiety of another carapace accompanies the last mentioned. In the Cambridge Univ. Mus. a/694 is a similar carapace nearly as well preserved (30 x 14mm.). The ventral margin has a distinct raised rim. The strie and interspaces differ in tint of colour on the cast. Some internal organs (teeth?) have caused a little break or 1 See Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 7.c. p. 159, mote; and Sedgwick's Lists of Kendal Fossils ; Wordsworth’s Letters on the Lakes, 1843-46, Appendix. Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 463 hole and a derangement of the stris in the antero-dorsal region. This specimen is from the Lower-Ludlow Shale at Dudley. Two specimens in the Oxford Mus. L. & M. evidently belong to this species. We wish to associate this rare but distinct species of Ceratiocaris with the name of our deceased friend, Mr. J. W. Salter, who worked so long and so well on these and allied Phyllopoda. 11. Creratrocaris cassia, Salter. 1860. Ceratiocaris cussia, Salter. A. M.N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 159. 1867. "3 a5 Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1877. a i H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 70. 1878, 5 Ea Huxley and Etheridge. Cat. C.S. Foss. M.P.G. p. 141. The best-preserved carapace-valve (22 x 11mm.) we have seen is Brit. Mus. 44342, from the Upper Ludlow of Benson Knot; Brit. Mus. 38400, from the Lower Ludlow of Leintwardine, is also good, but is crumpled so as to have its outline modified. Originally nearly oblong, slightly arched above and below, truncate with hollow curve behind, pointed and mucronate at the upper third in front. Ludlow Mus. H. and F. and M. P. G. x } (Catal. C. S. Foss. 1878, p. 141), seen by Mr. Salter, are not quite perfect. They are from a roadside quarry 8.H. of Trippleton Farm, near Leintwardine. Ludlow Mus. F. and Brit. Mus. 39400 retain traces of the abdomen: in the latter, 15 mm. long, without appendages ; in the former much less is seen, and a short telson (about 5mm.). The carapace is horizontally striate, and the telson is minutely pitted as if it had been spinose. The ventral margin had a delicate raised rim. Ludlow Mus. H., also from Trippleton, is a very small oval relic of a valve (18 x 7mm.) possibly of C. cassia, and a loose abdomen of 5-6 segments (16 mm.), with a neat little set of appendages, style, 6 mm., and two stylets, each 5 mm. Ludlow Mus. G. may be a modified carapace of C. cassia, no locality is recorded for it. 12. CeratiocaRis, sp. nov. ? Mus. Pract. Geol. x 3; (Catal. C. S. Foss. 1878, p. 142), labelled C. vesica, is a small specimen, having its carapace and abdomen pre- served in place. From the Lower Ludlow of Leintwardine. It differs very much from Physocaris vesica, although nearly of the same size. The carapace is subtriangular, 25 mm. long and 15 mm. deep at the middle of the ventral margin. The back is straight, but curved down at both ends to meet the steep upward slopes of the lower margin. The abdomen (15 mm.) comes out, as usual, from the upper part of the hinder region. It shows obscurely four segments (the ultimate one about 6 mm.), mostly striated obliquely. The ap- pendages have been broken off short. The carapace is somewhat crumpled, and is roughened anteriorly, probably by the presence of internal organs (such as teeth, etc.). It is possible that this may be a very young individual of C. stygia, to which it somewhat approximates by its subtriangular carapace, and its obliquely-striate segments. Otherwise it must be a distinct species. 464 Prof. T. Rupert Jones and Dr. H. Woodward— Specimen Lud. Mus. J. (from Trippleton, near Leintwardine) has a smaller but nearly similar carapace (22 x 12 mm.); nearly straight on the back, deeply curved below, and with almost equal dorsal angles in front and behind, but sharp instead of being blunt. 18. CERATIOCARIS ROBUSTA, Salter. 1851. Pterygotus i ae M‘Coy (in part). Brit. Palzeoz. Foss. fasc. i. p- 175, pl. 1 E. figs. 7¢, 7d. 1860. Ceratiocaris robustus, Salter. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 158. 1867. a a Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1873. 55 ar Salter. Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 164. 1877. i A H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. 1878. aA 53 Huxley and Etheridge. Cat. Camb. Sil. F. M.P.G. p- 142. This species was founded on the caudal appendages of a form the carapace of which has not yet been collated. The original speci- mens figured by M‘Coy and referred by Salter to a new species are in the Cambridge University Museum (a/925, fig. 7c; a/926, fig. 7d). The telson, 32 mm. long (longer than the figure), is straight, broadly ensiform, 6mm. broad at its base. The stylets, 20 mm. long, are also relatively broad and ensiform or sharp-blade-like. They all seem to have once been faintly fluted and ridged or costulated. They were from Leintwardine (Lower Ludlow). Two similar specimens, collected by the late Mr. Lightbody in Upper Ludlow beds, “above Ashley Moor,” are in the Owens Col- leve Museum, Manchester. One of the sets, however, has the stylets nearly as long as the style: whether this was due to variation of growth or to accident, we cannot now decide. B. M. 59404, from Leintwardine, belongs to the same species, though the style is rather longer (85 mm.). Also M. P. G. zy (Catal. 1878, p. 142), from Leintwardine, seems to belong to this Ryan It shows two segments and appendages. Style, 40 mm. ; one stylet present, broad and ensiform, 25 mm. long. Specimens A. and H. in the Oxford Museum are good examples of C. robusta, of rather large size, the style of one being 45 mm. long, and of the other 35 mm. Some segments also are in place, and show a neat imbricate ornament of angular raised lines, passing downwards on the sides into delicate oblique wrinkles. 5S. and T. in the same Museum are short trifids with broad style and stylets agreeing more closely with M‘Coy’s original specimens. They are faintly fluted, and there are on one style two rows of the bases of little prickles. All from the Ludlow formation. Var. longa. Specimen Ludlow Museum M. is a broad and much longer telson (at least 75 mm. long), with linear ornament, from the Lower Lud- low at Bow Bridge, Ludlow. A small part of a slightly curved ensiform stylet shows from beneath it. This may be either a variety of C. robusta, or possibly a distinct species, near to C. papilio. 14. CERATIOOARIS, sp. nov. ? In Owens College Museum, Manchester, is a very delicate little Notes on Species of Ceratiocaris. 465 set of caudal appendages. The style (central) shows a rounded section at its insertion, about 2 mm. wide, is 12 mm. long, tapering gently to a sharp point. The lateral stylets are 8 mm. each. All are delicately ridged and fluted. From the Lower-Ludlow or Aymestry Limestone, on the old road at Mocktree; collected by the late Mr. Lightbody. Mus. Pract. Geol. p 22 (Catal. C. 8. Foss. 1878, p. 118), from the Lower Ludlow at Leintwardine, is a somewhat similar little set of appendages (three spines). ‘The middle one is the longest, 8 mm., the others 6 mm. These may belong to a very young condition of some of the species above mentioned, or possibly to a distinct species. In the British Museum one of those marked 58878, from Linburn, near Muirkirk, shows a style (21 mm.), tapering, with circular sec- tion at base, and apparently smooth, together with a corresponding attached stylet, 16mm. long. Were these not smooth, they might be referred to the same species as the foregoing smaller specimens. This set differs from the appendages of either C. papilio or C. stygia. 15. Ceratrocaris DEcoRA, Phillips. 1848. Onchus decorus, Phillips. Mem. Geol. Surv. vol. ii. part 1, p. 226, pl. 30, figs. 5, 5a. 1867. Ceratiocaris decorus, Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1877. a 3 H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 70. This is a small obscure style (?), 13 mm. long, from the Ludlow beds, of Freshwater-East, Pembrokeshire. 16. CrratrocaRis (?) ENSIS, Salter. 1860. Ceratiocaris ? ensis, Salter. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 159. 1867. e 5 Salter. In Siluria, 3rd edit. p. 516. : 1877. $5 i H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. In the Grindrod Collection, Oxford Museum, specimen O, we find the original fossil described by Mr. Salter in 1860, namely, a large telson nearly six inches long, tapering, curved, lying on its side, and flattened, crenato-serrate on its convex (dorsal) edge, pitted along its inner (concave) margin, thickened at its proximal or articular end, sharp at the other; with a slight ridge along the middle of the ex- posed face. From the Lower Ludlow at Leintwardine, near Ludlow. 17. Crratiocaris (?) Lava, Salter. 1866. Aymenocaris ? latus, Salter. Mem. Geol. Surv. vol. iii. p. 240. 1866. Ceratiocaris ? latus, Salter. bid. p. 294, woodcut fig. 5. 1867. ie An Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1873. ” 55 Salter. Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 16. 1877. »” 00 H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. The specimen is in the Cambridge Museum (b/299 ?), and shows 5 (2?) abdominal segments crushed endwise, so as to be shortened (12 mm.) and widened (28 mm.). The woodcut referred to is a restoration. he specific, and even generic, relationship is obscure. From the Tremadoe Slate, at Garth, east of Portmadoc; collected by Mr. D. Homfray. DECADE III.—YVOL. II.—NO. X, 30 466 Prof. Jones and Dr. Woodward—Species of Ceratiocaris. 18, CrratrocaRis (?) INSPERATA, Salter. 1866. Ceratiocaris ? insperatus, Salter. Mem. Geol. Survey, vol. iii. p. 295. 1867. 5 iy Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1873. . 55 Salter. Cat. C. S. Foss. p. 16. 1877. x 3 H. Woodward. Cat. B. F. Crust. p. 71. In the Cambridge Museum (4/275). Obscure remnant of an ultimate abdominal segment, with clear indications of a trifid ap- pendage; the telson or central spine seems to be the longest, but all three are broken off above their points. The telson is about 35 mm. long. From dark-grey shales between the Lower and Upper Tre- madoc Slates in a railway cutting above the village of Penmorfa, Portmadoe. Collected by Mr. D. Homfray. Mr. Salter thought that it belonged to the same species as the foregoing. 19. Crratiocaris (?). An obscure hinder moiety (25 x 12 mm.) of a carapace possibly referable to Ceratiocaris, is in the Mus. Pract. Geol. 42, Catal. C. S. Foss. 1878, p. 72. From the ‘‘ Upper Llandovery; Onny River.” 20. CERATIOCARIS (?) PERORNATA, Salter. 1878. Ceratiocaris? perornatus (Salter MS.), Huxley and Etheridge. Catal. Cambrian and Sil. Foss. M. P. G., p. 142. An obscure form, known from only three small fragments, two of which are pitted all over, and one is tuberculate, like an Echinoderm spine. From Benson Knot, Kendal. : 21. Crratiocaris (?) ELLIprioa, M‘Coy. 1849. Ceratiocaris ellipticus, M‘Coy. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 2, vol. iv. p. 413. 1851. A a M‘Coy. Brit. P. Foss. fase. i. p. 137, pl. 1 E. fig.3. 1854. oe a Morris. Catal. Brit. Foss. 2nd edit. p. 103. 1859. Pe op Salter. In Siluria, 2nd (3rd) edit. p. 538. 1860. 33 #3 Salter, Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 157. 1867. s 53 Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 516. 1873. i ap Salter. Catal. Camb. Sil. Foss. p. 178. 1877. se Bs H. Woodward. Catal. Brit. Foss. Crust. p. 71. This interesting species, one of the first two established, is repre- sented in the Cambridge Museum by specimen 6/15 (M‘Coy’s fig. 8), and in the Museum of Practical Geology by 32 (Catal. 1878, p. 118) and X 335 (Catal. p. 142). The carapace is long-ovate in outline, not very convex, greatest convexity of surface and curvature of ventral margin ‘‘at about one-third from the anterior end”; obliquely rounded in front; obliquely truncate at the upper portion of the hinder end. There is a spot like a definite ocular tubercle in the anterior fourth and above the median line of each valve, and this gives it a distant likeness to a guinea-pig’s profile. The surface is neatly marked with delicate, longitudinal, parallel lines, rather far apart. The published figure of the specimen, b/15 (82 mm. long and 18mm. high) is reversed, and drawn too angular behind. It came from the Upper Ludlow Sandstone of Benson Knot. Specimen M. P. G. 22 is from the Lower-Ludlow beds of Leintwardine, near Ludlow, and is not quite so large nor so well preserved as 6/16. Specimen M. P. G. x +45, from the Upper-Ludlow of Combe Wood, Presteign, is larger and more ovate or elliptical than the others, but, unfortunately, is imperfect. The last two have been incorrectly Notices of Memoirs—The Bohemian Chalk Formation. 467 labelled C. Murchisoni. In 1860 Mr. Salter thought that C. elliptica was only a badly-preserved variety of CO. inornata (A. M.N. H. l.c.), but in the Catal. Cambr. Sil. Foss. p. 178, he recognized it as “quite distinct.” The above-mentioned three specimens supply the only evidence of an eye-spot in these British Ceratiocaridoid Phyllopods.’ It is not only a generic character distinguishing them from Ceratiocaris, but an important family distinction, of which, for the present, we do not propose to estimate the value. 22. PuHysocaRIS VESICA, Salter. 1860. Ceratiocaris (Physocaris) vesica, Salter. Ann. Mag. N. H. ser. 3, vol. v. p- 159, woodcut fig. 1865. Ceratiocaris ( Physocaris) vesica, Salter and H. Woodward. Catal. Chart. Foss. Crust. p. 17, fig. 8. 1867. Ceratiocaris vesica, Salter. In Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. p. 517. 1877. Ceratiocaris (Physocaris) vesica, H. Woodward. Cat. Brit. Foss. C. p. 72. 1878. Ceratiocaris vesica, Huxley and Etheridge. Cat. C. S. Foss. p. 142. Of this curious fossil Phyllopod, described carefully by Mr. Salter in 1860, only one specimen is known—namely, Ludlow Museum U. It differs slightly from Mr. Salter’s figure, being larger, and showing an appearance of having been probably broken away to a little extent just above the front, so as to leave a notch and angle, which constitute the prominence in the woodcut figure. If continued over this notch, the outline of the shell would possibly be that of a broad oval; whereas now it is broadly and obliquely pyriform (25 x 20mm.). The relative position of the animal is supposed to be indicated by the telson occupying the upper part of the abdominal appendages attached to the fossil. There are 8-9 segments in the abdomen, which appears to come out from the lower and hinder quarter of the carapace, and is very slender near its origin, but higher at its ultimate segment (5 mm. long); altogether 30 mm. The telson itself is 11 mm. long. One lateral spine (stylet), 7 mm., is present. The whole animal is about two inches long. It was collected by the late Mr. Salwey in the Lower Ludlow at Leintwardine, and Mr. Salter at first registered it as Ceratiocaris inflata. ISO MEALO As Sh) 9 Gas Yes mast WKS BES jp Stupres in THE District oF THE BonemiAN CuaLK FormATION. Tue Wetssenperc anD Maznirz Scursts. By Dr. Anton Fritscon, Prague. : Stupien 1m Geprere pEeR BoumiscHen Krermperormation. Dre WEISSENBERGER tunp Maxnnirzer Scurcuren. Mit 155 Holz- schnitten. Diz Isrrscurcuren. Mit 182 Textfiguren. Von Dr. Anton Frc. (Archiv der naturw. Landesdurchforschung von Bohmen, IV. Band, No. 1., V. Band, No. 2.) N these two memoirs Dr. Fritsch gives, in considerable detail, a petrographical and palxontological description of three of the } The “ ocular tubercles,’’ mentioned in the footnote at p. 286, Siluria, 3rd (4th) edit. 1867, are doubtless really due to the presence of “‘ teeth’’ within the valves. 468 Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. eight divisions into which the Cretaceous series of Bohemia has been divided. Numerous profiles.of sections and well-executed figures of the principal fossils accompany the text. From a slight sketch of the Cretaceous strata as a whole, it seems to present the characters of a littoral or comparatively shallow-water deposit. Although no very close comparison can be made between it and the deeper-water deposits of the same formation in France and England, yet it has been ascertained that the Bohemian Cretaceous series corresponds only to the Cenomanian, Turonian and part of the Senonian, and therefore the Gault and the divisions of the Lower Cretaceous are absent below; and its highest zone is below that of Belemnitella quadrata. By Prof. Krejci and the author, the Bohemian series has been divided, chiefly on paleontological grounds, into eight divisions, which, with the exception of the lowest, are of marine origin. The lowest or Perucer division con- sists of sandstones containing a rich Flora and some sparse remains of Verbebrates, Molluscs, and Insects. These beds rest unconformably on Silurian or Carboniferous strata, and are of Lower Cenomanian age. The division above, or Korycaner beds, are limestones, sandstones, and conglomerates, characterized by Trigonia sulcataria, Pecten asper, and Ostrea diluviana. Next above are the Weissenberg and Malnitzer beds, principally of sandstones—some glauconitic—of Turonian age. The former of these divisions contains numerous fish- remains, many of which are identical with those of the Chalk at Lewes; some of the other fossils present are also common to the French Craie Chloritée. The Iser, Teplitzer, Priesener and Chlomeker divisions are regarded as Senonian. From the first of these the author enumerates 175 species of fossils; the details of the latter yet remain to be worked out. RAV Lew Ss. Memoirs on Extinct Nortn-Amrerican VERTEBRATES, by Professor E. D. Corps, in the American Naturalist.1 (HWxtinct Rhinoceroses and their Allies, Dec. 1879; Extinct Cats, Dec. 1880; Hxtinct Dogs, March, 1885; Permian Batrachia, Jan. 1884; The Creodonta, March and April, 1884; The Tertiary Marsupialia, July, 1884; The Condylarthra, Aug. and Sept. 1884; The Amblypoda, Dec. 1884 and Jan. 1885; The Lemuroidea and Insectivora, May, 1885.) N this valuable series of contributions to a knowledge of the marvellous extinct Vertebrate Fauna of North America, Prof. Cope informs us in a letter that he has intended to give a résumé in a somewhat popular form of work which either has been or will be published in fuller detail as opportunity occurs. Before briefly noticing a few of the more interesting forms, we must premise that we are scarcely prepared to accept the extremely complex classification of the Mammalia which Prof. Cope propounds ; 1 We have only space to cite a few from this large series of memoirs. , Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. 469 and that in our own opinion it is preferable, as fresh discoveries indicate forms connecting groups widely separated at the present day, to unite those existing groups rather than to form fresh ones for the reception of the intermediate forms. Thus, taking the ungulated mammals as an instance, we find that on page 1121 of the memoir on the ‘Amblypoda,’ there are four so-called orders respectively named the Diplarthra, the Amblypoda, the Taxeopoda, and the Proboscidea; all of which we think are best included in the order Ungulata, as it is now very generally employed by English paleontologists. Even if this view were not accepted, it would surely have been preferable to retain the term Ungulata for the two suborders Perissodactyla and Artiodactyla (the Ungulata Vera of some Hnglish writers), rather than to invent for them the entirely new term Diplarthra, in which guise they are scarcely recognizable by the student of recent zoology. Similarly the recent Hyracoidea are relegated to a minor group of the so-called order Taxeopoda, when ‘we should have thought it would have been better to retain the former well-known term in the larger sense, and include in it (of course presuming that the affinity be a real one) the allied fossil forms. Another instance occurs in the case of Hycenodon and a host of allied extinct forms, which (together with some of the recent Insectivora) Prof. Cope (‘The Creodonta,’ op. cit.) refers to the sub- order Creodonta of a large heterogeneous order Bunotheria ;—the remaining Insectivora (judging from an earlier work) being re- garded as another suborder of equal value with the Creodonta. Now we confess that we are unable to accept the division of the modern Insectivora as here proposed ; and we think that as Hycno- don and its allies may be pretty safely regarded as ancestral forms connecting the modern Carnivora and the Insectivora by almost insensible gradations, it would be preferable that they should be affiliated to one or other of these orders,—our inclination tending to the Carnivora. This appears to us as a more advantageous plan than creating a suborder of a new order, which, after all, cannot be rigidly defined. That the result of this affiliation would be the impossi- bility of drawing any definite line of demarcation between the Carnivora and the Insectivora, we are fully prepared to admit ; and if any change were to be made in reference to these orders, we should prefer the inclusion of the latter, as a suborder, in the former. Regarding, then, the so-called Creodonta as affiliated to the Carnivora, it may be remarked that these early insectivoroid forms lacked the grooved astragalus, and the compound scapho- lunar of the modern Carnivores; the absence of these specialized characters being precisely what we should expect to find in early generalized forms, which may have been ancestral both to the Carnivora and the Insectivora. In regard to his families and genera, Prof. Cope is logically con- sistent to his views of the value of ordinal groups, and consequently makes them more numerous than we ourselves should be disposed to consider advisable. After all, however, these different views of classification are but matters of comparatively minor moment, which 470 Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. depend to a great extent on the mode of thought of each individual writer—a more complex .system appearing to one mind to convey best the idea of mutual affinities, which would be equally well conveyed to another by a simpler arrangement. With these preliminary remarks we may proceed to a short notice of the various memoirs quoted above. Rhinoceroses and their Allies——The Rhinoceroses are divided into the two families Hyracodontide and Rhinocerotide (Rhinoceridz) ; the latter being split up into the genera Aceratherium (1), Dicera- therium (2), Aphelops (8), Ceratorhinus (4), Zalabis (5), Rhinoceros (6), Atelodus (7), and Celodonta (8). Zalabis was made for the reception of the Siwalik Rhinoceros sivalensis, but the characters on which it was founded have been shown in the publications of the Geological Survey of India to have originated in a mistake. We are inclined to follow the view of Prof. Flower in including Nos. 4, 7, 8, and perhaps 2, in Rhinoceros. The European species of Acera- therium have no nasal horn, but are furnished with four anterior digits; while the American hornless forms grouped under Aphelops are distinguished by having only three anterior digits, and thereby agree with the existing species of Rhinoceros. Using Rhinoceros in the wider sense indicated above, we are inclined to include Aphelops in Aceratherium ; and we must then acknowledge that there is scarcely more than an arbitrary distinction between the latter and Rhinoceros, although its retention as a genus may be advisable. The logical sequence of cutting down the genera of Prof. Cope’s Rhinocerotidee from eight to two, and the consequent relegation of his generic characters to a minor value, will be the inclusion of his Hyracodon- tidee in the same family. Extinct Cats.—The cat-like animals Prof. Cope divides into the Nimravide and Felide ; the former comprising primitive generalized forms now entirely extinct, and the latter both the extinct sabre- toothed Tigers and all existing Cats. Here, again, we are afraid we must differ from the author as regards his separation of these two families, and his retention of Dr. Gray’s division of the existing Cats (excluding Oynelurus) into several genera. The most generalized animal which can be called a “‘ Cat” in the widest sense of the word seems to be the Proglurus of the French Phosphorites, which pre- sents many musteline affinities, and indicates how difficult it is to form any accurate family divisions in the older mammals. From this form there is a gradual advance through the genera Pseudelurus, Archelurus, Aflurogale, Pogonodon, etc. (most of which have more teeth than existing Cats), to the sabre-toothed Tigers and their modern allies. The sabre-toothed Tigers (which Prof. Cope divides into Drepa- nodon and Smilodon, but which we prefer to group together under the older name Machezrodus) are well represented in America ; and all European museums must envy the magnificent skeleton of Macherodus (Smilodon) necator figured in the frontispiece to this memoir. The phylogeny of the Cats, as worked out by Professor Cope and Dr. Filhol, indicates very fully the former history of the group. Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. 471 Extinct Dogs—The Dogs are included by Prof. Cope in a single family—the Canide—which has been shown by other writers to pass so imperceptibly by means of the genera Dinocyon and Hyanarctos into the Urside, that it seems impossible to draw any distinction between the two. Prof. Cope (p. 286) recognizes eight extinct * American genera of the family, mainly distinguished by dental characters of more or less importance. The Miocene European genus Amphicyon is represented by several species; and the same may be said of the genus Cynodictis, which Prof. Cope identifies with Gale- cynus, Owen ; the latter appearing to ourselves to be indistinguish- able from Canis, and of later age than Cynodictis. The peculiar American genus Ai/urodon appears to indicate a transition towards the Hyzenoid Ictitherium ; and since Cynodictis comes extremely close to some of the Viverridee, we learn how very intimate was the former connexion between the now well-marked families of the Hyznide, Viverride, Canide, and Urside. The Creodonta.—Vhe serial position of the forms included in this group have been already discussed in our preliminary remarks. Prof. Cope includes in it the Mesonychidez (1), Hyzenodontide (2), Chrysochloride (3), Centetide (4), Leptictide (5), Potamogalidee (Mythomyide) (6), Talpide (7), Oxyznide (8), and Miacide (9). Nos. 3, 4, 6, 7, are existing families of Insectivora, the remaining five being extinct. The family Oxyeenide includes the genera Pterodon and Oxyena; but the former appears so closely allied to Hyzenodon that we are inclined to place all three in the same family. Oxyena and Hyenodon occur in the Lower Tertiaries of EKurope and America, the latter being also represented in the higher Tertiaries of India. The type genus of the first family is Mesonya—evidently a very generalized form, with the premolar and molar teeth but little differentiated from one another. Space only admits of noticing a few of the more interesting forms of the other families. The genus Stypolophus, Cope, is included in the Leptictide, and is identical with the European Cynohyenodon, Filhol, which Prof. Gaudry iden- tifies with Proviverra, Rutimeyer—the latter name having the priority over both the others. Prof. Cope (p. 351) mentionsaslight difference in the form of the fourth upper premolar of the typical Proviverra, but we are not inclined to regard this as of more than specific value. The author regards the Leptictide as the ancestral forms of the modern Centetide. The upper dentition of Stypolophus is very like that of Pterodon, but the lower is quite distinct, and it is compared by Dr. Filhol to that of the Opossums, while its brain is that of an Insectivore. It is probable that we may follow Prof. Huxley? in regarding this genus as related both to the Hyzenodontide and the Centetide. Another interesting genus included by Professor Cope in the Leptictide is that to which he applies the name Esthonyz, but which has been shown in a late number of this Macazine to be apparently identical with the European Eocene genus 1 In Prof. Cope’s table Canis is erroneously included among the extinct genera. 2 Proc. Zool. Soc. 1880, p. 284. 472 Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. Platycherops. The author thinks that this genus may be regarded as an ancestral form of the Hrinaceide. The upper molars and the hinder premolars are triangular in form, and of equal com- plexity. In the family Miacide we have several genera, among which we may mention Miacis and Didimictis; this family Prof. Cope regards as making the nearest approach to the modern Carni- vora Vera, the lower jaw being furnished with a true ‘ carnassial”’ tooth. This approximation fully confirms our own view as to the impossibility of satisfactorily distinguishing the so-called Creodonta from the Carnivora Vera on the one side and the Insectivora on the other. ; The Lemuroidea and the Insectivora.—In this memoir the author says that it appears impossible to draw any satisfactory distinction on ‘the evidence of the skulls and teeth alone between the two groups mentioned—the latter including, it may be presumed, only those forms which the author does not class in his Creodonta. This con- fession appears to us to be another argument against the acceptance of the author’s order Bunotheria (of which the Insectivora, as restricted by him, form a suborder) ; the retention of which appears to us merely to obscure the relations of its different members. In reference to Prof. Cope’s so-called Hyopsodus vicarius,—this is a genus which in a paper read before the Geological Society on June 24th has been shown to be probably identical with the English Upper Eocene genus Microcherus, whose affinities appear to be decidedly Insectivorine. Lower jaws of the genera Notharctos and Tomitherium are figured, and appear to indicate forms allied to the Lemurine Necrolemur and Adapis. A genus represented by species of small size, and named Anaptomorphus, is considered to be allied to the existing Lemurine Tarsiusof Java. In the Insectivora Prof. Cope in- cludes the Huropean Hocene genus Arctocyon, on account of the form of its molars, and also classes in the same family the American Ache- nodon. With regard to the former we are fain to confess that its affinities seem so generalized that it appears to us to be impossible to assign it any very definite position, and we should have preferred to have placed it among the primitive Carnivores without indicating its relationship too closely. When, indeed, we reflect how very diffi- cult it has been to assign living forms like Chiromys and Galeopi- thecus, where we have the whole animal before us, to their proper serial position, it surely cannot be expected that we can in all cases refer fossil mammals to a definite position when at the best we have only more or less perfect portions of the skeleton to guide us. Ache- nodon appears to us to be a form not improbably connecting the buno- dont ungulates like Hlotheriwm (with which it has been classed) with the unguiculate mammals; its affinity to the latter being indicated by the nature of the articulation of the lower jaw. We totally fail however, to see why it should be categorically referred to the Insec- tivora. The Tertiary Marsupialia.—Our author divides the extinct Mar- supials into the trituberculate, quadrituberculate, and multitubercu- Reviews—Prof. Cope’s Extinct Vertebrates of N. America. 478 late groups, from the characters of their upper molar dentition. The first is equivalent to Owen’s Sarcophaga; and among it may be men- tioned the European and North American HKocene genus Peratherium, which Prof. Gaudry identifies with Didelphys. The second group agrees with Owen’s Poephaga, and is unrepresented in the Tertiaries of North America. The Multituberculata is divided into the Trity- lodontide, represented by the Mesozoic Stereognathus of Hurope and Tritylodon of South Africa; the Polymastodontide, represented by the American Eocene Polymastodon; and the Plagiaulacid, repre- sented by the Huropean Mesozoic Plagiaulax and the Kocene Neo- plagiaulac. A genealogical table is given on page 695, in which it is sought to derive Thylacoleo through Plagiaulax from Tritylodon ; but it appears to us that the peculiar structure of the characteristic tooth of Plagiaulaxz and its extremely small size must be an effectual bar to this view. The Amblypoda.—We have already given our opinion in favour of regarding this so-called order as a suborder of the Ungulata; it is divided into the sections Taligrada, Pantodonta, and Dinocerata. The first is represented by the single genus Pantolambda, characterized by the presence of a “‘ head” to the astragalus. The second (for which we should prefer the name Coryphodontia) includes the widely-distributed Coryphodon Estacodon, Metalophodon, Bathmodon, etc. ; and is charac- terized by the presence of a third trochanter to the femur—a feature by which it is much more closely related to the Perissodactyla than the third section, in which it is absent. The latter section having been fully noticed in this Macazinu, in a review of Prof. Marsh’s Dinocerata, does not call for further reference on this occasion; a number of figures of Loxophodon occur in it. Permian Batrachia.—Having already exceeded the space we had originally assigned to this notice, we must pass the present memoir with the briefest reference. It contains descriptions of several forms belonging to the group called by Prof. Cope the Rhachitomi, but which we think might be more advantageously known as the Arche- gosauria; it being in our opinion far preferable to take group-names from the genera which have been the longest established and are the best known. The peculiar structure of the vertebral column in this group is ingeniously illustrated by the folds caused by flexure in the sleeve of a coat. Figures are given of the crania of T'rimerorhachis, Eryops, and Cricotus ; all of which appear to be peculiar to America. That this group had originally a very wide extension in space is proved by the occurrence of representatives in the Permian of Europe (Actinodon and Archegosaurus), in the Karoo system of South Africa (Rhytidosteus), and in the Gondwana system of India (Gond- wanosaurus). All the members of the group are characterized by the imperfect ossification of the centra of the vertebral column; each of which consists of two lateral moieties, an azygos basal moiety, and in some cases of a fourth element corresponding to the “ wedge- bone” of the Rhynchocephalia. In the foregoing notice we have not spared adverse criticism where we thought there was cause for the same, and we venture to think 474 Reports and Proceedings—British Association. that such criticism is of itself a proof of our high opinion of the work before us, and of its importance in regard to a full knowledge of the chain of Mammalian existence. We congratulate Prof. Cope on the completion of so much good work, and hope that it is but the earnest of further labours. R. L. Ete @ iS Aaa Ee, @ Cae Sie Sr ied British Association FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. Firty-rirta Merrtine, ABERDEEN, 1885. Section C.—Grotoey. President; Prof. J. W. Jupp, F.R.S., Sec. G.S. Titles of Papers read September 10th—16th, 1885. The President’s Address:—On some Great Problems in Highland Geology. H. J. Johnston-Lavis.—Report on the Voleanic Phenomena of Vesuvius. Professor J. Milne.—Report on the Harthquake Phenomena of Japan. Professor G. A. Lebour.—On a Slight Shock of recent Harthquake in Sunderland. Dr. Tempest Anderson.—The Volcanoes of Auvergne illustrated by Photographs shown by the Oxyhydrogen Lantern. Professor E. Hull.—Notice of an outline Geological Map of Lower Egypt, Arabia Petraea, and Palestine. Professor £. Hull.—On the Cause of the Extreme Dissimilarity between the Faunas of the Red Sea and Mediterranean, not- withstanding their recent connection. (Read in Biology, Sec- tion D.) Professor E. Hull.—On the Origin of the Fishes of the Sea of Galilee. (Read in Biology, Section D.) Professor H. Hull.—On the Occurrence of Lower Old Red Conglome- rate in the Promontory of the Fanad, North Donegal. Professor T. G. Bonney.— On Bastite-Serpentine and Troktolite in Aberdeenshire, with a note on the Rock of the Black Dog. Professor W. I. Macadam.—The Aberdeenshire Diatomaceous De- posits; their Extent, Chemical Composition, and Industrial Uses ; with Notes on similar Deposits elsewhere in Scotland. W. Whitaker.—List of Works on the Geology, Mineralogy, and Paleontology of Staffordshire. Lieut.-Colonel Rk. L. Playfuir.—On the Re-discovery of Lost Nu- midian Marbles in Algeria and Tunis. C. E. De Rance and W. Topley.—Report of the Committee on the Erosion of the Sea Coasts of England and Wales. W. Watson.—The Chasm called “The Black Rock of Kiltearn.” Rev. Dr. Davidson.—The Bass of Inverurie, a remainder of an ancient Alluvial Bed. Dr. H. W. Crosskey.—Report of the Committee on the Erratic Blocks of England and Wales. Reports and Proceedings— British Association. 475 Professor H. Carvill Lewis.—The Direction of Glaciation as ascer- tained by the Shapes of the Striz. W. F. Stanley—Proposed conditions to account for a former Glacial Period in Great Britain existing under similar Meteorological Conditions to those that rule at the present time. Dr. H. Hicks. —On the Fynnon Beuno and Cae-Gwyn Bone-Caves, North Wales. Rev. Dr. Hugh Mitchell.— Exhibition of Specimens of Fish from the Lower Old Red Sandstone of Forfarshire. J. Gordon Phillips.—The Elgin Sandstones. Dr. kh. H. Traquair.—Preliminary Note on a new Reptile recently discovered at New Spynie, near Elgin. J. S. Gardner.—Report on the Fossil Plants of the Tertiary and Secondary Beds of the United Kingdom. Professor C. Lapworth.—The Great Highland Controversy; its Causes, Course, and Consequences. B. N. Peach and J. Horne.—The Geology of Durness and Eriboll, with special reference to the Highland Controversy. Professor T. G. Bonney.—Preliminary Note on some Traverses of the Crystalline District of the Central Alps. Professor H. Carvill Lewis.—Some Examples of Pressure-Fluxion in Pennsylvania. A. Harker.—On Slaty Cleavage and Allied Rock-structures; with special reference to the mechanical theories of their origin. G. H. Kinahan.—On Irish Metamorphic Rocks. John Guun.—A Description of the Rocks of Central Caithness. Professor A. Renard.—On some Rock Specimens from the Islands of the Fernando Nohronda Group. Rev. HE. Hill.—The Average Density of Meteorites compared with that of the Harth. Professor Henry Drummond.—Notes on a recent examination of the Geology of Hast Central Africa, from the Zambesi to the Nyassa Tanganyika Plateau. Dr. Max Schuster—Some Results of the Crystallographic Study of Danburite. Sir R. Owen.—American Evidences of Hocene Mammals of the “ Plastic Clay ” Period. Sir k. Owen.—Exhibition of a Restoration of Tinoceras. Professor O. C. Marsh.— Discovery of Anurous Amphibia in the Jurassic Deposits of America. Professor T. R. Jones.—Report on the Fossil Phyllopoda of the Paleozoic Rocks. Dr. Rk. H. Traquair.—On the Distribution of Fossil Fishes in the Hstuarine Beds of the Carboniferous Formation. Hugh Miller.—Some results of a detailed Survey of the old Coast- L nes near Throndhjem, Norway. J. Melvin.—The Parallel Roads of Lochaber. B. N. Peach and J. Horne.—F urther Evidence of the existence of the Ice in the North Sea Basin, based on the Exploration of the Wyville-Thomson Ridge by Dr. John Murray; and on the 476 Obituary—Henri Mine Edwards. occurrence of Shelly Boulder-clay in North Ronaldshay, found by Dr. Traill. H. Cadell.—Recent Advances in West Lothian Geology. Professor F. Clowes.—Barium Sulphate as a cementing material in Sandstone. A. G. Cameron.—Notes on Fullers’ Earth and its applications. Dr. J. C. Howden.—Notes on the Glacial Deposits of Montrose. Alex. Ross.—Notes on the Rocks of St. Kilda. C. E. De Rance.—Report of the Committee on the Circulation of Underground Waters. W. Whitaker.—On Deep Borings at Chatham. A Contribution to the Deep-seated Geology of the London Basin. W. Whitaker.—On the Waterworks at Goldstone Bottom, Brighton. CORRESPONDENCE. ‘se ie al FOSSIL SLUGS. Srr,—A correspondent has inquired whether any fossil slugs are known. Having unfortunately mislaid his letter, perhaps you will kindly permit me to answer the question in your pages. Testacella is recorded from the Middle and Upper Miocene and Pliocene. Limax from the Lower Miocene, upwards. Amalia from the Upper Miocene. Parmacellina from the Upper Hocene. Arion ater from the Pleistocene. Vitrina, Succinea, Hyalinia are found fossil in the Tertiaries, but scarcely perhaps enter the category of “slugs,” a rather vague term. Probably many other slugs are known as fossils in America, but it is of course only genera provided with some sort of shell that can possibly leave behind any fossil remains. 7, Damer Terrace, CuHEusna, Sept. 14, 1885. J. STARKIE GARDNER. OSU PASE Na. HENRI MILNE EDWARDS. Born Oct. 23, 1800; Dizp Jury 29, 1885. With regret we record in our present issue another loss to Science —the loss of a Naturalist who for more than sixty years devoted himself with unswerving perseverance to the unravelment of the mysterious and wondrous phenomena of animal life: and we shall not be overstepping the limits of our record by preserving in its pages a brief sketch of the work of a man who, while ranking as a chief among zoologists, carried his researches into the domain of palzontology also. Henri Milne Edwards, though born at Bruges—on October 28, 1800—was of English parentage. His father, Lieutenant-Colonel Hdwards, had settled in that city after successful operations as a planter in Jamaica. His mother, Elizabeth Vaux, a second wife, Obituary—-Henri Milne Edwards. 477 claimed descent from Sir Nicholas Vaux of Harrowden, first Baron Vaux. Henri was his father’s twenty-seventh child. During the incarceration of Colonel Edwards in Belgium, on suspicion of aiding the escape of some prisoners, Henri was placed in the care of his eldest brother William, the eminent physiologist. Most reputations may be traced to the fostering of early inclinations, and that of Henri Milne Edwards had its incipience in a scientific analysis he essayed in his boyhood of Buffon’s Histoire des Animaux. Educated for the medical profession, but dividing his leisure between painting and music, he took his M.B. degree at Paris in July, 1823, in which year he married Laure, daughter of Colonel Trézel. This union, which was one of affection, stimulated Edwards in the noble aims of his career. Thus early he addressed several memoirs to the Academy of Sciences, Paris, one of which, carefully elaborated with the assistance of F. Vavasseur, on the Influence du systéme nerveux sur la digestion stomacale, attracted considerable notice. It was a subject he continued later on in his mémoire, with G. Breschet, on the phénoménes de la digestion. Another paper printed at this dawning period (1825) deserves mention. It was his Mémoire sur la structure élémentaire des principausx tissus organiques des animaux. 'Two years later the necessities of an increasing family further stimulated his exertions. He published elementary treatises on medicine, and, conjointly with Vavasseur, the well-known Manuel de matiére médicale, translated into the principal Huropean languages. Hdwards’s passion for the study of Natural History at this time developed itself, and the numerous and admirable works which he brought out year by year threw new light on many of the problems of animal life. Hitherto, naturalists had been content to base their work on exterior characteristics, and the new and more philosophic departure in- augurated by Cuvier, namely, that in order to judge of the true relationship of animals, all their organs must be well understood, was followed up by Edwards with keenness and activity, especially in regard to modes of development; and the study of comparative anatomy and comparative physiology, pari passu, thus started, has been since accepted as the only true method of investigation in scientific research. Hdwards may be said to have taken the lead in biological inquiry, and to have pioneered the geographical distribution of the lower forms of animal life. In order to arrive at a reason- able understanding of the plan governing the constitution of the animal kingdom he endeavoured to judge of causes by their effects ; not that, for a single moment, he says, did he believe himself to be able to divine the mother-thought from which emanated the vast conception of life, nor to determine the route followed by the Gruat Autor in the execution of His work. But Edwards went thus far to declare that, though he found that organisms are not really identical, the first condition imposed upon Nature in the formation of animals appears to be diversity of productions. It was his com- prehensive and analytical method of exploitation constantly applied which realized the laws presiding over the organization of animated nature—laws which, put by him on a sure foundation, must be 478 Obituary— Henri Milne Edwards. understood by naturalists of the future. Hdwards’s life forms a trophy of laurels won in the prosecution of these views. In the year 1826 he commenced with J. V. Audouin a series of researches on the anatomy and zoology of animals of the coasts of France, which he visited more particularly to study living forms and to investigate habits; and before the year had expired he gave the result of these researches in a work entitled Littoral de la France, a great part of which, concerned with annelids, was eulogized by Cuvier. The following year, in collaboration with the same naturalist, he published the remarkable studies in experimental physiology: Recherches anatomiques et physiologiques sur la circula- tion dans les crustacés —a work which obtained in 1828 the prize for physiology given by the Academy of Sciences. By this inquiry, as declared by Cuvier, he enriched the fauna of France with new and curious species, and zoology generally with interesting observations. The results were submitted to the Academy in July and November, 1829, and they form the subject of an elaborate report presented in November, 1830, by Cuvier, Dumeril, and Latreille, in which the first idea of zones of marine life was promulgated. The great principle discovered by these researches was that, the more an animal exhibits in its organs a division of labour, the higher it is in the scale of organization ; and they obtained for Edwards the credit of being the founder of the morphology of crustaceous animals. Moreover, his work became the standard authority on the group. Although in 1832 Edwards was elected Professor of Natural History at Lycée Henri IV., and at the Central School of Arts and Manufac- tures, he produced several popular works on natural history, among which were the Nouveau Formulaire pratique des Hoépitaux and the Eléments @histoire naturelle of A. Comte. The latter work was re- produced to the extent of a hundred thousand copies, and was re- issued in 1851 asa Cours élémentaire de zoologie.' The study of marine animals now absorbed Milne Hdwards’s attention. Astonished at the profusion and richness of forms yet unknown exhibited by the crustaceans in the galleries of the Musée d’Histoire Naturelle, he resolved to write a complete history of these animals. His work, printed in the years 1834—1840, and entitled Histoire Naturelle des Crustacés (3 vols. and atlas), bears on every page evidence of the author’s remarkable powers of observation, as does also his article ‘«‘Orustacea,” contributed in this interval to Todd’s Cyclopedia. A visit to the coasts of Algeria was undertaken in 1886, and the materials then collected were given to the scientific world in a series of memoirs styled Recherches anatomiques et zoologiques sur les polypes, one marked result being the separation of the polyzoa from the polyps, included together in the group of Radiata founded by Cuvier. The importance, number, and variety of his works had already surprised zoologists, and on the death of Cuvier, in 1838, 1 This work was also translated into English by Dr. R. Knox (London 1856) and had a very large sale in this country. Many other copies of the work no¢ bearing Milne Edwards's name, have been published ‘‘by English, Scotch, Irish, and American literary contrabandists.’’—(Knox), Obituary—Henri Mine Edwards. 479 Edwards was selected to succeed him in the Academy of Sciences in the Departments of Anatomy and Zoology. The Notice of his works on this occasion included a résumé of sixty-six original memoirs, apart from numerous articles inserted in the Dictionnaire Classique d’Histoire Naturelle, and other similar publications. In this same year Edwards began the superintendence of the new edition of Lamarck’s Histoire Naturelle des non-vertébrés, continued to 1845; and he was now charged with the class of anatomy and comparative physiology until then under the direction of Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire. These appointments, however, do not appear to have interfered with the progress of his special pursuits. In 1839, after further researches on the Coasts of la Manche, ete., continued the year following at Nice, he published, in a series of memoirs, the facts which he had gathered concerning the embryology and comparative anatomy of the Ascidians. Herein he gave the first definite account of the mode of reproduction by budding. The development of beings which before had never been utilized in the comparative study of animals appeared to him to constitute a subject of the highest value; and his speculations show how great a part embryology plays in zoological science. In 1841 he succeeded his friend J. V. Audouin as Professor of Entomology at the Museum of the Faculty of Sciences. Bent on making progress with the study of marine animals, Edwards conceived the idea of dredging up specimens from the bottom of the sea, particularly at great depths, and of bringing to light a submarine world of animal existence then unknown. ‘The appliances for dredging were at that time of a primitive description, and he did not hesitate to risk his life in diving operations. This happened on the coast of Sicily, during a voyage undertaken in company with A. de Quatrefages and H. Blanchard. The results were considerable, and were explained in the work, Recherches anatomiques et zoologiques faites pendant un voyage sur les cétes de la Sicile. They form a splendid quarto volume of over 850 pages, illustrated with nearly 100 coloured plates. The work is for the most part a corrected report of the series of memoirs contributed to the Annales des sciences naturelles. On his return in 1844, Edwards was nominated Professor of Com- parative Physiology to the Faculty of Sciences of Paris, and five years later he undertook the functions of Dean of the Sorbonne, an office which he held to the day of his death. The superintendence of the removal of the laboratories was a task which Milne Edwards successfully accomplished, to the great advantage of future students. In April, 1847, he was created an officer of the Legion of Honour, and was promoted, August 31, 1861, to the rank of a commander. Jointly with Jules Haime, Milne Edwards published in the Paleeontographical Society’s volumes for 1850-54 a Monograph of the British Fossil Corals, and the next year a Monographie des Polypiers fossiles, both subjects being treated in a masterly manner, and forming a most solid contribution to palzontological knowledge. The year succeeding Edwards produced another long memoir—on the Morphology of Crustacea; and very shortly after his work on 480 Obituary— Henri Milne Edwards. the Tendances de la Nature, in which he gave forth his opinions on the vitality of different parts of organisms. We have additional evidence of the versatility of his genius about this period in further Recherches sur les polypiers (eight memoirs, with Haime, 1848), a paper on the meurs de divers insects xylophages (1848), and a report on pisciculture (1850). Elected an Associate, in 1854, of the Academy of Medicine, in 1856 he visited London to receive from the Royal Society the Copley Medal, in presenting which the President declared that it would be a difficult task to name any one existing naturalist who had prosecuted his researches with success over so wide a range of investigation. On the death of Haime, in that same year, Edwards completed the Histoire naturelle des Coral- liaires ow Polypes, 3 vols. and atlas. On the 28th May, 1862, he succeeded Isidore Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire as Professor of Zoology at the Musée, of which shortly after he became Assistant-Director. In 1867 appeared his Rapport sur les progrés récents des sciences zoolo- giques en France. The Lecons sur la physiologie et Vanatomie de UV Homme et des Animaux were published between 1857 and 1881, in fourteen volumes. They were dedicated to his relative M. J. Dumas, and will always possess importance for the student from the immense amount of details, accompanied by copious references to the labours of others, which they contain in limited compass. On the appear- ance of the last volume, a portrait-medal of the author was struck by his pupils and admirers; at the same time the Society of Sciences of Holland designated him as the recipient of the Boerhave Medal, given for the most valuable works in Natural History. Various learned societies had enrolled Edwards among their members. Crowned with the honour and success of a long life devoted to the advancement of science, Henri Milne Edwards died at Paris on the 29th of July of the present year. The wide range of his knowledge of zoology has rarely been equalled; and it must be borne in mind that he laboured when the study of zoology was scarcely settled on a scientific basis. A glance at the Royal Society’s catalogue of papers to 1868 will at once be convincing in regard to his work; 106 papers are placed to his credit alone, while thirty appear in connection with other well-known men of science. (Generation, changes of form, mode of growth, mechanism of respiration, forms of blood-corpuscles, the nervous system, circulatory apparatus, geographical distribution, are among the subjects treated in the side-walks as we may term them of his career. Personally, Milne Edwards was of a delicate constitution, and the interest excited by his discoveries may be said to have prolonged his life to the advanced age he reached. He was a good linguist, his English and French being perfect. His love for France and its people displayed itself in many instances of bravery and self-sacrifice during the cholera epidemic of 1852 and the Franco-German war which broke out in 1870. His rare qualities and generous nature will be missed by many a student and confrére, while the scientific world will mourn the loss of the remarkable powers of elucidation and classification evidenced by his life-long labours.—T.N. ee ee ( Ve ol Mae i Decade ILI. Vol. If, PL X11, See! eae . 4 we 5 Ne © ae 1 — WOODWARDIA NIGRA 2 _ CALONEURA DAWSONTI 3 — CORYDALOIDES SCUDDERI THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEW SERIES. DECADE III. VOL. Il. No. XI—NOVEMBER, 1885. aS IN Away Abd: ian CAE SS - — T.—Tue Fosstn Insects or THE Primary Rocks: a Raprp SURVEY OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL FAUNA OF THE PaLmozorc PERIOD." By Caries BRonGNIART, Honorary and Corresponding Member of the Manchester Geological Society. (PLATE XII.) HAD fossil insects of Paleozoic times are but little known, in con- sequence of the small number of specimens which have been discovered in the various Carboniferous deposits of the globe. Moreover, these specimens are usually imperfect, and authors generally have had at their disposal only fragments of wings, the soft parts of the body having probably been decomposed, leaving no trace in the shales. The rarity and the imperfection of the specimens are the principal causes why so few naturalists have taken up the study of the fossil Hexapoda. The important discoveries, however, made since 1878, in the mines of Commentry (Allier)—thanks to the devotion of the enlightened Director of these mines, M. Henry Fayol—have resulted in giving us more exact notions of the Insect fauna of the Coal Period. Whilst in Europe and North America there have been described only about 120 examples, at Commentry, since 1878, 1300 have been met with, of which the greater part is admirably preserved. Up to the time of these discoveries no idea of the form of the body of these Coal-insects could be given; but Iam now in a position to make known the external anatomical details of the bodies of these wit- nesses of bygone ages. The wings of insects furnish valuable information to aid in their determination, but one must not always rely solely on their form and neuration, for it would often result in the commission of grave errors. It is necessary, as much as possible, to take into account the characters of the body. Many authors, having had at their command only wings, or fragments of wings, have sometimes been deceived in 1 Translated and read before the Manchester Geological Society, October 6th, 1885, by Mark Stirrup, F.G.S., Hon. Sec. Revised and reprinted by permission of the author and translator. With a plate, from the Bulletin de la Société des Amis des Sciences Naturelles de Rouen (année 1885, 1¢" semestre). DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. XI. 31 482 Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. their determinations. Moreover, it has been too long thought possible that the divisions created to classify living insects could be made to include all fossil insects. It is curious to find how little these insects have changed, and to see that creatures, which are reckoned among the most ancient, have undergone modifications of only a secondary order, in coming down from the Coal period to the present time. Nevertheless, there is more homogeneity among the primary Hexa- pods than is presented by this group to-day, but this need not astonish us. The insects which are found in the Paleozoic shales belong to types represented at the present day by the Orthoptera, the Neurop- tera and the Hemiptera. Some authors have announced the discovery of Coleoptera; but these so-called Coleoptera are really fossil fruits or parts of Arachnida (?). I have, myself, considered the perforations found in some fossil wood to have been the work of Coleopterous insects; but if that were so, Coleoptera, which have hard elytra, would surely have left their impressions on the shales. The presence of Coleoptera in these Palaeozoic deposits seems to me then very doubtful, and one can only assume as certain the exist- ence of Hemiptera, Orthoptera and Neuroptera. But the limits of the two latter orders have been very differently estimated by various authors, some not considering the classification as a natural one, and are therefore inclined to unite them in a single group. This would, in my opinion, be going too far. The existing Orthoptera are well characterized as much by the general form of the body as by the neuration of their wings, and by their incomplete metamorphoses. The Physopoda, the Corrodentia, and the Amphibiotica, have, with good reason, been united to the Orthoptera properly so called, under the denomination of Orthoptera pseudo-Neuroptera. ‘The latter (Orthoptera pseudo-Neuroptera) would have been placed a long time ago among the Neuroptera, but their incomplete meta- morphoses ranged them rather with the Orthoptera. The true Neuroptera are then the Planipennia and the Trichoptera, which have complete metamorphoses. ‘he members of the latter sub-order may serve as links to unite them with the Lepidoptera, as much on account of the neuration of their wings and of the scales or hairs which cover them, as for the buccal apparatus, which forms a sort of proboscis by the union of the jaws and of the lower lip, the mandibles being atrophied. Among the Hemiptera, the Homoptera or Cicadide are the insects with incomplete metamorphoses. Some naturalists have wished to divide insects into two great groups—those which have incomplete, and those which have complete metamorphoses. It is easy to prove the defect of this classification from the indications mentioned pre- viously. In fact, it would be compulsory to sunder the Neuroptera (Planipenniaand Trichoptera) from the Orthoptera pseudo-Neuroptera, insects which are in reality very closely allied. For analogous Oharles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. 483 reasons, one is obliged to abandon the division into Mandibulata and Haustellata. In 1863 Dr. A. S. Packard, jun., proposed to create two series among the insects: the Mrrapona and the Hererometapora. In this latter group he ranges the Coleoptera, Orthoptera, Neuroptera, and Hemiptera; bringing into the first group the Hymenoptera, Diptera, and Lepidoptera. Mr. Samuel H. Scudder had the same idea in this respect as Packard ; he created the names of Sternoptena (Metabola of Packard) and of Gastroptena (Heterometabola of Packard). But the terms employed by Packard seemed to him better fitted for general use, and he has adopted them. Packard and Scudder start upon the principle that the more an Arthropod has the three regions of the body (head, thorax, and abdomen) clearly distinct, the one from the other, the more it is raised in organization. It isamong the Hexapoda that this character is most prominent: the Myriopoda, on the contrary, being the most degraded in consequence of the great number of segments of which the body is composed. The higher Crustacea and the Arachnida are intermediate examples, for the head and the thorax are united, and form the Cephalothorax. Among insects the component parts of the thorax are more or less united together among themselves, and those types whose thoracic segments are most united, and, con- sequently, whose organs of flight are most nearly connected, must be considered the most perfect. The Meraxzora are the Hexapoda which present this perfection in the highest degree. They form unquestionably a more homogeneous section than the Hmerrromerapoua, and are, moreover, of more recent appearance on the surface of the globe. Let us then briefly state the principal characters of these two great groups of insects, as Packard and Scudder have described them :— METABOLA. Body clearly divided into three very distinct parts (head, thorax, abdomen), the three segments of the thorax closely united together. E Component pieces of the mouth ar- ranged, as a whole or in part, for suction. Mandibles rarely opposed one to the other. Anterior wings membranaceous and much larger than the posterior, which are sometimes rudimentary. Larva generally soft, not resembling the adult. Pupa always inactive. Complete metamorphosis. Lepidoptera—Diptera— Hymenoptera. HETEROMETABOLA. Body divided into three parts; the three segments of the thorax are very distinct. Mouth arranged generally for masticat- ing, rarely for sucking. Mandibles opposite one another. Anterior wings more or less coriaceous, with very numerous and strong nervures, generally longer and straighter than the posterior wings, or equal to them. Larva most frequently resembling the adult. Pupa active or inactive. Metamorphosis most frequently in- complete. Hemiptera—Neuroptera—Orthoptera. It will be remarked that I have omitted to mention the Coleoptera, which Scudder places among the Heterometabola ; but in my opinion, 484 Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. the Coleoptera form an intermediate group, or are, at least, among the Heterometabola, in course of progression towards the Metabola. In the Paleozoic rocks the presence of Coleoptera is, as already remarked, very problematical, and the orders, whose existence has been proved, all belong to the great section of the Heterometabola. The classification of MM. Packard and Scudder is therefore that which agrees best with the evidence afforded by paleontology, em- bryology, and morphology. We proceed now to pass in review the Heterometabola found in the Palxozoic formations, showing the relationships which they offer to the present fauna. StturiAN System.—An insect was found this year in the sand- stone of Jurques (Calvados) analogous to the May-Hill-Sandstone belonging to the Middle Silurian. On Nov. 12, 1884, MM. Thorell and Lindstrém announced the discovery of a Scorpion (Palzophonus nuncius) in the Upper Silurian of the island of Gotland. Almost at the same time a second Scorpion was discovered in Scotland in similar deposits.’ The impression on the Jurques sandstone consists of a wing whose neuration recalls that of certain Orthoptera of the families of the Acrididee, Locustide, and especially of the Blattidee. That which is very remarkable, and which distinguishes this im- pression from all the wings of living or fossil Blaéte, is the length of the anal nervure and the small width of the axillary field. Pending new discoveries which may enlighten us concerning the zoological affinities of this fossil, we have placed it in the family of the Blattidee, under the name of Paleoblattina Douvillet. Drvontan System.—Several remains of wings have been found in the Devonian shales of New Brunswick; they have been studied with care by Mr. Scudder, who has referred them to the Neuroptera or to the Orthoptera pseudo-Neuroptera.? The estimate of the affinities of these insects is very difficult, and Mr. Hagen has blamed Mr. Seudder’s mistakes in his determina- tions. Without wishing to detract from the importance and excellence of Mr. Scudder’s work, we consider that this naturalist has been a little too hasty in his conclusions, and that his determina- tions are at least a little risky, having regard to the bad state of preservation of his material. Nevertheless, Mr. Hagen has, in our opinion, wandered much further from the truth than Mr. Seudder. 1. Gerephemera simplex.—Scudder, who had created the family of the Atocina for this fossil imprint, has placed it in my group of the Protophasmida. Is it right or wrong? Jt seems impossible to say, for it appears to me difficult to form a correct opinion from so small a fragment. This wing must have belonged to a large insect ; it was about 6 centimetres long. The wing was rather elongated, and the nervures were united by a rather loose reticulation. 1 Mr. R. P. Whitfield (under date July 31st, 1885) announced in “ Science,” vol. vi. No. 130, pp. 87-88, the discovery of a Scorpion in the Waterlime group, Lower Helderberg, of Oneida County, N.Y., nearly on the same geological horizon and closely agreeing with the Swedish fossil. A figure is also given of the specimen. 2 See GroLocicaAL Macazinz, 1868, Vol. V. pp. 172, 216. Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. 485 2. Platephemera antiqua.—lt is with reason that Scudder placed this wing in the family of the Ephemeride; Hagen is mistaken in wishing to refer it to the Odonata. This wing reminds one much of that of Palingenia virgo; but the fossil is seven times larger than the latter. 3. Lithentomum Hartii.—The remains of a wing thus named by Scudder are considered by that author as belonging to a neuropterous insect of the group of the Sialina. He creates for it the family of the Cronicosialina. So much trouble appears to me useless, the specimen not being, in my opinion, sufficiently well preserved, to permit the appraising of the characters of this fossil. 4, Homothetus fossilis—The wing that Scudder describes under this name presents characters common to the Neuroptera and the Orthoptera. He creates the family of the Homothetide for it. I have been able to compare the figure given by Scudder with some insects from Commentry, and am convinced that this type is near to the Ephemeride (genera Ephemera and Potamanthus). 5. Dyscritus vetustus.—In spite of the smallness of the fragment represented, it ought, in my opinion, to be classed in the same family (Ephemeride or Homothetidee). 6. Xenoneura antiquorum.—The imprint which the author describes is curious, because it presents at the base of the wing some stria, which have induced a belief in an apparatus of stridulation. Scudder, having regard to the absence of reticulation between the widely separated nervures, thinks that this insect forms a special and extinct family in the order of the Neuroptera. I am much of his opinion with respect to all these Devonian insect remains; but I believe that in the present state of our knowledge it is impossible to be quite certain; we must wait further discoveries. Nevertheless, if Mr. Scudder’s opinions are to be accepted, one must believe that the Neuroptera, the Neurorthoptera, and Orthoptera pseudo- Neuroptera were already in existence during the Devonian epoch. CaRBONIFEROUS SystemM.—It is in this system that we begin to find a pretty large variety of insects, and, thanks to the grand dis- coveries made at Commentry, we are able to establish a little order in this very interesting subject of the Paleeozoic Hexapoda. The number of works published on these insects is already con- siderable, and we owe much to MM. Germar, Goldenberg, Geinitz, Sterzel, Van Beneden, Dana, Lacoe, Woodward, Andree, Goss, and, above all, to Scudder, for having studied with patience and persever- ance the materials that they have had in their hands. But as the number of the fossil remains that they have made known was relatively small, it has been very difficult for them to give a comprehensive view of the entomological fauna of these ancient times. This task has been for me an easier one, seeing that I have had at my disposal a series of well-preserved and numerous specimens. Tam therefore about to sketch out a Propromus or THe Huxapopa OF THE COAL EPOCH. 1. OnrnHorrura.—Claus places the Thysanura among the Ortho- 486 Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. ptera ; they are generally considered as being a primordial type of insects. No author has described them as occurring in the system with which we are now engaged. Nevertheless they existed as early as the Carboniferous period, for 45 specimens have been found at Commentry. It is difficult to see the number of the joints of the legs, of the palpi and of the antennez ; but these organs can be discerned upon several specimens. The body is cylindrical, becoming thinner at the posterior part, and terminated by a multi-articulate filament as long as the body. The antennz and the legs are thick and short, the head is rather large. The prothorax is very narrow, the mesothorax and the metathorax are co-equal and much longer than the prothorax. The segments of the abdomen are ten in number and equal in size, the last only being a little longer than the rest. It appears to me that upon one of the specimens some abdominal plates are seen, as has been observed on Machilis. The whole of the body (antenne, legs, thorax, abdomen) is covered with very numerous and very short hairs. The body with the abdominal filament varies in length between 15 and 22 millimetres. This insect resembles Lepisma and Machilis. It differs from them in several characters, but the principal difference consists in the presence of a single abdominal filament in the fossil species. I shall designate this ancestor of the living Thysanura by the name of Dasyleptus Lucasi, dedicating it to M. H. Lucas, of the Paris Museum. Among the Orthoptera a great number of Blatte or of Palzeo- blattarize (Scudder) have been described, and Mr. Scudder has classed them in several groups. As he has made a special study of them, it is not necessary to speak of them here. Goldenberg has named a wing Fulgorina Klieveri, which must have belonged to a large Blatta; we shall designate it by the name of Megablattina Kievert. Another family of Orthoptera was pretty well represented, which I propose to call Paleacridiodea. The first group contains many genera; the Cidischia (mihi), of which the third pair of legs re- semble those of living locusts. The Sthenaropoda (mihi), near allies of Cidischia, but whose legs are thicker and shorter, and less fitted for leaping. The genus Protogryllacris (mihi), represented by an insect called Corydalis, then Gryllacris, and afterwards Lithosialis, ought to be changed in order to show that this insect did not resemble Sialis. A fourth genus, Paolia (Scudder), including many species, should be included in this first group. The second group contains three genera, namely :— Sthenarocera (mihi), insects with strong and long antennzx, short body, and thick, long legs, and long and narrow wings, recalling somewhat those of the Pachytylus. These insects measure fully 11 centimétres from the anterior part of the head to the extremity of the wings, when the latter are folded upon the back. Caloneura (mihi) is nearly related to the foregoing; but the legs Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. 487 and the antenne are more slender, the wings are shorter and not so narrow ; the nervures are admirably surrounded by coloured bands. See Caloneura Dawsonii (Plate XII. Fig. 2). Macrophlebium Hollebent of Goldenberg goes into this family for the present. All these insects may be regarded as the ancestral type of the Orthoptera-Saltatoria of the present day. I propose to form the order NrurorTHoPTERA, to include two sub- orders—that of Neurorthoptera properly so called, and that of Paleeodictyoptera (Goldenberg). The first sub-order will comprise— 1. The family of the Protophasmida (mihi), represented by the genera Protophasma (mihi), Lithophasma, which I create for a wing figured by Goldenberg under the name of Gryllacris lithantraca, _and which afterwards Scudder had placed in the genus Lithoszalis ; lastly, the genus Titanophasma (mihi), of which the body only is known to us, a gigantic body measuring 28 centimétres in length ; also the genus Archegogryllus (A. priscus, Scudder). 2. The family of the Sthenaropterida, which includes Meganeura Monyi, a wing measuring 33 centimétres in length—I had named it Dictyoneura Monyi; Archeoptilus ingens (Scudder), and A. Lucasi (mihi), wings which must have attained 25 to 30 centimetres in length. Then Megathentomum pustulatum of Goldenberg will take its place in this family; two insects that Goldenberg had named Acridites formosus and A. carbonatus will also come into the genus Mega- thentomum. In the first sub-order of the Neurorthoptera I have placed some insects of large size, whose wings have strong nervures united by a rather loose reticulation, insects which have some likeness to our living Phasmians by the form of the body, but which are much removed from them by the neuration of their wings. We must consider the Phasmians as much modified descendants of these ancient types. The second sub-order has been created by Goldenberg, and has been adopted by other authors. This savant, nevertheless, had elevated it to the rank of an order. It contains a series of insects of rather large size, which seem to have completely disappeared from our present fauna. The first family, that of the Stenodictyopterida, is composed of insects which have a thick and short, but broad body, short legs of moderate length. But that which rightly characterizes them, and makes of them a sufficiently homogeneous group, is the reticulation of the wings. The latter are elongate, rather narrow, traversed by rather straight nervures united by a very regular network of great fineness, reminding one a little of the network of the wings of our living Odonata. This family contains six genera, namely :— 1. The genus Hugereon of Goldenberg (Hugereon Boeckingii, Gold., HZ. Heeri, mihi) is characterized by a short and thick but broad body ; the head is small, the prothorax is scarcely broader than the 488 Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. head, whilst the mesothorax and the metathorax are much broader and longer. The legs are short and thick, and seem to be furnished with spines. As to those special organs which Goldenberg has de- scribed near to the mouth of the insect, I have not been able to find them on my specimens, which are notwithstanding very well preserved. On the other hand, the abdomen bears at its extremity two recurved appendices. 2. The genus Scudderia (mihi) is proposed for an insect whose neuration is different from that of Eugereon, and which is of larger size, the wing measuring nine centimétres in length. 3. I have given the name of Megaptilus Blanchardi to the large wing that I previously supposed must have belonged to Titanophasma Fayoli. Its neuration recalls that of Eugereon and of Scudderia. It must have measured 18 to 20 centimetres in length and five centi- métres in breadth. Therefore it must have been borne by an insect of considerable size. 4, Haplophlebium Barnesii and H. longipennis of Scudder will take their place here. 5. Then will come Goldenbergia of Scudder and Dictyoneura of Goldenberg. I place in the genus Goldenbergia the following species :— Termes Heeri, Goldenberg. Dictyoneura Humboldtiana, Goldenberg. 39 affinis, ae 5 anthracophila, 39 Ap lanus) ie elegans, 55 > contusa, Scudder. A elongata, Pe i longitudinalis, Aa a Smitzir, 09 Termitidium amissum, Goldenberg. obsoleta, 5 sinuosa, Scudder. The genus Dictyoneura, Goldenberg, mall comprehend the D. Golden- bergi (mihi), D. libelluloides, Gold., D. jucunda (Scudder). The body is short and thick, the head large, the thorax has the three segments nearly equal and much raised, nevertheless the pro- thorax is narrower. The abdomen measures 45 millimetres in length, and is terminated by two long multi-articulate filaments, and by two recurved hooks; moreover, some foliaceous appendages are observed, borne by the antepenultimate ring. The legs are short, strong, angular, and spined. The wings are not very wide (25 mm.), and have a very distinctive neuration. The reticulation recalls that of the preceding genera; the wings were traversed by coloured bands. The second family, that of the Hadrobrachypoda (mihi), comprises two genera, the Miamia (Scudder) (M. Bronsoni) and the Leptoneura (mihi), L. Oustaleti, Z. delicatula, L. robusta, L. elongata (mihi). All these insects have a very distinctive facies. They somewhat resemble the living Zermes, but, nevertheless, they cannot be ranged in the same group. It would not appear to me an exaggeration to say that they are ancestral types of Termes. The head is pretty broad, armed with strong mandibles, the antennee are short, the legs are short and squat, the wings are elongated, a little sickle-shaped, and traversed by fine nervures. Some wings are still tinted by a rather clear brown pigment. The third family of these Paleodictyoptera includes some insects Dictyoneura Decheni, Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. 489 absolutely new; I shall designate the family by the name of Platypterida. The wings are broad, generally rounded at their extremity, re- sembling, morphologically speaking, the wings of the Protophasmida, but differing from them completely by the neuration ; the nervures, in fact, are rather separated one from the other, and the wings are coloured by pigments often forming very elegant outlines. The body is less blunt than that of the preceding insects, and the abdomen is terminated, in one of the types, by two filaments. This family will comprise four genera, namely :—1. Lamproptilia (LZ. Grand Euryi, L. priscotincta, L. elegans, mihi). 2. Zeilleria; Z. fusca, Z. formosa, Z. carbonaria (mihi). 38. Spilaptera; 8. Packardi, S. venusta, S. libelluloides (mihi). 4. Acridites priscus (Andree). Afterwards comes a series of insects which may be included in the order of the Pseudo-Neuroptera; six families may, in the present state of our knowledge, take their place in this order. 1. The family of the Megasecopterida, mihi (in which I have placed eight genera), is characterized by insects with a body more or less robust, with a head generally small, with legs of middle size, with an abdomen terminated by two long appendices, which appear to be multi-articulate and hairy, with wings nearly similar to one another, rather elongated and narrowed at their base, showing nervures much separated from one another, and united by large nervures, which gives them a very special facies. The abdomen sometimes presents lateral plates which must have served for respiration. The genera Protocapnia, C. Brong., Brodia (Br. priscotincta), Scud- der, Trichaptum, C. Brong. Campyloptera, C. Brong., will be classed in this group. The wings of these insects are generally coloured by rather irregularly disposed spots. The genus Sphecoptora (mihi) comprises insects with very slender wings, extremely pedunculated, very narrow, and of a deep tint, ornamented with little circles deprived of colour, and rather irre- gularly arranged. Here I think should be placed the Breyeria Borinensis, described by M. Preudhomme de Borre. The genus Woodwardia (mihi) is a very interesting one; it in- cludes three specific types—W. modesta, W. nigra (Plate XII. Fig. 1), and W. longicauda. These two last are remarkably well preserved ; the head is rather small, and very distinct from the thoracic rings. The prothorax is shorter than the two other rings. The abdomen, composed of ten rings, is slightly cylindrical, narrower at its ex- tremity, and terminated by two long filaments. The wings are triangular, and, as they are very elongated, they present an obtuse angle nearly in the middle of the wing. The wings are of a deep colour, and present here and there little rounded spots of a brighter shade. The body of W. nigra is 8 centimétres in length, without counting the filaments, which are from 10 to 12 centimétres long. The breadth of the fully-extended wings is at least 16 centimetres. It is here that I propose to place the genus Corydaloides (mihi), 490 Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. C. Scudderi (Plate XII. Fig. 8), C. gracilis, created for some insects of the smallest size, but whose body measures 4 to 5 centimétres in length ; the spread of the fully-extended wings is about one déci- métre ; the body is more blunt than that of the Woodwardia, it is also less cylindrical. The neuration is analogous to that of the preceding genus; the nervures and nervules are nevertheless more abundant, and the wings are not coloured. But this genus presents a very curious peculiarity upon which it is well to insist. Firstly, I would remind you that insects breathe by the aid of trachez, whose distribution in the body is variable. Among perfect insects these trachess open externally by orifices which are called stigmata; these generally breathe the ordinary atmospheric air. A great number of larve, especially those of the Neuroptera and of the Orthoptera, are aquatic, and the organs of respiration are modified. The trachez, in place of ending suddenly and presenting Openings or stigmata, ramify endlessly. Sometimes the extremities of the trachee are free, at other times they are united in some kind of foliaceous organs. The insect then breathes the air contained in a state of mechanical solution in the water, either by the aid of branchial tufts, or by the means of branchial plates. Among the larve of the Ephemera the first seven rings of the abdomen show on each side a foliaceous organ, in which the tracheze are seen to ramify. The oscillations of these appendages maintain a continuous current around the larve; these organs are only lost at the time of passage to the state of the sub-imago. In 1848 Newport made known a pseudo-Neuropterous insect of the family Perlidee, the Pteronarcys regalis, which presents in the adult state, on the under part of the abdominal rings, some branchial tufts protected by a sort of pocket, and besides which it is provided with stigmata. This insect is amphibious, it can breathe the ordinary atmospheric air and the air which is contained in mechanical solution in the water. . The Corydaloides (mihi) offers in the adult state an analogous disposition of the organs of respiration. Hach one of the abdominal rings presents a plate on each side, where one can distinctly see, even with the naked eye, the branching out of the trachese. I have, besides, been able to verify the presence of stigmata. I possess ten impressions of this genus. It is then permissible to suppose that these insects were amphibious like the Pteronarcys. Like the latter, it presents at the extremity of the abdomen two multi-articulate filaments. I shall place by the side of these Megasecopterida an ancestral type of the Libellule; for which the creation of the family Proto- donata and the genus Protagrion seems to me necessary. At present only a single wing has been found at Commentry. It measures 10 centimétres in length and two in breadth. Its form, its neuration, and its reticulations remind one much of the living Odonata. There are, nevertheless, some rather notable differences. The third family, that of the Homothetida of Scudder, contains some insects of more modest size, slenderer bodies, more sessile Charles Brongniart—Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks. 491 wings, and with finer neuration. The nervules are also more numerous than in the Megasecopterida. In this family will be classed the Hemeristia occidentalis (Scudder), the Pachytylopsis Persenairet (P. de Borre), the Chrestotes (C. lapidea, Scudder); OC. Danae, Scud. (=Miamia Danae, Scud.) ; C. lugauensis, Sterzel; Omalia macroptera (Coemans and Van Beneden) ; lastly, three new genera from Com- mentry (Oustaletia, Brachyptilus and Diaphanoptera). The last three families of this group include some ancestral types of the Ephemeride, Perlide, and of the Ascalaphe. The Prote- phemerina (genus Homaloneura (mihi) near to the living Potamanthus). The Protoperlida (genera, Protodiamphipnoa (mihi); Protokollaria (mihi) ; Pictetia (mihi); Protoperla (mihi).) The Protomyrme- leonida (genus Protascalaphus (mihi).) Tho order of the Hemiptera is represented during the Paleozoic epoch. Up to the present time there have only been met with those types which we have been able to class in the group of the Homoptera ; these are the ancestors of our Fulgoride and of our living Cicadide. Goldenberg has named Fulgorina Ebersi and Fulgorina lebachensis, insects very near to our Fulgora. In this same genus I place some insects trom Commentry, F. Goldendergi (mihi), F-. ovalis (mihi), and & minor (mihi). The creation of several generic sections is necessary in order to denote some remarkable specimens that I have received from Com- mentry, namely :— Rihipidioptera elegans (mihi). Protociccus parvulus and P. fuscus (mihi). Dictyocicada antigua (mihi). Paleocivius Fayoli, & P. antiquus (mihi). Mr. Scudder names a wing Phthanocoris occidentalis that he con- siders as belonging to a Hemiptera-Heteroptera. I do not share his opinion, and I find a great analogy in the neuration between this wing and those of Peocera olivacea (Blanchard), which belong to the Homoptera. This communication may be considered as giving a general view of the fauna of the primary Hexapoda. New discoveries will perhaps compel naturalists to multiply genera, but I believe that the general sections here indicated will be able to be retained ; for all that I have stated is based upon the numerous discoveries made at Commentry during the last eight years. These discoveries have enabled me to rectify many mistakes occasioned by want of precise data, and well- preserved specimens. It is far from being perfect, but it may prove of service, if it only affords a glance at the riches which have been supplied to me by the mines of Commentry. At the moment of going to press I am in receipt of a new memoir from Mr. Scudder, which establishes some new families and genera among the primary Hexapods. Although differing in some cases, we are agreed upon many points. The new genera which he creates demand a close examination, which I reserve for another occasion; but it is curious to note how few types Mr. Scudder has found in America similar to those which have been described in Hurope. 492 Prof. P. Martin Duncan—On Galerites = Echinoconus. IJ.—On tHe Genus Gacterires = Ecurnoconus, By Prof. P. Martin Duncan, F.R.S., etc. saa my former communication to the Gronogican MaGazine! on Galerites albogalerus, I gave the results of the examination of the specimens in the British Museum and of many others, and stated that the species was edentulous, and that a true fifth basal (posterior generative plate) was never present. I explained that the so-called jaws were ten buccal plates, that the so-called auricles were raised surfaces in casts, and therefore depressions in the real, and that Cotteau, who had noticed a fifth plate, stated it was exceptional. This fifth plate is absolutely a part of basal plate No. 4 (left posterior generative), and is nota true basal plate. Before the paper was sent to the Gxonoaican Magazine, M. Cotteau had published a “ Description des Echinides fossiles de Vile de Cuba,” in the Ann. de la Soc. Géol. de Belge. t. ix. Mémoires. Some months since I saw this interesting and beautifully illustrated paper for the first time, thanks to the distinguished author. I regret that I did not see this paper before I wrote the com- munication on Galerites, not that it interferes with the statements made therein, but because it appears discourteous not to have noticed and considered the interesting paper about the Cuban fossils. More- over, had I seen the paper, there were facts in it which would have required very careful notice. I regret the matter all the more because Lovén has considered Cotteau’s paper very carefully in his wonderful work on Pourtalesia. This work, communicated to the Swedish Academy in 1882, was published in 1883, and I had to thank the author for a copy in 1884 —and subsequently to the appearance of my paper in the GEoLogrcaL Macazine. Cotteau describes two species of Hchinoconus=Galerites from the Cretaceous of Cuba.? In the diagnosis of this form the apical system is pentagonal and projects; there are five genital plates (basals) broadly perforated, the madreporite is prolonged into the centre of the system, and the ocular plates are small and intercalated at the angles of the genital plates, and are minutely perforated. The generative plates (basals) are separated by the oculars (radials) and the postero-lateral genera- tive plates are separated by the large madreporite. The ambulacral plates have the pores directly superposed abactin- ally, and they are close and show, near the ambitus to the peristome, amore or less pronounced tendency to group themselves in triple pairs. Peristome small, circular, and barely incised. Periproct elliptical, rather large, placed in the inferior face and very close to the peristome. The shape of the test is tall, circular and globular, the upper face rounded, the lower tumid, and flat near the peristome. M. Cotteau says that he placed the little species in the genus * New Series, Decade III. Vol. I. No. 1, p. 10, January, 1884. 2 Galerites Laneri (D’ Orbigny), Cotteau, op. cit. p- x1. fig. 7—18. Prof. P. Martin Duncan—On Galerites = Echinoconus. 498 Echinoconus because of its globular form. He states that it “se distingue nettement de toutes ses congénéres,” and he admits that the having five generative plates perforated is a “charactére qui n’avait pas encore été signalé chez les Eehinoconus.” I have placed those details which do not agree with the genus Galerites= Echinoconus in italics, and it will be noticed that in nearly all, the structural characters are not those of the typical forms. The well-developed and perforated fifth basal plate, the separation of the basals by the radials, and the separation of the posterior plates by the madreporite, are unknown in any other species of the genus. The position of the periproct, situated as it is in the inferior surface of the test and close to the peristome, would not convey the idea of Galerites to any one who has studied the well-known forms of the European Cretaceous rocks. The figure given by Cotteau of the structure of the ambulacra does not correspond with that of Galerites; for, notwithstanding the obliquity of the imperfect triplets, the plates are all low and small primaries, and do not therefore correspond with the interesting character of the ambulacral plates given so truthfully by Lovén in the instance of Galerites=Echinoconus albogalerus. II. The second species, called Echinoconus Antillensis, Cotteau, and described op. cit. p. 18, figs. 1 and 2, pl. 2, has not the apical system preserved, and moreover has an eccentric apex and an oblique peristome ! ! Now the question arises, can the first species come within the genus Galerites = Echinoconus? The reply might take the form of a question, why should the species not be placed in Holectypus ? The details of the apical system would interfere, but the form is nearer Holectypus than Galerites. With all respect to the opinion of M. Cotteau, I must decline to admit such elasticity in a well- diagnosed genus, and considering that he finds a variety of the first species without any triple pairing, I am bound to believe that the forms are not Echinoconus. Loven accepted without reserve the dictum that the forms de- scribed by Cotteau were indubitable Galerites = Hchinoconus. He uses this belief in one of his interesting arguments concerning the changes which occur in the apical system and position of the periproct in time. In the work on Pourtalesia, p. 68, Lovén writes, “In Echinoconus and Anorthopygus the vent is posterior, subventral, and the costal (genital-basal) No. 5 is present and without a pore.” On page 71 Lovén writes after considering the Spatangoids: “It has been seen that when in the Hchinoconide the periproct has retreated far back from the calyx (apical system), the costal 5 (that is, the fifth generative plate or basal), which had been suppressed, was reinstated again, and that the normal condition returned even so far as to allow the efferent duct of the corresponding sexual gland to perforate it.” That species vary during time, and that the changes may become so important as to necessitate the introduction of the forms into new genera, can hardly be doubted; but if the proof is to be scientific, it must be capable of verification from positive facts. 494 Prof. T. G. Bonney—Traverses of the Central Alps. Hence in order to agree with Lovén in the instance of Galerites, we must have proof that the earliest known species of it had the structures which “ were suppressed,” Now in “Les Etudes” there are descriptions and delineations of the apical system of the common Galerites which, like all Lovén’s positive work, are marvels of exac- titude. But there is no trace of the fifth plate, nor was the corre- sponding gland evidenced. In fact, there is no evidence whatever that any suppression took place, and it is quite possible that Galerites was the descendant of forms without the fifth plate. Lovén would have it believed that in long periods of time the fifth basal and gland appeared, the madreporite extended backwards, the ocular plates (radials) grew inwards, and separated the basals. and the position of the anus altered as well as the character of the ambulacra. A new form came from an old one by modification during time. Unfortunately the age of the Cuban forms is not so very long after that of the deposits containing Galerites. Perhaps there was no difference in the times of deposit. For the Cuban deposits are Cretaceous, and not Miocene or later. There was no time for the changes. Again, it must be felt, not- withstanding the assertions of the very distinguished naturalists, that there is little or nothing to link the Cuban forms with the group they are presumed to descend from. It must end in confusion worse confounded than the present state of the genera of the Echinoidea, if species are to be associated which have different structures of grave physiological importance. Under the conditions of our present knowledge, it really appears, that although the Cuban forms may have descended from a Galerites, they do not come within the generic diagnosis of the previously known species, and that they are so exceptional as to require entry into another genus. IIJ.—Pretiminary Note on some TRAVERSES OF THE CRYSTALLINE District or THE CrnrraL ALps.} By Professor T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S., Pres. G.S. URING the past four years I have made several traverses of the Central Alps from north to south, and venture to lay before you the general results as bearing in some respect on the geology of the Highlands. ° 1. The ordinary rules of stratigraphy as learnt from most lowland districts are commonly quite inapplicable to the Alps. The most highly crystalline and the older beds often form the higher parts of a mountain region, the newer the lower. The newer beds frequently appear to underlie and dip regularly beneath the older. Gigantic folds, overturns, and overthrust faults abound. The true stratigraphy of a district can only be worked by the exercise of patient and cautious inductions from observations extended over a wide area. 2. The non-crystalline rocks of the Alps are of various ages. There are some of Carboniferous age, but the great period of con- ' Read before the Geological Section (Section-C) of the British Association at Aberdeen, September, 1885. Prof. T. G. Bonney—Traverses of the Central Alps. 495 tinuous deposition generally begins with some part of the Trias. The conglomerates, which often occur at the base of the non-crystal- line deposits, indicate that the principal metamorphism of the crystalline series was anterior to both these epochs. There is at present no reason to suppose that either in the Central Alps or for some distance on each side there are any representatives of the earlier Paleozoics. I believe that the conglomerates at the base of the Carboniferous contain fragments of the later crystalline rocks of the Alps as well as of some of the earlier—though I do not assert that these crystalline rocks have undergone no modifications since Carboniferous times. 8. In the heart of the principal Alpine chains, and apparently at the base of everything, are coarsely crystalline gneisses. These differ little from granites, except that they generally —almost always —exhibit a certain foliation, and occasionally seem to be interbedded with thin seams of micaceous schists or flaggy fine-grained beds. 4, On examining these latter, we find reason to believe that they are generally due to crushing. ‘Their strike agrees with that of the apparent foliation in these older rocks, and with that of a foliation which is also present in the newer crystalline rocks. This corre- sponds with the strike of the main physical features of the district, and with the cleavage in the included troughs of sedimentary rock. It runs for great distances with remarkable uniformity, e.g. from the Maderanerthal to the upper part of the Lukmanier Pass the strike of this foliation does not materially vary from W.S.W.—E.N.E. d. This apparent foliation is due to the development of extremely thin films of a micaceous mineral. In many cases it causes the rock to bear the aspect of a highly micaceous schist; yet on examining a transverse section, it is seen distinctly to be a crushed gneiss; 7.e. though so conspicuous, it is a mere varnish. As it thus differs materially from a true foliation, it would be convenient to give it a name, and I should propose to call it the “sheen surface.” It is, in fact, a kind of “cleavage foliation,” that is, a foliation due to cleavage, and subsequent to it. But though from certain points of view so conspicuous, its minerals often constitute a very small part of the mass of the rock. 6. The pressure which has produced this “sheen surface ” has in many cases affected the orientation of the minerals, which are present in the true “foliation” layers of the more distinctly foliated, i.e. mineral-banded, rocks. It has affected these minerals as pressure affects the constituents of a sedimentary rock. 7. In the crystalline schists very commonly the “sheen surface ” corresponds with the original foliation surface, as in the slates the cleavage sometimes does with the bedding. This is due to the fact that the axes of the great folds often make a very high angle with the horizon. It may, however (like a cleavage surface), be seen crossing the foliation at all angles. 8. Thus a non-foliated crystalline rock may be rendered to some extent foliated by pressure (followed by a certain amount of mineral- ization) ; 7.e. some gneisses may be formed by crushing from granites, 496 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. some schists out of other igneous rocks. It may obliterate an earlier foliation, or it may intensify it, or it may produce an independent and more fissile foliation. In this sense gneiss may be said to pass into granite, because a rock which is now, both macroscopically and microscopically, a gneiss, may prove to be a granite which has in some parts yielded to pressure more than in others. 9. As we pass outwards from the great central granitoid masses, we come to gneisses and schists, where the evidence of some kind of stratification becomes more marked; bands of crystalline limestone, quartzite, and granulite being associated with mica schist of many kinds—simple, garnetiferous, staurolitic, actinolitic, and the lhke— the bands of different mineral character and composition varying from mere streaks to layers up to many yards in thickness. In fact, the above-named rocks are associated exactly as limestones, sand- stones, and clays are associated in the ordinary sedimentaries. 10. Although the crushing of a crystalline rock in siti, or the squeezing and shearing of a breccia or conglomerate of crystalline fragments, occasionally gives rise to local difficulties, these are on a small scale, and sedimentary beds belonging to the Paleeozoic or later periods of deposition are generaliy readily distinguishable from the whole of the crystalline series. Though folded and faulted in the most extraordinary manner, the members of the two series can generally be separated, and in the Alps there is no evidence of a mingling of the one with the other.in the process of rolling out or squeezing together; so that after patient study and microscopic examination we can generally decide without hesitation whether a particular set of rocks has originated from the crystalline or the sedimentary series. JI do not say that we can always decide whether a schist or a gneiss has originated from an igneous rock or from an older schist or gneiss, but I think that in the Alps we can say that it has originated from one of these. Fortunately, intrusive rocks are rare in the Paleozoic and later deposits in this part of the Alps. 11. Thus, although the Tertiary metamorphism of the Alpine rocks is very important, it is more pretentious than real, and its effects seem to have been the greatest where it has found a rock already crystalline to act upon. Hence I believe that every true gneiss and schist in the Alps is much older than the Carboniferous, and is probably older than any member of the Paleozoic period. IV.—Ow tae Literature anp Nomencrature or Britis Fossin Crocopinia. By Artuur SmirH Woopwarp, of the British Museum (Natural History). (With a Folding Table of Genera and Species). F all groups of fossil reptiles, there is perhaps none in greater need of critical revision than that comprising the Crocodilia. The remains of this order already discovered are so numerous, and the various descriptive accounts of them so scattered and disconnected, BRITISH FOSS es eT 7 pao Sep Aenfrimanres Chapman’ avd ‘ny Spina eat et I$ foedendre, Charter] ste | Upper Line | Wal CARI 856 Tr. Sect Bo. x prtwess | mi) | Upper tise | Waly Peery 2 Mexia cere || —< apy, lakes ‘Market Raseo ‘Geol,| > | reandefistisPet aosise seeyamyauaun, Guay St.- eS rephand,Hatbe Cloxwarth, Hictish | The only Mita com Sota Bore Toms | Tate. | Twasinl with thote'et Deo ——fewtiters, Bes. | 1X9 | tathowian | Osford Skoit,and | | Dotermionl om the evidence wf 4 maandible ——Geegresi, Owen, | 1 | Matboslan | Oxfordsbire Togertect ? ——iatin dr, Omen. 1 | Mathonlan | Oxfordsice Tapert | temporutin, Owen. | 2 *OoIhhe Vree Tmperteet 2 ‘Nowa bt Smet on fa P JPanlanat fee] Orford 7 datycep babar, Seckey,| 186 | Onfordlan Weadwardian] Not yet compleuly decribed. Amenee is | Musa al |" Stax. —— 9 (Owes). 1 ' Dalerdanpe_ cNotm | Penn of 7 | Dieermieed a the evidence of 3 Paliooteloghives.” p-sie | Skull fay armed be | Aastifer, Desk. 186) | Kimmeridgiaa! ’ Deslongehamps, of. eit, p- , , a | 4p. ind, Deal. 1h6g |Kimmeridg(an] Kimmeridge | Deslongchampa, ef. cif. p.| Mandible Beit (wea Sons Sea ‘ton ta cack | parposroens, Puitips ci pl ‘Cxieedlt | Vetoes 7 ¢ on i sindile | Mosum | eer ford p. 3ho-8), | gracitir, Prillips sp Shomsiuanran eractiit, Phil. | Prageiea Oxford pp: 384-388. Sisttand | Sfaxeum, I= tae | ae me | meme | Ste theres Manuel Mansefit,| Skul) and | Beith | = Pleriorwedns Mansetih, Owen, rt Journ Goal |mandibigete} Meaeum | “esr Journ. Ges. Soc, vol Bo atiotes —— hisccephalns, Seviey | s86p |Kirameridgiac) Ely Shall | Woodwantlas| Tacompletely described as yet Cour ps Paitire. Yat |OaSitise | St Clemeaie een | Cu | ame intact. ee ee ihe |Kimerdgla_Stolewer Toon || atl | Aaoeatenanety erred Pu L ‘ Reet | Meeressueers tag éiy —— >. Seeley, yy) | Corallian erocth Ortams Tooth | Weosomactee Usdesenbed: . caste 11 | ain | svi: | One, odonomnty vs] Team | catciene| Grae ade, epee : boner Sei! | ect ach Sra ey eee fom Hastwtck | Geabptoir spa, Polis; | Too | Oxford | Relerod ter by Saxage, Meu "Geol. of Ox * Pe Mucus ‘See. Gtol. France (3) vol. © . Méw. Ul, (1874), Be 50 181s Wealden | se of Wight | Ome, Yon Rept, Weald. | der Titik | Impertecly Keown, i eet) Oney burke Fees” Sepp | uae ef Sl sda 3 30 (Slow: Pal Soe oncenvs, Owen, 188 | Purbectian | Swanage You, Repl, Weald. | Hind ‘ hd! Part. erm!” Supph | "Monta Wi (lpn Tat Seca), | Coratiinn | Weymouth Family Gosvoruoune. iGomarwouss, 8 ratsident, Owes. | Bt Tilgate Fore] Oen, Asoc. Rep. | Teeth and andSwasige| atgu, p.m agmenisl esi = sims, Owen. mn Swasge | Once, Fou, Rept, Weald. | “Skull miisleprts Sed’ Pert. Porm 0 wi. (fos al Soe. ve), — fenutdens, Owes. Porbechian Fragmentary | Hirithih fatal ‘mandible | Suseom, 2 | Wealden | CuchSeld | Omen,‘ 1INL Poss, Repo" | Vertebre , Figores only. ‘Crocedilia, pl. 24. ee eltradens, Omen. | 184x| Wealden | Sussex | Owen, Tint. Ausoc. Rep,| Teeth Brith | Test and reisbee Gyrot ant de THA BO). ahieum | scribed a Owen's Posy. H ites, ere the plate [swroegifanel Namvonce items. —— rocifidens, Owen. | 1879 | Purbeck Durilestone | Owen, "Fou. Rept, Weald. | Skull and nays sana) Koll Purl For le, We txacierotcres, Oven, shy, py feo Ligue Bihan Omen —f ii |Owewtasvcney, A. 8. Wood, sig | Ha Dardlestone i ese Gay, Swanage] Mandiblar | Tieitlay vamun | Museum WHE ty miner, Owen, | Mandar | en Weed $5 eh ‘ramus | Soueumn euiner, Owen, sp, | 1870 | Porbockian, 1479 | Povbrchiaa, | Dardletone | Owen, You. Rept, Weald, | Shelton und | Bish fy swannge an Pur Horm al | Saveoo Sita pee a ix, (Men, Pal. Boe. bs L Dripple} | crmeedifs PSaulsi!* Omer. | vtsx |¥Groeeasnd.”) Sussex Tria | Nee Wit Fs iemepsah eg elt . erin tho: Bal et Museum | Reply’ aden ta vol. ep. vb WASH), Be 43e Ble ate skeletal fragy Correct geous iodetermisable, ues RUSUCTITA. ‘mela Ime Croenvininn and cuocnottun Laut ‘anfobrigieasts, Seth) s¥6 | Cambridge | C Canlobeie My | Cambrides | Cambridgn Sun. Ur 5 "Todles, ote!" po] Vertebea |. (Game only), el el peer eer ort Yam der re ea | eat ere | |= Spencers, Huckland, | 14)6 | London Clay, In) Geol and Mio. te She Muckland, | 146 Joo Clay:| Sheppey sei ie Mladee nor fs ol a — cham) j, Owen. | ui Leedop Clay, Omen, " ‘Shull, cham prides, 0 lay.| Sheppey Cie p nt ‘Ls lon ul eran we Be. Decribed is Quart. Jours, Gea Soc, vol. was: (V4), Be Od: WVably C. champuvider, Owen, Toliapiews, Owen, ee ilste| Onell Mt, Atte i Yorn desist (othe Hasta, One. |3h| Veoee beg Aus Re ey act hae ws ae sie aly) Bat Sr jue el St a i Pee ea I. Ipper ‘Sear eae Charlee Brito Rete LT sire Hartingria by . ewe ne ea peso Reus | ata eco Tens ane koeeds fifo Huy In hulian' em ONY ‘Falaor Ee vol pe me) eee ey —— _ Diveni, Owen. bye Middle HA Lood. | Portions of Sibert hy ard ‘Dixon’ Jeol and Fiske aoe aot iis Pe ein eth Sorina ps Aes Dl wintteeth fede po asics Tes species Lo whlch am asteriak |*) hae bens yralined are bare rygarded as syonyms. Sen column of Remarks, - Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocoditia. 497 —so commonly has it been the custom to take advantage of each successive ‘ find” for the manufacture of a new generic or specific name, however fragmentary the materials, and so frequently have species been imperfectly compared and characterized,— that a most intricate and perplexing synonymy has arisen, which it would require long-continued research by the profoundest of specialists to unravel. Moreover, cases are not unknown, in which type speci- mens have subsequently proved to be unfortunate restorations, and the occasional disregard of priority in nomenclature has also con- tributed to increase the confusion. In this country, indeed, there appears to have been no attempt, as yet, to collect the desultory materials and determine exactly the extent of our present knowledge of British forms: and it is the remembrance of this circumstance that has induced the writer to bring together the following connected account, in the hope that it may tend to point out the chief deficiencies and facilitate further research. It is proposed to give complete references to all studies on the subject hitherto published in England, and also enumerate the more important allusions to British species to be found in the memoirs of Continental authors. Triassic CRrocopiria. The earliest members of the order at present definitely known, either in the Old World or the New, are discovered in the Upper Trias, and belong to at least three genera. Only one has been recorded from British strata,—Stagonolepis, from the yellow sand- stones near Hlgin, N.B.,—and this does not appear to be represented by more than a single species. It was originally described by Agassiz,’ in 1844, on the evidence of a fragment of scaly armour, and considered by him—though he had only examined drawings of the fossil—to constitute a genus of ganoid fishes; twelve years later, however, through the assiduous researches of the Rev. Dr. Gordon, of Birnie, a more perfect series of remains enabled Prof. Huxley * to demonstrate the reptilian and crocodilian nature of the animal, and the subsequent discovery of other materials has rendered it possible to produce an elaborate monograph on the subject.? Prof. Huxley makes known fragments of the skull and mandible, teeth, vertebra, ribs, interclavicle, scapula, coracoid, humerus, ilium, ischium, pubis, femur, tibia?, fibula (or radius), metatarsals, and scutes, and the anatomy of this form is considerably elucidated by comparing the various parts with the beautifully preserved remains of its close ally, Belodon, from the Upper Keuper beds, near Stuttgart. Nothing seems to have been added to our knowledge of Stagonolepis since 1 L. Agassiz, ‘Rech. Poiss. Foss. Vieux Grés Rouge,’’ p. 139, pl. 31, figs. 18, 14. * T. H. Huxley, ‘‘ On the Stagonolepis Robertsoni (Agassiz) of the Elgin Sand- stones,’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xv. (1859), pp. 440-460, pl. xiv. 3 'T. H. Huxley, “The Crocodilian Remains found in the Elgin Sandstones, etc.,”’ Mem. Geol. Survey, Mon. iii. (1877): see also the Professor’s paper ‘‘ On Stagono- lepis Robertsoni, and on the Evolution of the Crocodilia,’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxi. (1875), pp. 423-438. _4 See memoirs on this genus by H. von Meyer in the “ Palseontographica,’’ yols. vil. x. and xiv. (1861-1864), DECADE 1II.—vVOL. II.—NO. XI. 32 498 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 1877, and it has not been recorded from any but one Scotch locality. Belodon had a much wider range, having been found in Wurtemburg,’ India,? and NorthAmerica ;* and Parasuchus‘ is a more generalized crocodilian from India. JURASSIC CROCODILIA. The Lower Lias has not hitherto yielded any fossils of this order ; but in the higher beds of Whitby, and their Continental equivalents, abundant remains of Teleosaurs are continually discovered, and numerous remarkably perfect skeletons and skulls are to be found in various museums. The earliest specimen made known to science was figured and described by Chapman and Wooller in the “ Philo- sophical Transactions” so long ago as 1758,° and the authors of these quaint communications perceived the general resemblance of their fossil in outward shape to that of the living Gavials and Alligators, thus suggesting an affinity: but none received a name until the publication of the Bridgewater Treatise, in which Buckland devoted a plate® to the illustration of three typical examples, and referred them all to an undefined species, Zeleosaurus Chapmani, Konig MS. Five years later, in his second Report on British Fossil Reptiles read before the British Association,’ Prof. (Sir Richard) Owen gave a detailed account of the specimen represented in fig. 1 of Buckland’s plate just quoted, and subsequently attached the MS. name of T. brevior to a fine skull in the British Museum ; in 1854, Mr. Charles- worth ® brought forward evidence of possibly another form, terming it T. ischnodon, but publishing no definition; in 1861, Owen’s “ Paleontology ” appeared, with the figure of a detached vertebra designated T. brevirostris;*® in 1876, Prof. J. F. Blake’? described Owen’s (MS.) T. brevior under the name of Steneosaurus brevior ; in 1880, Prof. H. G. Seeley ' applied the provisional name of T. eucephalus to a fragmentary skull—also from Whitby—in the Wood- wardian Museum, Cambridge; and quite lately, in his ‘‘ History of 1 H. von Meyer, Joc. cit. 2 R. Lydekker, ‘‘ The Reptilia and Amphibia of the Maleri and Denwa Groups,” Palzontologia Indica, ser. iv. vol. i. pt. 5 (1885). 3 E. D. Cope, ‘On the Reptilia of the Triassic Formations of the Atlantic Region of the United States,’’ Proc. Amer. Phil. Soe. vol. xi. (1871), pp. 444-446 (reprinted in Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., [4] vol. vi. pp. 498-500). 4 R. Lydekker, Joc. cit. 5 William Chapman, ‘‘An Account of the Fossile Bones of an Allegator, found on the Sea-shore, near Whitby, in Yorkshire,’ Phil, Trans., vol 50, pp. 688-9, pl. xxii. (6), and Wooller, “A Description of the Fossil Skeleton of an Animal found in the Alum Rock near Whitby,” d¢d., pp. 786-790, pl. xxx. This specimen was presented to the Royal Society, and is now in the British Museum. 6 Rey. W. Buckland, ‘‘ Geology and Mineralogy, etc.,’’ vol. ii. p. 35, pl. 25. An early figure of a skull from Whitby is also given by E. Charlesworth, in ‘‘ Mag. Nat. Hist.,’’ n.s., vol. i. (1837), p. 582, fig. 65. 7 British Association Reports, 1841, pp. 73-81. 6 K, Charlesworth, British Association Reports, 1854, Trans. Sections, p. 80. 9 R. Owen, ‘‘ Paleontology,” 2nd edit., p. 299, fig. 108 [1]. 10 R. Tate and J. F. Blake, ‘‘The Yorkshire Lias’’ (1876), p. 244, pl. i. figs. 1-3. 11 H, G. Seeley, ‘On the Cranial Characters of a large Teleosaur from the Whitby Lias,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxvi. (1880), pp. 627-634, pl. xxiv. ; Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 499 British Fossil Reptiles,’ 1 Sir Richard Owen has reprinted his previous (1841) description of T. Chapmani, and also added particulars of T. brevior, without attempting to incorporate the results of recent Continental research.? According to MM. Deslongchamps,’? whose views on the subject appear to be now generally adopted, none of these forms are refer- able to Teleosaurus proper, and ought rather to be placed in the genera Mystriosaurus of Kaup and Pelagosaurus of Bronn,—the broad-faced types, with much depressed cranium and upwardly directed orbits, belonging to the former, and those with long slender snouts and more laterally placed orbits, widely separated, to the latter. The present Professor at Caen, M. Eugéne Deslongchamps, regards the Whitby Museum specimen described by Owen (figured by Young and Bird,‘ and also in Buckland’s fig. 1, pl. 25), as the type of Mystriosaurus Chapmani, Konig sp., and the instructive original of plate 15 (Crocodilia) in Owen’s “ British Fossil Reptiles,” * as a typical example of Pelagosaurus Brongniarti, Kaup sp. With the latter, also, he would associate the specimens shown in figs. 2 and 3 of Buckland’s plate 25 ;7 and, under the same rearrangement, Teleosaurus brevior would be relegated to Mystriosaurus. Both these genera (or sub-genera) are represented by numerous specimens in the Continental Museums, chiefly from the Upper Lias of Boll, in Wirtemberg. and of Curcy, in Normandy, and the distinctive features of Pelagosaurus were very definitely elucidated by the elder Deslongchamps:* it is more difficult, however, to comprehend the precise particulars in which Mystriosaurus departs from the generic type of Steneosaurus,? and though Winkler, not 1 Op. cit., vol. iv. pp. 130-139. 2 Unfortunately, in this extensive work, there are no particulars as to the date at which each successive part appeared ; but as references on previous pages of the same volume (e.g., on p. 66) relate to papers published so recently as 1880, the following description of the Teleosaurs cannot have been printed before that or a later year. 3 EH. E. Deslongchamps, *‘ Notes Paléontologiques ”’ (1863-1869), and ‘* Le Jura Normand: Etudes Paléontologiques des Divers Niveaux Jurassiques de la Nor- mandie,’’? Monographie iv. (1877-8). * Young and Bird, “ Geological Survey of the Yorkshire Coast,’’ 2nd edit., 1828, 1. xvi. fig. 1. R © Ih may be noticed that this (British Museum) specimen is not described in Sir Richard Owen’s letterpress, although the plate is cited at the commencement of the Section (vol. iv. p. 130). Measurements, however, are given by M. Eugéne Deslong- champs, “‘ Le Jura Normand,” Mon. iy. p. 11. 6 To this species. also, M. Deslongchamps assigns Chapman and Wooller’s original specimen, and the restored figure given in Uwen’s “ Mon, Foss. Rept. London Clay,”’ pt. ii. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1850), pl. xi. figs. 2, 2a. 7 Vide Deslongchamps, “‘ Le Jura Normand,”’ Mon. iv. pp. 8-13, passim. 8 See works of Eugene Eudes Deslongchamps already cited: the descriptions of Pelagosaurus are largely based upon the studies of J. A. Eudes Deslongchamps ‘Mémoires sur les Téléosauriens de l’Kpoque Jurassique du Département du Calvados, Mém. i,’’ Mém. Soc. Linn. Normandie, vol. xiii. [Pelagosaurus typus is here described as Teleosaurus temporalis, but the mistake was afterwards rectified ] 9 In 1877, Eugéne Deslongchamps (‘‘ Le Jura Normand,’’ Mon. iv. p. 8, mote) announced a forthcoming paper on this subject, to be published in the Bull. Soc. Zool. France: the writer, however, has not been able to meet with it either in that journal, or in any of the Caen publications. 500 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. long ago,’ published a most elaborate study of its specific variations, he appears to have left the wider question of its affinities altogether untouched. The latter paleontologist endeavours to show that all the specimens hitherto described really belong to a single species, divisible into two varieties, one English and one German; and he accordingly proposes (loc. cit. p. 83) to apply the name of M. Stukelyi” to both, with the varietal adjunct of Chapmani, in the case of the first, and Bollensis in that of the second. But the ordinary rules of priority in nomenclature render it doubtful whether such a solution of the difficulty will meet with general acceptance. Teleosaurus itself, as now usually restricted, appears to be well represented in certain horizons of the English Oolites, and ranges at least from the Bathonian to the Kimmeridgian beds inclusive. Prof. Sir Richard Owen * has identified teeth and vertebrae of the typical species, 7. Cadomensis, Geoffr., from the Great Oolites of Enslow (near Woodstock) and Stonesfield, and also considers‘ a cervical vertebra from the Lower Oolites of Chipping Norton to indicate a very closely allied form. The same distinguished paleontologist, in his “British Fossil Reptiles,” also founds a new species, T. latifrons,® upon the greater portion of a skull from strata of Great Oolite age in Northamptonshire, but the teeth and some other important parts are wanting ; and Prof. Phillips, in his “Geology of Oxford,” adds two more from the well-known Oolitic Flagstones of Stonesfield, which he designates T. brevidens and T. subulidens, respectively, in allusion to the shape of the teeth. The former species® is founded upon a remarkably complete skull and mandible, and the latter’? upon a nearly perfect mandible, with several other fragments; and associated with the remains of both are numerous vertebree and limb-bones, of which the Professor figures an instructive series. ‘The genus has not hitherto been recorded from the Oxfordian or Corallian deposits ; but Sir Richard Owen ® gives the name of T. asthenodeirus to a few detached vertebrae found in the Kimmeridge Clay of Shotover Hill, and Mr. J. W. Hulke® has made known the discovery of an un- doubted Teleosaurus snout in the equivalent clays of Dorsetshire. This Kimmeridgian specimen is especially remarkable for the expan- sion of its terminal extremity, and accordingly received the name of T. megarhinus, Hulke. The remaining Teleosaurs of the Jurassic period seem to belong 1 T. C. Winkler, ‘“ Etude sur le genre Mystriosaurus,” Archives du Musée Teyler, vol. iv. fase. i (1876). * On the assumption that the Whitby fossil described by Stukely at the beginning of the last. century [Philosophical Transactions, 1719, pp. 963-968 (No. 360), pl. i. ] belongs to this genus ; the original specimen, however, 1 is now in the British Museum, and is certainly a Plesiosaur. R. Owen, British Association Reports, 1841, p. 81. o 4 Ibid. p. 81. 5 Sir R. Owen, Op. cit., vol. iii. p. 141, pl. xvii. (Crocodilia). 6 Prof. John Phillips, op. cit. pp. 186- 189. 1 Ibid. pp. 194, 195. 8 R. Owen, British Association Reports, 1841, p. 81. 9 J. W. Hulke, ‘‘ Note on a Fragment of a Meleosanrian Snout from Kimmeridge Bay, Dorset,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. yp. vol. xxvii. (1871), p. 442, pl. xviii. This eveeiue was discovered by Mr. Mansel-Pleydell, and presented by him to the British useum Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Oracauitias 501 to about six or seven generic types; the earliest are referable to the Steneosaurus of Geoffroy St.-Hilaire, and Teleidosaurus of Deslong- champs; and those of the Middle and Upper Oolites chiefly belong to AHolodon (H. von Meyer), Metriorhynchus (H. von Meyer), Dakosaurus (Quenstedt), and Machimosaurus (H. von Meyer). Mr. H. T. Newton? has also described a fragmentary mandible, probably crocodilian, from the Coral Rag of Weymouth, and this, if rightly determined, may possibly indicate another genus. Of Steneosaurus, the French Oolites appear to have furnished about twenty forms, and among British fossils, nine others have already been named and described; at least three of the latter, how- ever, were originally placed with this genus on very questionable grounds, and there is abundant reason for suspecting that they ought rather to be referred to Metriorhynchus. It is also unfortunate that the three cranial modifications made known by Sir Richard Owen are not compared or contrasted with those previously described by Deslongchamps; and, with the exception of Steneosaurus Boutilieri, Deslong.,? Mr. Hulke’s S. Stephani, from the Cornbrash of Closworth, Dorset, is thus the only English species yet satisfactorily defined. Those described by Owen‘ are S. Geoffroyi, from the Great Oolite near Oxford; 8. laticeps, also from this formation and locality; and S. temporalis, from the “ Oolitic Freestone” of Bath: all are founded upon more or less complete skulls, but there are no particulars as to the collection in which the type-specimen is preserved in either case. Phillips’ records a fragment of jaw, from the Kimmeridgian of Shotover Hill, under the rather indefinite ® name of “ S. longirostris, Cuv.”; and a cranial fossil of Oxfordian age, in the Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge, is regarded by Seeley’ as the type of a new species, S. dasycephalus. Teleidosaurus does not appear to have been recorded as yet from British strata, nor is there much definite information regarding the occurrence of Metriorhynchus in this country. Deslongchamps, indeed, seems to be the only paleontologist who has hitherto attempted to determine any English fragments of the last- 1 EK. T. Newton, “ Notes on a Crocodilian Jaw from the Corallian Rocks of Weymouth,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxiv. (1878), pp. 398-400, pl. xvi. 2 Under this name M. Deslongchamps (‘‘ Notes Paléont.” p. 230, pl. xvi. fig. 2) mentions a plaster cast of a skull and mandible from the Cornbrash near Oxford, received from the Bristol Institution, and labelled ‘‘Crocodilus Oxoniensis, Conybeare” ; and in describing his outline figures of the specimen, he further refers to it as “ Steneosaurus Oxoniensis, De la Beche.’’? But Mr. Edward Wilson, to whose kind- ness the writer is indebted for particul irs of the Crocodilian fossils now in the Bristol Museum, is unable to discover any such label in the collection; and the present whereabouts of the original specimen seems to be unknown. ‘The specific name is evidently MS. only. 3 J. C. Mansel-Pleydell, “ Note on a Gavial Skull from the Cornbrash of Closworth,’’ Proc. Dorset Nat. Hist and Antiquarian Field Club, vol. i. (1877), pp- 28-32, pl. i. A detailed descriptive paragraph is supplied by J. W. Hulke. 4 Sir Richard Owen, ‘“ History of British Fossil Reptiles, vol. ii. pp. 144, 14a, pl. 18, 19 (Crocodilia). 5 J. Phillips, ‘‘ Geology of Oxford,”’ p. 388 (with woodcut of tooth). 6 See Deslongchamps, *‘ Notes Paléontologiques,” pp. 110, 111. 7 H. G. Seeley, ‘‘ Index to Reptilia, etc., Woodwardian Museum,’’ 1869, p. 140. 502 = Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Orocodilia. named genus, and he incidentally refers to the occurrence of M. superciliosus, de Blainv. sp., in the Oxford Clay near Oxford,’ and of M. hastifer, Desl., in the Kimmeridgian.?, He further adds an interesting statement *® regarding the large mandible from Kimmeridge Bay, described by Sir Richard Owen * under the name of Pliosaurus trochanterius, and expresses his opinion that it certainly belongs to the present Crocodilian form. To Metriorhynchus, also, we may safely refer several fossils from the neighbourhood of Oxford, described by Professor Phillips as Steneosaurian. Among its many important characters,’ this genus is especially remarkable for the great development of the pre-frontal bones which overhang its laterally-placed orbits; the elongated, oval form of the upwardly directed external nostril; the large relative size of the three or four anterior teeth in each jaw; and the general contour of the hinder cranial region. Fragments of the snout may also be easily distinguished by the palatal surface exhibiting two parallel longi- tudinal grooves. Moreover, it seems even possible to recognize detached vertebre by the peculiarities of the neural arch, for the pedicle on each side is slightly prolonged downwards, thus presenting the appearance of clinging to the centrum.® Now, nearly all these characters are well shown in Prof. Phillips’ figures of “ Steneosaurus palpebrosus” and “ Steneosaurus gracilis,” and these species are also confined to the Upper Oolites, like the majority of the Metriorhynchs of the Continent. Of the first named 1 E. E. Deslongchamps, ‘‘ Notes Paléontologiques,” p. 319. 2 Op. cit. p. 353. 3 While describing the mandible of Metriorhynchus Moreli, M. Deslongchamps writes as follows (op. cit. p. 329) :—‘‘ Cette forme de machoire inférieure, toute différente de celle des autres animaux de la méme famille, rapelle assez la méme piece appartenant 4 un animal d’une tout autre famille, c’est-a-dire des Sauroptérygiens ; je veux dire celle qui est décrite par 8. Rich. Owen, comme étant celle d’un Pliwsawus qui, d’ailleurs, s’écarte notablement de la forme habituelle du Pliosaurus grandis, et quwil nomme Plhosaurus trochanterius.4 11 est hors de doute que la machoire décrite ici appartient au genre Métriorhynche; il serait en effet trop étrange que cette forme fat venue précisément se rencontrer dans toutes les assises ou se trouvent des Métrio- rhynches, et que je puisse rapporter des piéces en tout semblables par leurs caractéres particuliers de taille, de force et de briévété ou d’allongement du museau, a chacune de mes espéces de Métriorhynches, aussi bien dans les couches calloviennes quwoxfordiennes et kimméridgiennes; et, en effet, je connais dés maintenant des machoires inférieures se rapportant parfaitement aux Met. superciliosus, Moreli, et hastifer.”’ 4 R. Owen, “ Monograph of the Fossil Reptilia of the Kimmeridge Clay’ (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1868), p. 7, pl. iii. figs. 3-5. 5 K. E. Deslongchamps, op. cit. p. 182. 6 Character mentioned by H. E. Sauvage in Bull. Soc. Géol. France, [3] vii. (1879), p.695. See also figures and descriptions of vertebree by E. E. Deslongchamps in Lennier’s “ Etudes géologiques et paléontologiques sur ]’Embouchure de la Seine, etc.,’’ 1870, pp. 50-52, pl. x. 7 J. Phillips, “‘ Geology of Oxford,” pp. 380-888, with woodcuts. The Kim- meridge specimens were previously noticed by Owen (Brit. Assoc. Reports, 1841, p. 82) under the name of Stencosaurus rostro-minor, Geoftr. 8 Referring to the Continental forms, Deslongchamps remarks (op. cit. p. 184) :— “‘On les retrouve dans les diverses assises oxfordiennes, et leur maximum de développe- ment semble avoir lieu dans les assises kimméridgiennes supérieures et purt- landiennes.”’ a a a Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 503 form, a large series of remains, from the Kimmeridge Clay of Shotover, are preserved in the Museum at Oxford, and the Professor illustrates both skull and mandible, vertebre, shoulder girdle, and ischium, besides several limb bones more doubtfully referred to the sameanimal. WM. gracilis was founded upon less perfect materials : the type-specimen is a fragmentary skull, discovered by Mr. Wood Mason, and especially interesting on account of its being of Port- landian age. In the same work (p. 3819), Prof. Phillips further describes a number of vertebre from the Oxford Clay of Long Marston, said to agree very closely with those of the Shotover species ; and it may be added that an anterior portion of a mandible, obtained by Mr. Cunnington from the corresponding beds of Chippenham, and now in the British Museum (No. 46323), undoubtedly belongs to the same generic type. The presence of Machimosaurus among British fossils has only once been doubtfully suggested. M. Sauvage’ thinks it likely that the tooth recorded by Phillips? from the Kimmeridge Clay of Hardwick, under the name of Goniopholis sp., will eventually prove to belong to this genus; and our present information regarding the range of each form renders the suggestion very plausible. Another generic type of Kimmeridgian age is the Dakosaurus of Quenstedt.* Detached teeth closely resembling those described on the Continent are not unfrequently met with in several Kimmeridge Clay localities, but with the exception of certain derived fossils in the Potton deposits, no British specimens appear to have been definitely identified until 1869, when Mr. Wood Mason * presented a note on the subject to the Geological Society, and Prof. H. G. Seeley® recorded other specimens from the well-known pits near Ely. Some- what later in the same year, Mr. Hulke® made known a crocodilian jaw from the typical deposits of Kimmeridge Bay, which exhibited a number of teeth of an undoubtedly similar character, and was associated with vertebrae and other skeletal fragments; in 1870, the subsequent fortunate recognition of the skull of the same individual provided materials for a much more satisfactory study, with the result that the distinguished paleontologist just mentioned relegated the form to a new species of Steneosaurus—S. Manselit, Hulke— and thus deposed the generic name, Dakosaurus, to the rank of a 1 H. E. Sauvage, “ Mémoire sur les Dinosauriens et les Crocodiliens des Terrains Jurassiques de Boulogne-sur-Mer,’’ Mém. Soc. Géol. France, [2] vol. x. mém. i. (1874), p. 50. It should be noted that the statement in this Memoir, to the effect that Machimosaurus and Goniopholis are synonymous, was withdrawn in 1879, on the discovery of more complete remains of the former genus. 2 J. Phillips, op. cit. p. 332. 3 A. Quenstedt, ‘‘ Der Jura,’’ 1858, p. 785, pl. 97, figs. 8-11. 4 J. Wood Mason, “On Dukosaurus from the Kimmeridge Clay of Shotover Hill,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxv. (1869), pp. 218-220 (with woodcuts). 5 H. G. Seeley, ‘‘ Index to Reptilia, ete., Woodwardian Museum,”’ p. 109. 6 J, W. Hulke, “Notes on some Fossil Remains of a Gavial-like Saurian from Kimmeridge Bay, collected by J. C. Mansel, Esq., establishing its identity with Cuvier’s Deuxiéme Gavial d' Honfleur, Téte ad museau plus court (Steneosaurus rostro- minor of Geoffroy St.-Hilaire) and with Quenstedt’s Dakosawrus,’ Quart. Journ, Geol. Soc., vol. xxv. (1869), pp. 890-400, pls. xvii. xviii. 504 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. synonym.’ These instructive specimens (with many other Kim- meridge fossils) had been presented by their discoverer, Mr. Mansel- Pleydell, to the British Museum, where they have since occupied a prominent position in the Crocodilian series, and a little more than a year ago formed the subject of another memoir—on this occasion by Sir Richard Owen.” While confirming completely the descriptive details published by his fellow-worker fifteen years ago, Sir Richard now endeavours to maintain that the fossils in question are really generically separable from Steneosaurus, and thus proposes to estab- lish a new genus, Plesiosuchus—-so named in allusion to the fact, that the shape of the skull and the disposition of the nasal bones indicate a nearer approach to the later broad-faced Crocodiles than any of the earlier Teleosauria. On the other hand, Mr. Hulke ® still ventures “to deprecate any disturbance in the original name” ; and it is remarkable that in the paper just quoted,‘ Sir Richard Owen makes no allusion to the asserted identity of the teeth with those of Quenstedt’s Dakosaurus (1858), when he suggests the removal of this species from the true Steneosaurs. The interesting remains of Dakosaurus in the Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge, recorded and briefly noticed by Prof. Seeley,’ have not hitherto been fully described. Among others, they include a remarkably complete skull from the Kimmeridge Clay of Ely (which has received the name of D. lissocephalus, Seeley) and several other portions of the skeleton. There is also a worn tooth of Dakosaurus—probably indicative of a new species (Seeley )—from the Coral Rag of North Grimston.° As might be expected from the stout character of its teeth, it may be noted that Machimosaurus has proved to be a comparatively short- snouted Mesosuchian. Being of the same (Kimmeridgian) age, MM. Sauvage and Liénard’s valuable memoir’ on this generic type is especially interesting when considered in connection with Dakosaurus. PuRBECK AND WEALDEN CROCODILIA. The majority of the crocodilians of this age at present known are characterized by broad-faced skulls; and only two genera, probably 1 J. W. Hulke, “‘ Note on a Crocodilian Skull from Kimmeridge Bay, Dorset,’ ibid. vol. xxvi. (1870), pp. 167-172, pl. ix. This identification was subsequently questioned by H. EK. Sauvage (‘‘Sur le genre Dacosawrus, Quenstedt,’’ Bull. Soc. Géol. France [3], vol. i. 1873, pp. 380-385), who endeavoured to prove the Mosa- saurian character of the detached teeth met with in Continental deposits. Subsequent research, however, has failed to strengthen such an opinion. 2 Sir Richard Owen, ‘‘ On the Cranial and Vertebral Characters of the Crocodilian Genus Plesiosuchus, Owen,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xl. (1884), pp. 153-159. ae also Owen’s ‘‘ Brit. Foss. Reptiles,” vol. iii. pp. 146-151, (Crocodilia) pl. 20, gs. 1-4. 3 Presidential Address, 1884, Proc. Geol. Soc. pp. 45-47. 4 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1884. 5 H. G. Seeley, ‘‘ Index to remains of Reptilia, etc., Woodwardian Museum,” 1869, pp. 109, 92. 6 Can this be the same as certain Corallian teeth in the British Museum, bearing the MS. name of Pliosaurus teretidens, Owen? 7 H. KH. Sauvage and F. Liénard, ‘‘ Mémoire sur le genre Machimosaurus,’’ Mem. Soc. Géol, France, [3] vol. i. mém. iv. (1879). Abstract by H. EH. Sauvage in Bull. Soc. Géol. France, [3] vol. vii. (1879), pp. 693-697. Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 505 related to the older Teleosaurs, appear to have been hitherto described in Britain. Hyl@ochampsa vectiana, Owen,! is founded upon the hinder portion of a small (young ?) skull—discovered by the Rev. W. Fox, M.A., in the Wealden beds of the Isle of Wight—and its precise affinities are somewhat uncertain. Petrosuchus levidens, Owen,” is a Purbeck species, determined upon the evidence of a fragmentary skull and mandible from Swanage, and also rather problematical in its affinities: it is regarded, however, as intermediate between the long- and short-snouted types. The first of the broad-faced forms that received a name was that constituting Owen’s genus Goniopholis,’ and, though little was known of it at first, the original species has subsequently proved to have so many congeners, that it is now found convenient to group them all together in a family termed GontopHotipm;* Mr. Hulke, indeed, ventured, a few years ago,° to regard their peculiarities as justifying the erection of a new suborder, MetameEsosucata, but the advisability of such a procedure has lately been called in question.® Goniopholis—so named, in 1841,’ in allusion to the rectangular form of the (dorsal) seuntes—was founded upon a number of detached teeth discovered by Dr. Mantell in the Wealden of Tilgate Forest, and upon a large portion of a skeleton from the Purbeck Beds of Swanage, which also exhibited one or two dental fragments of a similar type. Subsequent discoveries in the Wealden of Sussex, and the Purbecks of Dorset, have contributed further to elucidate the genus, adding two new species, and the recent fortunate acquisition of almost complete skeletons from the celebrated Wealden strata of Bernissart in Belgium, seems destined to supply nearly all deficiencies in our knowledge of its osteology. The skull was not made known until 1878, when Hulke® (followed, in the case of one specimen, hy Owen °) was able to describe all its more salient features: and it is only about two years since Dollo” gave an outline of the general skeletal characters as revealed by the Belgian examples. 1 R. Owen, “ Monograph of the Fossil Reptilia of the Wealden and Purbeck Formations,’’ Suppl. vi. (Mon. Pal. Soc. 1873). 2 R. Owen, ‘‘ Mon. Foss. Rept. Weald. and Purb. Form.’’ Suppl. viii. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1878), p. 10, pl. vi. 5 R. Owen, ‘‘ Report on British Fossil Reptiles, Part II.”’ Brit. Assoc. Rep. 1841, . 69. 4 L. Dollo, ‘‘ Premiére Note sur les Crocodiliens de Bernissart,’’ Bull. Mus. Roy. Nat. Hist. Belgique, vol. ii. (1883), p. 334. 5 J. W. Hulke, ‘* Note on two Skulls from the Wealden and Purbeck Formations, indicating a new Sub-group of Crocodilia,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxiv. (1878), p. 381. 6 L. Dollo, loc. cit. p. 329. 7 R. Owen, Brit. Assoc. Reports, 1841, p. 69. 8 J. W. Hulke, paper already cited, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxiv. pp. 377-381, pl. xv. It should be added, that Prof. Huxley previously described a portion of an indeterminable crocodilian skull from the Wealden of Brook, Isle of Wight, in his paper of 1875, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxi. p. 432, pl. xix, fig. 3: these later discoveries indicate its probable reference to Goniopholis. 9 R. Owen, “ Monograph of the Fossil Reptilia of the Wealden and Purbeck Formations,’’ Suppl. viii. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1878), p. 7, pl. v. 10 L. Dollo, note already quoted above. 506 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. The teeth of the ‘Swanage Crocodile,” ! and Mantell’s specimens from Tilgate Forest, being remarkable for their thick and stunted shape, the original type-species was named G. crassidens.2, A second form, described by Hulke and Owen in 1878,' is known as G. simus, Owen, and it is to this that the magnificent skeletons from Bernissart may be referred: the teeth are more slender than in the first-named species and the head apparently less tapering. G. tenuidens is the name given by Owen,’ in 1879, to a fragmentary mandible from the Middle Purbecks of Durdlestone Bay, and indicates a small form, characterized by the slenderness of its teeth; and four vertebre, from the Wealden of Cuckfield, are figured in Owen’s “ British Fossil Reptiles ” °—though not described—under the name of G. carinatus. The Middle Purbecks of Durdlestone Bay have also yielded an interesting series of remains of ‘“‘ Dwarf Crocodiles,” some of which are undoubtedly referable to the same family. They were described by Sir Richard Owen® in 1879, and distributed among three new genera, termed respectively Nannosuchus, Brachydectes, and Therio- suchus, and considered to indicate about four species. Nannosuchus gracilidens is founded upon the skull and mandible ; but associated vertebrae, scutes, and portions of limb-bones are also known. The second genus—with its two species, B. major and B. minor—is indicated by mandibular rami, particularly remarkable on account of the very small proportion of the jaw bearing teeth. Brachydectes (‘short-biter”), however, is a name preoccupied by Cope, in 1868,’ for a Carboniferous Labyrinthodont, and it will, therefore, be necessary to substitute a new term. It may not be inappropriate to suggest the generic title of Oweniasuchus, employing the name of one to whom we owe the earliest definite information regarding British Fossil Crocodiles, and so many contributions to the subject that have subsequently appeared. The remains of Theriosuchus pusillus include not only the skull and mandible, but also a nearly complete skeleton, and its osteology is thus comparatively well known. M. L. Dollo has suggested * that it may possibly belong to his newly determined family of Bernis- sartide ; and if this view prove correct, the fact of its dorsal scutes being apparently on the Goniopholis plan—in two rows, with peg- and-socket articulation—instead of following the plan of Bernissartia, will become of especial interest. 1G. A. Mantell, “Wonders of Geology,’’ 3rd edit. (1839), vol. i. pp. 387-389, pl. i. 2 R. Owen, Brit. Assoc. Reports, 1841, p. 69. Further details are given in Owen’s ‘‘ Mon. Foss. Rept. Weald. and Purb. Form.,’’ Suppl. vii. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1878), pp. 1-6, pls. 1.-iv.; and Mr. Willett’s Wealden skull, described by Mr. Hulke, loc. cit., is regarded as probably belonging to this species. 3 Memoirs in Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. and Mon. Pal. Soc. already quoted. 4 R. Owen, ‘Mon. Foss. Rept, Weald. and Purb. Form.,” Suppl. ix. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1879), p. 2, pl. i. fig. 1. 5 Op. cit. pl. 14 (Crocodilia). 6 R. Owen, ‘‘ Mon. Foss. Rept. Weald. and Purb. Form.,’’ Suppl. ix. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1879). See also Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxv. pp. 149-152, pl. ix. 7 K. D. Cope, ‘‘ Synopsis of the Extinct Batrachia of North America,’’ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1868, p. 214. 8 L. Dollo, foc. cit. p. 380. Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 507 The genus Suchosaurus, Owen,! is very imperfectly known. It is founded upon detached teeth from the Wealden of Tilgate Forest, characterized by their laterally compressed and slightly curved shape, and ornamented with prominent longitudinal ridges; they are especially remarkable from the fact, that the compression is from side to side, and the opposite trenchant “‘ carine”’ hence anterior and posterior, while the corresponding edges in most other crocodilian teeth that are known to possess them are distinctly lateral in posi- tion. Only one species, S. cultridens, is as yet recognized, and with the teeth Sir Richard Owen has ventured to associate a peculiar type of Wealden vertebra that can scarcely be referred to any other Saurian hitherto met with in those deposits. Only one other British crocodilian fossil of Wealden (?) age appears to have been hitherto described. It is a small slab of “Greensand,” from the neighbourhood of Hastings, exhibiting a few scarcely determinable scutes and other skeletal fragments, and described by Sir Richard Owen,? in 1851, under the name of “ Crocodilus ? Saulii.” Later discoveries, of course, suggest its affinities with such forms as Bernissartia or the Purbeck genera. Cretaceous CRocoDILIA. No members of the Crocodilian order seem to have been recorded from any of the British Cretaceous formations, except the Cambridge Greensand. While the corresponding beds in North America afford evidence both of the decline of the Mesosuchia and the rise of the EKusuchia, at this period—and while satisfactory remains of the last- named suborder are also known from Continental deposits—the only discoveries hitherto recorded in Britain are a few proccelian vertebre from Cambridge. These are regarded by Prof. Seeley as indicative of two species, probably belonging to the genus Crocodilus, and accordingly named C. cantabrigiensis* and C. icenicus.* HKocrene Crocopitta. Of all known Crocodilia of the Eocene period, perhaps no series can claim to be of greater interest than that discovered in the London and Hampshire Basins. Not only—as Sir Richard Owen has pointed out—are the characters both of Crocodiles, Alligators, and Gavials, observed in the various forms from this single area, while the three families are nowhere found associated at the present day ; but many of the fossil remains already known are also of a 1 R. Owen, Brit. Assoc. Reports, 1841, p. 67; and ‘‘ Mon. Foss, Rept. Weald. etc.,’’ Suppl. viii., (Mon. Pal. Soc. 1878), p. 12, pl. iv. figs. 5-8. 2 R. Owen, ‘‘ Monograph of the Fossil Reptilia of the Cretaceous Formations,’’ (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1851), p. 44, pl. xv. 3 H. G. Seeley, ‘‘Index to Reptilia, ete., in Woodwardian Museum’’ (1869), p- xvi, and “ On Cervical and Dorsal Vertebree of Crocodilus cantabrigiensis (Seeley) from the Cambridge Upper Greensand,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxx. (1874), pp- 693-695, 4 H. G. Seeley, ‘On Crocodilus icenicus (Seeley), a second and larger Species of Crocodile from the Cambridge Upper Greensand, contained in the Woodwardian Museum of the University of Cambridge,”’ doc. cit, vol. xxxii. (1876), pp. 437-439, 508 Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. remarkably satisfactory character, and include fine cranial specimens in an excellent state of preservation. The first notice of a Crocodile from the London Clay of Sheppey was by Baron Cuvier,! who based his determination upon a detached cervical vertebra; an imperfect skull was subsequently discovered by Mr. Spencer, in 1831, and figured by Buckland? under the name of C. Spenceri; and in 1850, the Paleontographical Society published an exhaustive monograph by Prof. (Sir Richard) Owen,% which embraced an account of all the fossil remains of this order, from British Eocene deposits, at that time available. With the exception of a brief, but valuable contribution to our knowledge of the Hordwell species, by Prof. Huxley,‘ no further additions to the literature of the subject seem to have been made since the ap- pearance of this classical memoir; and the subsequent discoveries of crocodilian remains in the same beds have apparently afforded no evidence of any new specific form. Among the Sheppey fossils, two species are indicated not merely by the skulls, but also by numerous portions of the vertebral column; there is, however, no very definite information as yet con- cerning the rest of the skeleton, and isolated fragments of limb-bones and dermal scutes are the only remains hitherto forthcoming for study. To one of these species Sir Richard Owen gives the name of C. Toliapicus, regarding a fine skull and mandible in the British Museum as the type; and describes the second species as C. champ- soides, upon the evidence of another cranial fossil, likewise preserved in the National Collection. In regard to Buckland’s C. Spenceri, founded in 1836, the Professor displays some hesitation, and eventually declines to recognize the priority of the name by expressing doubts as to the possibility of determining the precise relationship of Spencer’s less perfect fossil to the more complete specimens under description.° A series of crocodilian vertebrae, obtained by Mr. Frederic Dixon, from the Lower Hocenes of Bognor, Sussex, probably belongs to C. Toliapicus, Owen ;° and science is indebted to the labours of the same indefatigable investigator of Sussex fossils for the discovery of undoubted fragments of a Gavial in the Bracklesham Beds. Sir Richard Owen’ has described the latter under the name of Gavialis 1 G. Cuvier, ‘“‘ Ossemens Fossiles,’’ 2nd. edit. (1824), vol. v. pt. ii. p. 165. i 2 Rev. W. Buckland, ‘‘Geol. and Min.” 2nd edit. (1837), vol. i. p. 251; vol. ii. p- 36, pl. 25’, fig. 1. * R. Owen, ‘‘ Monograph of the Fossil Reptilia of the London Clay,” Part II. (Mon. Pal. Soc., 1850). 4 T. H. Huxley, ‘On the Dermal Armour of Crocodilus Hastingsie,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xv. (1859), pp. 678-680, pl. xxv. , ° On this curious method of solving the difficulty, see the remarks of Dr. Léon Vaillant, ‘‘ Etude zoologique sur les Crocodiliens fossiles tertiaires de St.-Gérand le Puy,’’ Biblioth. ’ Ecole Hautes Etudes, vol. vi. pp. 10,11. It may be added, that this memoir contains valuable information respecting European ‘lertiary Crocodilia described before its date of publication (1872). : 6 R. Owen, ‘‘Mon. Foss. Rept. Lond. Clay,’’ pt. ii. p. 36. See also Dixon’s ‘“Geology of Sussex,’’ Ist edit. p. 207, pl. xv. figs. 1, 2 (2nd edit. p. 253, pl. xv. figs. 1, 2), in which Sir Richard Owen names it ‘* VU. Spenceri, Buckland.” 7 R. Owen, op. cit. p. 46, pl. x. Also F. Dixon, op. cit. 1st edit. p. 208 (2nd edit. p. 253). ——_— a Arthur Smith Woodward—British Fossil Crocodilia. 509 Dixoni, founding the species upon portions of the mandible and teeth, and provisionally associating with these a slender femur and vertebree. But the most completely known of British Eocene forms is the Crocodilus Hastingsie, Owen,’ of which the more or less perfect remains occur abundantly in certain horizons in the Hordwell Cliffs, Hampshire. With the exception of the characters of the limb-bones and scutes, the osteology of this species was very fully made known in Sir Richard Owen’s monograph;* and the dermal armour has been subsequently described by Prof. Huxley.’ As the result of these studies, there appears to be almost decided proof that only a single crocodilian form occurs in the Hordwell Beds, and that Searles Wood’s Alligator Hantoniensis * is thus merely a variety.2 C. Hast- ingsice, indeed, combines the characters both of Crocodiles and Alligators to a remarkable extent; and it also possesses some features that would quite entitle it to rank as a distinct genus, were it con- sidered desirable to recognize as such certain early proccelian types so distinguished in North America. None of the British Hocene species appear to have received further elucidation by discoveries on the Continent, and the writer has only succeeded in meeting with one case in which a foreign form is identified with a species previously described in Britain. This is Pictet’s doubtful reference of some fragmentary fossils from the Swiss Hocenes to Crocodilus Hastingsie, Owen.® With the close of Hocene times, the history of the Crocodilia in British areas seems to have ended; and the latest species yet recorded in Europe appears to be that mentioned by Gervais’ as found in the Pliocenes of Montpellier, France. Besides the descriptive works already referred to, the English literature of the subject also comprises some valuable general studies, and in the foremost rank may be placed Prof. Huxley’s now classical memoir on the Evolution of the Crocodilia, read before the Geo- logical Society in 1875. The well-known division of the order into the three sub-orders of Parasucuta, Mrsosucuta, and Eusucuta, is here first proposed, and appears to have met with almost universal 1 R. Owen, ‘‘ On the Fossils obtained by the Marchioness of Hastings from the Freshwater Kocene Beds of the Hordle Cliffs,” Brit. Assoc. Rep. 1847, Trans. Sections, p. 65. 2 R. Owen, op. cit. pp. 87-42, pls. vi.-ix. ; xii. figs. 2, 5. 3 T. H. Huxley, paper already cited, in Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xv. 4 Searles V. Wood, ‘‘On the Discovery of an Alligator and of several new Mammalia in the Hordwell Cliff,’ Charlesworth’s “ London Geological Journal,” 1846, p. 6, pls. 1, 6, 7. ° It is interesting to notice that Prof. Cope has described a curious specimen of a South American Alligator, in which the lower ‘canine’? on one side fits into a notch, while on the other the corresponding tooth is received in a pit (Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc. vol. xiv. 1869, p. 83). i F. J. Pictet, ‘* Paléontologie Suisse—Vertébrés de la Faune éocéne,” p. 89, pl. vii. 7 P. Gervais, “ Zoologie et Paléontologie francaises,” 2nd edit. (1859), p. 443, pl. lix. fig. 2; pl. vii. fir. 7. 8 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xxxi. pp. 423-488, pl. xix. 510 Dr. Henry Hicks—Bone-Caves of North Wales. acceptance. Sir Richard Owen, also, has contributed’ two interest- ing papers upon considerations suggested by his researches on the Dwarf Crocodiles of Swanage, and the reading of the first before the Geological Society, in 1878, was followed by an important and lengthy discussion. Tbe same distinguished paleontologist, so long ago as 1858,? also published an outline of the osteology of the Teleosaurian skull; and more recently, Prof. H. G. Seeley* has succeeded in elucidating some of the main features of the brain in that extinct group. In conclusion, without attempting, as yet, to enter into the merits of the various specific types that have been described by different authors, it will perhaps be useful to arrange our present knowledge of the subject in tabular form, and the accompanying extensive scheme is accordingly appended. (See folding Table, next p. 508.) Those names that may be regarded as synonyms on the evidence of existing literature have an asterisk prefixed to them, and in the case of species founded on Continental fossils, the particulars inserted in the columns following the name, refer to the date of identification, nature of the first recognized example, etc., of the British representatives. V.—On tHe Fynnon Beuno anp Car Gwyn Bone Cavzs, Norta Wauss.* By H. Hicks, M.D., F.R:S., F-G:S. N the Proceedings of the Geol. Assoc. vol. ix. No. 1, I have i given an account of the discovery of two Bone-caves in the Carboniferous rocks on the east side of the Vale of Clwyd, N. Wales, and of the researches carried on in those caverns by Mr. H. Bouverie Luxmoore, of St. Asaph, and myself in the summers of 1888 and 1884. This summer, by the aid of a grant from the Royal Society (the Government Grant), we were enabled to employ a staff of workmen, under our personal supervision, to explore these caverns more thoroughly and with very satisfactory results. Our main object was to gain a clear idea of the physical conditions of the area when the caverns were filled with the deposits, and of the manner in which the remains had been conveyed into them. These points we think we have been able to prove to satisfaction, but it may be advisable to » continue the researches for the purpose of obtaining as much con- firmatory evidence as possible. In the Cae Gwyn Cavern all the deposits were entirely undisturbed except by burrowing animals when we first discovered it, and great care was taken throughout to notice the conditions of the materials. 1 R. Owen, “ On the Influence of the Advent of a higher Form of Life in modi- fying the Structure of an older and lower Form,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxiv. (1878), pp. 421-430; also ‘“‘On the Association of Dwarf Crocodiles (Nannosuchus and Theriosuchus pusillus, e.g.) with the Diminutive Mammals of the Purbeck Shales,” ibid. vol. xxxv. (1879), pp. 148-155, pl. ix. 2 Portion of lecture delivered on April 29th, 1858, reported in Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. [3] vol. i. pp. 456-463. 3 H. G. Seeley, “ On the Cranial Characters of a large Teleosaur from the Whitby Lias,’’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxvi. (1880), pp. 627-634, pl. xxiv. 4 Read before the Geological Section (C) of the British Association, Aberdeen, September, 1886. Dr. Henry Hicks—Bone-Caves of North Wales. 511 The deposits in this cavern consisted first of a reddish clayey earth, varying in depth from two to four feet. Below this was found a more compact deposit, about 18 inches in thickness, made up of thin layers of fine marly clay, and under this the material containing the bones. This material consisted of a reddish clay with sand in places, and contained many boulders similar to those found in the the Boulder-clays of the district. Large fragments of a stalagmite floor and of stalactites occurred also in it, showing that the water action which disturbed the original materials in the cave must have been of a violent nature. Under this was found a gravelly deposit, containing fragments mainly from the hills above and no_ bones. In this cavern the deposits, except the lowest, have now been cleared out to a distance from the entrance of over 150 feet. It is for the most part a true tunnel cavern, with well-smoothed roof and sides. The largest chamber has just been reached at a little over 150 feet from the entrance. It is over 11 feet in length and 9 feet in height. The other chambers are small, being mainly dilatations of the tunnel, which varies from 3 to 9 feet in width. Extending from a small chamber about 45 feet from the entrance there is another branch tunnel which has been explored toa distance of about 16 feet. The bones discovered in this cavern, according to Mr. W. Davies, ¥F.G.S., of the British Museum, to whom all the bones found in both caverns have been submitted, belong to the Lion, Hyzna, Bear, Badger, Wolf, Fox, Great Irish Deer, Reindeer, Red Deer, Roebuck, Rhinoceros and Horse. A flint scraper was also found last year in association with the remains ata distance of 45 feet from the entrance. The Fynnon Beuno Cavern is partly a fissure and partly a tunnel- cavern. From the entrance inwards for a distance of about 40 feet it is a true tunnel-cavern, and there is a branch-tunnel extending from this for a further distance of over 50 feet, ultimately opening out on the hill-side above the main entrance. Another tunnel com- municates with an extensive fissure cavern which had evidently been disturbed at some time by mining operations (though I could obtain no information as to when). In the undisturbed parts of this cavern the deposits were of similar character to those in the Cae Gwyn Cave. This cavern, however, being for some extent an open cavern, had probably been inhabited in Neolithic, or perhaps later times, as a quantity of charcoal was found at two points at distances of from 20 to 24 feet from the entrance. Several well-worked flint flakes were found at different points in this cavern, in association with bones of the Mammoth, Rhinoceros, etc. Dr. Hvans recognized them as of the type of the wrought flakes found in Kent’s Cavern, they are white and porcellanous, and show indications of having been used, but not rolled by water action. Worked bones and others broken by man were also found. The bones were exceedingly plentiful in the cavern, and showed indications of having been gnawed freely, evi- dently when in a fresh condition, hence proving clearly that they had been conveyed into the cavern soon after the animals had died. —s eeeeenmnanceenre aera eer 512 Dr. Henry Hicks—Bone-Caves of North Wales. Some album grecum was also found in each of the caverns, therefore the evidence points conclusively to their having been dens occupied by beasts of prey. I think we are quite justified also in supposing from the positions of the flakes and worked bones, that the caverns were occupied by man, or at least that the district was inhabited by man when the Mammoth, Rhinoceros, Reindeer, Hyena, etc., roamed about the area. The bones found in this cavern belonged to the following animals, viz. Lion, Wild Cat, Hyena, Bear, Wolf, Fox, Wild Boar, Great Irish Deer, Reindeer, Red Deer, Roebuck, Bos, Mammoth, Rhinoceros, and Horse. The remains were much more plentiful in the Fynnon Beuno than in the Cae Gwyn Cave. Among the specimens found in the two caverns, there were over 80 jaws belonging to various animals, and more than 13800 loose teeth, in- eluding about 400 Rhinoceros, 15 Mammoth, 180 Hyena, and 500 Horse teeth. Other bones and fragments of bones occurred also in very great abundance. As these caverns are over 400 feet above present sea-level, and nearly 300 feet above the river Clwyd (the height given in my paper to the Geologists’ Association was understated), it is clear that very great physical changes must have taken place in this area since the time that the marine sand was conveyed into these caverns. The broken stalagmite floor, sometimes 10 to 12 inches in thickness, and the broken stalactites 6 to 8 inches across, show that the water action must have been also of a violent nature. The position of the bones in some places under still adherent parts of this stalagmite, and the presence of marine sand in the hollow parts of the bones show that the bones must have been in the caverns before the sea finally receded from them. The presence also of a material, in every respect like the Boulder-clay of the district filling up the caverns, points to the probability that the so-called Upper Boulder-clays of this district were deposited, for the most part at the time, or subse- quent to the infilling of these caverns. Along the hill-sides in the ravine in which the caverns are situated, sands and clays similar to those found in the caverns, and containing marine shells, are found at about the same horizon, and in the hills to the S.E, at much greater elevations. Cae Gwyn Cave is over 60 feet, and Fynnon Beuno 42 feet above the level of the little stream, a tributary of the Clwyd, in the ravine in which they are situated. These facts suggest the following as the probable changes indicated by the deposits in the caverns. The lowest deposit in the caverns consisting almost entirely of local materials, was introduced into them by the river which then flowed in the valley at a very much higher level than at present. As time went on the valley deepened and the caverns were above the reach of the floods. They then became the abode of Hyeenas and other beasts of prey, and during part of the time were probably occu- pied by man. Subsequently there was a period of great sub- mergence, and when the caverns were on a level with the sea, they were filled with sandy material and the bones were embedded in it. The following are the results which have to be accounted for :-— Prof. Lebour—Recent Earthquakes on Coast of Durham. 5138 A. The infilling of the caverns by local gravels. B. The occupation of the caverns by beasts of prey and by man. C. The formation of the stalagmite. D. The breaking up of the stalagmite floor, and the introduction of the Boulder-clay. The position of the caverns almost at the crest of a ridge of Carboniferous rocks makes it clear that the Boulder-clay could not have been introduced by streams; therefore the only conclusion | can arrive at is, that during a period of great submergence, either during or subsequent to the Glacial epoch, the material was introduced by marine action. Also that this sub- mergence, and the subsequent elevation of the submerged area to its present height of over 400 feet above sea-level, must undoubtedly have taken place since the caverns were occupied by man and by the extinct animals. VI.—On some Recent EartHQquakEs ON THE DurRHAM Coast AND THEIR PROBABLE CAUSE.! By G. A. Lezour, M.A., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in the Durham College of Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. INCE the latter end of 1883 up to the present time (Sept. 1885) the inhabitants of certain portions of the town of Sunderland have been much disturbed by a series of small but distinctly sensible earth-shakes, which have caused considerable discussion in the local press and elsewhere. ‘These shocks were chiefly felt in that quarter of the town known as the Tunstall Road, but were not absolutely limited to that locality. They were accompanied by rumblings— sometimes dull but often loud—by the rattling of crockery and furniture, and frequently by very distinct shakes of the entire frame-" work of buildings. Often the shocks have, at night, waked up and terrified the sleeping inhabitants. The probable origin of these disturbances has naturally been much canvassed, and blasting in quarries, shot-firing in collieries, and the passing of railway trains, have in turn been accused of causing them, _ and, on examination, have been found ‘not guilty.” At the present time there is no doubt whatever that the shocks are due to some natural cause. As to what that natural cause may be, there is per- haps room for difference of opinion. My friend, Mr. M. Walton Brown, of the Coal-trade Offices at Neweastle-upon Tyne, in a paper read in 1884 before the North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers, refers to the Sunderland shocks as being genuine earth-tremors ; but I think that their extremely local character—setting aside many other points inconsistent with this view of their origin—is conclusive against this being so. In another paper read at the same time as Mr. Walton Brown’s before the same Institute, I brought forward a number of facts tending to connect the phenomena above referred to with certain peculiarities in the geological structure of the district. Since that 1 Read before the Geological Section (C) of the British Association, Aberdeen, September, 1885. DECADE III.—YOL. II,—NO. XI, 33 514 Prof. Lebour—Recent Earthquakes on Coast of Durham. time the shocks having continued more or less continuously, and evidence of all kinds with regard to them having accumulated, I wish to lay my more mature views on the subject before Section C, in the hope that members in discussing them may help to elicit the truth. Sunderland stands upon the Permian Magnesian Limestone. There is from 300 to 400 feet of this rock beneath the town. This rock is riddled with cavities of every size and shape. The smaller ones give a vesicular aspect to the stone in many places, but the larger ones are often true caverns due to the combined action of mechanical and chemical agencies. Many of them may be accounted for by noting how frequently masses both large and small and of all shapes of soft pulverulent matter occur in the midst of the most compact and hard portions of the limestone. How easily such soft incoherent earthy rock or ‘‘ Marl” as it is called locally, can be removed by the merest percolation of rain-water, needs no proof, and that caverns would result and have resulted from such removal is clear. This action is indeed chiefly mechanical, but there is also going on at the same time a very considerable destruction or removal of rock by the ordinary chemical action of rain-water on limestone. I have shown elsewhere that every thousand gallons of Sunderland water pumped up, and ultimately thrown into the sea, represents one pound of stone abstracted. In each year the Water Company robs the Magnesian Limestone in this manner of about forty cubic yards of rock, and of course much more is carried off annually by natural channels. How large some of the cavities are which form water- cisterns in this rock may be gathered from the fact that when in ‘sinking a shaft at Whitburn Colliery in 1874, one of them was unfortunately tapped, it yielded 11,612 gallons of water per minute for a month. The rock then immediately underlying Sunderland is a mass of calcareous stone, mostly hard and compact, but cellular in places and earthy and friable in others, often cavernous on a large scale, full of water, and through its action continually parting with its sub- stance, and thus enlarging the cavities within it. Under conditions such as these, it follows necessarily that the vaults of cavities must from time to time give way, and in col- lapsing, produce concussions accompanied by noise, but limited in the area over which their effects would be felt. In short it seems to me that we have in such natural stone-falls at moderate depths a sufficient explanation of the Sunderland earth-shocks. Jn the paper before alluded to I pointed out that this theory explains equally well all the facts connected with the singular fissures full of breccia (‘‘ breccia-gashes”) which are common in the Magnesian Limestone of Durham, and have been a standing puzzle to Lyell, Sedgwick and all the geologists who have published accounts of the magnificent sections exhibited along the coast between South Shields and Sunderland. Quite recently very similar shocks have been felt, as J am in- formed, in the neighbourhood of Middlesborough, where it is pro- Notices of Memoirs—The British Association. 515 bable that they are due to the withdrawal of rock-salt which has been going on there of late years only. In this case the depth at which the cavities are being formed and rock-collapses are, as I believe, taking place, is much greater than in the Sunderland case, the borings for salt being from 1000 to 1200 feet deep. I will conclude with a quotation from my paper on the Breccia- gashes,! p. 174:—‘“‘The forms of these gashes, which are gullet- shaped and tapering downwards, unlike the sea-caves; the breccia with which they are filled; the matter with which the fragments are cemented ; the half-broken beds which so often bridge over the upper portions of the fissures; and the unbroken beds immediately above and below them, which would be inconceivable had the fissures and their infillings been due to real earthquakes. All these things are necessary accompaniments of the rock-collapses which, it has been shown, must in time past have happened frequently, are happening still, and must happen more and more frequently in the future.” IN (OuMbscCiwsS) Oss. IMCaaIME@reI STS T.—British ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. Firty-Firtd Mrrtinc, ABERDEEN, 1885. List of titles of papers bearing upon Geology and Paleontology read in other Sections of the Association than in Section C (Geology). Srorron A.—MatTHEMATICAL AND PuysicaL SCIENCE. Report of the Committee on Underground Temperature. Report of the Committee on Meteoric Dust. C. Meldrunm.—A Tabular Statement of the Dates at which and the Localities where Pumice or Volcanic Dust was seen in the Indian Ocean. Prof. Ewing.—On Measurements of Movements of the Ground. H. R. Mills.—Physical Condition of Water in Hstuaries. Section B.—CHEMICAL SCIENCE. Prof. W. Irwin Macadam.—Description of a Mineral from Loch Bhruithaie, Inverness-shire. F. Maxwell Lyte.-—On the use of Sodium or other Soluble Aluminates for Softening and Purifying hard and impure Water. Section D.—Brotoey. Prof. O. C. Marsh.—On the Size of the Brain in Extinct Animals. Prof. E. Hull. —On the Cause of the Extreme Dissimilarity between the Faunas of the Red Sea and Mediterranean, not- withstanding their recent connection. Prof. E. Hull.—On the Origin of the Fishes of the Sea of Galilee. Dr. Macfarlane.—On a Microscopic Fungus in Fossil Wood, from Bowling. 1 See Trans. N. HK. Inst, Min. Eng. vol. xxxii. (1884), where full references to most of the writers who have noticed the breccias are given, 516 Notices of Memoirs—Rev. E. Hill—Density of Meteorites. Srectron H.—Grf0GRAPHY. J. Y. Buchanan.—Oceanic Islands and Shoals. Gen. Sir R. Lefroy.—On the Depth of the Permanently Frozen Stratum of Soil in British North America. Srotrion G.—MEcHANICAL SCIENCE. W. Smith.—The Movement of Sand in Aberdeen Bay. Suction H. Thomas Wilson.—A New Man of Mentone. W. Pengelly—Happaway Cavern, Torquay. Dr. J. G. Garson.—The Human Remains found in Happaway Cavern, Torquay. Dr. R. Munro.—The Archeological Importance of Ancient British Lake-Dwellings and their Relation to analogous Remains in Europe. PAPERS READ BEFORE Suction C (GEOLOGY). Tl.—On tHe Averace Density or MertrEoRITES COMPARED WITH THAT OF THE HaRrTs. By the Rey. E. Hirt, M.A., St. John’s College, Cambridge. HE mean density of the earth, though not yet exactly deter- mined, is certainly about twice the average density of the rocks which compose its superficial crust. One conjecture which very naturally follows from this fact is that the constituents of its interior may essentially differ from the constituents of that crust. Professor Judd in his treatise on Volcanoes has alluded to this, and brings forward in addition the argument that materials are occasion- ally brought from below to the surface which resemble the materials of meteorites; bodies which generally have a high specific gravity and sometimes consist entirely of iron... The thought has occurred to me that it would be interesting to ascertain the average specific gravity of meteorites, in order to estimate what would be the density of a body formed by the aggregation of a multitude of such objects. To conduct such an investigation properly would involve enormous labour of research, and I have contented myself by using the materials furnished by Dr. Walter Flight’s most valuable ‘Chapters on Meteorites,” published in the Grotogican MaGazinn, during the years 1875, 1882, and 1883. From those chapters I have obtained the specific gravities of sixty-five different meteoric masses there described. The mean of these values, found by addition and division by 65, gives as result 4°84. This method of obtaining the mean will be correct, if the various sizes were equally distributed through each of the different specific gravities. ‘This would be rather a rash assumption, and it may seem fairer to bring into account the different masses of the specimens. From Dr. Flight’s papers, with some other materials, I have found fifty-seven cases in which both weight and specific gravity are recorded. Taking the sum of the weights, the sum of the corre- sponding volumes, and dividing, we obtain as final result a specific gravity of 5°71. 1 «¢Voleanoes,’’ p. 320. Notices of Memoirs—Rev. E. Hili—Density of Meteorites. 517 But in this enumeration is included the great Cranbourne meteorite, which weighs 34 tons, and exceeds all the rest put together. A mass so great swamps the rest, and makes the calculation unsatis- factory, affording at best a maximum limit. Several others are very large. Suppose we exclude all over 250]bs. here remain fifty- two cases, and the above process applied to these yields as result a specific gravity of 4:58. I have tried yet another method. I have seen somewhere a state- ment that in the British Museum are specimens of 260 meteorites, of which 55 are metallic. Now it becomes obvious on tabulating the specific gravities that the vast majority are either metallic with specific gravities lying between 7 and 8, or stony with specific eravities between 3 and 4. Separating the 57 cases previously alluded to into these two groups, and finding the respective average specific gravity by the second method, the results are 7-61 and 3-73. From 55 specific gravities of 7-61 and 205 of 3-73, we get an average of 4:55. This method is open to the objections made against the first, but in a slightly less degree from the larger numbers dealt with. It is probable that metallic masses more readily attract attention than stony meteorites, but on the other hand some appear to decay very rapidly. Thus it does not seem possible to say that either class has a better chance of obtaining admission to our calculations ; or a preponderating influence on the results. We may say, therefore, as a general result, that an assemblage of such meteoric masses as fall upon the earth, if collected from space indiscriminately and aggregated into a single mass, would form a body whose specific gravity would probably lie between 4:5 and 5:7, so long as its dimen- sions were moderate. Such a body, however, if it grew to be of planetary size, might become denser from the pressure due to its own attraction. How much denser we cannot say. But since water has been compressed by +4: th of its bulk under a pressure of 2000 atmospheres (Ency. Brit., art. Hlasticity), and a like pressure would be experienced at a depth of about four miles of the earth’s crust, at least as much may be expected in such an aggregated mass. Such a compression would raise even the lowest of the above results, viz. 4:5, to 4°9. And twice the compression would raise it to 5-4. Now 5:6 is the value usually adopted as the best estimate of the specific gravity of the earth. The density of the earth is, therefore, perfectly consistent with its being an aggregation of meteoric materials. Whether we regard meteorites as fragments of a planet, as condensations of cometary matter, or as self-existent bodies, they are certainly specimens of matter scattered widely over the solar system, and may very possibly be fair samples of its materials. And small as is the catalogue even of all we know, they contain all the most important constituents of the earth’s crust, and even of its soil. If the earth be an aggregate of meteoric materials, so must be the f=) other planets. Now the densest of these is Mercury with a specific 518 Notices of Memoirs—H. Miller—Old COoast-lines of Norway. gravity about 6°3; Venus is about the same as the Harth; and Mars somewhat less. All these specific gravities are perfectly consistent with such an origin. The others are very much lighter, ranging down to Saturn with a specific gravity of about 0-7. But high temperature and gaseous envelopes may have much to do with these apparent low densities: a cloudy envelope which shoald extend to one-fourth of the radius would halve the estimate of density. The fact that seems most seriously discordant with the hypothesis is the low specific gravity of the Moon, which is estimated at only 3 5. But this at any rate is about the specific gravity of the “stony” group of meteorites. And we may compare the fact that the super- ficial crust of the earth, and also some meteoric constituents, have lower specific gravities still. We naturally expect the lightest con- stituents on the surface of a planet, and a satellite may have affinity with the crust. The conclusion then is that on the hypothesis that the Earth has assumed its present condition either by aggregation or solidification, out of matters previously existing within the solar system, it is probable that its nucleus will be largely composed of metallic materials. But since all the meteorites known would together scarcely load a barge, this conclusion must be admitted to rest on a very slender basis. II1].—Some Resutts or A Deraitep Survey of THE OLD CoAstT-LINES NEAR TRonDHJEM, Norway. By Hvueu Mitizr, F.G.S., H.M. Geological Survey. URING a short visit to Norway in October, 1884, it appeared to the author that the best way to help to a solution the vexed questions connected with the coast-terracing of Norway was to execute a careful survey of a few square miles of some suitable coast region upon a sufficiently large scale. The neighbourhood of Trondhjem is remarkably well suited to this purpose. The map employed was partly a municipal chart on the scale of z5300, and partly an enlargement of the Ordnance Map. The limit of all the terraces and marine deposits is the famous ‘‘strand line” west of the town, a double range of old coast-cliff cut in the rock of the mountain-side. Its upper line is 580 feet above the sea, and answers to the ‘marine limit” over Norway generally. Numbers of level terrace-lines have been incised—chiefly in greenish clays, like brick- clays—all along the arable slopes east of the town between this rock-terrace and the sea. Above the Bay of Leangen, two miles east of town and river, and far beyond all erosive influence of the latter, thirty of these lines were mapped one above another in the first 300 feet of ascent, a distance of one mile anda half. Many of these are small but extremely distinct, the earthy clays being well suited to retain sharp impressions of successive sea-margins, which these unequivocally are. The present coast-line, neatly etched out by the waves in Trondhjem and Leangen bays, is the key to these tiers of older ones. It also resembles them in having made little or Notices of Memoirs—H. Miller—Old Coast-lines of Norway. 519 no impression where the coast becomes rocky, the lines of incision in both cases stopping short at once when they reach the harder material. The old coast-lines are most numerous in well-sheltered positions. Thus a single pair of large terraces in an exposed situa- tion east from Christiansten, where they face the open water of the fjord and the prevalent north-westerly storms, is represented in the recess above Leangen Bay by ten or twelve. The same fact is brought out on rising from this recess to the higher and more exposed ground. Thus, while thirty-three or thirty-four terraces are mapped below 850 feet (approximate) elevation, only nine or ten appear between that level and the rock-terraces of the upper marine limit, the numerical average height of the terraces thus rising by more than a half. In recesses of the coast further east, but beyond the map, these upper terraces seem to be preserved in considerably greater numbers. The number actually mapped was forty-three, or with the rock-terraces, forty-five. The largest number of terraces hitherto described at any one place in Norway seems to have been eighteen. Some of the general conclusions of the author are as follows :— 1. These terraces are all post-glacial, i.e. formed since the rock- glaciation of the district. This is confirmed by the condition of the high coast-cliff, which has been cut in ice-rounded rock, but is not itself glaciated. It appears, however, from the fauna of the raised shell-banks of the country (as worked out by Sars and Kjerulf), in which recent shells do not rise above 380 feet, that the seas of the upper levels were still glacial; and, though the Trondh- jem fjord was free from land-ice, other deeper fjords and higher coasts may still have had glaciers coming into conflict with the sea, and producing the glaciated rock-terraces described by Sexe. All the evidence obtained discountenances Sexe’s view that these rock- terraces were cut out by glaciers, as well as Carl Petersen’s that they were rasped out by floating-ice coasting the shores. On the clay terraces coast-ice has left no more sign of its presence than the winter freezing of our British rivers leaves upon our river terraces. 2. If the country was upraised by a succession of elevatory jerks as supposed by most geologists from Keilhau downwards, most of these would seem to have been small—much smaller, at least, than is supposed by Kjerulf. It is improbable that even Leangen Bay was secluded enough to contain a record of all the original coast-lines. The longer pauses and greater storms may have effaced an unknown number, by a process of excision exemplified in all its stages by the map. It is hard to say, in fact, where the subdivision would end if all were preserved. The smaller terraces remind the eye of the incised lines and little planes engraved on the sandbanks bordering rivers after a flood, in which case there is no periodicity in the subsidence of the waters. 3. The preservation or excision of the terraces thus seems to depend as much upon local circumstances—exposure to storms, resistance of coast- line, etc.—as upon anything else. It is impossible at present to predicate which of them shall in any given place remain. Whether 520 Notices of Memoirs—Prof. E. Hull—Fishes in Sea of Galilee. elevation by jerks, therefore, be postulated or not, all hope of corre- lating these terraces throughout the country must be deferred until their heights have been accurately determined by level. The measure- ments hitherto made, not even excepting those of Professors Kjerulf and Mohn, are probably inadequate for the purpose. This observation seems to apply also to the terraces graven in rock. In their aneroid measurements of the upper strand-line at Trondhjem these observers differ by fifty-five feet. 4. On entering the mouth of the Trondhjem Valley, the terraces come under an influence other than that of the sea-waves. ‘The valley was worked out, in deposits partly levelled out by the sea, according to the laws of river terracing under the accelerating influences of a falling sea-level. The processes of automatic river terracing are beautifully exemplified within the district mapped, in the deep lobe-shaped curve of the river just before it enters the sea. The terraces have been added one after another to the point of the lobe of land thus surrounded, which is known as Oen. IV.—Some Resvirs or rue Crystaniocrapnic Srupy or DANBURITE. By Dr. Max Scuusrer. N studying the characters of the faces and the structure of the Danburite crystals found in Switzerland, the author has met with vicinal faces of a peculiar kind, for which he proposes the term ‘transitional faces’ (T’schermak, Min. Mittheil. vi. 1884, p. 511). Attention is called to the fact that these faces are easily affected by those causes which produce an unequal development of faces other- wise symmetrically disposed, and an illustration is given of the way in which their indices are numerically related to those of the principal faces of the crystal. PAPER READ In Section D (Bronoey). V.—ON THE ORIGIN OF THE FisuEs oF THE SEA oF GALILEE. By Professor Epwarp Hui, LL.D., F.R.S., Director of the Geological Survey of Ireland. Vie preparing a memoir for the Palestine Exploration Society on the physical history of Arabia Petra and Palestine, I was confronted with two biological problems: one on the origin of the fauna of the Sea of Galilee (or Lake of Tiberias) ; the other on the cause of the extreme dissimilarity between the faunas of the Red Sea and Mediterranean, notwithstanding the ascertained fact that the seas themselves have been physically connected within very recent times. With the former problem I propose here to deal as far as the fishes are concerned ; with the latter I shall deal presently. The abundance of the fishes which inhabit the waters of the Sea of Galilee is known both from sacred and secular history, and has been testified to by several recent observers. The characters and habits of these fishes have also been ably discussed and illustrated, especially by Canon Tristram? and Professor L. Lartet,? from which it has been determined that nearly one-half of the species are * Fauna and Flora of Palestine, preface, p. xii. Mem. Palestine Survey, 1884. * Poissons et Reptiles du Lac de Tibériade, Archives du Musée d’ Histoire Naturelle de Lyon, tome iii. 1883, Notices of Memoirs—Prof. EF. Huli—Fishes in Sea of Galilee. 521 peculiar to the lake and its tributaries; while of the rest only one— namely, Blennius lupulus—belongs to the ordinary Mediterranean fauna; two others—namely, Chromis Niloticus and Clarias macra- canthus—are found in the Nile; seven other species occur in the rivers of South-western Asia; and ten more are found in other parts of Syria. Tristram considers that this assemblage points to a close affinity of the fauna of the Jordanic basin with that of the rivers of Tropical Africa (Aithiopian) ; but what most strikes the observer is perhaps the speciality of the species to Jordanic waters, sixteen out of a total of thirty-six species being peculiar. This view seems to be borne out also by an analysis of the molluscous forms, which are for the most part also peculiar, for no less than sixteen species of Unio are special to Jordanic waters.t Assuming that the forms which are common to Jordanic and other waters have been distri- buted in a manner similar to that by which we have to account for the distribution of lacustrine forms in other parts of the world, we have yet to account for the presence of the forms which are special and peculiar. This leads to a consideration of the manner in which the Jordanic basin was first formed and afterwards modified ; and without enter- ing here into this wide question, which I have endeavoured to deal with in the memoir above referred to, I may be allowed to summarize my conclusions somewhat as follows :— In the first place, it must be recollected that as the whole region on both sides of the Jordanic valley was originally overspread by strata of the Hocene period (known as the Nummulitic Limestone), this region formed the floor of the ocean down to the close of the HKocene period; the only possible lands in the district may have been those of the Crystalline rocks of the Sinaitic group of mountains. The geological period, which succeeded, that of the Miocene, was that in which land first appeared in the Palestine area. The bed of the sea was locally elevated into dry land, but at the same time most of the leading physical features by which that land is now diversified were traced out and finally determined. Chief amongst these was the line of the great Jordan-Arabah depression—marked out by a line of fault or displacement of the strata, ranging from the slopes of the Lebanon on the north to the Gulf of Akabah on the south. It seems to me probable that as the land on either side of this de- pression was being elevated, the displacement of the strata on either side of the great fault was also proceeding, and the floor of the sea was subsiding along the line of the Jordan valley. An inland lake of considerable extent was thus formed, the waters of which were first derived from those of the ocean itself, in which were enclosed the fishes, molluscs and cther forms which inhabited these waters themselves. There are good grounds for believing that once the lake was enclosed and shut off from the outer sea by a barrier of land, it was never again physically connected with the outer sea. The saddle of the Arabah valley, rising some 600 feet above the highest limit to which the waters of the old Jordanic lake ever 1 Tristram, idid. p. 178. The molluses have been also recently described by M. A. Locard, Malacologie du Lac de Tibériade, 1883. O22 Reviews—Geological Survey Memoirs. ascended, would have proved an effectual barrier towards the south.' Towards the west the barrier would have been much more elevated. Hence the living forms in the waters of the inland salt lake were isolated from those of the ocean, and had either to adapt themselves to their new conditions or to die out. We may suppose that the first to disappear would be the corals, crinoids, and starfishes. On the other hand, fishes, molluscs, and crustaceans, having greater powers of adaptation, would in many cases survive. Meanwhile, the law of “descent with modification ” would now come into operation, and we may suppose that through- out the Miocene and Pliocene periods the process of modification in form, colour, and habit gradually proceeded. The fittest forms survived, and differentiation between those of the outer and inner seas, resulting, as we have seen, in almost an entire specific change, was effected. The above view seems in accordance with recent observations regarding the adaptability of many marine forms to new lacustrine conditions, provided the process of change is sufficiently gradual. Professor Sollas, whose memoir on “The Origin of Fresh-water Faunas”? is very suggestive, arrives at the conclusion that, as the conversion of comparatively shallow continental seas into fresh- water lakes has taken place on a large scale several times in the history of the earth, this has been accompanied by the transforma- tion of some of the marine into fresh-water forms. The Jordan valley lake, originally salt, has shrunk back into two or three lakes connected by a river. The Dead Sea alone remains salt and lifeless. The waters of the Sea of Galilee are fresh, and teem with life. In reply to my enquiry whether the above views would harmonize with his own, Professor Sollas writes: “‘I have always regarded the curious fishes of the Sea of Galilee as evidence of a previous marine communication, but it never occurred to me to speculate as to the age of that connection. If this sea (that of Galilee) were stocked from the Eocene ocean, it would fit in very well with the history, as I believe it, of other fresh-water faunas.” It is gratifying to me to have the concurrence on this point of so able an authority. I conclude, therefore, that the special forms of fishes now inhabiting the Sea of Galilee are the descendants of those which lived in the Eucene ocean. ge) GER een SVVaisS Tur GEOLOGY oF THE CouNnTRY AROUND Ipswich, HapLerGn, AND Fruixstow. By Witi1am Wartaker, B.A., F.G.S., ete. (With Notes by W. H. Datron, F.G.S., and F. J. Benyert, F.G.S.) Memoirs of the Geological Survey. 8vo. pp. vii. 156. London, 1885. Price Two shillings. HIS Memoir contains a detailed account of the formations that are met with in the country around Ipswich, or in the tract embraced by Quarter-sheets 48 N.W. and N.H. of the Geological Survey Map. 1 See Mount Seir, Sinai and Western Palestine, pp. 95 and 99, etc. 2 Scientific Trans. Royal Dublin Society, vol. iii, ser. 2. Reviews—Geological Survey Memoirs. 523 The Chalk forms the basement rock of the district ; it comes to the surface in the bottom of some of the main valleys, but is very rarely exposed in section. Although unquestionably the Upper Chalk, no fossils are recorded. The Lower London Tertiaries (Thanet, Reading, and Oldhaven Beds) crop out only to a slight extent in the same valleys. Two of the finest sections may be seen on the left bank of the Gipping, in the large chalk-pits north of Bramford. Here London-clay and newer deposits are shown, rest- ing on the Reading Beds, Thanet Beds, and Chalk. The occurrence of Oldhaven Beds appears to be limited to the town of Ipswich. These Lower London Tertiaries are interesting from a stratigraphical point of view, but their fossil treasures are few or but little known. Mr. Whitaker expresses the hope that more attention may in future be paid to these strata. The London Clay extends beneath the Crag and Drift over much of the southern and eastern portion of the area, though its outcrop is almost wholly confined to the valleys. It is well exposed in many brickyards, presenting its ordinary characters of blue or brown clay with septaria, underlaid by its ‘basement bed,” which is gene- rally very sandy and has often a layer of flint-pebbles. Among the fossils a few shells, teeth of Zamna, remains of turtles, and fragments of wood have been found. The most interesting section in this formation was that at Kingston or Kyson Quay, in the valley of the Deben. This section was originally noted by Mr. 8S. V. Wood in 1889, and he then obtained from the basement-bed of the London- clay some small teeth resembling those of a Bat; also a portion of a small marsupial, Didelphys Colchesteri (discovered by Mr. William Colchester), and a portion of a lower jaw, containing the last molar tooth, which Sir Richard Owen described as that of a Monkey (Macacus Eocenus), but which was subsequently proved to belong to Hyracotherium. Referring to the extent of the older Tertiary beds, Mr. Whitaker remarks that the evidence of well-sections proves that these strata occur along the whole of the eastern border of Suffolk. To the collector, the beds of Crag have always furnished the chief attraction in Suffolk Geology. In the area under consideration the Coralline Crag occupies a very limited portion of the ground, being exposed only at Tattingstone, Sutton, and Ramsholt. ‘The sections, lowever, are of considerable interest; that at Sutton shows about 22 feet of the Crag, with (at the base) phosphatic nodules, bones of cetacea, teeth of sharks, box-stones (with Diestian fossils), ete. A general account of the Coralline Crag is reserved for a Memoir on the district around Aldborough, etc. The Red Crag occurs over a large part of the Ipswich district, generally with a narrow outcrop at the higher part of the valley- flanks, being otherwise much masked by Glacial Drift’ A general account of this formation is given, of its phosphatic nodules or “ coprolites,” of its organic remains, and of the unfossiliferous sand out of which in many cases the shells have been dissolved. The nodule-bed is of a conglomeratic character, like that at the base of the Coralline Crag, the most peculiar of the rock-contents being the O24 _ Reviews— Geological Survey Memoirs. box-stones whose fossils are of the age of the Diestian Crag of Belgium. We regret that Mr. Whitaker has not given a full lst of the Red Crag fossils; for although the works of Searles Wood and Prestwich contain long lists, yet it would have been convenient for the student to have in this one volume a complete account of the paleontology of the district. An excellent account of the literature of the Red Crag, with critical remarks, occupying over eleven pages, will be of much service to those desirous of studying what has been written about the forma- tion. Detailed accounts of the various sections of Red Crag occupy 27 pages. Of these sections, those of T'attingstone, VFelixstow, Foxhall, Sutton, Ramsholt and Bawdsey are among the best known. Mr. Whitaker concludes that the Red Crag was accumulated in a short time, geologically speaking, and that it “is a small thing” compared with our Glacial Drift or River Gravels. Under the heading of ‘ Glacial Drift,” various deposits of Sand and Gravel, Brickearth or Loam, and Boulder-clay are included ; but for classificatory purposes Mr. Whitaker would make only two divisions of the Drift. The Boulder-clay is the Upper Glacial of Wood and Harmer, the Sand and Gravel their Middle Glacial, and the Brickearth, to some extent at least, their Lower Glacial ; but the strong division insisted on by Mr. Wood as occurring between the Middle and Lower Glacial Beds is not recognized by Mr. Whitaker. He states that, while he cannot disprove Mr. Wood’s theory, he is disposed to think that the Brickearth may occur in the form of large lenticular masses in the Sand and Gravel. In the district there is little evidence of the occurrence of beds of Boulder-clay in the sand and gravel or with the brickearth that underlie this great sheet of clay, but such layers do occur here and there. The various Drifts are described in detail, they occur over nearly the whole of the area, and are therefore most important in their relation to agriculture, and in connection with local questions of water-supply. The term Glacial Drift is used in a chronological sense to include all beds formed during what is known as the Glacial Period. The term Post-Glacial is, however, applied to certain River or Valley Drifts which are later than the Glacial Drift of the district, but which may in some cases have been formed while Glacial conditions still endured in portions of the British area. Among these ‘“ Post- Glacial” deposits the most interesting are the beds at Stutton Ness, containing many land and freshwater mollusca; and a deposit at Ipswich which has yielded remains of Hlephas antiquus, HE. primi- genius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus, etc. Among recent deposits, the Allu- vium of the Orwell is noteworthy, with its peaty deposits first described by Dr. J. E. Taylor, which have yielded teeth of the Mammoth (? derived). Accounts of Shingle and Blown Sand are also given. A chapter entitled Miscellaneous is devoted to Disturb- ances, and Hconomics. Under the latter heading we find analyses of the Pseudo-coprolites and fossil bones. Appendices giving details of Well-sections and Borings, some Supplementary Notes to other Memoirs (relating to Sudbury and Correspondence—Rev. W. Downes—MUr. J. J. Murphy. 525 Colchester), and a list of 314 works on the Geology and Pale- ontology of Suffolk, together with an Index, complete the volume. On the whole this Memoir, like most of those issued of late years by the Geological Survey, contains a large amount of dry detailed description, far from attractive to an ‘ordinary reader,” and not at all calculated to arouse enthusiasm in the science. And yet these details may prove of great service in many ways, both practical and scientific. We are, however, informed by the Director-General in his prefatory notice to this Memoir, that the whole of the Pliocene deposits of the Hast of Hngland having now been completely sur- veyed and published, it is intended to prepare a Stratigraphical Monograph illustrative of them. This we presume will bring out, more clearly than could otherwise be the case, the general results of the official and other work, towards the elucidation of which the Memoirs explanatory of particular maps will furnish a solid, if not very entertaining, basis. (GO sess HS ISO UN IDAAIN | Gass ——— UNDERGROUND HEAT. Srr,—It was with much interest that I read in the September number Mr. J. 8. Gardner’s article upon the above subject, and the more so as it is rather a pet subject of my own. ‘Though I have never suc- ceeded in throwing so much practical light upon it as Mr. Gardner has, I ventured in an article in Belgravia as long ago as June, 1881, to forecast that the day might come when we might see “conductors of subterranean heat ramifying like the gas pipes of a city into every house, and superseding the use of fuel.” But I never, until now, found any one willing to treat the subject otherwise than as wild and visionary. With, however, the astonishing inventions and developments of machinery which every year presents to us, it would be nothing strange if a means were found of getting at this practically exhaustless supply of heat long before the finite quantity represented by our fuel reaches the beginning of its end. At a measurable distance beneath us we have hot air and hot water. Geysers, Mr. Gardner tells us, have actually been utilized for heating purposes. To make a geyser at a given spot would be only a question of money and skill, often probably not a greater under- taking than laying down an Atlantic cable; and the one undertaking would probably bring in as good dividends as the other. Compe RatricgH Rectory, Hontron. W. Downes. UNDERGROUND HEAT. Srr,—I have read Mr. Starkie Gardner’s article in your Magazine for September, with much interest. IJ understand him to maintain that the surface of the earth is solid from cooling, and the centre solid from pressure, but that between the two there isa fluid stratum of no great proportionate thickness ; he seems to think also that the continuity of the liquid stratum is in some degree interrupted by 526 Correspondence—Ur. J. J. Murphy—Prof. E. D. Cope. the roots of mountain chains forming ridge-shaped projections on the lower surface of the solid crust. Perhaps it is not generally known how nearly this resembles a theory propounded by the late Mr. Hopkins of. Cambridge thirty or forty years ago. He maintained that the earth is solid at the surface from cooling, and at the centre from pressure; that the solid centre is for the most part continuous with the solid crust; but that in volcanic regions there are subterranean lakes of molten matter between the two. I speak with no authority, but I think it most probable that the earth is solid throughout,-with the possible exception of small and perhaps only temporary reservoirs of lava. The fact that the lava in neighbouring craters often stands permanently at different levels, proves that they cannot be in communication with a common reservoir; and the tremulousness of the earth’s surface, which the microphone reveals, seems to me to prove only that the materials composing it are elastic and slightly flexible. Bexrast, 9th Sept. 1885. JosEPH JoHN Morpuy. MR. LYDEKKER ON ESTHONYX. Sir,—The article in your August number by Mr. Lydekker on the identity of Esthonyz, Cope, with Platycherops, Charlesworth, excited my interest, and requires a few words of comment. It is of the greatest importance to determine, if possible, the identity of generic and specific forms in widely separated localities during past geological ages. This has occasionally been successfully accomplished, as, for instance, the determination of Hyrachyus, by Gaudry, and of Oxyaena, by Filhol, in France. In other cases discovery of missing parts has shown that such supposed identification were premature. Thus, I have been compelled to recede from some identifications of American with European Lemuroids. After an examination of Prof. Owen’s figures and description of Miolophus planiceps* cited by Mr. Lydekker, I find that the identity of Hsthonyx with Miolophus is extremely improbable, and could as well be asserted of at least one other genus. Indeed, there is nothing in the technical characters of the superior molars to pre- vent the identification of Miolophus with Chriacus, Mioclaenus or Deltatherium, genera which only differ from each other in the characters of the superior and inferior premolars and inferior molars. But Esthonyx differs still more from the normal types in its very peculiar incisors. In order that Miolophus should be identified with Hsthonyx under these circumstances, some evidence as to the characters of its incisors should be obtained, which is not the case as yet. Mr. Lydekker appears to attach some importance to a space behind p.m. 8. This space in the specimen of Hsthonya Burmeis- teri figured by me, may be due to accident, as the maxillary bone is in bad condition, and a fissure traversed the first true inferior molar. There is also a good reason for suspecting that the genera in question are not identical. This is the presence of a loop-like inner posterior 1 Platycherops Richardsoni, teste Lydekker. Correspondence—Prof. E. D. Cope. 527 cingulum, quite distinct from the rest of the crown, in Esthonya, which is absent in Miolophus, according to Owen. ‘Though this is not alone a generic character, in my opinion it is one of those indicators which generally accompany them. In like manner, Mio- lophus presents no important distinction from Deltatharium, but the wide internal lobes of the crowns lead me to suspect that such exist. As to the name Platycherops, it cannot be adopted, as its publica- tion was not accompanied by the distinct generic description which the accepted rules of nomenclature require. K. D. Covz. THE BATRACHIA! OF THE PERMIAN BEDS OF BOHEMIA. Srr,—In Dr. Fritsch’s volume we have the continuation of an ex- tensive work which I have noticed at various times in the “Naturalist ”’ as the successive parts appeared. I desire to add, on this occasion, my renewed commendation of the care and detail with which Dr. Fritsch continues to develope the subject, and my praise for the admirable plates which accompany the text. The species treated of are those which belong to the larger forms of the Rhachitomi, together with some of the intermediate types, such as the Dendrerpe- tonide. Of the greatest interest are two new genera of the order Embolomeri, Chelydosaurus and Sphenosaurus, where the additional vertebral centrum, entire in the type of the order (Cricotus), is divided into three segments, two lateral and an inferior. This is a curious discovery, especially as Sphenosaurus has hitherto been regarded as a reptile.” It also has an important bearing on the value of the order Embolomeri, which Dr. Fritsch is disposed (p. 4) to question. He thinks that the embolomerous vertebral structure is confined to the caudal region in the genus Cricotus, although I have fivured it in the lumbar and cervical region of that genus, and described it as found in the dorsal*® region. Dr. Fritsch reached this conclusion because he finds that in Archegosaurus the caudal region is embolomerous, and the dorsal region rhachitomous. His discovery of the persistence of the embolomerous condition in the dorsal region of Chelydosaurus and Sphenosaurus might have suggested to him the correctness of my observations on Cricotus. I add here that in Eryops, in which the dorsal vertebrae are rhachitomous, the caudal vertebree are not embolomerous. So Archegosaurus stands alone in this respect. This determination of the characters of Archegosaurus by Dr. Fritsch is very useful to American paleontologists, as it has hitherto been very imperfectly described. I have stated that there are vertebra of this type from Lebach in the Museum of Princeton College, New Jersey. As they agree exactly with Dr. Fritsch’s figures of Archegosaurus, it is difficult to perceive why he denies the accuracy of my statement in the matter (p. 1d). HE. D. Corr. {Re-published at the writer’s request from the American Naturalist, June, 1885 } 1 Fauna der Gaskohle in d. Kalksteinen d. Permformation Bohmens, Von Dr. Anton Fritsch, b, 1. heft i.; Praag, 1885. 2 ‘These two genera should form a second family of the Embolomeri, characterized as above, which I call the Sphenosauride. 3 Proc. Amer. Philo, Soc. 1884, p. 29. 528 Obituary—Dr. Thomas Davidson. @ eS eae -ASEo as ———— THOMAS DAVIDSON, LL.D.,F.R.S., F.G.S., F.L.S., &e. Born May 17, 1817; Diep Ocrosrr 14, 1885. Iv is with profound regret that we have to record the death of another eminent British palzeontologist, whose loss from our ranks we must all deplore. Although Dr. Davidson’s ancestral home was at Muirhouse, near Edinburgh, he had long resided in Brighton, and had identified himself as Chairman of the Committee with the Free Public Museum and Library of that town ; to which he had also been a liberal donor. We published in April, 1871, in the pages of this Macaztnz, an account of Dr. Davidson’s life, with a portrait of himself and a list of his Memoirs to that date. He has since completed his magnificent work on the Britis Foss Bracniopopa for the Paleontographical Society (of which he was a Vice- President), which occupies five large quarto volumes illustrated with over 200 plates drawn by the author’s own hands. He has prepared the article Brachiopoda for the “ Encyclopedia Britannica” ; monographed the entire series of Brachiopoda collected during the exploring expedition of H.M.S. “ Chal- lenger”’; prepared an exhaustive memoir on Recent Brachio- poda now in course of publication by the Linnzan Society, besides various lesser papers in the pages of this Macazinr and elsewhere. He may be truly described as one of the most hard-working and single-minded Naturalists of the present century. Although living much in retirement, he had been elected an Honorary Member of all the chief Scientific Societies in Europe and America; he had also been decorated with the Gold Medal of the Royal Society in 1870, the Wollaston Gold Medal of the Geological Society in 1865, and the “Silurian Medal” by Murchison in 1868. He died at his residence, 9, Salisbury Road, Brighton, having been for some time a great sufferer from an acute affection of the lungs.’ As a final act of generosity, Dr. Davidson has bequeathed his magnificent collection of Recent and Fossil Brachiopoda, containing a large proportion of the “types” figured in his various works, together with his Books and Original Drawings, to the Nation, to be preserved in their entirety in the Depart- ment of Geology in the British Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, London, 8.W. 1 His American friend, Prof. W. H. Dall, paid the last compliment to his labours in the Grotocican Macazine for September (p, 429). Decade IIVol IL. Pl. XML Mag.1885 7 Que Ge West Newman&Co.imp. HA .Nicholson del. E.© Woodward lit. Solenopora compacta Bulings sp. &e. Ke, THE GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE. NEW SERIES. DECADE Ill. VOL. Il. No. XII—DECEMBER, 1885. Oi em uA a) A= et Gita Ss —>—__ I.—On tHE Synonymy, Structure, anpD GEOLOGICAL DisTRIBUTION or SoLeNoprokA coupacta, Billings, sp. By H. Autzyne Nicuorson, M.D., D.Sc., and Roperr Erueripes, jun. (PLATE XIII.) N his ‘ Paleozoic Fossils” (1861-65), Mr. Billings described, without figures, a fossil from the Black River Limestone, to which he gave the name of Stromatopora compacta. The description given was as follows :—‘“ This species forms small subglobular masses, from one to two inches in diameter. The concentric lamelle are thin and closely packed together, there being in some specimens from six to twelve layers in the space of two lines” (op. cit. p. 55). In 1877, the present writers described, under the name of Tetradium Peachti, a singular fossil which occurred in pebbles of Ordovician Limestone contained in the Old Red conglomerates of Habbie’s Howe, Pentland Hills, near Edinburgh, the source of these pebbles being at that time unknown (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx. p. 166). Ia the same year (1877) Dr. Dybowski described a fossil from the Ordovician strata of Esthonia under the name of Solenopora spongi- oides, n.sp., his description and figures leaving no doubt of the identity of this with Tvtradium Peachii, Nich. and Eth. jun. (“ Die Chaetetiden der ostbaltischen Silur. Formation,” p. 124, taf. ii. figs. lla, b). The genus Solenopora was regarded as referable to the Monticuliporoids, and Dr. Dybowski defined it as follows :— “Corallum spheroidal ; corallites irregularly prismatical, of very small diameter ; coenenchyma wanting; tabulz absent.” In 1880, we gave a further and much fuller description of Tetradium Peachii, from specimens which had been collected by Mrs. Robert Gray from the Craighead Limestone (Ordovician) near Girvan, Ayr- shire (Monograph of the Silurian Fossils of the Girvan District in Ayrshire, p. 31, pl. i. fig. 8, and pl. ii. figs. 1, 1b). In this descrip- tion we still adhered to the reference of the fossil to Tetradium, from the close resemblance of cross-sections of the tubes in many speci- mens to similar sections of Tetradium., Sir J. W. Dawson, in a paper on the microscopic structure of the Stromatoporide (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxv. p. 53, 1879), expressed the opinion that the fossil described by Billings under the DECADE III.—vVOL. U.—NO. XII, 34 530 MM. Nicholson and R. Etheridge, jun.— name of Stromatopora compacta is not referable to the Stromatopo- roids. He states that it “consists of very minute hexagonal tubes, with extremely thin walls and well-developed tabule, which, from their strong development and continuity, give in some specimens an appearance of concentric lamination.” Sir William Dawson regards the fossil as referable to Stenopora (i.e. to the Monticuliporoids). Lastly, Mr. A. H. Foord has described (Contrib. Micro. Pal. Sil. Rocks, Canada, Geol. Survey, 1883, p. 24) a variety of this peculiar fossil under the name of Tetradium Peachii, var. Canadense, Foord, which differs from the British form in having thicker and more wavy tube-walls. Mr. Foord did not observe any tabule in his Specimens, and suggested that the species should be removed from the genus Tetradium. So far as we are aware, the above are all the published notices of this singular fossil, the forms described as Zetradium Peachii by us, as T. Peachii, var. Canadense, by Foord, and as Solenopora spongioides by Dybowski being specifically identical with the previously-named Stromatopora compacta of Billings. We have long known that Solenopora spongioides, Dyb., was the same as our Tetradium Peachii, but we are indebted to our friend Mr. Foord for having pointed out to us that the Stromatopora compacta of Billings—which we had not seen—was really the same organism. As it is quite certain that this fossil—whatever its true nature may be—cannot be referred to either Tetradium, Dana, or Stromatopora, Goldf., we shall retain for it the generic name of Solenopora proposed for it by Dr. Dybowski. The species, will, therefore, stand as Solenopora compacta, Bill. sp. Mr. Foord’s varietal name of ‘“ Canadense” can hardly be retained, as the Canadian specimens are the type of Billings’s species. On the other hand, Mr. Foord was quite correct in pointing out that the Scotch specimens differ in some respects from the Canadian type, and we may, therefore, retain for these the varietal name of “ Peachii.” The Russian examples, again, appear to agree in all essential respects with the Canadian specimens. ‘To this rectification of nomenclature we may append the following brief remarks on the structure, affinities, and geological distribution of this very remarkable organisin. Solenopora compacta, Bill. sp., in all its varieties, presents itself in the form of smaller or larger subspherical masses, from the size of a hempseed up to the dimensions of an orange, the external surface being usually lobulate. Even under a good lens, no actual structure can usually be detected as present in the surface itself, but it is common to find indications of a more or less obvious composition out of concentrically -disposed strata. Fractured surfaces have a characteristic porcellanous, sometimes obscurely fibrous aspect, and are usually white or light brown in colour. Thin sections show that the fossil is composed of very minute capillary tubes, which are in close apposition, diverge slightly from a central line, and are com- monly interrupted in their growth in such a way as to give rise to a concentric lamination of the skeleton. The tubes are from a fifteenth to a twelfth of a millimétre in diameter, and are not “ prismatic” or “hexagonal,” but, as shown by tangential sections (Pl. XIII. Fig. 3), On Solenopora compacta, Billings sp. 531 of very irregular shape. The walls of the tubes are singularly sinuated, or folded into minute undulations (PI. XIII. Fig. 2), reminding us of what is seen in long sections of Monotrypa omnia, Nich., eine other allied forms. One of the most striking features hover by thin sections is the rapid increase of the tubes by fission. This shows itself in tangential sections by the common occurrence of projecting septa-like processes, which extend into the interior of the tubes (PL XIIL Figs. 8, 5-8). It was the appearance of these septiform processes which originally induced us to refer the fossil to Tetradium; aud the number of them which may be present varies greatly. Sometimes they can hardly be recognized as existing atall. Atother times (Pl. XIII. Fig. 3) they occur in scattered tubes, here and there among the ordinary tubes, as is so commonly seen in the genus Chetetes, Fischer. Again, in many of the specimens from Ayrshire and Hsthonia, these structures are -extraordinarily numerous (Pl. XIII. Figs. 7, 8), giving to cross-sections of the tubes precisely the appearance, on a small scale, presented by cor- responding sections of the tubes of Laceripora, Hichw. The fissipa- rous development of the tubes of Solenopora compacta is quite as easy to recognize in longitudinal sections (Pl. XILI. Fig. 2), as it is in tangential slices. Cross-partitions in the tubes, or “tabule,” are unquestionably present; but they are very variable in number. We have seen no examples in which they are so abundant, or so regularly placed, as they are said by Sir William Dawson to be in some of his specimens. In sections of some of our examples especially if they are reduced to great tenuity, they are not to be recognized as occurring at all. In most specimens there are a few of these structures present, irregularly developed, and commonly situated at the point where a tube divides into two (Pl. XIII. Fig. 2), or where a concentric line of growth is produced (Pl. XIII. Fig. 9). The walls of the tubes, as examined in long sections, are certainly imperforate. Certain specimens, how- ever, show a peculiar granular structure of the walls, which in some respects is very similar to what is observed in the skeleton-fibre of certain Stromatoporoids. Ina great many examples, further, the tubes as seen in long sections (Pl. XIII. Figs. 2 and 4) exhibit a peculiar appearance, as if the walls were formed of dark, ill-defined granules arranged in transverse lines, these lines corresponding i in contiguous tubes, and being separated by corresponding clear lines, and thus giving rise to a fine concentric striation. The appearance here alluded to is not at all unlike that presented by thin sections of the massive Nullipores, when the component cells may not be very distinctly shown: but we shall speak more particularly of this point immediately. The above being the general structure of the skeleton in Soleno- pora, it does not seem “unnatural that it should have been referred to the Actinozoa. There is not, in fact, anything whatever in the main features of the fossil which would obviously distinguish it from a species of the genus Chetetes, Fischer, or Tetradium, Dana. Tangential sections of certain specimens of Solenopora compacta, Bill., ee ee 532 IMM. Nicholson and R. Etheridge, gun.— present—the size of the component tubes apart—the closest possible resemblance to corresponding sections of Chetetes, while others exhibit a strong likeness to Zetradium. The extraordinarily minute size of the tubes of Solenopora would, however, certainly render it improbable that we had to deal with a species of Chetetes or Tetra- dium. Indeed, upon this ground alone, it might be considered as seriously doubtful if Solenopora could be referred to the Actinozoa at all. If it be Ccelenterate, it would perhaps more properly find a place among the Hydrozoa rather than the Actinozoa. We are not, however, acquainted with any Hydrozoén, living or extinct, with which Solenopora could be compared. It shows no features in its minute structure which remind us of the Hydrocorallines, and it assuredly presents no structural resemblance to any known type of the Stromatoporoidea. The only other direction in which one might look for the true place of Solenopora is among the calcareous Alge. In its external appearance, in its general texture, and in the aspect of fractured surfaces, it presents a remarkable similarity to the massive forms of the Nullipores (Lithothamnion). In all the Nullipores, however, as in the Algze generally, the minute structure of the organism is essentially cellular and not tubular. In none do we find the long capillary tubes, with their transverse tabule and fissiparous mode of growth, such as are characteristic of Solenopora. Moreover, if an argument against the reference of Solenopora to the Coelenterata be founded upon the fact that its tubes are much more minute than those of any known Actinozoén or Hydrozoén, the same argument may be reasonably employed, in an opposite direction, as against a reference of Solenopora to the calcareous Alge. In other words, the minute structure of Solenopora is as much grosser than that of the Nullipores, as it is finer than that of the Coelenterates generally. This will be seen by a reference to Pl. XIII. Figs. 10 and 11, which represent sections of a living Nullipore on the same scale of enlarge- ment as the Figures 4 and 5 of Solenopora. This difference may be roughly put in this way, that while a two-inch objective is sufficient for a general examination under the microscope of a thin section of any species of Chetetes or Tetradiwm, one requires a one-inch objective in order to clearly make out the structure of a similar section of Solenopora, and one cannot recognize the characteristic structure of a section of a Nullipore with a lower power than a quarter-inch objective. In deciding, however, as to any possible relationship between Solenopora and the calcareous Algze, it is necessary to consider more minutely certain points in the structure of this curious fossil. Most examples of Solenopora compacta show concentric lines of growth, which differ in no essential particular from those of many “ 'Tabulate Corals” (e.g. species of Monotrypa, Stenopora, Chetetes, etc.). That is to say, their growth was interrupted by periodic pauses, signalized commonly (though not necessarily) by a simultaneous development of tabula, the same tubes subsequently continuing their upward growth (Pl. XIII. Fig. 4). a On Solenopora compacta, Billings sp. 533 In all specimens, however, of Solenopora, which are well preserved, we can recognize in addition a number of clear concentric lines of a different kind. These lines can be examined in longitudinal sections, and they differ from ordinary lines of growth in several points. In the first place, concentric lines of growth are mere stoppages of the tubes at a given level over the whole fossil, and they are marked either by an interruption of the tubes at this level, or, commonly, by a concentric line of tabule. On the other hand, the concentric lines in Solenopora to which we allude are concentric clear lines of calcite, which are extraordinarily close-set, and are placed at uniform distances. In this last respect, they are quite unlike ordinary concentric lines of growth, these being of such a form that they are placed at their widest distances apart in the middle of the skeleton (where the skeleton is thickest), and approximate to one another towards the margins of the same. Moreover, in very well-preserved specimens it can be shown in properly prepared longitudinal sec- tions that these concentric clear bands in Solenopora are the result of an apparent interruption or deficiency of all the tubes at a series of concentric and corresponding horizons (Pl. XIII. Fig. 4). This appearance is particularly well shown in some sections of Solenopora compacta from the Trenton Limestone of Ontario, which our friend Dr. George J. Hinde was good enough to place at our disposal. It follows from this that the clear concentric bands of Solenopora are not of the nature-of concentrically disposed tabule; but that they are rather similarly disposed deficiencies in the walls of the tubes. It would be a very natural hypothesis that we had to deal here with a structure resembling that of a recent Nullipore, but in an im- perfectly preserved condition. We might, namely, suppose that we had in Solenopora really to deal with a structure composed of oblong cells arranged in regular, concentrically and vertically disposed rows, such as we see in both living and extinct Nullipores (Pl. XIII. Fig. 10). All that we should have to suppose is that the cell-nuclei had dis- appeared in the process of mineralization, and that the cell-walls had only been preserved in parts; those walls which have a vertical direc- tion being well preserved, and therefore showing as dark lines; while the cell-walls having a horizontal or concentric arrangement are badly preserved, and only appear as clear spaces. Some coun- tenance is given to this view, as a possible one at any rate, by the not uncommon occurrence of specimens of Heliolites and other similar corals so preserved that the tabulze remain as distinct dark lines, while the walls of the corallites and interstitial tubes are so badly preserved as to be almost or quite invisible. There are, how- ever, two serious difficulties in the way of accepting any such ex- planation of the observed structure of Solenopora compacta. In the first place, even those specimens which most clearly exhibit these close-set concentric clear lines which we have described, at the same time show in parts of long sections no traces of such clear lines, or of dark lines appearing instead of such. In all specimens, the tubes in places appear to have continuous walls, without any concentrically developed interruptions. In the second place, tangential sections of 5384 MI. Nicholson & R. Etheridge, jun.—Solenopora compacta. all specimens alike not only show no traces whatever of any concen- tric clear bands, or of any interruptions in the walls of the tubes ; but, so far we can judge, exhibit appearances absolutely incompatible with anything except the cross-sections of tubes. Upon the whole, therefore, while admitting our inability to adequately explain the peculiar appearances above described as seen in long sections of many examples of Solenopora, we do not think that these appearances afford sufficient evidence for concluding that the true structure of the fossil is cellular. If evidence can be obtained proving decisively the existence of a cellular structure in Solenopora, then the reference of the genus to the calcareous Algee would follow as a matter of course. In the absence of such evidence, we can only leave the question of the affinities of the genus quite open. The only remaining point upon which we may say a few words is the geological range of Solenopora compacta; the species being remarkable not only for its wide distribution, but also for the con- stancy with which it presents itself at a particular horizon. In North America it occurs, apparently in great abundance, in certain parts of the Trenton and Black River Limestones. In Scotland, it is found in the Ordovician limestones of Craighead, near Girvan, which we have elsewhere paralleled with the upper portion of the Trenton Limestone (Mon. Sil. Foss. Girvan, p. 95). In Russia it was obtained by Dr. Dybowski from Herrkill, in beds of Ordovician age (“ Borckholm beds” of Friedrich Schmidt). It has, however, recently been collected by one of us, in great quantity, in still lower beds in Esthonia, namely in the limestones of Saak, south of Reval. These limestones are placed by Magister Schmidt in the upper portion of the “‘ Jewesche Schichten,” and correspond, therefore, with the Trenton Limestone of North America. At this locality, Solenopora compacta not only occurs as detached specimens of all sizes, but it also makes up almost entire beds of limestone, most of the examples being in this case of comparatively small dimensions. Indeed, some of the bands of limestone at Saak look like amygdaloidal lavas; while others have a cellular appearance, from the dissolution out of them of the little pea-like skeletons of this fossil. Apart, therefore, from the question of its affinities, Solenopora compacta must be regarded as remarkable both for its very wide geographical range, and also on account of its being highly charac- teristic of a definite geological horizon. As before mentioned, however, there are certain differences which separate the Scotch examples of the species from those found in other regions. The type of the species must be held to be the Canadian examples, since it was upon these that Billings founded his Stromatopora compacta. With the Canadian examples, the Russian examples appear to agree in every particular. On the other hand, the tubes in the Ayrshire specimens are decidedly, and apparently constantly, larger than those of the Canadian and Russian examples, their general structure being otherwise the same. This difference will be seen by comparing the MM. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. 585 tangential section of an Ayrshire example of Solenopora compacta (Pl. XIII. Fig. 3) with a corresponding section of a Russian specimen (Pl. XIII. Fig. 6), the two being drawn to the same scale. As above said, the Canadian specimens and the Russian are in this respect alike. It may, therefore, be as well to consider the Ayrshire specimens as constituting a variety of the species under the name of Solenopora compacta, var. Peachit. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII. Fic. 1. An example of Solenopora compacta, Bill. sp., from the Ordovician Limestone of Saak, Esthonia. Natural size. a 2. Vertical section of a specimen of Solenopora compacta, var. Peachii, Nich. and Eth. Jun., from the Ordovician Limestone of Craighead, Girvan. Enlarged about fifty times. bp 3. Tangential section of the preceding, similarly enlarged. Both these sections show the fissiparous development of the tubes. rf 4. Part of a long section of a specimen of Solenopora compacta, Bill., from the Trenton Limestone of Prince Edward’s County, Ontario. (Coll. Dr. George J. Hinde.) Enlarged about one hundred and fifty times, and showing the curious concentric banding of the fossil. Tangential section of the preceding specimen, similarly enlarged. Tangential section of a specimen from Saak, Esthonia. Enlarged fifty times. », 7, 8. Tangential sections of another specimen from Saak, showing different conditions of preservation of the walls. Both sections show numerous septiform processes due to the fission of the tubes. Enlarged one hundred and fifty times. nA 9. Part of a vertical section of Solenopora compacta, var. Peachii, enlarged fifty times, showing a true concentric line of growth. Craighead, Girvan. », 10, 11. Vertical and tangential sections of a recent Nullipore, enlarged one hundred and fifty times. DOr IJ.—Notres oN THE CARBONIFEROUS OsTRACODA OF THE NortTH-WEST oF ENGLAND. By Professor T. Rupert Jonss, F.R.S., and James W. Kirxsy, Esq. INTRODUCTION. 1 ies following notes and lists of species are based upon material collected by one of us during several visits to the neighbourhood of Grange-over-Sands, Lancashire. They are here recorded because they add a little to what is known of the distribution of Bivalved Entomostraca in the North-West of the English area during the early half of the Carboniferous Period. The localities from which we obtained our material range over part of the Furness district, and the country to the north and north- west of Morecambe Bay. Most of this is in North Lancashire, but a portion of it lies in Westmoreland. The Sheets 98 8.E., 98 S.W., and 91 N.W. of the One-inch Map of the Geological Survey take in nearly the whole of this region. The Carboniferous strata here represented are the Scar- or Mountain- Limestone and the Yoredale rocks. A little further to the west, in the valley of the Lune, the Millstone-grit and Coal-measures come in; but these we have not seen. The localities are therefore all in the lower half of the Carboniferous series. The Scar-limestone is about 1000 feet in thickness, and is finely 5386 MM. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. exposed in most parts of the district, in both natural and artificial sections. Generally speaking it is not rich in fossils; and, when they are present, they are difficult to extract owing to the hardness of the rock. Hence, with one exception, the Ostracoda have not been obtained from the limestone itself, but from the shaly partings, or intercalated thin beds of shale, that are occasionally (though rarely) present init. Most of these more argillaceous bands appear to come in near the base of the Limestone, as at Arnside, Sandside, and Heversham ; but there is one bed (perhaps more) of shale some- where near its centre, as at Kendal, Kent’s Bank, and Stainton. In one locality, near Storr Moss, the limestone, just beneath the turf, was somewhat decomposed and pretty full of Hntomostraca, which were easily got out. The Yoredale rocks are not well seen, and we have been able to examine only one good natural section of them (Holker Park). In Furness, where they have been proved to be of considerable thickness, they are usually covered by superficial deposits, and thus not easily to be got at, except where brought to the surface by the sinking of ironstone-pits and wells, or where quarries and railways have cut into them. The presence of this series of beds in Furness was, we believe, first noticed by the Survey Geologists; and it may be here mentioned that the maps and memoirs. which they have published on this region have been of considerable service to us in examining the district for Ostracoda. In working the shales for these microzoa, we have followed the usual method of washing (or boiling) away the earthy matter from the organic contents of the different samples collected, and sorting what is left by sifting, preparatory to picking out the Entomostraca with a watch-maker’s lens and sable pencil. Besides Ostracoda, most of our washings contain Foraminifera ; and some of those from the Yoredale rocks are rich in Polyzoa;* the latter especially in the shales from Holker Park and Gleaston Castle. The marks * and ** prefixed to the species in the following lists indicate their relative local abundance. J.—Locauities in THE Scar-Limustone, 1. Arnside.—The best locality we have met with for Ostracods in the Scar-limestone is near to Arnside, where what appears to be the lowest beds of the series come up, on the shore, half a mile to the west of the village. These beds have shaly partings, and in some places become decidedly argillaceous in character. From various washings of the softer portions we have obtained the following species,—associated with Foraminifera, Polyzoa, Crinoids, and a few Brachiopods :— * Leperditia Okeni (Munster). * Beyrichia craterigera, G.S. Brady, MS. L. suborbiculata (Munster). B., sp. LL. oblonga, J. & K. * Kirkbya umbonata (D’ Kichwald). LL. acuta,? J. & K. EK. tricollina, sp. noy. MS. LL. obesa, sp. nov. MS. ** Cytherella valida, J. K. & B. 1 The Polyzoa met with have been handed to Mr. G. R. Vine. * This was originally published as L. Okeni, var. acuta; but we now prefer to give this and some other forms a specific, instead of a varietal standing. WM. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. 537 *Cytherella scrobiculata, J. K. & B. ** Bairdia Hisingeri (Miinster). *Cythere 2) cuneola, Jones & Kirkby. *B. curta, M‘Coy. C. 21 gyripunctata, sp. nov. MS. *B. plebeia, Reuss, var. Bythocypris Phillipsiana, Jones & Holl, B. ampla, Reuss. var. carbonica, nov. B. brevis, J. & K. Argillecia equalis, J. & K. *B. subelongata, J. & K. Macrocypris Jonesiana, Kirkby. **B. submucronata, J. & K., and var. 2. Sandside.—The species given below are from soft shaly partings in the limestone that is exposed on the roadside between Sandside Station (Kendal Branch of the Furness Railway) and Arnside, southward of the bridge that carries the road over the line. Ento- mostraca are moderately plentiful, and are associated with a few Crinoids and other fossils. Leperditia Okeni (Minst.). * Oythere 21 cuneola, J. & K. MS. L. sp. Bythocypris bilobata (Miunst.). Kirkbya umbonata (D’ Hichw.). Cythere 2+ subreniformis, Kirkby. EK. costata (M‘Coy). ** Bairdia Hisingert (Miinst.). ** Oytherella valida, J. K. & B. B. plebeia, Reuss, var. C. serobiculata, J. K. & B. *B. suhelongata, J. & K. C. recta, J. K. & B. B. amputata, Kirkby. 3. Heversham.—In a cutting on the Kendal Branch of the Furness Railway. From shaly partings of a dark-grey limestone, apparently low down in the Scar-limestone. The fossils associated are Corals, Crinoids, and Brachiopods. Entomostraca are rather rare. Leperditia Okeni (Miinst.). Cythere ? cuneola, J. & K. MS. Kirkbya umbonata (D’ Hichw.). * Bairdia Hisingeri (Miunst.). K. costata (M‘Coy). B. plebeia, Reuss, var. * Cytherella valida, J. K. & B. *B. submucronata, J. & K. C. scrobiculata, J. K. & B. 4. Kettlewell Quarry, Kendal.—Our attention was kindly directed to this locality by Mr. Severs, of Kendal. The quarry is on the hill a little to the north-west of the town, where the limestone has been worked for lime-burning. A bed of shale, a foot or so thick, is here exposed, and in it the remains of Ostracoda are not at all rare, though badly preserved. The four following species have been determined; some specimens, which we cannot make out, may represent other forms. Leperditia Okeni (Miunst.). Cytherella valida, J. K. & B. Beyrichia radiata, J. & K. Bairdia submucronata, J. & K. 5. Meathop.—This locality is just to the north of the Grange Gas- works, by the side of the road to Meathop, where the limestone cliff is occasionally quarried for road-metal. The lower beds have argil- laceous partings, one of which swells into a bed of shale fully a foot thick. This evidently local bed is filled with the remains of Kirkbya spiralis, J. & K., along with a few valves of Leperditia Okeni (Miinst.). No other fossils have been noticed; nor have we observed these or other Entomostraca elsewhere hereabouts. 6. North of Storr Moss, Silverdale.—In limestone just to the north of Storr Moss, as seen by the side of the road from Silverdale to Yealand-Redmayne, and about a mile from the railway station. Just 1 The generic relationship of the species thus marked in these lists is doubtful as yet; certainly they are not true Cythera. 5388 IMM. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. under the turf the limestone is rather rotten, and full of Corals and Mollusca; Ostracods also are plentiful, and as follow— *Leperditia Okeni (Miunst.). *Bythocypris bilobata (Miinst.). *Z. Armstrongiana, J. & K. MS. Argillecia equalis, J. & K.MS. Beyrichia radiata, J. & K. Bairdia Hisingeri (Minst.). ** Kirkbya Permiana, Jones. B. ampla, Reuss. Cytherella ? reticulosa, sp. nov. MS. *B. curta, M‘Coy. *Oythere’ 2 cuneola, J. & K. **B. brevis, J. & K. *Xestoleberis ? subcorbuloides, sp.n. MS. 7. Kent’s Bank.—From a bed (about a foot thick) of very dark, shivery shale in the limestone cutting on the Furness Railway, a little to the west of Kent’s Bank Station. The shale is exposed on both sides of the cutting; also close to the sea-shore, immediately to the south. The associated fossils are species of Productus and other Brachiopods, etc. Ostracods are few. Leperditia Okent (Miinst.). Bairdia Hisingeri (Miunst.). Beyrichia, sp. B. submucronata, J. & K. Cytherella, sp. 8. Stainton.—In Stainton Quarry, a mile or so south-east of Dalton-in-Furness, Kirkbya Permiana occurs in shaly partings of the Scar-limestone, associated with Corals. IJ].— Locauities In THE YOREDALE Rocks. 1. Humphrey Head.—On the west side of Humphrey Head, just to the south of the Holy Well, is about four feet of grey shale, associated with limestone in thinnish beds, and lying rather irregu- larly with a steep dip to the west. Both shale and limestone are fossiliferous, and we take them to be Yoredale beds faulted down against the cliff of Scar-limestone forming this picturesque head- land.” Leperditia Okeni (Minster). *C.? cornigera, J. & K. MS. Beyrichia radiata, Jones & Kirkby. Bairdia Hisingeri (Minst.). *B.? ventricornis, J. & K. MS. *B. plebeia, Reuss. Kirkbya Permiana, Jones. *B. submucronata, J. & K. *K. Urei, Jones. B. brevis, J. & K. Cytherella Benniei, J. K. & B. B. sp. Cythere 2 cuneola, J. & K. MS. 2. Holker Park.—An interesting section of the Yoredale rocks is exposed on the west side of Holker Park, just on the edge of the marshland to the north of Quarry Flat. ‘These beds consist of yellow sandstones, shales, and crinoidal limestones, all dipping sharply about south-south-east. A few Ostracods are foand ina dark-grey shale underlying the uppermost limestone; but they are not numerous, and are very badly preserved. A little further to the north a thick calcareous shale comes in beneath another and lower limestone. This shale is especially rich in Polyzoa besides other fossils. Twelve species of Ostracoda occur in it, all of small size, and none very plentiful. 1 See footnote 1, ante p. 537. 2 .1n the One-inch Map of the Geological Survey no Yoredale beds are shown here ; but this is probably due to their having been only recently exposed. MM. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. 539 Leperditia acuta, J. & K. C. scrobiculata, J. K. & B. Beyrichia, sp. *(1 2 cuneola, J. & K. MS. * Kirkbya Urei, Jones * Bairdia plebeia, Reuss. K. spinosa, J. & K. B. brevis, J. & K. Cytherella valida ?, J. K. & B. B. subelongata, J. & K. C. recta, J. K. & B. B. sp. 3. Little Urswick.—At the waste-heaps of an abandoned ironstone- pit, in a field just to the east of Little Urswick, Furness, are quanti- ties of a light-grey and reddish shale, containing a few Ostracods. The shale belongs to the Yoredale series, and is full of Crinoidal stems, with Fenestella and other Polyzoa, and Molluscan fossils. Fragments of a similar shale are seen on some waste ground, by the side of the road, just to the south-east of the village. This material looks like a very suitable rock for Ostracoda, but several boilings of it have only yielded the following species : Leperditia Okeni (Miunst.). Bairdia subelongata, J. & K. Bythocypris bilobata (Miinst.). B. brevis, J. & K. * Bairdia plebeia, Reuss. B. sp. 4. Scales Green.— An exposure of dark shale is seen on the north side of the pond (the water being low) at Scales Green, at the east end of the village of Scales, in Furness. Crinoids and other marine fossils are common in the shale, which apparently belongs to the Yoredale series, though the ground is coloured as Carboniferous Limestone in the One-inch Map of the Geological Survey. The Ostracoda are small and not very plentiful :— Beyrichia radiata, J. & K. Bairdia plebeia, Reuss. B. 2 ventricornis, J. & K. B. brevis, J. & K. *Cythere ? cuneola, J. & K.MS. *B. submucronata, J. & K. *C. 2? cornigera, J. & K. MS. 5. Gleaston Castle.—The species mentioned below are from the shaly partings of a dark-grey limestone seen in an old quarry on the east side of the road a little to the north of Gleaston Castle, in Furness. The position of the limestone is said by the Geological Survey authorities? to be at about the base of the Yoredale Rocks. The shale is rich in fossils, especially in Polyzoa. *Cytherella valida, J. K. & B. var. *B. brevis, J. & K. affiliata, nov. Bairdia subelongata, J. & K. * Phreatura conemna, gen. et. sp.n. MS. B. ampla, Reuss. * Bairdia Hisingeri (Munst.). *B. submucronata, J. & K. *B. plebeia, Reuss. B. legumen, sp. noy. MS. 6. The only other locality where we have found Entomostraca is in pebbles from the Drift, as seen on the coast to the north of Alding- ham. In one of these Kirkbya Permiana, Jones, was peculiarly abundant, as good impressions. Species of Cythere and Bairdia occurred with it. In the accompanying Table the distribution of the species in the Scar-Limestone and Yoredale Rocks is shown, as well as their occurrence elsewhere in the North of England and in Scotland. 1 See footnote 1, ante p. 537. 2 Explanation of Quarter Sheet 91 N.W., p. 8. 540 MWY. Jones and Kirkby—On Carboniferous Ostracoda. TABLE OF SPECIES SHOWING THEIR DistTRIBUTION. N. Lancashire and Westmoreland, Noe Protland : ae erland, : Species. Scar-lime-| Yoredale etc.l |T. Carbon- Canhonite stone. Rocks. iferous. Rise. Leperditia Okent (Minster) ......... x x x x x L. suborbiculata (Miinst.) ......... x x L. oblonga, Jones & Kirkby......... x bon ame x Te PLUS Mee Masa Bo Socboteooouodeon x x x wae LI. Armstrongiana, J. & K. MS.... x 200 x TF Obe805) SP) MOV.) abe) ec-bee ese seeeee x So ae a6 ape Beyrichia radiata, J. & K. ......... xe x x x x BUS Disa spistusactceeeonsteceend Saige ane xe a ABB B. craterigera, Brady, MS. ......... x sk x x B. ventricornis, J. & K. MS....... ae x BAG AES x Kirkbya Permiana, Jones ......... xe x x x x K. umbonata (D’ Hichwald)......... XK x Bes x K. tricollina, Sp. NOV. .......0...2..- x 200 500 500 500 KE, costata (M‘Coy) ......-...-2s-oe-- X 000 BK axe x LG GOORTEES do 5 IRS, enosccoocaaoonhace x ae on x Wee HENUT co ROOMES he eee eee eee x x x K. spinosa, J. & Ky oo .cceccececcneees oes x x x Cythereila valida, J. K. & B. ...... x p x ——— var.affiliata, nov. ude x 30 Bod C. serobiculata, J. K. & B. ......... x x x x (Gh papi, Ue TE 66 TBs Soabaccesoncas x x x C. Benniei, J. K. & B., var. ...... x x see CBs SO Raa oe NRA id TE 2 ahs ee ono C. ? reticulosa, Sp. DOV........0...0++ x 56 x ts p Bythocypris bilobata (Minst.) ..... exe x x x x B. Phillipsiana, Jones & Holl, var. Car bonica, NOV. .......0-.000-- a x xe ne x Argillecia equalis, J. & K.MS.... x K x Macrocypris Jonesiana, Kirkby . aR x aR nee Xestoleberis ? subcorbuloides, sp.nov x 090 : see Phreatura concinna, gen. &sp.nov.| ... x 006 000 wes Bairdia Hisingeri (Munst.)......... x x IK x x By plebeia, Reuss. b:c-.ssec.c0sesc e+e) x De x x x Tiss. HURT, AO) sastoanecsuncbeseasos x 506 x noe x B. ampla, Reuss. ........0.ccceceseee: Xs x x xe x JE UAE, dig 6S Us Gpocogocdbusctonounede x 5 x xx Xe B. submucronata, J. & K. ......... x Px ox x x B. subelongata, J. & K. ..... 12.02 x x x x x B. amputata, Kirkby ............... x oe x bee B. leguimen, Sp. NOV: ...rveeeee -2ae+s- se x ihe P Cythere ? cuneola, J. & K. MS.... x x x x 0. ? cornigera, J. & K.MS.......... . x x x C. 2 gyripunctata, sp. NOV. ......... %K Note. —We hope to have an early opportunity of describing and figuring the new species. Of this list 24 species occur elsewhere in the Carboniferous rocks And 28 of them are known to us from Scotland. Two others (Cytherella? reticulosa and Bairdia legumen) are also probably found there. Kirkbya tricollina, Phreatura concinna, Xestoleberis ? subcorbuloides, and Cythere? gyripunctata—are new to us. 1 Including a few localities in Durham and Cumberland. of the North of England. Five species—Leperditia obesa, Geol.Mag.1885. C.Berjeau lith DecadelI Vol... Pl. XIV. RP Tomes del. West, Newman dCo.imp. British Cretaceous Madreporaria. R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 541 As common Scar-limestone forms the following may be taken :— Leperditia Okeni, Kirkbya Permiana, Cytherella valida, Bairdia Hisingeri, and B. submucronata. As distinguishing species, on account of their exceptional occurrence in this formation, may be also named Leperditia Armstrongiana, L. obesa, Beyrichia craterigera, Kirkbya costata, K. spiralis, XK. tricollina, Bythocypris bilobata, Argillccia e@qualis, Bairdia curta, as well as others, most of which are either confined to or attain their maximum development in the Lower Carboniferous series of Scotland and the North of England. The Ostracoda of the Scar-limestone are generally more plentiful and robust than those in the ‘“‘ Yoredales” above. Bairdia Hisingeri particularly is large and thick-shelled as well ascommon. Cytherella valida is perhaps the most abundant of any form in the shale and shaly partings of the lowest beds. In the limestone itself, Leperditia Armstrongiana, Bythocypris bilobata, Bairdia curta, and Xestoleberis ? subcorbuloides come to the front as relatively common forms. In the Yoredale beds 22 species occur, most of which are of poor growth and scarce, as before said. Beyrichia ventricornis, Kirkbya Urei, Cythere ? cuneola, Bairdia plebeia, and B. brevis may be named as the prevailing forms. The two first named, along with K. spinosa, Cytherella recta, C. Benniei, C.? cornigera, and Phreatura concinna, are apparently confined to this formation. All of these, except the last (which is new), are well-known forms in the Carboniferous Limestone series of Scotland, which formation is equivalent in part to the Yoredale beds. In conclusion, we may add that there is little doubt but that more remains to be done in this district, and it would be well if the sub- ject were taken up and thoroughly worked out by some one residing in the locality. IIJ.—OBSERVATIONS ON SOME IMPERFECTLY KNOWN J4ADREPORARIA FROM THE Cretaceous FormMAtTION oF HNGLAND. By Rozert F, Tomzs, F.G.S. (PLATE XIV.) HE arrangement of a considerable collection of Cretaceous corals in my own cabinet has been the means of identifying some species not hitherto recorded as English, though well known else- where, and at the same time of subjecting some others to a more searching examination than they had before undergone. The result has been the addition of the following genera to the English list, viz. Ceratotrochus, Pleurosmilia, Barysmilia, Rhizangia, and Leptophyllia. A very careful examination of the corals of the Red Chalk of Hunstanton has brought to light some affinities which have been wholly overlooked, and which have occasioned their removal into quite a different genus from the one in which they were placed by their original describer. Similarly the genus Turbinoseris, from the Lower Greensand of Atherfield, is now absorbed into an earlier formed genus. 542 R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. A section of the Gault at Folkestone is given, not from any new features it contains, but to afford the opportunity of pointing out the exact stratigraphical position of the several species of Madre- poraria there met with. SECTION OF THE GAULT AT FOLKESTONE. ft. in. 1. Rubbly yellow Gault.............. about 39 0 { Pecten, Astrea, Hamites, Am- { monites Goodhalli. 2. Light-coloured mottled Gault,with ) layers of phosphate nodules about | the middle, and a hard seam near 522 0 the bottom, with a layer of No- | Gules Demeath 16 cecsccccccsccsseseccscneeeressee J { Ammonites cristatus, Pentacrinus ( Lfittoni. : Casts of Inoceramus above the hard ST SEE RN ey Eon } seam— Trochocyathus Wiltshirei, Caryophyllia Bowerbanki. Trochocyathus Harveyanus, and a 4. JNodule bed. sn.seantncunccee 5 \ variety, Bathycyathus Sowerbyi. 5. Very dark Gault with a hard seam \ 7 0 iia eM OLLOM peer eee 6. Dark mottled ded wn. 3 © Fucoids, Nautilus, Gervillea, Cera- 7. Light mottled bed, in the bottom 6 0 totrochus insignis, Smilotrochus of which are many corals .............. \ cylindricus, S. calearatus, Lepto- cyathus gracilis. 8. Light fawn-coloured bed................. 7 0 Crustacea, Pinna. OPVietiya darks Gauliipesnene reeset 5 0 Mytilus, Trochocyathus Harveyanus. lO MGault: Pee oe ee eee 5 0 Cyclocyathus Fitton. 11. Gault, containing bands of no- aa) dules of sulphate of iron ............... 12. Dark-coloured Lower Greensand, said to contain corals. The foregoing section was copied by me from one in the possession of the well-known collector of Gault fossils, Mr. J. Griffiths, of Folkestone, whose practical knowledge of the locality is very intimate. This was taken to the spot, and made use of in fixing the position of the corals. It has subsequently been correlated with the one published by Mr. Price in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society.1 I regret that I did not consult Mr. Price’s section before visiting the coral-bearing strata at Folkestone, as I should have referred to it instead of the one I have here introduced. A great many of the species were observed in siti, and were placed in the section on the spot. Nearly all the corals I saw were in a thin seam between beds number 7 and 8. The common species, Cyclocyathus Fittoni, is not, however, by any means confined to the one bed mentioned, but has a vertical range of nearly fifty feet. Probably also Trochocyathus Harveyanus has a somewhat similar range. Crratorrocuus 1nstenis, Dunc. sp. Pl. XIV. Fig. 6. Smilotrochus insignis, Dunc. Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 37, pl. xvi. fig. 18, 1870. Having been struck with the very great resemblance between the Smilotrochus insignis of Duncan and the Ceratotrochus ornatus of M. de Fromentel, I broke up some specimens of the former, from the Gault of Folkestone, and ascertained at once, by the existence of 1 Quart. Journ, Geol. Soc. 1874, vol. xxx. p. 342. R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 543 a large and spongy columella, that I had very properly suspected both of being representatives of the same genus. Prof. Duncan’s species must therefore be removed into the genus Ceratotrochus, and that genus must now be introduced into the English Coral fauna. The specific resemblance between the two above named is so considerable that some suspicion may well be entertained as to their distinctness, but there are some particulars in which they differ. The English form has the columella smaller, and the septa and mural cost are much more uniform in size throughout. Moreover, the single row of tubercles which ornaments the coste in both species are much smaller in the English than in the French specimens. However, they are very closely allied forms, and the one may very possibly prove to be only a variety of the other. TrocuocyatHus WIttTsHireI, Dunc. Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 34, pl. xiv. figs. 10-12, 1870. Smilotrochus granulatus, Dune. (oe. cit. p. 36, pl. xiv. fig. 17. The existence of a columella in the supposed Smilotrochus insignis, and its consequent removal to another genus, naturally led to the search for a columella in the allied species Smilotrochus granulatus. The result was the discovery of that part surrounded by pali. A subsequent investigation of the coralla of many species of varied ages satisfied me that none of them are anything more than immature examples of the species described by Prof. Duncan under the name of Trochocyathus Wiltshirei. I may add that in the investigation of these small Madreporaria from Folkestone, it is absolutely necessary that a good many examples should be examined, and that some of them should be broken up, otherwise their real affinities will be overlooked, as they appear to have been by Prof. Duncan. Some of the immature examples of this species have so close a resemblance to specimens of the foregoing species, which are of corresponding size, that it is impossible to distinguish them, excepting by ascertaining whether they have pali or not. SMILOTROCHUS ? CALCARATUS, sp. nov. PI. XIV. Figs. 1-5. The corallum is small, conical, and the inferior extremity is pro- duced into a long oblique and slender, but flattened, spur, which, when complete, has a ring of short rootlets at the end, by which it may perhaps have been attached. The mural costz are distinct, rather large, equal in size, rounded, and prominent according to their order. They are continued along the spur, quite to the end. They have a single row of tubercles along their central line, which are most distinct near the calice, more especially in young specimens. In the larger, and therefore older ones, the tubercles are nearly obsolete. The calice is circular, saucer-shaped, and the margin is rather thin. The septa are a little exsert outwardly, near the margin of the calice, but speedily curve inwards and downwards towards the fossula. O44 R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. There are six systems, and four complete cycles, and a fifth which is incomplete. Those of the first cycle are long, and approach very near to the axial space, and their lateral spines, which are scarcely observable near the wall, gradually increase in size and prominence towards their inner margin, where they are much pronounced and have a rugged nodular growth. The septa forming the second cycle are three-fourths the length of those of the first, and are similarly furnished with rugged and warty processes (spines ?) at their inner margins. The third cycle has septa which are three-fourths the length of those of the second, and which have also similar excrescences at their inner margin, and the fourth is formed by septa which are scarcely half the length of the third, while those of the fifth cycle are very short, simple, and irregular, and even absent in some of the systems. The spinous processes of the septa, which are confined to the first three cycles, have sufficient prominence and irregularity of growth to mix and form a loose mass, which occupies the whole of the middle part of the calice. There is considerable irregularity in the degree of development of this in different examples, and in some of them it fills up the calice so much that the cycles are difficult to trace. I have examined fifteen specimens of this species from the Gault of Folkestone, not one of which has the margins of the septa uninjured, while the calice of most of them is much damaged by pyrites. A single specimen from the Speeton clay of Yorkshire has also come under my observation. It isa small one, and the oblique foot and the peculiar septal processes are not greatly developed. The height of the largest specimen I have seen is a little more than half an inch, and the diameter of the calice three lines. It is with considerable doubt that I place this curious species in the genus Smilotrochus. Cyctocyatuus Firront, var.? Micrabacia Fittoni, Duncan, Suppl. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 37, pl. xiv. figs. 6-9, 1870. More than twenty years ago I received from the late Dr. 8. P. Woodward a small collection of corals from the Gault of Folkestone, in which was a specimen which, though labelled by him Cyclocya- thus Fitton, appeared to differ from all the others which were similarly named, and from the same locality. It corresponds in every particular with Micrabacia Fittoni, Duncan, and, like the figured specimen, had the whole of the central region obscured by stony matter. Fortunately the usually troublesome and destruc- tive pyrites was absent, and black and apparently phosphatic lime, though hard, gave way to and was readily scooped out by a sharp steel instrument, and a deep calice revealed. In this is a papillous columella and a ring of pali. These are seen in section, and being of a pure white colour, are very clearly defined by the surrounding black substance with which the loculi are filled. Compared with the same parts in Cyclocyathus Fittoni, they correspond very closely, and all further question about the generic affinities of the species ‘-_" Se R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 545 under consideration is set at rest. There is, however, one peculia- rity about which I am by no means satisfied. I allude to the single layer of dissepiments which is visible a little above the basal wall, all round the corallum, like a tabulum.~ It is well figured by Prof. Duncan, who speaks of it as consisting of large synapticule. But that it is dissepimental in its nature I have not the least doubt, the downward curvature in each loculus being only what is observable in the dissepiments of some Montlivaltie, though in that genus they are never arranged so as to form a tabulum. I may also allude to the great flatness of the whole of the under surface, and of the costee, as well as the regularity in the size of the latter, as differing from the same parts in typical specimens of Cyclocyathus Fittoni. It cannot, however, be considered as anything more than a variety of that species, and of course the existence of this second species of Micra- bacia is inadmissible. BaRyYsM1LIA TUBEROSA, Reuss. Beitr. Charak. Kreid. Ostalpen, p. 91, pl. x. figs. 14—16, 1854, Deuts. K.K. Akad. Wien, vii. Pl. XIV. Hiroe Aas A species of Barysmilia from the Upper Greensand of Haldon has long been known to me. A specimen in my own cabinet, though of small size, agrees so nearly with the description and figure given by Reuss of Barysmilia tuberosa, that there can be no doubt as to its identity with that species. The calices in this specimen are rather more irregular in form and are more closely placed than they appear in the figure alluded to. The small size of this and the following Species, compared with the examples figured by their respective describers, is in accordance with the stunted form of other compound corals from the same locality, though some of the simple ones are of relatively greater size. Barysminia Corpiert, M. Edw. and Haime. Ann. des Sci. Nat. 8rd ser. t. x. p. 273, pl. 5, fig. 4, 1849. HE. de From. Pal. Franc. Polyp. Terr. Crétacé, p. 385, pl. 86, fig.i.1873. Pl. XIV. Fig. 14. In the elevated and almost cylindrical form of the peduncular parts of the corallum, in the ovoid or round and comparatively small size of the calices, and in the number and delicacy of the mural costz and septa, the only specimen yet obtained agrees closely with the figure and description of Barysmilia Cordieri of MM. Milne Edwards and Haime. But while the figure above mentioned repre- sents a corallum of four inches in height, the specimen now before me is only one inch high. This specimen was obtained from Haldon with the last species. No locality is assigned to the present species by MM. Milne Edwards and Haime, but M. de Fromentel, who copies their figure, mentions its occurrence in the Craie tuffeau a of Mamers (Sarthe). Some other compound corals have been collected at Haldon, which from their unsatisfactory condition cannot be determined, though I believe them to be new. As the Haldon corals are only casts, they cannot be trusted when internal structure is important. The genus Haldonia is in my opinion a very doubtful one. Specimens in my DECADE I1I.—VOL. II.—NO. XII. 35 546 R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. own collection from Haldon differ in the important respect of some- times having a styliform columella, and sometimes only a ring of pali, as in Prof. Duncan’s figures. The very dwarfed individuals representing the two species of Barysmilia from Haldon are apparently in exact accordance with the small and incrusting Thamnastree from the same locality. Genus Pievrosmitia, H. de From. Bull. de Ja Soc. Géol. de France, 2nd ser. t. xiii. p. 853, 1856. The generic name Pleurosmilia was first made use of in 1856 by M. de Fromentel for a group of simple corals having an elongated and essential columella, one end of which is united to one of the principal septa, and the other end is free.1_ The specimens on which the genus was first founded were obtained from the Portland Oolite of France (Haute Sadne), where a species of Peplosmilia, to which Pleurosmilia is allied, also occurs. In the subsequently published Paléontologie Frang¢aise,? the same distinguished Zoophytologist de- scribed and figured two other species, under the names of Pleuro- smilia Neocomiensis and P. Barrottei, both from the Neocomien formation of Chatouroupt, Haute-Marne, France. Without entering into any of the considerations affecting the correlation of the Greensand of this country with the Neocomien of the Continent, it will be interesting to add to the paleontological evidence already known and recorded, the occurrence in the Isle of Wight of one of the above-mentioned species, described and figured by M. de Fromentel from the Neocomian strata of France. PLEUROSMILIA NEOComIENSIS, H. de From. Pal. Frang. Terr. Orétacé, p: 375, pl. 78, fig. 1. Pl. XIV. Figs. 12 and 13. One specimen only of Pleurosmilia neocomiensis has, as yet, been met with, so far as I know, and it was taken from the “ Perna beds” of the Lower Greensand at Atherfield, Isle of Wight. It possesses all the characteristics of the species in a well-marked degree. The shortness of the corallum, the elongated form of the calice, the stout- ness of the septa, and the rugose epitheca, are peculiarities, the presence of which leaves no doubt as to the identity of our English specimen with those figured by M. de Fromentel. Professor Quenstedt has proposed that the name Awophyllum should be substituted for that of Pleurosmilia, but the latter for obvious reasons must be retained. ASTROCG@NIA, sp. A single ill-preserved specimen of a small species of Astrocenia, which was obtained from the well-known locality for Greensand fossils at Farringdon, has fallen into my hands. ‘The base is quite flat, and the upper surface hemispherical. The calices are crowded and have a diameter of about one line. It is not in a sufficiently 1 Bull. de la Soc. Géol. de France, 2nd ser. 1856. * Terr. Crétacé Zooph, p. 375=6, pl. 78. R. EF. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 47 good state of preservation to admit of satisfactory specific definition, though it possesses characters which do not correspond with those of any species of Astrocenia which I have yet met with. Isastrma Reuss[1]ana, M. Edw. & Haime. Hist. Nat. Corall. ii. p. 028. Ulophyllia erispa, Reuss. Denkschr. der Akad. der Wiss. Wien, t. vii. p. 106, pl. ii. fig. 6, 1854. (Not Milne Edwards and Haime). In the collection of Cretaceous Corals in the British Museum are specimens of a coral, some of which have been obtained from Ather- field, Isle of Wight, and others from Gosau. They are without doubt specifically identical. Those from Gosau are labelled Isastrea Reussana, Milne Edwards and Haime, which is the Ulophyllia crispa of Reuss. The specimens from Gosau differ however from the figure given by Reuss in having their septa denticulated. The septa pass quite uninterruptedly from one calice to another, though there is a distinctly elevated line where the union of the calices takes place. Gemmation occurs freely between, or just within the calices, as in Isasitrga and Latimeandra. The general aspect of this coral is very much that of a Thamnastrea, though on those parts of the corallum where increase in the number of calices has been the result of recent gemmation, a very Latimeandrine appearance is observable. A broken specimen shows well-marked dissepiments, and imper- fectly developed pseudo-synapticulz, as in Thamnastrea. In another specimen there is an abundance of well-formed synapticule of a similar kind. Leaving the identification and nomenclature of this somewhat obscure species for future consideration, I must content myself with observing of the Atherfield specimens that they, as well as the Gosau examples, have both dissepiments and synapticule. IsASTRHA NEOCOMIENSIS, sp. nov. A specimen of a coral referable to the genus Isastrcea forms part of the British Museum collection, and was obtained from the ‘““Crackers beds” of the Upper Neocomian deposits of Atherfield, Isle of Wight. It bears some general resemblance to the Isastrea profunda of Reuss, but differs from it in some important par- ticulars. The calices are larger and shallower, and the septa of one calice pass over the mural region and are continuous with those of adjoining calices. So far as I can observe, this does not occur in the species figured by Reuss. The specimen is very broadly attached (by the whole of its breadth) to a large specimen of Perna Ricordeana, D’Orbigny.1 The upper surface is convex, aud the outline consider- ably resembles that of Isastreea profunda. Around the outer margin is a fringe of short but well-defined radiating coste, indicative of further extension of the corallum over the surface of the shell. The calices are distinctly polygonal, and where they are worn, the dividing wall becomes very apparent. The septa are thin, regularly 1 T am indebted to the kindness of Mr. R. Bullen Newton, F.G.S., for the determination of this shell, and for other information which has enabled me to give the stratigraphical position of the coral here described. 548 R. EF. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. denticulated, and some of the newer run into the older ones. The cycles are not traceable on account of the centre of the calices being more or less filled up with extraneous matter, but there are about forty septa. The continuity of the septa between the calices of this species gives it a somewhat Thamnastrea-like aspect, which is suggestive of the presence of pseudo-synapticule. These, however, I have been unable to detect. Diameter of the corallum, about 1 inch 9 lines. Height of the corallum, about 11 lines. Diameter of the calices, from 14 to 2 lines. Genus Rurzanera, Edw. and Haime, 1848. Podoseris, Duncan, 1869. My acquaintance with the corals of the Red Chalk dates from 1862, when, with other members of the British Association, then met at Cambridge, I visited Hunstanton and secured a considerable number of specimens. At that time I observed the peculiarly expanded base, with its ragged outline, suggestive of incompleteness, which characterizes so many specimens. Again in 1876, when a considerable collection of these small corals came into my possession, I was similarly impressed with the appearance presented by the peculiar conformation of the base, notwithstanding that Prof. Duncan had in the interval made the species the type of a new genus, under the name of Podoseris. But it was not until the kindness of Dr. W. Bélsche had furnished me with specimens of Rhizangia Sedgwicki, from the Cretaceous deposits of Gosau, that the real affinities of the Hunstanton corals became manifest, and their identity with Rhizangia established. The comparison of the Hunstanton corals with undoubted examples of that genus, besides detecting characters which have led to the generic alterations here made, has also been the means of discovering some other peculiarities which deserve mention. The endotheca of the species described by Prof. Duncan under the names Podoseris mamilliformis and Podoseris elongata is peculiar, and cannot be understood without the assistance of vertical and horizontal sections. The septa, like those of Cyclolites and Leptophyllia, are formed by vertical trabiculee, having schlerenchimatous expansions at regular intervals, constituting horizontal ledges, which are on the same level on each side of the septum, but are not opposite those of other septa, and they do not meet in the middle of the loculus. Dissepiments are present, but they are peculiarly arranged. At nearly regular intervals from the base of the corallum upwards, there are thick and rudely-formed layers of endotheca, which are of a dissepimental nature. They extend in all the loculi across the whole of the corallum, on nearly the same level, and are formed by the crowding together of numerous thin and flat dissepiments. Their position in the corallum is indicated in Prof. Duncan’s figure of Rhizangia elongata. (Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. pl. ix. fig. 16). Magnified representa- tions of the same are also given in Figures 9 and 11 of Plate XIV. accompanying the present paper. LR. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 549 So far as I have been able to observe, there is no true wall, only such a one as would be formed by the union of synapticule near the outside of the corallum. Beyond this so-formed wall the ends of the septa project, and unless hidden beneath bands of irregularly developed pellicular epitheca, synapticule may be seen between them. I am not at present familiar with the endotheca of any species of Rhizangia, excepting the species here mentioned, and am indeed prepared to learn that it has not yet received attention at the hands of zoophytologists. So far, however, as may be gathered from an inspection of the figures of some of the species, there are indications of a septal structure corresponding with what I have above described. The denticulations of the septa of such species as Rhizangia procurrens, Reuss,’ bear but little resemblance to those of any of the Astreide. They more nearly correspond with the denticulations of the septa of some of the Mungide, and are probably the terminations of vertical trabicule, loaded by a synapticular growth, as in Cyclolites and Leptophyllia. To the genus Podoseris, first formed for the reception of these Red-Chalk corals, another species from the Inferior Oolite of Dorset- shire has been added by Professor Duncan. This is Podoseris constricta, the type of which has lately been in my hands. The examination of it and of some other corals from the same bed has convinced me that it is nothing more than an abnormal form of a species appertaining to an old and well-known genus. The genus Syzygophyllum of Reuss appears to me to possess some characters which are not wholly inconsistent with those of Rhizangia.? The figures of Syzygophyllum brevis are by no means unlike many specimens of Rhizangia elongata, and the description given by Ruess supplies some particulars which are equally consistent with it. The broadly-attached corallum, the moderately-developed columella with its papillated upper surface, the anastomozing septa, and the toothed mural coste (when not obscured by epitheca) sufficiently illustrate this. The lateral ornamentation of the septa, and the endotheca, appear, however, to differ materially. The following is a translation of the words used by Ruess :—‘‘ The lateral surfaces of the septa are united by numerous thin, very flat, bow-shaped, endothecal lamellee, which form a large vesicular mesh-work. Together with them they bear scattered granular pimples. In a cross-section of the corallum the endothecal vesicles are observed forming pretty regular concentric rows.” I may call attention to the ornamentation of the septa shown in the magnified figure (Fig. 8b), and suggest that the genus Syzygophyllum is one which demands further investigation. Although I have myself collected corals from the cliff at Hunstanton, I am unable to speak of their precise position in it. That deficiency has, however, been fully made up by Professor 'T. Wiltshire, who has taken Rhizangia mamilliformis from the top 1 Foss. Korall d. Osterreichisch-Ungarischen Miocans, Taf. vi. fig. 1. 2 Foss, Korall des Osterreichisch-Ungarischen Miocans, p. 36. Taf. v. figs. 6-9. 550 fh. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreroraria. to the bottom of the Red Chalk, and Rhizangia elongata from the middle part only.’ There is great reason for supposing that the genus Rhizangia occurs in the Oolitic strata of Gloucestershire. I have seen two corallites attached to a Thamnastrea from the Lower Trigonia grit of Ravensgate Hill, Cheltenham, which are probably referable to that genus; and I have one from a bed of Oolitic gravel between Cirencester and South Cerney. The latter is without doubt a Rhizangia, and as it was associated with other Oolitic corals, it was probably derived from some part of the Oolitic series. RHIZANGIA MAMILLIFoRMIS, Dunc. sp. Pl. XIV. Figs. 7, 8, and 9. Podoseris mammiliformis, Duncan. Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 25, pl. ix. figs. 2-18, 1868. The greater number of the specimens from Hunstanton consist of isolated and worn corallites. A limited number show the base and its ragged margin, while in three instances only have I seen the corallites connected by the calcified stolon. Not unfrequently Specimens may be observed attached to Belemnites, over which the thread-like extension of the stolon is seen. A short piece of a Belemnite now before me is so completely enclosed, as to have led in the first place to the supposition that it was wholly coralline, until by an accidental fracture the unmistakeable structure of the Belemnite was revealed. Rurzanera ELONGATA, Dunc. sp. Pl. XIV. Figs. 10 and 11. Podoseris elongata, Duncan. Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 26, pl. ix. fig. 16-17, 1868. Although this species so much exceeds in height all others of the genus, I cannot detect any generic differences. Specifically Rhizangia elongata differs also from R. mamilliformis in having the dissepiments placed more on one level, that is, they collectively form masses which are more clearly defined and more nearly horizontal. In the latter species the layers of endotheca are more or less saucer-shaped, and when the convex calicular surface has been rubbed smooth and polished, they appear as rings, one within the other, having some- thing the appearance of wall within wall.? In Rhizangia elongata these layers of dissepiments are seen when a vertical section of the corallum is made. Genus LepropHyLitia, Reuss. Turbinoseris, Duncan. For a long time I have believed that the genera Leptophyllia and Turbinoseris were one and the same. Although I had not made such ! See that gentleman’s very interesting paper on the Red Chalk of Hunstanton, in the twenty-fifth volume of the Journal of the Geological Society. 2 A horizontal section of a corallite, if only a little way below the calice, should correspond as nearly as is practicable with the surface of the calice, for otherwise some of the septa would be cut through much lower down than others. Indeed, the same septum would be reduced very unequally, and the endotheca more exposed in one place than another. As, however, there is no reason to suppose, prrmda facie, that any important difference exists between the two sides of a tud/ corallum, a horizontal section taken low down seems unobjectionable. R. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. 551 an intimate internal examination as would be necessary to determine their relationship on structural grounds, I found great difficulty in admitting’as the representatives of distinct genera, forms which were so absolutely similar in all their more obvious characters. And this great general resemblance did not fail to strike other observers, fully competent to give an opinion. Examples of Leptophyllia clavata, Reuss, from Gosau, and of Turbinoseris de Fromenteli, Duncan, from Atherfield, in my own collection, being placed before my late and much lamented friend Dr. Wright, brought forth the prompt affirmation of their generic identity. Of the generic peculiarities of Leptophyllia, M. H. Pratz has given so full an account, that it will be surperfluous for me to enter into the details.’ Although I have long been aware of the similarity in all outward details existing between Leptophyllia clavata and Turbinoseris de Fromenteli, I did not know that there were synapticulee in the former. Now, however, that not only their presence but their precise confor- mation has been clearly demonstrated by M. Pratz, this is confirmation in my opinion of the unity of the genera Leptophyllia and Turbinoseris. The two genera thus brought together are, I know, placed by Prof. Dunean, the one, Turbinoseris, in the Fungide, and the other, Lepto- phyllia, in the newly-proposed family Plesioporitide ; the supposition being that the former has imperforate, and the latter perforate septa. But I cannot see that the two differ generically from each other, and I therefore regard them as identical. The earliest appearance of the genus is in the Oolite (assuming that the Oolitic Zeptophyllie structurally resemble those of the Chalk), and several species are recorded by Etallon and M. de Fromentel. Of the upward range of the genus I can only decide from the evidence afforded by Reuss of the occurrence of a species in the older Tertiary strata of the Alps? Not having had the opportunity of examining any of the West-Indian species of Turbinoseris described by Prof. Duncan, I am unable to speak of them, except to observe that I do not see anything in the description of either genus or species which is irreconcileable with that of Leptophyllia. Lrpropuyituia Anewica, Tomes. Turbinoseris de Fromenteli, Dunc., Supp. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. ii. p. 42, pl. xv. fig. 1318, 1870. As the genus Turbinoseris must give way to Leptophyllia, and a species has already been named after M. de Fromentel by M. Etallon, a new specific name is needed for the present species. I therefore propose that for the future the name Anglica be applied to it. There are specimens in the British Museum which have been obtained from Potton, as well as others from Atherfield. 1 Paleeontographica, vol. xxix. 1882. 2 Palaont. stud. u. die Alter. Tertiirsch. der Alpen, p. 10, pl. xxxvii. fig. 1. and p. 36, pl. xliv. fig. 8. 552 Rk. F. Tomes—Some Cretaceous Madreporaria. Braumontia Ecrrtont. Edw. and Haime, Monogr. Polyp. Foss. Terr. Paleoz. p. 276, 1857. Brit. Foss. Cor. pt. iii. p. 160, tab. xlv. fig. 1, 1852. A large compound tabulate coral is sometimes met with in the coprolite beds of the Upper Greensand of Cambridge, which may be mentioned here, although there can be no doubt that it is a derived fossil, and from the Carboniferous Limestone. At present I know it only from the examination of a fragment struck off a mass of con- siderable size, and lent to me by my friend the Rev. P. B. Brodie. The internal structure has been well retained, and the nature of the tabule is very clearly observable. It is undoubtedly referable to the Favositoid genus Beaumontia, and the remblance to Beauwmontia Egertoni is so great, that it may be unhesitatingly referred to it. Compared with other species of the genus, the present may be dis- tinguished by the very slight degree of convexity of its tabule. It was described by MM. Milne Edwards and Haime from a specimen in the collection of the Geological Society, which was obtained by Sir P. Egerton from the Mountain Limestone of Sracrapagh, Ireland. It is not without some interest to the geologist that the Cretaceous formation of this country is now found to have a greater resemblance in its Coral fauna to that of the Continent, than has been heretofore believed. Prof. Duncan has made known in his Supplement to the History of British Fossil Corals, and subsequently in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, some genera and species of Corals from the Upper Greensand of Haldon and other localities, which indicate a nearer relationship between the English Coraliferous beds of the Cretaceous formation and those of the Continent than had been supposed. In the latter publication he concludes a paper on the Coral fauna of Haldon by the observation that it ‘appears to be the Northern expression of that of the French and Central-European deposits, which are the equivalents of the British Upper Greensand.” The occurrence of such genera as Ceratotrochus, Pleurosmilia, Bary- smilia, Rhizangia and Leptophyllia, now for the first time made known as occurring in the English Cretaceous beds, tends to ap- proximate them still more closely with those of the Continent. (The foregoing paper was read at the meeting of the Geological Society on the 24th of June, but was withdrawn by the author with the consent of the Council. It is now printed verbatim with figures by Mr. C. Berjeau of the specimens exhibited at that meeting.) EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV. Fic.1. Smilotrochus calcaratus. The corallum. Natural size. », 2 Jb. ‘The corallum of another specimen. Natural size. », 8 Lb. The corallum of a young example. Natural size. », 4. Jb. The calice of No. 1. Much magnified. », 0. Jb, The spur of the same specimen. Much magnified, and showing the coste. », 6. Ceratotrochus insignis. A vertical section of the corallum. Much magni- fied and showing the spongy columella. Rhizangia mamilliformis. Three corallites united by the stolon. Magnified. Jb. Two corallites similarly united. One of them being very little worn shows the denticulations of the septa. Magnified about half a diameter. EIEN! W. S. Gresley—Boulders in a Coal-seam. 5)38 Fic. 9. Jb. Part of the polished calicular surface of a specimen showing the dis- sepiments in the loculi, to which reference is made at page 548, in the description of the genus Rhizanga. ; », 10. Rhizangia elongata. The synapticule as they appear in a vertical section. Highly magnified. », ll. Jb. A vertical section, showing the dissepiments arranged in irregular layers which are on nearly the same level in all the loculi. They are usually more fused together than is shown in the figure. Highly magnified. », 12. Pleurosmilia Neocomiensis. The corallum. Natural size. », 13. Jb. The calice. Natural size. », 14. Barysmilia Cordieri. A young example. Natural size. », 15. Barysmilia tuberosa. A young example. Natural size. ITV.—On tHe Occurrence oF QvUARTZITE BOULDERS IN A CoaL-SEAM IN LEICESTERSHIRE. By W. S. Grestey, F.G.S. le 1883 a scattered group of five boulders was met with in the workings of the Coleorton Colliery in the “ Lount Nether” coal, at a depth from the surface of about 375 feet. They were all entirely enveloped in the coal, and occurred about 20 inches from the top of the seam. Four of them were found within a space of 20 yards of one another, but no two of them very near together, and the fifth occurred some 500 yards S.W. of the others. The coal- seam was of its normal thickness—namely, about 44 feet. This is the seam marked “ Lount 4” upon the Geol. Survey Sheet No. 46 of Horizontal Sections, and it is the lowest but one worked in the district. The dimensions and weights of these boulders are :— Ibs. ozs. 1. 72 inches longest diam. x 5%inches shortest diam. 11 8 weight. 2. B By ” x 45 ”? ”? Do: ” 3. 43 ” ” x 43 ” ” 210 ” he We p ” x 3 ” ” 110 ” 5. 23 55 ” Se EE ” O Gr og No two of them are at all alike in outward form, but all are con- siderably, or very much, rounded and smooth-surfaced. No. 1 exhibits, very markedly, the divisional planes due to original strati- fication ; these run parallel to its flatter sides. The exterior is rather rough and here and there coated with scaly iron-pyrites and coaly matter, and a very little shale or clay adheres firmly to the boulder, and shows signs of considerable pressure. No. 2 is somewhat pear or wedge-shaped, but is well and smoothly worn all over. No. 3 highly rounded into a flattish circular mass, and very smooth all over. When broken through it exhibited a sharp, almost conchoidal fracture, and is evidently extremely compact. No. 4 has a large portion broken away on one side along an original joint (?); the edges are now smoothed and rounded off. No. 5 shows a rather singular convex surface, occupying about one-third of its area, which (to me) has the appearance of having been produced by some planing rather than rolling action, but there are no rough or clearly defined edges left; the strie (if any really exist) are very minute. I certainly never remember seeing a quartzite pebble of a similar form. 554 W. S. Gresley—Boulders in a Coal-seam. All the stones seem to be composed of very similar rock, the colour outside being grey, blotched with black. The exterior for a depth of about 4 inch, is of a darker shade than the interior of the stones ; due no doubt to being so long in contact with the coal. I cannot detect any signs of fossils upon or within any of them. From No. 2 a slide has been prepared, which I submitted to Prof. Bonney, and he has been kind enough to send me the following description of it :—‘‘ A very compact pale grey quartzite, consisting of rather angular fragments, often about ‘01 inch diameter, of quartz, with which are a few more rounded grains of a decomposed kaolin- like material, which probably were once felspar; these have worn out of the slide in grinding. There are apparently a few specks of iron-oxide, but some of these may be mere accumulations in the above vacuities of the material used in grinding the slide. I note also a few flakes of colourless mica, a small grain or two of epidote, and one, partly broken away, which | think is tourmaline.! The rock macroscopically and microscopically is like some of the more compact quartzites in the pebbles of the Bunter in Staffordshire, and in the Loch Maree district; it differs in some respects from the quartzite of Hartshill, the Lickey, or the Wrekin. It reminds me of a quartzite pebble described by me some years since from the Coal-measures of South Staffordshire, of which, however, I do not possess a fragment for comparison. See Grou. Maa. Vol. X. p. 289.” The seam of coal from which these boulders were taken is, at this colliery, particularly subject to ‘ Horses” or ‘“ Wants,” i.e. sudden interruptions in the continuity of the coal, its place being taken by sandstone and shale, exhibiting current-bedding, and often enclosing patches of detrital coal, &c. This coal-bed is here and there swelled up to double its ordinary thickness, and again, hard by, is reduced to half its proper thickness. It is also often mixed with layers or patches of sandstone, having a concretionary- looking formation, which set in and run out in a peculiar way. The roof of the seam is very variable in composition: sometimes it is sandstone-rock, sometimes shale containing numerous strings and pipes of bright, glossy coal, and some clay-ironstone nodules. Again it is fire-clay or soft carbonaceous shale and coal mixed. [A roof richer in fossil plant remains I never witnessed in any colliery, and they are often exceedingly beautifully preserved. I have obtained specimens of the leaflets of ferns (the actual dead leaves themselves) and placed them between bits of glass to preserve them, which when exposed to a current of air, flapped up and down, though still fast by their stalks to the rock.] I mention all this to show that the conditions under which this Coal-seam and its roof were deposited were such as clearly indicate that currents of running water, having considerable weight and velocity, flowed at the time of, or immediately subsequent to, the formation of the Coal-seam ; and as 1 I have identified this mineral in a compact grey quartzite very like the above, which is among the Bunter pebbles, and find a grain of it in a slide cut from a similar quartzite which occurs on the Torridon road about three miles from Kinlochewe.—T. G. B. W. S. Gresley—Boulders in a Coal-seam. 559d four out of five of these boulders were found within 80 or 90 yards from the edge of a “horse ” or “ wash-fault” of unusual width (100 yards), their connection with this interruption in the coal may be very close. Of the several theories advanced respecting the way in which boulders have become enveloped in Coal-beds, I am inclined to accept that one which supposes that they have been dropped or washed out of the roots of trees as they were floated along in flood- time from higher ground on which they grew. And there seems every reason to believe that as the matter composing the Midland Coal-measures undoubtedly came from the N.W., the parent rock from which these boulders have been derived existed more or less in that direction. In conclusion it may be interesting to cite several other authenticated instances of the occurrence of quartzite or other boulders and pebbles, either embedded in seams of coal or in the “ measures ” enclosing them. (a) In a colliery in Shropshire, a water-worn pebble of lead ore was taken (by Mr. George Spencer, the manager) from the top of a Coal-seam in the workings. [From this fact we learn that mineral veins—of lead-ore at any rate—were formed prior to the deposition of the Coal-measures. | (6.) At Church Gresley Colliery, in Derbyshire, at 630 feet deep, in 1867 was found a boulder composed of hard, crystalline sandstone, dotted with small, angular quartz-pebbles, having a smooth, well- worn surface; it measures ten inches in diameter by six inches thick, and in this latter particular corresponded exactly with the thickness of the clay (the underclay of the “Little Coal” seam) in which it reposed. Again, quite recently (1885) four or five little grey quartzite pebbles, the largest being roughly the size of a hen’s egg, were obtained from the same stratum of underclay in the same pit; they were all near together. (c.) In North Staffordshire two instances of large rounded boulders occurring in the Coal-measures are mentioned in the Report (for 1865) of the British Association.—See “‘ Reports,” p. 42. (d.) The South Wales Coal-field has yielded pebbles. See Memoir of Geological Survey, vol. i. p. 194. (e.) In the Forest of Dean Coal-field. Mr. Buddle’s account in Trans. Geol. Soc., 2nd series, vol. vi. p. 217. . (f.) The Lancashire Coal-districts, including Cheshire. Many boulders have been discovered in working the mines, accounts of which may be found in Memoirs of the Lit. and Phil. Soc. of Man- chester, vol. ix. 2nd series, 1851; Trans. of the Manchester Geol. Soe. vol. xiii. p. 141; also vol. xiv. p. 378. In America, in the Tennessee and Ohio Coal-fields quartzite boulders have occurred more or less buried in Coal-seams. See Dana’s Manual of Geology, p. 317. 506 Prof. A. Gaudry—Paleontology in Germany. V.—PAL@ONTOLOGY IN GERMANY AND AUSTRIA. By Prof. ALbert Gaupry, Membre de 1’Institut, For. Memb. Geol. Soc. Lond. [Nore sy THe Transiator.—M. Albert Gaudry, the well-known Professor of Paleontology at the Museum of Natural History of Paris, following up a report which he published last year of a visit to the British Museum (Natural History), Cromwell Road, has recently written an article in the ‘Revue Scientifique ” + on a series of visits just paid to the Museums of Germany and elsewhere. This article is valuable, not only for the statement of the existence of a great scientific movement on the Continent, but for the sum- marised sketch it gives of the most interesting geological and palzontological collections in the principal museums of Europe, a knowledge of which is often desiderated by the student when travel- ling abroad.—Marx Srtirrve. | SAW that Germany, like Engiand, is erecting Museums of Paleontology ; each counting it an honour to have a museum which displays the primitive history of its country. Stuttgart possesses, besides its general museum in which are the pro- ducts of different countries, a gallery of Geology and Paleontology, specially devoted to the fossils of Wurtemberg. This local collection, directed by Professor Oscar Fraas, has a deserved reputation; for in it can be followed from age to age the paleontological history of one of the best studied countries of Hurope. It is there especially that the astonishing reptiles are seen which lived upon the continents at the epoch of the Trias; the Atosaurus, the Zanglodon, the Mastodonsaurus, the Metopias, etc., permit one to form some idea of the strange aspect of the fauna of this epoch. The museum of Stuttgart is also one of those in which the Liassic epoch is well represented; it possesses the Holzmaden collection, celebrated for its entire skeletons of reptiles. M. Fraas had the kindness to take me to this locality some years ago, in order to show me in what condition the fossils are found ; most frequently they are encrusted with stone, and only swellings or protuberances are seen, which would teach nothing to an uneducated eye; but M. Fraas is able to foretell where the head, the members, the tail, are to be found, and even he could tell me what kind of animal must be there concealed. It is by the graving tool that those entire skeletons are developed which are the ornament of a great number of museums, and of which we have in Paris some magnifi- cent specimens. The collection of Stuttgart contains many Ichthyosauri with young ones enclosed within their ribs, generally they (the young) have the head turned towards the anus, as in other viviparous animals; never- theless I have seen one which has in its interior two young ones turned towards the head, and another which has six little ones in ventre turned in every direction. Must one suppose that the Ichthyosaurus had sometimes a single young one, like the terrestrial 1 Extract ‘‘ Revue ScrenTIFIQUE,”’ 7 Nov. 1885. Prof. A. Gaudry—Paleontology in Germany. 507 Salamander, sometimes several young ones as the viper or the blind worm? ‘This appears to me extraordinary, and explains why it was formerly believed that the young found in the interior of the Ichthyo- saurus had been eaten by it. Munich possesses important collections of paleontology adminis- tered by Professor Zittel: for example, that of Ammonites which, it is said, is the most complete in existence, and the series of admirable preparations of fossil sponges, whose skeletons Dr. Zittel has developed by steeping in acidulated water. I have seen again with pleasure the fossils of Pikermi, that Wagner had the merit of first making known. But the principal curiosity of the Paleontological Museum of Munich is the collection of fossils of the Lithographic Stone or Upper White Jura, of Solenhofen, in Bavaria. If one must go to Stuttgart to study the Trias and Lias, it is to Munich one must proceed to admire the Oolite. All geologists know that the stones of Solenhofen were originally mud, which was deposited upon a shore, where at the same time the inhabitants of the sea met those of land; in this mud, creatures of the most different and the most delicate organization, belonging to the Oolitic epoch, are preserved in the most astonishing perfection ; one finds there, down to Acalephee, a multitude of Crustacea, insects which have retained the most delicate neuration of their wings, their legs and antenne; Ammonites with their aptychus, and Fishes which are in course of passing from the Ganoid to the Teleostean state. It is there especially that one goes to study the flying reptiles, where they appear in all positions. There also may be seen the little Compsognathus, which long before the discovery of the entire Iguanodons of Belgium enabled us to understand the appearance of these Dinosaurians. The paleon- tologist thinks he is dreaming whilst contemplating this gathering together of beings which permit him to fancy himself in the Second- ary period almost as perfectly as if it were the present epoch ; one can readily believe, after seeing this grand collection, that a day will come, in which our successors will have a clear idea of the life-history of all past ages. It is well known that Vienna, for a long time deservedly extolled for its animation and gaiety, is becoming a splendid city, that its fortifications have been replaced by spacious boulevards bordered by gardens, fine houses and palaces. Science is about to profit largely by these transformations. On one side of the new Hotel de Ville, the sumptuous palace of Parliament has been erected, and as a companion building on the other side, the palace of the University. Ata short distance from the Palace of Parliament, opposite the Palace of the Emperor, they are finishing, at this moment, the Museum of Fine Arts and the Museum of Natural History. Thus the University and the Museum of Natural History are in the most magnificent quarters of Vienna; it is not as in Paris, where our Jardin des Plantes is banished so far from the centre. 508 Prof. A. Gaudry—Paleontology in Germany. The building of the University is nearly finished ; it is a pleasure to be a student in such a palace; marble has been lavished upon it ; it is reached by a vast flight of steps. An eminent savant, Professor Suess, a Member of Parliament, directs the collections of geology, and another professor equally able, M. Neumayr, superintends those of paleontology. The Museum of Natural History (Hof Naturalien Museum) belongs to the Crown. The Emperor has just placed at its head Dr. Franz Ritter von Hauer, who was formerly Director of the Geological Insti- tute. M. Fuchs is specially charged with the department of paleeon- tology. The buildings are advancing rapidly, and a large part of the collections are expected to be arranged before the coming spring. I was told that the fossils will be, as in the old museum, separated from the representatives of living creatures, and that they will occupy six rooms. ‘I'he vertebrate room is ornamented with mural paintings, which represent landscapes of the world at different geological epochs with the most characteristic animals and plants. These paintings are separated from one another by statues which have their palzon- tological attributes; one holds an Ichthyosaurus, another a head of Dinotherium, another a piece of Cervus megaceros, another a head of Uiniatherium, etc. I have seen few fossils, because all is in process of removal. Among those which M. Fuchs was able to show me, I observed some skeletons of Ursus speleus, a skeleton of Megaceros, another of the Quaternary Ibex, some fine specimens of Mastodon, of Dinotherium and a series of vertebrates from Maragha, in Persia, of the same age as those of Pikermi and those of Baltavar in Hungary, described by M. Suess. Besides the collections that I have just cited, there is the Geolo- gische Reichanstalt, which the new Director, Herr Dionys Stur, had the kindness to show me. The fossils are there arranged accord- ing to their geographical and geological order; it is perhaps the finest collection of stratigraphical paleontology which exists in Hurope. One admires especially the series of Ammonites from the Trias of the Austrian Alps, upon which M. de Mojsisovies has lately written some most important memoirs. I have not been recently to Pesth; but two learned Hungarian professors, M. de Hantken and M. Szabo, have assured me, that since I was in that city, its collections of geology and paleontology have become very important. At Prague, Professor Fritsch conducted me over the site where the foundations have just been laid of a large museum of science for Bohemia; pending the erection of the new building, they have built near the old museum of Bohemia a provisional hall specially consecrated to paleontology. Professor Fritsch has there arranged numerous and very remarkable fossils classed age by age. The immense collection of Silurian fossils which was made by Barrande, and given by him to Bohemia, has been left in the apartment which our illustrious and revered compatriot occupied in the Chotek Gasse. It is difficult to imagine the immense number of Orthoceratites, Cyrto- ceratites, Trilobite, ete, in this apartment. I had there a proof of the degree to which the love of paleontology can reach, for in the Prof. Dr. J. 8. Newberry—On “ Cone-in-Cone.” 559 rooms, more than simple, in which the old tutor of the Comte de Chambord passed the greatest part of his life, there are collections of Primary fossils which have cost enormous sums. Barrande was parsimonious with regard to himself, prodigal for science. His collection will be removed into the museum which is now being built. A young Czech professor, M. O. Novak, and a German savant, M. Waagen, well known for his work upon the palezontolgy of India, are engaged in continuing the gigantic labours of Barrande upon the Silurian fossils of Bohemia. Dresden, whose picture galleries draw artists from all countries of the world, has also accorded a large development to its galleries of geology and paleontology. They are in the same palace (Zwinger) as the objects of art. The Director, Prof. H. B. Geinitz, has arranged the fossils by geological ages, in a way that one can readily form an idea of the life-history of past times. The creatures of the Per- mian epoch are particularly well represented there; no one has con- tributed so much as Prof. Geinitz in making known this epoch, which was formerly believed to have represented a momentary sus- pension in the vital forces, but which, on the contrary, has furnished for some years past a multitude of fossil plants and animals. Berlin has quite another character to Vienna: while the latter aspires more to pleasure, Berlin prefers the harshness of a military life. Nevertheless its government, which above all neglects nothing which relates to war, occupies itself also with science, for it knows that Knowledge is Power. A vast building has just been constructed in Invaliden Strasse for the geological collections directed by M. Hauchcorne, and another for the collections of the agricultural arts, where M. Nehring has assembled the curious Quaternary fauna, which he has described under the name of the Fauna of the Steppes; between these museums, a large Museum of Natural History is about to be erected. The University has some fine collections of geology directed by Professor Beyrich, and of paleontology superintended by Professor Dames; it is at the University that the second specimen of Arche- opteryx may be seen, for which £1000 was paid. It has the advantage over the British Museum specimen, of having its head, and of show- ing its fore limbs, whose metacarpal bones are not anchylosed im- movably together as in existing birds, but are free and furnished with clawed digits. (Herr Dames has published a most interesting memoir on this specimen, a notice of which appeared in the GrotocicaL Magazine, 1884, Decade III. Vol. I. pp. 418-424, Pl. XIV.) VI.—*“ Conz-1n-Cons.”’ ? By Prof. J. 8. Newperry, M.D., For. Memb. Geol. Soc. Lond. ; Professor of Geology in Columbia College, New York. N the June Number of the Gronocioan Macazine an abstract is given of a paper on Cone-in-cone, read by Mr. John Young before 1 The MS. of this article was unfortunately mislaid, and its publication con- sequently delayed some months, for which the Editor begs to apologise. 560 Prof. Dr. J. 8S. Newberry—On “ Cone-in- Cone.” the Geological Society of Glasgow, in which he advances the theory that this peculiar structure is caused by the escape of gases. While I was yet a boy I found cone-in-cone, and was puzzled by it, but examining a fine exposure of it in which the bases of the cones were all turned upward, the theory of escaping gases suggested itself to me. Subsequently, when I was a student in the Jardin des Plantes, Paris, attending the geological lectures of M. Cordier, he described cone-in-cone as an imperfect crystallization. I proposed to him the theory of the escape of gases through a pasty medium, but he said that would not do, because the points of the cones were sometimes turned upward, sometimes downward. This led me to review the subject later, and while I had the supervision of the Geological Survey of Ohio, and was connected with the Government Surveys in the Western Territories, I had opportunities of observing the occurrence of cone-in-cone in a large number of localities, and at many geological levels. ‘The results of my obser- vations are given in the Report of the Geological Survey of Ohio, Vol. I. p. 211. They are briefly as follows: Cone-in-cone consists, as is well known, of a series of hollow cones like extinguishers placed one within another, and it some- times makes up the entire mass of a stratum several inches in thickness and many feet in lateral extent. It is not confined to one horizon, but occurs throughout the geological series wherever there are argillaceous shales, locally impregnated with lime, or in which septaria or clay-iron-stones are found. More generally the cone-in-cone structure is observable in lenticular sheets of earthy limestone or shale impregnated with lime, and in each sheet the cones are usually turned in the same direction, oftenest with the points down, but sometimes turned upward, and occasionally turned in both directions. In one locality in Ohio where cone-in-cone occurs abundantly in the Waverley shales (Lower Carboniferous), a lenticular mass is divided obliquely by a sheet of clay-iron-stone. On one side of this the points are turned downward, on the other side they occupy a reversed position. I have before me as I write a nodule of iron ore from the same locality which is surrounded by cone-in-cone two inches in thickness; the cones above are turned point downward, those below point upward, and those on the sides, somewhat confused by pressure, are divergent. In the Cretaceous formation of Colorado lime concretions occur with a radiated cone-in-cone structure, and similar concretions are reported by Dr. C. A. White in the Coal-measures of Iowa (Amer. Journ. Science, vol. xlv.1868, p. 401). Again, in the Huron Shale (Upper Devonian) of Ohio, the bones of the great fishes (Dinichthys) are generally coated with a sheet of impure limestone which has cone-in-cone structure; and here the cones are divergent from the surfaces of the bones, however irregular these may be. Such specimens as these I have described seem to me to be in- compatible with the theory that cone-in-cone is caused by pressure or the escape of gases, and appear rather to confirm the conclusion that it is due to an impeded tendency to crystallization. Notices of Memoirs—W. Whitaker—Deep Borings at Chatham. 561 IN KO) GAR OAHS) (O/asy aes WHORES Se —_»—__—_ British Association : ABERDEEN. PAPERS READ BEFORE Section C. Gronoey. T.—On Staty Cieavace anp ALLIED Rock-StRucTURES; WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE MercuantcaL THEORIES OF THEIR Orrein. By Atrrep Harxnr, M.A., F.G.S. INCE Professor Phillips’ Report to this Association in 1856, the subject of Cleavage, especially in connection with Foliation, has received much attention. In the present communication the mechanical theories of Mr. Sharpe and Dr. Sorby are discussed at length, and pursued through their various consequences, such as the variation of Cleavage in rocks of different natures and the peculiari- ties of Cleavage-planes which traverse alternating strata. A section is devoted to the mode of working slate-rock in the quarries, which throws much light on the structure of the rock. The spurious and incipient Cleavages due to minute contortion or faulting of the rocks are next described. A consideration of the general effects, mechani- cal, physical, and chemical, of pressure upon rocks leads to a discus- sion of the relations between Cleavage and Foliation, and the extent to which the latter can in many cases be referred to the action of mechanical forces. The concluding section deals briefly with the relation of Cleavage to Harth movements. Il.—On Derr Borines at CuatHam. A OOoONTRIBUTION TO THE Derp-sEATED GEOLOGY oF THE Lonpon Basin. By W. Wuitaxer, B.A., F.G.S., Assoc. Inst.C.E. FEW years ago the Admiralty made a boring in the Chatham Dockyard extension, to the depth of 9034 feet, just reaching the Lower Greensand, and in 1883-4 followed this by another boring, near by, to increase the supply, which has led to an unexpected result. After passing through 27 feet of Alluvium and Tertiary beds, 682 of Chalk, and 193 of Gault, the Lower Greensand was again reached; but, on continuing the boring, was found to be only 41 feet thick, when it was succeeded by a stiff clay, which, from its fossils, is found to be Oxford Clay, a formation not before known to occur in Kent. At its outcrop, about seven miles to the south, the Lower Green- sand is 200 feet thick, and is succeeded, a little further south, by the Weald Clay, there 600 feet thick. Not only, however, has this 600 feet of clay wholly disappeared, but also the whole of the next underlying set of deposits, the Hastings Beds, which crop out every- where from beneath the Weald Clay, and are also some hundreds of feet thick. More than this, the Purbeck Beds, which underlie the Hastings Beds near Battle, are absent, and also the Portlandian, Kimmeridge DECADE III.—VOL. II.—NO. XII. 36 562 Notices of Memoirs—Col. Playfair— Algerian Marbles. Clay, Corallian, etc., beds which have been proved above Oxford Clay in the Subwealden Boring, to the great thickness of over 1600 feet. We are therefore faced with a great northerly thinning of the beds below the Gault, a fact agreeing in the main with the evidence given of late years by various deep wells in and near London. Three other deep borings have been made or are being made near Chatham, all of which have passed through the Chalk into the Gault, and one has gained a supply from the sand beneath. The practical bearing of the Chatham section is, however, to enforce the danger of counting on getting large supplies of water in the London Basin from the Lower Greensand, by means of deep borings at any great distance from its outcrop. Even if Lower Greensand occur at all in such places, it will probably be in reduced thickness, and therefore with reduced water- capacity. Il].—On tHe Re-piscovery or Lost Numip1an Marsires IN ALGERIA AND TUNIs. By Lieut.-Colonel R. L. Puayrarr, H.M. Consul-General for Algeria and Tunis. HE author explained that the name itself was a misnomer, as _ they are not found within the limits of Numidia proper, but in the province of Africa and in Mauritania. Most of the ‘ Giallo antico’ used in Rome was obtained from Simitiu Colonia, the modern Chem- ton, in the valley of the Medgérda, the quarries of which are now being extensively worked by a Belgian company; but the most remarkable and valuable marbles are found near Kleber, in the pro- vince of Oran, in Algeria. There, on the top of the Montagne Grise, exists an elevated plateau, 1500 acres in extent, forming an un- interrupted mass of the most splendid marbles and breccias which the world contains. Their variety is as extraordinary as their beauty. There is creamy white, like ivory; rose colour, like coral; Giallo antico ; some are as variegated as a peacock’s plumage; and on the west side of the mountain, where there has been a great earth- movement, the rock has been broken up and re-cemented together, forming a variety of breccias of the most extraordinary richness and beauty. Gained Playfair exhibited specimens of the principal varieties, to prove that his descriptions were not exaggerated. The beauty of these marbles has been recognised by the Trustees of the British Museum, who are now mounting the sculptures of the Parthenon and the Mausoleum on basements of them. Specimens may also be seen in the Mineralogical Room of the British Museum, at South Kensington. The marble mountain belongs to Signor del Monte, of Oran, and, although it is not being worked as it ought to be, blocks can be obtained at a cost of about £18 per cubic metre, ready for shipment. Reviews—R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. 563 a5y) da VA BE IS OW Se ——_ = Manvat or Geronocy, THroretTicaAL AND Practicat. By Joun Parties, LL.D., F.R.S.—Part II. StraticRaAPHICcAL GEOLOGY AND Patmontotocy. Hdited by Rosert Eruernipver, F.B.S., Assistant-Keeper, Geological Department, British Museum. pp. 712, with 33 plates, 116 tables of organic remains, and full index. (London: Charles Griffin & Co., 1885.) AST year the first instalment of the new edition of ‘“ Phillips’s Manual of Geology,” by Prof. Seeley, was reviewed in the Grot. Mac. We have now to welcome the companion volume from the pen of Mr. Robert Htheridge, for many years Palzeontologist to the Geological Survey, and quite recently President of the Geological Society of London. Owing to the great amount of matter contained in this work, the publication has been somewhat delayed, and students of geology have been anxiously waiting for the appearance of the long-promised volume. It is only right to remark that, although bearing the name of Phillips, Part II. contains very little of the original text—less indeed than the part edited by Prof. Seeley. This circumstance arises from the nature of the subject, and from the great advances which have been made in stratigraphical geology, both at home and abroad, no less than in paleontology, during the last 30 years. The original illustrations of organic remains have been culled and added to, and these now form a series of 33 plates, which contribute much to the instructive character of the work before us. The publishers have been fortunate in securing the services of Mr. Etheridge for this great task, requiring qualifications which he probably possesses to a greater degree than any of his con- temporaries. He has had immense experience as Palzontologist to the Survey, whose valuable collections it was his duty to sift and in part arrange during the many years he was at Jermyn Street. His two addresses from the Chair of the Geological Society afforded also an intimation of the great stores of knowledge which he had accumulated. Moreover, his well-known industry and peculiar aptitude for arranging facts in a tabular form eminently fitted him for the work he has undertaken. The records of geological literature are becoming so vast that it requires an almost gigantic industry to deal with them. Hence the size of publications, nowadays, is almost more portentous than their number, and in this case it has evidently been a difficult matter to condense the subject within the limits of a single volume. A bird’s eye view of the geology of the British Isles in the shape of a small map constitutes the frontispiece. The general result is sufficiently accurate considering the smallness of the scale, but in one or two cases (Cornwall for instance) the colours denoting Granite and Basalt respectively have got transposed. The author still depicts the great mass of the Scotch Highlands as Lower Silurian; and indeed who shall gainsay him in the present state of the controversy ? 564 Revriews—R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. If the so-called Upper Gneiss is to be regarded as the result of the rolling out of Archeean rocks in Paleeozoic times, with the production of abundant crystalline change, and in some cases even with an incor- poration of Palzeozoic strata, it becomes almost a point of casuistry to what period these great mountain masses should be assigned. In the earliest chapters the author devotes a few pages to the beginning of things, though of actual Cosmogony there is none. He still seems to regard ‘“‘ Hozoon” asa gigantic Foraminifer, which flourished in the earlier seas under a temperature a little below boil- ing point. After comparatively brief allusions to Archean topics, he fairly settles down to his work (Chapter IV.), and with the help of Dr. Hicks gives us the base of the Paleozoic column as it appears in England. Part I. of this volume, with the exception of the introductory matter previously noted, is devoted to the Lower Paumozorc Rocks (Chapters IV.—X VII. inclusive), and may be regarded as containing a most exhaustive summary of the several faunas hitherto discovered in the British area. It might perhaps be going too far to say that the arrangement in all cases is not open to criticism. The author seems to have had such a press of matter, that he has been somewhat puzzled where and how to place it, and his difficulty has been further increased by the conflicting nomenclature of the system itself and its primary divisions. The Harlech or Longmynds, the Menevians, the Lingula Flags, and the Tremadoc rocks constitute the first or lowest section. This section corresponds to a certain extent with the first or primordial fauna of Barrande. Most of the great groups of Invertebrates here enter an appearance for the first time. This fauna is rich in Trilo- bites, especially of the genera Agnostus, Paradoxides, Niobe, etc. As an example of the author’s method of handling a particular series we append an abridgment of the “ Paleontology of the Lower Tremadoc Rocks” (p. 4) :— “‘Hyprozoa.—The Shineton Tremadoc rocks have yielded two species, Clonograptus and Bryograptus Callavei, of Lapworth, both belonging to the family Dichograptide. These are the oldest Rhabdo- phora known. “« Aotinozoa.—None known below the Llandeilo rocks. “« ECHINODERMATA.— Dendrocrinus cambrensis, Hicks, and Pale- asterina Ramseyensis, Hicks, are both from the Lower Tremadoc beds of Ramsey Island, St. Davids; they are the first known species of the orders Crinoidea and Asteroidea. . “ Crustacea.—Only two new genera appear with the coming-in of the Lower Tremadoc ...; but the whole Crustacean fauna comprises 18 genera and 24 species, of which 10 genera and 19 species especially characterize the Lower Tremadoc. They are so essential to a right understanding of the Lower Tremadoc rocks, and so distinct from the fossils of the Upper Lingula Flags, that we enumerate them. .... The Lower and Upper Tremadoc are con- nected only by Agnostus princeps, Ampyx pranuntius, and Ogygia seutatrix. Reviews —R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. 569 *“« Poryzoa.—Dictyonema sociale as in the Upper Lingula Flags, also near Tremadoc in the passage-beds. “ Bracuropopa.—The Lower Tremadoc Brachiopoda are... . Four of these genera and 6 of the 11 species pass to the Upper Tremadoc.... . “‘ PELECYPODA (LAMELLIBRANCHIATA).—The Tremadoc rocks of Ramsey Island have yielded the first evidence of Pelecypod or bivalve molluscan life in Britain. They are referable to 5 genera and 12 species — Davidia (2), Glyptarca (2), Modiolopsis (4), Palaarea (2), and Ctenodonta (2); none of the species are known out of .... the Lower Tremadoc. “‘GastTEROPoDA.— None known below the Arenig rocks. “ PrrRopopaA.—The genus Theca is represented by five species in the Lower Tremadoc..... The three first named pass to the Upper Tremadoc. .... “ HerEropopa.— Bellerophon ramsayensis and B. solvensis charac- terize the Tremanhire or Solva and Ramsay Island beds. ““CrpHaLopopa. None below the Upper Tremadoc.” Referring to the Hydrozoa, there appears to be a slight slip on p: 08, where the author says, ‘‘ No Rhabdophora are known below the Arenig rocks,” and also at p. 59, where he says, “No Rhabdophora occur below this line anywhere.” It is true that in both these cases he is alluding to Wales, but it would have been safer to have made a reservation. Again, in the general table, page 141, he quotes Diplograptus pristis and D. folium as occurring in “‘'Tremadoc Slates.” The second section of the Lower Paleozoic rocks comprises the Arenig or Skiddaw series; the Lower Bala and Llandeilo Flags; the Caradoc Sandstone, Bala Beds and Coniston Limestone ; and lastly the Lower Llandovery rocks. This grouping corresponds in the main with the second fauna of Barrande, and comprises the principal portion of the Lower Silurian of the Geological Survey. The author has largely availed himself of the discoveries of Harkness, Nicholson, Hicks, Lapworth and Callaway, whose labours, since the first appearance of Phillips’s Manual, have shed such a flood of light - on the paleontology of these at that time little known rocks. It is quite within the memory of many of us that the Skiddaw rocks were supposed to contain hardly any fossils: yet here we find 70 species enumerated, mostly Graptolites. There may be some numerical error here, however ; for at p. 63 he says that 28 species of Rhabdo- phora occur in the Skiddaw Group, whilst in Table VIII. p. 66, there are 48 species of Hydrozoa enumerated from Skiddaw, which is in Cumberland, and not in Westmoreland, as the author supposes. In the corresponding Arenigs of South Wales, out of 88 species enumerated, the Hydrozoa and Crustacea are about equally represented. Certain authorities object to the per-centage system, which is no doubt somewhat inelastic, and was perhaps more calculated to command attention in the days when people attached greater importance to “species” than is now the case. We know for instance that Mr. Marr demurs to the system as one which in the present state of synonymy and incomplete determination of forms 566 Reviews—R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. is premature, if not altogether objectionable. Nevertheless it is a rough and ready sort of way of separating the several series, and certainly it is impossible not to admit the distinctness of such a fauna as the Arenig for instance, ushered in by an influx of Grapto- lites, and terminated, Mr. Etheridge tells us, by a change of genera and species which has scarcely any parallel in the Palaeozoic rocks. That this should be the case in the Lake District is not to be wondered at, since some of the thickest volcanic accumulations known in these islands are superimposed; and the author hints (p. 68) that the Borrowdale series may, in Wales, be represented by the Aran and the Arenig volcanic beds, the Llandeilo slates, and the Snowdon volcanic series. Subsequently (p. 80) he throws doubts on the Llandeilo age of the Borrowdale rocks ‘from the fact that the great series of Llandeilo rocks in the south-west of Scotland appears to be free from intermixture with contemporaneous igneous matter.” The Llandeilo age of the Lower Moffat Shales is determined through the total absence of those complex Arenig forms of Dicho- grapti, Tetragrapti and Phyllograpti, so characteristic a feature of the Graptolithic fauna of the Skiddaw, Shelve, and St. Davids beds, together with their Canadian equivalents. It is through the Hydrozoa, Crustacea, and Brachiopoda chiefly that the Llandeilo rocks are connected with the overlying Bala or Caradoc; 77 species out of 175 passing from the former to the latter. The Sedgwickian, we know, would do away with the Llandeilo altogether as a geolo- gical series, and Mr. Etheridge considers that the large community of species is confirmatory of the views of Sedgwick : yet in spite of this he gives great prominence throughout to the “ Llandeilo Series.” On the other hand, no more than 102 species out of 610 pass from the Caradoc to the Lower Llandovery, which, together with the Upper Llandovery, he suggests might be classed as passage-beds under the title of Middle Silurian. Under this arrangement the Wenlock and Ludlow series would constitute the fourth and final section of the Lower Paleozoic rocks. It is hardly necessary to remark that in all cases the foreign equivalents of each group or series are discussed at some length ; and if the reader requires further information, he has only to consult the works to which reference is made. Meantime he is reminded of the immense amount of research which has been effected of late years in the Lower Paleozoic areas both of Europe and America. On pp. 189-141 is given a “Tabular view of the Cambrian and Silurian strata, with Physical and Paleontological particulars.” In this table the Menevian series is altogether omitted, or else absorbed in the Lingula Flags. On pp. 142-149, Table XVI. the author enumerates the “‘ Organic remains of the Lower Paleozoic Strata ” : the genera are arranged alphabetically, whilst the number of species is brought down to date. Finally, on p. 150, Table XVII. shows the numerical history of the ‘“‘ Lower Paleozoic Series.” We have noticed at some length the author’s treatment of the Lower Paleozoic rocks, both because he is known to be especially Reviews—R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. 567 well acquainted with their paleontology, and also as affording an example of his mode of treatment of the several systems which succeed. The remaining notices must be brief. Three chapters are devoted to the “Middle Paleozoic Strata,” comprising the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone. The author gives us the views of Prof. Geikie on the several lakes or basins in which the Old Red Sandstone of Britain was deposited: also a very detailed description of the Devonian rocks, their correlation and fauna. “Perhaps during no period in the physical history of the British Islands has such an assemblage of Actinozoa occurred as that which specifically characterizes the Middle Devonian rocks of South and North Devon, as well as the Rhenish provinces, Scandinavia, and North America” (p. 200). “‘ With the exception of the fishes of the Old Red Sandstone (120 species), the Brachiopoda is the largest group of the British Devonian rocks. We should expect this when we know that no less than 61 genera and over 1100 foreign described species have passed through the hands of European, American, and British paleontologists. Of these 1100 species only 114 are British” (p. 202). We have reason to rejoice in the reflection that our native paleontologists have been comparatively merciful. Six chapters are devoted to the ‘Upper Paleozoic Strata,” or in other words to the Carboniferous system, which in England, according to the author, when fully expanded, admits of division into the following six groups, not, however, to be found together in every district. Coal Measures Millstone Grit \ Upper Group. Yoredale Rocks Scar Limestone Lower Limestone Shales Calciferous Sandstone Lower Group. Subsequently this is replaced by a quaternary grouping. The author devotes a chapter to general considerations of the Carboniferous system, and we find at p. 225 the remarkable state- ment that the Upper or true Coal Measures were chiefly, if not entirely, “terrestrial or land formations.” Surely these extensive accumulations, in places 12,000 feet thick, were laid down in water, though such water may have been fresh or brackish for the most part ; even if the Coal itself, which forms but a fraction of the Coal-measures, happened to have been formed on a land surface. In connection with the Coal areas of England, he makes the following state- ment (p. 226), “These Coal-fields are separated at the surface by the overlying New Red Sandstone. .... They are, however, connected underneath.” Surely this is not so in all cases, since the three great Coal areas of Durham, Lancashire, and South Yorkshire are separated at the surface by lower beds, and cannot therefore possibly be connected underneath, although they may have once formed parts of a continuous basin of deposit. Chapters on the Carboniferous strata of Scotland and Ireland, on the Coal-fields of the Continents of Europe and America, and General Considerations relative to the history of Coal serve to show how 568 Reviews—R. Etheridge’s Manual of Geology. extensively Mr. Etheridge has dealt with this most important subject before attacking the paleontology in detail. According to the census given on p. 276, the Puant# of the British Carboniferous rocks number 75 genera and 3828 species, their stratigraphical distribution through the following eight series or groups of strata being as follows :— Calciferous Sandstone... ... ... 10 genera and 12 species. Lower Limestone Shale ... ... 22 ,, Ai Carboniferous Limestone ... ... 13 ,, 22) 55 WoredaleyRocks)).5 9.2.) ee) ee one: none. Mullstones Grit eeeeen: pee meee all) pee Bil 99 Lower Coal-measures... ... ... 54 4, PIL ge Middle se. SVC OAE) REAR SANE 88 WE} gp Upper poo 000. oO se (Bs hos 9 168 ” Ten genera are largely represented in Britain, and contain 192 species out of the known 828; they are Alethopteris 10 species, Asterophyllites 12, Calamites 12, Lepidodendron 22, Lepidostrobus 8 (probably we may never know to what species of Zepidodendra all these Lepidostrobi belong), Neuropteris 28, Pecopteris 29, Sigillaria 31, Sphenopteris 34, Ulodendron 11. With regard to the Actrnozoa, he says that 9 families, 39 genera, and 145 species constitute the Carboniferous Ccelenterate fauna, the most prolific families being the Favositide and Cyathophyllide. No species of Coral is known above the Yoredale rocks, and only 2 species occur in that series, viz. Favosites tumidus and Zaphrentis Phillips. The Carboniferous Limestone contains nearly all the species in the list, and evidence may be obtained of extensive reefs composed mainly of Lithostrotion, Lonsdaleia, and forms of Cyatho- phyllum. Of the Carboniferous Ponyzoa he further says that “as a group (they) constitute by far the largest series in any division of the Paleozoic rocks.” Seventy-eight species range through the three lower horizons, i.e. through the Carboniferous Limestone, the Lower Limestone Shales, and the Calciferous Sandstone, the whole group essentially belonging to the calcareous rocks and shales. Ceriopora, Fenestella, Glauconome, and Polypora are the most prolific genera. The author is not quite correct in stating that not a single species of Polyzoa occurs in the Millstone Grit; since a species of Fenestella is by no means uncommon in the “Cayton Gill Beds,” though possibly it may not have been named as yet. Nevertheless we rather think that it is quoted in one of Mr. Fox Strangway’s Geological Survey Memoirs. Moreover we believe that where the limestones are thick in the Yoredale rocks, possibly more than two species of Corals might be obtained. Two chapters are devoted to the “ Permian or Dyas Strata,” which the author regards as probably of freshwater origin. From a paragraph on page 307 we arrive at this interpretation of freshwater :— “The water in these basins must have undergone extreme concen- tration, and chemical precipitation, so as to have resulted in the accumulation now presented of dolomites, saliferous clays, rock salt, gypsum, and anhydrite.” Apart from this slip, we should demur to the statement that much of the Magnesian Limestone of the North Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 569 of England was laid down in freshwater even of this peculiar kind, when we bear in mind the character of its fauna, pauperized it is true from Carboniferous types, but still unmistakably marine wherever fossils have been found. Referring once more to the conditions of deposition both of the Permian and the Trias, no one will quarrel with the author’s subsequent statement that both these systems indicate a period of shallow seas and general disturbance resulting in the formation of land surfaces inclosing saline lakes, ete. ‘“ During this age many forms of life disappeared, and were replaced by others of a different type and order: hence, the Permian group is regarded as Paleozoic, and the Triassic as Mesozoic.” Somewhat less than one-half of the volume is occupied with the Paleozoic rocks, and of this portion we have endeavoured to give a brief and inadequate notice, showing more especially the methods adopted by the author, who continues to treat the remainder of his subject with equal fulness. Indeed, if there is any fault to find, it would be that too much matter is given, that the several paragraphs are not always in accord with each other, and that the work bears the impress of having been written at different times, producing rather a want of uniformity in some cases. But for the purposes for which it is required, more especially as a work of reference, this Manual possesses the highest value, despite such trifling and obvious slips as we have noted. We would especially direct attention to the Tabular Summaries, of which there are no less than 116 throughout the book. These present, in a most condensed form, an amount of information scarcely to be found in any other work. Undoubtedly it is a volume which must find a place in the library of every geologist who wishes to know what has been done in stratigraphical paleontology during the last thirty years. WEE pees @ sey aS ASIN) sess © S sate iG ——_@——_ GEOLOGICAL SocleTY oF Lonpon. November 4, 1885.—Prof. T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.B.S., President, in the Chair.—The following communications were read : 1. “On the Premaxillaries and Scalpriform Teeth of a large Extinct Wombat (Phascolomys curvirostris, Ow.).” By Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B., F.R.S., F.G.S. The specimen described in this paper is a cast from a fossil dis- covered in a late exploration of the Wellington bone-caves, and sent to the author with some other casts from the same collection by the authorities of the Australian Museum, Sydney, New South Wales. The fragments in question consist of the premaxillary bones, con- taining a pair of scalpriform incisors, 160 millim. (63 inches) long, measured along the outer curve. The teeth and the fragments of bone in which they are implanted were described in detail, and referred to the Wombat family. The animal to which they belonged must have been somewhat larger than Phascolomys medius, Owen, but less than the type of the sub- 570 Reports and Proceedings— genus Phascolomys. ‘The specific name is suggested by the chief characters that distinguish the present form from any hitherto known, recent or distinct. 2. “On the Structure and Classificatory Position of some Madre- poraria from the Secondary Strata of England and South Wales.” By Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B., F.R.S., F.G.S. This paper consisted chiefly of a criticism of the conclusions arrived at by Mr. R. F. Tomes in various papers communicated to the Society. All the species of the genus Astroceenia which were described in the Supplement to the British Fossil Corals, Pal. Soc. 1867, from the Infra-Lias of South Wales, belong to that genus, and not to Stylastrea, de From. The drawing of Astrocenia plana, Dunc., given by Mr. Tomes, does not correspond with the type specimen of the species. Stylastrea sinemuriensis and S. Martini, de From., do not form part of the fauna of the Infra-Lias of South Wales. Cyathocenia, Dunc., is not the same as Phylloceenia, Laube, which is Koilocenia, Dune. Thecosmilia Martini and 7. Michelini of the European Hettangian are found in the Infra-Lias of England. T. rugosa, Laube, was first noticed in the Memoir of the Corals of the zone of Ammonites angulatus, Pal. Soc. 1867, and the species was properly figured. Cladophyllia is a subgenus of Thecosmilia. Elysastrea, Laube, has two well-marked species in the Sutton Stone. Monitlivaltia simplex has the shape of the calice not merely dependent on pressure, but caused by normal growth. Jf. Walliz, Dunc., has no evidence of “rejuvenescence,” and the growth noticed is endothecal, and would be termed by Lindstrém “stereoplasm.” M. polymorpha, Terquem et Piette, remains a member of the Infra-Lias fauna. IM. pedunculata, Dune., is not a Cladophyllia, but a simple coral of the genus to which it was assigned by the author. The geological position of the Sutton Stone and associated deposits is, from the paleeontological evidence, above the Rheetic series. The cast of a Montlivaltia, figured by the author in the Memoir on the Corals of the Zone of A. angulatus, Pal. Soc. 1868, p. 68, does not coincide with M. rhetica, Tomes, but with M. Haimei. M. foliacea, 'Tomes, has not nine cycles of septa, as stated by its describer. The septal arrangement of M. excavaia, Tomes, and M. papyracea, Tomes, is doubtful. Thamnastrea is not a perforate coral, but a Fungid. Synastrea and Centrastrea were not founded by M. de Fromentel; the former originated with Milne Edwards, and the latter with d’Orbigny. Centrastrea is not synonymous with Astreomorpha. Oroseris is not a perforate coral; and Milne Edwards and Jules Haimes were quite correct in stating that the genus “se rapproche beaucoup des Comoseris ;”’ and it is incorrect to state that one genus really bears but a faint resemblance to the other. Oroseris isa subgenus of Comoseris, which is not one of the Perforata. Microsolena, Lmx., is one of the Fungida. Cyathophyllia, H. de From., is posterior in date to Antillia, Dunc., and therefore C. oolitica, Tomes, is Antillia oolitica, Tomes, sp. ; but as Antillia is a subgenus of Circophyllia, Edw. & H., the name should be Circophyllia oolitica, Tomes, sp. Geological Society of London. O71 What is termed the “rejuvenescence” of corals by some zoophy- tologists has been long recognized as irregularity of growth, and there should be no difficulty in distinguishing worn growth-rings from calicular gemmation; but this has been confounded with the other condition. Oppelismilia, Dunc., is retained as a subgenus of Montlivaltia. Axosmilia Wrighti, Edw. & H., and Montlivaltia Holli (Oppelismilia, Dunc.), are not identical, they are both simple corals and differ from the fasciculate and compound genus Donacosmilia, E. de From. Epismilia is a worthless genus, because one can never be certain that the septa were not once spinose; moreover, the presence and absence of spines and dentations on the free edges of the septa are not of physiological importance, and there is no dis- tinction to be made between the soft parts of the recent corals with and without ragged septa. Clausastrea consobrina, Hdw. & H., is not a species of Confusastrea. Isastrea tenuistriata, M‘Coy, sp., confounded with some other form, but not by its author, is a true Isastrean. Confusastrea tenuistriata, Tomes, cannot remain in the genus, for it has characters which do not belong toit. Chorisastrea, de From., is not a good genus according to Milne Edwards and Jules Haime, Reuss and Stoliczka; it makes a method of growth which is common to several fossil and recent genera of primary importance. Thecosmilia gregaria and T. obtusa are names which should be retained, and the forms should be removed from Chorisas- trea. Heterogyra, Reuss, is a good genus. Symphyllia Htheridgit, Dune., belongs to the genus with which it is associated, and not to Phyllogyra, Tomes. Thecoseris is an epithecate Leptophyllia, and T. polymorpha, Tomes, is quite distinct in its morphology from Tur- binoseris and Paleoseris, Dunc. Cryptoceenia, d’Orb., is an imper- fectly distinguished genus, and is replaced by Cyathophora, Kdw. & H. Therefore Cyathophora tuberosa, Dunc., which has not a close resemblance with C. Luciensis, Edw. & H., and also C. Pratti, Edw. & H., remain as good species of their genus. The septal arrange- ment of what is termed Cryptocenia microphylla, Tomes, is incorrectly given. Montlivaltia caryophyllata, Wdw. & H., had not its septa wrongly described by its illustrious authors; Mr. Tomes says that they made an obvious mistake, and his own accusation proves that they were correct. The subject of fissiparity was not originally introduced by M. de Fromentel, but was well understood at the time when he wrote. The walls are not defective in corals increas- ing fissiparously. TF issiparity and gemmation were not confounded by Milne Edwards and J. Haime or by the author. Thecosmilia Slatieri, Tomes, is a variety of Cladophyllia Babeana. The figure given by the author of Thamnastrea Waltoni, Edw. and H., has been misapprehended. Isastrea oblonga, Edw. & H., was correctly described by those authors, and no addition to our knowledge of the form has been made. The genus Isastrea has its species budding within the calice and close to the outer wall, never, as stated, between the walls of ealices. Helioceenia is a subgenus of Stylina, and differs from Placo- cenia, VOrb. Isastrea Conybearti, Hdw. & H., is a good species ; O72 Correspondence—Prof. E. D. Cope. it is not the same as Clausastrea = Plerastrea Pratti, Edw. & H. The type specimen of Plerastrea Pratti, Hdw. & H., has a columella, and the authors of the genus did not describe it as having an essential columella. Bathyceenia, Tomes: nothing was stated in the work called “ A Revision of the Genera of Madreporaria” about the similarity of this genus and Stylosmilia ; this is a statement difficult of explanation. Every one of these numerous statements is made in opposition to the opinions of Mr. Tomes. Proper acknowledgment is made regarding the useful knowledge conveyed by Mr. Tomes about the localities of corals and the zones which some frequent. The author of this communication agrees with Mr. Tomes on two points: Mr. Tomes has shown that, owing to the matrix of Cyclo- lytes Lycetti, Dunc., not being sufficiently removed, the form is his Dimorphastrea dubia, and that properly the generic name should be Dimorpharea. Again, Mr. Tomes has raised much doubt in the author’s mind where a species is placed by him under the genus Lepi- dophyllia, Dunc., should be placed; probably it will have to come within Donacosmilia, as stated by Mr. Tomes; but Donacosmilia requires careful working out. 3. “On the Astrocenie of the Sutton Stone of the Infra-Lias of South Wales.” By Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B., F.R.S., F.G.S. The species which were placed in the genus Astroconia, and which came from the Sutton Stone and Brocastle deposits of the Infra-Lias of South Wales, were re-examined in the instance of A. gibbosa, A. insignis, A. parasitica, and A. plana (Dunc.). These Species were originally described by the author in his ‘ Monograph of the British Fossil Corals,’ second series, Pal. Soc. 1867, pt. iv. No. 1, and were illustrated. A good specimen of A. gibbosa is de- scribed, and its structures are shown to be strictly Astroccenian. The different states of the corallites produced by various conditions, such as growth and gemmation, were explained. The same course was taken with reference to A. insignis and A. parasitica, and the density of the united walls was shown to have nothing to do with any intermural structure or coenenchyma in that sense. A. plana was critically examined, and as it has all the characters of typical Astrocenia, it remains in that genus with the others. CO ize SS 2 @AN Si @aere ———_@—__—_ PALMONTOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE. Srr,—With your permission I wish to present some remarks on the review of certain of my papers which Mr. Lydekker published in the number of the Gronocgican MaGcazine for October, 1885. The author of the review in question does me the honour to agree with me in my determinations of affinities, but he expresses general disapproval of my systematic methods. While I am much gratified at the agreement in more important matters thus expressed or im- plied, I think it very desirable that there should be a harmony of Correspondence—Prof. E. D. Cope. 573 action between naturalists in questions of classification and nomen- clature. Scientific truth is involved in the former, and convenience in the latter. In the first place I shall be sustained in differing from Mr. Lydek- ker whenever he fails to comply with that bulwark of the language of science, the law of priority. Wxcept in the matter of the termina- tion of the family name in ide, and its derivation from some genus embraced in it, any name proposed first and accompanied by a defi- nition, must be used in preference to any later name. I take it that this rule applies to all scientific terms whatsoever, which belong to any object, or definite idea abstracted from objects, provided the name be not false in its significance. Hence it will not be proper to yield to mere preferences, as for instance that of Mr. Lydekker, who would rather name orders and suborders from some genus which they contain, when other names have already been proposed in accordance with the rules. In the application of this rule to the use of names for divisions of higher rank than families, room for the exercise of some discretion may be found. Ifa name be applied by its author to a group, there are two ways of learning what the proposer of the name had in view or the idea he intends to express ; or, in other words, what he would include within its limits. One indication is to be found in his diag- nosis; the other in the contents of described objects which he em- braces in it. I claim, and I find that custom sanctions the claim, that the name should be retained for the division thus indicated, and for nothing else ; and if both diagnosis and content do not represent any natural or tenable division, that the name should be dropped. In insisting on the applicability of diagnosis or content to something real, as the ground of the acceptance of a proposed group and of its name, I of course do not expect completeness in either of the con- ditions. In fact, these characteristics are never to be expected in the early stages of science. But incompleteness is not falsity. An example of a false division with a false diagnosis is to be found in the supposed order of Pachydermata, the name of which is positively rejected, and is not applied to one of those fragments of it which are natural divisions. Another false group is the Theriodonta, which was applied to some South African reptiles of Permian age. The definition, based on the dentition, does not define an order, and is common to more than one family, and the contents of the division agree with the definition. As types with grinding teeth clearly belong to the same order and suborder, there seems to be no place for the name. To apply these propositions to the cases found in my papers and criticized by Mr. Lydekker. While the Condylarthra do agree generally with the Hyracoidea, the differences are so important, especially in the form of the ungual phalanges, that I cannot refer them to the same suborder at least. Nor am I justified in applying the term Hyracoidea to the two divisions combined, as they certainly must be, for the group Hyracoidea has already a meaning and cur- rency which it is not wise to attempt to disturb. Should I do so, 574 Correspondence—Prof. E. D. Cope. the result would be more complex than that which I have preferred, for not only would the significance of the name Hyracoidea be changed, but I would have to make a new name for the Hyracoidea proper of older authors. The same reasoning applies to the case of the Insectivora. I must either change the significance of the now generally adopted term, or give a uew name to the major division of which it forms only a part. I now come to a second branch of the subject, and that is, the question of the definition of divisions. I lay down the principle, which is, I believe, a generally accepted one, that classification con- sists of precise definitions; and that the aim of the systematist should be to attain as great precision as the nature of the case will permit. The fact that all definitions which separate adjacent groups will be ultimately found to be fallible, does not permit us to fall into inexact and inconsistent methods of definition. Any absolute difference in the number of parts must be noticed in the system as indices of the steps on the lines of descent. It is only proportions, dimensions, and texture which define species, as represented by their fossil remains. Any system which places animals with four digits in the same genus with others possessing three digits, is inexact. Any system which places animals with four premolar teeth in the same genus with those with three premolars is inexact, unless it can be shown that some species has indifferently three or four premolars. A system which includes animals with a scapholunar bone in the same division with animals with distinct scaphoid and lunar bones, is inexact. I think it will be ultimately agreed that animals with tritubercular superior molars must be more widely separated from those with quadrituberculars, than has hitherto been accepted. Nevertheless I admit that every character loses its value somewhere because of variability. But cases where such are not variable must be carefully distinguished from those where they are. To again illustrate this point from those brought forward by Mr. Lydekker. My critic “prefers” to arrange the Creodonta with the Carnivora, although they have no scapholunar bone. Now, I ask, what will be the definition of the order Carnivora, if we reject this character? There will be none, as the latter constitutes the only bond of union between its diverse forms. As if an unconscious cerebration opposed this view, Mr. Lydekker maintains the division Creodonta, but gives it a new name, ‘Carnivora primigenia,” a name to which the law of priority opposes an objection. Secondly, on any character at present known the division called Insectivora is heterogeneous, and so soon as exact definitions are demanded, it requires subdivision.1 In order to distinguish these subdivisions as a whole, with the allied ones, which are clearly neither Hdentata, Chiroptera nor Rodentia, I applied to them all, as an order, the name Bunotheria. This group is as definable as any of the others named, and has equal rank. It is the primitive form of placental unguiculate mammal, just as the Taxeopora is the primitive type of primitive ungulate mammal. 1 Some of this work remains to be done, Obituary—Dr. Walter Flight, F.B.S. 578 I must now explain my use of the term Ungulata. Lamarck in his Philosophie zodlogique, of which the first edition was published in 1809, distinguished the mammalia into Exongulés, Amphibies, Ongulés, and Onguiculés. Of these, the Ongulés is a natural division which has been adopted by Cuvier, Owen (Odontography) and many other zodlogists, and has been current in zodlogical literature for half a century before it was applied by modern authors to a different and more restricted group (my Diplarthra), in opposition, as I believe, to the law of priority. In fact the distinction of the mam- malia into Unguiculata, Ungulata, and Mutica was employed by Linneus in the twelfth edition of the Systema Nature, about a cen- tury earlier than the term Ungulata as preferred by Mr. Lydekker.' And for placental gyrencephalous mammalia this classification is as natural as any one which has been proposed, and is the only one available for paleontologists. In concluding, I refer to another attempt at change of a long-standing and generally-accepted name by modern authors. I refer to the name Batrachia, which it is sought to replace by the term Amphibia. Although the latter is the better name, it has not the claim of priority by a half century at least. Although the early definitions were imperfect, the contents of the class were then the same as now. ‘The division Batrachia, used by Lamarck and Cuvier, is uniformly employed in the herpeto- logical literature of the last half century, except by a few German authors (e.g. Wagler), who combined them with the Reptilia in one division under the name Amphibia. Not only has the name Am- phibia no claim on the ground of priority, but the diverse uses to which it has been put also render its use undesirable. PHILADELPHIA, Oct. 30, 1880. E. D. Cops. Oss ee ASE — WALTER FLIGHT, D.Sc.(LOND.), F.R.S., &C. Born 21st January, 1841; Diep 4tH November, 1885, Tue close of this year has witnessed the termination of another bright and promising life, ended all too soon for the hopes and expectations of his many friends. Walter Flight was the son of William P. Flight, of Winchester, in which city he was born on the 21st January, 1841. He was sent, after a period of pupilage at home, to Queenwood College, 1 There is one noteworthy exception to this argument, viz. where Mr. Lydekker remarks that ‘‘ Archenodon appears to us to be a form not improbably connecting the bunodont ungulates like lotheriwm (with which it has been classed) with the unguiculate mammals,’”’ ete. Now this proposition is in opposition to theoretical and actual mammalian phylogeny, as I haye remarked in the American Naturalist, 1884, p. 718. It is impossible for any Artiodactyle mammal like Elotheriwm to have direct connection with an unguiculate. The genealogical line must pass backwards through a taxeopod line, and then downward into or through the bunotherian, to complete such a connection. O76 Obituary—Dr. Walter Flight, F_R.S, Hampshire, in the days when George Edmondson was head master, and Tyndall and Debus were the teachers of science. From Queenwood he went to the University of Halle, where, in the Laboratory of Prof. Heintz, he specially applied himself to chemistry during the winter session of 1863-64. During 1864 and 1866 he studied at the University of Heidelberg, where, in the Laboratories of the celebrated Professors Bunsen, Kopp, and Kirchhoff, he devoted himself earnestly to acquire that thorough knowledge of the various branches of theoretical and practical chemistry, and that marked facility for overcoming experimental difficulties which characterize the practised and careful worker. From Heidelberg Flight passed to the University of Berlin, where he remained until 1867, studying and working in Prof. Hofmann’s Laboratory, and for a time filling the office of his Secretary and Chemical Assistant. Returning to England in 1867, he graduated D.Sc. in the University of London, and in the following year was appointed by the Senate to the office of Assistant Examiner under Prof. Debus (his former teacher at Queenwood). On the 5th September, 1867, Dr. Flight was appointed an Assistant in the Mineralogical Department of the British Museum, and a Laboratory was fitted up for his use. Here, under the direction of Prof. Maskelyne, the Keeper of Mineralogy, he commenced a series of researches into the chemical composition of the mineral constituents of meteorites and the occluded gases they contained. Many of the methods by which he carried out these investigations were originated by him in the course of his researches, and displayed in a remarkable degree his skill and ingenuity in chemical manipulation. He was shortly after this date appointed Examiner in Chemistry and Physics at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, and in 1876 Examiner to the Royal Military Academy, Cheltenham. For several years Dr. Flight served on the Luminous Meteors Committee of the British Association, to which he lent much valuable assistance. Between the years 1864 and 1888 he was author of twenty-one original papers, embracing descriptions of the Cranbourne, Rowton, and Middlesborough Meteorites, which appeared in the Philosophical Transactions ; and ‘‘A Chapter in the History of Meteorites,” which . appeared in a succession of twenty-three articles in the GronocroaL Magazine in 1875, 1882, and 1883. He was also joint author or contributor of results to many other papers, chiefly with Professor Story-Maskelyne, F.R.S., on the Mineral Constituents of Meteorites, as the Busti, the Manegaum and the Breitenbach Meteorites, read before the Royal Society between 1870-71. Dr. Flight was elected to the Royal Society, June 7th, 1883. In 1884 he was seized by illness which prostrated his mental powers, and rendered it needful for him to resign his appointment in the British Museum in June last, and notwithstanding every care which medical skill or affection of friends could devise, he succumbed on 4th November, leaving a wife and three young children to deplore his early loss. INDEX. ABE BERDEEN Bay, The Movement of Sand in, by W. Smith, 515. Aberdeen, British Association at, 474, 516. Aberdeenshire, Bastite-Serpentine, by T. G. Bonney, 439. Acteonina cinerea, sp. noy., Hudleston, 206. tumescens, sp.? nov., Hudle- ston, 203. African Geology, Sketches of South, by W. H. Penning, 329. Amblystegite, as a rock-forming mineral, by J. W. Judd, 173. Americana, Mapoteca Geologica, 26. Americas, Denudation of the Two, by T. M. Reade, 320. Amphibians, Permian, of Bohemia, by A. Fritsch, 80. Antelopes, Siwalik, Revision of, by R. Lydekker, 169. Archean Canadian rocks and Irish Meta- morphic rocks, by G. H. Kinahan, 159. Artiodactyla, Note on three Genera of, by R. Lydekker, 63. Astrocenia of the Sutton Stone, by P. Martin Duncan, Attleborough, Geology around, by F. J. Bennett, 179. Australian Mesozoic Plants, Woodward, 289. Australia, 8., Geology E. of Farina, by H. P. Woodward, 374. Azoic System and its proposed sub- divisions, by J. D. Whitney and M. E. Wadsworth, 28. . by H. AGSHOT Strata, General Section of the, by A. Irving, 280. Water Supply from the, by A. Irving, 17. Barrington, Hippopotamus major from, by P. Lake, 318. Bastite-Serpentine in Aberdeenshire, by T. G. Bonney, 439. Batrachia of the Permian beds of Bohemia, by E. D. Cope, 527. Bavaria, Geology of, by K. W. Gumbel, 178 Bennett, F. J., Geology around Attle- . borough, 179. — Diss, 179. Berkshire, Intermittent Streams in, by T. R. Jones, 148. DECADE I1I.—VOL. II.—NoO. XII. CAL Bermuda, Geology of, by W. N. Rice, 276. Birds, Fossil, by P. B. Brodie, 384. —— Wingless, Fossil and Recent, by H. Woodward, 308. Blake, J. H., Explanations of Horizontal Sections of the Suffolk Cliffs, 180. Blake, Prof. J. F., The Theory of Faults, 285. Blanford, W. T., Classification of the Jurassic System, 47, 239. Bohemian Chalk Formation, by A. Fritsch, 467. Bone Caves of N. Wales, by H. Hicks, 510. Bonney, Prof. T. G., Bastite-Serpentine in Aberdeenshire, 439. Cornish Serpentines, 431. —— Enstatitic Lavas of Kycott Hill, 77, 336. On Some Traverses of the Crystalline District of the Central Alps, 494. The Diorite of Little Knott, 328. Boulder-clays of Lincolnshire, by A. J. Jukes-Browne, 135. Boulger, G. S., A Geological Map of the World, 384. Brachiopoda, Cretaceous, from Sweden, by B. Lundgren, 228. —-—— Monograph of British Fossil, by T. Davidson, 429. Brain in Extinct Animals, by O. C. Marsh, 515. British Association at Aberdeen, 474, 515. Brodie, Rev. P. B., Fossil Birds, 384. Brongniart, C., Fossil Insects of the Primary Rocks, 481. Brown, H. Y. Lyell, The Echunga Gold-field, 372. Bryozoa, Fossil, from 8. Australia, by A. W. Waters, 189. Buchanan, J. Y., Oceanic Islands and Shoals, 516. Budle, Note on the Posidonomya beds of, by G. A. Lebour, 73. LENOTHERIUM Bravardi, sp. noy., Lydekker, 67. California, State Mining Bureau, 277. Callaway, Dr. C., A Plea for Comparative Lithology, 258. 37 578 CAL Callaway, Dr. C., The Granitic and Schistose Rocks of Donegal, 278. Cameron, A. G., Fuller’s Earth and Water Supply, 91. ——— —— On Fuller’s Earth, 190. Campbell, J. F., Obituary of, 191. Canadian Archean Rocks and Irish Metamorphic Rocks, by G. H.Kinahan, 159. Canterbury, New Zealand, The Curiosity- Shop Beds, by F. W. Hutton, 383. Carboniferous Insects, English, by S. H. Scudder, 265. Carboniferous, Psephodus magnus from K. Kilbride, by R. H. Traquair, 337. Carruthers, W., Fossil Root in the Sarsen Stones of Wiltshire, 361. Ceratiocaris, British Species of, by T. R. Jones and H. Woodward, 385, 460. ———_ gobiiformis, sp. noy., Jones and H. Woodw., 462. Salteriana, sp. nov., Jones and H. Woodw., 462. ——— sp. nov. ? Jones and H. Woodw., 463, 464. Champernowne, A., Homalonotus crassi- cauda, 285. Chatham, A Deep Boring at, by W. Whitaker, 561. Chelonia, Siwalik and Narbada, by R. Lydekker, 371. Cheviot District, Quartz-Felsites and Augite Granites of, by J. J. Harris Teall, 106. Classification of the Stratified Rocks, by A. J. Jukes Browne, 298. by H. Hicks, 358. Claypole, HE. W., On a Pteraspidian Fish in the Up. Silurian of N. America, 89. Cleavage, Slaty, On the Cause of, by A. Harker, 15. by O. Fisher, 174. ————_ ————_ On the Stages of, by A. Harker, 266. Coal-fields, North Wales and Shrewsbury, by D. C. Davies, 327. Coal-seam in Leicestershire, Quartzite Boulders in, by W. 8S. Gresley, 553. Cockroach and Two Scorpions of Silurian ' Age, by H. Goss, 129. Cole, G. A., On Hollow Spherulites, 279. Collins, J. H., Geology of the Rio-Tinto Mines, 181. —— On the Cornish Serpentines, 298. Commentry, New Insects from the Coal- measures of, by C. Brongniart, 481. Comparative Lithology, A Plea for, by C. Callaway, 258. Cone-in-cone Structure, by J. Young, 283. —— by J. 8. Newberry, 559. Index. DUN Contouring of Geological Maps, Sub- terranean, 238. ——= by B. 8. Lyman, 335. Contour-lines on Geological Maps, by B. 8. Lyman, 132. Cope, Prof. E. D., Batrachia of the Permian Beds of Bohemia, 527. -————. Extinct American Ver- tebrates, 468. ——— Mr. Lydekker on Zs- thonyx, 526. Paleontological Nomen- clature, 572. Cornish Serpentines, by J. H. Collins, 298 Cretaceous Madreporaria, on some im- perfectly known, by R. F. Tomes, 541. Crocodilia, On British Fossil, by A. 8. Woodward, 496. Crystalline District of the Central Alps, Traverses of, by Prof. T. G. Bonney, 494, Cumberland and Westmoreland Associa- tion, Transactions of, 276. Cynfael Falls, Boulder in the, by T. M. Reade, 183. Wares The Crystallographic Study of, by Max Schuster, 520. Darwin Memorial Statue, 336. Davidson, T., Monograph of the British Fossil Brachiopoda, 429. Obituary of, 528. Davies, D. C., The North Wales and Shrewsbury Coal-fields, 327. Davison, C., Magnetic Disturbance by Harthquakes, 210. Dawkins, Prof. W. Boyd, Skull of Ovibos moschatus, 188. Devonian, A New Limuloid Crustacean, by H. 8S. Williams, 427. Dinocerata, The, by O. C. Marsh, 212. Diorite of Little Knott, by T. G. Bonney, 328. Diss, The Geology around, by F. J. Bennett, 179. Distribution of the Graptolithide, by O. Herrmann, 406. Donegal, The Granitic and Schistose Rocks of, by C. Callaway, 278. Downes, Rev. W., Underground Heat, 525. Duncan, Prof. P. Martin, On the Astro- cenia of the Sutton Stone, 572 — On the Genus Galer- ites = Echinoconus, 492. ————— ———— Madreporaria of the Secondary Strata, 570. ———_— ———— Structure of the Ambulacra of some Echinoidea, 281. Dunker, Prof. R. W., Obituary of, 288. Dunn, E, J., Mode of Occurrence of Gold in the Transvaal Goldfields, 171. Index. DUS Dust, Meteoric, Report of the Committee on, 515. Durham Coast, Recent Earthquakes on the, by G. A. Lebour, 518. ARTHQUAKES, Magnetic Disturb- ances by, by C. Davison, 210. Recent, on the Durham Coast, by G. A. Lebour, 513. Echinoconus = Galerites, by P. Martin Duncan, 492. Echinoidea, Structure of the Ambulacra of, by P. Martin Duncan, 281. Edwards, Prof. H. Milne, Obituary of, 432, 476. Enstatitic Lavas of Eycott Hill, by F. Rutley, 285. —— by T.G. Bonney, 77, 335. Rock-forming Minerals, by J. W. Judd, 173. Eocene Land Mollusca, by J. S. Gardner, 241. Epping Forest, Walks in, by P. Lindley ; Geology by H. B. Woodward, 368. Erratics in the Cheshire Boulder-clay, by C. Ricketts, 330. Esthonyx, Identity with the genus Platy- cherops, by R. Lydekker, 360. Mr. Lydekker on, by E. D. Cope, 526. Estuaries, Physical Condition of Water in, by H. R. Mills, 515. Etheridge, R., jun., Synonymy and Struc- ture of Solenopora compacta, 529. — Phillips’ Manual of Geology, 563. Kitingshausen, C., Baron von, Fossil Flora of Sagor, 383. Ewing, Prof., Measurement of Move- ments of the Ground, 515. Eycott Hill, Note on the Enstatitic Lavas of, by F. Rutley, 285. ——_ by T. G. Bonney, 77, 335. AKENHAM, Geology around, by H. B. Woodward, 180. Faults, by F. W. Hutton, 190. Theory of, by J. F. Blake, 285. Fauna of the Red Sea and the Mediter- ranean, by E. Hull, 515. Fisher, Rev. O., On the Cause of Slaty Cleavage, 174. Fletcher, L., Guide to the Mineral Gallery at the British Museum, 32. Flight, Dr. W., Obituary of, 575. Fossils, The Young Collector’s Hand- book of, by B. B. Woodward, 277. Fox-Strangways, C., Geology of York, 179. O79 GLA Fritsch, Dr. A., Bohemian Chalk-forma- tion, 467. Fauna of the Gas-coal, etc., of Bohemia, 271, 375. Permian Amphibians of Bohemia, 80. Frozen Soil of N. America, Depth of permanently, by Sir R. Lefroy, 516. Fulgurite from Mont Blanc, by F. Rutley, 188. Fuller’s Earth, by A. G. Cameron, 190. Fungus in Fossil Wood from Bowling, by Dr. Macfarlane, 515. ALERITES = Echinoconus, On the Genus, by P. Martin Duncan, 492. Galilee, The Fishes of the Sea of, by E. Hull, 515, 520. Gardner, J. Starkie, Can Underground Heat be Utilized ? 397. —_— Fossil Slugs, 476. ————— — — Lower Eocene Plant- beds of Ulster, 87. — On Eocene Land Mollusca, 241. — Oscillations of Level along our S. Coast since the Human Period, 145. Tertiary Basaltic Formation in Iceland, 45. Garson, Dr. J. G., On Happaway Cavern, Torquay, 516. Gas-coal of Bohemia, Fauna of, by A. Fritsch, 271, 375. Gastornis Klaassenii, sp. nov., Newton, 362. Gaudry, Prof. A., Paleontology in Germany and Austria, 556. Geinitz, H. B., The Limits of the Zechstein and Dyas Formations, 234. Geological Map of the World, by G. 8. Boulger, 384. —— Maps, Contour Lines on, by B. 8. Lyman, 132. — Nomenclature, by F. W. Hutton, 95. Society of Glasgow, Proceed- ings of, 283. —— London, Proceedings of, 43, 45, 87, 88, 135, 181, 182, 183, 188, 232, 278, 280, 281, 326, 331, 380, 569. — Surveys of Europe, by W. Topley, 365. ——— Survey Publications, 179, 522. Geologists’ Association, Proceedings of, 1S 7Mes3: German Geol. Society, Proceedings, 234. Glacial Period, Inland Seas of, by T. F. Jamieson, 193. —_—— in the Pyrenees, by A. Penk, 134, 580 GLA Glacial Period of Australia, by R. von Lendenfeld, 281. Godwin-Austen, R. A., Life of, 1. Goldfield, The Echunga, by H. Y. Lyell Brown, 372. Goldfields, Transvaal, Mode of Occurrence of Gold in, by E. J. Dunn, 171. Goss, H., Carboniferous and Silurian Insecta and Arachnida, 333. On a Cockroach and two Scor- pions of Silurian Age, 129. Graptolithide, Distribution of the, by O. Herrmann, 406. Organization and Economy of, by O. Herrmann, 448. Green, A. H., On a Section near Llan- beris, 45. Greensand, Cambridge, Polyzoa and Foraminifera of, by G. R. Vine, 280. Upper and Lower, 8. Eng- land, Sponge-remains in, by G. J. Hinde, 324. Gresley, W. S., On Quartzite Boulders in a Coal-seam in Leicestershire, 553. Gulf Stream Deposits, by T. M. Reade, 25 Giimbel, Prof. K. W., Geologie von Bayern, 178. Gunn, W., Posidonomya Becheri, 92. ARKER, A., On the Cause of Slaty Cleavage, 15; On the Stages of Slaty Cleavage, 266; OnSlaty Cleavage, 561. Hauer, Dr. T. R. von, 288. Haverfordwest, The Lower Paleozoic Rocks of, by J. E. Marr, 331. Heat, Underground, Utilization of, by J.S. Gardner, 317. Heilprin, A., Tertiary Geology of the United States, 230. Herrmann, Dr. O., Distribution of the Graptolithide, 406. Organizationand Economy of the Graptolithide, 448. Helminthochiton Grayie, sp. nov., H. Woodw., 352. Hicks, H., Geology of the N.W. High- lands, 137. On the Fynnon Beuno and Cae Gwyn Bone-Caves of N. Wales, 510. The Classification of Stratified Rocks, 358. Highland Controversy, The Close of the, by C. Lapworth, 97. Highlands, N.W., Geology of, by H. Hicks, 137. Hill, Rev. E., Average Density of Meteorites, 516. Hinde, G. J., Sponge-remains in the Lower and Upper Greensand of S. England, 324. Index. JON Hippopotamus major from Barrington, by P. Lake, 318. Homalonotus crassicauda, by A. Champer- nowne, 285. Hudleston, W. H., Contributions to the Paleontology of the Yorkshire Oolites, 49, 121, 151, 201, 252. Hughes, G., On some West-Indian Phosphate Deposits, 90. Hulke, J. W., The Sternal Apparatus of TIguanodon, 331. Hull, Prof. E., On the Faunas of the Red Sea and the Mediterranean, 515. —— On the Fishes of the Sea of Galilee, 515, 520. Human Remains in a Cave at Great Ormes Head, by A. H.W. Ingram, 307. Hutton, F. W., Geological Nomenclature, 59. ———_——. On Faults, 190. ———_——. The Curiosity Shop Beds, New Zealand, 383. Hyopotamus Picteti, sp. nov., Lyd., 131. GNEOUS Matter, Injection of, by H. Johnston- Lavis, 282. Rocks of Breidden Hills, by W. W. Watts, 381. Tguanodon Mantelli, by H. Woodward, 10. The Sternal Apparatus of, by J. W. Hulke, 331. Ingram, A. H. W., Human Remains in a Cave at Great Ormes Head, 307. Inland Seas of the Glacial Period, by T. F. Jamieson, 193. Insecta and Arachnida, Carboniferous and Silurian, by H. Goss, 333. Insects, English Carboniferous, by S. H. Scudder, 265. Fossil, of the Primary Rocks, by C. Brongniart, 481. Ipswich, Geology Around, by W. Whitaker, 522. ; Irving, Rev. A., General Section of the Bagshot Strata, 280. Water Supply from the Bagshot, 17. Tsastrea Neocomiensis, sp. nov., 547. AMIESON, T. F., Inland Seas of the Glacial Period, 193. Jeffreys, J. Gwyn, Obituary of, 144. Johnston, H., Obituary of, 432. Jones, Prof. T. Rupert, British Species of Ceratiocaris, 385, 460. —— Intermittent Streams in Berkshire, 148. ——— ——— Note on the Ostracoda of N.W. of England, 535. ——— —— Un the Ostra- coda of the Purbeck, 326. Index. JUD Judd, Prof. J. W., An Enstatitic Rock- forming Mineral, 173. —— Deep Boring at Richmond, 380. —— Peridotites in Scot- land, 182. Jukes-Browne, A. J., Classification of the Jurassic System, 138, 336. Classification of the Stratified Rocks, 293. The Boulder-clays of Lincolnshire, 135. Jurassic System, 138. Classification of, 286. by W. T. by A. J. Blanford, 47, 239. Jukes-Browne, 138, 336. IDSTON, R., On Ulodendron, 232. Kinahan, G. H., Canadian Archean Rocks and Irish Metamorphic Rocks, 159. —_—— Methylosis and Para- morphosis, 286. Kirkby, J. W., Note on the Ostracoda of the N.W. of England, 535. Koken, E., On the Otoliths of Fishes, 275. ABYRINTHODONTS from the Bijori Group, by R. Lydekker, 370. Laidlay, J. W., Obituary of, 286. Lake Dwellings, Ancient British, by R. Munro, 516. Lake, P., On Hippopotamus major from Barrington, 318. Land-Ice of Great Crosby, by T. M. Reade, 326. Lansdell, H., Russian Central Asia, 364. Lapworth, C., The Close of the High- land Controversy, 97. Layis, H. Johnston, Geological Map of Monte Somma and Vesuvius, 27: Injection, etc., of Igneous Matter, 282. ——_—_—____—— Speculations on Ve- suvius and Monte Somma, 302. Lebour, Prof. G. A., Note on the Posidonomya Becheri Beds of Budle (Northumberland), 73. —_—_ Recent Earth- quakes on the Durham Coast, 513. Lefroy, Sir R., Depth of Permanently Frozen Soil in N. America, 516. Lendenfeld, R. von, The Glacial Period of Australia, 281. Leptophyllia Anglica, Tomes, 551. Lias, Yorkshire, Fossils of, by M. Simpson, 180. Limuloid Crustacean, A New Devonian, by H. 8. Williams, 427. 581 MAP Lindstrém, Prof. G., On the Silurian Gasteropoda and Pteropoda of Got- land, 36. Lithological Studies, by M. E. Wads- worth, 268. Lithology, A Plea for Comparative, by C. Callaway, 258. Llanberis, On a Section near, by A. H. Green, 45. Loch Bhruithaie, A Mineral from, by W. I. Macadam, 515. London, Geology of, by W. Whitaker, 179. Lundgren, B., Cretaceous Brachiopoda from Sweden, 228. Lydekker, R., Catalogue of the Fossil Mammalia in the British Museum, 321. Labyrinthodonts of the Bijori Group, 370. Note on Three Genera of Fossil Artiodactyla, 63. On a New Species of Hyopotamus, 131. On Microcherus, 382. On the Identity of the Genera Esthonyx and Platycherops, 360. Revision of the Siwalik Antelopes, 169. Siwalik and Narbada Chelonia, 371. Siwalik Bones errone- ously referred to a Struthioid, 237. Lyman, B. §., Contour-lines on Geolo- gical Maps, 132. Subterranean Contouring of Geological Maps, 335. Lyte, F. Maxwell, The Softening and Purifying of Water, 516. ACADAM, Prof. W. I., A Mineral from Loch Bhruithaie, 515. Macfarlane, Dr., A Fungus in Fossil Wood from Bowling, 515. Madreporaria from the Great Oolite, by R. F. Tomes, 182. of the Secondary Strata, by P. Martin Duncan, 570. Some Cretaceous, by R. F. Tomes, 388, 541. Magnetic Disturbances by Earthquakes, by C. Davison, 210. Mammalia, Fossil, Catalogue of, in the British Museum, by R. Lydekker, 321. Mammoth, Remains of, from the Cres- well Bone-Caves, 44. Upper Jaw of, from the Cres- well Bone-Caves, by A. T. Metcalfe, 44, Mantellia Babbagensis, Woodward, 290. Mapoteca Geologica Americana, 26. sp. nov., H. 582 MAR Marcou, Jules, Relative Ages of Ameri- can and English Neozoic Strata, 46. Marr, J. E., The Lower Paleozoic Rocks of Haverfordwest, 331. Marsh, Prof. O. C., On the Brain in Extinct Animals, 516. On the Dinocerata, 212. Massachusetts, Syenite and Gabbro in, by M. E. Wadsworth, 207. Matthew, G. F., On the Genus Steno- theca, 425. Meldrum, C., Dates and Localities where Pumice was Seen in the Indian Ocean, 515. Mentone, A New Man of, by T. Wilson, 516. Metcalfe, A. T., On the Upper Jaw of a Mammoth from the Creswell Bone- Caves, 44. Meteorites, Average Density of, by E. Hill, 516. Meteoric Dust, Report of the Committee on, 516. Methylosis and Paramorphosis, by G. H. Kinahan, 286. Microcherus, by R. Lydekker, 382. Miller, H., Old Coast-lines of Norway, 518. Mills, H. R., Physical Condition of Water in Estuaries, 515. Mineral Gallery of the British Museum, A Guide to, by L. Fletcher, 32. Mining Bureau, Californian State, 277. Mollusca, Eocene Land, by J. S. Gardner, 241. Morgan, C. Lloyd, The 8. W. Extension of the Clifton Fault, 88. Movements of the Ground, Measurements of the, by Prof. Ewing, 615. Munro, Dr. R., Ancient British Lake Dwellings, 516. Murphy, J. J., Underground Heat, 525. EBALIA, and some Paleozoic Phyllopod-shells, by H. Wood- ward, 345. Neoplagiaulax, Teeth of, Resemblance to those of Zritylodon, by Sir R. Owen, 43. Neozoic Strata, American and English, Relative Ages of, by J. Marcou, 46. Newberry, Prof. J. S., “‘ Cone-in-Cone,”’ 559. New Insects from the Coal-measures of Commentry, by C. Brongniart, 481. Newton, E. T., A Gigantic Kocene Bird, 362. Nicholson, Prof. H. A., Synonymy and Structure of Solenopora compacta, 529. Nomenclature, Geological, by F. W. Hutton, 59. of British Fossil Crocodilia, by A. S. Woodward, 496. Index. PEN Norway, Old Coast-line of, by H. Miller, 518. Numidian Marbles, Rediscovery of, by R, L. Playfair, 562. BITUARY of J. F. Campbell, 191. Prof. R. W. Dunker, 288. ——_——_ —— T. Davidson, 528. Dr. W. Flight, 575. —__—__——\— R. A. Godwin-Austen, 1. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, 144. ———_—— H. Johnston, 482. J. W. Laidlay, 286. —______—— Prof. H. Milne Edwards, 432, 476. A. Tylor, 142. S. V. Wood, 48, 138. ——_—_—— Dr. T. Wright, 93. Obsidian, Strains in, by T. H. Waller, 91 Oceanic Islands and Shoals, by J. Y. Buchanan, 516. Oolite, The Yorkshire, Contributions to the Paleontology of, by W. H. Hudle- ston, 49, 121, 151, 201, 252. Ore Deposits, by J. A. Phillips, 34. Organization and Economy of the Grapto- lithide, by O. Herrmann, 448. Ormes Head, Great, Human Remains in e Cave at, by A. H. W. Ingram, 307. Oscillations of Level along our 8. Coast since the Human Period, by J. 8 Gardner, 145. Ostracoda of the Purbeck, by T. R. Jones, 326. ———— Notes on the Carboniferous of the N.W. of England, T. R. Jones and J. W. Kirkby, 535. Otoliths of Fishes, by E. Koken, 275. Ovibos moschatus, Skull of, by W. Boyd Dawkins, 188. Owen, Sir R., On the Teeth of Phas- colomys curvirostris, 569. Remains of Mammoth from the Creswell Bone-caves, 44. Resemblance of the Teeth of an Eocene Mammal to those of Tritylodon, 43. ALAONTOLOGICAL Nomencla- ture, by E. D. Cope, 572. Paleontology in Germany and Austria, by A. Gaudry, 546. Paleozoic Insects, by C. Brongniart, 481. Peach, B. W., and J. Horne, The Old Red Sandstone Volcanic Rocks of Scotland, 368. Pengelly, W., Happaway Cavern, Tor- quay, 516. Penk, Dr. A., The Glacial Period in the Pyrenees, 134. Index. PEN Penning, W. H., Sketches of 8S. African Geology, 329. Peridotites of Scotland, by J. W. Judd, 182. Phascolomys curvirostris, sp. noy., Owen, 569. Phillips, J. A., A Treatise on Ore De- posits, 34. Phyllopod-shields, Paleozoic, and on Nebalia, by H. Woodward, 345. Plants, S. Australian Mesozoic, by H. Woodward, 289. Platycherops, identity with the Genus Esthonyx, by R. Lydekker, 360. Playfair, Col. R. Lyon, Rediscovery of the lost Numidian Marbles, 562. Pleurotomaria, Recent and Fossil, by H. Woodward, 433. Porfido - rosso - antico, 188. Posidonomya Becheri, by W. Gunn, 92. ————__ ———— Beds of Budle, by G. A. Lebour, 78. Psephodus magnus, from the Carboniferous Limestone of EK. Kilbride, by R. H. Traquair, 337. by F. Rutley, UARTZITE Boulders in a Coal-seam in Leceistershire, by W. 8. Gresley, 553. Quartz - Felsites and Augite - Granites from the Cheviot District, by J. J. H. Teall, 106. EADE, T. Mellard, Boulders in the Falls of Cynfael, 183; Denudation of the Two Americas, 320; Gulf Stream Deposits, 25 ; Land-iceat Great Crosby, 326. Rhytina gigas, by H. Woodward, 233, 412. Rice, W. N., The Geology of Bermuda, 276. Richmond, Deep-boring at, by J. W. Judd, 380. Ricketts, C., Erratics in the Cheshire Boulder-clay, 330. Rio-Tinto Mines, Geology of, by J. H. Collins, 181. Rocky Mountains, Geology of, by H. H. Winwood, 240. Roots, Fossil, in Sarsen Stone, Wiltshire, by W. Carruthers, 361. Royal Society of London, Proceedings, » 324. Russian Central Asia, by H. Lansdell, 364. Rutley, F., Fulgurite, Mont Blanc, 188; On Porfido-rosso-antico, 188; Ensta- titic Lavas of Eycott Hill, 285. 583 SYE QO Fossil Flora of, by C. von LY Ettingshausen, 383. Sarsen Stones, Wiltshire, Fossil Roots in, by W. Carruthers, 361. Schuster, Dr. Max, The Crystallographic Study of Danburite, 520. Scorpions and a Cockroach of Silurian Age, by H. Goss, 129. Scotch Volcanic Rocks, by B. W. Peach and J. Horne, 368. Scudder, 8. H., Two English Carbon- iferous Insects, 265. Serpentines, Cornish, by T. G. Bonney, 431. 298. Silurian Cockroach and Two Scorpions, by H. Goss, 129. ———— Gasteropoda and Pteropoda of Gotland, by G. Lindstrém, 36. —§#— of Girvan, Helminthochiton from, by H. Woodward, 352. Simpson, M., Fossils of the Yorkshire Lias, 180. Sirenia, Fossil, in the British Museum, by H. Woodward, 412. Siwalik Antelopes, Revison of, by R. Lydekker, 169. bones erroneously referred to a Struthioid, by R. Lydekker, 237. Slaty Cleavage, 15, 174, 266, 561. Slugs, Fossil, by J. S. Gardner, 476. Smilotrochus 2 calearatus, sp. nov., 543. Smith, W., The Movement of Sand in Aberdeen Bay, 516. Solenopora compacta, by H. A. Nichol- son and R. Etheridge, jun., 529. South Coast, Oscillations of Level along the, by J. S. Gardner, 145. Speculations on Vesuvius and Monte Somma, by H. J. Johnston-Lavis, 302. Spherulites, On Hollow, by G. A. Cole, 279. Sponge-remains in the Greensands of the South of England, by G. J. Hinde, 324. Stenotheca, On the Genus, by G. F. Matthew, 425. Stratified Rocks, Classification of, by H. Hicks, 358. by A. J. Jukes- ——— by J. H. Oollins, Browne, 293. Streams, Intermittent, in Berkshire, by T. R. Jones, 148. Subterranean Contouring on Geological Maps, 238. Suffolk Cliffs, by J. H. Blake, 180. Geology of, by J. E. Taylor, 180. Syenite and Gabbro in Massachusetts, by | M. KE. Wadsworth, 207. 584 Index. TAY ZEC | GaN J. E., Geology of Suffolk, | Waller, T. H., Strains in Obsidian, 91. 180. Waters,A.W., Bryozoa, 8. Australia, 189. Teall, J. J. Harris, On Quartz-Felsites, etc., Cheviot District, 106. Temperature, Underground, 515. Tertiary Basaltic Formation in Iceland, by J. S. Gardner, 45. Geology of the United States, by A. Heilprin, 230. Tomes, R. F., Cretaceous Madreporaria, 383, 541; ditto of the Gt. Oolite, 182. Topley, W., The National Geological Surveys of Europe, 365. Toérnquist, S. L., The Trilobites of Siljan, 230. Torquay, Happaway Cavern, 516. Transvaal Goldfields, Mode of Occurrence of Gold in, by E. J. Dunn, 171. Traquair, Dr. R. H., On Psephodus magnus from K. Kilbride, 337. Traverses of the Central Alps, by T. G. Bonney, 494. Trigonia, Jurassic, of N. Oxfordshire, by E. A. Walford, 45. Trilobites of Siljan, by S. L. Térnquist, 230. Trochus Scarburgensis, sp. nov., 128. subglaber, sp. nov., 125. Turbo (Delphinula) granatus, sp. nov., Hudleston (Bean MS.), 55. Tylor, A., Obituary of, 142. (PEON, by R. Kidston, 232. Underground Heat, by W. Downes, 525. —— = by J. J. Murphy, 525. by J. S. Gardner, 397. Temperature, Report of Com- mittee on, 515. ERTEBRATES, Extinct N. Ameri- can, by HK. D. Cope, 468. Vesuvius and Monte Somma, 27 ; Specu- lations on, 302. Vine, G. R., L. Siiurian Polyzoa, 90; Polyzoa and Foraminifera of the Cam- bridge Greensand, 280. Volcanic Dust, Indian Ocean, 515. ADSWORTH, Dr. M. E., Litho- logical Studies, 268; Syenite and Gabbro in Massachusetts, 207. Wales, N., Bone-Caves of, 510. Walford, EH. A., Jurassic Trigonia of N. Oxfordshire, 45. Water, Softening, F. M. Lyte, 515. Water Supply and Fuller’s Earth, 91. from the Bagshot, 17. Watts, W. W., The Igneous Rocks of Breidden Hills, 381. Westmoreland and Cumberland Associa- tion, Transactions of, 276. Whitaker, W., Geology Around Ipswich, 522; Geology of London, 179; Ona Deep Boring at Chatham, 561. Whitney and Wadsworth, The Azoic Sys- tem, 28. Williams, H. S., Limuloid Crustacean, 427. Wilson, T., A New Man of Mentone, 516 Wingless Birds, Fossil and Recent, by H. Woodward, 308. Winwood, H. H., Geology of the Rocky Mountains, 240. Wright, Dr. T., Obituary of, 93. Wood, S. V., Obituary of, 48, 138. Woodward, A. Smith, On British Fossil Crocodilia, 496. Woodward, B. B., The Young Collector’s Handbook of Fossils, 277. Woodward, Dr. H., British Species of Ceratiocaris, 385, 460; On Helmin- thochiton from the Upper Bala of Girvan, 352; On Iguanodon Mantelli, 10; On Paleozoic Phyllopod-shields and on Nebalia, 345; On Rhytina gigas, 233; On Wingless Birds, Fossil and Recent, 308 ; Recent and Fossil Plew- rotomaria, 433 ; Sirenia in the British Museum, 412; 8. Australian Mesozoic Plants, 289. Woodward, H. B., Geology Around Fakenham, 180; Epping Forest, 368; Life of R. Godwin-Austen, 1. Woodward, H. P., Geology E. of Farina, 8. Australia, 374. Vers Geology of, by C. Fox-Strang- ways, 179. Yorkshire Oolites, Contributions to the Paleontology of, by W. H. Hudle- ston, 49, 121, 151, 201, 252. Young, Dr. J., On Cone-in-Cone Struc- ture, 283. y faa and Dyas Formations, Limits of, by H. B. Geinitz, 234. STEPHEN AUSTIN AND SONS, PRINTERS, HERTFORD. {= Price to Subscribers 12s. 6d. (carriage free.) Che Geology of England ¢ ales By HORACE B. WOODWARD, F.G.S. With Geological Map and Numerous Illustrations. SECOND EDITION. Nine years have now elapsed since the publication of the first edition of this book, and it remains the only work devoted exclusively to the Geology of England and Wales (treated as a whole). During this interval considerable additions have been made to our knowledge of the Igneous rocks, and of the Stratified formations and their fossils; the nomenclature of both rocks and fossils has been modified in many respects ; while very many subdivisions and local names of strata have been introduced. A new and thoroughly revised edition of ‘‘ THE GEOLOGY OF ENGLAND AND WALES” is therefore desirable. With this object in view the writer has devoted nearly all his leisure hours since 1876 to the preparation of it, sparing no pains to render it as complete and accurate as possible, and he therefore trusts it will be received with the indulgence kindly accorded to him on the publication of the former edition. Large additions will now be made to the volume, and much of the earlier work re-written. While giving prominence to the general description of the rocks, their leading fossils, and economic products, some details will be inserted to show the chief variations of the strata when traced across the country. Numerous tables and diagrams will also be given, to show the relations of the larger groups and of the local and minor divisions of each series of stratified rocks. The history of each rock-name, and its synonyms, so far as possible, will be briefly noted. Indeed, the endeavour is made to explain every local rock- name, as well as the terms applied to particular beds or zones of fossils. Attention will also be drawn to localities where the strata may be studied, and where fossils may be collected.. Descriptions will be given of the soils and physical features to which the rocks give rise, while a separate chapter is de- voted to the origin of the Scenery. The chapter on Water- supply, Mineral Springs, etc., will be much amplified, and condensed records will be given of the more important Deep Wells and Borings. The account of the Geology of the principal Lines of Railway will also be very much enlarged. The description and classification of the Igneous and Metamorphic rocks, contributed by Mr. Frank Rutley to the former Edition, have been kindly revised by him; and a new Synopsis of the Animal Kingdom, with especial reference to the Fossils of England and Wales, has been prepared by Mr. E. T. Newton. Throughout the work the writer has endeavoured to do justice to the many Geologists who have contributed to our knowledge of the Geology of England and Wales, and references will be given to all original sources of information. Asthe work doesnot profess to beattractive tothe general reader, but is intended rather as a handy work of reference for the field and the library, its publication is not expected to repay the writer for the time and labour bestowed upon it. He is therefore desirous of guaranteeing the cost of publica- tion by means of a List of Subscribers, and with this object appeals to those interested in the work, to send in their names as soon as possible, to the Printers or to himself. As soon as this List is complete, the writer will be enabled to make his arrangements for publication. It is expected that the New Edition will be issued before the close of 1886, but the writer is disinclined to fix any exact date, as the work will not leave his hands until it is completed to the best of his ability. The price to Subscribers is fixed as low as possible, but it is hoped that the published price (with discount) will not much exceed the same amount. Wetec ME TC ME Aaicrsraioalais Sakae atetnantece elm an tarnetes ssolppy Bee at Sei erc ns kis enw iden nan et en een LIAS (‘sasy ysiueg ay fo qavg kup og a9tf asvisdv7) “PQ ‘StI BIg “S54 ‘GUVMMGOOM ‘q AVAOH 4q « Z| \y wy Wa, ~ a VS ; ore A |W \ y yoo vovesven suet ete AVIS SAI Vialehed Ca WW A WIS SF aes “WU MM \e} ish \ ws XL Y\ w YU MA 5 WA j \ WA vit Vy \ | SW Vv vy, s) & ‘Sie VU iy VU Za to ere « — re es os eaeanon =e as 35s Sn ee ee esr, 5 R ; - - ee Sate , Sa FS ne SaaS sea E =e =i Se a eae Oy : eat ee ee = FL SS Toe —————— eS 2 SS 102 S11 - See ; > 33, WN AIM 3 2044 = Sb os > > :s > >> >> » DS ES 2 >_>: ee pee > pe ae = ws UY w, PAN 3 { 4 ~ ~ af 7 | Sy >” Wet SY { iy | i : v j | { i dy \ 2 | a at Lf . _ 7th ' \, | v t \ ww JS BAIG? \\ Nye isi] hi hey J |X WV > { “I i\\ |